User Manual

GE Medical Systems
Technical
Publications
2177611-100
Revision 0
LOGIQt 500
Users Manual
Volume 1
Copyright
E 1997 By General Electric Co.
Operating Documentation
Regulatory Requirement
This product complies with regulatory requirements of the following European

Directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices
GE Medical Systems
GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371

P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 U.S.A.
(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)
GE Medical Systems–Europe
283 rue de la Miniére BP34
78533 BUC Cedex
Revision History
REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE
0 March 6, 1997 Initial Release
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION
NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER
VOLUME 1: Vascular 1 thru 38 0

Title Page 0 Cardiology 1 thru 142 0
Revision History A and B 0 Index 1 thru 16 0
Table of Contents 1 thru 26 0
VOLUME 3:
Introduction 1 thru 14 0
Title Page 0
Getting Started 1 thru 56 0
Revision History A and B 0
Safety 1 thru 28 0
Basic Scan 1 thru 102 0
Biopsy Procedures 1 thru 22 0
BĆMode 1 thru 40 0
Probes 1 thru 46 0
Doppler 1 thru 54 0
User Maintenance 1 thru 62 0
MĆMode 1 thru 24 0
Appendices 1 and 2 0
Adding Color 1 thru 50 0
Bioeffects A-1 thru A-106 0
Index 1 thru 16 0
System Data B-1 thru B-10 0
VOLUME 2: Peripherals C-1 thru C-14 0
Title Page 0 Assistance D-1 thru D-6 0
Revision History A and B 0 Warranties E-1 thru E-4 0
Table of Contents 1 thru 26 0 OB Table Data F-1 thru F-40 0
Customizing Your System 1 thru 154 0 Glossary G-1 thru G-36 0
General Meas & Calcs 1 thru 28 0 VCR Operations H-1 thru H-54 0
Abdomen and Small Parts 1 thru 34 0 Index 1 thru 16 0
OB/GYN 1 thru 98 0
t
LOGIQ 500 User Manual
Revision History A
2177611–100 Rev 0
Revision History
Please verify that you are using the latest revision of this document. Information
pertaining to this document is maintained on GPC (GE Medical Systems Global
Product Configuration). If you need to know the latest revision, contact your
distributor, local GE Sales Representative or in the USA call the GE Ultrasound
Clinical Answer Center at 1-800-682-5327 or 414-524-5255.
Revision History B t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
VOLUME 1
Title Page
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A
Table of Contents
Introduction
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3
Attention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3
Prescription Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3
System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3
Interference Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 4
General Indications for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 6
Indications for Fetal Doppler use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 6
Contraindications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 7
LOGIQ 500’s Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 8
Improved operator interface and system ergonomics Introduction 8
Improved sensitivity and resolution in each
imaging mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 8
How This Book is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9
Manual Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9
How to Use This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 11
Manual Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 11
Finding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 11
Conventions used in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 12
Getting Started
Preparing the System for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 3
Local Site Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 4
Before the system arrives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 4
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 5
Console graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 6
LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

2156394–100 Rev 0 Table of Contents 1
Table of Contents
Connecting and Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 10

Warm Up Temperature Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 11
Power On/Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 12
Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 14
Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 16
Circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 18
Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 19
Foot Switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 20
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 21
External disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 24
Storage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 25
Adjusting the Display Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 26
Rotate, tilt, raise and lower the monitor . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 26
Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 27
Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 28
Peripheral/Accessory Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 29
Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 31
Control Panel Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 31
Key Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 32
Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 33
Probe Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 34
Soft Menu Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 35
TGC and Acoustic Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 37
Measurement and Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 39
Mode, Display and Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 42
VCR Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 45
Doppler and CFM Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 46
User Defined Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 48
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 49
Relocating The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 51
Moving the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 51
Transporting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 53
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 55
Setting the lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 55
Safety
Precaution Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 3
Icon Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 3
Hazard Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 5
Icon Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 5
Important Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 6

Table of Contents 2 2156394–100 Rev 0
Table of Contents
Patient Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 7

Related Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 7
Equipment and Personnel Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 9
Related Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 9
Device Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 11
Label Icon Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 11
Classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 13
Acoustic Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 19
Controls Affecting Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 19
Best practices while scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 19
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 20
Acoustic Output Default Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 20
Warning Label Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 21
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 21
Monitor Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 21
Console Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 24
Defibrillator Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 24
Ground Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 25
Regulatory Labels (European Systems) . . . . . . . . . . Safety 26
Regulatory Labels (American Systems) . . . . . . . . . . Safety 27
Basic Scan
Beginning an Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 3
Beginning a New Patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 4
ID/Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 10
Helpful hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 11
Reading the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 13
B-Mode Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 13
Acoustic Output Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 18
Adjusting the Acoustic Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 19
Doppler Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 22
M-Mode or Doppler Spectrum Only Display . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 25
Dual Doppler Spectrum Only Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 26
Color Flow Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 27
Other Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 29

Table of Contents
Soft Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 33

Top Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 34
Key Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 36
Sub-Menu Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 37
Probe Name Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 37
B-Mode Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 38
M-Mode Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 39
PWD Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 40
CWD Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 41
CFM Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 42
Preset Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 43
Set Up Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 43
ECG Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 44
Image Archive Option Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 44
Cine Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 45
Auto Sequence Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 45
Body Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 45
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 46
Measurement (GYN calculation menu) . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 46
Image Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 46
Advanced Cardiac Measurement Option . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 47
Annotating an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 49
Annotation Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 51
Entering/Editing the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 52
Displaying annotation scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 53
Adding Comments to an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 54
Special Annotation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 55
Editing Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 56
Editing while annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 56
Body Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 57
Zooming an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 61
Zooming an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 62
Zoom Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 63
Acoustic Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 63
Display Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 64
Zooming an M-Mode Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 65
Multi–Image Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 66
VCR Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 67

Table of Contents
Freezing an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 69

Post processing of the image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 69
Freezing an Image (Freeze Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 70
Freezing an Image (Foot Switch option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 70
Using Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 71
Cine memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 72
Cine functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 72
Accessing Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 73
Using Cine Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 74
Cine Loop Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 76
Multipl CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 76
Side Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 77
CINE Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 77
CINE Capture (option—color images only) . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 77
Capture Frame (option—color images only) . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 78
Exiting Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 78
Helpful Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 78
ECG/Cine Gauge/Image Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 78
Archiving Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 79
Optional Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 80
Printing an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 80
B/W Video Page Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 80
Color Video Page Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 81
Multi-Image Camera (MIC) (IIE Model 460) . . . . . . . Basic Scan 82
Video Cassette Recorder (VCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 83
Laser Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 83
Image Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 84
Storage Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 85
Image Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 85
Helpful hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 86
MOD Image Archive (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 87
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 87
Archive Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 87
Related Preset Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 88
System ID Entry/Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 88
Media Format (DEFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 90
Disk Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 91
Storing Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 92
Patient Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 94
Image Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 98
Media Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 99
MO Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 102

Table of Contents
B-Mode
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 3
Typical Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 3
Optimizing the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 5
Control Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 5
Adjustments Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 5
B-Mode Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 5
Acoustic Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 6
TGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 8
Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 10
B/M Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 12
Scan Area Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 14
Scan Area Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 15
Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 16
Display Format (Dual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 17
Dynamic Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 18
Gray Scale Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 20
Focus Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 22
Focus Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 24
Frame Averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 26
Penet (Penetration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 28
Image Softener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 29
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 30
Biopsy Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 31
Color Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 33
Tag Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 34
Image Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 35
Rejectn (Rejection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 37
B Edge Enhance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode 39
Doppler
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 3
Typical Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 3
PW Doppler Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 4
Pulsed Wave Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 5
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 5
Frequencies Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 5
Typical exam protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 6
High PRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 8
Continuous Wave Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 9
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 9
Typical exam protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 10
Activating Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 11
Activating PW Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 11
Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 12
Activating CW Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 13

Table of Contents
Doppler Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 15

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 15
Control Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 16
Acoustic Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 17
B-Mode Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 19
M/D Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 20
Audio Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 21
Doppler Spectral Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 22
Theta Angle Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 23
CFM/Spectrum Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 25
Velocity Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 26
Baseline Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 29
B Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 30
Dynamic Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 31
Slant Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 33
Wall Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 35
Sample Volume Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 37
Sweep Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 39
Penet. (Penetration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 41
Auto Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 43
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 45
Color Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 46
Tag Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 47
HPRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 48
Rejectn (Rejection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 49
CFM/PWD Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 51
CFM Shrink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 53
M-Mode
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 3
Typical Exam Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 3
Optimizing the Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 5
Common Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 5
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 5
Accessing/Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 5
B/M Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 6
M/D Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 8
Zoom (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 9
Dynamic Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 12
Gray Scale Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 14
Rejectn (Rejection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 15
Edge Enhance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 17
Sweep Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 19
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 21
Color Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 22
Tag Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode 23

Table of Contents
Adding Color
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 3
Typical Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 3
Activating Color Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 5
Activating Color Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 5
M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 7
Exiting Color Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 7
Optimizing the Color Flow Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 9
Control Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 9
Common Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 10
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 10
Color Doppler Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 11
CFM/Spectrum Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 12
Velocity Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 13
Affects on other controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 13
Color Flow Baseline Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 14
Color Flow Window Size (Scan Area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 15
Color Flow Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 17
Slant Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 18
Diag Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 20
Color Flow MTI Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 22
Frame Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 23
Penet. (Penetration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 25
High Resoltn (Resolution) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 27
Color Flow Display Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 28
Color Capture (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 30
Packet Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 31
Spatial Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 33
W. E. (Wall Echo) Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 35
Color Flow Velocity Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 36
Tag Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 38
CFM/PDI Enhancement (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 39
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 39
ACE (Adaptive Color Enhancement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 40
Noise Blanker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 41
Persistence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 42
Power Doppler Imaging (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 45
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 45
Colorized Gray Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 49
Gray Scale Color Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Color 49
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index 1

Table of Contents
VOLUME 2
Title Page
Table of Contents
Customizing Your System
Time Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 3
Time Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 3
Index of Preset Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 5
Preset Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 7
Custom Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 15
Parameter Menu Command Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 16
Changing a Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 19
Custom Display Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 21
Page 1 of 17 (Imaging Parameter 1 – Probe
Dependent 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 22
Page 8 of 17 (Imaging Parameter 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 48
Page 9 of 17 (Imaging Parameter 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 49
Page 10 of 17 (Imaging Parameter 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 54

Table of Contents
System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 79

System Parameters Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 80
Page 1 of 6 (System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 81
Page 4 of 6 (System Setup – Body Pattern) . . . . . . . . . . Customize 92
Page 5 of 6 (System Setup – Recording) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 97
Page 6 of 6 (System Setup – User ID and Password) . . Customize 101
Preset Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 105
Preset Program Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 106
Page 1 of 9 (Application) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 107
Page 2 of 9 (Application) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 109
Page 3 of 9 (Application – Measurement) . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 111
Page 4 & 5 of 9 (Application – Measurement Sub-Menu) Customize 116
Page 6 of 9 (Application – Measurement Submenu) . . . Customize 118
Page 7 & 8 of 9 (Application – Annotation Library) . . . . . Customize 134
Page 9 of 9 (Application – Patient Information) . . . . . . . . Customize 136
Save Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 139
Saving Scan Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 139
Exam Applications Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 141
Defining a User Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 141
Naming a User Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 144
Deleting User Presets and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 145
Recall Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 145
User Define Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 147
Programming User Define Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 147
User Define Key Program Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 149
User Define Lock/Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 150
Deleting User Define Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 150
User Data Back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 151
Saving Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 151
Loading Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 152
System ID Entry/Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 153
Enter/Display System ID Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 153

Table of Contents
General Measurements and Calculations

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 3
General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 3
Erasing Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 4
Locating measurement controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 5
Measurement Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 6
Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 6
B-Mode Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 7
Distance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 7
Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 9
Circumference/Area (Trace) Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 11
Echo Level Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 13
Doppler Mode Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 15
Peak Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 15
TAMAX (Manual or Auto Trace) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 16
Slope/Time Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 18
Time Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 19
M-Mode Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 21
Tissue depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 22
Time Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 23
Depth Difference with Time and Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 24
CFM B-Mode Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 25
Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 25
Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 25
Gray Scale Echo Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 25
Velocity point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 26
Abdomen and Small Parts

General Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 3
Measuring Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 3
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 4
Volume Calculation Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 6
Measuring Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 7
Measuring Stenosis Ratio (% stenosis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 9
Ellipse method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 9
Trace method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 12
Measuring S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio or PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 14
Measuring heart rate (HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 16
Time averaged maximum velocity (TAMAX)
measurement method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 18

Table of Contents
Measuring the Max PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 19

Automatic Calculation of Max PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 20
Measuring the Mean PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 21
Automatic Calculation of Mean PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 22
Measuring cardiac output (CO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 23
Automatic CO calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 25
Measuring stroke volume ratio (SV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 26
Automatic SV calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 27
Measuring heart rate (HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 28
Measuring flow volume (FV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 28
measurement method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 30
Measuring flow volume output (FVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 30
Helpful hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 30
General Calculation Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 31
Urology Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 33
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 33
OB/GYN
Exam Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 3
Fetal Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 5
Doppler Mode for Fetal Exams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 5
Indications for Fetal Doppler use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 5
Contraindications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 5
Acoustic Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 7
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 7
General warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 7
Prudent use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 7
Concerns surrounding fetal exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 7
Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 7
OB Measurements and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 9
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 9
OB Format Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 9
OB Measurement Soft Menus and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 10
Tokyo University Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 10
Osaka University Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 13
USA Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 16
European Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 20
Other OB Calculation Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 23
GS Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 28
User-Programmed Calculations (Tables) . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 28
Measuring S/D (D/S) Ratio, A/B Ratio, RI or PI . . . . OB/GYN 30
Time averaged maximum velocity (TAMAX) . . . . . . . OB/GYN 32
Fetal Heart Rate Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 33
Helpful Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 35

Table of Contents
OB Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 37

Starting an Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 37
OB Report Page Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 38
OB Report Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 39
OB Report Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 42
Editing the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 45
Recording Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 46
Anatomical Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 47
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 47
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 48
User Programmed Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 49
OB Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 51
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 51
OB Graph Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 52
OB Graph Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 52
Changing OB Graph Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 54
Fetal Trend Management (software option) . . . . . . . OB/GYN 57
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 57
Storing Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 57
Data Storage Estimations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 58
Media Selection Preset Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 58
Saving Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 59
Growth Trending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 63
List ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 64
List ID Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 65
Data List Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 72
Data List Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 73
Basic OB–Multigestational (software option) . . . . . . OB/GYN 75
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 75
Patient Entry Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 75
Entering Fetus Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 75
Distinguishing Each Fetus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 76
Measurements/Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 76
Change the Number of Fetuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 77
Number Increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 77
Number Decrease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 77
Report Page Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 78
OB Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 79
Fetal Trend Management (Multigestational Option) . . . . OB/GYN 81
Save Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 82
Data List Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 82

Table of Contents
Data Management Center (DMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 83

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 83
Operational Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 83
Operational Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 84
Transferring OB Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 84
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 85
Patient Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 87
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 87
Send Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 87
Data Transferred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 87
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 88
GYN Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 89
B-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 89
Ovarian Length, Height, and Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 89
Uterine Length, Height, and Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 92
Endometrium Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 93
Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 95
Resistive index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 95
Helpful Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 96
GYN Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 97
GYN Report Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 97
GYN Calculation Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 98
Vascular
Exam Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 3
General Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 3
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 5
Starting an Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 5
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 5
Vascular calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 6
Carotid Artery Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 7
Measuring ECA, CCA, Bifurc and ICA . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 8
Measuring RT (LT) ICA/CCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 10
Measuring S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio or PI . . . . . . . . . Vascular 12
Measuring Stenosis Ratio (% stenosis) . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 14
Measuring Heart Rate (HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 19
Time Averaged Maximum Velocity (TAMAX) . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 21
Helpful Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 21
Vascular Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 23
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 23
Displaying the Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 23
Editing the Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 25
Printing the Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 25
Vascular Calculation Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 26

Table of Contents
Advanced Vascular (software option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 27

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 27
Menu Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 27
Report Page Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 30
Advanced Vascular Report Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 30
Venous Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 34
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 35
Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 35
Selecting Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 36
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 36
Vascular Calculation Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 37
Cardiology
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 3
General Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 4
BSA Calculation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 6
Oriental Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 6
Occidental Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 6
Basic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 7
Cubed and Teichholz Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 7
Bullet and Modified Simpson’s Rule Methods . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 13
Single and Bi Plane Ellipsoid Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 22
LV Calculation Formulas (Cubed Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 31
LV Calculation Formulas (Teichholz Method) . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 32
LV Calculation Formulas (Bullet Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 33
LV Calculation Formulas (Modified Simpson’s
Rule Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 34
LV Calculation Formulas (Single Plane Ellipsoid Method) . . Cardiology 35
LV Calculation Formulas (Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method) . . . Cardiology 36
Additional Cardiology Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 37
Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 37
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 38
Volume Calculation Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 40
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 41
Measuring the % stenosis (stenosis ratio) . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 43
PHT (Pressure Half Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 48
MVA (Mitral Valve Area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 49
ET (Ejection Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 50
Measuring the Max PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 52
Automatic Calculation of Max PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 53
Measuring the Mean PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 54
Automatic Calculation of Mean PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 55
S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio, PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 56
Heart Rate and TAMAX Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 56

Table of Contents
ECG Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 57

Physio Sweep Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 58
ECG Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 58
ECG Lead Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 59
Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 60
Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 61
Sync Selectn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 62
Ref Scan (Reference Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 63
R Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 65
ECG Wave, PCG Wave, Aux Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 66
ECG Gain, PCG Gain, Aux Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 67
ECG Positn, PCG Positn, Aux Positn (Position) . . . . . . . Cardiology 68
ECG/Cine Gauge/Image Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 69
Advanced Cardiac Calculations (AMCAL option) . . Cardiology 71
Measurement Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 72
Sequence Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 72
Re-measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 73
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 73
Operation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 73
Automatic Determination of Systole and Diastole . . . . . . Cardiology 75
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 75
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 76
Auto Trace Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 76
Continous M-Mode Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 77
Advanced Cardiac Calculations Measurement Menus . . Cardiology 79
AMCAL Sub-Menus (First Layer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 79
AMCAL Sub-Menus (Second Layer)—Automatic
Determination of Systole/Diastole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 80
AMCAL Sub-Menus (Second Layer)—Manual
Determination of Systole/Diastole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 88
Cardiac Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 93
Customizing Measurement Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 94
Pop up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 95
New Measurement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 96
Auto Sequence Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 98
Advanced Cardiac Specification Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 98
LV Calculation Formulas (Cubed Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 99
LV Calculation Formulas (Teichholz Method) . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 101
LV Calculation Formulas (Bullet Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 103
LV Calculation Formulas (Modified Simpson’s
Rule Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 105
LV Calculation Formulas (Single Plane Ellipsoid Method) Cardiology 107
LV Calculation Formulas (Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method) . . . Cardiology 109
LV Calculation Formulas (Gibson Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 111

Table of Contents
B-Mode Analysis – Parasternal Long Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 113

B-Mode Analysis – Parasternal Short Axis (PSAX-AV) . Cardiology 114
B-Mode Analysis – Parasternal Short Axis (PSAX-MV) . Cardiology 115
B-Mode Analysis – Parasternal Short Axis (PSAX-PAP) Cardiology 116
B-Mode Analysis – Apical 4 Chamber (AP-4CH) . . . . . . Cardiology 117
B-Mode Analysis – Apical 2 Chamber (AP-2CH) . . . . . . Cardiology 120
M-Mode Analysis – Left/Right Ventricle (M-LV/RV) . . . . . Cardiology 121
M-Mode Analysis – Mitral Valve (M-MV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 123
M-Mode Analysis – Aortic Valve (M-AV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 124
M-Mode Analysis – Pulmonic Valve (M-PV) . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 125
M-Mode Analysis – Tricuspid Valve (M-TV) . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 126
Doppler Analysis – Mitral Valve (D-MV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 127
Doppler Analysis – Aortic Valve (D-AV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 129
Doppler Analysis – Pulmonic Valve (D-PV) . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 131
Doppler Analysis – Tricuspid Valve (D-TV) . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 133
Advanced Cardiac Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 135
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 135
Standard Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 137
List Type Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 139
Select Reports (S–RP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 139
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index 1

Table of Contents
VOLUME 3
Title Page
Table of Contents
Biopsy Procedures
Special Concerns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 3
Precautions Concerning the Use of Biopsy Procedures Biopsy 3
Accessories and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 4
Required supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 4
Ordering replacement supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 4
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 5
Biopsy Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 5
BX-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 6
Needle Guide Type Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 7
E721 Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 9
Biopsy Guide Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 10
Fixed Needle Guide Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 10
The Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 15
Post Biopsy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 15
E721 Probe Biopsy Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 16
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 16
Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 19
Post Biopsy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 20
Biopsy Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy 21
Probes
Probe Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 3
Ergonomics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 3
Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 4
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 8
Connecting and Disconnecting a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 11
Selecting a probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 11
Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 12
Inspecting probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 12
Storing probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 12
Transporting probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 12
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 12

Table of Contents
Probe Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 13

Handling precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 13
Electrical shock hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 13
Mechanical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 14
Special handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 14
Probe handling and infection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 15
Probe Cleaning Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 16
Disinfecting probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 19
Coupling gels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 22
Planned Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 22
Probe Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 23
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 23
Probe naming conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 23
Curved Array (Convex) Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 24
C364 (CBF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 25
C386 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 26
C551 (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 27
C721 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 28
E721 (MTZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 29
Linear Array Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 30
I739 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 31
546L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 32
739L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 33
L764 (LH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 34
T739 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 35
LA39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 36
Sector Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 37
S220 (W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 38
S222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 39
S316 (UC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 40
S317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 41
S611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 42
B510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 43
P509 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 44
CWD Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 45
CWD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 45
CWD5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 46

Table of Contents
User Maintenance
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 3
Who To Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 4
Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 6
Trouble images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 7
To Store a Trouble Image to the Hard Drive . . . . . . . User Maintenance 7
To Save Trouble Images to MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 8
To Load Trouble Images from MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 12
To Display Trouble Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 12
Loose cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 13
Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 14
System Error Message Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 15
Operation Error Message Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 16
Operation Guide Message Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 20
Warning Message Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 22
Operator Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 23
Probe Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 23
Accessing Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 24
System Test 1 (reduced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 25
Test Pattern Black & White . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 26
Test Pattern Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 27
Test Pattern Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 27
Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 29
Typical Tests to Perform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 30
Frequency of tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 31
Phantoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 32
Baselines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 34
Periodic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 34
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 35
System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 36
Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 37
Axial distance measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 38
Lateral distance measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 40
Axial resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 41
Lateral resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 43
Penetration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 45
Functional resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 47
Contrast resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 48
Gray Scale photography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 49
Setting up a Record Keeping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 50
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 50
Record Keeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 50

Table of Contents
System Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 53

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 53
Inspecting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 53
Weekly Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 54
Cleaning the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 55
Other Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 59
Cleaning the air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 59
Replacing illuminated key caps/lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 60
Planned Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 61
Appendices
Bioeffects
Concerns Surrounding the Use of Diagnostic Ultrasound Bioeffects A–1
Thermal Bioeffect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–2
Mechanical Bioeffect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–3
Operator Awareness and Actions to Minimize Bioeffect Bioeffects A–4
Tissue characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–5
Acoustic output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–6
Operator intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–8
Implementing ALARA Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–10
Clinical instructions for fetal use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–11
Efficacy of Fetal Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–14
Suggested Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–16
Variance studies for fetal Doppler measurements . . . . . Bioeffects A–18
Training and User Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–19
Acoustic Output Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–20
Maximum output summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–20
B510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–20
CWD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–20
CWD5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–21
C364 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–21
C386 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–21
C551 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–22
C721 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–22
E721 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–23
I739 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–23
546L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–24
739L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–24
L764 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–25
LA39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–25
P509 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–26
S220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–26
S222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–27
S316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–27
S317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–28
S611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–28
T739 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–29

Table of Contents
Summary of system control settings that

yield maximum output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–30
Maximum Thermal Indices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–34
B510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–34
C364 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–36
C386 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–38
C551 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–40
C721 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–42
E721 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–43
I739 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–44
546L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–45
739L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–47
L764 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–49
LA39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–50
P509 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–51
S220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–53
S222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–54
S316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–55
S317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–57
S611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–58
T739 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–59
CWD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–60
CWD5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–60
Key to Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–61
Measurement Precision and Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–62
Acoustic Output Display Operation and Accuracy . . . . . Bioeffects A–62
Endnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–63
IEC Acoustic Output Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–65
Key to Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–65
C364 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–67
E721 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–75
546L Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–77
L764 (LH) Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–79
739L Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–81
LA39 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–83
I739 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–85
T739 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–87
S316 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–89
S317 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–91
S220 (W) Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–93
B510 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–99
P509 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–101
CWD2 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–103
CWD5 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A–105

Table of Contents
System Data
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data B–1
LOGIQ 500 Clinical Measurement Accuracy . . . . . . . . System Data B–3
Basic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data B–3
LOGIQ 500 Clinical Calculation Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . System Data B–5
Fetal age measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data B–6
OB Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data B–7
PV and Cardiac Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data B–8
Gynecological . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data B–10
Peripherals
Peripheral Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripherals C–1
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripherals C–1
Peripheral Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripherals C–2
Black/White Video Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripherals C–2
Color Video Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripherals C–4
S-VHS Video Cassette Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripherals C–6
Multi-Image Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripherals C–9
VCR and Color Page Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripherals C–13
Video Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripherals C–14
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripherals C–14
Assistance
Clinical Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assistance D–1
Service Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assistance D–1
Literature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assistance D–1
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assistance D–1
Supplies/Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assistance D–2
Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assistance D–2
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assistance D–2
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assistance D–3
Gel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assistance D–4
Disinfectant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assistance D–4
Civco Biopsy Starter Kits (includes bracket) . . . . . . . Assistance D–5
Multi-Angle Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assistance D–5
Biopsy Replacement Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assistance D–5
Ultrasound Probe and Cord Sheath Sets . . . . . . . . . Assistance D–6
Physio Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assistance D–6
Patient Electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assistance D–6

Table of Contents
Warranties
Scope and Duration of Warranties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranties E–1
Product warranties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranties E–1
Patent and copyright warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranties E–1
Warranty Exclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranties E–3
Exclusive Warranty Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranties E–4
Product warranties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranties E–4
Patent and copyright warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranties E–4
OB Tables
List of OB Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–1
Glossary
List of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary G–1
Video Cassette Recorder Operating Instructions
Operating Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–1
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–1
Cassette tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–1
VTR–PB function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–1
Introduction of VCR Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–3
Remote Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–3
Frame–forward search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–3
Variable–speed search function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–3
Tape search function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–4
Image search function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–4
Saving of data to be searched . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–4
Playback with measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–4
Image processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–4
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–5
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–5
Applicable VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–5
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–5
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–5
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–6
Prohibition of modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–6
Prevention of Electromagnetic Interference . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–6
Operation of the VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–6

Table of Contents
Setting Up the VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–7

VCR Part Names and Functions/Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–7
Part Names and Functions of the VCR Front Panel VCR Operation H–7
Part Names and Functions of the VCR Rear Panel . VCR Operation H–10
Connecting the VCR to the LOGIQ 500 . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–12
Setting up the LOGIQ 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–13
Starting the VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–15
VCR Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–15
Checking Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–15
Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–16
Status Icon Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–16
Tape insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–17
Checking Pause/Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–17
Start-Up Final Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–18
VCR Status Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–19
VCR Counter Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–19
VCR Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–20
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–20
Registering a New Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–25
Power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–25
Checking the scan mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–25
Inserting a tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–26
Recording ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–26
New Tape Registration Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–27
Recording/Playback/Image Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–29
Recording Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–29
Registering a new patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–29
Start recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–29
Recording audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–30
Recording Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–30
Ejecting the tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–31
Playback Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–31
VCR playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–31
Stopping playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–32
Playback with Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–33
Precautions for playback with measurements . . . . . VCR Operation H–34
Advanced Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–35
Image search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–35
Tape Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–40
Saving/Reading the Data to be Searched . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–45
Saving the data to be searched . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–45
Reading the data to be searched . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–46

Table of Contents
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–47

Inspection Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–47
Operation Guide/Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–48
A List of Problems and How To Troubleshoot Them . . . . VCR Operation H–51
Helpful hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–53
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index 1

Introduction
System Overview
How This Book is Organized
How to Use This Book
t
This section provides a basic description of the LOGIQ 500 system’s features and
benefits. It explains how this User Manual is organized and how to use the special
features of this manual.
t
Introduction 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
This page left blank intentionally.
Introduction 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Overview
Attention
Read and understand all instructions in this manual before
t
attempting to use the LOGIQ 500 system.
Keep this User’s Manual with the equipment at all times.

Periodically review the procedures for operation and safety
precautions.
.
Prescription Device
For USA
Only
Caution: United States law restricts this device to sale or use
by or on the order of a physician.
.
System Components
Refer to the Service Manual (P9030TA) for the LOGIQ
system components.
t 500
Interference Caution
CAUTION Do not use the following devices near this equipment. Use of
these devices near this equipment could cause this
equipment to malfunction.
DEVICES NOT TO BE USED NEAR THIS EQUIPMENT
Devices which intrinsically transmit radio waves such as:

Cellular phone, radio transceiver, mobile radio transmitter,
radio-controlled toys, etc.
Keep power to these devices turned off when near this

equipment.
Medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct

technicians, patients and other people who may be around
this equipment to fully comply with the above regulaion.
t
Introduction 3
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Overview
Introduction
t
The LOGIQ 500 digital Ultrasound System is a high
performance ultrasound imaging system, intended for general
purpose applications.
The system provides image generation in B-Mode, M-Mode,

Pulsed, CW and Color Flow Doppler and Color M-Mode with
all transducer types. Digital architecture allows maximum
flexibility of all scanning modes and transducer types,
throughout the full spectrum of operating frequencies.
All transducers are precise solid state array devices, allowing

electronically controlled imaging with Phased Array Sector,
Convex, Micro-convex and Steered Linear probes. Use of
solid state digital designs allows a wide variety of scan
parameters to be optimized including focusing, scan control,
spatial resolution, temporal resolution and contrast resolution.
The result is consistent generation of finely detailed
anatomical resolution with excellent dynamic contrast tissue
range and penetration.
t
LOGIQ 500 also features newly integrated specialized
processing for Flow Data acquisition. Doppler information is
displayed with low noise and clean spectral content to
optimize measurements of important flow parameters.
Selected probes can operate in Multifrequency Mode in order
to Optimize Resolution in B-Mode and Sensitivity to flow in
Doppler and Color Flow Modes.
The system display processor is highly versatile to produce

the optimal set of imaging parameters and display formats
without compromising important diagnostic information.
Comprehensive graphical displays allow rapid and easy
placement of Doppler sample volumes. In Color Flow Mode,
combined B-Mode and Color Flow images can be steered
independently so that optimal positioning is available in both
modes.
Introduction 4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Overview
Introduction (cont’d)
t
Versatile, yet easy to use, the LOGIQ 500 system
combines a wide variety of state-of-the-art operator features
without complicating operation. The operator can customize
all set-up parameters for a given mode, probe or clinical
application. Operator controls have been placed in a logical
clinical format with both hard controls and menu-driven soft
control components. Three simultaneous probe connections
allow rapid switching electronically between probes without
delaying the examination.
t
The LOGIQ 500 System provides a total imaging solution
for today’s diverse ultrasound department needs, with
investment security through reliable upgrades, application
enhancements, and complete product support from GE.
t
Introduction 5
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Overview
General Indications for Use

t
The LOGIQ 500 is a general purpose ultrasound imaging
system intended for use in the dynamic evaluation of soft
tissue and vascular diseases in the following areas:
S Head
S Neck
S Chest
S Abdomen
S Pelvis
S Male reproductive organs
S Female reproductive organs
S Limbs/Extremities
S Pregnant uterus
S Cardiac
Indications for Fetal Doppler use

The LOGIQt 500 system can be used for fetal examination
in Pulsed Wave Doppler, Continuous Wave Doppler, Color
Flow Doppler, and Color M-Mode for the diagnosis of:
S Structural fetal cardiac anomalies for high-risk patients.

S Intrauterine growth retardation (IUGR) for high-risk
patients with one or more of the following known or
suspected conditions:
S Multiple pregnancy
S Maternal hypertension
S Hydrops
S Diabetes
S Lupus
S Placenta abnormality
Introduction 6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Overview
Contraindications
The system is NOT intended for use in the following areas:
.
Ophthalmic use (or any use causing the acoustic beam to
pass through the eye).
Pulsed Wave Doppler, Continuous Wave Doppler, Color Flow

Doppler, and Color M-Mode are not intended for routine fetal
examination or screening nor are they intended for fetal
examination in a low-risk population. The use of Doppler,
even at minimal output levels, in fetal examination must be
adjunctive with conventional fetal echocardiography and
other clinical diagnostic methods, for high risk patients only.
t
Introduction 7
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Overview
LOGIQ t 500’s Features

t
The LOGIQ 500 digital ultrasound system offers the
following enhanced features:
Improved operator interface and system ergonomics

t
The LOGIQ 500 has been designed to streamline users’
workflow, especially by:
S Creating intuitive user controls and prompts

S Grouping controls by mode or functionality
S Making the controls easy to recognize by touch
Assures users that with little effort and minimum time they
can produce a complete exam with consistently high quality
images. The sonographer can comfortably have full reach of
all controls making the system easy to learn in order to
perform a quality exam on any patient.
Improved sensitivity and resolution in each imaging mode

Benefits the user with improved acquisition and presentation
of images and biometric information.
Introduction 8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Manual Content
t
The LOGIQ 500 User Manual is organized to provide the
information needed to start scanning right away. Detailed
information is also provided for more time-intensive studies.
S Introductory material. These sections give an overview

of the system to help the operator start scanning as soon
as possible.
S Getting Started. How to prepare the system for use
and a map of the control layout.
S Safety. Important information concerning the safe
operation of the LOGIQt 500 system.
S Basic Scan. How to perform a basic scan.
S Image optimization. These sections detail how to

improve image, trace, or spectrum information and how to
optimize the use of color.
S B-Mode. How to optimize B-Mode images.
S Doppler Mode. How to optimize Doppler information.
S M-Mode. How to optimize the M-Mode timeline.
S Color. How to apply Color Flow to an image and how
to colorize image, Doppler, and timeline information.
S Customizing your system. Shows how to customize

the system for your particular institution, clinic, or exam
type.
t
Introduction 9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Manual Content (cont’d)

S Medical speciality analysis. Shows how to do
characteristic measurements and supplemental
information useful in performing studies.
S General Measurements and Calculations. Emphasis
on basic measurements for each mode.
S OB/GYN. Emphasis on obstetric/gynecological
calculations and reports.
S Vascular. Emphasis on Doppler spectrum
calculations and reports.
S Cardiology. Emphasis on left ventricular
measurements and reports.
S Biopsy Procedures. Emphasis on using biopsy
guidelines and performing a biopsy.
S Probes. Provides intended uses, specifications, care and

maintenance, and biopsy capability instructions for each
probe.
S User Maintenance. Provides information concerning
error messages, user diagnostics, quality assurance, and
system care.
S Appendices. The appendices provide additional useful
information.
S Bioeffects.
S System specifications.
S Peripheral maintenance.
S Customer Assistance.
S Warranties.
S OB Table Data.
S Glossary of Ultrasound terms.
S VCR Operation.
Introduction 10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Manual Format
Information has been arranged and provided to help find
information easily and quickly.
Finding information
Tables of Contents Locate topics in the main table of contents.
Tabs Chapter tabs are provided.
Headers/Footers The chapter’s title, section name, and page number appear
on the outer corners of every page.
Topics Information is grouped on one page per topic, where

possible. Related diagrams are on the same page or the
facing page, where applicable.
References See also page references that are noted.
Appendices Provides specialized information.
Index Meant for frequent and easy reference. Extensive tool that
presents ideas, topics, terms, titles, headings, and cross
references. Also, use it to find all entries of a like topic
throughout the manual.
Glossary The glossary is intended to help learn new terms, to decipher

t
acronyms, and to associate LOGIQ 500’s terminology with
commonly-used industry terms.
t
Introduction 11
2177611–100 Rev 0
Conventions used in this manual

The following conventions have been used:
2-Column layout The right column contains text; the left column contains
headers and graphics to highlight the text.
Graphics Graphics provide a visual guide to the text when possible.
Push the top or bottom of a rocker switch to get the desired

result.
Turn rotary knobs to the left (counter clockwise) and right

(clockwise).
Press a key to activate a function or change a parameter.
Move TGC slidepots to the left and right.
Move the Trackball around with the palm of a hand or

fingertips.
Introduction 12 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Notes Notes are set in italics.
References References to other chapters appear in italics.
Icons Various icons highlight safety issues.
.
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
Indicates precautions or prudent use recommendations that

should be used in the operation of the ultrasound system.
Hints Scanning hints help save time.
Hints
t
Introduction 13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction 14 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Getting Started
Preparing the System for Use

Operator Controls
Relocating The System
This section gives more details on how features of the system are used to prepare
for scanning. It briefly explains each operator control on the keyboard, monitor and
chassis.
t
Getting Started 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Getting Started
Getting Started 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
.
Introduction
Only qualified physicians or sonographers should perform
ultrasound scanning on human subjects for medical
diagnostic reasons. Request training, if needed.
Do not attempt to install the system alone. General Electric,

Affiliate, or Distributor Field Engineers and Application
Specialists will install and setup the system.
Perform regular preventive maintenance. Refer to

User Maintenance 53 for maintenance instructions.
Maintain a clean environment. Turn off the system circuit

breaker before cleaning the unit. Refer to
User Maintenance 54 for cleaning instructions.
Never set liquids on the unit to ensure that liquid does not
drip into the control panel or unit.
Ensure that unauthorized personnel do not tamper with the

unit.
t
Getting Started 3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Local Site Requirements

In order to properly install the system, certain hardware must
be in place and operational within the room where the
console is used.
Before the system arrives

Ensure that the following is provided for the new system:
S A separate power outlet with a 15 amp circuit breaker for

120 VAC (USA) or 10 amp circuit breaker for
220–240 VAC (Europe, Latin America).
S Take precautions to ensure that the console is protected
from electromagnetic interference.
Precautions include:
S Operate the console at least 15 feet away from
motors, typewriters, elevators, and other sources of
strong electromagnetic radiation.
S Operation in an enclosed area (wood, plaster or
concrete walls, floors and ceilings) help prevent
electromagnetic interference.
S Special shielding may be required if the console is to
be operated in the vicinity of Radio broadcast
equipment.
NOTICE
This medical equipment is approved, in terms of the
prevention of radio wave interference, to be used in hospitals,
clinics and other institutions which are environmentally
qualified. The use of this equipment in an inappropriate
environment may cause some electronic interference to
radios and televisions around the equipment. Proper
handling of this equipment is required in order to avoid such
trouble according to the operator and service manuals. This
equipment can be used in residential areas only under the
supervision of physicians or qualified technicians.
Getting Started 4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Environmental Requirements
The system should be operated, stored, or transported within
the parameters outlined below.
Operational Storage Transport

Temperature 10_- 40_ C –10_- 60_ C –40_- 60_ C
50_- 104_ F 14_- 140_ F –40_- 140_ F
Humidity 30-85% 30-90% 30-90%
non-condensing non-condensing non-condensing
Pressure 700-1060hPa 700-1060hPa 700-1060hPa
Table 1. System Environmental Requirements
t
Getting Started 5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Console graphics
The following are illustrations of the console:
LOGIQ
t 500 System (right side view)

Illustration 1. LOGIQ
Getting Started 6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Console graphics (cont’d)
LOGIQ 500
Probe Cable Holder

(optional) *
Task Light Switch
VCR Microphone
Task Light Release Button
to raise and lower the
video monitor
B/W Video
Page Printer
(optional) Physiological
Input Panel
(optional)
ECG
Air Filter
accessed from front
and back of system
PCG
Aux
Power Supply
Air Filter
* Wire cable holder is standard for Americas’ systems
Illustration 2. LOGIQ t 500 System (front view)
t
Getting Started 7
2177611–100 Rev 0
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Probe Cable Holder
(optional) * ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Swivel Lock
on Video Monitor Arm ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Pivot
Lock
Pull
Free
Hinged Peripheral Cable

Access Panel Door
Cable Access
Pull Open Channel
Air Filter
accessed from front
and back of system
1 ON
ON
0 OFF
Illustration 3. LOGIQ t 500 System (back view)
Getting Started 8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Cable Holder

(optional) *
Probe and Gel Bottle Holder

(Removable for Cleaning)
Cable Clipper
for Probe Cable
(Optional)
Illustration 4. LOGIQ t 500 System (left side view)
t
Getting Started 9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Connecting and Using the System

To connect the system to the electrical supply:
1. Ensure that the wall outlet is of the appropriate type.

2. Make sure that the power switch is turned off.
3. Unwrap the power cable. Make sure to allow
sufficient slack in the cable so that the plug is not
pulled out of the wall if the system is moved slightly.
4. Push the power plug securely into the wall outlet.
WARNING To avoid risk of fire, the system power must be supplied from
a separate, properly rated outlet. See Local Site
Requirements, Before the system arrives on
Getting Started 4 for rating information.
The system is supplied with an attachment plug. Under no

circumstances should this plug be altered, changed, or
adapted to a configuration rated less than specified. Never
use an extension cord or adapter plug.
To help assure grounding reliability, connect to a “hospital

grade” or “hospital only” grounded power outlet.
Plug Outlet Plug Outlet

120 VAC, 1350 VA 220–240 VAC, 1350 VA
Plug and Outlet Configuration Plug and Outlet Configuration
(USA) (Europe)
Illustration 5. Example Plug and Outlet Configurations
Getting Started 10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Warm Up Temperature Chart
Environment In order for the LOGIQ 500 to operate well, its environment
must not harm it. Care must be taken when it is transported
or stored. Either its operational environment must be
constantly maintained or the unit must be turned off.
Temperature Humidity
Operational 10_ to 40_ C (50_ to 104_ F) 30 to 85% non-condensing
Storage –10_ to 60_ C (14_ to 140_ F) 30 to 90% non-condensing
Transport (for –40_ to 60_ C (–40_ to 140_ F) 30 to 90% non-condensing
less than 16 hours)
Table 2. Warm Up Temperature Chart
System Acclimation Time
After being transported, the unit may be very cold or hot. If

this is the case, allow the unit to acclimate before turned on.
It requires one hour for each 2.5_ increment its temperature is
below 10_ C or above 40_ C.
_C 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10
_F 140 131 122 113 104 95 86 77 68 59 50
hours 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
_C 5 0 –5 –10 –15 –20 –25 –30 –35 –40

_F 41 32 23 14 5 –4 –13 –22 –31 –40
hours 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Table 3. System Acclimation Time Chart
t
Getting Started 11
2177611–100 Rev 0
Power On/Standby
CAUTION The Power/Standby switch is located on the front of the

console next to the Probe Connectors. Press the top portion
of this switch to turn the power on. The circuit breaker, on
the rear of the unit, must also be in the on position (see
Getting Started 18).
LOGIQ 500
On
Off/Stand–by
Illustration 6. Location of Power Button
2177611–100 Rev 0
Power On/Standby (cont’d)

After powering on the system, the following happens:
S The monitor and console power indicator light up.

S The system is initialized. During this time:
S Two beeps sound during the sequence.
S All lighted buttons on the keyboard light.
S System diagnostics run. Its status is reflected on the
monitor by the graphics in Illustration 7.
Start of
diagnostic
run
2135131–4 2135131–4
Version 3.10 Version 3.10
End of
diagnostic
run
Version 3.10
Illustration 7. Power Up Graphic Sequence
t
Getting Started 13
2177611–100 Rev 0
.
Power On/Standby (cont’d)
NOTE: If errors occur, an error message appears at the
bottom of the screen. See User Maintenance,
Troubleshooting for more information.
Hints If problems occur, freeze the image and take a picture

for reference. This will help if there is a need to call
.
for service.
S Probes are initialized for immediate operation.
NOTE: If no probes are connected, the system goes into

standby mode.
S Peripheral devices are activated on power up.

After initialization has been completed, the system is in
B-Mode and ready for imaging. Refer to Basic Scan for
scanning instructions.
Password Protection
A maximum of eight personal IDs and associated passwords
can be preset in the LOGIQ 500 (see Customize 101).
If IDs and passwords have been entered and the Password

Ask parameter is on, the following occurs in the power up
sequence:
S The message USERID:__________ appears in the

middle of the start up sequence.
S Type in a User ID and press Return.
S Keyboard lights go out.
S The message PASSWORD:__________ is highlighted.
S Type in the password that corresponds to the User ID and
press Return.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Password Protection (cont’d)
USER ID :
PASSWORD: Version 3.10
Illustration 8. System Startup Screen with Password Ask on
If the correct User ID/Password is entered, the system

continues with the power up sequence.
If an incorrect User ID/Password is entered, the system

allows four additional attempts. After the fifth incorrect entry,
.
the message “Login incorrect” appears. The power up
sequence will not continue. The system must be turned off,
then on, to begin again.
NOTE: If User ID/Passwords are registered and the

Password Ask function is off, press Return at the
ID__________ prompt. The system continues the power up
sequence.
t
Getting Started 15
2177611–100 Rev 0
Power Off
When switching off the system:
S Move the ON, OFF/STAND-BY switch to the OFF

position. The message “WARNING: NOW STARTING
THE POWER OFF PROCESS” appears at the bottom of
the display.
S The LOGIQt 500 will take a few seconds to save current
scan parameter data in the temporary files to the hard
drive before turning the power off.
During this time a message flashes on the screen:
“Do not pull Power Cable.

Do not turn off Breaker.”
Pulling the power cable or turning off the circuit breaker,
while the hard drive is working, may corrupt the system
operating software on the hard drive.
If the system has not turned off five minutes after
pressing the power switch off:
S Listen for hard drive activity
OR
S Monitor the hard drive activity light which is located
above probe port number two. See Illustration 9 for
location.
If the hard drive activity light is not lit or flashing, the
circuit breaker on the bottom of the power supply can be
used to turn off the system. Do NOT turn off the circuit
breaker while the hard disk activity light is on or flashing.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Power Off (cont’d)
Hard Drive Activity Light
Illustration 9. Hard Drive Activity Light Location
S Disconnect the probes.

Clean or sanitize all probes as necessary. Store them in
their shipping cases to avoid damage.
S If daily maintenance is to be performed, turn off the circuit
breaker in the back of the system.
t
Getting Started 17
2177611–100 Rev 0
Circuit breaker
1
The Circuit Breaker is located on the back of the console, at
ON
the bottom of the system. On supplies main power to all
internal systems. Off removes main power from all internal
systems. The circuit breaker automatically shuts off power to
the system in case of a power overload.
If a power overload occurs:
0 OFF 1. Turn off all peripheral devices.
2. Turn off the Main Power Switch to the console.
3. Reactivate the Circuit Breaker switch.
The Circuit Breaker switch should stay in the On position; DO
.
NOT hold the switch in the On position. If the Circuit Breaker
switch remains On, follow the Power On procedure
previously described.
NOTE: If the Circuit Breaker switch does not remain in the

On position or trips again:
1. Disconnect the Power Cable.

2. Call Service immediately.
DO NOT attempt to use the system.
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
circuit
breaker
1 ON
ON
0 OFF
Illustration 10. Location of Circuit Breaker
2177611–100 Rev 0
Power cord
When storing or moving the system:
1. Turn the system power switch OFF.

2. Turn the Circuit Breaker OFF.
3. Unplug the Power Cord.
4. Loop the cord around the handle on the back of the
system or wrap the cord in a bundle and store it
behind the rear storage panel.
To prevent damage to the Power Cord, DO NOT pull

excessively on the cord or make sharp bends while wrapping.
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
handle
storage
area behind door
Illustration 11. Location of Storage Area
t
Getting Started 19
2177611–100 Rev 0
Foot Switch (option)
Freeze An optional multi-functional Foot Switch may be used in

parallel with or as an alternative to the Freeze and Record 1
controls to:
S Freeze a real-time image (left switch).

S Send an image to the hard copy device (right switch).
Record
Foot Switch Only use the recommended foot switch.
The Foot Switch connection is located at the back of the

console on the left-hand side of the back panel.
Store the Foot Switch in the storage compartment located at

the front of the console, below the keyboard.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
LOGIQ 500
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
accessory
panel for
foot switch
connector
store
foot switch
here
Console Air
Filter Screen
Power Supply
Air Filter
Illustration 12. Foot Switch Storage and Connectors
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probes
Only use approved probes.
All imaging probes can be plugged into any of the three

probe ports.
For more Refer to Probes for more information.

information
Connecting Probes can be connected at any time, regardless of whether

the console is powered on or off.
To connect a probe:
1. Place the probe’s carrying case on a stable surface

and open the case.
2. Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe

cord.
CAUTION 3. DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact

to the probe head could result in irreparable damage.
4. Turn the connector locking handle counter clockwise.
5. Align the connector with the probe port and carefully

push into place.
Illustration 13. Probe Connector Panel
t
Getting Started 21
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probes (cont’d)
6. Turn the connector locking handle clockwise to secure
the probe connector.
7. Carefully position the probe cord so that it is free to
move and is not resting on the floor.
lock
unlock
Illustration 14. Connecting a Probe
Disconnecting Probes can be disconnected at any time, regardless of

whether the console is powered on. However, the probe
should not be selected as the active probe.
To disconnect a probe:
1. Move the probe locking handle counterclockwise.

2. Pull the probe and connector straight out of the probe
port.
3. Carefully slide the probe and connector away from the
probe port and around the right side of the keyboard.
4. Ensure the cable is free.
5. Be sure that the probe head is clean before placing
the probe in its storage box.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Storing It is recommended that all probes be stored in the carrying

case provided.
To store a probe:
1. First place the probe connector into the carrying case.

2. Carefully wind the cable into the carrying case.
3. Carefully place the probe head into the carrying case.
DO NOT use excessive force or impact the probe
head.
Activating To activate a probe:
Press the Probe Select key that corresponds to the probe

port to which the desired probe is connected.
Illustration 15. Probe Select Keys
The probe activates in the currently selected operating mode.

The probe’s default settings for the mode and selected
application are used automatically. The selection key for the
active probe will not be lighted.
Probe Name Menu
If the Display Probe Name preset in the Setup/System

Parameters page one is ON, by pressing a half bright or
brightly lit key causes the probe names for each port to be
displayed in the soft menu. See Illustration 16 on
Getting Started 24. The desired probe can then be selected
from the soft menu or by pressing the Probe Select key for
the desired probe. Press the Mode Top Menu key to exit the
probe name display.
t
Getting Started 23
2177611–100 Rev 0
Activating (cont’d)
Illustration 16. Probe Name Menu
Deactivating When deactivating the probe, the probe is automatically

placed in standby mode.
To deactivate a probe:
S Press the Freeze key.

"❙A
S Gently wipe the excess gel from the face of the probe.
S Carefully slide the probe around the right side of the
keyboard, toward the probe holder.
S Ensure that the probe is placed gently in the probe holder.
External disk drive

The external MOD drive is a 3.5 inch 128MB/230MB MOD
drive located below the keyboard.
It can be used to perform:
S Software upgrades
S Image archiving (option)
S Service diagnostics
2177611–100 Rev 0
Storage areas
Several convenient storage areas are provided within the
console as shown by the shaded areas in Illustration 17:
S A compartment located on the right side of the console to

store coupling gel, sheaths, etc.
S A molded storage area located above the alphanumeric
keyboard can be used for convenient access to coupling
gel bottle, writing utensils, etc.
S A storage area in the front of the console to store the foot
switch and probe cables.
LOGIQ 500
LOGIQ
Illustration 17. Storage Areas
t
Getting Started 25
2177611–100 Rev 0
Adjusting the Display Monitor

Adjust the display in the following ways:
S Rotate, tilt, raise and lower the monitor

S Adjust Brightness and Contrast
.
Display controls are located behind the control panel cover
under the display screen.
NOTE: Monitor degaussing (demagnetizing) is done

automatically when the system is turned on.
Rotate, tilt, raise and lower the monitor

The monitor position can be adjusted for easy viewing.
S The monitor can be rotated around it’s central pivot point.

S The monitor can be tilted for the optimum viewing angle.
S The monitor arm can swing forward or backwards.
S The monitor arm can be raised or lowered for the best
viewing height.
CAUTION Movement of the monitor swing arm or height adjustment
requires the release of the locking mechanism. After an
adjustment is made, ensure that the mechanism is locked to
prevent unexpected motion.
t
When moving the LOGIQ 500 system, lower the monitor to
its lowest possible position to improve stability.
Illustration 18. Display Monitor Movement
2177611–100 Rev 0
Brightness and Contrast

Adjusting the monitor’s contrast and brightness is one of the
most important factors for proper image quality. If these
controls are set incorrectly, the Gain, TGC, Dynamic Range
and even Acoustic Output may have to be changed more
often than necessary to compensate.
The proper setup displays a complete gray scale. The lowest

level of black should just disappear into the background and
the highest white should be bright, but not saturated.
To adjust the Brightness and Contrast:
t
1. Turn on the LOGIQ 500 and display a gray scale
image with a variety of echo levels.
2. Access the Brightness/Contrast controls by pushing
on the top center of the control panel door, located
under the display screen.
3. Push Brightness and Contrast slidepots to minimum
(to the left).
4. Increase the Brightness until the background or
monitor raster is just one shade above black.
5. Increase the Contrast to display the complete or
desired range of gray shades.
.
Generally speaking, do not change the controls once they
have been set. Once set, the display then becomes the
reference for the hard copy device(s).
NOTE: After readjusting the monitor’s Contrast and

Brightness, readjust all preset and peripheral settings.
Task Light
Microphone
Task Light Button Brightness Contrast
Illustration 19. Brightness and Contrast
t
Getting Started 27
2177611–100 Rev 0
Speakers
Stereo audio is provided by speakers located on the sides of
the Display Monitor.
Stereo audio is provided as a standard feature and useful for

the following:
S Audio Doppler operation (left side is blood flow away/

right side is blood flow toward)
S Audio playback of videotaped scan sessions
S Error notification
Speakers
toward away
Illustration 20. Display Monitor Speakers
2177611–100 Rev 0
Peripheral/Accessory Connector Panel

t
LOGIQ 500 peripherals and accessories can be properly
connected using the rear connector panel located behind the
rear door. Only the B/W Page Printer (UP-890) can be
connected to the front accessory panel.
Located on the panel are video input and output connections,

audio input and output, camera expose connectors, foot
switch connector, power connectors and control connections
for VCR, printer, MIC and service tools.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
!
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Video In Rec/Expose
VCR/
Composite Color R
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Color
Printer
A
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
S Video
G
VCR/
B Color
L Printer
Audio–R
B
Sync
Video Out
MIC
Composite Color R
Composite B/W G
S Video
B Service
L Audio–R
Sync
Rec/Expose
SCSI Bus
B/W Printer
B/W Camera
Ethernet
Color
Camera
P9524PV
Foot Switch 100V 5.0A Max.

Include front printer panel
Thermal P9524PW
Power Cir. Breaker
120V 4.1A Max.
Power Power P9524PX
220–240V 2.0A Max.

Illustration 21. Peripheral/Accessory Connector Panel
t
Getting Started 29
2177611–100 Rev 0
Peripheral/Accessory Connector Panel (cont’d)

CAUTION Each outer (case) ground line of peripheral/accessory
connectors are Earth Grounded.
Signal ground lines are Not Isolated, except the Service

Port.
All of the signal lines (including the signal ground) of the

Service Port are Isolated.
Service
Illustration 22. Service Port
CAUTION Use only approved probes, peripherals or accessories.
. Refer to the Service Manual (P9030TA) for more information

about Peripherals/Accessories and their connections.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
Control Panel Map
" "❙ A
q
→ →
"❙ A
Illustration 23. Control Panel
This section is a map of all user controls. For in-depth

information on using the controls, refer to the Basic Scan,
B-Mode, Doppler, M-Mode, and Color Flow chapters.
Controls are grouped together for ease of use:
S Patient Information. These controls are used at the start

of a new patient study to erase previous patient
information or edit current patient data.
t
Getting Started 31
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
Control Panel Map (cont’d)

S Probe Controls. These controls activate one of the three
probes attached to the system or the dedicated CW
Doppler probe.
S Soft Control Panel. These controls and dynamic display
are used to access mode or operation specific
parameters or software.
S TGC and Acoustic Output. These controls are used to
adjust the Time Gain Compensation and transmit
acoustic output.
S Measurements and Annotations. These controls are
used to make specified measurements on the image or to
annotate the image display.
S Mode, Display and Record. These controls are used to
designate display modes, image orientation, gain, freeze,
record (print) and image memory manipulation.
S VCR Controls. These controls provide basic system
keyboard control of a designated optional VCR.
S Doppler and Color Flow Controls. These controls are
used to adjust the B/W Doppler spectrum as well as the
Color Doppler display.
S User Define. The function of these controls can be
defined by the user.
S Keyboard. The keyboard is used for patient data entry,
image annotation, some VCR control and other special
functions.
Key Illumination
The front panel keys/controls are illuminated according to
their availability.
Disabled or unavailable selections will have the key

illumination turned off.
Enabled or available selections will have the key illumination

half lighted (back lit).
Active or cancelable selections will have the key illumination

fully lighted.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
Patient Information
Illustration 24. Patient Information Keys
The New Patient key should be pressed prior to the start of

each patient study. A preset parameter can be set to prompt
the user if they wish to erase all patient data or not.
Enter patient data with the alphanumeric keyboard.
The Soft Menu automatically defaults to the last exam preset
.
top menu when New Patient is pressed. A diagnostic region
can be selected from the preset sub-menus to provide a
suitable starting point for system scan parameters.
NOTE: After a specific time interval the Soft Menu defaults

to the “B” Top Menu.
The ID/Name key functions the same as the New Patient

key except it does NOT erase previous patient data (i.e.
measurements, calculations, etc.)
This key would typically be used to edit patient information

without changing the current system status.
CAUTION To avoid patient identification errors, always verify the

identification with the patient. Make sure the correct patient
identification appears on all screens and hard copy prints.
t
Getting Started 33
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
Probe Controls
Illustration 25. Probe Select Keys
These probe controls are used to select

(activate) one of the three possible probe ports
t
available on the front of the LOGIQ 500.
A dark key indicates no probe is attached to that probe port.
A half bright key indicates a probe is attached to the probe

port but not active.
A brightly lit key indicates a probe is attached to that probe

port and is the active probe.
For Probe Name Menu operation, see Getting Started 23.
The fourth key is used to select (activate) the dedicated

continuous wave Doppler (CWD) probe.
CWD Mode, split Crystal or Doppler-Only CW probes are

t
options available on the LOGIQ 500.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
Soft Menu Control Panel
1 B Preset Set Up ECG

2
Frame Penet. Color Biopsy
Average Lines
2 Image
4 OFF Softener
Illustration 26. Soft Menu Control Panel
The Soft Menu Display is in the center of the Soft Menu

Controls. The display is divided into twelve sections, four top
menu categories and eight sub-menu categories.
TOP TOP TOP TOP

SUB SUB SUB SUB
SUB SUB SUB SUB
Illustration 27. Soft Menu Organization
The Top Menu Select key cycles through the top level menu
page selections. The far left side top menu is the default
selection and its sub-menus are automatically displayed.
t
Getting Started 35
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
Soft Menu Control Panel (cont’d)
The four top menu select keys will select

and highlight the corresponding top menu
and display its associated sub-menus.
The Sub-Menu Select rocker switch will cycle to the next ( ")
A
or previous ( ) sub-menu page.
The Sub-Menu rocker switches allow for the

increase/decrease of a parameter value (i.e.
Dynamic Range) or enabling/disabling of a
parameter (i.e. Image Softener).
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
TGC and Acoustic Output
Illustration 28. TGC and Acoustic Output Controls
The Acoustic Output control allows for varying the power

output of the transmitted sound wave.
Clockwise rotation increases the acoustic output.

Counter-clockwise rotation decreases the acoustic output.
Acoustic Follow the principle of “as low as reasonably achievable”

Output (ALARA) when scanning patients. Always use the least
Hazard amount of acoustic output possible to obtain an optimal
image.
t
Getting Started 37
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
TGC and Acoustic Output (cont’d)
The TGC controls are used to vary the gain of the

received echoes at a specific depth.
These controls compensate for echo attenuation as

depth increases.
In Zoom, the TGC adjusts automatically if the “TGC Depth

Remap” preset, on Custom Display page 9, is set to ON.
Only the TGC pots that affect the zoomed region of interest
will be lighted.
When a depth change is made, TGC is rescaled to affect the

new depth range. Each TGC pot is proportionally scaled
across the display depth range as illustrated below.
0 cm 0 cm
2 cm 3 cm
4 cm 6 cm
6 cm 9 cm
8 cm 12 cm
10 cm 15 cm
12 cm 18 cm
14 cm 20 cm
< > < >

± 20% ± 20%
Illustration 29. Time Gain Compensation
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurement and Annotation
↑
↓
Illustration 30. Measurement and Annotation Controls
This group of controls performs various functions related to

making measurements, annotating and adjusting the image
information.
The Comment key enables the image text editor and displays
the annotation library soft menu. After the Comment key is
pressed, text can be added through the Soft Menu comment
library or by typing comments from the alphanumeric
keyboard. Turning off the cursor can be done by pressing the
Set key. Pressing the Clear key will erase all comments.
t
Getting Started 39
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
Measurement and Annotation (cont’d)
The Body Pattern key enables the body pattern Soft Menu
and displays the default pattern on the screen. The
Sub-Menu Select rocker switch is used to select the desired
pattern from the active package. See Customize 92 to
program a body pattern package and Customize 107 to
select an active body pattern package.
The M/D Cursor key enables Trackball control of the M-Mode

or Doppler cursor line (not angle correction) or the CFM
window in real-time Color Flow Mode.
The Scan Area key enables Trackball control of the B-Mode

image area size and position in B/W, the CFM window size
and position in Color mode and the Zoomed area size and
position in Zoom. Refer to Basic Scan 61, B-Mode 14,
B-Mode 15 and Adding Color 15 for more details.
The Measurement key is used in all types of basic

measurements, including distance, circumference/area,
ellipse, etc. It displays the measurement soft menu for the
current exam category.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
Measurement and Annotation (cont’d)
The Ellipse rocker switch is used to activate the ellipse

measurement function after the first distance measurement
↑ has been set. It also toggles which cursor is the movable
↓
cursor during the ellipse adjustment.
The Set key is used for various functions, but is generally

used to fix or finish an operation (i.e. to fix a measurement
cursor or exit scan area size/position in B-Mode and zoom).
The Clear key is generally used to erase or exit functions

such as annotations/comments, measurements and zoom.
This will return the system to the basic mode top menu.
Press the Zoom key to activate the zoom function. Adjust

the size with the Zoom Size knob. Press the Clear key to
cancel the zoom function and the Set key to fix the zoom
magnification.
Zoom Size
This knob is used to control the zoom size with the zoom
Rotation
function in real-time or rotate the probe position indicator in
the body pattern function.
The Trackball is used with almost every key function in this

group. Trackball control depends on the last key function
pressed.
t
Getting Started 41
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
Mode, Display and Record
→ →
"❙A
Illustration 31. Mode, Display, and Record Controls
This group of controls provides various functions relating to

the display mode, display orientation, image recording/
saving, freeze, gain and cine scroll.
The Mode Controls select the desired display mode or

combinations of display modes.
During dual display modes the L and R keys activate the Left
or Right displayed image.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
Mode, Display and Record (cont’d)
The Depth knob controls the image display depth. Clockwise

rotation decreases display depth. Counterclockwise rotation
increases display depth.
Increase Decrease
Illustration 32. Depth Control Adjustment

The Reverse key toggles the left/right orientation of the scan
image.
The Image Memory key stores the current frozen displayed

→
image in system image memory.
Maximum number of B-Mode images is 8.

Maximum number of Timeline images is 4.
All images are erased when the New Patient key is pressed
or there is a loss of system power.
The Image Recall key displays a menu of the images stored

→ in memory. After pressing Image Recall, select the desired
image from the Soft Menu for display.
Record 1 and Record 2 are used to activate the designated

recording device (i.e. video page printer, multi-image camera,
or image archive option). This will print, film or store the
current displayed image.
t
Getting Started 43
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
Mode, Display and Record (cont’d)
The Freeze key is used to stop the acquisition of ultrasound

data and freeze the image in system memory.
"❙A
Pressing Freeze a second time continues live image
acquisition.
This control performs a dual function. During live

B-Mode, it controls the gain of the displayed echoes.
During B/M- and M-Mode, it controls the gain of the
displayed timeline echoes. During B/M-Mode, B-Mode
gain can be controlled by the Doppler/CFM Angle
Control.
The gain value displayed on the monitor is:
B-Mode B-Mode Gain

M-Mode M-Mode Gain
B/M-Mode M-Mode Gain
When the image is frozen it controls scrolling forwards
and backwards through the cine loop images in
temporary storage.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
VCR Controls
J/" / F
Illustration 33. VCR Controls
These controls are used in conjunction with the optional

video cassette recorder.
Press the External Video key to allow for the display of an

external video signal (i.e. from a VCR) on the system monitor.
↓ Pressing Play automatically selects external video.
Press the key a second time to return to LOGIQ t 500 video

display.
Press this key to enable or disable the on board microphone

to allow for audio to be added to the taping of system video.
Pressing the Stop/Play key either places the VCR in the play
J/" mode or stops the play or record mode.
Pressing the Pause/Record key either places the VCR in the

record mode or causes the VCR to pause if it is already in the
F
.
/ record or play mode.
NOTE: See keyboard for additional VCR controls.
t
Getting Started 45
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
Doppler and CFM Controls
↑ V
↓ m/s "❙A
Illustration 34. Doppler and CFM Controls
The controls in this group are specific to Doppler or Color

Flow Doppler imaging.
This control adjusts the audio volume output to the speakers.
Pressing the Select key assigns all controls in the

Doppler/CFM section to either Doppler processing or CFM
processing when both Doppler and CFM are active.
The indicator will light for the active mode, Doppler or CFM.
The Gain control adjusts the receive gain of the signal for the
selected mode, Doppler or CFM.
Turn this control to adjust the pulsed Doppler angle correction

to be parallel to the flow of blood in the sample area.
q
The M/D Cursor key controls the enabling or disabling of the
angle correction control.
The M/D Cursor key disables Trackball control, B-Mode

image area size and position and CFM window size and
position.
The Angle knob controls B-Mode gain in all modes except

Doppler.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
Doppler and CFM Controls (cont’d)
The Spectrum Invert key is used in B/W Doppler to invert the

↑
↓ polarity of the Doppler spectrum display.
During CFM processing this key will reverse the color

assignments (i.e. red/blue blue/red).
Pressing the top of the Velocity Scale rocker switch will

increase the displayed velocity scale.
V
m/s
Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch decreases the
velocity scale.
Pressing the top of the Baseline Shift rocker switch raises

the baseline of the display vertically.
Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch decreases or lowers

the baseline of the display.
While in B-Mode only, Baseline Shift can be used to change

Focus Position.
The B Pause key is used to pause or activate the B-Mode

"❙A image area when in Doppler, B, or M-Modes.
The function of the B-Pause key is set by the parameter

“PWD Alternative Scan” found in Set Up/Custom Display
page 4.
t
Getting Started 47
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
User Defined Keys
Illustration 35. User Defined Keys
These keys can be programmed through the Set Up/User

Define function to perform almost any desired soft menu,
keyboard or front panel control function.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
Keyboard
f Æ
/ ?
Ç
Illustration 36. Keyboard
The keyboard has standard alphanumeric keys available

along with some special functions.
The Cursor Home key brings the alphanumeric cursor to the

very upper left corner of the available field.
The Escape key is used to exit or cancel specified functions

or modes.
Control is used in conjunction with other keys to activate

special keyboard functions.
Back Space is used to delete previous characters while

annotating.
Return is used to move to the next line of annotation.
t
Getting Started 49
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls
Keyboard (cont’d)
Tab is used to move forward or backwards through the text
one word at a time, or eight characters at a time.
Red Shift is used to activate the special characters

highlighted in red on the keys to the right side of the
Red keyboard. See Basic Scan 55 for details.
Blue Shift activates the VCR controls on the keyboard for the
approved Sony SVO-9500MD. When Blue Shift is activated
Blue and the VCR is in play mode, the left/right pointers control
searching reverse or forward. The up/down pointers control
shifting backwards/forwards one frame at a time while the
VCR is paused.
If the VCR is not in play mode, the left/right pointers will

cause the VCR to rewind or fast forward.
Caps Lock locks all alpha characters in the upper case mode.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Relocating The System
Moving the System

When moving or transporting the system, follow the
precautions below to ensure the maximum safety for people,
the system, and other equipment.
Before moving the system:
1. All cables from off-board peripheral devices (IIE

camera, external printer, VTR, etc.) must be
disconnected from the console.
2. Ensure that no loose items are left on the console.
3. Wrap the console’s power cable securely as
suggested in Getting Started 19.
.
4. Connect all probes to be used while off site. Ensure
that probe cables are out of the way from the wheels
and not protruding beyond the console.
NOTE: If more than three (3) probes are intended to be used,
store the additional probes securely in the front
storage area.
5. Store all other probes in their original cases or in soft
cloth or foam to prevent damage.
6. Store sufficient gel, optical disks, and other essential
accessories in the provided space.
7. Adjust the monitor to its lowest position possible.
Ensure that the monitor arm is locked in place.
8. Unlock the front wheels.
t
Getting Started 51
2177611–100 Rev 0
Relocating the System
Moving the System (cont’d)

When moving the system:
.
1. Take extra care when moving the system long
distances and on inclines. Ask for help if necessary.
NOTE: Wheel chair ramps are usually less than five degrees.
Avoid ramps that are steeper than ten degrees to
avoid tipping over the system.
Utilize additional care and personnel when moving on
steep incline (>5°) or loading into a vehicle for
.
transport.
2. Always use the rear handle grips to move the system.
NOTE: DO NOT attempt to move the console using any
cables or fixtures, such as the probe connectors.
3. Use the brake, located on the bottom of the system in
the front, when necessary.
4. Do not let the system strike walls or door frames.
5. Use extra care when crossing door or elevator
thresholds.
6. Once the destination is reached, lock the wheels.
CAUTION The system weighs approximately 180 kg (397 lbs). To avoid

possible injury and equipment damage:
S Be sure the pathway is clear.

S Limit movement to a slow careful walk.
S Use two or more persons to move the system on inclines
or long distances.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Transporting the System

Use extra care when transporting the system using vehicles.
In addition to the instructions used when moving the system
(refer to Getting Started 51), do the following:
1. Only use vehicles that are designed for transport of

t
the LOGIQ 500 system.
2. Load and unload the system to a vehicle parked on a
level surface.
3. Ensure that the transporting vehicle can handle the
weight of the system plus the passengers.
4. Ensure that the load capacity of the lift (a minimum of
180 kg [397 lbs] is recommended) is capable of
handling the weight of the system.
5. Ensure that the lift is in good working order.
6. Secure the system while it is on the lift so that it
.
cannot roll. Use either wood chocks, restraining
straps, or other similar types of constraints. Do not
attempt to hold it in place by hand.
NOTE: Strap the system below its handle so that the system
does not break loose.
WARNING Never ride on the lift with the system. A person’s
weight coupled with the weight of the system may
exceed the load capacity of the lift.
7. Employ two to three persons to load and unload
safely from a vehicle.
t
Getting Started 53
2177611–100 Rev 0
Transporting the System (cont’d)
.
8. Load the unit aboard the vehicle carefully and over its
center of gravity. Keep the unit still and upright.
NOTE: Do not lay the unit down.
9. Ensure that the system is firmly secured while inside
the vehicle. Any movement, coupled with the weight
of the system, could cause it to break loose.
10. Secure system with straps or as directed otherwise to
prevent motion during transport.
11. Prevent vibration damage by driving cautiously. Avoid
unpaved roads, excessive speeds, and erratic stops
or starts.
2177611–100 Rev 0
.
Wheels
Examine the wheels frequently for any obvious defects that
could cause them to break or bind.
Front wheels The front wheels swivel, pivot, and lock.
.
Back wheels The back wheels swivel and pivot but do not lock.
NOTE: For the USA version console, the back wheels do not
pivot.
Setting the lock

To engage the wheel lock:
Press down on the lock pedal (located at the front of
the wheels). The pedal remains depressed.
To release the lock:

Press down on the pedal again. The pedal returns to
its normal position.
t
Getting Started 55
2177611–100 Rev 0
2177611–100 Rev 0
Safety
Precaution Levels
Hazard Symbols
Patient Safety
Equipment and Personnel Safety
Device Labels
Acoustic Output
Warning Label Locations
This section is important in order to become familiar with precaution levels and
hazard symbols used in this manual and on the system. It explains patient, system
and personnel safety concerns. The controls that affect acoustic output levels are
shown in table form.
t
Safety 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Safety
Safety 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Precaution Levels
Icon Description
Various levels of safety precautions may be found on the
equipment and different levels of concern are identified by
one of the following flag words which precede the
precautionary statement.
DANGER Indicates that a specific hazard is known to exist which

through inappropriate conditions or actions will cause:
S Severe or fatal personal injury

S Substantial property damage.
WARNING Indicates that a specific hazard is known to exist which

through inappropriate conditions or actions may cause:
S Severe personal injury

S Substantial property damage.
CAUTION Indicates that a potential hazard may exist which through

inappropriate conditions or actions will or can cause:
.
Minor injury
S Property damage.
Indicates precautions or prudent use recommendations that

should be used in the operation of the ultrasound system,
specifically:
S Use of the ultrasound system as a prescription device,

under the order of a physician
S Maintaining an optimum system environment
S Using this Manual
S Notes to emphasize or clarify a point.
t
Safety 3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Precaution Levels
Safety 4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Hazard Symbols
Icon Description
Potential hazards are indicated by the following icons:
Potential
Icon Hazard Usage Source
Biological S Patient/user S Cleaning and care ISO 7000
Hazard infection due to instructions No. 0659
contaminated S Sheath and glove
equipment. guidelines
Electrical S Electrical micro- S Probes
Hazard shock to patient, S ECG
e.g., ventricular
fibrillation initiated. S Connections to
back panel
S Electrical macro-
shock to patient/
user.
Moving S Console, S Moving

accessories or Using brakes
Hazard optional storage
S
devices fall on S Transporting

patient, user, or
others.
S Collision with
persons or objects
results in injury
while maneuvering
or during system
transport.
S Injury to user from
moving the
console.
S Patient injury or S ALARA, the use of
Acoustic tissue damage acoustic output
Output from ultrasound following the as low
Hazard radiation. as reasonably
achievable principle
Table 4. Potential Hazards
t
Safety 5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Hazard Symbols
Icon Description (cont’d)
Potential
Icon Hazard Usage Source
S Risk of S Flammable
Explosion explosion if anesthetic
Hazard used in the
presence of
flammable
anesthetics.
S Patient/user S Replacing fuses
Smoke injury or adverse
& Fire S Outlet
reaction from fire guidelines
Hazard or smoke.
S Patient/user
injury from
explosion and
fire.
Non– S Console failure, S RF IEC 878

Ionizing erratic operation No. 03-04
or output error
Radiation due to RF
interference.
Table 4. Potential Hazards (cont’d)
Important Safety Considerations

The following sections (Patient Safety, and Equipment and
Personnel Safety) are intended to make the equipment user
aware of particular hazards associated with the use of this
equipment and the extent to which injury can occur if
precautions are not observed. Additional precautions may be
provided throughout the manual. The equipment user is
obligated to be familiar with these concerns and avoid
conditions that could result in injury.
Safety 6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Patient Safety
Related Hazards
WARNING The concerns listed can seriously affect the safety of patients
undergoing a diagnostic ultrasound examination.
Patient Always include proper identification with all patient data and
identification verify the accuracy of the patient’s name or ID numbers when
entering such data. Make sure correct patient ID is provided
on all recorded data and hard copy prints. Identification
errors could result in an incorrect diagnosis.
Diagnostic Equipment malfunction or incorrect settings can result in

information measurement errors or failure to detect details within the
image. The equipment user must become thoroughly familiar
with the equipment operation in order to optimize its
performance and recognize possible malfunctions.
Applications training is available through the local GE
representative. Added confidence in the equipment
operation can be gained by establishing a quality assurance
program.
Mechanical Damaged probes or improper use and manipulation of

hazards intracavitary probes can result in injury or increased risk of
infection. Inspect probes often for sharp, pointed, or rough
surface damage that could cause injury or tear protective
barriers. Never use excessive force when manipulating
intracavitary probes. Become familiar with all instructions
and precautions provided with special purpose probes.
t
Safety 7
2177611–100 Rev 0
Patient Safety
Related Hazards (cont’d)
Electrical A damaged probe can also increase the risk of electric shock
Hazard if conductive solutions come in contact with internal live parts.
Inspect probes often for cracks or openings in the housing
and holes in and around the acoustic lens or other damage
that could allow liquid entry. Become familiar with the probe’s
use and care precautions outlined in Probes.
Acoustic Ultrasound energy, even at diagnostic levels, is capable of

Output damaging sensitive tissues if adequate precautions are not
Hazard followed. The wrong combination of equipment settings,
probe positioning, and tissue type can result in injury. Please
become thoroughly familiar with equipment controls that
affect acoustic output levels as well as the output display.
Acoustic output concerns and their potential bioeffects are
discussed in Appendix A.
Follow the principle of as low as reasonably achievable

(ALARA) when scanning a patient. During each ultrasound
examination, the clinical user is expected to weigh the
medical benefit of the diagnostic information obtained against
the risk of potential harmful effects. Once an optimal image
is achieved the need for increasing acoustic output or
prolonging the exposure cannot be justified.
Training It is recommended that all users receive proper training in

applications before performing them in a clinical setting.
Please contact the local GE representative for training
assistance. ALARA training is provided by GE Application
Specialists.
Safety 8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Related Hazards
WARNING This equipment contains dangerous voltages that are
capable of serious injury or death.
There are no user serviceable components inside the

console. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel
only.
DANGER The concerns listed below can seriously affect the safety of
equipment and personnel during a diagnostic ultrasound
examination.
Explosion Risk of explosion if used in the presence of flammable

Hazard anesthetics.
Electrical To avoid injury:

Hazard
S Do not remove protective covers. No user serviceable
parts are inside. Refer servicing to qualified service
personnel.
S To assure adequate grounding, connect the attachment
plug to a reliable (hospital grade) grounding outlet (having
equalization conductor ).
S Do not place liquids on or above the console. Spilled

liquid may contact live parts and increase the risk of
shock.
Smoke The system must be supplied from an adequately rated

& Fire electrical circuit. The capacity of the supply circuit must be
Hazard as specified in Chapter 3 of the LOGIQt 500 Service
Manual.
t
Safety 9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Related Hazards (cont’d)

Biological For patient and personnel safety, beware of biological
Hazard hazards while performing invasive procedures. To avoid the
risk of disease transmission:
S Use protective barriers (gloves and probe sheaths)

whenever possible. Follow sterile procedures when
appropriate.
S Thoroughly clean probes and reusable accessories after
each patient examination and disinfect or sterilize as
needed. Refer to Probes for probe use and care
instructions.
S Follow all infection control policies established by your
office, department or institution as they apply to personnel
and equipment.
CAUTION Devices containing latex may cause severe allergic reaction

in latex sensitive individuals. USA customers should refer to
the FDA’s March 29, 1991 Medical Alert on latex products.
Safety 10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Device Labels
Label Icon Description

The following table describes the purpose and location of
safety labels and other important information provided on the
equipment.
Label/Icon Purpose/Meaning Location

Identification and S Manufacturer’s name and address Rear of console near
Rating Plate S Date of manufacture power inlet
S Model and serial numbers
S Electrical ratings (Volts, Amps, phase,
and frequency)
Type/Class Label Used to indicate the degree of safety or
protection.
IP Code Indicates the degree of protection Foot Switch
(IPX1) provided by the enclosure per IEC 529.
IPX1 indicates drip proof.
Equipment Type BF (man in the box Probe connectors and
symbol) IEC 878-02-03 indicates B Type PCG connector
equipment having a floating applied part.
Equipment Type CF (heart in the box ECG connector and

symbol) IEC 878-02-05 indicate surgical probes
equipment having a floating applied part
having a degree of protection suitable for
direct cardiac contact.
Device Listing/ Laboratory logo or labels denoting Rear of console
Certification Labels conformance with industry safety
standards such as UL or IEC.
“DANGER – Risk of The system is not designed for use with Rear of console
explosion used in...” flammable anesthetic gases.
“CAUTION” The equilateral triangle is Various
usually used in combination with other
symbols to advise or warn the user.
Table 5. Label Icons
t
Safety 11
2177611–100 Rev 0
Device Labels
Label Icon Description (cont’d)
Label/Icon Purpose/Meaning Location

“ATTENTION – Consult accompanying Various
documents” is intended to alert the user to
refer to the operator manual or other
instructions when complete information
cannot be provided on the label.
“CAUTION – Dangerous voltage” (the Various
lightning flash with arrowhead) is used to
indicate electric shock hazards.
“Mains OFF” Indicates the power off Rear of system,

position of the mains power switch. adjacent to mains
switch
“Mains ON” Indicates the power on Rear of system,

position of the mains power switch. adjacent to mains
switch
“ON” Indicates the power on position of Adjacent to
the power switch. On-Off/Standby
CAUTION: This Power Switch DOES NOT Switch
ISOLATE Mains Supply.
“Off/Standby” Indicates the power Adjacent to
off/standby position of the power switch. On-Off/Standby
Switch
CAUTION: This Power Switch DOES
NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply.
“Equipotentiality” Indicates the terminal to Rear of console
be used for connecting equipotential
conductors when interconnecting
(grounding) with other equipment.
CAUTION: This is only for

”FUNCTIONAL GROUNDING”, NOT
”PROTECTIVE EARTH”.
Table 5. Label Icons (cont’d)
Safety 12 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Device Labels
Classifications
Type of protection against electric shock
Class I Equipment (*1)
Degree of protection against electric shock

Type BF Equipment (*2) (Except ECG)
Type CF Equipment (*3) (ECG Only)
Ordinary Equipment
Continuous Operation
*1. Class I EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT in which protection against electric shock does
not rely on BASIC INSULATION only, but includes an earth
ground. This additional safety precaution prevents exposed
metal parts from becoming LIVE in the event of an insulation
failure.
*2. Type BF EQUIPMENT

TYPE B EQUIPMENT with an F-TYPE APPLIED PART
TYPE B EQUIPMENT: EQUIPMENT providing a specified
degree of protection against electric shock, with particular
regard to allowable LEAKAGE CURRENT.
Normal Mode Single fault

condition
Patient leakage current Less than 100 mA Less than 500 mA
*3. Type CF EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT providing a degree of protection higher than
that for TYPE BF EQUIPMENT against electric shock
particularly regarding allowable LEAKAGE CURRENTS, and
having an F-TYPE APPLIED PART.
Normal Mode Single fault

condition
Patient leakage current Less than 10 mA Less than 50 mA
t
Safety 13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Device Labels
*4. EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)
4.1 EMC Performance
All types of electronic equipment may characteristically cause

electromagnetic interference with other equipment, either
transmitted through air or connecting cables. The term EMC
(Electromagnetic Compatibility) indicates the capability of
equipment to curb electromagnetic influence from other
equipment and at the same time not affect other equipment
with similar electromagnetic radiation from itself.
This product is designed to fully comply with the

EN60601–1–2 (IEC601–1–2) in medical electric equipment
EMC regulations.
Proper installation following the service manual is required in

order to achieve the full EMC performance of the product.
The product must be installed as stipulated in 4.2, Notice

upon Installation of Product.
In case of issues related to EMC, please call your service

personnel.
CAUTION Do not use the following devices near this equipment. Use of
these devices near this equipment could cause this
equipment to malfunction.
DEVICES NOT TO BE USED NEAR THIS EQUIPMENT
Devices which intrinsically transmit radio waves such as:

Cellular phone, radio transceiver, mobile radio transmitter,
radio-controlled toys, etc.
Keep power to these devices turned off when near this

equipment.
Medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct

technicians, patients and other people who may be around
this equipment to fully comply with the above regulaion.
Safety 14 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Device Labels
4.2 Notice upon Installation of Product
1. Use either power supply cords provided by GE

Medical Systems or ones designated by GE Medical
Systems. Products equipped with a power source
plug should be plugged into the fixed power socket
which has the protective grounding conductor. Never
use any adaptor or converter to connect with a power
source plug (i.e. three-prong-to-two-prong converter).
2. Locate the equipment as far away as possible from
other electronic equipment.
3. Be sure to use only the cables provided by or
designated by GE Medical Systems. Connect these
cables following the installation procedures (i.e. wire
power cables separately from signal cables).
4. Lay out the main equipment and other peripherals
following the installation procedures described in the
Option Installation manuals.
4.3 General Notice
1. Designation of Peripheral Equipment Connectable to

This Product.
The equipment indicated in Appendix C—Peripherals,
List of Optional Peripherals, can be hooked up to the
product without compromising its EMC performance.
Avoid using equipment not designated in the list.
Failure to comply with this instruction may result in
poor EMC performance of the product.
2. Notice against User Modification
The user should never modify this product. User
modifications may cause degradation in EMC
performance.
Modification of the product includes:
a. Changes in cables (length, material, wiring, etc.)
b. Changes in system installation/layout
c. Changes in system configuration/components
d. Changes in securing system parts (cover
open/close, cover screwing)
t
Safety 15
2177611–100 Rev 0
Device Labels
4.3 General Notice (cont’d)
3. Operate the system with all covers closed. If a cover

is opened for some reason, be sure to shut it before
starting/resuming operation.
Operating the system with any cover open may affect
EMC performance.
*5. Patient Environmental Devices
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Peripheral Devices
(1) VCR
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ (2) B/W Video
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Printer
(3) Color Video
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Power Cables with Protective Earth
Printer
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
(4) B/W Polaroid
Camera
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Peripheral Device
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
(5) Color Polaroid
ÎÎÎÎÎ
(1) B/W Video Printer Camera
Front Panel (6) Multi Image
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Signals I/O Port Rear Panel Camera
Signals I/O Port
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Power In Signals I/O Port
Power Out Signals I/O Port
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Power Out
Non–Imaging Probes Power In
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Imaging Probes Power Cables with
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Probe
Ports Protective Earth
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Imaging Probes Signals I/O Port
InSite Modem
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Probe Adaptor Signals I/O Port
ÎÎ
ECG Cable
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Physio–Signal Foot Switch
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Connector Power Line
Input Panel
ÎÎ
PCG Sensor Telephone Line
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Power In Foot Switch
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Power Line (AC~)
Power Cable with Protective Earth
Ground Line
Illustration 37. Patient Environmental Devices
Safety 16 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Device Labels
5.1 Acceptable Devices
The devices shown in Illustration 37 are specified to be

suitable for use within the PATIENT ENVIRONMENT.
Please refer to Service Manual (P9030TA), the User Manual

Appendix–C “Peripherals” and Appendix–D “Assistance” for
more details.
CAUTION Do not connect any probes or accessories without approval

by GE.
Those listed in the Appendix–C “Peripherals” and

Appendix–D “Assistance” have been tested and verified to be
compatible with the LOGIQ 500 system.
5.2 Unapproved Devices
CAUTION The user takes All Responsibility for connecting unapproved

devices.
If devices are connected without the approval of GE, the

warranty will be INVALID.
Any device connected to the LOGIQ 500 must conform to

one or more of the requirements listed below:
1. IEC 50, IEC 65, IEC 335, IEC 348, IEC 414, IEC 820,
IEC 950, IEC 1010–1, ISO 7767, ISO 8185, ISO 8359
or IEC 601–1.
2. The devices shall be connected to PROTECTIVE
EARTH (GROUND).
t
Safety 17
2177611–100 Rev 0
Device Labels
Safety 18 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Acoustic Output
Controls Affecting Output

The potential for producing mechanical or thermal bioeffects
is influenced by the controls listed below (refer to Safety 20).
Direct. The Acoustic Output control has the most

significant effect on Acoustic Output.
Indirect. Indirect effects may occur when adjusting the

controls listed on Safety 20.
Always observe the output display for possible effects.
Best practices while scanning
Hints S Raise the Acoustic Output only after attempting image

optimization with controls that have no affect on Acoustic
.
Output, such as Gain and TGC.
NOTE: Refer to the Optimization section of the Mode

chapters for a complete discussion of each control.
WARNING Be sure to have read and understood control explanations for

each Mode intended to be used before attempting to adjust
the Acoustic Output control or any control that can affect
Acoustic Output.
Acoustic Use the minimum necessary output to get the best diagnostic
Output image or measurement during an examination. Begin the
Hazard exam with the probe that provides an optimum focal depth
and penetration.
t
Safety 19
2177611–100 Rev 0
Acoustic Output
Controls
Mode Control Affect Default Setting

All Acoustic Output Direct. The middle setting is a
Significant factory preset
determined to be a
reasonable setting for all
exams. Use presets to
set the output preferred
by scan mode and exam
combination.
B Focus Comb Indirect. Minor Off.
B/M/CFD Depth Indirect. Minor Probe-dependent
(FOV) operator preset.
B/M Focal Zone Indirect. Minor Probe-dependent
Position and system preset.
Number
B/CFD Scan Area Indirect. Off.
Doppler M/D Cursor Indirect. Minor Off.
Doppler Doppler Sample Indirect. Minor Application-dependent
Volume Gate system preset.
Length
Doppler Velocity Scale Indirect. Minor Application-dependent
operator preset.
PWD/CFD Freq. Hi/Low Indirect. Minor Low.
CFD Scan Area Indirect. Minor Off.
B/M / CFD Zoom Indirect. Minor Off.
Table 6. Controls Affecting Acoustic Output
Acoustic Output Default Levels

In order to assure that an exam does not start at a high
output level, the LOGIQ 500 initiates scanning at a reduced
or default output level. The reduced level takes effect when
the system is powered on, a new patient is entered or when
changing exam categories.
Factory exam category default settings are:

Abdomen OB GYN Cardio Vasc Urology Small Pts
64% 64% 64% 64% 80% 56% 64%
Safety 20 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Overview
t
LOGIQ 500 warning labels are provided in seven different
languages. Each message is provided in English, Japanese,
German, French, Italian, Portuguese and Spanish.
Monitor Labels
For service personnel, a temporary label is placed on the
monitor face to warn not to move the monitor support arm
without the monitor attached. Illustration 39 shows the actual
label.
LOGIQ 500
Push Open
Illustration 38. Temporary Label Location
This label is removed after installation of the monitor.
t
Safety 21
2177611–100 Rev 0
Monitor Labels (cont’d)
Illustration 39. Temporary Warning Label
Two caution labels are found on the back of the monitor. One
warns to only move the console with the monitor in its lowest
position; the second warns not to push the console from the
side. Illustration 41 shows the actual labels.
1 2
Illustration 40. Caution Labels on Back of Monitor
Safety 22 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Monitor Labels (cont’d)
Illustration 41. Lower Monitor Cautions
t
Safety 23
2177611–100 Rev 0
Console Labels
Labels found on the back and side of the console will either
be translated to the seven languages or be specific to the
region.
Defibrillator Caution
LOGIQ
Illustration 42. Defibrillator Label Location
Safety 24 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Ground Point
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Illustration 43. Signal Ground Point Location and Label
CAUTION This is only for “FUNCTIONAL GROUNDING”, NOT

“PROTECTIVE EARTH”.
t
Safety 25
2177611–100 Rev 0
Regulatory Labels (European Systems)
Illustration 44. Regulatory Label Location (European)
Safety 26 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Regulatory Labels (American Systems)
Illustration 45. Regulatory Label Location (Americas)
t
Safety 27
2177611–100 Rev 0
Safety 28 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Basic Scan
Beginning an Exam
Reading the Display
Soft Menu
Annotating an Image
Zooming an Image
VCR Operations
Freezing an Image
Using Cine
Archiving Images
The section Getting Started described the basic physical elements of the
t
LOGIQ 500 system as well as the keyboard controls.
This section describes basic elements of the system and its displays common to all
types or modes of scanning.
The basic elements include:

S Patient information entry
S Display formats
S Soft-Menu function and displays
S Image annotation
S Zoom
S Image recording
S Cine
S Image archival
t
Basic Scan 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Basic Scan
Basic Scan 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Beginning an Exam
Introduction
Begin an exam by entering new patient information. Pressing
the New Patient key clears all patient data, annotations,
measurements, and calculation summary report pages from
the system’s memory. The system defaults to B-Mode. A
patient data entry menu is displayed on the monitor.
The operator should enter as much information as possible,

such as:
S Exam category
S Patient name
S Patient ID
S Comments
S Other patient demographic information
The patient’s name and ID number is retained with each

patient’s image and transferred with each image during
archiving or hard copy printing.
t
Basic Scan 3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Beginning an Exam
Beginning a New Patient

The New Patient key should be pressed at the beginning of
each patient study. Pressing this key automatically erases all
patient data, annotations, measurements, calculations and
.
summary report pages.
NOTE: Oper ID and Ref MD will not be erased.
The Soft Menu defaults to the last top menu selected when
New Patient is pressed. After a specific time interval the
Soft Menu defaults to the “B” top menu.
The Patient Entry Menu appears on the display monitor.
Illustration 46. Patient Entry Menu
The first Data Entry field is presented in reversed display,

with the selected cursor in position for the first character to be
entered.
Basic Scan 4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Beginning an Exam
Beginning a New Patient (cont’d)

S There are 7 examination categories to choose from:
Radiology/Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology,
Cardiology, Vascular, Urology and Small Parts. The
category should be selected before the start of the
examination.
S Use the Trackball to move to the exam category
selection. Input the appropriate number. As a result, the
patient information input menu changes when the
selected CATEGORY appears in reversed display.
Information pertinent to the selected exam category
appears in an abbreviated menu.
S Input the patient name (29 characters maximum).
S Press Return or use the Trackball to move the reversed
cursor.
S Input ID number (14 characters maximum).
cursor.
S Input any desired note (30 characters maximum).
.
cursor to the next desired input edit.
S Input the desired Oper ID (four digits maximum).
NOTE: Patient Name, Patient ID, Notes, Oper ID, Ref MD,
and Comments are common to all exam category menus.
The Patient Name and Patient ID will appear on the image
screen. All other information is automatically entered into the
appropriate exam report page.
Information in the Exam Category patient entry menus is

considered necessary for that type of exam. Fill in all
information possible.
S The display units of measure for items such as weight or

height can be selected from the Set Up/Preset program
menu page 9. Choose the priority and unit of measure on
this Preset Menu page.
S Input Ref MD (16 characters maximum).
S Input comment field (2 lines of 50 characters each).
t
Basic Scan 5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Beginning an Exam
Beginning a New Patient (cont’d)
.
S When all patient data entries have been completed,
highlight Exit and press Return or the New Patient key.
NOTE: If patient information needs to be edited or the exam

category changed, use the ID Name key. Pressing ID Name
allows for modification of the Patient Entry Menus without
erasing accumulated patient images, measurements,
annotations, calculations and summary reports.
The following are examples of the exam category patient
entry menus:
1: RAD/ABDOMEN
2: OBSTETRICS
3: GYNECOLOGY
4: CARDIOLOGY
.
5: VASCULAR
6: UROLOGY
7: SMALL PARTS
NOTE: Patient age entry information (years, months, weeks,

days) is selected in Set Up/Preset Program page 9, “Display
Unit Age”. Patient height is “Display Unit Height” and Patient
weight is “Display Unit Weight”. Choose the unit values that
are to appear on the patient entry menu.
BBT is a pregnancy origin data selection choice that appears

in the Tokyo University, Osaka University and European OB
formats only. LMP, EDC and GA are the only choices in the
USA version.
For OB and GYN patient entry menus, if the Multigestational
.
option is installed, “Fetus Number:” will appear to the right of
Ref. MD:. If more than one fetus, enter the correct number of
fetuses.
NOTE: In the case of multiple gestation, if the Multi-

gestational option is not installed, each fetus must be
scanned separately. Re-enter the patient’s information for
each fetus. BBT will not appear on the USA version menu.
It is possible to read patient data from a PC (personal

computer) into the LOGIQ 500 Patient Entry Menu.
See OB/GYN 87 for details.
Basic Scan 6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Beginning an Exam
Radiology/Abdominal Exam Menu
Illustration 47. Rad/Abdomen Exam Menu
Obstetrics Exam Menu
Illustration 48. Obstetrics Exam Menu
t
Basic Scan 7
2177611–100 Rev 0
Beginning an Exam
Gynecology Exam Menu
Illustration 49. Gynecology Exam Menu
Cardiology Exam Menu
Illustration 50. Cardiology Exam Menu
Basic Scan 8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Beginning an Exam
Vascular Exam Menu
Illustration 51. Vascular Exam Menu
Urology Exam Menu
Illustration 52. Urology Exam Menu
t
Basic Scan 9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Beginning an Exam
Small Parts Exam Menu
Illustration 53. Small Parts Exam Menu
ID/Name
Use the ID/Name key to enter or replace patient data without
changing the current status of the system. One common
reason might be to change the exam category.
Pressing ID/Name enables the Patient Entry Menu.
Use the Trackball or Arrow keys to move around the menu

entry lines. Return moves the entry cursor to the next line.
No other function can be started until ID/Name is completed.

To complete the ID/Name process, press ID/Name a second
time or move the highlighted cursor to Exit and press
Return.
Basic Scan 10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Beginning an Exam
Helpful hints
Hints If power is lost during the ID/Name function, any data that
was added or modified will not be saved.
Patient information/setup is saved to the system hard drive at

power off only if the System Parameters (page 1) preset
“Power On Status” is set to Keep Latest.. The setup is then
returned to it’s power down state when power is turned on.
The following rules apply when filling in the New Patient

menu:
S Press Caps Lock to type uppercase letters. Press Caps

Lock again to type lowercase letters.
S Press Back Space to erase characters and correct
errors.
S To change information, press Return or use the
Trackball to move to the field, then type over the existing
information with correct information.
S Press Return to move to the next field.
S Use the Trackball to move the reversed cursor to the
desired item.
S When pressing Return at the last data entry field, the
system returns to real-time scanning.
S Standard keyboard keys repeat when held down.
S To start over, press New Patient.
Remember, user and factory-defined presets are
dependent upon the exam category selected when filling
in the New Patient menu.
t
Basic Scan 11
2177611–100 Rev 0
Beginning an Exam
Basic Scan 12 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
B-Mode Display
t
The LOGIQ 500 offers a wide variety of display formats.
Each format shows the operator valuable information relating
to patient data and system scan parameters.
The following illustrates the basic B-Mode display and the
.
information that can be expected with this format. The
remaining modes and combinations of modes will highlight
information that is different for that particular display.
NOTE: Timeline formats (M-Mode and Doppler) available for

display are enabled on the Set Up/Custom Display screen
menus.
First, choose the Side/Side, or Top/Bottom display style on

Custom Display page 11, “Timeline Format”. The choice is
Side/Side or Top/Bottom. The two styles cannot be mixed.
Second, make the M-Mode format Enable/Disable selections

on Custom Display page 11.
Make the Doppler format Enable/Disable selections on

Custom Display page 12.
t
Basic Scan 13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
B-Mode Display (cont’d)
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Illustration 54. B-Mode Display Format
Basic Scan 14 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
B-Mode Description, Format, Values

Display
Patient Name A maximum of 29 alphanumeric characters.
Input at Patient Entry Menu.
ID Patient identification number.
A maximum of 14 alphanumeric characters.
Input at Patient Entry Menu.
Date Today’s date according to the system
settings.
Can be preset to display as MM/DD/YR,
DD/MM/YR, or YR/MM/DD.
Time Displays the current time during normal
operation. Can be preset to a 12 or 24 hour
clock. Displays the frame acquisition time
when in Cine Mode.
Hospital Name Shows the name of the hospital or institution.
A maximum of 34 alphanumeric characters.
Input at Set Up/System Parameters, page 1.
GA Gestational Age for OB patients. Calculated
from LMP input from Patient Entry Menu.
GA (LMP) = ##W#D
Acoustic Output The acoustic power output percentage is
Percentage preceeded by a “P” and then a number from
0–100.
Penetration “PP” is the indication for penetration mode
Mode On/Off on. The first P is penetration mode for
B-Mode. The second P is penetration mode
for Doppler. “NP” is the indication that
penetration mode is off.
Probe Probe name or designation of the active
probe.
Probe GE is the marker used for scan orientation.
Orientation This should coincide with the probe
GE or orientation marking on the probe body. This
marker can be turned off in Set Up/Custom
Display page 9.
Table 7. B-Mode Display Explanation
t
Basic Scan 15
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
Graphic Description, Format, Values

Display
Gray Scale Shows the B-Mode Gray Scale assignment.
Color Scale In Color Mode, the right half shows the Color
Scale assignment.
Basic Scan 16 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display

Display
FR/Cine Shows display acquisition frame rate.
###Hz (Real-time) Can be turned off by a
parameter in Set Up/Custom Display page 9.
In Cine Mode it shows the display playback
frame number. CN### (Frozen)
Depth Shows the display depth in cm.
##cm
Dual Mode: ##cm##
DR Dynamic Range shows the range over which
echo intensities are converted to gray scale.
Displayed in dB. DR##
Dual Mode: ##DR##
Gain Displays the overall B-Mode or M-Mode
Receive Gain. G##
Dual Mode: ##G##
Body Pattern Shows the body pattern selected for scan
orientation.
VTR Counter Indicates the video tape location shown as:
##:##:##
"" VTR status indication shows the current
operational status of the VTR.
TV Counter A two digit indication of the TV Frame count
during VTR playback.
t
Basic Scan 17
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display

Display
Measurements Lines of image measurement data are
displayed in this area.
The format and value depends on the type of
measurement.
The bottom line fills first and scrolls up as
additional information is obtained.
Operator System generated messages are displayed
Messages on this line (i.e. error messages)
HR Heart Rate is displayed here in beats per
minute. ###BPM (Requires ECG input)
A Output Acoustic Output display for MI (Mechanical
Index) or TI (Thermal Index). The larger one
is displayed. If both are less than 0.4, the
message “TI=<0.4” is displayed.
Acoustic Output Display

Displayed in the lower right corner of the screen, this is
intended to keep the user informed of the potential bioeffects
that can result when the Acoustic Output is increased. Refer
to the Bioeffects section in Appendix A.
The Acoustic Output display shows MI (Mechanical Index) while

in B-Mode. When other modes are selected TIS, TIB or TIC are
displayed. The Set Up/Custom Display menu page 9 will
determine which value (TIS, TIB or TIC) is displayed.
Display increments are 0.2 for values of one or less and 1.0
for values greater than one. Display accuracy for MI is
–50% to +50%. Display accuracy for TI is –50% to +100%.
Index values less than 0.4 are not displayed.
Basic Scan 18 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
Acoustic Output Display (cont’d)
Acoustic Output Index

Display Function
Other
Operation Mode
B Only
Display MI Setup/Custom
TIS TIC
(Mechanical Display page 9
Index) Value Selection
TIB
Display TIS (Soft Display TIB (Bone Display TIC (Cranial

Tissue Thermal Thermal Index) Bone Thermal
Index) Value Value Index) Value
NOTE: *For all Index Values, if the calculated value is less than 0.4 then Display will be “< 0.4”.
Illustration 55. Acoustic Output Display Selection
Adjusting the Acoustic Output

The initial acoustic output may be preset within the range of
0% and 100% in Set Up/Custom Display page 1. Acoustic
power settings are available for B/M and D/CFM/PDI with the
following presets:
S Acoustic Power B/M [%]

S Acoustic Power D/CFM/PDI [%]
While scanning, rotate the dial clockwise to increase the

acoustic output, or counterclockwise to decrease it.
t
Basic Scan 19
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç (0 cm)
Ç
(1 cm)
Ç
Ç
(5 cm)
Ç
Ç
(10 cm)
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Illustration 56. B-Mode Display Format
Scale markers are presented along the right side of the

(0 cm)
display as large marks every 5cm and small marks every
(1 cm) 1cm.
(5 cm)
(10 cm)
Basic Scan 20 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
The TGC curve displays the relative position of the TGC slide
pots compared to their depth.
This display can be turned on or off in the Setup/Custom

Display Menu page 9.
The number displayed next to the probe orientation symbol is

the zoom or scroll depth starting point for the image
displayed.
t
Basic Scan 21
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
Doppler Display
The following information displays on the Doppler Mode
image:
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Ç
ÇÇ Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Illustration 57. 1/2 B-Mode plus 1/2 D-Mode Display
Basic Scan 22 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
Doppler Display (cont’d)

The following additional parameters are displayed when in
Doppler Mode.

Display
Doppler The Doppler frequency value is displayed in
Frequency (D) MHz (MegaHertz).
Pulse Repetition Displays the Doppler Pulse Repetition
Frequency (R) frequency in KHz (KiloHertz).
Wall Filter (WV) The Wall Filter velocity value is displayed in
(WF) m/sec (meters per second) or Hz (frequency).
WV###
Dual Mode: ###WV###
Sample Volume Sample Volume (Length) is displayed in mm.
(Length) (SV) SV##
Dual Mode: ##SV##
q (Angle) Indicates the Doppler Angle in Q (degrees)
between the Doppler Mode cursor and angle
correction indicator. q##
Dual Mode: ##q##
D.G Doppler signal gain is displayed as a two digit
number.
Table 11. Doppler Mode Display Format
t
Basic Scan 23
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
Doppler Display (cont’d)

Display
HPRF HPRF is displayed to indicate that the system
is in the high pulse repetition frequency
mode.
SPEC INV SPEC INV is displayed to indicate that the
spectrum display is inverted from the
prescribed norm.
D. Velocity The Doppler velocity scale is displayed in
meters per second. The forward velocity is
displayed above the spectrum while the
reverse velocity is displayed below.
When the spectrum is inverted, the velocity
scale readings also invert.
Time Scale Three speeds:
Slow (4 second sweep). Major marker = 1
second; minor marker = 0.5 second.
Medium (2 second sweep). Major marker =
1 second; minor marker = 0.5 second.
Fast (1 second sweep). Major marker = 1
second; minor marker = 0.5 second.
Table 12. Doppler Mode Display Format
Basic Scan 24 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
M-Mode or Doppler Spectrum Only Display

The following information is displayed on the M-Mode or
Doppler mode spectrum image:
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
q
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Illustration 58. M-Mode or Doppler Spectrum Only Display Format
t
Basic Scan 25
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
Dual Doppler Spectrum Only Display
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
Ç ÇÇ
Ç ÇÇ
Ç ÇÇ
Ç ÇÇ
Ç ÇÇ
Ç ÇÇ
Ç ÇÇ
Ç ÇÇ
Ç ÇÇ
Ç ÇÇ
q
Ç ÇÇ
Ç ÇÇ
Ç ÇÇ
Ç ÇÇ
Ç ÇÇ
.
Illustration 59. Dual D-Mode Display Format
NOTE: Dual M-Mode format is not currently available.
Basic Scan 26 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
Color Flow Display

The following information displays on the Color Flow Mode
image:
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
CG
Ç
Ç
Ç
FR/Cine
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Illustration 60. Color Flow Mode Graphic Display
t
Basic Scan 27
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
Color Flow Display (cont’d)

Display
Velocity Scale Raises/lowers the velocity scale on the color
bar. Displayed in cm/m per second or Hz.
Color Scale Displays the selected velocity, velocity &
variance, power, or velocity & power map.
CFM Area Cursor Color displays only in this sector. Press the
Scan Area key to toggle between cursor size
and position control. Size this window using
the Trackball. Position this window via the
Trackball.
MTI Filter Displays on the Color Flow bar as a black
area surrounding the baseline.
Color Threshold The color display threshold based on the
Marker B-Mode gray scale level.
Units (V or F) Indicates the unit of measure. Velocity (V) in
meters per second or Frequency (F) in KHz.
Color Gain (CG) Displays the Color Receive Gain value from
0 to 31. CG##
Dual Mode: ##CG##
Table 13. Color Flow Mode Display Format
Basic Scan 28 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
Other Display Formats

Other possible display formats are:
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Ç
Ç
D
R
Ç
WV
SV
q Angle
Ç
DG
Time Scale
Ç
FR/Cine
Depth
Ç
DR
Gain
Ç
Illustration 61. Top/Bottom B Mid Preset
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
D
Ç
R
WV
SV
Ç ÇÇ
q Angle
DG
FR/Cine
Depth
Ç
DR
Gain
Time Scale
Ç
Ç
Illustration 62. Top/Bottom B Large Preset
t
Basic Scan 29
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
Other Display Formats (cont’d)
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç Ç
D
Ç
Ç
R
WV
Ç
SV
q Angle
Ç
DG
FR/Cine
Ç
Depth
DR
Ç
Gain
Ç
Illustration 63. Top/Bottom B Small Preset
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
FR/Cine
Ç
Ç
Depth
DR
Ç
Gain
Ç
Illustration 64. Dual B-Mode Display Format
Basic Scan 30 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
Other Display Formats (cont’d)
Ç
Ç
Ç
Zoom Depth
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
Ç
FR/Cine
Ç
Depth
DR
Ç
Gain
Ç
Illustration 65. Zoom with Reference Mode Display Format
ÇÇ Ç
ÇÇ Ç
ÇÇ Ç
ÇÇ Ç
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
D
R
HPRF
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
SPEC INV
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ D velocity HPRF SPEC INV D velocity
Ç Ç
WV
SV
q Angle
Ç Ç
DG Time Scale
Ç Ç
FR/Cine
Depth
DR
M(D) M(D)
Ç Ç
Gain
Ç Ç D velocity D velocity
Illustration 66. Dual Format
t
Basic Scan 31
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the Display
Basic Scan 32 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Soft Menu
Introduction
Additional functionality, not available as a control or key on
the front panel, can be found via the Soft Menus. Different
soft menus appear depending on the mode, special function
or calculation package selected.
The Soft Menu consists of Top Menu Select keys and

Sub-Menu Select rocker switches.
1 B Preset Set Up ECG

2
Frame Penet Color Biopsy
Average Lines
2 Image
4 OFF Softener
Illustration 67. Soft Key Display and Keys
t
Basic Scan 33
2177611–100 Rev 0
Soft Menu
The Soft Menu is divided into twelve sections. There are four
top menu categories and eight sub-menu categories.
TOP TOP TOP TOP

SUB SUB SUB SUB
SUB SUB SUB SUB
Illustration 68. Soft Menu Structure
Top Menus
There are five basic top menu groups. They are divided into
two pages. The first top menu page displays:
Illustration 69. Mode Default Top Menu (page one)
S Mode Default Menu is the current highest priority active

mode. The five possibilities are “B”, “M”, “PWD”, “CWD”
and “CFM”.
S Preset is for user programmable application parameter
preset selections.
S Set Up enables the system customization sub-menus.
S ECG is used to adjust the ECG waveform and ECG
synchronized scanning.
Basic Scan 34 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Soft Menu
Top Menus (cont’d)
The second top menu page shows:
Illustration 70. Mode Default Top Menu (page two)
S Archive is used with the Image Archive option for storing

images to MOD.
S Auto Sequence displays the user programmed
measurement sequence.
.
S CINE is used when the image is frozen for review of the
accumulated image data.
NOTE: Freezing the image automatically selects the Cine
top menu and displays its sub-menus.
Cycle through the available top menu pages by pressing the

Top Menu Select key.
TOP TOP TOP TOP

SUB SUB SUB SUB
SUB SUB SUB SUB
Illustration 71. Top Menu Page Display
The numbers to the left of the Top Menu area show the
current Top Menu page displayed and the number of Top
Menu pages available.
t
Basic Scan 35
2177611–100 Rev 0
Soft Menu
Top Menus (cont’d)
Illustration 72. Top Menu Selections
Select a displayed top menu by pressing the corresponding

enable key.
Four keys on the front panel automatically disable all top

menus and display specific sub-menu selections.
S Body Pattern displays the available graphic selections in

the sub-menu area.
S Comment displays the available selections from the
comment library.
S Measurement displays the available measurements
suitable for the current exam category, image format or
individual user sequences.
.
S Image Recall displays information pertaining to images
temporarily stored in system memory.
NOTE: To return functions to the Top-Menus, press Clear.
Key Illumination
Like all front panel keys, the Top Menu and Sub-Menu keys
are illuminated according to availability.
S Disabled or unavailable selections have the key

illumination turned OFF.
S Enabled or available selections have the key illumination
half lighted.
S Active or cancelable selections have the key illumination
fully lighted.
Basic Scan 36 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Soft Menu
Sub-Menu Organization
Different Sub-Menus are displayed according to the front

panel key pressed or Top Menu selected.
Each selection or parameter in the Sub-Menus relates

directly to the Top Menu that is fully illuminated.
The following illustrates the variety of Sub-Menu selections

available.
Details for each Sub-Menu or Sub-Menu selection can be

found when that mode or top menu selection is discussed.
Cycle through the available Sub-Menu pages by pressing the

Sub-Menu Select rocker switch.
TOP TOP TOP TOP

SUB SUB SUB SUB
SUB SUB SUB SUB
Illustration 73. Sub-Menu Page Display
The numbers to the left of the Sub-Menu areas show the

current page number displayed and the available number of
pages.
Probe Name Menu
Illustration 74. Probe Name Menu
t
Basic Scan 37
2177611–100 Rev 0
Soft Menu
B-Mode Top Menu
Illustration 75. B-Mode Sub-Menu (page 1 of 4)
Basic Scan 38 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Soft Menu
M-Mode Top Menu
Illustration 79. M-Mode Sub-Menu (page 1 of 2)
Illustration 80. M-Mode Sub-Menu (page 2 of 2)
t
Basic Scan 39
2177611–100 Rev 0
Soft Menu
PWD Top Menu
Illustration 81. PWD Sub-Menu (page 1 of 3)
1/2
Basic Scan 40 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Soft Menu
CWD Top Menu
Illustration 84. CWD Sub-Menu (page 1 of 3)
t
Basic Scan 41
2177611–100 Rev 0
Soft Menu
CFM Top Menu
Illustration 87. CFM Sub-Menu (page 1 of 4)

(CFM/PDI Enhancement Option)
Basic Scan 42 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Soft Menu
Preset Top Menu
Illustration 91. Preset Sub-Menu (page 1 of 3)
Set Up Top Menu
Illustration 94. Set Up Sub-Menu (page 1 of 1)
t
Basic Scan 43
2177611–100 Rev 0
Soft Menu
ECG Top Menu
Illustration 95. ECG Sub-Menu (page 1 of 3)
Image Archive Option Top Menu
Illustration 98. Image Archive Sub-Menu (page 1 of 1)
Basic Scan 44 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Soft Menu
Cine Top Menu
Archive Auto Seq
Illustration 99. Cine Sub-Menu (page 1 of 2)
Illustration 100. Cine Sub-Menu (page 2 of 2)
Auto Sequence Top Menu
Illustration 101. Auto Sequence Sub-Menu (page 1 of 1)
Body Pattern
Illustration 102. Body Pattern Sub-Menu
t
Basic Scan 45
2177611–100 Rev 0
Soft Menu
Comment
Illustration 103. Comment Library Sub-Menu
Measurement (GYN calculation menu)
Illustration 104. Typical Measurement Sub-Menu
Image Recall
.
Illustration 105. Image Recall Sub-Menu
NOTE: The number of images that can be saved for recall

will depend on the availability of the extended memory
option.
Basic Scan 46 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Soft Menu
Advanced Cardiac Measurement Option
Illustration 106. Advanced Cardiac Measurement Option Sub-Menu

(page 1 of 4)

(page 2 of 4)

(page 3 of 4)

(page 4 of 4)
t
Basic Scan 47
2177611–100 Rev 0
Soft Menu
Basic Scan 48 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Annotating an Image
Introduction
The annotation keyboard is always active. Upon starting a
new patient or power up, the underscore cursor appears in
the mode’s home position. Annotation can commence after
using the Trackball to specify where the comment should
start.
Underscore Cursor or Block
Illustration 110. Annotation Cursor in Home Position
.
Annotations are input in type-over, not insert, mode. Be
careful not to write over text when editing.
NOTE: The comment function will work with any report page.
When the cursor is in a field designated for comments, the
comment key will illuminate and the annotation library will
appear in the Soft Menu. All comment, edit and annotation
functions are then available.
t
Basic Scan 49
2177611–100 Rev 0
Annotating an Image
All annotations are permanently retained with the image.
However, annotations are erased at power down or when
Clear or New Patient are pressed.
In addition, the display’s home position can be changed

(preferred annotation area) for each display so that all
subsequent annotations begin in the same spot.
Cursor Home: Established in Set Up/Preset Program

page 1, the cursor returns to the upper left part of the screen
or the user specified position.
A new cursor home position is established by placing the

cursor in the desired position and pressing Ctrl and M. The
new cursor position is placed in the Preset Program values.
Pressing the Comment key assigns the trackball function to

controlling the cursor and displays the annotation library in
the soft menu.
To end the Comment/Library annotation function, press

Clear. Comments will be erased.
“Comment Clear Key Function” is a parameter found in the

Set Up/Preset Program page 1. This parameter can be set to
erase all comments on the screen or just the comment line
the cursor is on. With the line selection, the second time
Clear is pressed, all comments will be erased.
“Measurement Clear Operation” is a parameter found in the

have only measurements erased with the Clear key or
measurements and comments.
The Trackball and Keyboard Arrow keys are used to move

the cursor to the desired position on the image.
When the blinking cursor is in the desired position, comments

may be typed in or a selection can be made from the
annotation library.
Basic Scan 50 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Annotating an Image
The Set key is used to end the Comment/Library function.
The Tab key will move the cursor to the right every eight
characters or to the next word depending on the preset
parameter. See Basic Scan 53 for more details.
Shift and Tab moves the cursor in the same manner but to
+ the left.
Annotation Library
To reduce the amount of time spent annotating an image,
store often-used annotations in the Annotation (Comment)
Library. These scripts can be up to 20 characters in length.
As many as 24 scripts can be saved for each user application
preset within each exam category.
Library scripts for each preset are entered in the Preset/

Set Up menu. See Customizing Your System for details.
t
Basic Scan 51
2177611–100 Rev 0
Annotating an Image
Entering/Editing the Library

Access the Annotation Library by selecting Set Up/Preset
Program.
Pages 7 and 8 of the Preset Program menus will be the 24

annotation library selections.
.
Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to the desired
Annotation Library location number.
NOTE: Remember the first eight selections will appear on

sub-menu page 1. Annotation Library 9 to 16 will be on
sub-menu page 2. Annotation Library 17 to 24 will be on
sub-menu page 3.
Press Set. The 20 character space for that library location

will be in reverse video.
Add or edit the desired script.
Select the next library location and press Set.
Continue until all additions or edits are complete.
To save all entries and edits, Trackball to the SAVE selection

and press Set.
The system prompt will read “overwrite existing data? ‘Y’ or

‘N’”. Press ‘Y’ to rewrite and save data. Press ‘N’ to program
a new annotation library.
To avoid saving unwanted changes (all current changes),

select RESET and press SET.
Basic Scan 52 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Annotating an Image
Displaying annotation scripts

To review the Comment Library scripts:
Press Comment. The Library menu for the designated exam

category appears.
Use the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch to cycle through the

three pages of scripts available.
Illustration 111. Comment Library Sub-Menu Display
The Library Sub-Menu display shows the first 14 characters

of each script.
Hints Print a hard copy of these codes from the Set Up/Preset
Program Menus if there are several operators in the
department.
There is a space following all programmed annotations.

Example: PANCREAS_
Type in the eight most used scripts first, so that they appear
on the first Sub-Menu page.
t
Basic Scan 53
2177611–100 Rev 0
Annotating an Image
Adding Comments to an Image

To annotate an image:
S Type comments where the cursor is currently located (the

display’s home position) or use the Trackball/Arrow keys
to place the annotation cursor in the desired location
.
before typing.
S Press Return to move to the next line.
NOTE: Annotations wrap to the next line when they are

within one character of the right margin.
The word wrap starts one line below the start of that
annotation.
Annotations appear on all prints, photos, and VCR

recordings.
WORD WRAP WORD

WRAP
Before After
Illustration 112. Next Line Word Wrap
If the cursor appears at the right edge of the lowest line, or a

word cannot be completed in the lower right corner, word
wrap cannot be executed.
To annotate an image using the Library:
S Press Comment and move the annotation cursor to the

desired start position using the Trackball/Arrow keys.
S Use the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if necessary, to
display the desired script.
S Press the top/bottom of the appropriate rocker switch to
write the library script starting at the position of the cursor.
S The same word wrap principles apply for library scripts as
typed comments.
Basic Scan 54 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Annotating an Image
Special Annotation Keys

Some special annotation symbols can be used by activating
the Blue Shift or Red Shift keys. Red Shift does not function
while Blue Shift is active. The Blue Shift and Red Shift keys
act as a lock function (similiar to the Caps Lock key).
Activating Blue Shift will cause the arrow, female and male
symbols to be printed on the screen during the comment
function when the keys shown in Illustration 113 are pressed.
/ ?
Illustration 113. Blue Shift Keys
The Red Shift key enables the special symbols shown in red
on the keyboard.
S The red symbols shown in the lower right portion of a key

will print when the Red Shift is active.
S The red symbols shown in the upper half of a key will
print if the normal shift key is held down while the Red
Shift is active.
S Red symbols can be used in any language, but can only
be used with the proper designated letters.
Illustration 114. Red Shift Keys
t
Basic Scan 55
2177611–100 Rev 0
Annotating an Image
Editing Annotations
On screen annotations can be revised. Revision can be
accomplished by adding or deleting text, or completely
removing all annotations by pressing Clear.
Editing while annotating
.
Backspace over any error(s) made. Blank spaces take the
place of the letter(s) that was there. Continue typing the
annotation after backspacing over all incorrect letters.
NOTE: Text does not adjust automatically.
To delete previous character(s):
S Press Backspace as many times as necessary to make

the deletion.
S Retype the annotation from the point where backspacing
was stopped.
S Position the cursor and type over existing text.
To move through the text eight characters at a time:
S Press Tab to move to the right (Preset Keyboard Tab =

Normal).
S Press Shift and Tab to move to the left.
To move through the text a word at a time:
S Press Tab to move to the right (Preset Keyboard Tab =
.
Word)
S Press Shift and Tab to move to the left.
NOTE: The Tab selection is found on page one of the

Set Up/System Parameter menus.
Basic Scan 56 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Annotating an Image
Body Patterns
An additional way to annotate the image display is with body
patterns. Body patterns are a simple graphic of a portion of
the anatomy that is frequently scanned.
This body pattern is generally displayed in the lower left

corner of the screen. Its placement can vary with the format
of the display.
Along with the body part graphic is a marker that illustrates

the probe position. This marker can be placed with the
Trackball and rotated with the Zoom Size/Rotation control.
The body pattern and probe marker can serve as a reference

for patient and probe positioning when images are archived.
Probe Orientation
Marker
Illustration 115. Body Pattern with Probe Marker
Names of available body patterns can be displayed in the

Soft-Menu by pressing the Body Pattern key.
Body Pattern packages are displayed according to exam

category and preset.
The eight body pattern packages may be customized to

accomodate user preference. The sixteen individual body
patterns in the eight packages can be changed.
t
Basic Scan 57
2177611–100 Rev 0
Annotating an Image
Body Patterns (cont’d)

Use the sub-menu rocker switches to select the desired
pattern to be displayed. The Set Up/System Parameters
menu page 4 allows for the choice of displaying the pattern
only during freeze or at all times.
Each Body Pattern Package (1–8) can be customized and

the package for each preset selected in the Set Up/System
Parameters menus.
The Body Pattern Package (1–8) is selected from the

Set Up/Preset Program page 1.
Illustration 116 shows the body patterns available to be

preset and the order in which they appear in the selection
cycle.
Supine Right Oblique Left Oblique Left Decubitus Neck
Right Oblique Left Oblique Mammo Prone Right Decubitus

Neck Neck
Pregnancy Right Breech Left Breech Vertex Brow Up Vertex Brow Down
Illustration 116. Body Patterns
Basic Scan 58 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Annotating an Image
Antiverted Uterus Retroflex Uterus Transverse Uterus Head Left Head
Right Head Back Head Liver PLAX PSAX–Mitral

Valve
PSAX–Left PSAX–Aortic Apical 4 Apical 2 Aortic Arch

Ventricle Valve Chamber Chamber
Sub–costal Right Arm Poster Leg Anter Leg Left Arm

4 Chamber
Prostate Prostate Prostate Prostate Left Vertex

Sagittal Medial Sagittal Lateral Transverse Transverse
Right Vertex Breech Brow Up Breech Brow Down Breast Left Breast Right
Illustration 116. Body Patterns (cont’d)
t
Basic Scan 59
2177611–100 Rev 0
Annotating an Image
Duodenum Stomach Lung Intestine Ovary
Hand Back Hand Palm Dog Abdomen Dog Right Dog Left
Cat Abdomen Cat Right Cat Left Cattle Uterus Cattle Left
Cattle Right Horse Uterus Horse Left Horse Right Horse Front
.
Horse Rear Blank
Illustration 116. Body Patterns (cont’d)
NOTE: Refer to Customize 92 for details on programming

the contents of each body pattern package.
Refer to Customize 107 for details on selecting the body

pattern package to be used.
Basic Scan 60 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Zooming an Image
Introduction
Zoom is used to magnify an area of interest. A specified
zoom Region Of Interest (ROI) is magnified to approximately
the size of a full-sized image. The system adjusts all imaging
parameters accordingly. Decreasing the size of the ROI
increases the magnification factor.
Cine and VCR playback images must be frozen to be

zoomed.
t
Basic Scan 61
2177611–100 Rev 0
Zooming an Image
Zooming an Image
To magnify a live image, press Zoom. The zoomed image
may appear with a small reference image.
When zooming an image, specify which part of the image is
.
to be zoomed by positioning the ROI using the Trackball.
Size the Region Of Interest (ROI) using the Zoom Size
control.
NOTE: The zoomed image can be panned around the

B-Mode image by moving the Trackball.
Measurements can be performed on zoomed images.
Changing the depth does not affect the zoomed image,

unless the zoomed area is no longer contained within the
new depth.
TGC pots within the zoom ROI are active (and these pots’
LEDs light up). Gain is decreased by sliding the pot to the
left. Gain is increased by sliding the pot to the right. When
zoom is exited, the 8 slide pots are reproportioned to the
current depth scale.
Basic Scan 62 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Zooming an Image
Zoom Methods
The LOGIQ 500 offers two types of zoom capabilities,
Acoustic (real-time) Zoom and Display (freeze) Zoom.
Acoustic Zoom
Acoustic Zoom is accomplished while scanning live
(real-time).
Zoom While scanning, press the Zoom key to activate the zoom
function.
Rotate the Zoom Size control to the desired magnification.

The magnification choices available are:
1.2, 1.5 (default), 2.0, 2.5, 3.0 and 4.0
The default value can be set in Set Up/Custom Display, page
1 “Zoom Factor”.
Use the Trackball to position the zoom region of interest.
Clear
Press Clear or Zoom to cancel the zoom function.
t
Basic Scan 63
2177611–100 Rev 0
Zooming an Image
Display Zoom
Display (freeze) Zoom is accomplished after the image is
frozen. This applies to the current image, a Cine image or a
VCR playback image.
The magnification factor for Display Zoom is fixed at 2.0.
Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.

"❙A
Zoom Press Zoom to activate the zoom function.
Use the Trackball to pan around the image area.
Clear
. NOTE: If an acoustic zoom image is frozen, display zoom

will not function.
Basic Scan 64 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Zooming an Image
Zooming an M-Mode Image

If the Zoom key is pressed while in B/M-Mode, only the
M-Mode image will be zoomed.
Zoom Press Zoom to display a magnified M-Mode image and a

M-Mode zoom marker in the B-Mode image.
Adjust the Zoom Size control to the desired magnification

factor. The six steps are the same as B-Mode.
Use the up/down movement of the Trackball to move the

Zoom Markers vertically along the M-Mode cursor.
Use the side to side movement of the Trackball to move the

M cursor and Zoom cursor throughout the image.
Clear
. NOTE: Display Zoom does not function on a frozen B and

M-Mode Timeline Image.
t
Basic Scan 65
2177611–100 Rev 0
Zooming an Image
Multi–Image Zoom
When using the Zoom function in a multiple image display
format, a few basic rules apply.
S Display Zoom (Freeze) can be performed on any or all of

the multiple images.
Display Display
Zoom Zoom
Illustration 117. Dual Format Display Zoom
S A frozen acoustic zoom and active acoustic zoom can be

displayed simultaneously.
Frozen Acoustic
Acoustic Zoom
Zoom
Illustration 118. Dual Format Display, Frozen and Active
S Acoustic Zoom and Display Zoom cannot be mixed on the

same display.
Display Acoustic
Zoom Zoom
Illustration 119. Dual Format Display/Acoustic Zoom Unavailable
Basic Scan 66 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
VCR Operations
Introduction
An optional video cassette recorder (VCR or VTR) is
available for the LOGIQ 500. The optional VCR is S-VHS
compatible for improved recording quality.
The LOGIQ 500 supports remote control of the Sony

SVO-9500MD/MDP S-VHS Video Cassette Recorder only.
Other VCRs can record and playback video with the
LOGIQ 500, however remote control, advanced search
.
functions and auto calibration will not be supported. Control
of VCRs other than the Sony SVO-9500MD/MDP must be
done by the VCR front panel.
.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix H and to the manual supplied with
the VCR for more information.
NOTE: Measurements from VCR Playback video requires the

optional VCR measurement playback board for proper operation.
The following explanation of VCR operations assumes that

the Sony SVO-9500 is being used. It also assumes that the
“Heading VCR Playback” option is installed.
CAUTION The system can keep track of patient and tape information.
The system can search a tape for patient images. However,
the system CANNOT:
S Stop or indicate when it comes to the end of the last study

on the tape.
S Prevent recording over previous studies if record is
pressed while positioned in the middle of a study.
Without the Heading VCR Playback option:
S The hard drive does not store patient or tape id information.

S Auto calibration for playback measurements is not
available.
S Image, Patient and Tape Search functions are not
available.
t
Basic Scan 67
2177611–100 Rev 0
VCR Operations
Basic Scan 68 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Freezing an Image
Introduction
Freezing a real-time image stops all acquisition of information
into system memory.
This allows for measurements, annotations, printing or

storage into temporary image memory.
VCR playback images can also be frozen for similar reasons.
Post processing of the image

The following post processing image parameters can be
changed to affect the appearance of a frozen image:
S Display Zoom (x2 only)

S Reject
S Color (B Color or CFM Color Maps)
S Gray Scale Map Selection
S Image Rotation
S Color Tag
t
Basic Scan 69
2177611–100 Rev 0
Freezing an Image
Freezing an Image (Freeze Key)
.
To freeze an image:
S Press Freeze. The key backlights.
NOTE: If both B- and M-Modes are active, the B-Mode and

timeline trace stops immediately. Use the Cine Scroll Control
to start CINE review.
To reactivate the image:
S Press Freeze again. Deactivating Freeze restarts the
.
B-Mode and timeline after a black and white bar
indicating discontinuity is inserted in the timeline (M-Mode
Display).
NOTE: Deactivating Freeze erases all measurements and

calculations from the display (but not from the report page).
Selecting a new probe unfreezes the image.
Freezing an Image (Foot Switch option)

Toggle Freeze on and off by pressing the foot switch.
Foot Switch Pressing the left foot switch backlights the Freeze key on the
console.
Basic Scan 70 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Using Cine
Introduction
Cine is useful for focusing on images during a specific part of
the heart cycle or to find an image before the patient moved
or breathed.
Cine images are constantly being stored by the system. The

standard 8 megabytes of memory stores the most recent
data available for playback or manual review via Cine. The
amount of time represented depends on the system’s frame
rate, scan mode, image size and other parameters.
Timeline data is continually stored at four times the display

width of timeline data (and updates the corresponding
B-Mode images).
View Cine as a continuous loop via Cine Loop or manually

review Cine images frame by frame via the Cine Scroll
Control.
Data in Cine is available until new data is acquired. Cine is

stored in the system’s memory and can be transferred to
image memory, video page printer, multi-image camera or
optional optical disk (MOD).
An optional 40 megabyte frame memory board is available to

increase Cine storage capabilities from the standard 8
megabytes.
t
Basic Scan 71
2177611–100 Rev 0
Using Cine
Cine memory
Cine memory is erased when changing the following:
S Probe
S Scan Mode
S Depth
S Display format (zoom, dual, rotate)
S Timeline Sweep Speed (D/M-Modes)
S Changing the PWD Velocity Scale (spectrum only)
S Changing the Color Flow Velocity Scale
Cine functionality
Post Processing functions can be performed while in Cine
such as:
S Measurements and calculations

S Color Baseline shift
S B Color
S Color Flow Velocity Tag
S Color Flow Display Threshold
S CFM Spectrum Invert
S Zoom
S Rejection
S Gray Scale Maps
S Edit annotations
Basic Scan 72 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Using Cine
Accessing Cine
.
To access and manually review Cine:
1. Press Freeze.
NOTE: One click of the Cine Scroll knob erases displayed
measurements.
2. Rotate the B/M Gain/Cine Scroll knob to activate

Cine.
3. Rotate the Cine Scroll dial left (backward) and right
(forward) to move through the images in Cine
memory.
4. The current frame on the Cine gauge moves and the
Cine frame number is displayed on the lower left side
of the screen, above the depth.
Cine Gauge
Current Frame
.
Illustration 120. Cine Gauge Display
NOTE: Cine frame number 0 is the most current image. The

higher the Cine frame number, the older the image.
Depth, dynamic range, and gain parameters are valid for

Cine frame number zero only.
t
Basic Scan 73
2177611–100 Rev 0
Using Cine
Using Cine Loop

Specify which sections of Cine memory to playback by
creating a Cine Loop.
To create a Cine Loop:
1. Press Freeze. The key backlights.

2. Rotate the Cine Scroll dial to the desired starting
position in Cine memory. The Cine Sub-Menu is
displayed on the Soft Menu display.
Illustration 121. Cine Sub-Menu
3. Select START FRAME on the Cine Sub-Menu.
Illustration 122. Cine Gauge Frame Start
4. Rotate the Cine Scroll dial to the desired ending

position in Cine memory.
5. Select END FRAME on the Cine Sub-Menu.
Basic Scan 74 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Using Cine
Using Cine Loop (cont’d)
Illustration 123. Cine Gauge Frame End
6. Select REVIEW LOOP on the Cine Sub-Menu.
Cine Review Loop playback begins right away at the selected

speed.
.
Illustration 124. Cine Loop Operation
NOTE: Cine Loop is not available during Timeline Review.
To deactivate Cine Loop:
S Select REVIEW LOOP on the Cine Sub-Menu or turn the

Cine Scroll knob. This returns to manual Cine review.
To reactivate Cine Loop:
S Select REVIEW LOOP on the Cine Sub-Menu.
t
Basic Scan 75
2177611–100 Rev 0
Using Cine
Cine Loop Speed

To adjust the speed of viewing Cine Loop playback, access
LOOP SPEED from the Cine Sub-Menu.
.
Illustration 125. Cine Sub-Menu (Loop Speed)
NOTE: Cine cannot be viewed faster than real-time.
To increase playback speed, press the top of the LOOP

SPEED rocker switch.
Press the bottom of the LOOP SPEED rocker switch to slow

down playback speed.
Each press of the rocker switch cycles to the next speed

setting (1/1, 1/2, 1/4 or 1/8).
Multipl CINE
The Multipl CINE Soft-Menu selection is used in Dual
B-Mode Cine Operation.
With Multipl CINE on (menu highlighted), Cine review of the

two B-Mode images can be done simultaneously.
With Multipl CINE off, Cine review is done separately using

the L/R keys to designate the active Cine image.
Review with Multipl CINE on/off can be accomplished with

the Cine knob or review loop.
Basic Scan 76 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Using Cine
Side Change
This menu selection is used with B/M (D)-Mode imaging.
Side Change is used to toggle between B image Cine scroll

and Timeline (M/D) Cine scroll.
Illustration 126. Cine Sub-Menu (Side Change)
CINE Gauge
Used to toggle the Cine gauge graphic display on or off.
CINE Capture (option—color images only)

CINE Capture is a post processing version of the Capture
selection in the CFM/PDI sub-menu page 2.
Illustration 127. Cine Sub-Menu (Cine Capture)
Selecting CINE Capture will search through all images

between the start frame and end frame and display each
peak or the highest velocity. Adjust the start frame and end
frame points to limit the image frames used in the process.
t
Basic Scan 77
2177611–100 Rev 0
Using Cine
Capture Frame (option—color images only)

Capture frame can be used to eliminate specific image
frames from the Cine Capture process.
Use the Cine Scroll knob to display an image frame to be

eliminated, and press the Capture Frame rocker switch. A
small mark will be displayed on the Cine gauge. Do this for
all images that are not to be included in the Cine Capture
process. When all frames to be eliminated are marked, press
the Cine Capture rocker switch to display the peak velocity
detected color image.
Exiting Cine
To exit Cine, press Freeze.
Helpful Hints
Hints The following hints can help when freezing an image:
S Color, multi-format or M/D images take up more memory

than normal B-Mode. Therefore, less frames of
information are available for Cine storage.
ECG/Cine Gauge/Image Tracking

When an ECG waveform is displayed with the cine gauge, an
arrow pointer appears above the ECG waveform.
As the cine gauge marker is moved with the Cine Scroll

control, the arrow above the ECG waveform moves to
indicate where on the ECG cycle the displayed image was
taken.
Basic Scan 78 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Introduction
t
The LOGIQ 500 can save scan images to a variety of
optional devices.
Available archiving options are:
S Black/white video page printer

S Color video page printer
S Multi-Image (Multiformat) camera
S Video cassette recorder (VCR or VTR)
S Optical disk
S Laser camera
How images are recorded depends on the desired

destination.
Device Manufacturer Model Video Signal

VCR SONY SVO-9500MD NTSC
SONY SVO-9500D PAL
Color Video Printer SONY UP-1850 NTSC
SONY UP-1800EPM PAL
SONY UP-1850EPM PAL
Video Graphic SONY UP-860 NTSC/PAL
Printer
SONY UP-870MD NTSC
SONY UP-860CE PAL
Multi Image Camera International Imaging IIE360 NTSC
Electronics
Reprodine MX4 PAL
Reprodine MF2 PAL
Table 14. Suggested Optional Recording Devices
t
Basic Scan 79
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Optional Peripherals
Optional peripherals enhance the recording capabilities of the
t
LOGIQ 500.
Printing an Image
B/W Video Page Printer

Remote control of the B/W printer is limited to the print
function only. Adjustments to print quality are done on the
page printer. No status or error messages are available to be
t
displayed on the LOGIQ 500.
There is a six second delay built in to the Record key

recognition. This eliminates improper operation if the Record
key is pressed more than once in rapid succession.
To print an image:

"❙A
. NOTE: Remember that Cine Scroll may be used to look at

previous image frames to obtain the best image.
Press Record 1 to activate the print function on the standard
.
B/W Video Page Printer.
NOTE: The Record 1 and Record 2 keys can be preset to

activate almost any peripheral device. This is done by
assigning the key control to the output port to which the
peripheral is attached. See Customizing Your System,
System Parameters.
For details on the page printer operation, consult the Sony

Operator Manual provided with the printer.
Basic Scan 80 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Color Video Page Printer

The color video page printer allows for recording 1 or 4
images on a single sheet of paper in color or Black/White.
t
When the LOGIQ 500 is powered on, the Preset/Set Up
selections set the memory mode (1 or 4 images) and the
input signal select (RGB, Video, S-Video) on the color printer.
All other functions need to be selected at the printer control
panels.
The Record 1 or Record 2 keys can be programmed in the

Preset/Set Up function to activate the print function on the
Sony color page printer.
One image format: After the Record key is pressed, the

image is first stored in printer memory and then printed.
Four Image Format: The first, second and third time the
Record key is pressed, the image is stored in printer
memory. The fourth time the Record key is pressed, the
image is stored in printer memory and all four are printed on
one sheet.
t
Basic Scan 81
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Color Video Page Printer (cont’d)

The color video page printer provides some feedback if there
is an error in the print process. The following error messages
could be displayed due to color printer problems:
S Paper is jamming. Check paper.

S Check ribbon cassette setting.
S Check paper cassette setting.
S No paper. Set paper.
S Place paper print side up.
For details on the page printer operation, consult the Sony
Operator Manual provided with the printer.
Multi-Image Camera (MIC) (IIE Model 460)

The multi-image camera provides for the storage of still
½
images on an 8 x11 sheet of x-ray film.
The Record keys can be programmed in the Preset/Set Up

menu to control the print (expose) function of the camera. All
other camera functions are adjusted by the controls mounted
on the camera.
The LOGIQt 500 beeps after each exposure. The camera

controls the placement of the images.
Some error messages could be displayed if a problem occurs

in camera operation. Possible error messages are:
S Maximum number of prints have been made.

S No video signal. Check connections.
S Check Multi-Image camera.
For details on camera operation, consult the IIE Operator

Manual provided with the camera.
Basic Scan 82 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Video Cassette Recorder (VCR)

Consult the VCR instructions previously outlined in this
section and the VCR operator manual.
The Record keys and foot switch can be programmed in the

Preset/Set Up menu to activate the Record/Pause function
for the VCR.
Laser Camera
The LOGIQ t 500 can print images to a Laser Camera for
archival.
Contact the local GE Service Representative for details about

hook-up and operation.
t
Basic Scan 83
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Image Memory
The LOGIQ t 500 has storage space for 8 images in system
memory.
This storage is temporary. The images are erased when the

New Patient key is pressed or power is turned off.
To save images in system memory:

"❙A
Use the Cine Scroll control, if necessary, to display the best

image.
Press the Image Memory key. The image is saved to

→ system memory and the number of images currently stored is
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
If the system memory is full and the Image Memory key is

pressed, the system beeps.
Pressing Image Memory again deletes the oldest image in

system memory and saves the current displayed image.
The system gives a Memory Full warning beep each time an

image is about to be stored in a full memory.
Basic Scan 84 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Storage Space
Without the optional Cine Memory extension, the following
number of images or proper combination of formats can be
saved in memory:
S Single Format 8 images

S Dual Format 4 images
S Timeline Format 4 (NTSC) or 3 (PAL)
With the optional Cine Memory extension, the following

number of images or proper combinations of formats can be
saved in memory:
S Single Format 8 images

S Dual Format 8 images
S Timeline Format 4 (NTSC) or 3 (PAL)
Image Recall
Images stored in system memory can be recalled for review
or archival.
To recall images stored in system memory:
S Press the Image Recall key. The Image Recall

→ Sub-Menu is displayed on the Soft Menu display.
S The last image to be placed into Image Memory is displayed.
The Soft Menu contains the display mode and time the
images were stored.
Use the appropriate Sub-Menu rocker switch to select the

desired image to recall.
After the recalled image is displayed, no image post processing

can be performed. Only Comment, Measurement, Body
Pattern, Clear, Ext Video and Mic functions are available.
Press Freeze to continue scanning or press Image Recall to

return to the previous system status before Image Recall was
initially pressed.
t
Basic Scan 85
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Helpful hints
Hints The following hints can help when archiving images:
S Images can be temporarily stored in system memory and

recalled for archiving.
S Images stored in system memory will be lost if the New
Patient key is pressed or power is turned off.
S Images are stored in system memory on a “first in, first
out” basis (maximum 8 images).
S Retain any peripheral operator manuals for future
reference.
S Use the highest quality videotape possible and record in
the slowest speed possible.
Basic Scan 86 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
MOD Image Archive (option)
Overview
Image Archive is an option offered for the LOGIQ 500 that
gives the user the ability to store and recall scan images
using the latest technology, a 3.5 inch Magnetic Optical Disk.
The Magnetic Optical Disk (MOD) allows for much faster and
greater storage capacity than a Floppy Disk Drive (FDD). A
DEFF formatted MOD holds 128 or 230 Megabytes of
information (138 images) compared to 1.4 Megabytes (1
image) that may be stored on a high density floppy disk.
Along with the increased speed and storage capacity, the

user can perform measurements and calculations on images
recalled from a MOD. Images recorded as hard copy (film)
do not allow for additional measurements at a later date.
Images recalled from a MOD have much better resolution
than VCR playback images, providing better detail for
additional measurements.
In addition to the image archive function, the LOGIQ 500

MOD allows for a System Backup disk to be made in the
unlikely event of a hard disk failure. System software
updates and service diagnostics may also be accomplished
much faster.
Archive Functions
The Image Archive option allows the user to perform the
following functions:
S Store Image to MOD

S Recall Image from MOD
S Patient File search of MOD
S MOD Media file search
S Delete a file from MOD
S Format the MOD disk
S Eject the MOD disk from the drive
t
Basic Scan 87
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Related Preset Parameters

Two selections must be made in the Set Up/Preset Program
Sub-Menu, page 2, that affect image archiving.
Image Archive Compression:
S No is no DEFF format image compression.

S Yes is for DEFF format image compression. Storage time
for a compressed image is more than double.
NOTE: If image compression is used, images saved by the
LOGIQ 500  cannot be read on other TIFF readers, DEFF
devices or the LOGIQ  700. However, they can be read on
the LOGIQ  400.
B/W Image & Color Graphics:
S B/W is for graphics to be stored as black and white (less

storage space required).
S Color is for graphics to be stored the same color as they
are displayed (more storage space required).
System ID Entry/Display
The LOGIQ 500 system ID number is assigned at the
factory. A System ID should be unique for a system. A
system ID number can be assigned in the range of 00000 to
16383. This number is used by the system when initializing a
video tape or MOD (image archive option) for image storage.
If there is more than one system at a facility, the ID numbers

should be set the same. A scanner will not write to a tape or
MOD if the media was initialized on a different scanner
(different ID number).
To display or enter a System ID number:
S Select the Set Up Top Menu.

S Select Utility from the Set Up Sub Menu.
Basic Scan 88 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
System ID Entry/Display (cont’d)
Illustration 128. Utility Menu
S Enter number 10 (System ID Entry/Display) and press

Return.
S Enter number 1 (ID Entry) or 2 (ID Display) and press
Return.
S Enter an ID number in the range of 00000–16383 and
press Return. If the ID was displayed, make a mental
note or record the number for future reference.
.
S Press Ctrl, R simultaneously to exit the Utility menu and
return to the previous scan mode.
NOTE: Images which are not stored on the GE LOGIQ 
series systems will not be listed by the patient search
function or displayed on a LOGIQ  series machine.
If there is more than one LOGIQ  400 or LOGIQ  500 in a

facility or group of hospitals, each system should have it’s
own unique System ID number. However, the ID numbers
can be changed to be the same in order to share image
archive disks between systems.
t
Basic Scan 89
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Media Format (DEFF)

The Archive function is located on page two of the Top Menu
display. Use the Top Menu Select key to display page 2
of 2. Press the key above the Archive selection in the Top
Menu to display the Archive sub-menu. The Archive
sub-menu is displayed in Illustration 129.
Archive AutoSeq CINE

Patient Store MO
Search Image Eject
Media DEFF
Search Format
Illustration 129. Archive Sub-Menu
Press the Format rocker switch to select and highlight DEFF

Format in the sub-menu. The following messages are
displayed during the disk initialization and formatting process:
“Do you continue ? (Y/N)”
Insert the disk and press ‘Y’ to continue or ‘N’ to quit. If ‘Y’ is
pressed,
“Initializing now”
appears. The disk format function is in progress.
The MO (disk) ID and System ID will be written on the disk

media. One system can register a maximum of 10,000 disks.
If the number of registered disks is greater than 10,000,

previously registered disk information will be overwritten in
order to register the new disk information.
To avoid confusion, it is essential that care is taken not to
.
attempt image storage to a previous (old) disk who’s MO ID
and System ID is not available (IDs have been deleted from
the media file).
NOTE: The media list on the Media Search Menu contains

both previous (old) and current (new) disk information.
Basic Scan 90 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Disk Verification
In order to protect images from being deleted by other
LOGIQ 500 systems, the disk is always verified by the
system before it can be used.
If the MO disk is not inserted into the drive or an unformatted

MO disk is inserted, the following message is displayed:
“MEDIA IS EITHER UNMOUNTED OR UNFORMATTED.”
When a disk is inserted into a drive, the system first reads the
MO (disk ID) and System ID from the media. These two IDs
are displayed at the bottom of the monitor while the system
verifies that they are registered in the verification list on the
system hard drive.
There are two types of media that would be recognized by

the system:
OWN–SYSTEM MEDIA The disk is registered

(formatted) in this system.
Images may be stored,
recalled or deleted.
OTHER–SYSTEM MEDIA The disk is NOT registered
.
in this system. Images may
only be recalled. They may
NOT be stored or deleted.
NOTE: If an “Other-System Media” disk is inserted into the
drive and the user attempts to store an image, the following
error message is displayed: “Mismatched System ID. Insert
correct media.”.
t
Basic Scan 91
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Storing Images
sub-menu is displayed in Illustration 129 on Basic Scan 90.
Press the Store Image rocker switch to select and highlight

this selection in the sub-menu. The following message is
.
displayed during the storage process:
“In Progress. Please wait.”
NOTE: Storing compressed images takes about 30 seconds

for B/W and 70 seconds for Color. Uncompressed images
take more disk space but only about 30 seconds for color
image storage.
In order to save scan time, the image storage operation is

performed in the “background”. This means the eject button
on the MOD drive will not function. The disk must be ejected
using the MO Eject function from the soft menu.
Basic Scan 92 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Storing Images (cont’d)

The following error messages are displayed if the storage
function cannot be accomplished:
S “Mismatched System ID. Insert correct media.”

The disk is not a registered disk. Images can not be
stored.
S “The MO is full, change MO.”
There is not enough space to store additional images on
the disk. Use a different disk.
S “Media is locked.”
The disk has been write protected. Disable the write
protection or use another disk.
S “Media is either unmounted or unformatted.”
The disk is either not formatted or inserted in the drive.
S “Too much data. Store failed.”
The hard drive capacity of the hard drive to store
additional MOD media search data is full. Please backup
MOD media search data from the hard drive to a separate
MOD before attempting image storage.
Optional Storage method
In addition to the Store Image function in the Soft Menu, the

Record 1 & 2 keys can be programmed in the Set Up/System
Parameter Sub-Menu, page 5.
By selecting Image Archive for the Record1 B&W/Color or

Record2 B&W/Color selection, these keys automatically store
the B/W or Color image to MOD when pressed.
t
Basic Scan 93
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Patient Search
Press the Patient Search rocker switch to highlight this

selection in the sub menu. After a few moments of disk
verification, the Image Archive Patient Search Menu is
displayed on the monitor as shown in Illustration 130 and
“Recall : Input file number” is displayed in the command
region.
Illustration 130. Patient Search Menu
Basic Scan 94 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Search Criteria
A specific MOD can be searched for patient files that meet

certain criteria. The hard disk data base and backup MODs
can also be searched for a list of MODs and files that meet
the criteria listed below.
Patient Name Maximum 29 characters

Patient ID Maximum 14 characters
Date Format specified in System
Parameters page 1.
Criteria Input Region
Both the Patient Search Menu and Media Search Menu have
a criteria input region as shown in Illustration 131.
PT NAME :
PT ID :
DATE (MM / DD / YY) :
Illustration 131. Criteria Input Region
The system defaults to the PT NAME region and that region

is highlighted. Use the keyboard to type in the desired name.
When the name input is complete, press Return or use the
Trackball to move to the PT ID region.
Input the Patient ID using the keyboard. When the ID input is

complete, press Return or use the Trackball to move to the
Date region.
Input the desired date. Press Return or use the Trackball to

move the cursor out of the criteria input region. The search
function starts immediately.
t
Basic Scan 95
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Criteria Input Region (cont’d)
Hints Spaces can be used as a wild card in the date entry. For
example:
MM/ / lists everything for a specific month.

/ /YY lists all in a specific year.
MM/ /YY lists all within a specific month of a
specific year.
If nothing is entered in one or more of the search criteria, a
list of files is displayed that match the remaining criteria
entered.
Searching the MOD
The search function is initiated when the Trackball is used to

move the highlighted cursor out of the criteria area or the
Return key is pressed while in the Date entry area.
In a few moments the first 15 files are displayed on the

monitor. If the search is not complete, the message:
“In Progress, Please wait”
appears at the bottom of the monitor. This message remains

until the search process is totally complete.
Hints In order to perform any other function, the user must wait
until the search is complete or press Ctrl, C simultaneously
to cancel the search function.
If no search criteria was entered by the user, a complete file

listing of the entire MOD is executed. Only 15 files are
displayed at one time on the monitor.
Basic Scan 96 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Patient Search Menu Commands
The commands listed at the bottom of the Patient Search

Menu can be used to manipulate the file information
displayed.
CTRL, N Displays the next page of files.

If the last page is displayed and CTRL, N
is pressed, the first page of the entire list is
displayed.
CTRL, P Displays the previous page of files.
If the first page is displayed and CTRL, P
is pressed, the last page of the entire list is
displayed.
CTRL, X Recalls an Image from MOD.
CTRL, L Locks an image file.
A locked file has an asterisk (*) after it’s
file number and cannot be deleted while
locked.
CTRL, U Unlocks an image file.
CTRL, D Erases an unlocked image file from the list.
A file must be unlocked before being
.
erased.
The image is not deleted from the
affected MO.
NOTE: An image file will still be listed in the Media
Search Menu even though the file has been deleted from
the Patient Search Menu.
CTRL, C Cancels the search process.

CTRL, Q Changes the current mode to the search
criteria input mode.
CLEAR Clears (delete) entered characters.
t
Basic Scan 97
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Image Recall
During the Image Recall process, from the Patient Search
Menu, the message:
“In progress. Please wait.”
is displayed; changing modes and inputting scan parameters

are not allowed.
To quit the recall process, press the Freeze key. The system
returns to the previous menu displayed.
Hints Storage of a recalled image can be accomplished as

previously described. A new image is stored on the MOD
and the original recalled image remains on the MOD
unchanged.
Basic Scan 98 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Media Search
The Image Archive option has the ability to store a file of all
registered (Own–System) disks on the hard drive. This file
consists of MO (disk) ID, Patient Name, Patient ID and Date
information.
The Media Search function can search this data base and
indicate which Disk ID number contains information that
meets the search criteria.
The media search menu is shown in Illustration 132.
Illustration 132. Media Search Menu
t
Basic Scan 99
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Media Search Menu Commands
The commands listed at the bottom of the Media Search

Menu can be used to manipulate the file information
displayed.
CTRL, N Displays the next page of files

CTRL, P Displays the previous page of files
CTRL, C Cancels the search process
CTRL, Q Changes the current mode to the search
criteria input mode
CTRL, B Executes search of media backup MODs
CLEAR Clears (delete) entered characters
Media Search Messages
Messages displayed during the Media Search are similar to

those displayed during Store Image, Image Recall and
Patient Search. These messages are:
“In progress. Please wait.”

“Search failed.”
“MEDIA IS EITHER UNMOUNTED OR UNFORMATTED.”
The following message is displayed when the last page of the

media list is displayed on the monitor:
“There may be file in Backup Media fits this criteria.”
.
The user should then search any Media backup disks for
desired files.
NOTE: When both NTSC and PAL images are stored on the
same MO (disk), the following message is displayed:
“Incompatible image are not listed up.”
Basic Scan 100 t

2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
Hard Disk Capacity
The capacity of the hard drive to store all media information

is limited.
When the hard disk has reached it’s capacity to store media
information, the user is asked to make a Backup MOD. The
following message is displayed:
“Too much data. Store failed.”
The user should perform the Backup function at this time.
Media File Recall
It is important to note that image files CANNOT be recalled

from the media search menu. This function simply gives the
user a list of all MO (disk) ID numbers, Patient Names,
Patient IDs and Dates that meet the search criteria.
t
Basic Scan 101
2177611–100 Rev 0
Archiving Images
MO Eject
To eject a disk from the drive, the user must select MO Eject
from the Archive sub-menu.

display. Press the Top Menu Select key to display page 2 of
2. Press the key above the Archive selection in the Top
Press the rocker switch to select and highlight MO Eject in

the sub-menu. The message:
“Eject MO from the drive now.”
.
is displayed on the monitor. The inserted MO is then ejected
from the drive automatically.
NOTE: After a MO is inserted into the drive and the search

process is executed from the Patient Search Menu or the
Media Search Menu, selecting MO EJECT from the soft
menu is the only method to eject the MO. The MO cannot be
ejected by the eject button on the front of the drive.
Basic Scan 102 t

2177611–100 Rev 0
B-Mode
Introduction
Optimizing the Image
This section describes a typical B-Mode exam. It explains controls and Soft-Menu
selections that can be used to optimize the B-Mode image.
t
B-Mode 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
B-Mode
B-Mode 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
Typical Exam
A typical examination using B-Mode might proceed as
follows:
1. Record exam-related patient information.

2. Verify system setup (probes and presets).
3. Position the patient and the console for optimum
operator and patient comfort.
4. Perform the scan:
S Locate anatomy.
S Perform a detailed examination of the
anatomy/pathology. Optimize parameters for
tissue texture and visible window.
S Add important data to the image such as
annotations and biometry.
S Make measurements and calculations as
necessary.
S Record results such as print hard copies, print
summary reports, Cine review/optimize image
capture, or dynamic recording (VCR).
5. Complete the study:
S Collect all the data.
S Clean and store probes/accessories.
t
B-Mode 3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
B-Mode 4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Control Layout
t
LOGIQ 500 controls are grouped together for optimum
operator convenience.
Mode and Display controls are on the lower right side, while
Acoustic Output and TGC are on the lower left side.
Adjustments Available
Front Panel controls and Soft Menu selections can be used
to optimize the B-Mode image.
The following describes each control and selection available.
B-Mode Key Operation

Pressing the B-Mode key while in a combination of other
modes will result in the following:
CURRENT MODE RESULTANT MODE

B/PD B
B/M B
B/CFM and PD B/CFM
B/CFM and M/CFM B/CFM
B/CFM B
M/CFM B/CFM
t
B-Mode 5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Acoustic Output
Description
Increases or decreases the system acoustic output level or
power during transmit.
Accessing/Changing
There are acoustic output settings, ranging from minimum to
maximum.
To increase acoustic output, turn the Acoustic Output dial

clockwise.
.
To decrease acoustic output, turn the Acoustic Output dial
counterclockwise.
NOTE: Always optimize gain before increasing the acoustic

output.
Benefits
Acoustic output optimizes the image quality thereby
minimizing exposure time to the patient while maximizing
penetration and echo return.
B-Mode 6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
The mid-range acoustic output setting is factory preset to be
a reasonable setting for each type of exam category.
Acoustic output levels are returned to the factory preset value

when changing the following:
S Probe
S Exam category
S New patient
Affects on other controls

Acoustic output and gain interact to affect acoustic output
exposure. To a point, gain can be increased to compensate
for a reduction in acoustic output. This minimizes acoustic
output exposure.
Bioeffect
Acoustic Increasing acoustic output increases Mechanical and
Output Thermal Index values; decreasing acoustic output decreases
Hazard Mechanical and Thermal Index values.
However, the improvement in image quality should allow the

patient exposure time to be decreased.
CAUTION Observe the effect of acoustic output adjustment on the TI/MI

display. Increasing the index values to levels greater than
1.0 should take into account the risk/benefit potential. Refer
to Appendix A, Bioeffects for more information.
t
B-Mode 7
2177611–100 Rev 0
TGC
Description
TGC amplifies returning signals to correct for the
attenuation caused by tissue at increasing depths.
The individual eight slide pots correspond to the
maximum display depths for each probe.
Accessing/Changing
TGC Slide Pot To decrease TGC, move the TGC slide pot to the left.
To increase TGC, move the TGC slide pot to the right.
.
Decrease Increase
NOTE: Active slide pots backlight.
Benefits
TGC balances the image so that the density of echoes is the
same throughout the image.
B-Mode 8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
When display depth is changed, TGC need not be adjusted.
TGC
Slide pot
TGC breakpoints are

proportioned to the Half current depth
depth scale.
Current scan depth
Decrease Increase
± 20 dB
Illustration 133. Time Gain Compensation

In zoom, only the pots that fall within the Zoom ROI are
active and backlit. When exiting zoom, the slide pots are
reproportioned to the selected depth scale.
t
B-Mode 9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Depth
Description
Depth controls the distance over which the B-Mode images
anatomy. Display depth may be changed according to the
anatomical size or to the region of interest. Minimum/
maximum values available depend on the probe. Select from
4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, and 24 cm for the
desired depth.
Accessing/Changing
Turn the rotary encoder to the next depth setting. Imaging
and display parameters adjust automatically.
To reduce depth (look at a shallower image), turn the Depth

rotary encoder clockwise.
To increase depth (look at a deeper image), turn the Depth

rotary encoder counterclockwise.
Benefits
Depth adjusts the field of view. Increase the field of view to
look at larger or deeper structures; decrease the field of view
to look at structures near the skin line.
B-Mode 10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
Depth increments vary by probe. Values may be preset for
each probe. Depth displays on the monitor in centimeters.

After adjusting the depth, it may be necessary to adjust the
TGC, focus, frame rate and edge enhance.
Changing depth while scanning clears Cine memory, but not

Timeline Replay. A bar is displayed in the timeline at which
point it is not possible to scroll past this change.
Bioeffects
Acoustic Increasing the depth tends to decrease the MI and TI
Output because the frame rate slows down.
Hazard
Hints Make sure enough space is left below the anatomy of interest
to demonstrate shadowing or enhancement.
t
B-Mode 11
2177611–100 Rev 0
B/M Gain
Description
Gain increases or decreases the amount of echo information
displayed in an image. It has the effect of brightening or
darkening all displayed echoes at any depth.
Accessing/Changing
.
Turn the B/M Gain control to adjust gain. Gain values
change depending on the probe; they are not associated with
a particular position of the button.
NOTE: It is not possible to change the gain on a frozen

image.
Changing the gain while in another mode does not affect the
B-Mode image gain.
To increase gain, turn the B/M Gain dial clockwise.
To decrease gain, turn the B/M Gain dial counterclockwise.

Doppler.
q
Benefits
Gain allows for the balance of echo contrast so that cystic
structures appear echo-free and reflecting tissue fills in.
Values
Gain displays on the monitor in dB. Gain increments are
available every 2 dB within the range of 0 to 98 dB,
depending on the selected probe.
B-Mode 12 t
2177611–100 Rev 0

After adjusting acoustic output, there may be a need to adjust
the gain. Generally speaking, if acoustic output increases,
the gain may need to decrease; a decrease in acoustic
output may require an increase in gain.
Gain and TGC interact together. Gain changes overall echo

amplification while TGC changes amplification at specific
depths.
Bioeffects
Gain has no affect on Acoustic Output. However, with
increased Gain, the output level can usually be reduced to
produce equivalent image quality.
t
B-Mode 13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Scan Area Size
Description
Widen or narrow the size of the sector to maximize the
image’s field of view for convex and sector probes. Adjusts
color window for linear probes.
Accessing/Changing
To narrow the angle:
S Press Scan Area.

S Move the Trackball toward the left.
To widen the angle:
.
Press Scan Area (if not already activated).
S Move the Trackball toward the right.
NOTE: Pressing Scan Area toggles between size and

steering control.
Benefits
Increase the sector width to see a wide anatomical structure,
decrease the sector width to have a faster frame rate.
Values
Sector/Convex Probe: Range from 10° to full “B” width.
Linear Probe: Range from 10mm to full “B” width.

Increasing sector size decreases the frame rate; decreasing
sector size increases the frame rate.
Bioeffects
Acoustic As the sector width narrows, the TI tends to increase since
Output the target is being hit more often and the MI may decrease
Hazard since the peak power is reduced.
Observe the output display for possible effects.
B-Mode 14 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Scan Area Position
Description
The reduced sector angle can be steered to get more
information without moving the probe. Colored markers
around the image act as guides while steering the reduced
sector angle.
Accessing/Changing
To assign trackball control to the scan area position mode
and steer the angle:
S Press Scan Area (adjust scan area size).

S Press Scan Area again.
S Move the Trackball to the right or left.
Benefits
Allows the movement of a reduced sector angle laterally.
Beneficial in GYN.
Values
Continuous steer within the full maximum probe width.

In scan area position mode, press Scan Area to return
trackball control to the scan area sizing mode.
t
B-Mode 15
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reverse
Description
Reverse controls the horizontal orientation of the image on
the screen. It toggles the left/right orientations of the image
display.
Accessing/Changing
Simply press the Reverse key to toggle image reverse on or
off.
Benefits
The Reverse key allows for changing the orientation of the
image display without physically rotating the probe 180°.
Values
On or Off.
The GE logo at the top of the sector wedge corresponds to

the orientation mark on the probe body. Pressing the
Reverse key flips the image left/right and switches the GE
logo to correspond to the probe mark.
B-Mode 16 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Display Format (Dual)
Description
Each scan mode or combinations of modes can be displayed
in dual format (side by side images). The Left Image and
Right Image keys allow for the dual format to be displayed.
Accessing/Changing
To initiate the dual format display, press the Left Image key.
The current display mode will be reduced to the left half of
the image area.
Press the Right Image key to activate the same image
.
format on the right half of the image area.
NOTE: When the Left Image key and Right Image key are
pressed simultaneously, while in single B-Mode imaging, the
dual live image mode is activated.
Benefits
Allows for viewing two images side-by-side.
Values
System parameter displays relocated for each format.

Other controls only affect the active image.
t
B-Mode 17
2177611–100 Rev 0
Dynamic Range
Description
Dynamic range controls how echo intensities are converted
to shades of gray, thereby creating a range of gray scale that
can be adjusted.
Illustration 134. B-Mode Sub-Menu (Dynamic Range)
Accessing/Changing
Access dynamic range from the B-Mode Sub-Menu page
one. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if
necessary, to display page one.
Each press cycles to the next dynamic range setting. The

selected value is displayed on the Sub-Menu.
To increase the dynamic range, press the top of the Dynamic

Range rocker switch.
To decrease the dynamic range, press the bottom of the

Dynamic Range rocker switch.
Benefits
Dynamic range is useful for optimizing tissue texture to
differentiate between echo levels that are close together.
Dynamic range should be adjusted so that the highest
amplitude edges appear as white while lowest levels (such as
blood) are just visible.
B-Mode 18 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
The settings cycle in 6 dB steps from 30 dB to 78 dB. Use
presets to set the output preferred to any scan mode and
exam combination. Dynamic range levels are returned to the
preset value when changing the following:
S Application
S Exam category
S New patient
Refer to Customizing Your System for preset instructions.
Dynamic range is a pre-processing function.

Dynamic range operates only in real-time, not in freeze, Cine,
Timeline replay, or VCR playback.
t
B-Mode 19
2177611–100 Rev 0
Gray Scale Mapping
Description
Gray scale mapping determines how the echo intensity levels
received are presented as shades of gray.
Illustration 135. B-Mode Sub-Menu (Gray Map)
Accessing/Changing
Access gray scale mapping from the B-Mode Sub-Menu
page one. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if
To change gray scale mapping, press the top or bottom of the

Gray Map rocker switch to select the desired map. The
Benefits
Displays the received echo levels with different weights on
specific levels of gray. For example, a certain gray map may
enhance mid level echoes over a wider range of grays verses
high or low level echoes.
Allows for better differentiation between echo levels through

gray levels displayed.
B-Mode 20 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
There are sixteen selections of Gray Scale Mapping. Gray
Map is a post-processing function.
B1 B6
B2 B7
B3 B8
B4 B9
B5 B10
INPUT LEVEL INPUT LEVEL
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
INPUT LEVEL
Illustration 136. Gray Scale Map Graphs
t
B-Mode 21
2177611–100 Rev 0
Focus Number
Description
Focus number changes the number of focal zones so that the
beam can be tightened or expanded for a specific area. A
graphic caret corresponding to the focal zone position(s)
appears on the right edge of the image.
Illustration 137. B-Mode Sub-Menu (Focus Number)
Accessing/Changing
Access focus number through the B-Mode Sub-Menu page
Each time the Focus Number rocker switch is pressed, the

selection cycles to the next Focus Number setting. The
To increase the number of focal zones, press the top of the

Focus Number rocker switch.
To decrease the number of focal zones, press the bottom of

the Focus Number rocker switch.
Benefits
Focus number optimizes the image by increasing the
resolution for a specific area.
Values
Choose from 1, 2 or 3 focal zones.
Focus Number is a pre-processing function.
B-Mode 22 t
2177611–100 Rev 0

Changing the focus number affects frame rate. The greater
number of focus points, the slower the frame rate.
Bioeffects
Acoustic Adding focal zones tends to increase TI, although it may
Output decrease MI.
Hazard
t
B-Mode 23
2177611–100 Rev 0
Focus Position
Description
Focus Position changes the depth at which the selected
number of focal zones are optimized. All graphic carets
representing focal points will move with a change in focal
position.
Illustration 138. B-Mode Sub-Menu (Focus Positn)
Accessing/Changing
Access focus position through the B-Mode Sub-Menu page
Each press cycles to the next focus position setting.
To move the focal zone shallower, press the top of the Focus
Positn rocker switch.
To move the focal zone deeper, press the bottom of the

Focus Positn rocker switch.
Benefits
Focus position optimizes the image by centering the focal
point(s) to the depth of the area of interest.
Values
Relative to depth of the display (FOV). Focal point indicators
vary with position change up (shallow) or down (deep).
Focus Position is a pre-processing function.
B-Mode 24 t
2177611–100 Rev 0

Changing the focus position affects frame rate. The deeper
the focus, the slower the frame rate.
Bioeffects
Acoustic Moving the focal zone(s) may affect acoustic output
Output requirements because of concentrating on a specific area of
Hazard interest. Acoustic output may be decreased with the front
panel control if the focal zone is properly placed.
t
B-Mode 25
2177611–100 Rev 0
Frame Averaging
Description
Averages previous frames of image data with the current
.
frame. Frame averaging uses more data points to make up
one image. This has the effect of presenting a smoother,
softer image.
NOTE: Not available on Cine replay.
Illustration 139. B-Mode Sub-Menu (Frame Average)
Accessing/Changing
Access frame average from the B-Mode Sub-Menu page two.
Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if necessary, to
display page two.
Each press cycles to the next frame average setting. The

To increase frame averaging, press the top of the Frame

Average rocker switch.
Press the bottom of the Frame Average rocker switch to

decrease frame averaging.
Benefits
Helps to average out brief, sudden changes in echo intensity
information. Could help to filter out low intensity noise.
B-Mode 26 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
Frame average values are off, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. Frame
average values are returned to the preset value when
changing the following:
S Probe
S Exam category
S New Patient
S Application type.
Frame Averaging is a pre-processing selection.
t
B-Mode 27
2177611–100 Rev 0
Penet (Penetration)
Description
In B-Mode, penetration changes the receive filtering to allow
more echoes to pass through.
Illustration 140. B-Mode Sub-Menu (Penet.)
Accessing/Changing
Access penetration from the B-Mode Sub-Menu page two.
display page two.
Press the top of the Penet. rocker switch to activate

penetration.
To deactivate, press the top of the Penet. rocker switch

again.
Benefits
Allows for an increase in echo intensity without changing
gain, TGC or acoustic output.
Values
On or Off. Penetration is a pre-processing selection.

Acoustic output, gain and TGC may be able to be reduced
due to increased penetration.
B-Mode 28 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Image Softener
Description
B-Mode images may be adjusted for the amount of
smoothing applied.
Illustration 141. B-Mode Sub-Menu (Image Softner)
Accessing/Changing
Access Image Softener from the B-Mode Sub-Menu page
two. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if necessary,
to display page two.
To toggle the image softener on or off, press the bottom of

the Image Softner rocker switch. Each press cycles the
image softener on or off.
Benefits
Provides a smoother homogenous image display.
Values
On or Off.
Image Softener is a pre-processing function.
t
B-Mode 29
2177611–100 Rev 0
Color
Description
Color allows for enabling B-Mode image colorization.
Illustration 142. B-Mode Sub-Menu (Color)
Accessing/Changing
Access B-Mode color from the B-Mode Sub-Menu page two.
display page two.
Press the top of the Color rocker switch to activate B-Mode

color.
To deactivate B-Mode color, press the top of the Color rocker

switch again.
Benefits
Displaying the gray scale as shades of color may allow for
improved differentiation between echo levels.
Values
On or Off.
The B-Mode color presented is a selection in the

Set Up/Custom Display menu page 10. There are six color
choices.
B Color is a post-processing function.
B-Mode 30 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Biopsy Lines
Description
This selection enables any electronic biopsy guideline
available for the active probe.
Illustration 143. B-Mode Sub-Menu (Biopsy Lines)
Accessing/Changing
Access biopsy lines from the B-Mode Sub-Menu page two.
display page two.
Press the top of the Biopsy Line rocker switch to enable the
guidelines.
To disable the guidelines, press the top of the Biopsy Line

rocker switch again.
DANGER When the biopsy guidelines are displayed, the message:
“Confirm BX type of Bracket”
is displayed at the bottom of the screen with the angle

selected in the Custom Display Menu page 1.
.
Ensure that the (M)BX type selected for each probe in each
exam category for each preset is the same as the angle
selected on the biopsy guide.
NOTE: See Customize 24 or Biopsy 7 for specifics on

availability of biopsy guide angles.
t
B-Mode 31
2177611–100 Rev 0
Benefits
Electronic biopsy guide zone show the expected needle path
during insertion.
DANGER Failure to match the preset to the guide may cause the
needle to track a path outside the displayed zone.
It is extremely important that when using the adjustable angle

biopsy guides, the preset displayed on the screen (which is
selected on Custom Display page 1) matches the angle set
on the guide.
.
Values
On or Off.
Press the Measurement key once to display the integrated

biopsy depth cursor while the guidelines are present. Use
the Trackball to position the depth marker.
B-Mode 32 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Color Tag
Description
Color tag enables the colorization of a specific gray scale
level range. This causes the specified gray levels to be
displayed as a predetermined color in the B-Mode image.
Illustration 144. B-Mode Sub-Menu (Color Tag)
Accessing/Changing
Access color tag from the B-Mode Sub-Menu page three.
display page three.
Press the bottom of the Color Tag rocker switch to enable

the B-Mode color tagging.
To disable the color tag function, press the bottom of the

Color Tag rocker switch again.
Benefits
Allows for the quick recognition of specific gray levels by
colorization.
Values
On or Off.
The color and tagging range presented is a selection in the

Set Up/Custom Display menu page 10.
Color Tag is a post-processing function.
t
B-Mode 33
2177611–100 Rev 0
Tag Position
Description
Tag Position allows for the movement of the specified color
tag range throughout the gray scale displayed.
Illustration 145. B-Mode Sub-Menu (Tag Positn)
Accessing/Changing
Access tag position from the B-Mode Sub-Menu page three.
display page three.
If the Color Tag selection is not enabled when Tag Positn is

selected, Color Tag is automatically activated.
Press the top of the Tag Positn rocker switch to move the
color tag up the gray scale range.
To move the color tag down the gray scale range, press the
bottom of the Tag Positn rocker switch.
Benefits
Allows for setting the color tag to the desired level of gray
scale colorization.
Values
Move the color tag up or down the gray scale. Color and size
of the tag are determined in the Set Up/Custom Display
menu page 10.
Tag Position is a post-processing function.
B-Mode 34 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Image Rotate
Description
.
Rotates the single real-time or zoomed B-Mode image in 90 _
increments.
NOTE: Linear probe images do not rotate.
Illustration 146. B-Mode Sub-Menu (Image Rotatn)
Accessing/Changing
Access image rotation from the B-Mode Sub-Menu page four.
display page four.
The selected value is displayed on the Sub-Menu.
To rotate the image clockwise, press the top of the Image

Rotatn rocker switch.
To rotate the image counterclockwise, press the bottom of the

Image Rotatn rocker switch.
Benefits
Orient image display for easy reference.
t
B-Mode 35
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
The image rotates in 90_ increments in a clockwise and
counterclockwise direction.
Image Rotation is a post-processing function.
CAUTION When reading a rotated image, be careful to observe the

probe orientation to avoid possible confusion over scan
direction or right/left image reversal.
B-Mode 36 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Rejectn (Rejection)
Description
Rejection allows for the elimination of low level echoes from
the display. This is generally used to clear noise out of
vessels or cysts.
Illustration 147. B-Mode Sub-Menu (Rejectn)
Accessing/Changing
Access Rejection from the B-Mode Sub-Menu page four.
display page four.
Press the top of the Rejectn rocker switch to increase the

gray level rejection value displayed.
To decrease the gray level rejection value displayed, press

the bottom of the Rejectn rocker switch.
Benefits
Allows for the elimination from the display image of low level
echoes caused by noise.
t
B-Mode 37
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
Off and 2 through 40 in increments of 2.
Rejection is a post-processing function.

Rejection affects real-time imaging, frozen, Cine or VCR
playback images.
B-Mode 38 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
B Edge Enhance
Description
B edge enhance brings out subtle tissue differences and
boundaries by enhancing the gray scale differences
corresponding to the edges of structures.
Illustration 148. B-Mode Sub-Menu (Edge Enhance)
Accessing/Changing
Access B edge enhance from the B-Mode Sub-Menu page
four. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if
necessary, to display page four.
Each press cycles to the next edge enhance setting. The

To increase edge enhancement, press the top of the Edge

Enhance rocker switch.
To decrease edge enhancement, press the bottom of the

Edge Enhance rocker switch.
Benefits
Edge enhance modifies the B-Mode image by accentuating
the interfaces between organs or vessels.
t
B-Mode 39
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
The four selections are Off, Low, Mid and High. Edge
enhance levels are returned to the preset value when
changes are made to the following:
S Application
S Exam category
S New patient
Edge Enhance is a pre-processing function.

Edge Enhance operates in real-time only, not in Freeze,
Cine, or VCR playback.
B-Mode 40 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Doppler
Introduction
Activating Doppler Mode
Doppler Optimization
t
This section describes the Doppler capabilities of the LOGIQ 500. It outlines a
typical Doppler exam for vascular studies. The controls and Soft-Menu selections
used to optimize a Doppler study are explained.
t
Doppler 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Doppler Mode
Doppler 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
Typical Use
In Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW or PWD) Mode, energy is
transmitted from the ultrasound probe into the patient, as in
B-Mode. However, the received echoes are processed to
extract the difference in frequency between the transmitted
and received signals. Differences in frequencies can be
caused by moving objects in the path of the ultrasound
signal, such as red blood cells. The resultant signals are
presented audibly through the system speakers and
graphically on the system display. The X axis of the graph
represents time while the Y axis represents the shift in
frequency. The Y axis can also be calibrated to represent
velocity in either a forward or reverse direction.
PW Doppler is typically used for displaying the speed,

direction, and spectral content of blood flow at selected
anatomical sites.
PW Doppler operates in two different modes: conventional

PW and High Pulse Repetition Frequency (HPRF).
PW Doppler can be combined with B-Mode for rapidly

selecting the anatomical site for PW Doppler examinations.
This is described under B/M-Mode operation. The site where
PW Doppler data is derived appears graphically on the
B-Mode image (Sample Volume Gate). The site can be
moved anywhere within the B-Mode image.
t
Doppler 3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
PW Doppler Display
A typical Doppler display appears in the Reading the Display
section of the Basic Scan chapter. Time zero (the start of the
trace) appears on the left side of the graph. As time
progresses, the trace moves to the right. The baseline of the
graph (representing zero velocity, zero frequency shift or no
detected flow) appears as a solid line running horizontally
across the display. By convention, movement toward the
probe is positive and movement away from the probe is
negative. Positive frequencies or velocities appear above the
baseline. Negative frequencies or velocities appear below
the baseline.
Typically, blood flow is not uniform but is composed of a mix

of blood cells moving at different velocities and in different
directions. Thus, the display is composed of a spectrum as
gray scale values. Strong signals are displayed as bright
shades of gray while weak signals are displayed as darker
shades.
Information about the Doppler display is automatically written

on the screen and updated when scanning parameters are
changed.
The following can be used:
S Pulsed Wave (PW) Doppler

S Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler
S CW Non-Imaging Doppler
This chapter includes:
S A discussion of PW and Imaging and Non-Imaging CW

Doppler.
S Accessing Pulsed and Continuous Wave Doppler
S Optimizing the Doppler spectrum.
Doppler 4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Definition
Allows examination of blood flow data selectively from a
small region called the sample volume. Choose a particular
location for the sample volume; however, the range of
velocities accurately evaluated is limited due to aliasing that
occurs at very high velocities.
Frequencies Used
For reference, Doppler frequencies (with penetration On or
Off) are shown according to probe in the table below.
PROBE FREQUENCY (MHz)

ON OFF
B510 4.0 5.0
C364/CBF 2.5 3.3
C386 2.5 3.3
C551/CAE 4.0 5.0
C721 5.0 6.6
E721/MTZ 5.0 6.6
I739 5.0 6.6
546L 4.0 5.0
739L 5.0 6.6
LA39 5.0 6.6
L764/LH 5.0 6.6
P509 4.0 5.0
S316/UC 2.5 2.8
S317 2.5 2.8
S220/W 2.2 2.5
S222 2.0 2.5
S611 4.0 5.0
T739 5.0 6.6
Table 15. Doppler Frequency
t
Doppler 5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
Typical exam protocol

A typical examination using PW Doppler Mode might proceed
as follows:
1. Connect the appropriate probes. Refer to Probes for

more probe information.
2. Position the patient for the examination.
3. Press New Patient. Enter the appropriate patient
data using the appropriate exam category and
worksheet. Refer to the Beginning an Exam section
of the Basic Scan chapter.
4. Locate the anatomy to be examined. Get a good
B-Mode image. Refer to B-Mode for more
information.
5. Engage the pulsed wave Doppler spectrum by
pressing PD.
6. Position the sample volume cursor by moving the
Trackball left and right. Position the sample volume
gate by moving the Trackball up and down.
7. Press PD a second time to display the B-Mode plus
spectrum format.
8. Optimize the PW Doppler spectrum, as necessary.
Refer to the Optimizing the Spectrum section of this
chapter for more information.
9. Sample along the whole length of the vessel. Make
sure that the probe is parallel to flow. Listen and look
when positioning the sample volume cursor.
Doppler 6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
Typical exam protocol (cont’d)

10. Press Freeze to hold the trace in memory and stop
imaging.
11. Perform measurements and calculations, as
necessary. Refer to the applications chapters in this
manual.
12. Record results by pressing Record 1 or Record 2,
depending on the setup of the recording devices. The
system transfers the displayed image to the selected
output device.
13. Press Freeze to resume imaging.
14. Repeat the above procedure until all relevant flow
sites have been examined.
15. Replace the probe in its respective holder.
t
Doppler 7
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
High PRF
High Pulse Repetition Frequency (HPRF) is a special
operating mode of PW Doppler. In conventional mode, a
single energy pulse is used to obtain signals for each line in
the PW spectrum. In HPRF mode, multiple energy pulses
are used. This allows higher velocities to be detected without
aliasing artifacts. HPRF mode is used when detected
velocities exceed the processing capabilities of the currently
selected PW Doppler scale or when the selected anatomical
site is too deep for the selected PW Doppler scale.
HPRF is enabled when operating in PW Doppler Mode and

the velocity scale is increased beyond a set value. The
selection on page three of the Doppler Sub-Menu can be
used to override this automatic switching to HPRF mode.
When HPRF is active, three (3) sample volume gates appear

along the Doppler Mode cursor. Doppler information can be
.
received from any of the three sample volume gates. The
Doppler signals from all three gates are added together and
displayed in one spectrum.
NOTE: Ensure that only one gate overlays a blood vessel at

a time. Otherwise, signals from more than one flow area are
superimposed.
Refer to Doppler 48 on how to enable/disable the HPRF

function.
Doppler 8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
Continuous Wave Doppler
Definition
Allows examination of blood flow data all along the Doppler
Mode cursor rather than from any specific depth. Gather
.
samples along the entire Doppler beam for rapid scanning of
heart. Range gated CW allows information to be gathered at
higher velocity.
NOTE: If split crystal is activated, CW is automatically

selected.
There are two CW Doppler operating modes: Steerable and

Non-Imaging.
Steerable Allows viewing of the B-Mode image to position the Doppler

cursor to the area of interest while viewing the Doppler
spectrum (shown below the B-Mode image) and listening to
the Doppler audio signal.
Works with sector probes only.
Non-Imaging Provides only Doppler Spectrum and Audio for

ascending/descending aortic arch, other hard-to-get-to
spaces or higher velocities.
Requires a single CWD probe and connection.
Works with CWD probes only (CWD2, CWD5).
t
Doppler 9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
Typical exam protocols
Steerable A typical examination using CW Doppler Mode might proceed

as follows:
1. Get a good B-Mode image.

2. Press CWD. Position the sample volume cursor on
the full B-Mode image.
3. Engage the CW Doppler spectrum by pressing CWD
again. Doppler audio can now be heard.
4. Reposition the sample volume cursor on the reduced
B-Mode image, if necessary, by moving the Trackball
left and right.
5. Optimize the CW Doppler spectrum, as necessary.
6. Perform measurements, as necessary. Refer to the
applications chapters in this manual.
B-Mode update/pause increases the CW display quality.
Non-Imaging A typical examination using Non-Imaging CW Doppler Mode

might proceed as follows:
1. Connect the non-imaging probe.

2. Activate CWD Probe by pressing the Single CWD key
under Probe Select.
3. Engage the Doppler spectrum by pressing CWD.
Doppler audio can now be heard.
4. Adjust the CW Doppler spectrum, as necessary.
5. Perform measurements, as necessary.
Doppler 10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Activating PW Doppler Mode

To activate PW Doppler Mode, press the PD key. The key
backlights while in PW Doppler Mode. The Doppler sample
line and cursor are displayed.
.
Press PD a second time and the Doppler spectrum displays
along with the B-Mode image.
NOTE: Doppler display formats available depend on the

presettable parameters found in the Set Up/Custom Display
menus.
The PW Doppler Sub-Menu appears:
Illustration 149. PW Doppler Sub-Menu (Page 1)
Position and size the sample volume to get a spectrum

display. Use the system’s audio to listen for when the sample
volume is positioned over an area of flow.
t
Doppler 11
2177611–100 Rev 0
Activating PW Doppler Mode (cont’d)

Access pages 2 and 3 of the PW Doppler Sub-Menu by
pressing the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch.
Refer to the Optimizing the Spectrum section of this chapter

for more information on these softkey functions.
To exit PW Doppler Mode, press B-Mode.
Uses
.
PW Doppler is used to examine blood flow information in the
vessels of the legs, arms, abdomen, heart and neck.
NOTE: The Set Up/Preset Program allows the types of

B/Doppler display formats to be chosen. Each time the PD
(or CWD) key is pressed, it cycles to the next display format
enabled in the Set Up/Preset Program.
Doppler 12 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Activating CW Doppler Mode

To activate CW Doppler Mode, press the CWD key, as
necessary. The key backlights while in CW Doppler Mode.
The Doppler spectrum displays along with the B-Mode image

(Steerable CW Doppler, NOT Non-Imaging CW Doppler).
The CW Doppler Sub-Menu appears:
Illustration 152. CW Doppler Sub-Menu (Page 1)
Access pages 2 and 3 of the CW Doppler Sub-Menu by

pressing the Sub Menu Select rocker switch.
t
Doppler 13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Activating CW Doppler Mode (cont’d)
Refer to the Optimizing the Spectrum section of this chapter

for more information on these softkey functions.
To exit CW Doppler Mode, press B-Mode.
Doppler 14 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
In order to maximize the quality of information when
operating in Doppler Modes, both the control adjustments
.
and scan technique must be considered. This section begins
with a detailed description of each control associated with
Doppler data acquisition.
NOTE: This section discusses the Pulsed Doppler controls

and menu selections. If Continuous Wave Doppler is being
used the keyboard controls are the same. Selections found
in the CWD soft menu function the same as a like selection in
the PWD soft menu.
t
Doppler 15
2177611–100 Rev 0
Control Layout
Doppler Mode controls discussed in this section are shown
below:
↑ V
↓ m/s "❙A
Illustration 155. Doppler/CFM Controls
These functions are specific to pulsed or continuous wave

Doppler when that mode is active, as well as color flow.
If the color flow mode is enabled while in Doppler, the Select

key switches the Doppler/CFM controls between Doppler and
CFM.
Doppler 16 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Acoustic Output
Description
Increases or decreases the system acoustic output level or
transmit power during B-Mode and Doppler transmission.
Accessing/Changing
There are acoustic output settings, ranging from minimum to
maximum.
To increase the acoustic output, turn the Acoustic Output

dial clockwise.
.
To decrease acoustic output, turn the Acoustic Output dial
counterclockwise.
NOTE: Always optimize Doppler or B/M gain before

increasing acoustic output.
Benefits
Acoustic Output optimizes the image quality, thereby
minimizing exposure time to the patient while maximizing
penetration and echo return.
Values
The mid-range acoustic output setting is factory preset to be
a reasonable setting for each type of exam category.
Acoustic output levels are returned to the factory preset value

when changing the following:
S Probe
S Exam category
S New patient
t
Doppler 17
2177611–100 Rev 0

Acoustic output and gain interact to affect acoustic output
exposure. To a point, gain can be increased to compensate
for a reduction in acoustic output. This minimizes acoustic
output exposure.
Bioeffects
Acoustic Increasing acoustic output increases Mechanical and
Output Thermal Index values; decreasing acoustic output decreases
Hazard Mechanical and Thermal Index values.
However, the improvement in image quality should allow the

patient exposure time to be decreased.
CAUTION Observe the effect of acoustic output adjustment on the TI/MI

display. Increasing the index values to levels greater than
1.0 should take into account the risk/benefit potential. Refer
to Appendix A, Bioeffects for more information.
Doppler 18 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
B-Mode Controls
Description
Several Front Panel controls affect the B-Mode portion of the
display and not the echoes in the Doppler spectrum.
These are:
S TGC
S Depth
S B/M Gain
S Scan Area Size
S Scan Area Position
S
.
Reverse
S Dual Format Keys (L/R)
NOTE: If the scan area size is reduced and the position

changed, the Doppler cursor will follow the position change to
stay within the displayed scan area.
See B-Mode for details on B-Mode controls.
t
Doppler 19
2177611–100 Rev 0
M/D Cursor
Description
The M/D Cursor assigns trackball control to the B-Mode
Doppler cursor. It also displays and erases the theta angle
correction cursor.
Accessing/Changing
Pressing PD will automatically assign trackball control to the
B-Mode Doppler cursor.
To terminate trackball control of the M/D cursor, press SET.
To reactivate trackball control of the Doppler cursor, press

M/D Cursor.
NOTE: Pressing the M/D Cursor key while the trackball is

actively controlling the B-Mode Doppler cursor will display the
theta angle correction cursor. (Refer to Theta Angle
Correction in this chapter for more information.)
Benefits
Allows for repositioning of the Doppler cursors after the
trackball has been assigned a different function.
Values
On or Off.
The Doppler cursor displays in the center of the screen or

changes to the active color if already present.

Terminates trackball control from its current function and
assigns it to the Doppler cursor.
When angle correction is active, the M/D cursor returns angle

correction to zero degrees.
Doppler 20 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Audio Volume
Description
Controls Doppler audio output.
.
Accessing/Changing
NOTE: The system automatically unwraps aliased audio.
Pressing PD automatically activates Doppler Audio.
The volume is initially set to the Audio Volume % chosen in

the Set Up/Custom Display page 12.
To increase volume, turn the Audio Volume knob clockwise.
To decrease volume, turn the Audio Volume knob

counterclockwise.
CAUTION Doppler audio sounds change rapidly, often abruptly.

Increase the volume in small steps to avoid startling the
patient.
Benefits
An audio representation of the flow within a vessel can be
used before activating the spectral trace or CWD.
Values
The volume increases/decreases logarithmically, with positive
flow through the right channel and negative flow through the
left channel.
t
Doppler 21
2177611–100 Rev 0
Doppler Spectral Gain
Description
Amplifies the overall strength of the echoes being processed
in the Doppler spectral trace.
Accessing/Changing
Gain (DG#) values are shown on the left side of the display.
The initial gain value is selected in the Set Up/Custom
Display menu page 4.
To increase gain, turn the Gain knob clockwise.
To decrease gain, turn the Gain knob counterclockwise.
Benefits
Fills in or cleans out spectrum information.
Values
0 to 32 in increments of 2.
Usually set in the middle of the range.
Bioeffect
Doppler spectral gain has no affect on acoustic output.
However, with increased Doppler spectral gain, the output
level can usually be reduced to produce an equivalent
spectrum image quality.
Doppler 22 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Theta Angle Correction
Description
Estimates the flow velocity in a direction at an angle to the
Doppler vector by computing the angle between the Doppler
q vector and the flow to be measured.
Estimated flow velocity equals the velocity toward the probe

divided by the COSq.
PW Doppler CW Doppler
Angle Correction
Cursor
Illustration 156. Phased Array Doppler Display with Angle Correct
Accessing/Changing
Flow towards the probe is mapped above the baseline of the
spectral display and left speaker.
To adjust the angle clockwise relative to the probe face, turn

θ Angle clockwise.
To adjust the angle counterclockwise relative to the probe

face, turn θ Angle counterclockwise.
Press M/D Cursor to quickly return the angle correction to

zero degrees and erase the angle correction cursor from the
display.
t
Doppler 23
2177611–100 Rev 0
Benefits
Optimizes the accuracy of the flow velocity. This is especially
useful in vascular studies where it is necessary to measure
velocity.
Values
For optimum velocity measurements, the angle of incidence
should be less than 20° for cardiac applications. The usual
setting is between 45° and 65° for vascular applications.
1° increments from 0° to 80°.
Doppler 24 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
CFM/Spectrum Invert
Description
Vertically inverts the spectrum trace without affecting the
↑ baseline position.
↓
Accessing/Changing
To invert the spectrum trace, press CFM/Spect Invert.
Forward flow (F) and Reverse flow (R) signs appear on the
velocity scale which reverse when the spectrum is inverted.
.
Positive velocities go to the bottom of the spectrum and to
the right speaker. A spectral invert graphic appears on the
display to indicate that the spectrum has been inverted.
NOTE: Inverting the spectrum does not affect the baseline

position.
Benefits
If the blood flow is still moving in the same direction after
changing the probe angle, the Doppler information may be
reversed. It is easy to invert the spectrum instead of
reversing the probe orientation.

The polarity of the audio Doppler is also reversed.
t
Doppler 25
2177611–100 Rev 0
Velocity Scale
Description
Adjusts the velocity scale to accommodate faster/slower
blood flow velocities. Adjust the size of the presentation to
show a low velocity scale for low flow and a higher velocity
scale for high flow.
Velocity scale determines PRF. If the velocity goes off the

scale (outside the limits of pulsed Doppler), high PRF
activates and samples up to three gates.
The display updates velocity scale parameters after adjusting

the velocity scale.
Accessing/Changing
To increase the velocity scale, press the top of the Velocity
Scale rocker switch until reaching the desired scale.
.
To lower the velocity scale, press the bottom of the Velocity
NOTE: A bar is inserted in the display with each velocity

scale change that cannot be measured across velocity scale
changes.
Doppler 26 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Benefits
Blood flow information is not cut off due to the effect of
aliasing.
Values
Velocity range is in meters per second or KHz, depending
upon preset velocity scale units.
Probe PW Velocity Steerable CW Non-Imaging

Freq. Scale Range Velocity Scale CW Velocity
Range Scale Range
2.0 50 cm/sec –
7.0 m/sec
2.5 50 cm/sec – 1 m/sec –
4.5 m/sec 7.0 m/sec
3.3 12 cm/sec –
3.47 m/sec
5.0 6.0 cm/sec – 25 cm/sec – 25 cm/sec –
1.76 m/sec 3 m/sec 3 m/sec
6.25 5.0 cm/sec –
2.0 m/sec
7.5 5.0 cm/sec –
1.5 m/sec
Table 16. Velocity Scale Ranges
t
Doppler 27
2177611–100 Rev 0

When raising the velocity scale, the spectrum waveform
decreases in size; when lowering the velocity scale, the
spectrum waveform increases in size. Changes in the
spectrum are relative to changes in the velocity scale, that is,
it sizes accordingly.
When adjusting the velocity scale, Cine memory is cleared.
.
Velocity scale units change with sample volume size, depth,
frame rate and Doppler wall filter.
NOTE: The velocity scale changes when angle correct is

changed.
Bioeffects
Acoustic Adjusting this control may cause minor changes in acoustic
Output output. Observe the output display for possible effects.
Hazard
Doppler 28 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Baseline Shift
Description
Changes the spectrum baseline to accommodate higher
velocity blood flow. Minimizes aliasing by displaying a
greater range of forward flow than reverse flow. With
baseline shift, higher velocities in one direction can be
displayed without clipping off the peaks.
Accessing/Changing
Baseline shift adjusts the point in the spectrum where the
velocity trace is at zero. The default baseline can be chosen
in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 14.
To shift the baseline up, press the top of the Baseline Shift
rocker switch.
To shift the baseline down, press the bottom of the Baseline

Shift rocker switch.
The baseline is displayed as a solid line running across the

spectrum. The baseline is raised and lowered in equal
increments, depending on the current Doppler scale factor.
The control does not wrap when the maximum baseline shift
(in either direction) has been reached. This is a
non-repeating key.
Benefits
Unwraps the alias. Rearranges the velocity scale display
without changing the velocity scale. Readjusts the positive
and negative velocities limit without changing the total
velocity range.
Values
–75%, –50%, –25%, 0, +25%, +50%, and +75%, with zero
being the center of the display, +100% being the top edge of
the display and –100% being the bottom edge of the display.
t
Doppler 29
2177611–100 Rev 0
B Pause
Description
Freezes the B-Mode image while keeping the Doppler
spectrum display active.
Accessing/Changing
To pause the B-Mode image, press B Pause. The key
backlights fully.
To cancel B-Mode image freezing, press B Pause. The key

semi-backlights.
Benefits
The spectrum tracks the Doppler Sample Volume Gate in
real-time.
.
B-Mode pause increases the Doppler display quality.
NOTE: When pressing Freeze while in B Pause and then

unfreezing the image, a preset selection will determine if the
B Pause key is released or the image remains in B Pause.
This is determined by the Set Up/Custom Display menu
page 11 “Auto B Melt at Unfreeze”.
The echo level measurement is not available in B Pause. It

is only available on a frozen image.
Doppler 30 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Dynamic Range
Description
can be adjusted. (Also found in the CWD soft menu.)
Illustration 157. PW Doppler Mode Sub-Menu (Dynamic Range)
Accessing/Changing
Access dynamic range from the PWD Sub-Menu page one.
display page one.


To decrease the dynamic range, press the bottom of the

Benefits
t
Doppler 31
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
The settings cycle in 6 dB steps from 18 dB to 48 dB. Set the
default value for PWD dynamic range in the Set Up/Custom
Display menu page 4. Dynamic range levels are returned to
the preset value when changing the following:
S Application
S Exam category
S New patient.

Dynamic range operates only in real-time, not in freeze, Cine,
Timeline replay, or VCR playback.
Doppler 32 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Slant Scan
Description
Slant Scan in Doppler imaging is used to control the position
of the Doppler cursor for LINEAR PROBES ONLY. (Also
found in the CWD soft menu.)
Illustration 158. PW Doppler Mode Sub-Menu (Slant Scan)
Accessing/Changing
Access slant scan from the PWD Sub-Menu page one.
display page one.
Press the Slant Scan rocker switch to cycle through the left,
center or right display of the cursor. The selected value is
displayed on the Sub-Menu.
+ (Left) 0 (Center) – (Right)
Illustration 159. Slant Scan Cursor Selections
t
Doppler 33
2177611–100 Rev 0
Accessing/Changing
Illustration 160. B-Mode Display with Slant Selection
When Slant Scan is selected while in a B-Mode display, the

B-Mode is not effected. Only the Dopplere cursor will show
at a slant.
Benefits
Provides a Doppler cursor suitable for linear probe operation.
Values
+, 0 and –.
Slant Scan is a pre-processing selection.
Doppler 34 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Wall Filter
Description
Removes the low level, low frequency Doppler signal caused
by movement of the vessel walls. (Also found in the CWD
soft menu.)
Illustration 161. PW Doppler Mode Sub-Menu (Wall Filter)
Accessing/Changing
Access wall filter from the PWD Sub-Menu page one. Press
the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if necessary, to display
page one.
Each press of the rocker switch cycles to the next wall filter
setting. The selected value is displayed on the Sub-Menu.
To increase wall filter, press the top of the Wall Filter rocker
switch. To decrease wall filter, press the bottom of the Wall
Filter rocker switch.
The wall filter cutoff value displays in cm/s on the softkey,

depending on the preset selection.
The Wall Filter value can be displayed as velocity or

frequency. This selection is made in Setup/Custom Display
page 12.
t
Doppler 35
2177611–100 Rev 0
Benefits
Eliminates unnecessary information. Filters out low level
noise above and below the baseline so it cannot be seen or
heard on the spectrum.
Values
Values for wall filtering can be displayed as velocity (cm/sec).
This choice is made in the Set Up/Custom Display Menu
(presets) and is probe/velocity dependent.
1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 5.0, 7.0, 10, 15 or 20 cm/sec.

The values could go as high as 50 cm/s depending on the
probe and the velocity scale.
Wall Filter is a pre-processing function.

Wall filter changes with velocity scale.
Doppler 36 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Sample Volume Length
Description
Changes the size of the sample volume gate length.
Illustration 162. PW Doppler Mode Sub-Menu (S.V. Length)
Accessing/Changing
Access sample volume length from the PWD Sub-Menu page
Each press of the rocker switch cycles to the next sample

volume gate size setting. The selected value is displayed on
the Sub-Menu.
To increase the gate size, press the top of the S. V. Length

rocker switch.
.
To decrease the gate size, press the bottom of the S. V.
Length rocker switch.
NOTE: Adjustments to the sample volume gate size are

made from the center point of the sample volume position. A
larger gate will increase the spectral broadening affect to the
spectrum.
Benefits
A smaller gate produces accurate sampling results because it
is more sensitive. The gate can be enlarged if there are
problems hearing the Doppler audio or for sampling large
chambers.
t
Doppler 37
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14 and 16 mm.
Sample Volume Length is a pre-processing function.
Bioeffects
Acoustic Adjusting this control may cause minor changes in acoustic
Output output. Observe the output display for possible effects.
Hazard
Doppler 38 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Sweep Speed
Description
.
Sweep Speed changes the speed at which the timeline is
updated. (Also found in the CWD soft menu.)
NOTE: Time or distance measurements are not allowed

across sweep speed changes.
Illustration 163. PW Doppler Mode Sub-Menu (Sweep Speed)
Accessing/Changing
Access sweep speed from the PWD Sub-Menu page two.
display page two.
Each press of the rocker switch cycles to the next sweep

speed setting. The selected value is displayed on the
Sub-Menu.
To increase sweep speed, press the top of the Sweep Speed

rocker switch.
To decrease sweep speed, press the bottom of the Sweep

Speed rocker switch.
Benefits
Speed up or slow down the spectrum for analysis to record
more or fewer occurrences over time.
t
Doppler 39
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
Slow (16 sec), Mid (8 sec), Fast (4 sec) and Very-Fast (2sec).
Very-Fast is a function in Doppler mode only.
Sweep Speed is a pre-processing function.

If more cardiac cycles are seen, the spectrum appears
smaller; if less are seen, the spectrum appears larger or
more spread out.
Doppler 40 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Penet. (Penetration)
Description
Penetration can be increased by lowering the operating
frequency of the active probe.
Illustration 164. PW Doppler Mode Sub-Menu (Penet.)
Accessing/Changing
Access penetration from the PWD Sub-Menu page two.
display page two.

penetration.

again.
Benefits
Allows for a slight increase in penetration without changing
gain or acoustic output.
Values
On or Off.
Penetration is a pre-processing function.

t
Doppler 41
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Decreasing the probe transmitting frequency, without
decreasing acoustic output, tends to increase Mechanical
and Thermal Index values. However, improved penetration
should allow for decreasing patient exposure time.
Probe Frequencies
For reference, Doppler frequencies (with penetration On or
Off) are shown according to probe in the table below.

ON OFF
B510 4.0 5.0
C364/CBF 2.5 3.3
C386 2.5 3.3
C551/CAE 4.0 5.0
C721 5.0 6.6
E721/MTZ 5.0 6.6
I739 5.0 6.6
546L 4.0 5.0
739L 5.0 6.6
LA39 5.0 6.6
L764/LH 5.0 6.6
P509 4.0 5.0
S316/UC 2.5 2.8
S317 2.5 2.8
S220/W 2.2 2.5
S222 2.0 2.5
S611 4.0 5.0
T739 5.0 6.6
Table 17. Doppler/CFM Frequency
Doppler 42 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Auto Trace
Description
Automatically traces (real-time) the parameter selected in the
Set Up/Custom Display Menu page 12. The choices are
Peak, Floor, Mean, and Mode. (Also found in the CWD soft
menu.)
Illustration 165. PW Doppler Mode Sub-Menu (Auto Trace)
Accessing/Changing
Access auto trace from the PWD Sub-Menu page two. Press
page two.
To enable auto trace, press the bottom of the Auto Trace

rocker switch.
To disable Auto Trace, press the bottom of the Auto Trace

Use the Set Up/Preset Program Top Menu to select the

parameter to be traced.
t
Doppler 43
2177611–100 Rev 0
Benefits
No need to manually trace a selected value.
Values
On or Off.
Auto Trace is a post-processing function.
Hints The best Doppler data is collected when parallel to flow, with
orientation also parallel to the anatomic target; whereas, the
best B-Mode image data is collected perpendicular to the
anatomic target. Therefore, there usually is not both an ideal
B-Mode image and ideal Doppler data simultaneously.
Doppler 44 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Color
Description
Color allows for enabling pulsed wave Doppler Mode image
colorization. (Also found in the CWD soft menu.)
Illustration 166. PW Doppler Mode Sub-Menu (Color)
Accessing/Changing
Access color from the PWD Sub-Menu page two. Press the
Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if necessary, to display
page two.
Press the top of the Color rocker switch to activate PW

Doppler color.
To deactivate, press the top of the Color rocker switch again.
Benefits
Values
On or Off.
The PW Doppler color presented is a selection in the

Color is a post-processing function.
t
Doppler 45
2177611–100 Rev 0
Color Tag
Description
displayed as a predetermined color in the pulsed wave
Doppler Mode image. (Also found in the CWD soft menu.)
Illustration 167. PW Doppler Mode Sub-Menu (Color Tag)
Accessing/Changing
Access color tag from the PWD Sub-Menu page two. Press
page two.

the PWD color tagging.

Benefits
colorization.
Values
On or Off.
The color and tagging range presented is determined by the

Doppler 46 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Tag Position
Description
Tag position allows for the movement of the specified color
tag range throughout the gray scale displayed. (Also found in
the CWD soft menu.)
Illustration 168. PW Doppler Mode Sub-Menu (Tag Positn)
Accessing/Changing
Access tag position from the PWD Sub-Menu page two.
display page two.

Benefits
scale colorization.
Values
of the tag is determined in the Set Up/Custom Display menu
page 12.
t
Doppler 47
2177611–100 Rev 0
HPRF
Description
HPRF allows the operator to enable or disable the High Pulse
Repetition Frequency function while in PWD Mode. Refer
to Doppler 8.
1/2
Illustration 169. PW Doppler Mode Sub-Menu (HPRF)
Accessing/Changing
Access HPRF from the PWD Sub-Menu page three. Press
page three.
Press the top of the HPRF rocker switch to turn the HPRF
function on or off.
Benefits
Allows for higher frequencies to be detected with aliasing
artifacts.
Values
HPRF is highlighted when enabled (on).
HPRF is not highlighted when disabled (off).

Frame rate (image update) may decrease when HPRF is
active.
Doppler 48 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Rejectn (Rejection)
Description
Rejection allows for the elimination of low level echoes from
the display. This is generally used to clear noise out of
vessels or cysts. (Also found in the CWD soft menu.)
1/2
Illustration 170. PW Doppler Mode Sub-Menu (Rejectn)
Accessing/Changing
Access Rejection from the PWD Sub-Menu page three.
display page three.

Press the bottom of the Rejectn rocker switch to decrease

the gray level rejection value displayed.
Benefits
Allows for the elimination from the display image of low level
echoes caused by noise.
t
Doppler 49
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values

Rejection affects real-time imaging, frozen, Cine, or VCR
playback images.
Doppler 50 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
CFM/PWD Ratio
Description
CFM/PWD Ratio is active in triplex mode. It is used to set
the velocity ratio between PWD and CFM.
1/2
Illustration 171. PW Doppler Mode Sub-Menu (CFM/PWD Ratio)
Accessing/Changing
Access CFM/PWD Ratio from the PWD Sub-Menu page
three. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if
necessary, to display page three.
The selected ratio is displayed on the Sub-Menu.
Press the top of the CFM/PWD Ratio rocker switch to

increase the ratio displayed. Press the bottom of the
CFM/PWD Ratio rocker switch to decrease the ratio
displayed.
Benefits
Used to optimize frame rate in Triplex mode. Without
changing CFM or PDI velocity scale, PWD velocity scale can
be changed to decrease aliasing.
t
Doppler 51
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
Choose from 1/1, 1/2 or 1/4.
1/1 CFM and PWD Velocity the same.

1/2 PWD Velocity twice the CFM Velocity.
1/4 PWD Velocity four times the CFM Velocity.

Affects display frame rate.
Doppler 52 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
CFM Shrink
Description
CFM Shrink reduces the CFM window to the size specified in
Setup/Custom Display page 4.
1/2
Illustration 172. PW Doppler Mode Sub-Menu (CFM Shrink)
Accessing/Changing
Access CFM Shrink from the PWD Sub-Menu page three.
display page three.
Press the top of the CFM Shrink rocker switch to turn the
CFM Shrink function on or off.
CFM Shrink can be turned on/off in Setup/Custom Display

page 4.
Benefits
Used to optimize frame rate in Triplex mode.
Values
On CFM Window size set by value selected in
Setup/Custom Display page 4.
Off CFM window size adjusted by scan area function.

Affects display frame rate.
t
Doppler 53
2177611–100 Rev 0
Doppler 54 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
M-Mode
Introduction
Optimizing the Timeline
M-Mode is intended to provide a display format and measurement capability that

represents tissue displacement (motion) occurring over time along a single scan
vector.
This section describes a typical M-Mode exam. It outlines the front panel controls
and Soft-Menu selections used to optimize the M-Mode trace.
t
M-Mode 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
M-Mode
M-Mode 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
Introduction
M-Mode is used to determine patterns of motion for objects
within the ultrasound beam. The most common use is for
viewing motion patterns of the heart.
Be sure to read and understand Acoustic Output

considerations for each mode (refer to Safety chapter) before
adjusting the Acoustic Output control or any control affecting
acoustic output.
Typical Exam Protocol

A typical examination using M-Mode might proceed as
follows:
1. Get a good B-Mode image. Survey the anatomy and

place the area of interest near the center of the
B-Mode image.
2. Press M Mode. The M-Mode cursor/line is displayed
in the B-Mode image.
3. Use the Trackball to position the mode cursor over
the area to be displayed in M-Mode.
4. Press M Mode a second time to display timeline
format.
5. Adjust the Sweep Speed, TGC, Gain, Acoustic
Output, and Focus, as needed.
6. Press Freeze to stop the M trace.
7. Make any desired annotations, measurements or
calculations.
8. Record the trace to disk or to a hard copy device.
9. Press Freeze to continue imaging.
10. To exit, press B Mode.
t
M-Mode 3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
M-Mode 4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Common Controls
Description
Since M-Mode is basically a single B-Mode scan vector
displayed over time, basic controls that affect the B-Mode
display also affect the M-Mode display.
Acoustic output, TGC and depth affect both the M-Mode and
B-Mode displays.
.
Scan area size, scan area position and reverse affect
B-Mode only.
If the scan area size is reduced and the position changed, the
M-Mode cursor will follow the position change to stay within
the displayed scan area.
The Dual Format Keys (L–R) work the same as in dual

B-Mode, but display both B-Mode and M-Mode on the left
and right side of the screen.
Accessing/Changing
See B-Mode for details on these controls.
t
M-Mode 5
2177611–100 Rev 0
B/M Gain
Description
Gain increases or decreases the amount of echo information
displayed in an image. It has the effect of brightening or
darkening all displayed echoes at any depth.
Accessing/Changing
.
Turn the B/M Gain control to adjust gain. Gain values
change depending on the probe; they are not associated with
a particular position of the key.
NOTE: Gain cannot be changed on a frozen image.
Changing the gain while in M-Mode does not affect the

B-Mode image gain.
To increase gain, turn the B/M Gain dial clockwise.
To decrease gain, turn the B/M Gain dial counterclockwise.

Doppler.
q
Benefits
Gain allows for the balance of echo contrast so that cystic
structures appear echo-free and reflecting tissue fills in.
M-Mode 6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
Gain displays on the monitor in dB. Gain increments are
available every 2 dB within the range of 0 to 98 dB,
depending on the selected probe.

After adjusting the acoustic output, there may be a need to
adjust gain. Generally speaking, if acoustic output increases,
the gain may need to decrease; a decrease in acoustic
output may require an increase in gain.
Gain and TGC interact by adding together. Gain changes

overall echo amplification while TGC changes amplification at
specific depths.
Bioeffects
Gain has no affect on acoustic output. However, with
increased gain, the output level can usually be reduced to
produce equivalent image quality.
t
M-Mode 7
2177611–100 Rev 0
M/D Cursor
Description
Entering M-Mode automatically assigns trackball control to
the M/D Cursor.
Accessing/Changing
To enable trackball control of the M/D cursor, press the M/D
Cursor key. The M-Mode cursor line changes color.
To terminate trackball control of the M/D cursor, press Set.

The M-Mode cursor line changes color.
Benefits
Allows for repositioning of the M-Mode cursors after the
trackball has been assigned a different function.
Values
On or Off.
The M-Mode cursor displays in the center of the screen or

changes to the active color if already present.

Terminates trackball control from its current function and
assigns it to the M-Mode cursor.
M-Mode 8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Zoom (M-Mode)
Description
Acoustic zoom can be accomplished while in M-Mode. The
B-Mode reference image does not zoom but the M-Mode
display will enlarge. Display (freeze) zoom is not available
with M-Mode.
Illustration 173. Zoom (M-Mode) Display
Accessing/Changing
To access zoom while in B/M-Mode, press the Zoom key.
Rotate the Zoom Size control to adjust the size of the zoom
area cursors.
t
M-Mode 9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Accessing/Changing (continued)
Use the Trackball to move the zoom area vertically along the
M-Mode cursor line.
Press Set to fix the zoom function and continue scanning.
Press Clear to exit the zoom function.
Benefits
Allows for expanding a region of interest over the entire
M-Mode timeline display.
Values
Acoustic zoom has magnification values of 1, 1.2, 1.5, 2, 2.5,
3.0 and 4.0. The default value is set in the Set Up/Custom
Display menu page 1.
M-Mode 10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0

Changes the transmit focal point position when moved
vertically.
Bioeffects
Acoustic Moving the focal zone affects acoustic output by bringing the
Output near field closer and by adding focal zones. The amount of
Hazard increase varies depending on the probe and its frequency.
Adding focal zones tends to increase TI, although it may
decrease MI.
t
M-Mode 11
2177611–100 Rev 0
Dynamic Range
Description
can be adjusted. Adjustments to M-Mode’s dynamic range
affects the M-Mode timeline only.
Illustration 174. M-Mode Sub-Menu (Dynamic Range)
Accessing/Changing
Access dynamic range from the M-Mode Sub-Menu page


To decrease the dynamic range, press the bottom of

Benefits
M-Mode 12 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
The settings cycle in 6 dB steps from 30 dB to 78 dB. The
default for M dynamic range is set in the Set Up/Custom
Display menu page 3. Dynamic range levels are returned to
the preset value when changing the following:
S Probe
S Exam category
S New patient

M dynamic range operates only in real-time, not in freeze,
Cine, Timeline replay, or VCR playback.
t
M-Mode 13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Gray Scale Map

Description
Gray scale mapping determines how the echo intensity levels
received are presented as shades of gray.
Illustration 175. M-Mode Sub-Menu (Gray Map)
Accessing/Changing
Access gray scale mapping from the M-Mode Sub-Menu
Press the top or bottom of the Gray Map rocker switch to
select the desired gray scale map. The selected value is
displayed on the Sub-Menu.
Benefits
Displays the received echo levels with different weights on
specific levels of gray. For example, a certain gray map may
enhance mid level echoes over a wider range of grays verses
high or low level echoes.
Allows for better differentiation between echo levels through
gray levels displayed.
Values
There are six selections of gray scale mapping. This is a
post-processing function.
M-Mode 14 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Rejectn (Rejection)
Description
Deletes low level echoes.
Illustration 176. M-Mode Sub-Menu (Rejectn)
Accessing/Changing
Access rejection from the M-Mode Sub-Menu page one.
display page one.
Each press of the rocker switch cycles to the next rejection

setting. The selected value is displayed on the Sub-Menu.

To decrease the gray level rejection value displayed, press

the bottom of the Rejectn rocker switch.
Benefits
Higher rejection values will remove weak, low level echoes in
a displayed image.
t
M-Mode 15
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values

Rejection functions in real-time, as well as in freeze, Cine, or
VTR playback.
M-Mode 16 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Edge Enhance
Description
Edge enhance brings out subtle tissue differences and
boundaries by enhancing the gray scale differences
corresponding to the edges of structures. Adjustments to
M-Mode’s edge enhancement affects the M-Mode timeline
only.
Illustration 177. M-Mode Sub-Menu (Edge Enhance)
Accessing/Changing
Access edge enhance from the M-Mode Sub-Menu page
Each press cycles to the next edge enhance setting. The

To increase edge enhancement, press the top of the Edge

Enhance rocker switch.
To decrease edge enhancement, press the bottom of the

Edge Enhance rocker switch.
Benefits
Edge enhance modifies the M-Mode image by accentuating
the interfaces between organs or vessels.
t
M-Mode 17
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
The four selections are Off, Low, Mid and High. Edge
enhance levels are returned to the preset value when
changes are made to the following:
S Application
S Exam category
S New patient
Edge enhance is a pre-processing function.

Edge enhance operates in real-time only, not in freeze, Cine,
or VCR playback.
M-Mode 18 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Sweep Speed
Description
.
Sweep speed changes the speed at which the timeline
updates across the display.
NOTE: Time or distance measurements are not allowed

across sweep speed changes.
Illustration 178. M-Mode Sub-Menu (Sweep Speed)
Accessing/Changing
Access sweep speed from the M-Mode Sub-Menu page two.
display page two.
Each press of the rocker switch cycles to the next sweep

speed setting. The selected value is displayed on the
Sub-Menu.
To increase sweep speed, press the top of the Sweep Speed

rocker switch.
To decrease sweep speed, press the bottom of the Sweep

Speed rocker switch.
Benefits
Speed up or slow down the timeline in order to view more or
fewer occurrences over a period of time.
A fast speed shows less cycles but better transition definition.
A slow speed shows more cycles but less definition during

transitions.
t
M-Mode 19
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
Slow (16 sec), Mid (8 sec) and Fast (4 sec).
Sweep speed is a pre-processing function.

If more events are seen, the timeline appears smaller; if less
events are seen, the timeline appears larger or more spread
out.
M-Mode 20 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Color
Description
Color allows for enabling M-Mode image colorization.
Illustration 179. M-Mode Sub-Menu (Color)
Accessing/Changing
Access M-Mode color from the M-Mode Sub-Menu page two.
display page two.
Press the top of the Color rocker switch to activate M-Mode

color.
To deactivate M-Mode color, press the top of the Color

Benefits
Values
On or Off.
The M-Mode color presented is a selection in the
Color is a post processing function.
t
M-Mode 21
2177611–100 Rev 0
Color Tag
Description
displayed as a predetermined color in the M-Mode image.
Illustration 180. M-Mode Sub-Menu (Color Tag)
Accessing/Changing
Access color tag from the M-Mode Sub-Menu page two.
display page two.

the M-Mode color tagging.

Benefits
colorization.
Values
On or Off.
The color and tagging range presented is determined by the

M-Mode 22 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Tag Position
Description
Tag position allows for the movement of the specified color
Illustration 181. M-Mode Sub-Menu (Tag Positn)
Accessing/Changing
Access tag position from the M-Mode Sub-Menu page two.
display page two.
Benefits
scale colorization.
Values
page 11.
Tag Position is a post processing function.
t
M-Mode 23
2177611–100 Rev 0
M-Mode 24 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Adding Color
Introduction
Activating Color Flow
Optimizing the Color Flow Image
CFM/PDI Enhancement Option
Power Doppler Imaging
Colorized Gray Scale
Doppler Color Flow Mapping is a method for imaging blood flow by displaying flow
data (velocity/direction) on a B-Mode Image. It allows for a quick qualitative survey
concerning the relative velocity and direction of fluid (blood) within the B-Mode
Image.
This section describes how color flow mapping is used in B-Mode, M-Mode and
Doppler spectral display. It explains the controls and Soft-Menu selections used to
optimize color flow mapping.
Power Doppler Imaging and suggested PDI preset values are outlined.
This section also describes Colorized Gray Scale on the LOGIQ t 500.
t
Adding Color 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Adding Color
Adding Color 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
Typical Exam
A typical examination using Color Flow Doppler:
1. Follow the same procedure as described under

B-Mode to locate the anatomical area of interest.
2. After optimizing the B-Mode image, add Color Flow by
pressing CFM.
3. Move the color flow area of interest as close to the
center of the image as possible.
4. Optimize the color flow parameters so that a high
frame rate can be achieved and appropriate flow
velocities are visualized.
5. Press Freeze to hold the image in memory.
6. Record color flow images as necessary.
7. If more definitive information is needed about flow,
utilize pulsed or continuous wave Doppler modes.
t
Adding Color 3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
Adding Color 4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0

To activate Color Flow Mapping, press the CFM key (color
flow). The key backlights while in Color Flow Mode. The
color flow image appears after a short pause.
Color Flow Mapping can be used with B-Mode, M-Mode or

Doppler Imaging.
In all B-Modes, the Color Flow wedge overlays the B-Mode

image.
Color
Window
Illustration 182. Color Flow Image Window
The Scan Area key and Trackball now control the size and
position of the color flow window.
t
Adding Color 5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Activating Color Flow (cont’d)

The Color Flow Sub-Menu appears:
Illustration 183. Color Flow Sub-Menu (page one)
Access pages 2, 3 and 4 of the Color Flow Sub-Menu by

pressing the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch.
Illustration 184. Color Flow Sub-Menu (page two)
Illustration 185. Color Flow Sub-Menu (page three)
Adding Color 6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Activating Color Flow (cont’d)
Illustration 186. Color Flow Sub-Menu (page 4 of 4)

CFM/PDI Enhancement Option
M-Mode
In M-Mode, the color flow wedge overlays the B-Mode image.
The color displayed in the M-Mode is that which is seen
along the Doppler line cursor.
To activate color flow mode, press CFM (color flow). The key
backlights while in the color flow mode. The color flow image
appears after a short pause.
The Color Map selected for B-Mode applies to M-Mode. The

size and position of the color flow window in B-Mode
determines the color information displayed in M-Mode.
Exiting Color Flow

To exit Color, press CFM (color flow).
t
Adding Color 7
2177611–100 Rev 0
Adding Color 8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Control Layout
↑ V
↓ m/s "❙A
Illustration 187. Color Doppler Controls
Color Flow Mapping is basically Doppler velocity/direction

information mapped as a color on top of the gray scale
B-Mode (or M-Mode) Image.
Keyboard controls used to affect the Doppler spectrum also

affect CFM Mode. However, some Soft Menu controls affect
only the color processing and display.
t
Adding Color 9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Common Controls
Description
After initial transmission/reception, CFM processing is
generally separate from gray scale processing.
Acoustic output affects the transmit power for both B-Mode

and Color Flow Mapping signals.
TGC, Depth, B/M Gain and Reverse function only on the

B-Mode image displayed.
The M/D Cursor key is not relevant to CFM scanning; it only

affects the Doppler/M-Mode cursor.
.
Dual format keys (L–R) work the same as in dual B-Mode,
but display two B-Mode and CFM images on the left and right
side of the screen.
NOTE: If “L” and “R” keys are pressed simultaneously, both

left and right B-Mode images will be active. Pressing CFM
will then provide a live B-Mode image on the left and a live
B-Mode with CFM on the right.
Accessing/Changing
See B-Mode for details on all controls common or specific to
B-Mode.
Select
If the color flow mode is enabled while in Doppler, the Select
key switches the Doppler/CFM controls between Doppler and
CFM.
Adding Color 10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Color Doppler Gain
Description
Amplifies the overall strength of the echoes being processed
in the Color Doppler section.
Accessing/Changing
Gain values change depending on the probe; gain is not
associated with a particular position of the knob.
To increase gain, turn the Gain knob clockwise.
To decrease gain, turn the Gain knob counterclockwise.
Benefits
Allows control of the amount of color within a vessel.
Values
The settings range is 32 levels, but values are not displayed
on the image monitor. Usually set the dial in the middle,
depending on the vessel.

The system automatically adjusts the gain based on the
acoustic output.
Bioeffects
Color Doppler gain has no affect on acoustic output.
However, with increased color Doppler gain, the output level
can usually be reduced to produce an equivalent spectrum
image quality.
t
Adding Color 11
2177611–100 Rev 0
CFM/Spectrum Invert
Description
.
Allows for viewing blood flow from a different perspective,
↑
↓ i.e., red away (negative velocities) and blue toward (positive
velocities). Color reverses a real-time or frozen image.
NOTE: Invert reverses the forward/reverse color assignment.
Accessing/Changing
To reverse the color assignment, press CFM/Spect Invert.
Benefits
Allows viewing of blood flow according to personal
preference, or display proper color without changing probe
orientation.
Values
Invert and non-invert.
Adding Color 12 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Velocity Scale
Description
Increases or decreases the Velocity Scale represented by the
color bar.
V
m/s
Accessing/Changing
To increase velocity scale, press the top of the Velocity
To decrease velocity scale, press the bottom of the Velocity

Benefits
If blood is flowing at a higher velocity, increase the velocity
scale in order to avoid aliasing in the color display.
Values
Velocity scale is displayed in cm per second.

Velocity scale changes frame rate, acoustic output, and wall
filter.
When adjusting velocity scale, Cine memory is cleared.
Bioeffects
Acoustic Changing the velocity scale tends to change the MI.
Output
Hazard Observe the output display for possible effects.
t
Adding Color 13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Color Flow Baseline Shift
Description
Minimizes aliasing by reallocating the forward/reverse color
velocity scale assignment. For example, it allows a greater
portion of the color scale to be assigned to forward flow than
to reverse flow.
Baseline Shift adjusts the point in the color spectrum where

the color velocity is at zero (black).
Accessing/Changing
To adjust the baseline shift, press the top or bottom of the
Baseline Shift rocker switch.
Baseline does not wrap. If the baseline is positioned at the

top of the color bar, shifting the baseline again will cause the
system to beep.
Benefits
Minimize aliasing during color flow imaging.
Values
Color flow baseline can be shifted to one of 7
proportionately-spaced positions on the color bar.
Zero velocity follows the baseline. The total velocity range

remains the same.
Adding Color 14 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Color Flow Window Size (Scan Area)
Description
Color Flow data is placed on top of the gray scale image in a
specific area. This is represented by a sector wedge outline
with convex probes or a rectangle with linear probes.
The size and position of this color area can be easily

adjusted.
The Color Flow window is a solid line when position may be

adjusted by the Trackball. The Color Flow window is a dotted
line when the size (CFM area) may be adjusted by the
Trackball.
Accessing/Changing
While in the CFM Mode, press Scan Area once. This
assigns trackball control to color window size adjustment.
Use the Trackball to adjust the color window size.
S Move the Trackball left to close the color window and

right to open it.
S Move the Trackball down to increase and up to decrease
the color window vertical size.
.
Press Scan Area a second time to assign trackball control to
positioning the re-sized window.
NOTE: Pressing Scan Area toggles between trackball

control of window size or position.
Pressing Set fixes the color window size and position.

Trackball control is returned to its previous assignment.
t
Adding Color 15
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
Sector/Convex Probe. Ranges from 10° to full “B” width.
Linear Probe. Ranges from 10mm to full B” width.
Bioeffects
Acoustic Narrowing the image size may increase the frame rate,
Output thereby increasing the TI. This change also tends to
Hazard decrease the MI.
Adding Color 16 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Color Flow Maps

Description
Allows for the selection of how Doppler velocities are mapped
as color over the gray scale. The Color Bar represents the
selected map.
Illustration 188. CFM Mode Sub-Menu (CFM Map)
Accessing/Changing
Access CFM maps from the CFM Sub-Menu page one.
display page one.
Each press cycles through the CFM map choices. The

Press the top or bottom of the CFM Map rocker switch to

cycle to the appropriate map choice.
Values
The four color map selections available are assigned in the
Set Up/Custom Display page 14. The parameters CFM Color
Map 1–4 can be assigned as Velocity maps (V1 thru V8),
Velocity/Turbulence maps (VT1 thru VT8) or Turbulence
maps (T1 and T2).
t
Adding Color 17
2177611–100 Rev 0
Slant Scan
Description
Slant scan in CFM Imaging is used to control the position of
the CFM window for LINEAR PROBES ONLY.
Illustration 189. CFM Mode Sub-Menu (Slant Scan)
Accessing/Changing
Access slant scan from the CFM Sub-Menu page one. Press
page one.
Press the Slant Scan rocker switch to cycle through left,

center or right displays. The selected value is displayed on
the Sub-Menu.
+ (Left) 0 (Center) – (Right)
Illustration 190. Color Doppler Window Selections
Adding Color 18 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Benefits
Provides a color flow window suitable for linear probe
operation.
Values
+ (left), 0 (center) and – (right).
Slant Scan is a pre-processing function.
t
Adding Color 19
2177611–100 Rev 0
Diag Mode
Description
Allows for the selection of the best color flow display format.
There are four mode sequences available in the Set Up/
Custom Display menu page 14. The four sequences have
two or three of the four possible modes. The four methods
are:
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Survey Mode (Svy)—The Survey Mode is the default Diag
ÇÇ
Mode display and is common for each of the two programs.
The Survey Mode displays the B/W B-Mode image and has
ÇÇ an adjustable, full depth CF wedge that can be steered with

the Trackball.
ÇÇ
Survey/Detail Mode (SvyDtl)—The Survey/Detail Mode
displays a high resolution color flow window that is half the
ÇÇ depth of the B-Mode image. The CF wedge is adjustable

horizontally and vertically and can be steered within the full
ÇÇ
B-Mode image with the Trackball.
ÇÇ Map Mode (Map)—In the Map Mode, the B-Mode image and
ÇÇ the color flow are the same size. The Map Mode offers
ÇÇ higher CF frame rates and a full size adjustable CF wedge.
ÇÇ
Map/Detail Mode (MapDtl)—The Detail Mode shows a high
resolution, high frame rate color flow window that is half of
ÇÇ the B-Mode depth. The B-Mode and the CF are the same
adjustable angle.
Map
Illustration 191. CFM Mode Sub-Menu (Diag Mode)
Adding Color 20 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Accessing/Changing
Access Diag Mode from the CFM Sub-Menu page one.
display page one.
Press the Diag Mode rocker switch to cycle through the

preset sequence. The selected value is displayed on the
Sub-Menu.
Benefits
Gives the operator a choice of CFM displays to optimize
scanning.
Values
Four sequences are available in the Set Up/Custom Display
menu page 14:
Survey>Map>Map/Detail
Survey>Survey/Detail
Survey>Survey/Detail>Map
Survey/Detail>Map/Detail
Diag Mode is a pre-processing function.

Display frame rate could be improved by minimized gray
scale B-Mode image size or CFM window size.
t
Adding Color 21
2177611–100 Rev 0
Color Flow MTI Filter
Description
Filters out low flow velocity color. This minimizes motion
artifacts caused from breathing.
Illustration 192. CFM Mode Sub-Menu (MTI Filter)
Accessing/Changing
Access MTI filter from the CFM Sub-Menu page one. Press
page one.
Each press cycles to the next MTI filter setting. The selected
value is displayed on the Sub-Menu.
To increase MTI filter, press the top of the MTI Filter rocker
switch.
Press the bottom of the MTI Filter rocker switch to decrease

MTI filter.
Benefits
Filters out the lowest velocities (colors).
Values
Values are Low, M1, M2, M3, M4 and High.
Color Flow MTI Filter is a pre-processing function.
Adding Color 22 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Frame Average
Description
Averages color information from previous frames with the
current frame.
Illustration 193. CFM Mode Sub-Menu (Frame Average)
Accessing/Changing
Access frame average from the CFM Sub-Menu page two.
display page two.
Each press cycles to the next frame average. The selected

value is displayed on the Sub-Menu.
To increase frame averaging, press the top of the Frame

Average rocker switch.
Press the bottom of the Frame Average rocker switch to

decrease frame averaging.
Benefits
Averages out one time events like noise spikes.
t
Adding Color 23
2177611–100 Rev 0
Values
Off, low, medium and high.
Frame Average is a pre-processing function.

Trade off between frame rate and color quality. As the color
quality increases, the frame rate decreases and as the frame
rate increases, the color quality decreases.
Adding Color 24 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Penet. (Penetration)
Description
Penetration can be increased by lowering the operating
frequency of the active probe.
Illustration 194. CFM Mode Sub-Menu (Penet.)
Accessing/Changing
Access penetration from the CFM Sub-Menu page two.
display page two.

penetration.

again.
Benefits
Allows for a slight increase in penetration without changing
gain or acoustic output.
Values
On or Off.
Penetration is a pre-processing function.

t
Adding Color 25
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Decreasing the probe transmitting frequency, without
decreasing acoustic output, tends to increase Mechanical
and Thermal Index values. However, improved penetration
should allow for decreasing patient exposure time.
Probe Frequencies
For reference, Color Flow Doppler frequencies (with
penetration On or Off) are shown according to probe in the
table below.

ON OFF
B510 4.0 5.0
C364/CBF 2.5 3.3
C386 2.5 3.3
C551/CAE 4.0 5.0
C721 5.0 6.6
E721/MTZ 5.0 6.6
I739 5.0 6.6
546L 4.0 5.0
739L 5.0 6.6
LA39 5.0 6.6
L764/LH 5.0 6.6
P509 4.0 5.0
S316/UC 2.5 2.8
S317 2.5 2.8
S220/W 2.2 2.5
S222 2.0 2.5
S611 4.0 5.0
T739 5.0 6.6
Table 18. CFM Frequency
Adding Color 26 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
High Resoltn (Resolution)

Description
High Resolution provides a quick way to maximize resolution
for the CFM display.
Illustration 195 CFM Mode Sub-Menu (High Resoltn)
Accessing/Changing
Access High Resoltn from the CFM Sub-Menu page two.
To activate or deactivate the high resolution function, press

the High Resoltn rocker switch.
Benefits
Optimizes CFM color display by changing system parameters
to maximize color line density.
Values
When High Resoltn is highlighted in the sub-menu display,
the function is on. When it is not highlighted, it is off.
High Resolution is a pre-processing function.

High Resolution will cause the scan frame rate to decrease.
t
Adding Color 27
2177611–100 Rev 0
Color Flow Display Threshold
Description
Color flow display threshold is the gray scale level at which
the overlay of color information stops.
If the display threshold is set at a gray shade percentage of

34, any color information available will be overlaid below 34%
of the gray scale map. Color information will not be placed
on top of any part of the gray scale greater than 34% of
maximum (white).
Illustration 196. CFM Mode Sub-Menu (Color Threshd)
Accessing/Changing
Access color threshold from the CFM Sub-Menu page two.
display page two.
To increase the gray scale threshold, press the top of the

Color Threshd rocker switch.
Press the bottom of the Color Threshd rocker switch to

decrease the gray scale threshold.
Adding Color 28 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Benefits
Can limit color flow overlay to low level echoes inside vessel
walls. Helps minimize color “bleeding” outside vessel walls.
Values
This is a post processing function. The color threshold can
be set on real-time or frozen images.
The settings cycle through the following values:
0% to 100% of the gray scale in 3% increments.
t
Adding Color 29
2177611–100 Rev 0
Color Capture (option)
Description
.
Displays the highest mean velocity (average velocity)
detected over a specific time interval.
NOTE: If a velocity map is selected, the image displays

accumulated peak mean velocities. If a variance map is
selected, the image displays variance for the accumulated
peak mean velocities.
Illustration 197. CFM Mode Sub-Menu (Capture)
Accessing/Changing
Access capture from the CFM Sub-Menu page two. Press
page two.
To activate color Capture, press the top of the Capture

rocker switch. The selected value is displayed on the
Sub-Menu.
To adjust the capture time interval, press the top or bottom of

the Capture rocker switch, as necessary.
Benefits
Useful in making slide presentations. Also refer to Basic
Scan, Using Cine for post processing Cine Capture and
Capture Frame functions.
Values
Off, 0.5, 1, and 2 seconds.
Color Capture is a pre-processing function.
Adding Color 30 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Packet Size
Description
Controls the number of samples gathered for a single color
flow vector.
Illustration 198. CFM Mode Sub-Menu (Packet Size)
Accessing/Changing
Access packet size from the CFM Sub-Menu page three.
display page three.
To increase the packet size, press the top of the Packet Size
rocker switch.
Press the bottom of the Packet Size rocker switch to

decrease the packet size.
Values
Soft Menu values are SMALL, MID and LARGE.
Benefits
Allows for the improvement of the color sensitivity.
t
Adding Color 31
2177611–100 Rev 0
Affect on other controls

When the packet size is decreased, the frame rate is
.
increased at the expense of CFM image quality. When the
packet size is increased, CFM image quality is improved at
the expense of frame rate.
Note: This function doe not work in Color M-Mode or B/CFM

with Pulsed Doppler.
Bioeffect
Changing packet size may change the TI and/or MI.
Adding Color 32 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Spatial Filter
Description
Smooths color information so that it is less grainy. It averages
the color information out over time.
Illustration 199. CFM Mode Sub-Menu (Spatial Filter)
Accessing/Changing
Access spatial filter from the CFM Sub-Menu page three.
display page three.
To increase the spatial filtering, press the top of the Spatial

Filter rocker switch.
Press the bottom of the Packet Size rocker switch to

decrease the spatial filtering.
Values
Off, Low, Mid and High.
t
Adding Color 33
2177611–100 Rev 0
Benefits
Smooths color information.
Affect on other controls

Affects frame rate. The slower the spatial filter averaging, the
faster the frame rate; the higher the spatial filter averaging,
the slower the frame rate.
Bioeffect
Changing Spatial Average tends to decrease MI.
Adding Color 34 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
W. E. (Wall Echo) Cancel
Description
Wall echo cancel eliminates the low velocity echoes caused
by the motion of vessel walls.
Illustration 200. CFM Mode Sub-Menu (W.E. Cancel)
Accessing/Changing
Access wall echo cancel from the CFM Sub-Menu page
three. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if
necessary, to display page three.
To activate/deactivate the wall echo cancel, press the

W. E. Cancel rocker switch.
Benefits
Eliminate low velocity echoes caused by vessel wall motion
to help clean up the color Doppler display.
Values
On or Off.
Wall Echo is a pre-processing function.
t
Adding Color 35
2177611–100 Rev 0
Color Flow Velocity Tag
Description
Allows for the assignment of a single color to a range of
velocities.
.
Real-time or frozen images may be tagged. Velocity tags can
be incorporated into velocity/variance color maps.
NOTE: The tag assignment appears on the color bar for

reference.
Illustration 201. CFM Mode Sub-Menu (Color Tag)
Accessing/Changing
Access color tag from the CFM Sub-Menu page three. Press
page three.
To enable the color tag function, press the bottom of the

Color Tag rocker switch.
To adjust the tag position, press the top or bottom of the Tag
Positn rocker switch. This moves the velocity tag area to the
desired velocity range.
Adding Color 36 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Benefits
Provides the ability to emphasize specific blood flow
velocities so that they stand out to the eye.
Values
On/Off.
.
Color Flow Velocity Tag is a post-processing function.
NOTE: The “CFM Tag Width” is a parameter that can be

preset in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 14.
t
Adding Color 37
2177611–100 Rev 0
Tag Position
Description
Tag Position allows for the movement of the specified color
Illustration 202. CFM Mode Sub-Menu (Tag Positn)
Accessing/Changing
Access tag position from the CFM Sub-Menu page three.
display page three.

Color Tag up the gray scale range.
bottom of the Tag Positn rocker switch
Benefits
scale colorization.
Values
page 14.
Adding Color 38 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
CFM/PDI Enhancement
(option)
Overview
An option is available to enhance CFM/PDI signal
processing. It requires the necessary hardware (Color
Processing Board) and software (CFM/PDI Enhancement).
When properly installed and activated, the CFM/PDI

Enhancement option provides the following additional
choices in the CFM/PDI Soft-Menu page 4:
S Adaptive Color Enhancement (ACE)

S Noise Blanker
S Persistence
Illustration 203. CFM/PDI Enhancement Option Sub-Menu (page 4 of 4)
t
Adding Color 39
2177611–100 Rev 0
CFM/PDI Enhancement
ACE (Adaptive Color Enhancement)
Description
Adaptive Color Enhancement (ACE) is designed to reduce
“color artifact noise”. This noise can appear as a flash of
color synchronized with the heart beat while scanning the
abdomen. The noise may also appear to fill the color window
when changing window size/position or when moving the
probe. Noise due to value motion in cardiac studies may be
considered clutter noise.
Illustration 204. CFM/PDI Enhancement Option Sub-Menu (ACE)
Accessing/Changing
The ACE function is only available with the CFM/PDI
Enhancement option. Access ACE from the CFM Sub-Menu
page four. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if
necessary, to display page four.
Press the top of the ACE rocker switch to turn on ACE.
Press the bottom of the ACE rocker switch to turn off ACE.
Benefits
Reduces the “color artifact noise” as described in the
description section.
Values
On or Off.
Affects on Other Controls

May have a tendency to reduce frame rate due to increased
CFM processor functions.
Adding Color 40 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
CFM/PDI Enhancement
Noise Blanker
Description
Noise Blanker is intended to reduce the random noise
generated due to the increase in Color Gain.
Illustration 205. CFM/PDI Enhancement Option Sub-Menu (Noise Blanker)
Accessing/Changing
Access noise blanker from the CFM Sub-Menu page four.
display page four.
To increase the noise blanker, press the top of the Noise

Blanker rocker switch.
Press the bottom of the Noise Blanker rocker switch to

decrease the noise blanker.
Benefits
Noise Rejection increases color sensitivity with the ability to
use higher color gains. Very effective when observing low
velocity blood flow.
Values
OFF No Noise Blanking
LOW Minimum Noise Blanking
MID Medium Noise Blanking
HIGH Maximum Noise Blanking

Allows use of increased Color Gain or equivalent results with
less gain.
t
Adding Color 41
2177611–100 Rev 0
CFM/PDI Enhancement
Persistence
Description
Retains the largest pixel color value until a larger value is
detected or preset time has elapsed.
When a higher color value for a pixel is detected, that value is

retained and the persistence time is reset for that pixel.
When the persistence time elapses for that pixel, color is
deleted and it returns to gray scale.
Illustration 206. CFM/PDI Enhancement Option Sub-Menu (Persistence)
Accessing/Changing
Access persistence from the CFM Sub-Menu page four.
display page four.
To increase persistence, press the top of the Persistence

rocker switch.
Press the bottom of the Persistence rocker switch to

decrease persistence.
Benefits
Present a continuous, high sensitivity color image.
Adding Color 42 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
CFM/PDI Enhancement
Values
OFF No Persistence
SHORT Short Persistence time
MID Medium Persistence time
HIGH Long Persistence time

The activation of the Persistence function will over ride any
previous selections made for CFM Capture or CFM B Frame
Average. When Persistence is deactivated CFM Capture
and CFM B Frame Average will return to normal operation.
t
Adding Color 43
2177611–100 Rev 0
CFM/PDI Enhancement
Adding Color 44 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
(option)
Overview
A color flow processing option to the LOGIQ 500 is Power
Doppler Imaging or PDI. PDI is a different way of processing
the power information from the color flow transmissions by
using different color maps and not displaying directional
information.
Description
Power Doppler Imaging is a color flow mapping technique
used to map the strength of the Doppler signal rather than
the frequency shift or velocity of the signal. Using this
technique, the system plots color based on the number of
reflectors that are moving, regardless of velocity.
Accessing/Changing
.
While scanning in the CFM Mode, enable the Blue Shift key
(key will be lighted) and press P.
Note: For USA systems, the User Define Key 6 has been
locked and programmed to toggle the PDI mode on/off. User
Define Key 6 can be reprogrammed for other functions if it is
unlocked.
Although remaining in the CFM Mode Top Menu, the system

will shift to the PDI presets and color maps.
Values
Only power maps are available in the PDI mode.
P1 thru P4 are non-topo (power) maps.
P5 thru P8 are topo maps.
Changes between non-topo and topo maps can only be done

in real-time, not on a frozen image.
t
Adding Color 45
2177611–100 Rev 0

Only changes between P1 and P2 or P3 and P4 are
post-processing functions and do not affect image acquisition
controls. PDI parameters need to be changed in real-time.
Some controls that affect CFM also affect PDI.
Optimizing the PDI Option

Change the following parameters on Custom Display menu
page 7 for a Power Doppler specific presets.
PDI Color Threshold : 100

PDI Threshold Power : 0
PDI Target Frame Rate : LOW
PDI Target Frame Rate Dtl : LOW
PDI Packet Size Survey : LARGE
PDI Packet Size Map : LARGE
PDI Packet Size Srvy Dtl : LARGE
PDI Packet Size MpDtl : LARGE
PDI Velocity [cm/s] : 20 (a range of 10-20 is useful)
PDI B Gain : 20 (user preference)
PDI B High Resolution : ON OFF (user choice)
PDI B Frame Average : Low Mid High (user choice—
High preferred)
PDI B Wall Filter : M1 (high frequencies)
: M4 (low frequencies)
PDI M Gain (Delta from B) : 0
PDI M Wall Filter : M1 (high frequencies)
: M4 (low frequencies)
PDI ACE : Option, user choice
PDI Noise Blanker : Option, user choice
PDI Persistence : OPtion, user choice
Adding Color 46 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Optimizing the PDI Option (cont’d)

Custom Display menu page 15 also has a few parameters
specific to PDI.
CFM/PDI Initial Mode : Choose CFM or PDI for the

default mode.
PDI B/W Display : On equals transparent mode
for P1 thru P4 maps only.
PDI Default Map : User choice
PDI Dynamic Range : User choice
PDI Tag Auto Start : OFF
PDI Tag Center [%] : 0
PDI Tag Width [%] : 3
Hints The PDI Velocity choice is a trade-off between low flow

detectability and wall motion.
The PDI B High Resolution choice is a trade-off between

frame rate and color resolution.
The PDI B Frame Average choice is a trade-off between a

sharper noisy appearance or a smoother less noisey
appearance to the image.
The activation of the Persistence function will over ride any

previous selections made for PDI B Frame Average. When
Persistence is deactivated PDI B Frame Average will return
to normal operation.
.
The PDI B Wall Filter choice is made depending on the
frequency of the probe.
NOTE: Remember that parameters found on Custom

Display page 7 are probe dependent. Set up these
IMPORTANT parameters for all probes that will be used for PDI.
NOTE: Parameters on Custom Display page 15 are effective

for all probes.
t
Adding Color 47
2177611–100 Rev 0
Adding Color 48 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Gray Scale Color Basics

Each mode selection (except CFM) can display the shades of
gray as shades of a color. The system simply maps out the
gray levels as hues of a color scale.
The gray scale bar changes color and the image display
changes accordingly.
The color displayed is selected in the Set Up/Custom Display

menu. The preset “Color Map” is chosen separately for
B-Mode, M-Mode and Doppler displays. Details on the color
map selection are found in Customizing Your System.
Colorized gray scale is an on/off selection found in each

mode Top Menu.
In each mode (B, M, PD and CWD), the color selection is

found on the Sub-Menu page two.
Access Color from the appropriate mode’s sub-menu

page two. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if
necessary, to display page two.
The Color rocker switch toggles colorized gray scale on or

off.
Illustration 207. B-Mode Sub-Menu Page 2
t
Adding Color 49
2177611–100 Rev 0
Adding Color 50 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Index
Index
Hazard, Getting Started 37

Symbols I739, Bioeffects A–23, Bioeffects A–44
Key to probe tables, Bioeffects A–61
% Stenosis, Abdom/Small Parts 9, Vascular 14, key to probe tables, Bioeffects A–65
Cardiology 43 L764, Bioeffects A–25, Bioeffects A–49
LA39, Bioeffects A–25, Bioeffects A–50
P509, Bioeffects A–26, Bioeffects A–51
Numbers Precision, Bioeffects A–62
Prudent Use, OB/GYN 7
S220, Bioeffects A–26, Bioeffects A–53
546L, Probes 32
739L, Probes 33 S316, Bioeffects A–27, Bioeffects A–55
Safety, Safety 19
A T739, Bioeffects A–29, Bioeffects A–59
Tables, Bioeffects A–20
A/B Ratio, OB/GYN 30
Acoustic Output Hazard, Safety 8
Abdomen/Small Parts, Measurements
A/B Ratio, Abdom/Small Parts 14 Acoustic Zoom, Basic Scan 63
Max PG, Abdom/Small Parts 19 Advanced Cardiac Measurement Option,
Mean PG, Abdom/Small Parts 21 Sub–Menu, Basic Scan 47
Pulsatility Index (PI), Abdom/Small Parts 14
Resistance Index (RI), Abdom/Small Parts 14 Advanced Vascular, Vascular 27
S/D Ratio, Abdom/Small Parts 14 Menu Selections, Vascular 27
Report Page Layout, Vascular 30
Accessories Venous Comments, Vascular 34
Connector Panel, Getting Started 29
Placing an order, Assistance D–1 Air Filter
Requesting a catalog, Assistance D–1 Cleaning, User Maintenance 60
Locating, User Maintenance 59
ACE Removing, User Maintenance 60
CFM/PDI Enhancement Option, Adding Color 39
Color Flow, Adding Color 40 ALARA, Getting Started 37, Bioeffects A–10
Acoustic Output, Getting Started 37 Angle

546L, Bioeffects A–24, Bioeffects A–45, Calculation, Abdom/Small Parts 7, Cardiology 41
Bioeffects A–46, Bioeffects A–52 Correction (Theta), Doppler, Doppler 23
739L, Bioeffects A–24, Bioeffects A–47 Correction Control, Getting Started 46
Adjusting, Basic Scan 19 Annotation, Basic Scan 49
B–Mode, B-Mode 6 Blue Shift, Basic Scan 55
B510, Bioeffects A–20, Bioeffects A–34, Clear, Basic Scan 50
Bioeffects A–35 CTRL+M, Basic Scan 50
Best Practices, Safety 19 Cursor Home, Basic Scan 50
C364, Bioeffects A–21, Bioeffects A–36 Editing, Basic Scan 56
C386, Bioeffects A–21, Bioeffects A–38 Image, Basic Scan 54
C551, Bioeffects A–22, Bioeffects A–40 Library, Basic Scan 51
C721, Bioeffects A–22, Bioeffects A–42 Red Shift, Basic Scan 55
CWD2, Bioeffects A–20, Bioeffects A–60 Set, Basic Scan 51
CWD5, Bioeffects A–21, Bioeffects A–60 Shift+TAB, Basic Scan 51
Display, Basic Scan 18 Special Keys, Basic Scan 55
Doppler, Doppler 17 Tab, Basic Scan 51
E721, Bioeffects A–23, Bioeffects A–43
Fetal Exposure, OB/GYN 7 Aortic Valve, Cardiology 124, Cardiology 129
General Warning, OB/GYN 7
t
Index 1
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
Apical 2 Chamber, Cardiology 120 Optimizing the Image, B-Mode 5

Penetration, B-Mode 28
Apical 4 Chamber, Cardiology 117
Rejection, B-Mode 37
Application Presets, Defining a User Preset, Reverse, B-Mode 16
Customize 141 Scan Area Position, B-Mode 15
Scan Area Size, B-Mode 14
Archive, Image, Basic Scan 79
Sub–Menu, Basic Scan 38
Audio Tag Position, B-Mode 34
Speakers, Getting Started 28 TGC, B-Mode 8
VCR Recording, VCR Operation H–30 Top Menu, Basic Scan 38
Volume Control, VCR Operation H–31 Typical Exam, B-Mode 3
With Doppler, Doppler 19
Audio Volume, Getting Started 46
Doppler, Doppler 21 B–Mode Analysis
Auto Sequence
Programming, Cardiology 98 Parasternal Long Axis, Cardiology 113
Parasternal Short Axis
Top Menu, Basic Scan 45 Aortic Valve, Cardiology 114
Auto Trace, Doppler, Doppler 43 Mitral Valve, Cardiology 115
Papillary Muscles, Cardiology 116
Aux
Gain, Cardiology 67 B/M Gain, Getting Started 44
Positn, Cardiology 68 B–Mode, B-Mode 12
Wave, Cardiology 66 M–Mode, M-Mode 6
B/W Video Page Printer, Basic Scan 80
B510, Probes 43
B Backup, User Data, Customize 151
B Pause, Getting Started 47 Baseline Shift, Getting Started 47
Doppler, Doppler 30 Color Flow, Adding Color 14
B–Mode Doppler, Doppler 29
Acoustic Output, B-Mode 6 Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 22,
B/M Gain, B-Mode 12 Cardiology 109
Biopsy Guidelines, B-Mode 31
Circumference/Area, Gen. Meas/Calcs 11 Bioeffects
Color, B-Mode 30 Acoustic output, Bioeffects A–6
Color Tag, B-Mode 33 ALARA, Bioeffects A–10
Colorized, B-Mode 30 Concerns surrounding diagnostic ultrasound,
Bioeffects A–1
Endnotes, Bioeffects A–63
Color Tag, B-Mode 33
Mechanical, Bioeffects A–3
Tag Position, B-Mode 34
Operator awareness, Bioeffects A–4
Depth, B-Mode 10
Thermal, Bioeffects A–2
Display, Basic Scan 14
Tissue characteristics, Bioeffects A–5
Display Format(Dual), B-Mode 17
Training and user assistance, Bioeffects A–19
Distance Measurement, Gen. Meas/Calcs 7
Dual Format, B-Mode 17 Biological Hazard, Safety 5, Safety 10
Dynamic Range, B-Mode 18
Echo Level Measurement, Gen. Meas/Calcs 13 Biopsy
Edge Enhance, B-Mode 39 Depth Cursor, B-Mode 32
Focus Number, B-Mode 22 Guidelines, B-Mode 31
Focus Position, B-Mode 24 Procedures, Biopsy 1
Frame Averaging, B-Mode 26 Accessories & supplies, Biopsy 5
Gray Scale, B-Mode 30 Guide attachment, Biopsy 10
Gray Scale Map, B-Mode 20 Probes, Biopsy 21
Image Rotation, B-Mode 35 Special concerns, Biopsy 3
Image Softener, B-Mode 29 Blue Shift, Basic Scan 55
Measurements, Gen. Meas/Calcs 1
Index 2 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
Body Patterns, Getting Started 40, Basic Scan 57 Apical 4 Chamber, Cardiology 117
Illustrations, Patterns Available, Basic Scan 58 Left/Right Ventricle, Cardiology 121
Package Selections, Customize 107 Mitral Valve, Cardiology 123, Cardiology 127
Programming Packages 1–8, Customize 92 Parasternal Long Axis, Cardiology 113
Sub–Menu, Basic Scan 45 Parasternal Short Axis
Aortic Valve, Cardiology 114
Bullet Method, Cardiology 13, Cardiology 103
Mitral Valve, Cardiology 115
Pulmonic Valve, Cardiology 125, Cardiology 131
C Tricuspid Valve, Cardiology 126, Cardiology 133
Cardiac Output, Abdom/Small Parts 23
C364, Probes 25 Automatic Calculation, Abdom/Small Parts 25
C386, Probes 26 Cardiology, Cardiology 1
C551, Probes 27 Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 22
BSA Calculation Methods, Cardiology 6
C721, Probes 28 Bullet Method, Cardiology 13
Calculations, Cardiology 37
Calculation, Accuracy, System Data B–5
Cubed Method, Cardiology 7
Calculation Formulas ECG, Cardiology 57
Biplane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 36 Exam Menu, Basic Scan 8
Bullet Method, Cardiology 33 Measurements
General, Abdom/Small Parts 31 % Stenosis, Cardiology 43
GYN, OB/GYN 98 Angle, Cardiology 41
Left Ventricular, Cardiology 31 ET, Cardiology 50
Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 109 Max PG, Cardiology 52
Bullet Method, Cardiology 103 Mean PG, Cardiology 54
Cubed Method, Cardiology 99 MVA, Cardiology 49
Gibson Method, Cardiology 111 PHT, Cardiology 48
Modified Simpson’s Rule Method, Volume, Cardiology 37
Cardiology 105 Modified Simpson’s Rule Method, Cardiology 13
Single Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 107 Overview, Cardiology 3
Teichholz Method, Cardiology 101 Single Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 22
Modified Simpson’s Rule Method, Cardiology 34 Teichholz Method, Cardiology 7
Single Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 35
Teichholz Method, Cardiology 32 Care and Maintenance, Cleaning the system
Vascular, Vascular 26 Air Filters, User Maintenance 59
Advanced, Vascular 37 Cabinet, User Maintenance 55
Foot Switch, User Maintenance 57
Calculations Monitor, User Maintenance 55
Cardiology, Cardiology 37 Multi Image Camera, User Maintenance 58
Erasing, Gen. Meas/Calcs 4 Operator control panel, User Maintenance 57
General Instructions, Gen. Meas/Calcs 3 Page Printer, User Maintenance 58
GYN, OB/GYN 1 VCR, User Maintenance 57
OB, OB/GYN 1
Urology, Abdom/Small Parts 33 Caution, Safety 3, Assistance D–2
Vascular, Vascular 6 CFM. See Color Flow
Capture, Color Flow, Adding Color 30 CFM Shrink, Doppler, Doppler 53
Capture Frame, Basic Scan 78 CFM/PDI Enhancement, Adding Color 39
Cardiac Calculation Formulas CFM/PWD Ratio, Doppler, Doppler 51
Aortic Valve, Cardiology 124, Cardiology 129
Apical 2 Chamber, Cardiology 120 CINE, CINE Capture, Basic Scan 77
t
Index 3
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
Cine, Basic Scan 75 Common Controls, Adding Color 10

Accessing, Basic Scan 73 Control Layout, Adding Color 9
Capture Frame, Basic Scan 78 Diag Mode, Adding Color 20
Cine Gauge, Basic Scan 77 Display, Basic Scan 27
Cine Guage/Image Tracking, Basic Scan 78 Exiting, Adding Color 7
Exiting, Basic Scan 78 Frame Average, Adding Color 23
Functionality, Basic Scan 72 Gain, Adding Color 11
Helpful Hints, Basic Scan 78 High Resolution, Adding Color 27
Introduction, Basic Scan 71 M–Mode, Adding Color 7
Loop Speed, Basic Scan 76 Maps, Adding Color 17
Memory, Basic Scan 72 Measurements, Gen. Meas/Calcs 1
Multipl, Basic Scan 76 Mode
Side Change, Basic Scan 77 Distance, Gen. Meas/Calcs 25
Sub–Menu, Basic Scan 45 Echo Level (gray scale), Gen. Meas/Calcs 25
Top Menu, Basic Scan 45 Trace, Gen. Meas/Calcs 25
Using Cine Loop, Basic Scan 74 Velocity Point, Gen. Meas/Calcs 26
MTI Filter, Adding Color 22
CINE Capture, Basic Scan 77
Noise Blanker, Adding Color 41
Cine Scroll, Getting Started 44 Packet Size, Adding Color 31
Penetration (Penet.), Adding Color 25
Circuit breaker, Getting Started 18
Persistence, Adding Color 42
Class I Equipment, Safety 13 Select, Adding Color 10
Slant Scan, Adding Color 18
Cleaning Spatial Filter, Adding Color 33
Foot Switch, User Maintenance 57 Spectrum Invert, Adding Color 12
Monitor, User Maintenance 55 Sub–Menu, Basic Scan 42, Adding Color 6,
Multi Image Camera, User Maintenance 58 Adding Color 7
Operator control panel, User Maintenance 57 Tag Position, Adding Color 38
Page Printer, User Maintenance 58 Threshold, Adding Color 28
System cabinet, User Maintenance 55 Top Menu, Basic Scan 42
VCR, User Maintenance 57 Typical Exam, Adding Color 3
Clear, Getting Started 41 Velocity Scale, Adding Color 13
Velocity Tag, Adding Color 36
Clinical instructions for fetal use, Bioeffects A–11 W.E. Cancel, Adding Color 35
Fetal heart, Bioeffects A–13 Window, Linear Probe, Adding Color 18
Umbilical artery, Bioeffects A–11 Window Size, Adding Color 15
Uterine artery, Bioeffects A–12
Color Printer, Troubleshooting, User
Color Maintenance 17
B–Mode, B-Mode 30
Doppler, Doppler 45 Color Tag
Gray Scale B–Mode, B-Mode 33
B–Mode, B-Mode 30 Color Flow, Adding Color 36
Color Tag, B-Mode 33 Doppler, Doppler 46
Tag Position, B-Mode 34 M–Mode, M-Mode 22
Basics, Adding Color 49 Color Threshold, Color Flow, Adding Color 28
Doppler, Doppler 45
Color Tag, Doppler 46 Color Video Page Printer, Basic Scan 81
Tag Position, Doppler 47 Comment, Getting Started 39
M–Mode, M-Mode 21 Displaying, Basic Scan 53
Color Tag, M-Mode 22 Editing, Basic Scan 52, Basic Scan 56
Tag Position, M-Mode 23 Entering, Basic Scan 52
M–Mode, M-Mode 21 Scripts, Basic Scan 53
Color Flow, Adding Color 1 Sub–Menu, Basic Scan 46
ACE, Adding Color 40 Comments, Venous Page, Vascular 34
Activating, Adding Color 5
Baseline Shift, Adding Color 14 Console Labels, Safety 24
Capture, Adding Color 30 Contraindications, Doppler, Introduction 7
Color Window, Adding Color 5
Index 4 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
Control Display, Basic Scan 13

Acoustic Output, Getting Started 37 A Output, Basic Scan 18
B/M Gain, Getting Started 44 Acoustic Output %, Basic Scan 15
Cine Scroll, Getting Started 44 Angle, Basic Scan 23
Depth, Getting Started 43 B–Mode, Basic Scan 13
Gain, Getting Started 46 B–Mode Format, Basic Scan 14
CFM, Getting Started 46 B/W Threshold Marker, Basic Scan 28
Doppler, Getting Started 46 Body Pattern, Basic Scan 17
Rotation, Getting Started 41 CFM Area Cursor, Basic Scan 28
TGC, Getting Started 37 CG, Basic Scan 28
Volume, Getting Started 46 Color Flow, Basic Scan 27
Zoom Size, Getting Started 41 Color Scale, Basic Scan 16, Basic Scan 28
D. Velocity, Basic Scan 24
Control Panel
Date, Basic Scan 15
Replacing key caps, User Maintenance 60
Depth, Basic Scan 17
Replacing key lamps, User Maintenance 60
DF, Basic Scan 23
Control Z, VCR Counter Reset, VCR DG, Basic Scan 23
Operation H–21 Doppler, Basic Scan 22
Dual Spectrum, Basic Scan 26
Controls, Getting Started 31
Spectrum, Basic Scan 25
Counter, VCR Display, VCR Operation H–19 Dual B–Mode Display Format, Basic Scan 30
Dual Format, Basic Scan 31
Coupling Gels, Probes 22 Dyn, Basic Scan 17
Cubed Method, Cardiology 7, Cardiology 99 FR/Cine, Basic Scan 17
GA, Basic Scan 15
Cursor Gain, Basic Scan 17
Annotation, Basic Scan 49 Gray Scale, Basic Scan 16
Biopsy Depth, B-Mode 32 Hospital Name, Basic Scan 15
Color Flow Doppler, Adding Color 18 HPRF, Basic Scan 24
Doppler, Doppler 20 HR, Basic Scan 18
Cursors, Gen. Meas/Calcs 6 ID, Basic Scan 15
Image Rotation, B-Mode 35
Custom Display Presets, Customize 15 M–Mode
Customizing Your System, Customize 1 Dual Spectrum, Basic Scan 26
CWD Measurements, Basic Scan 18
Sub Menu, Basic Scan 41 MTI Filter, Basic Scan 28
Top Menu, Basic Scan 41 Operator Messages, Basic Scan 18
CWD2, Probes 45 Patient Name, Basic Scan 15
PRF, Basic Scan 23
CWD5, Probes 46 Probe
Name, Basic Scan 15
Orientation, Basic Scan 15
Sample Volume Length (SVL), Basic Scan 23
D Scale Marker, Basic Scan 20
Scroll Depth, Basic Scan 21
Danger, Safety 3, Safety 9 Soft Menu, Basic Scan 33
Defibrillator Caution, Safety 24 SPEC INV, Basic Scan 24
TGC Curve, Basic Scan 21
Depth, Getting Started 43 Time, Basic Scan 15
B–Mode, B-Mode 10 Time Scale, Basic Scan 24
Device Labels, Safety 11 Top/Bottom B Large Preset, Basic Scan 29
Top/Bottom B Mid Preset, Basic Scan 29
Diag Mode, Color Flow, Adding Color 20 Top/Bottom B Small Preset, Basic Scan 30
Diagnostics, Operator, User Maintenance 23 TV Counter, Basic Scan 17
Accessing, User Maintenance 24 Units (V or F), Basic Scan 28
Velocity Scale, Basic Scan 28
Diastolic/Systolic Ratio (D/S), OB/GYN 30 VTR Counter, Basic Scan 17
Disk Drive, Floppy Disk, Getting Started 24 VTR Status, Basic Scan 17
t
Index 5
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
Wall Filter (WV), Basic Scan 23 PWD

Zoom, Basic Scan 21 Sub–Menu, Doppler 11
with Reference, Basic Scan 31 Uses, Doppler 12
Rejection, Doppler 49
Display Format(Dual), B–Mode, B-Mode 17
Sample Volume Length, Doppler 37
Display Messages, User Maintenance 14 Slant Scan, Doppler 33
Spectral Gain, Doppler 22
Doppler Spectrum, Gain, Doppler 22
Acoustic Output, Doppler 17 Spectrum Invert, Doppler 25
Activating CWD, Doppler 13 Sweep Speed, Doppler 39
Activating PWD, Doppler 11 Tag Position, Doppler 47
Angle Correction, Getting Started 46, TAMAX, Gen. Meas/Calcs 16
Doppler 23
Typical Exam
Audio Volume, Doppler 21
CWD, Doppler 10
Auto Trace, Doppler 43
PWD, Doppler 6
B Pause, Doppler 30
Typical Use, Doppler 3
B–Mode Controls, Doppler 19
Velocity Scale, Doppler 26
Baseline Shift, Doppler 29
Wall Filter, Doppler 35
CFM Shrink, Doppler 53
CFM/PWD Ratio, Doppler 51 Doppler Analysis
Color, Doppler 45 Aortic Valve, Cardiology 129
Color Flow, Adding Color 1 Mitral Valve, Cardiology 127
Activating, Adding Color 5 Pulmonic Valve, Cardiology 131
Common Controls, Adding Color 10 Tricuspid Valve, Cardiology 133
Control Layout, Adding Color 9
Dual, Cardiology 61
M–Mode, Adding Color 7
Typical Exam, Adding Color 3 Dual Format, B–Mode, B-Mode 17
Color Gain, Adding Color 11
Color Tag, Doppler 46 Dynamic Range
Color Window, Adding Color 5 B–Mode, B-Mode 18
Colorized Gray Scale, Doppler 45 Doppler, Doppler 31
Color Tag, Doppler 46 M–Mode, M-Mode 12
Tag Position, Doppler 47
Continuous Wave
Definition, Doppler 9
Non–Imaging, Doppler 9
E
Steerable, Doppler 9
E721, Probes 29
Contraindications, Introduction 7
Control Layout, Doppler 16 ECG, Cardiology 57
CWD, Sub–Menus, Doppler 13 Cine Guage/Image Tracking, Basic Scan 78,
Display, Basic Scan 22, Basic Scan 25, Cardiology 69
Doppler 4 Gain, Cardiology 67
Dual Display, Basic Scan 26 Lead Placement, Cardiology 59
Dynamic Range, Doppler 31 Positn, Cardiology 68
Fetal Exams Soft Menu, Cardiology 58
Contraindications, OB/GYN 5 Sub–Menu, Basic Scan 44
Indications, OB/GYN 5 Top Menu, Basic Scan 44
Fetal use, Introduction 6 Wave, Cardiology 66
High PRF, Doppler 8
Edge Enhance
HPRF, Doppler 48
B–Mode, B-Mode 39
Introduction, Doppler 3
M–Mode, M-Mode 17
M/D Cursor, Doppler 20
Measurements, Gen. Meas/Calcs 1 Electrical Hazard, Safety 5, Safety 8, Safety 9
Optimization, Doppler 15
Ellipse, Getting Started 41
Peak Velocity, Gen. Meas/Calcs 15
Penetration, Doppler 41 EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility), Safety 14
Pulsed Wave
Definition, Doppler 5 End Frame, Basic Scan 74
Frequencies Used, Doppler 5
Index 6 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
Endometrium Thickness, OB/GYN 93 Angle, Abdom/Small Parts 7

Cardiac Output (CO), Abdom/Small Parts 23
Equipment Safety, Safety 9
CFM Mode, Velocity Point. See General
ET (Ejection Time), Cardiology 50 Calculations
Heart Rate (HR), Abdom/Small Parts 16,
Exam Abdom/Small Parts 28, Abdom/Small
Application Presets, Defining a User Preset, Parts 29, Abdom/Small Parts 30
Customize 141 Radiology/Abdomen. See General
Beginning, Basic Scan 3 Calculations
Explosion Hazard, Safety 6, Safety 9 Small Parts. See General Calculations
Stroke Volume Ratio (SV), Abdom/Small
External Video, Getting Started 45 Parts 26
TAMAX, Abdom/Small Parts 18, Abdom/Small
Parts 30
Urology. See General Calculations
F Volume, Abdom/Small Parts 3
Fetal Doppler, OB/GYN 5 General Measurements, Gen. Meas/Calcs 1

Efficacy, Bioeffects A–14 Gestational Sac (GS), OB/GYN 28
Cardiac anomalies, Bioeffects A–14
IUGR, Bioeffects A–14 Gibson Method, Cardiology 111
Summary, Bioeffects A–15 Gray Scale
Suggested guidelines, Bioeffects A–16 Colorized
Methodology, Bioeffects A–17 B–Mode, B-Mode 30
Variance studies, Bioeffects A–18 Color Tag, B-Mode 33
Fetal Growth Trend Tag Position, B-Mode 34
Data List Management, OB/GYN 72 Basics, Adding Color 49
Growth Trending, OB/GYN 63 Doppler, Doppler 45
List ID Management, OB/GYN 64 Color Tag, Doppler 46
Storing Patient Information, OB/GYN 57 Tag Position, Doppler 47
M–Mode, M-Mode 21
Fetal Heart Rate, OB/GYN 33 Color Tag, M-Mode 22
Fetal Trend Management, OB/GYN 57 Tag Position, M-Mode 23
Multigestation option, OB/GYN 81 M–Mode, M-Mode 14
Map, B–Mode, B-Mode 20
Fetus Number, OB/GYN 75
Ground Point, Safety 25
Floppy Disk Drive, Getting Started 24
GS, OB Measurements, OB/GYN 28
Focus
Number, B–Mode, B-Mode 22 Guidelines, Biopsy, B–Mode, B-Mode 31
Position, B–Mode, B-Mode 24 GYN
Foot Switch, Getting Started 20 Calculation Formulas, OB/GYN 98
Cleaning, User Maintenance 57 Exam Menu, Basic Scan 8
Exam Preparation, OB/GYN 3
Frame Averaging Measurements, OB/GYN 89, OB/GYN 92
B–Mode, B-Mode 26 Endometrium Thickness, OB/GYN 93
Color Flow, Adding Color 23 Ovarian Height, OB/GYN 89
Freeze, Getting Started 44, Basic Scan 69 Ovarian Length, OB/GYN 89
Foot Switch, Basic Scan 70 Ovarian Width, OB/GYN 89
RI, OB/GYN 95
Uterine Height, OB/GYN 92
Uterine Length, OB/GYN 92
G Uterine Width, OB/GYN 92
Summary Report, Layout, OB/GYN 97
Gain
CFM, Getting Started 46
Color Doppler, Adding Color 11
Doppler, Getting Started 46
General Calculations
% Stenosis, Abdom/Small Parts 9
t
Index 7
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
CFM Select, Getting Started 46

H Clear, Getting Started 41
Comment, Getting Started 39
Hazard Doppler Select, Getting Started 46
Acoustic Output, Safety 5 Ellipse, Getting Started 41
Symbols, Safety 5 External Video, Getting Started 45
Heart Rate (HR), Abdom/Small Parts 16, Freeze, Getting Started 44
Abdom/Small Parts 28, Abdom/Small Parts ID/Name, Getting Started 33
29, Abdom/Small Parts 30, OB/GYN 33, Illumination, Getting Started 32, Basic Scan 36
Vascular 19 Image Memory, Getting Started 43
Image Recall, Getting Started 43
High Resolution, Color Flow, Adding Color 27
M/D Cursor, Getting Started 39
HPRF, Doppler, Doppler 48 Measurement, Getting Started 40
Mic, Getting Started 45
HR, OB/GYN 33, Vascular 19
Mode, Getting Started 42
New Patient, Getting Started 33, Getting
Started 43
I Pause, Getting Started 45
Play, Getting Started 45
Probe Controls, Getting Started 34
I739, Probes 31
Record, Getting Started 45
ID/Name, Getting Started 33, Basic Scan 10 Record 1, Getting Started 43
Record 2, Getting Started 43
Illumination, key, Getting Started 32
Reverse, Getting Started 43
Image Scan Area, Getting Started 39
Annotation, Basic Scan 49, Basic Scan 54 Set, Getting Started 41
Archiving, Basic Scan 79 Soft Menu, Getting Started 35
Freeze, Basic Scan 69 Spectrum Invert, Getting Started 47
Memory, Basic Scan 84 Stop, Getting Started 45
Printing User Define, Getting Started 48
B/W Video Page Printer, Basic Scan 80 Velocity Scale, Getting Started 47
Color Video Page Printer, Basic Scan 81 Zoom, Getting Started 41
Multi–Image Camera (MIC), Basic Scan 82
Keyboard, Getting Started 31, Getting Started 49
Recall, Basic Scan 85 Back Space, Getting Started 49
Rotation, B–Mode, B-Mode 35 Blue Shift, Getting Started 50
Softener, B–Mode, B-Mode 29 Caps Lock, Getting Started 50
Image Archive Option Control, Getting Started 49
Sub–Menu, Basic Scan 44 Cursor Home, Getting Started 49
Top Menu, Basic Scan 44 Escape, Getting Started 49
Red Shift, Getting Started 50
Image Memory, Getting Started 43 Return, Getting Started 49
Image Recall, Getting Started 43, Basic Scan 85 Tab, Getting Started 50
Index of Presets, Customize 5
Information, Requesting, Assistance D–1 L
L764, Probes 34
LA39, Probes 36
K
Labels, Icon Description, Safety 11
Key Laser Camera, Basic Scan 83
B Pause, Getting Started 47
Baseline Shift, Getting Started 47 Leakage Current, Safety 13
Body Pattern, Getting Started 39
Index 8 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
Left Ventricular, Calculation Formulas, Display, Basic Scan 25

Cardiology 31 Dual Display, Basic Scan 26
Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 109 Dynamic Range, M-Mode 12
Bullet Method, Cardiology 103 Edge Enhance, M-Mode 17
Cubed Method, Cardiology 99 Gray Scale, M-Mode 14
Gibson Method, Cardiology 111 Introduction, M-Mode 3
Modified Simpson’s Rule Method, M/D Cursor, M-Mode 8
Cardiology 105 Measurements, Gen. Meas/Calcs 1
Single Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 107 Optimizing, M-Mode 5
Teichholz Method, Cardiology 101 Rejection, M-Mode 15
Left/Right Ventricle, Cardiology 121 Sub Menu, Basic Scan 39
Sweep Speed, M-Mode 19
Library, Annotation, Basic Scan 51 Tag Position, M-Mode 23
Entering/Editing, Basic Scan 52 Time, Gen. Meas/Calcs 19, Gen. Meas/Calcs 23
Tissue Depth, Gen. Meas/Calcs 22
Locatn (Location), OB/GYN 29
Top Menu, Basic Scan 39
LOGIQ 500 Typical Exam, M-Mode 3
Back view, Getting Started 8 Zoom, Basic Scan 65, M-Mode 9
Features, Introduction 8
M–Mode Analysis
Front view, Getting Started 7
General Indications for Use, Introduction 6
Left/Right Ventricle, Cardiology 121
Left side view, Getting Started 6
Moving, Getting Started 52
Pulmonic Valve, Cardiology 125
Relocating, Getting Started 51
Tricuspid Valve, Cardiology 126
Right side view, Getting Started 9
Transporting, Getting Started 53 M/D Cursor, Getting Started 40, Getting Started 46
Wheels, Setting the Lock, Getting Started 55 Doppler, Doppler 20
M–Mode, M-Mode 8
Loop, Cine, Basic Scan 74
Maintenance, User Maintenance 53
Loop Speed, Basic Scan 76
Cleaning the Air Filters, User Maintenance 59
LT Bifurc, Vascular 8 User, User Maintenance 1
Who to Contact, User Maintenance 4, User
LT CCA, Vascular 8 Maintenance 5
LT ECA, Vascular 8
Max PG, Abdom/Small Parts 19, Cardiology 52
LT ICA, Vascular 8 Automatic Calculation, Abdom/Small Parts 20,
Cardiology 53
LT ICA/CCA, Vascular 10 Cardiology Calculations, Cardiology 52
General Calculations, Abdom/Small Parts 19
Mean PG, Abdom/Small Parts 21, Cardiology 54
M Abdomen/Small Parts Calculations,
Abdom/Small Parts 21
M–Mode, M-Mode 1, M-Mode 5 Automatic Calculation, Abdom/Small Parts 22
B/M Gain, M-Mode 6 Cardiology Calculations, Cardiology 54
Color, M-Mode 21 Measurement, Getting Started 40
Color Flow, Adding Color 7 Accuracy, System Data B–3
Color Tag, M-Mode 22 Cursors, Gen. Meas/Calcs 6
Colorized Gray Scale, M-Mode 21 Key, Gen. Meas/Calcs 6
Color Tag, M-Mode 22
Tag Position, M-Mode 23 Measurement Pressed, Sub–Menu, Basic Scan 46
Depth Difference, Gen. Meas/Calcs 24
t
Index 9
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
Measurements Radiology/Abdomen. See General

Abdomen/Small Parts Calculations
A/B Ratio, Abdom/Small Parts 14 Single Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 22
Pulsatility Index (PI), Abdom/Small Parts 14 Small Parts. See General Calculations
Resistance Index (RI), Abdom/Small Parts 14 Teichholz Method, Cardiology 7
S/D Ratio, Abdom/Small Parts 14 Urology. See General Calculations
B–Mode Vascular, Vascular 5
Circumference/Area, Gen. Meas/Calcs 11 A/B Ratio, Vascular 12
Distance, Gen. Meas/Calcs 7 Heart Rate, Vascular 19
Echo Level, Gen. Meas/Calcs 13 Pulsatility Index (PI), Vascular 12
Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 22 Resistance Index (RI), Vascular 12
Bullet Method, Cardiology 13 RT(LT) Bifurc, Vascular 8
Calculations, Gen. Meas/Calcs 4 RT(LT) CCA, Vascular 8
Cardiology RT(LT) ECA, Vascular 8
% Stenosis, Cardiology 43 RT(LT) ICA, Vascular 8
Angle, Cardiology 41 RT(LT) ICA/CCA, Vascular 10
ET, Cardiology 50 S/D Ratio, Vascular 12
MVA, Cardiology 49 Volume, Cardiology 37
PHT, Cardiology 48
Memory
Volume, Cardiology 37
Cine, Basic Scan 72
Color Flow
Image, Basic Scan 84
Distance, Gen. Meas/Calcs 25
Storage Space, Basic Scan 85
Echo Level (gray scale), Gen. Meas/Calcs 25
Image Recall, Basic Scan 85
Trace, Gen. Meas/Calcs 25
Velocity Point. See General Calculations Mic, Getting Started 45, VCR Operation H–30
Controls, Gen. Meas/Calcs 5
MIC (Multi–Image Camera), Basic Scan 82
Doppler Microphone. See Mic
Mitral Valve, Cardiology 123, Cardiology 127
TAMAX, Gen. Meas/Calcs 16
General, Gen. Meas/Calcs 1 Mode, Controls, Getting Started 42
General Instructions, Gen. Meas/Calcs 3
GYN, OB/GYN 1, OB/GYN 89, OB/GYN 92 Modified Simpson’s Rule Method, Cardiology 13,
Cardiology 105
Endometrium Thickness, OB/GYN 93
Ovarian Height, OB/GYN 89 Monitor
Ovarian Length, OB/GYN 89 Adjustment
Ovarian Width, OB/GYN 89 Brightness, Getting Started 27
RI, OB/GYN 95 Contrast, Getting Started 27
Uterine Height, OB/GYN 92 Position, Getting Started 26
Uterine Length, OB/GYN 92 Cleaning, User Maintenance 55
Uterine Width, OB/GYN 92 Labels, Safety 21
M–Mode
Depth Difference, Gen. Meas/Calcs 24 Moving Hazard, Safety 5
Time, Gen. Meas/Calcs 19, Gen. MTI Filter, Color Flow, Adding Color 22
Meas/Calcs 23 Multi Image Camera
Tissue Depth, Gen. Meas/Calcs 22 Cleaning, User Maintenance 58
Modified Simpson’s Rule Method, Cardiology 13 Troubleshooting, User Maintenance 18
OB, OB/GYN 1
Multigestation
Basic OB option, OB/GYN 75
D/S Ratio, OB/GYN 30
Change Number of Fetuses, OB/GYN 77
GS, OB/GYN 28
Distinguishing each Fetus, OB/GYN 76
Hints, OB/GYN 35
Fetal Trend Management, OB/GYN 81
HR, OB/GYN 33
Measurements/Calcs, OB/GYN 76
Locatn, OB/GYN 29
OB Graph, OB/GYN 79
Pulsatility Index (PI), OB/GYN 30
Patient Entry Menu, OB/GYN 75
Resistance Index (RI), OB/GYN 30
Report Page Layout, OB/GYN 78
S/D Ratio, OB/GYN 30
TAMAX Auto, OB/GYN 32 MVA (Mitral Valve Area), Cardiology 49
Index 10 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
Table Data, OB Tables F–1

N
OB Format Selection, OB/GYN 9
New Patient, Getting Started 33, Basic Scan 3, OB Graph, Multigestation, OB/GYN 79
Basic Scan 4
Exam Category, Basic Scan 6 OFD, Measurement from HC, OB/GYN 39
Patient Entry Menu, Basic Scan 4
Operator intervention, Bioeffects A–8
Rad/Abdomen, Basic Scan 7
Cardiology, Basic Scan 8 Optimizing, B–Mode, B-Mode 5
Gynecology, Basic Scan 8
Obstetrics, Basic Scan 7 Ov–H, OB/GYN 91
Small Parts, Basic Scan 10 Ov–L, OB/GYN 91
Urology, Basic Scan 9
Vascular, Basic Scan 9 Ov–W, OB/GYN 91
Noise Blanker, Color Flow, Adding Color 41 Ovarian

Height, OB/GYN 91
Non–Ionizing Radiation, Safety 6 Length, OB/GYN 90
Width, OB/GYN 91
O
P
OB, OB/GYN 37
Anatomical Survey, OB/GYN 47 P509, Probes 44
Editing, OB/GYN 48
User Programmed Features, OB/GYN 49 Packet Size
Data Management Center (DMC), OB/GYN 83 Affect on frame rate, Adding Color 32
Exam Menu, Basic Scan 7 Color Flow, Adding Color 31
Exam Preparation, OB/GYN 3 Page Printer, Cleaning, User Maintenance 58
Fetal Trend Management. See Fetal Growth
Trend Parasternal Long Axis, Cardiology 113
Formulas Parasternal Short Axis
European Version, OB/GYN 21 Aortic Valve, Cardiology 114
Osaka University Method, OB/GYN 14 Mitral Valve, Cardiology 115
Other Available Formulas, OB/GYN 23 Papillary Muscles, Cardiology 116
Tokyo University Method, OB/GYN 11
USA Version, OB/GYN 16 Password, Protection at Power Up, Getting
Graph, OB/GYN 51 Started 14
Changing Selection, OB/GYN 54 Patient Entry Menu, Basic Scan 4
Selection, OB/GYN 52 Cardiology, Basic Scan 8
Measurements Gynecology, Basic Scan 8
A/B Ratio, OB/GYN 30 Obstetrics, Basic Scan 7
D/S Ratio, OB/GYN 30 Rad/Abdomen, Basic Scan 7
GS, OB/GYN 28 Small Parts, Basic Scan 10
Hints, OB/GYN 35 Urology, Basic Scan 9
HR, OB/GYN 33 Vascular, Basic Scan 9
Locatn, OB/GYN 29
Pulsatility Index (PI), OB/GYN 30 Patient Safety, Safety 7
Resistance Index (RI), OB/GYN 30 Pause, Getting Started 45
Soft Menu, OB/GYN 10 PCG
TAMAX Auto, OB/GYN 32 Gain, Cardiology 67
Summary Report, OB/GYN 37 Positn, Cardiology 68
Editing, OB/GYN 45 Wave, Cardiology 66
European Version Layout, OB/GYN 40 PDI, Adding Color 45
Osaka University Layout, OB/GYN 41 Optimizing, Adding Color 46, Adding Color 47
Recording, OB/GYN 46
USA Version Layout, OB/GYN 39 Penet., Color Flow, Adding Color 25
t
Index 11
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
Penetration Frame Averaging, B-Mode 26

B–Mode, B-Mode 28 Image Softener, B-Mode 29
Doppler, Doppler 41 Color Flow
Capture, Adding Color 30
Peripherals, Peripherals C–1
Diag Mode, Adding Color 22
Black/White Video Printer, Peripherals C–2
Frame Average, Adding Color 23
Color Video Printer, Peripherals C–4
High Resolution, Adding Color 27
Multi–Image Camera, Peripherals C–9
Doppler, Dynamic Range, Doppler 31
S–VHS Video Cassette Recorder,
M–Mode
Peripherals C–6
Dynamic Range, M-Mode 12
Persistence, Color Flow, Adding Color 42 Edge Enhance, M-Mode 17
Personnel Safety, Safety 9 Precaution Levels, Safety 3
PHT (Pressure Half Time), Cardiology 48 Preset
Physio Sweep Speed, Cardiology 58
Planned Maintenance, User Maintenance 61
Preset Index, Customize 5
Preset Parameters, Customize 1, Customize 15,
Post Processing Customize 79, Customize 105
B–Mode Save Values, Customize 139
Color, B-Mode 30 Top Menu, Defining a User Preset,
Color Tag, B-Mode 33 Customize 141
Gray Scale Map, B-Mode 20 Preset Program, Customize 105
Color Flow Printing, Images, Basic Scan 80
Color Tag, Adding Color 36 Probe, Getting Started 21, Probes 1
Color Threshold, Adding Color 28 546L, Probes 32
Map, Adding Color 17 739L, Probes 33
Packet Size, Adding Color 31 Activating, Getting Started 23
Spatial Filter, Adding Color 33 Application, Probes 7
Tag Position, Adding Color 38 B510, Probes 43
W.E. Cancel, Adding Color 35 Biopsy Guidelines, B-Mode 31
Doppler Body Pattern Marker, Basic Scan 57
Color, Doppler 45 C364, Probes 25
Color Tag, Doppler 46 C386, Probes 26
Tag Position, Doppler 47 C551, Probes 27
Image Rotation, B-Mode 35 C721, Probes 28
M–Mode Care and Maintenance, Probes 12
Color, M-Mode 21 Cleaning, Probes 15
Color Tag, M-Mode 22 Connecting, Getting Started 21, Probes 11
Gray Scale Map, M-Mode 14 Controls, Getting Started 34
Rejection, M-Mode 15 Coupling Gels, Probes 22
Tag Position, M-Mode 23 Curved Array (Convex), Probes 24
Rejection CWD2, Probes 45
B–Mode, B-Mode 37 CWD5, Probes 46
Doppler, Doppler 49 Deactivating, Getting Started 24
Power, Getting Started 10 Description, Probes 23
Circuit Breaker, Getting Started 18 Disconnecting, Getting Started 22, Probes 11
Connection, Getting Started 10 Disinfecting, Probes 19
Cord, Getting Started 19 Dual Frequency Operation, Penetration,
Off, Getting Started 16 B-Mode 28, Doppler 41
On/Standby, Getting Started 12 E721, Probes 29
Environmental Requirements, Probes 12
Power Doppler Imaging, Adding Color 45 I739, Probes 31
Pre–Processing Immersion Levels, Probes 17
B–Mode L764, Probes 34
Dynamic Range, B-Mode 18 LA39, Probes 36
Edge Enhance, B-Mode 39 Labelling, Probes 4
Index 12 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
Linear
Color Flow Window, Adding Color 18 R
Doppler Cursor, Doppler 33
Linear Array, Biopsy guide zone, Probes 30 R Delay, Cardiology 65
Naming Conventions, Probes 23 Rad/Abdomen, Exam Menu, Basic Scan 7
Orientation Marker, Basic Scan 57
P509, Probes 44 Radiology/Abdomen
Planned Maintenance, Probes 22 Calculations. See General Calculations
S220, Probes 38 Measurements. See General Calculations
S222, Probes 39 Record, Getting Started 45
S316, Probes 40
S317, Probes 41 Record 1, Getting Started 43, Basic Scan 80,
S611, Probes 42 Basic Scan 81
Safety, Probes 13 Record 2, Getting Started 43, Basic Scan 80,
Coupling gels Basic Scan 81
Applying, Probes 22
Precautions, Probes 22 Recording, Audio, VCR Operation H–30
Sector, biopsy guide zone, Probes 37 Red Shift, Basic Scan 55
Special Handling Instructions, Probes 14
Specifications, Probes 8 Ref Scan, Cardiology 63
Storing, Getting Started 23 Regulatory Labels
T739, Probes 35 Americas Systems, Safety 27
Probe Name Menu, Basic Scan 37 European Systems, Safety 26
Pulmonic Valve, Cardiology 125, Cardiology 131 Rejection

B–Mode, B-Mode 37
Pulsatility Index (PI), Abdom/Small Parts 14, Doppler, Doppler 49
OB/GYN 30, Vascular 12 M–Mode, M-Mode 15
PWD Resistance Index (RI), Abdom/Small Parts 14,
See also Doppler OB/GYN 30, OB/GYN 95, Vascular 12
Top Menu, Basic Scan 40 Reverse, Getting Started 43
B–Mode, B-Mode 16
Review Loop, Basic Scan 75
Q RI, OB/GYN 95
Rotation, Getting Started 41
Quality Assurance, User Maintenance 29
B–Mode Image, B-Mode 35
Baselines, User Maintenance 34
Checklist, User Maintenance 51 RT Bifurc, Vascular 8
Frequency of tests, User Maintenance 31
RT CCA, Vascular 8
Introduction, User Maintenance 29
Periodic checks, User Maintenance 34 RT ECA, Vascular 8
Phantoms, User Maintenance 32
Record keeping, User Maintenance 50 RT ICA, Vascular 8
Results, User Maintenance 35 RT ICA/CCA, Vascular 10
System setup, User Maintenance 36
Test descriptions, User Maintenance 37
Axial distance measurement, User
Maintenance 38 S
Axial resolution, User Maintenance 41
Contrast resolution, User Maintenance 48 S220, Probes 38
Functional resolution, User Maintenance 47
Gray scale photography, User S222, Probes 39
Maintenance 49 S316, Probes 40
Lateral distance measurement, User
Lateral resolution, User Maintenance 43 S611, Probes 42
Penetration, User Maintenance 45
Typical tests, User Maintenance 30
t
Index 13
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
Safety, Safety 1 Exam Menu, Basic Scan 10

Acoustic Output, Safety 19 Measurements. See General Calculations
BF Equipment, Safety 13
Smoke & Fire Hazard, Safety 6, Safety 9
CF Equipment, Safety 13
Class I Equipment, Safety 13 Smoothing, B–Mode, Image Softener, B-Mode 29
EMC, Safety 14
Equipment and personnel safety Soft Key, Basic Scan 33
Explosion hazard, Safety 9 Soft Menu, Basic Scan 33
Smoke and fire hazard, Safety 9 B–Mode
Hazard Symbols, Icon Description, Safety 5 Biopsy Guidelines, B-Mode 31
Labels, Icon Description, Safety 11 Color, B-Mode 30
Leakage Current, Safety 13 Color Tag, B-Mode 33
Patient Dynamic Range, B-Mode 18
Diagnostic Information, Safety 7 Edge Enhance, B-Mode 39
Identification, Safety 7 Focus Number, B-Mode 22
Mechanical Hazards, Safety 7 Focus Position, B-Mode 24
Patient safety Frame Averaging, B-Mode 26
Acoustic Output hazard, Safety 8 Gray Scale Map, B-Mode 20
Diagnostic information, Safety 7 Image Rotation, B-Mode 35
Electrical hazard, Safety 8 Image Softener, B-Mode 29
Mechanical hazards, Safety 7 Penetration, B-Mode 28
Patient identification, Safety 7 Rejection, B-Mode 37
Training, ALARA, Safety 8 Tag Position, B-Mode 34
Precaution Levels, Icon Description, Safety 3 Color Flow
Safety hazards, defined, Safety 5– Safety 6 ACE, Adding Color 40
Safety icons, defined, Safety 3 Color Capture, Adding Color 30
Warning Label, Location, Safety 21 Color Flow Map, Adding Color 17
Sample Volume Length, Doppler, Doppler 37 Color Tag, Adding Color 36
Color Threshold, Adding Color 28
Save Values, Customize 139 Diag Mode, Adding Color 20
Scan Area, Getting Started 40
Color Flow Window Size, Adding Color 15
Position, B–Mode, B-Mode 15
Size, B–Mode, B-Mode 14
Packet Size, Adding Color 31
Select Penet., Adding Color 25
CFM, Getting Started 46 Persistence, Adding Color 42
Color Flow, Adding Color 10 Slant Scan, Adding Color 18
Doppler, Getting Started 46 Spatial Filter, Adding Color 33
Tag Position, Adding Color 38
Service, Requesting, Assistance D–1
W.E. Cancel, Adding Color 35
Set, Getting Started 41 Control Panel, Getting Started 35
Doppler
Set–Up
CFM/PWD Ratio, Doppler 51
Single, Cardiology 60 Color, Doppler 45
Color Tag, Doppler 46
Single Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 22,
Dynamic Range, Doppler 31
Cardiology 107
HPRF, Doppler 48
Site Requirements, Getting Started 4 Penetration, Doppler 41
Slant Scan
Color Flow, Adding Color 18
Slant Scan, Doppler 33
Doppler, Doppler 33
Sweep Speed, Doppler 39
Small Parts Tag Position, Doppler 47
Calculations. See General Calculations Wall Filter, Doppler 35
Index 14 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
M–Mode OB, OB/GYN 37

Color, M-Mode 21 Vascular
Color Tag, M-Mode 22 Displaying, Vascular 23
Dynamic Range, M-Mode 12 Editing, Vascular 25
Edge Enhance, M-Mode 17
Sweep Speed
Gray Scale Map, M-Mode 14
Doppler, Doppler 39
Rejection, M-Mode 15
M–Mode, M-Mode 19
Tag Position, M-Mode 23 Sync Selectn, Cardiology 62
Structure, Basic Scan 34
System
Software Option Care, User Maintenance 53
Cardiology, Cardiology 1 Specifications, System Data B–1
OB, OB/GYN 1
System Parameters, Preset Parameters,
Vascular, Vascular 1
Customize 79
Spatial Average, Affect on frame rate, Adding
Systolic/Diastolic Ratio (S/D), Abdom/Small
Color 34
Parts 14, OB/GYN 30, Vascular 12
Spatial Filter, Color Flow, Adding Color 33
Speakers, Getting Started 28
Spectral Gain, Doppler, Doppler 22 T
Spectrum T739, Probes 35
Doppler, Display, Basic Scan 25
Gain, Doppler, Doppler 22 Tag Position
Invert, Getting Started 47, Doppler 25 B–Mode, B-Mode 34
Color Flow, Adding Color 12 Color Flow, Adding Color 38
M–Mode, Display, Basic Scan 25 Doppler, Doppler 47
M–Mode, M-Mode 23
Start Frame, Basic Scan 74
TAMAX, Vascular 21
Stenosis Ratio. See % Stenosis Measurement Method, OB/GYN 32
Stop, Getting Started 45 TAMAX Auto, Abdom/Small Parts 18,
Storage areas, Getting Started 25 Abdom/Small Parts 30, Vascular 21
Stroke Volume, Abdom/Small Parts 26 Teichholz Method, Cardiology 7, Cardiology 101

Automatic Calculation, Abdom/Small Parts 27 TGC, Getting Started 37
Sub–Menu, Basic Scan 33, Basic Scan 37 B–Mode, B-Mode 8
Advanced Cardiac Measurement Option, TGC Curve, Disable, Basic Scan 21
Basic Scan 47
Auto Sequence, Basic Scan 45 Time Adjustment, Customize 3
B–Mode, Basic Scan 38 Timeline, Common Controls, M-Mode 5
Body Patterns, Basic Scan 45
Cine, Basic Scan 45 Top Menu, Basic Scan 33
Color Flow, Basic Scan 42 Auto Sequence, Basic Scan 45
Comment, Basic Scan 46 Automatic, Basic Scan 36
CWD, Basic Scan 41 B–Mode, Basic Scan 38
ECG, Basic Scan 44 Cine, Basic Scan 45
Image Archive Option, Basic Scan 44 Color Flow, Basic Scan 42
Image Recall, Basic Scan 46 CWD, Basic Scan 41
M–Mode, Basic Scan 39 Disable, Basic Scan 36
Measurement Pressed, Basic Scan 46 ECG, Basic Scan 44
Preset, Basic Scan 43 Image Archive Option, Basic Scan 44
PWD, Basic Scan 40 Mode Default Menu, Basic Scan 34
Select, Basic Scan 37 Preset, Basic Scan 43
Setup, Basic Scan 43 PWD, Basic Scan 40
Select, Basic Scan 35
Sub–Menu Select, Getting Started 36 Set–Up, Basic Scan 43
Summary Report Top Menu Select, Getting Started 35
GYN, Layout, OB/GYN 97
t
Index 15
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
Trackball, Getting Started 41 RT(LT) ICA, Vascular 8

RT(LT) ICA/CCA, Vascular 10
Tricuspid Valve, Cardiology 126, Cardiology 133
S/D Ratio, Vascular 12
Troubleshooting, User Maintenance 3 Summary Report
Color printer, User Maintenance 17 Displaying, Vascular 23
Display Messages, User Maintenance 14 Editing, Vascular 25
Multi Image Camera, User Maintenance 18
Vascular Calculations, % Stenosis, Vascular 14
Operation Error Message, User Maintenance 16
System Error Message, User Maintenance 15 VCR, Basic Scan 67
VCR, User Maintenance 18 Basic Recording, Audio, VCR Operation H–30
Warning Message, User Maintenance 22 Cleaning, User Maintenance 57
Type BF Equipment, Safety 13
Counter Display, VCR Operation H–19
Type CF Equipment, Safety 13 Counter Reset, Control Z, VCR
Operation H–21
Velocity Ratio (A/B), Abdom/Small Parts 14,
U OB/GYN 30, Vascular 12
Velocity Scale, Getting Started 47
Urology Color Flow, Adding Color 13
Calculations, Abdom/Small Parts 33 Doppler, Doppler 26
Exam Menu, Basic Scan 9
Venous, Comments Page, Vascular 34
User
Video Cassette Recorder. See VCR
Data Backup, Customize 151
Defined Keys, Getting Started 48 Volume, Getting Started 46, Abdom/Small Parts 3,
Programming, Customize 147 Cardiology 37
Programmed Calculations, Tables, OB/GYN 28 Doppler Audio, Doppler 21
Tables, OB/GYN 28
VTR. See VCR
User Sequence 1–8, Programming, Customize 125
Ut–H, OB/GYN 92
Ut–L, OB/GYN 92 W
Ut–W, OB/GYN 92 W.E. Cancel, Color Flow, Adding Color 35
Uterine Wall Filter, Doppler, Doppler 35
Height, OB/GYN 92
Length, OB/GYN 92 Warning, Safety 3, Safety 9, Peripherals C–1
Width, OB/GYN 92 Label Locations, Safety 21
Warranties
Duration, Warranties E–1
V Scope, Warranties E–1
Wheels, Getting Started 55
Word Wrap, Basic Scan 54
Advanced, Calculation Formulas, Vascular 37
Advanced option, Vascular 27
Calculation Formulas, Vascular 26
Calculations, Vascular 6
Carotid Artery Measurements, Vascular 7
Z
Exam Menu, Basic Scan 9 Zoom, Getting Started 41
Exam Preparation, Vascular 3 Display Format, Basic Scan 31
Measurements, Vascular 5 Introduction, Basic Scan 61
A/B Ratio, Vascular 12 M–Mode, Basic Scan 65, M-Mode 9
Heart Rate, Vascular 19 Methods
Pulsatility Index (PI), Vascular 12 Acoustic Zoom, Basic Scan 63
Resistance Index (RI), Vascular 12 Display, Basic Scan 64
RT(LT) Bifurc, Vascular 8 Multi–Image, Basic Scan 66
RT(LT) CCA, Vascular 8 Size, Getting Started 41
RT(LT) ECA, Vascular 8
Index 16 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
GE Medical Systems
Technical
Publications
2177611-100
Revision 0
LOGIQt 500
Users Manual
Volume 2
Copyright

GE Medical Systems

78533 BUC Cedex
Revision History


VOLUME 3:
Title Page 0
Safety 1 thru 28 0
BĆMode 1 thru 40 0
Probes 1 thru 46 0
Doppler 1 thru 54 0
MĆMode 1 thru 24 0
Index 1 thru 16 0
OB/GYN 1 thru 98 0
t
Revision History A
2177611–100 Rev 0
Revision History
2177611–100 Rev 0
Time Adjustment
Index of Preset Parameters
Custom Display
System Parameters
Preset Program
Exam Applications Presets
User Define Keys
User Data Back-up
This section explains the powerful user customizing capabilities of the

t
LOGIQ 500. If desired, the user can set a personal default value for nearly every
system parameter available. This includes the initial settings of all soft menus,
body patterns, annotation library, user OB tables, calculation sequences, summary
report formats, and much more.
The LOGIQ t 500 parameters can be exam category, mode or probe dependent.
The index of parameters allows for a quick reference in finding a particular preset.
Presets are divided into Custom Display, System Parameter, and Preset Program
Menus.
t
Customize 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Customize 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Time Adjustment
Overview
The system clock for the LOGIQ 500 is set by service
personnel to the local time during the installation process.
If any other time adjustment is needed during the year, the

clock can be changed in the Set Up/Utility Menu.
Time Adjustment
To adjust the system clock:

S From the Set Up Sub-Menus, select Utility. The Utility
Menu appears as shown in Illustration 208.
t
Customize 3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Time Adjustment
Time Adjustment (cont’d)

S Enter menu number “1” or “01” (Time Adjustment) in the
Utility Menu and press Return. The Time Adjustment
.
Illustration 209. Time Adjustment Menu
NOTE: Time is changed by adjusting the current time a

maximum of plus or minus 12 hours.
S To Advance (add) the time, type in the number of hours

and minutes to add to the currently displayed time.
HH:MM is the format to use.
S To Retard (subtract) the time, type a minus sign (–) then
the hours and minutes to be subtracted from the currently
displayed time. –HH:MM is the format to use.
S Press Return. This completes the time adjustment and
the Utility Menu reappears with the new time displayed.
S Press the Utility rocker switch to return to the previous
scan mode.
The 12 hour display format has no am/pm indicator. The
date will change at noon if the set time is 12 hours off.
Customize 4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Overview
LOGIQ 500 presets provide the user with a powerful tool to
customize initial system operation for a particular exam type.
The organization structure of the presets in the system is as

follows:
S Within each of the seven exam categories to choose from

in the patient entry menu, there are eight user
programmable and up to eight factory applications
presets.
S Parameters used in these presets are divided into three
groups: Preset Program, Custom Display, and System
Parameters.
S Changes to System Parameters affect all applications
presets in all exam categories. These are the only
parameters that affect factory presets. Nothing else can
be changed in factory presets by the user.
S User programmable application presets can also be
affected by parameters found in Preset Program and
Custom Display. These parameters can customize the
preset within an exam category or every user preset
within an exam category.
S For additional flexibility, the first eight pages of the
Custom Display parameters are specific to the probe in
use.
Decreased setup time and increased productivity can be
accomplished by establishing an application preset for types
of studies that are frequently performed by customizing all
parameters to values that are normally used at the start of an
exam.
This index provides a list of all parameters alphabetically. It

references where to find the parameter on the system menus
and where to find parameter information in this manual.
t
Customize 5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Overview (cont’d)
Each parameter may be affected by a change in exam
category, user preset, or probe. Each parameter description
in this section is coded to show how it is affected. The codes
are as follows:
EC Exam Category dependent
UP User Preset dependent
P Probe dependent
R Reset to preset value with new patient

selection.
Customize 6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Index
A B Focus Dual Marker [EC, UP], Custom Display menu
page 10, Customize 54
B Format B Dual [EC], Custom Display menu page 10,
Acoustic Power B/M (%) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Customize 55
Display menu page 1, Customize 25
B Format B Single [EC], Custom Display menu page 10,
Acoustic Power D/CFM/PDI (%) [EC, UP, P, R], Customize 55
Custom Display menu page 1, Customize 25
B Frame Average [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu
Acoustic Power Knob Effect [EC, R], Custom Display page 2, Customize 27
menu page 9, Customize 50
B Gain [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 2,
Add 1 Week to EDD [EC], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 26
Customize 114
B Gray Scale Map [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display
Annotation Library 1–24 [EC, UP], Preset Program menu page 2, Customize 28
pages 7 & 8, Customize 135
B Image Softener [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display
Audio Tone Equalizer [EC], Custom Display menu menu page 2, Customize 27
B Penetration [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu
Auto B Melt at Unfreeze [EC, UP], Custom Display page 2, Customize 27
menu page 11, Customize 58 B Rejection [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu
Auto Focus Control [EC], Custom Display menu page 9, page 2, Customize 29
Customize 51 B Scale Mark [EC], Custom Display menu page 10,
AUX Auto Display [EC], Custom Display menu page 16, Customize 56
Customize 77 B Softener Level [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display
AUX Gain [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 16,
Customize 77 B Tag Auto Start [EC, R], Custom Display menu
AUX Position [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 16,
Customize 77 B Tag Center (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu
Average Activity [EC], Preset Program menu page 3,
Customize 112 B Tag Width (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 10,
Customize 55
Average Number [EC], Preset Program menu page 3,
Customize 113 B Target Frame Rate [EC, UP, P], Custom Display
B Video Inverse [EC], Custom Display menu page 10,
B Customize 56
B&W Printer Exposure Min Interval [sec], System
Parameters menu page 5, Customize 100
B Angle/Width (deg. mm) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom
Display menu page 2, Customize 29 B&W Printer Exposure Pulse Length [msec], System
B Color Auto Start [EC, R], Custom Display menu
B/W Image & Color Graphics [EC], Preset Program
B Color Map [EC, UP], Custom Display menu page 10, Body Pattern Copy to Active Side, System
Customize 55 Parameters menu page 4, Customize 96
B Dynamic Range [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display Body Pattern Package [EC, UP], Preset Program
menu page 2, Customize 26 menu page 1, Customize 107
B Edge Enhance [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display Body Pattern Package 1–8, System Parameters menu
menu page 2, Customize 27 page 4, Customize 92
B Far Field Mode [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display Body Pattern Probe Change Erase, System
menu page 2, Customize 28 Parameters menu page 4, Customize 96
B Focus Combi Number [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Body Pattern Probe Mark Preset [EC, UP], Preset
Display menu page 2, Customize 29 Program menu page 1, Customize 107
t
Customize 7
2177611–100 Rev 0
Body Pattern Unfreeze Erase, System Parameters CFM Packet Size SrvyDtl [EC, UP, P], Custom Display
BSA Type, System Parameters menu page 2, CFM Packet Size Survey [EC, UP, P], Custom Display
Customize 87 menu page 5, Customize 40
CFM Persistance [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display
C CFM Tag Auto Start [EC, R], Custom Display menu

Cardiac Calculation, Preset Program menu page 6, CFM Tag Center (cm/s) [EC, R], Custom Display
CFM Tag Width (cm/s) [EC, R], Custom Display menu
Cardiac Measurement Choices [EC, UP], Preset
Program menu page 4 & 5, Customize 117
CFM Target Frame Rate [EC, UP, P], Custom Display
CFM ACE [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 6, menu page 5, Customize 39
Customize 43
CFM Target Frame Rate Dtl [EC, UP, P], Custom
CFM B Angle/Width (deg/mm) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 39
CFM Threshold Turbulence [EC, UP, P, R], Custom
CFM B Frame Average [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 39
CFM Threshold Velocity [EC, UP, P, R], Custom
CFM B Gain [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu Display menu page 5, Customize 38
CFM Velo Dynamic Range [EC, UP], Custom Display
CFM B High Resolution [EC, UP, P, R], Custom menu page 14, Customize 70
CFM Velocity (cm/s) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display
CFM B Wall Filter [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 40
menu page 5, Customize 41 CFM Wall Echo Canceller [EC, UP, P, R], Custom
CFM Base Line (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu Display menu page 5, Customize 39
page 14, Customize 72 CFM/PDI Focus Depth (%) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom
CFM Capture Interval (s) [EC, R], Custom Display
menu page 14, Customize 70 CFM/PDI Initial Mode [EC. R], Custom Display menu
CFM Color Map 1 [EC], Custom Display menu page 14,
Customize 71 CFM/PDI Initial Sequence [EC], Custom Display menu
Customize 71 CFM/PDI Sequence [EC, UP], Custom Display menu
Customize 71 CFM/PDI Shrink Angle/Width (deg, mm) [EC, UP, P,
R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 36
Customize 71 CFM/PDI Shrink in Triplex [EC, UP, P, R], Custom
CFM Color Threshold [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display
menu page 5, Customize 38 CFM/PDI Spatical Filter [EC, UP, P], Custom Display
CFM M Gain (Delta from B) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom
CFM/PDI Start Depth (mm) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom
CFM M Wall Filter [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display CFM/PDI Vertical Size (mm) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom
menu page 6, Customize 42 Display menu page 5, Customize 41
CFM Noise Blanker [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display CFM/PWD Ratio in Triplex [EC, UP, P, R], Custom
menu page 6, Customize 43 Display menu page 4, Customize 35
CFM Packet Size Map [EC, UP, P], Custom Display Cine Gauge Auto Display [EC], Custom Display menu
CFM Packet Size MpDtl [EC, UP, P], Custom Display Cine Speed [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 9,
menu page 5, Customize 40 Customize 51
Customize 8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Circ/Area Method [EC], Preset Program menu page 3, CWD Rejection [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu
Customize 112 page 4, Customize 36
Col Applcat, System Parameters menu page 2, CWD Velocity (cm/s) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display
Col Aux, System Parameters menu page 2, CWD Wall Filter (cm/s) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom
Customize 90 Display menu page 4, Customize 37
Col Back Gnd, System Parameters menu page 2,

Customize 88
Col Comment, System Parameters menu page 2,
Customize 89
D
D Audio to Speaker [EC], Custom Display menu
Col Dop Trac, System Parameters menu page 2, page 12, Customize 66
Customize 90
D Audio Volume (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu
Col Imag Crs, System Parameters menu page 2, page 12, Customize 66
Customize 89
D Color Auto Start [EC, R], Custom Display menu
Col Mes Crs, System Parameters menu page 2, page 12, Customize 63
Customize 89
D Color Map [EC, UP], Custom Display menu page 12,
Col Moving, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 63
Customize 90
D Format (Side/Side, Full) [EC], Custom Display
Col Scale, System Parameters menu page 2, menu page 12, Customize 64
Customize 89 D Image Processing [EC], Custom Display menu
Col Sys Inf, System Parameters menu page 2, page 13, Customize 67
Customize 89 D Mode Full B+ Cursor [EC], Custom Display menu
Color Printer Memory, System Parameters menu page 5,
Customize 99 D Mode Full D [EC], Custom Display menu page 12,
Customize 66
Color Printer Signal, System Parameters menu page 5,
Customize 99 D Mode Side/Side B Large [EC], Custom Display
Color Printer Type, System Parameters menu page 5,
Customize 98 D Mode Side/Side B Small [EC], Custom Display
Comment Clear Key Function [EC], Preset Program
menu page 1, Customize 108 D Mode Top/Bottom B Large [EC], Custom Display
Comment Erase at Display Change [EC], Preset
Program menu page 1, Customize 108 D Mode Top/Bottom B Mid [EC], Custom Display
Comment Home Position Horizontal [EC, R], Preset
Program menu page 1, Customize 108 D Mode Top/Bottom B Small [EC], Custom Display
Comment Home Position Vertical [EC, R], Preset
Program menu page 1, Customize 108 D Realtime Auto Trace [EC, R], Custom Display menu
CUA Selection Reset on New Patient, System
D Realtime Trace Method [EC, R], Custom Display
CWD Base Line (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu D Tag Auto Start [EC, R], Custom Display menu
page 14, Customize 70 page 12, Customize 63
CWD Dynamic Range [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display D Tag Center (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu
CWD Gain [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, D Tag Width (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu
CWD Gray Scale Map [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display D Time Resolution [EC], Custom Display menu page 13,
CWD Non–aliasing mode [EC, R], Custom Display D Type for Wall Filter [EC], Custom Display menu
t
Customize 9
2177611–100 Rev 0
D Video Inverse [EC], Custom Display menu page 12, Echo Level Method [EC], Preset Program menu page 3,
Customize 66 Customize 112
D/CFM Scale Mark [EC], Custom Display menu page 12, EFBW Form (Europe), System Parameters menu
Date Format, System Parameters, System EFBW Form (Tokyo), System Parameters menu page 2,
Parameters menu page 1, Customize 81 Customize 88
Delay Trigger Source, System Parameters menu page 2, End Systole Period from Prior Edge [EC, UP], Preset
Customize 87 Program menu page 3, Customize 115
Diag Category, System Parameters, System Enter Depth [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu
Parameters menu page 1, Customize 82 page 1, Customize 22
Diastole/Systole Determination [EC], Preset Program External Video Signal, System Parameters menu
Display EDD with GA Value [EC], Preset Program

Display Height 1–3 [EC], Preset Program menu page 9,
F
Customize 137
Focus Depth (mm) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display
Display Probe Name, System Parameters menu page 1, menu page 1, Customize 22
Customize 85
Frame Rate Display [EC], Custom Display menu page 9,
Display TGC Curve [EC], Custom Display menu page 9, Customize 52
Customize 53
H
Display Unit Age 1–4 [EC], Preset Program menu
Display Unit Weight 1–2 [EC], Preset Program menu
page 9, Customize 137 Heart Rate Method [EC], Preset Program menu page 3,
Customize 112
Displayed TI [EC], Custom Display menu page 9,
Customize 50 Hospital Name, System Parameters menu page 1,
Customize 81
E I
ECG Audio Beat Sound [EC, R], Custom Display
ID/Name Prohibition After Measurement, System
ECG Audio Beat Sound Tone [EC], Custom Display
Image Archive Compression [EC], Preset Program
ECG Auto Display [EC], Custom Display menu page 16, Image Back Color [EC, UP], Custom Display menu
ECG Gain [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 16, Image Gamma (%) [EC, UP], Custom Display menu
ECG Heart Rate Display [EC], Custom Display menu Image Mode [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 9,
page 16, Customize 76 Customize 49
ECG Position [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 16, Image Reverse [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu
ECG R Delay 1 (ms) [EC, UP, R], Custom Display Image Rotation [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu
ECG R Delay 1 to 2 (ms) [EC, UP, R], Custom Display Insite Access Enable, System Parameters menu page 1,
Customize 10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
K M Mode Top/Bottom B Small [EC], Custom Display

M Peak Hold [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu
Keyboard LED Bright, System Parameters menu page 1,
Customize 83
M Penetration [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu
Keyboard Menu Bright, System Parameters menu page 3, Customize 32
M Rejection [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu
Keyboard Tab, System Parameters menu page 1, page 3, Customize 32
Customize 83
M Scale Mark [EC], Custom Display menu page 11,
Customize 61
L M Softener Level [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display

M Tag Auto Start [EC, UP], Custom Display menu
Language, System Parameters menu page 1,
Customize 82
M Tag Center (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu
Length Unit [EC], Preset Program menu page 3, page 11, Customize 59
Customize 111
M Tag Width (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu
M M Video Inverse [EC], Custom Display menu page 11,

Customize 61
Mask Image [EC], Preset Program menu page 3,
M Color Auto Start [EC, R], Custom Display menu
Customize 113
Mask Image Characters, System Parameters menu
M Color Map [EC, UP], Custom Display menu page 11, page 2, Customize 86
Customize 58
Maskline Record, System Parameters menu page 5,
M Dynamic Range [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display Customize 100
Measurement Clear Operation [EC], Preset Program
M Edge Enhance [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 3, Customize 115
Measurement Menu B [EC, UP], Preset Program
M Format (Side/Side, Full) [EC], Custom Display menu page 6, Customize 130
Measurement Menu CFM [EC, UP], Preset Program
M Gain (Delta from B) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 6, Customize 130
Measurement Menu D [EC, UP], Preset Program
M Gray Scale Map [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 6, Customize 130
Measurement Menu M [EC, UP], Preset Program
M Image Softener [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 6, Customize 130
Media Selection for Fetal Trend [EC], Preset Program
M Mode FULL B + Cursor [EC], Custom Display menu menu page 3, Customize 115
M Mode Full M [EC], Custom Display menu page 11,
Customize 61
M Mode Side/Side B Large [EC], Custom Display
N
menu page 11, Customize 59 Needle Guide Type [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display
M Mode Side/Side B Small [EC], Custom Display
M Mode Simul PD Activity [EC], Custom Display menu
page 11, Customize 58 O
M Mode Top/Bottom B Large [EC], Custom Display OB Report Format, System Parameters menu page 2,
M Mode Top/Bottom B Mid [EC], Custom Display Operation Error Beep, System Parameters menu
t
Customize 11
2177611–100 Rev 0
P PDI Tag Auto Start [EC, R], Custom Display menu

PDI Tag Center (cm/s) [EC, R], Custom Display menu
Password 1–8, System Parameters menu page 6, page 15, Customize 74
Customize 103
PDI Tag Width (cm/s) [EC, R], Custom Display menu
Password Ask, System Parameters menu page 6, page 15, Customize 74
Customize 101
PDI Target Frame Rate [EC, UP, P], Custom Display
PCG Auto Display [EC], Custom Display menu page 16, menu page 7, Customize 45
Customize 77
PDI Target Frame Rate Dtl [EC, UP, P], Custom
PCG Filter, System Parameters menu page 2, Display menu page 7, Customize 45
Customize 87
PDI Threshold Power [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display
PCG Gain [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 16, menu page 7, Customize 44
Customize 77
PDI Velocity (cm/s) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display
PCG Position [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 16, menu page 7, Customize 45
Customize 77
PDI/PWD Ratio in Triplex [EC, UP, P, R], Custom
PDI ACE [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 7, Display menu page 4, Customize 35
Customize 47
Physio Sweep Speed on B [EC, UP, P, R], Custom
PDI B Frame Average [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display Display menu page 3, Customize 31
menu page 7, Customize 46 Plug 1–BW, System Parameters menu page 5,
PDI B Gain [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu Customize 99
page 7, Customize 46 Plug 2–CLR, System Parameters menu page 5,
PDI B High Resolution [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display Customize 99
menu page 7, Customize 46 Port A, System Parameters menu page 5,
Customize 100
PDI B Wall Filter [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu
page 7, Customize 46 Port B, System Parameters menu page 5,
Customize 100
PDI B/W Display [EC], Custom Display menu page 15,
Customize 73 Port MIC, System Parameters menu page 5,
Customize 100
PDI Color Threshold [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display
menu page 7, Customize 44 Power on Memory Test, System Parameters menu
PDI Default Map [EC], Custom Display menu page 15,
Customize 74 Power on Status, System Parameters menu page 1,
Customize 84
PDI Dynamic Range [EC, UP], Custom Display menu
page 15, Customize 74 Probe Direction Mark Display [EC], Custom Display
PDI M Gain (Delta from B) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom
Display menu page 7, Customize 46 PWD Alternative Scan [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display
PDI M Wall Filter [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display
menu page 7, Customize 47 PWD Base Line (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu
PDI Noise Blanker [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display
PWD Dynamic Range [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display
PDI Packet Size Map [EC, UP, P], Custom Display PWD Gain [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4,
PDI Packet Size MpDtl [EC, UP, P], Custom Display PWD Gray Scale Map [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display
PDI Packet Size SrvyDtl [EC, UP, P], Custom Display PWD HPRF [EC], Custom Display menu page 14,
PDI Packet Size Survey [EC, UP, P], Custom Display PWD Rejection [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu
PDI Persistance [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu PWD Sample Volume (mm) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom
page 7, Customize 47 Display menu page 4, Customize 34
Customize 12 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
PWD Velocity (cm/s) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display

menu page 4, Customize 34 T
PWD Wall Filter (cm/s) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display TA Max Auto [EC], Preset Program menu page 3,
PWD/CFM/PDI Penetration [EC, UP, P, R], Custom TGC Depth Remap [EC], Custom Display menu page 9,
Display menu page 4, Customize 33 Customize 51
PWD/CFM/PDI Slant Auto Start [EC, UP, P, R], Time Format, System Parameters, System
Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 33 Parameters menu page 1, Customize 82
Time Unit [EC], Preset Program menu page 3,
Customize 111
R Timeline Format [EC], Custom Display menu page 11,

Customize 57
RDelay Time of End Systole Prior Edge [EC, UP], Timeline Sweep Method [EC], Custom Display menu
Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 114 page 11, Customize 57
Timeline Sweep Speed [EC, UP, P, R], Custom
Record 1 B&W, System Parameters menu page 5, Display menu page 3, Customize 30
Customize 97
Trackball Function at Freeze [EC], Preset Program
Record 1 Color, System Parameters menu page 5, menu page 1, Customize 108
Customize 97
U
Record 2 B&W, System Parameters menu page 5,
Customize 98
Record 2 Color, System Parameters menu page 5,
Customize 98 User Define Key No 1, System Parameters menu
Report, System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 98
User Define Key No 2, System Parameters menu
Report Cursor Blink, System Parameters memu page 1, page 3, Customize 91
Customize 82
Report Cursor Type, System Parameters menu page 1, page 3, Customize 91
Customize 82
Report Format [EC], Preset Program menu page 6, page 3, Customize 91
Customize 118
Report Video Inverse to Printer, System Parameters page 3, Customize 91
S
User ID 1–8, System Parameters menu page 6,
Customize 102
User Table Editor, Preset Program menu page 6,
Customize 121
Sequence 1–8 [EC], Preset Program menu page 4,
Customize 125
Setup Blue Back Start, System Parameters menu
page 2, Customize 86 V
Skip New Patient Y/N Ask [EC], Preset Program menu VCR Play Audio [EC], Preset Program menu page 2,
page 9, Customize 136 Customize 110
Standby Time (min), System Parameters menu page 1, VCR Play Audio Volume (%) [EC, R], Preset Program
Standoff Setting [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu VCR Rec Audio Doppler [EC], Preset Program menu
page 1, Customize 24 page 2, Customize 109
System Error Erase Interval, System Parameters VCRPB Calib Method [EC, R], Preset Program menu
t
Customize 13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Z
Zoom Auto Start [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu
Zoom Factor [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu
Zoom Reference [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu
Zoom Reference Update [EC, UP], Custom Display
Customize 14 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Overview
Custom Display in the Set Up Top Menu is seventeen pages
of preset parameters that are exam category/preset name
dependent. The first eight pages are detailed further
because they are probe dependent within the exam category
and preset name. The last nine pages detail mode-specific
items for the exam category/preset name.
Illustration 210. Setup Sub-Menus (Custom Display)
.
A brief description of each preset parameter and the choices
available for that preset follows.
NOTE: If it is necessary to quickly return to page one of the

Custom Display Sub-Menus, press Ctrl and 1 simultaneously.
Refer to Index of Presets, Overview for the key to the codes

used to describe each parameter’s affect.
t
Customize 15
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Parameter Menu Command Lines

An example of a Custom Display parameter menu is shown
in Illustration 211.
Illustration 211. Custom Display Menu
The top protected lines show the date, time, hospital name
and active probe. The next four lines provide information
about the menu displayed plus commands to manipulate the
menu pages and parameters.
Customize 16 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Command line one

This line shows the parameter categories available with the
current one highlighted. The categories listed are:
S User Param is not active at this time.

S System Param has six pages of programmed parameters.
S Preset Program has nine pages of programmable
parameters.
S Custom Display has seventeen pages of programmable
parameters.
Command line two

This line shows the exam category and application preset
name.
Command line three

This line shows the menu page displayed (1/17 is page one
of seventeen).
PRIOR will display the previous menu page. NEXT will

display the following menu page. CONTENTS will show a
summary of all Custom Display pages.
S Use the Trackball to place the arrow cursor on PRIOR or

NEXT.
S Press Set to change menu pages.
t
Customize 17
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Command line four

This line lists four commands that affect the parameters in
the category displayed. They are:
SAVE use the Trackball to place the arrow cursor

over SAVE. Press Set. The system displays
an overwrite prompt. Pressing ‘Y’ followed by
Return overwrites the old data with the values
changed. Pressing ‘N’ followed by Return
prompts the operator to make a new user
preset.
RESET if parameters were changed after the SAVE

function was used, RESET will return those
parameters to the saved values.
Trackball the arrow cursor to RESET and

press Set.
DELETE is used to erase the currently displayed user

preset. Factory presets cannot be erased.
Trackball the arrow cursor to DELETE and

press Set.
EXIT returns the system to the last scan mode.

Parameter changes will only be temporary if
they were not saved before exiting.
Customize 18 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Changing a Parameter
To change a parameter value:
Trackball the arrow cursor to the desired parameter.
Press Set to highlight the choice.
If the parameter lists several values, Trackball the

arrow cursor to the desired value and press Set.
If the parameter needs the value to change, use the
Ellipse rocker switch to increase or decrease the
value.
When the desired value is selected or changed, Trackball

the arrow cursor to SAVE.
Press Set.
A prompt at the bottom of the screen asks:
“Overwrite Existing Data? ‘y’ or ‘n’”.
Press ‘y’ to save the new values for the preset displayed.
.
Press ‘n’ and the prompt “Input User Preset Number (1–8)”
appears. Enter the desired number.
NOTE: If no is selected to overwrite current data, the system

is asking to make a new user application preset. The eight
available spaces are displayed by selecting the preset top
menu.
t
Customize 19
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Changing a Parameter (cont’d)

To customize the name of the new preset (1–8):
Trackball to the preset name in command line two.
Press Set. Type in the personalized preset name.
Trackball to Save.
Press Set. All parameter data is saved as a new preset.
Hints S Parameters on all of the menu pages can be customized

before selecting Save.
S Parameter changes will be lost if Save is not selected.
S A maximum of eight user application presets can be
saved.
S Only a change in System Parameters will affect factory
presets.
Customize 20 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Custom Display Contents
Illustration 212. Custom Display Contents Page
The custom display contents page shows a summary of the

seventeen menu pages.
Note that the first eight pages of presets are probe

dependent as well as category/preset dependent like the last
nine pages.
The 3D Cine option (listed on pages 8 and 17) is not

available at this time.
Trackball the cursor to the desired page and press Set.
t
Customize 21
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Page 1 of 17 (Imaging Parameter 1 – Probe Dependent 1)
Illustration 213. Custom Display Page 1
Enter Depth EC, UP, P, R

Choose the desired default display depth for the probe
indicated.
4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22 or 24 cm.
Focus Depth [mm] EC, UP, P, R

Choose the desired default focus depth for the probe
indicated.
1 to 240 mm in 1 mm increments.
Customize 22 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Image Rotation EC, UP, P, R

Choose the desired default image orientation.
0 (N) Normal top to bottom orientation.

90 (W) 90° left to right orientation.
180 (S) Inverted bottom to top orientation.
270 (E) 270° right to left orientation.
Image Reverse EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default to initially have image reverse on or off
(left-right orientation).
Off Image reverse off.

On Image reverse on.
Zoom Auto Start EC, UP, P

Choose to automatically place the image into the zoom mode
after a probe selection change. The amount of zoom is set
by “Zoom Factor”. The presence of a reference image is set
by “Zoom Reference”.
Off No auto zoom at probe change.

On Auto zoom mode at probe change.
Zoom Reference EC, UP, P

Choose to have the zoom reference image available or not
available as the default.
Off No reference image in zoom.

On Reference image available in zoom.
Zoom Factor EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default zoom factor for the read (freeze) zoom.
Choose 1.0, 1.2, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0 or 4.0.
t
Customize 23
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Standoff Setting EC, UP, P, R

Choose a setting for the type of probe standoff, if used, for
the 739L or L764 (LH) probes. When any other probe is
selected the preset is “Not Available”.
Choose Off (No standoff), WP (Water path) or

CPL (Couplant)
Needle Guide Type EC, UP, P, R

Choose the type of biopsy guide angle to be displayed for the
attachment used (desired target depth) with each probe listed
in the table below. For additional information, see Biopsy 7.
Depth in cm at Center Channel

Fixed–Angle Multi–Angle
Probe BX-1 BX-2 BX-3 MBX-1 MBX-2 MBX-3
C364/CBF n/a n/a 8.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
C551/CAE n/a n/a 7.0 4.0 5.5 7.0
C721 n/a 3.0 n/a n/a n/a n/a
C386 n/a n/a n/a 4.0 6.0 8.0
546L n/a n/a n/a 4.0 5.5 7.0
L764/LH 2.0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
739L 2.0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
LA39 1.5 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
S317 n/a n/a 8.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
T739 2.0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Table 19. Biopsy Guide Attachment Selection
Customize 24 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Needle Guide Type EC, UP, P, R (cont’d)
needle to track a path outside the displayed lines.

on the guide, otherwise the needle will not follow the
displayed guide zone which could result in repeated biopsies
or patient injury.
When the E721 probe is attached and active, the needle

guide type selection choices are:
S TV0° Reusable metal guide with a 0 degree offset angle.

S TR5° Civco disposable guide with a 5 degree offset angle.
Acoustic Power B/M [%] EC, UP, P, R

Set the initial percentage of acoustic power to be used when
in B- or B/M-Modes.
Choose from 0 to 100% in 10% increments.
Acoustic Power D/CFM/PDI [%] EC, UP, P, R

Set the initial percentage of acoustic power to be used when
in Doppler, Color Flow or Power Doppler imaging modes.
Choose from 0 to 100% in 10% increments.
t
Customize 25
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
B Gain EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default gain value for B-Mode.
Enter a value from 0 to 98 in 2 digit increments. The

maximum value is probe dependent and may not reach 98.
B Dynamic Range EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default dynamic range value for B-Mode.
Enter a value from 30 to 78 in 6 digit increments.
Customize 26 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
B Edge Enhance EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default edge enhancement value for B-Mode.
Choose Off, Low, Mid or High.
B Image Softener EC, UP, P, R

Choose to have the image softener function default for
B-Mode on or off.
Off No image softener as default.

On Image softener on as default.
B Softener Level EC, UP, P, R

If the image softener for B-Mode is enabled, choose the
default level for the softener.
D1, D2, D3, Low, Mid or High.
B Frame Average EC, UP, P

Choose the default value for frame averaging in B-Mode.
Off (no frame averaging), 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
B Penetration EC, UP, P, R

Choose to have the default for penetration, using the lower
probe frequency, for B-Mode on or off.
Off Use higher probe frequency.

On Use lower probe frequency.
t
Customize 27
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
B Far Field Mode EC, UP, P, R

Choose from two types of far field signal processing for an
application and probe.
This parameter is available only when the penetration mode is

on and supports only the C364/CBF and C551/CAE probes.
Choose A or B type signal processing.

B Gray Scale Map EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default gray scale map for B-Mode. Choose 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or 16.
B1 B6
B2 B7
B3 B8
B4 B9
B5 B10
INPUT LEVEL INPUT LEVEL
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
INPUT LEVEL
Illustration 215. Gray Scale Map Graphs
Customize 28 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
B Rejection EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default level for rejection in B-Mode.
Enter 0 to 40 in 1 digit increments.
B Focus Combi Number EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default number of focus points in B-Mode.
Choose 1, 2 or 3.
B Angle/Width [deg, mm] EC, UP, P, R

Choose the amount of the scan angle to display as a default
for B-Mode.
The amount or degrees available depends on the probe.
B Target Frame Rate EC, UP, P

Choose the default value for B-Mode frame rate.
Low Low frame rate, better resolution.

Mid Mid range frame rate and resolution.
High Higher frame rate, less resolution.
t
Customize 29
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Timeline Sweep Speed EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default value for the timeline (M-Mode and
Doppler spectrum) sweep speed.
Choose Slow 16 microseconds per pixel

Mid 8 microseconds per pixel
Fast 4 microseconds per pixel
Very-Fast* 2 microseconds per pixel
* Works with Doppler only, not M-Mode or M/D-Modes.
Customize 30 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Physio Sweep Speed on B EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default value for the physio signal sweep speed
displayed on the B-Mode image.
Choose Slow 16 microseconds per pixel

Mid 8 microseconds per pixel
Fast 4 microseconds per pixel
M Gain (Delta from B) EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default value for M-Mode gain difference from the
B-Mode Gain.
Enter –98 to 98 in 2 digit increments.
M Dynamic Range EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default value for M-Mode dynamic range.
Enter from 30 to 78 in 6 digit increments.
M Edge Enhance EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default level for M-Mode edge enhancement.
Off, Low, Mid or High.
M Image Softener EC, UP, P, R

Choose to have the image softener function default for
M-Mode initially on or off.
Off No image softener as default.

On Image softener on as default.
t
Customize 31
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
M Softener Level EC, UP, P, R

If the image softener is enabled, choose the default level for
the softener.
Low, Mid or High.
M Penetration EC, UP, P, R

Choose to have the default for penetration for M-Mode on or
off.

M Gray Scale Map EC, UP, P, R

Choose a default gray scale map for M-Mode.
Enter 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10.
M Rejection EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default rejection level for M-Mode.
M Peak Hold EC, UP, P, R

Choose to initially enable or disable the peak value hold
function for M-Mode.
Off No peak hold function as default.

On Peak hold function as default.
Customize 32 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
PWD/CFM/PDI Penetration EC, UP, P, R

Choose to have the default for penetration, using the lower
probe frequency, for pulsed Doppler, color flow mapping and
power Doppler imaging modes on or off.

PWD/CFM/PDI Slant Auto Start EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default position of the slant scan window.
Off Vertical (no slant)

Other-Side Slanted away from the probe orientation mark
Marker-Side Slanted toward the probe orientation mark
t
Customize 33
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
PWD Gain EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default gain value for pulsed Doppler Mode.
PWD Dynamic Range EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default dynamic range value for pulsed Doppler
Mode.
PWD Sample Volume [mm] EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default pulsed Doppler sample volume cursor
size (in millimeters).
Choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14 or 16.
PWD Gray Scale Map EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default gray scale map for the pulsed Doppler
Mode.
Choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10.
PWD Rejection EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default level for rejection in the pulsed Doppler
Mode.
Choose from 0 to 40 in 2 digit increments.
PWD Velocity [cm/s] EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default value for the velocity scale in pulsed
Doppler Mode.
Customize 34 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
PWD Wall Filter [cm/s] EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default value for the wall filter for pulsed Doppler
Mode.
Choose from 0.3, 0.5, 0.7,1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 5.0, 7.0, 10, 15,
20, 30 or 50. Use the Ellipse rocker switch to change the
value.
PWD Alternative Scan EC, UP, P, R

Choose the action of the B-Pause key while in PWD Mode.
On Pressing B-Pause toggles between B-Mode

frozen/PWD real-time or B-Mode real-time/
PWD frozen.
Off Pressing B-Pause freezes or unfreezes the

B-Mode image only.
CFM/PWD Ratio in Triplex EC, UP, P, R

Choose the velocity ratio between the CFM display and
Pulsed Doppler.
1/1 Same velocity display.

1/2 Pulsed Doppler velocity 2 times CFM.
1/4 Pulsed Doppler velocity 4 times CFM.
PDI/PWD Ratio in Triplex EC, UP, P, R

Choose the velocity ratio between the PDI display and
Pulsed Doppler.
1/1 Same velocity display.

1/2 Pulsed Doppler velocity 2 times PDI.
1/4 Pulsed Doppler velocity 4 times PDI.
t
Customize 35
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
CFM/PDI Shrink in Triplex EC, UP, P, R

Choose to turn CFM/PDI shrink function on or off. Allows for
shrinking of the CFM/PDI window to a specified value to
improve frame rate.
CFM/PDI Shrink Angle/Width [deg, mm] EC, UP, P, R

Choose the shrink value for the CFM/PDI window in degrees
for convex and sector probes or millimeters for linear probes.
CWD Gain EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default gain value for continuous wave Doppler
Mode.
CWD Dynamic Range EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default dynamic range value for continuous wave
Doppler Mode.
CWD Gray Scale Map EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default gray scale map for the continuous wave
Doppler Mode.
Choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10.
CWD Rejection EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default level for rejection in the continuous wave
Doppler Mode.
Customize 36 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
CWD Velocity [cm/s] EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default value for the velocity scale in continuous
wave Doppler Mode.
CWD Wall Filter [cm/s] EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default value for the wall filter for continuous
wave Doppler Mode.
Choose from .3, .5, .7,1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 5.0, 7.0, 10, 15, 20,
30 or 50. Use the Ellipse Rocker Switch to change the value.
t
Customize 37
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
CFM Color Threshold EC, UP, P, R

Choose a priority level for B-Mode display during CFM mode.
The higher the number, the greater the emphasis on CFM
Mode (color) verses B-Mode (gray scale).
Choose 0 to 100 in 1 digit increments.
CFM Threshold Velocity EC, UP, P, R

Choose the level above which color will no longer be used to
display velocity.
Customize 38 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
CFM Threshold Turbulence EC, UP, P, R

Choose the level above which color will no longer be used to
display turbulence.
CFM Wall Echo Canceller EC, UP, P, R

Choose to initially have the wall echo cancel function on or
off.
Off No wall echo cancel function.

On Wall echo cancel function enabled.
CFM/PDI Spatial Filter EC, UP, P

Choose the desired amount of averaging between color
pixels.
Off No spatial filtering.

Low Low spatial filtering.
Mid Medium spatial filtering.
High Maximum spatial filtering.
CFM Target Frame Rate EC, UP, P

Choose the desired frame rate range while in CFM mode.
Density Lowest frame rate for high color density

Low Low frame rate for CFM.
Mid Medium frame rate for CFM.
High High frame rate for low color density.
CFM Target Frame Rate Dtl EC, UP, P

Choose the desired frame rate range while in the Detail (Dtl)
Mode of CFM presentation.

Low Low frame rate for CFM Detail Mode.
Mid Medium frame rate for CFM Detail Mode.
High High frame rate for CFM Detail Mode.
t
Customize 39
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
CFM Packet Size Survey, Map, SrvyDtl and MpDtl EC, UP, P
Choose the default packet size for each CFM diagnostic
mode display. This will be for Survey Mode, Map Mode,
Survey-Detail Mode and Map-Detail Mode.
.
Small Small packet size.
Mid Medium packet size.
Large Large packet size.
NOTE: The higher the packet size, the better the color
presentation but with a slower frame rate.
CFM Velocity [cm/s] EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default CFM velocity scale in centimeters per
second.
CFM B Gain EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default B-Mode gain setting while in CFM Mode.
CFM B High Resolution EC, UP, P, R

Choose to initially have the high resolution function in CFM
Mode on or off.
Off No high resolution function.

On High resolution enabled.
CFM B Frame Average EC, UP, P, R

Choose the level of frame averaging for B-Mode while in
CFM.
Off No B-Mode frame averaging.

Low Low frame averaging.
Mid Medium frame averaging.
High High frame averaging.
Customize 40 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
CFM B Wall Filter EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default level of wall filtering for B-Mode while in
CFM.
Choose from Low, M1, M2, M3, M4 and High.
CFM B Angle/Width [deg, mm] EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default B-Mode angle or width of the display
while in CFM.
Choose from 1 to 124 in one digit increments. Maximum is

determined by the probe type.
CFM/PDI Start Depth [mm] EC, UP, P, R

Set the start depth of the CFM/PDI window area.
Choose the depth in millimeters ranging from 0 to 230.
CFM/PDI Vertical Size [mm] EC, UP, P, R

Set the vertical size of the CFM/PDI window.
Choose the size in millimeters ranging from 10 to 240.
CFM/PDI Focus Depth [%] EC, UP, P, R

Set the desired depth of the focal zone in CFM/PDI Mode
window.
Choose a percentage ranging from 0 to 100.
t
Customize 41
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
CFM M Gain (Delta from B) EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default level for M-Mode gain while in CFM.
Choose from –31 to 31 in 1 digit increments.
CFM M Wall Filter EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default level for the M-Mode Wall Filter while in
CFM Mode.
Choose from Low, M1, M2, M3, M4, or High.
Customize 42 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
CFM ACE EC, UP, P, R

Adaptive Color Enhancement - Reduces clutter noise or color
flash
Choose ON or OFF as the default setting
CFM Noise Blanker EC, UP, P, R

Reduces random color noise.
Choose: OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH
CFM Persistence EC, UP, P, R

Retains highest color pixel value for a specified period of time
or until a higher value is detected.
Choose: OFF, SHORT, MID or HIGH
t
Customize 43
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
PDI Color Threshold EC, UP, P, R

Choose a priority level for B-Mode display during PDI mode.
The higher the number, the greater the emphasis on B-Mode
verses PDI Mode.
Choose 0 to 100 in 1 digit increments.
PDI Threshold Power EC, UP, P, R

Set the threshold value (%) at which power information will
start to be displayed.
Set from 0 to 50 percent.
Example: Setting = 20%

Power values less than 20% will not be displayed. They will
be set to the background color. Only power values over 20%
will be displayed as color.
Customize 44 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
PDI Target Frame Rate EC, UP, P

Choose the desired frame rate range while in PDI mode.

Low Low frame rate for PDI.
Mid Medium frame rate for PDI.
High High frame rate for PDI.
PDI Target Frame Rate Dtl EC, UP, P

Choose the desired frame rate range while in the Detail (Dtl)
Mode of PDI presentation.

Low Low frame rate for PDI Detail Mode.
Mid Medium frame rate for PDI Detail Mode.
High High frame rate for PDI Detail Mode.
PDI Packet Size Survey, Map, SrvyDtl and MpDtl EC, UP, P
Choose the default packet size for each PDI diagnostic mode
display. This will be for Survey Mode, Map Mode,
Survey-Detail Mode and Map-Detail Mode.
.
Small Small packet size.
Mid Medium packet size.
Large Large packet size.
NOTE: The higher the packet size the better the color
presentation but with a slower frame rate.
PDI Velocity [cm/s] EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default PDI velocity scale in centimeters per
second.
t
Customize 45
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
PDI B Gain EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default B-Mode gain setting while in PDI Mode.
PDI B High Resolution EC, UP, P, R

Choose to initially have the high resolution function in PDI
Mode on or off.
Off No high resolution function.

On High resolution enabled.
PDI B Frame Average EC, UP, P, R

Choose the level of frame averaging for B-Mode while in PDI.
Off No B-Mode frame averaging.

Low Low frame averaging.
Mid Medium frame averaging.
High High frame averaging.
PDI B Wall Filter EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default level of wall filtering for B-Mode while in
PDI.
Choose from Low, M1, M2, M3, M4 and High.
PDI M Gain (Delta from B) EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default level for M-Mode gain while in PDI.
Choose from –31 to 31 in 1 digit increments.
Customize 46 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
PDI M Wall Filter EC, UP, P, R

Choose the default level for the M-Mode Wall Filter while in
PDI Mode.
Choose from Low, M1, M2, M3, M4, or High.
PDI ACE EC, UP, P, R

Adaptive Color Enhancement - Reduces clutter noise or color
flash
Choose ON or OFF as the default setting
PDI Noise Blanker EC, UP, P, R

Reduces random color noise.
Choose: OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH
PDI Persistence EC, UP, P, R

Retains highest color pixel value for a specified period of time
or until a higher value is detected.
Choose: OFF, SHORT, MID or HIGH
t
Customize 47
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Page 8 of 17 (Imaging Parameter 8)
Custom Display Page 8 is reserved for the 3D Imaging

option.
3D Imaging option is not available at this time.
Customize 48 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Image Mode EC, R

Choose the default imaging mode for this preset.
B B-Mode only
B/B Dual B-Mode
B/M B- and M-Modes
B/D B- and Doppler Modes
CFM-B B-Mode with Color Flow
CFM-B/B B-Mode with Color Flow and B-Mode
CFM-B/M B- and M-Modes with Color Flow
CFM-B/D B- and Doppler Modes with Color Flow
t
Customize 49
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Acoustic Power Knob Effect EC, R

Set how the Acoustic Output knob will affect the scan image.
Both B and D – Knob changes power for B/M/D/CFM/PDI all

the time regardless of scan mode.
Only B – Knob changes power for B or B/M mode only.

D/CFM/PDI modes cannot be adjusted by Acoustic power
knob. If B or M-Modes are in combination with D/CFM/PDI
they also cannot be adjusted. It is fixed at setup preset value.
Independent B and D – Knob changes power for B/M-Mode

while in B/M-Mode. Knob changes power for D/CFM/PDI
mode while in D/CFM/PDI mode.
No Effect – Acoustic output knob has no effect on changing

power. Values fixed at set up preset numbers.
Displayed TI EC
Choose the type of thermal index display.
TIS Thermal Index – Soft Tissue

TIC Thermal Index – Cranial Bone
TIB Thermal Index – Bone
Image Gamma [%] EC, UP

Choose the level of gamma correction applied to the image
during photography.
Customize 50 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Auto Focus Control EC

Choose to have the focus control follow depth changes as a
percent of depth or have the focus depth be a fixed value.
On Focus is a percent of the current depth (Focus

Pos % Depth preset) until changed by focus
position.
Off Focus is at a fixed depth until changed by
focus position control (Focus Depth [mm]
Preset).
Zoom Reference Update EC, UP

Choose to update timing of reference image in Zoom.
Off No reference update.

0.5s, 1.0s, or 2.0s Update at time interval selected.
TGC Depth Remap EC

Choose to have the TGC graphic recomputed and displayed
when parameters are changed.
Off No TGC remap with change.

On TGC remap with change.
Cine Gauge Auto Display EC

Choose to have the Cine gauge initially displayed when Cine
is activated.
Off Cine gauge not displayed.

On Cine gauge displayed.
Cine Speed EC, R

Choose the default Cine loop playback speed.
Choose 1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 or 1/16.
t
Customize 51
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Image Back Color EC, UP

Choose the image area background color.
Choose from:
BLK Black
GR1 10% Gray
GR2 20% Gray
GR3 30% Gray
DRD Dark Red
BDX Bordeaux Red
GGR Green Gray
DGR Dark Green
Frame Rate Display EC

Choose to enable or disable the frame rate display on the
screen.
Off Frame Rate not displayed.

On Frame Rate displayed.
Probe Direction Mark Display EC

Choose to turn the display of the probe direction marker on or
off.
Off No probe direction marker

On Probe direction marker is displayed
Customize 52 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Audio Tone Equalizer EC

Choose the desired type of audio output response
Flat Normal setting

1 Reduced high tones, increased mid tones
2 Reduced high tones, increased mid/low tones
3 Reduced high tones, increased mid tones
Bass Mid Treble

Flat 0db 0db 0db
1 0db 2db -4db
2 2db 2db -2db
3 0db 4db -2db
Display TGC Curve EC

Choose to turn the TGC Curve display on or off for both large
and small image format.
t
Customize 53
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
B Focus Dual Marker EC, UP

Choose to display focus markers on both dual B-Mode
images or just to the right side of the right image.
Off Only one focus marker is displayed.

On Focus markers will be displayed to the right of
both the right and left images.
B Color Auto Start EC, R

Choose to have B color (colorized gray scale) initially on or
off.
Off B color is off initially.

On B color is on initially.
Customize 54 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
B Color Map EC, UP

Choose a B color default map from six possibilities.
Choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
B Tag Auto Start EC, R

Choose to have B color tag initially on or off.
Off B color tag is initially off.

On B color tag is initially on.
B Tag Center [%] EC, R

Choose the center point of the B color tag window as a
default.
Choose from 0 to 100%. A percentage of the entire

displayed B color window (colorized gray scale).
B Tag Width [%] EC, R

Choose a default for the desired B color tag width.
Choose from 0 to 100% for the B color window size.
B Format B Single EC
Choose a default display size for a single B-Mode image.
Large or small.
The TGC curve is displayed only during B-Format B Single

Small.
B Format B Dual EC
Choose a default display size for a dual B-Mode image.
Large or small.
t
Customize 55
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
B Scale Mark EC
Choose as a default what the scale markers will represent in
B-Mode.
Depth/Width Depth and width marks.

Depth Depth marks only.
Comb Combination mode.
B Video Inverse EC
Choose as a default how to display B-Mode video.
Off White on black.

On Black on white.
Customize 56 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Timeline Sweep Method EC

Choose as a default between two types of timeline
presentations.
Scroll Continuous update at edge of the screen.

Moving-Bar Timeline is updated by a bar moving across
the screen.
Timeline Format EC
Choose as a default how the timeline (M-Mode or Doppler
spectrum) will be displayed. Only one type of display format
is available at one time.
Side/Side B-Mode on left half of the display and the

timeline on the right half.
Top/Bottom B-Mode on the top of the display and the
timeline across the bottom.
t
Customize 57
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Auto B Melt at Unfreeze EC, UP

When the B Pause function is used to freeze B-Mode while in
B/M or B/D, the preset sets the default to have the B-Mode
image remain paused when the system is unfrozen.
Off B-Mode remains paused at unfreeze.

On B-Mode exits pause condition at unfreeze.
M Mode Simul PD Activity EC

Choose as a default to have the ability to display
simultaneous M-Mode and pulsed Doppler spectrum.
Off No simultaneous M and PD display.

On Simultaneous display capable.
M Color Auto Start EC, R

Choose to have M color (colorized gray scale) initially on or
off.
Off M color is off initially.

On M color is on initially.
M Color Map EC, UP

Choose a M color default map from six possibilities.
Choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
M Tag Auto Start EC, R

Choose to have M color tag initially on or off.
Off M color tag is initially off.

On M color tag is initially on.
Customize 58 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
M Tag Center [%] EC, R

Choose the center point of the M color tag window as a
default.

displayed M color window (colorized gray scale).
M Tag Width [%] EC, R

Choose a default for the desired M color tag width.
Choose from 0 to 100% for the M color window size.
M Format (Side/Side, Full) EC

Choose the default size for the M-Mode display format when
it is full screen or side by side. Side/Side must be selected
for “Timeline Format” on page 11 in order to display this
format.
Choose large or small.
M Mode FULL B + Cursor EC

Choose to enable or disable the full B plus M-Mode cursor
display format.
Off Disabled
On Enabled
M Mode Side/Side B Large EC

Choose to have the large B-Mode (left side) and M-Mode
(right side) format enabled or disabled. Side/Side must be
selected for “Timeline Format” on page 11 in order to display
this format.
Off Disabled
On Enabled
t
Customize 59
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
M Mode Side/Side B Small EC

Choose to have the small B-Mode (left side) and M-Mode
(right side) format enable or disabled. Side/Side must be
this format.
Off Disabled
On Enabled
M Mode Top/Bottom B Large EC

Choose to have the large B-Mode (top) and M-Mode (bottom)
format enabled or disabled. Top/Bottom must be selected for
“Timeline Format” on page 11 in order to display this format.
Off Disabled
On Enabled
M Mode Top/Bottom B Mid EC

Choose to have the medium size B-Mode (top) and M-Mode
(bottom) format enabled or disabled. Top/Bottom must be
this format.
Off Disabled
On Enabled
M Mode Top/Bottom B Small EC

Choose to have the small size B-Mode (top) and M-Mode
(bottom) format enabled or disabled. Top/Bottom must be
this format.
Off Disabled
On Enabled
Customize 60 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
M Mode Full M EC
Choose to have the full screen M-Mode format enabled or
disabled.
Off Disabled
On Enabled
M Scale Mark EC
Choose the method to display scale markers in M-Mode.
Time/Depth Time horizontal and depth vertical.

Time Time horizontal only.
M Video Inverse EC
Choose the display video type for the M-Mode portion of the
display.
Off White on black (inverse off).

On Black on white (inverse on).
t
Customize 61
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
D/CFM Scale Mark EC

Choose the default value for the scale markers in Doppler
with color flow.
Velo Velocity
Frq Frequency
Velo/Frq Velocity/Frequency
Frq/Velo Frequency/Velocity
D Type for Wall Filter EC

Choose the type of wall filter display while in Doppler.
Velo Velocity
Freq Frequency
Customize 62 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
D Realtime Auto Trace EC, R

Choose to initially have the auto trace function during
real-time Doppler on or off.
Off No Real-time trace function.

On Real-time trace function enabled.
D Realtime Trace Method EC, R

Choose the value that will be traced during real-time Doppler.
Peak Peak or highest values.

Floor Bottom or lowest values.
Mean Average values.
Mode Brightest echo trace.
D Color Auto Start EC, R

Choose to have D color (colorized gray scale) initially on or
off.
Off D color is off initially.

On D color is on initially.
D Color Map EC, UP

Choose a D color default map from six possibilities.
Choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
D Tag Auto Start EC, R

Choose to have D color tag initially on or off.
Off D color tag is initially off.

On D color tag is initially on.
t
Customize 63
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
D Tag Center [%] EC, R

Choose the center point of the D color tag window as a
default.

displayed D color window (colorized gray scale).
D Tag Width [%] EC, R

Choose a default for the desired D color tag width.
Choose from 0 to 100% for the D color window size.
D Format (Side/Side, Full) EC

Choose the default Doppler display size for the side by side
or full Doppler formats. Side/Side must be selected for
“Timeline Format” on page 11 in order to display this format.
Choose large, small or very-small.
D Mode Full B + Cursor EC

Choose to have the full B-Mode plus Doppler cursor format
display enabled or disabled.
Off No full B plus Doppler cursor.

On Full B plus Doppler cursor available.
D Mode Side/Side B Large EC

Choose to have the large B-Mode (left side) and Doppler
this format.
Off No large B plus side by side Doppler.

On Large B plus side by side Doppler available.
Customize 64 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
D Mode Side/Side B Small EC

Choose to have the small B-Mode (left side) and Doppler
this format.
Off No small B plus side by side Doppler.

On Small B plus side by side Doppler available.
D Mode Top/Bottom B Large EC

Choose to have the large B-Mode (top) and Doppler
spectrum (bottom) format enabled or disabled. Top/Bottom
must be selected for “Timeline Format” on page 11 in order to
display this format.
Off No large B (top) plus Doppler (bottom).

On Large B (top) plus Doppler (bottom) available.
D Mode Top/Bottom B Mid EC

Choose to have the medium B-Mode (top) and Doppler
Off No medium B (top) plus Doppler (bottom).

On Medium B (top) plus Doppler (bottom)
available.
D Mode Top/Bottom B Small EC

Choose to have the small B-Mode (top) and Doppler
Off No small B (top) plus Doppler (bottom).

On Small B (top) plus Doppler (bottom) available.
t
Customize 65
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
D Mode Full D EC
Choose to have the full screen Doppler spectrum format
enabled or disabled.
Off No full screen Doppler spectrum.

On Full screen Doppler spectrum available.
D Audio to Speaker EC
Choose the default type of Doppler audio to be sent to the
speakers.
Stereo Forward & Reverse signals separate.

Mono–F Forward signals only.
Mono–R Reverse signals only.
D Audio Volume [%] EC, R

Choose the default percentage value for the Doppler volume
to the speakers.
Choose from 0 to 100% in 4 digit steps.
D Video Inverse EC
Choose the default type of video used to display the Doppler
spectrum.
Off White on black.

On Black on white.
Customize 66 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
D Image Processing EC
Choose the desired type of Doppler spectrum image
processing.
Black Holes Filling Reduce the noise in the Doppler

spectrum by filling in vertically.
Normal Standard Processing. No additional
filtering to reduce noise.
Smoothing Reduce the noise in the Doppler
spectrum by filling in vertically and
horizontally.
t
Customize 67
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
D Time Resolution EC
Choose the amount of emphasis to be placed on Doppler
time resolution as compared to frequency resolution.
1 Time resolution much greater than frequency

resolution.
2 Time resolution slightly greater than frequency
resolution.
3 Frequency resolution slightly greater than time
resolution.
4 Frequency resolution much greater than time
resolution.
Customize 68 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
PWD HPRF EC
Choose the default setting for the HPRF selection in PWD
Mode.
On HPRF is enabled.
Off HPRF is disabled.
PWD Base Line [%] EC, R

Choose the default percentage value for forward pulsed
Doppler spectrum display.
Choose from –75% to +75% in 25% increments (0 is 50%

forward and 50% reverse).
t
Customize 69
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
CWD Base Line [%] EC, R

Choose the default percentage value for forward continuous
wave Doppler spectrum display.
Choose from –75% to +75% in 25% increments (0 is 50%

forward and 50% reverse).
CWD Non-aliasing mode EC, R

Choose how to process the CWD signal for aliasing.
Off Non-aliasing mode off

On Increase signal to noise ratio to reduce
aliasing
CFM Capture Interval [s] EC, R

Choose the default value (time) for the CFM capture interval.
Off No time interval update.

1/2 Update at .5 second intervals.
1 Update at 1 second intervals.
2 Update at 2 second intervals.
ECG Update synchronized with ECG signal.
CFM Velo Dynamic Range EC, UP

Choose the default value for the CFM velocity dynamic range
display.
Customize 70 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
CFM/PDI Sequence EC, UP

Use the ellipse rocker switch to choose the default diagnostic
mode sequence for Color Flow Mapping or Power Doppler
Imaging.
Srvy>Mp>MpDtl Survey, map and map/detail.

Srvy>SrvyDtl Survey and survey/detail.
SrvyDtl>MpDtl Survey/detail and map/detail.
Srvy>SrvyDtl>Map Survey, survey/detail and map.
Refer to Adding Color 20.
CFM/PDI Initial Sequence EC

Choose the initial default diagnostic mode for Color Flow
Mapping or Power Doppler Imaging.
Choose survey, map, survey/detail or map/detail.
Refer to Adding Color 20.
CFM Color Map 1, 2, 3 and 4 EC

Choose the default color map type for each of the four
selection positions in the CFM mode.
Choose map V 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8. (velocity)
Choose map VT 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8. (velocity/turbulence)
Choose map T 1 or 2. (turbulence)
CFM Tag Auto Start EC, R

Choose to initially have the CFM tag on or off.
Off CFM tag is initially off.

On CFM tag is initially on.
t
Customize 71
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
CFM Tag Center [cm/s] EC, R

Choose the default center point in cm/sec for the CFM color
tag window.
Choose from 0 to 500.
CFM Tag Width [cm/s] EC, R

Choose the default width in cm/sec for the CFM color tag
window.
CFM Base Line [%] EC, R

Choose a default baseline for the CFM color map.
Choose –75, –50, –25, 0, 25, 50 or 75.
75
0
–75
Illustration 228. Color Scale Example
Customize 72 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
CFM/PDI Initial Mode EC, R

Choose the default mode for color CFM or PDI.
CFM Regular CFM mode.

PDI Power Dopper Imaging mode.
PDI B/W Display EC

This parameter turns on or off the transparent mode that
affects Power Maps 1 and 2 only.
Off PDI transparent mode off.

On PDI transparent mode on.
t
Customize 73
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
PDI Default Map EC

Choose the default color map for the PDI mode .
Choose from P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7 or P8
PDI Dynamic Range EC, UP

Choose the default value for the Power Doppler dynamic
range display.
PDI Tag Auto Start EC, R

Choose to initially have the PDI tag on or off.
Off PDI tag is initially off.

On PDI tag is initially on.
PDI Tag Center [cm/s] EC, R

Choose the default center point in cm/sec for the PDI color
tag window.
PDI Tag Width [cm/s] EC, R

Choose the default width in cm/sec for the PDI color tag
window.
Customize 74 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
ECG Auto Display EC

Choose to have the ECG waveform initially displayed on the
monitor.
Off ECG not automatically displayed.

On ECG automatically displayed.
ECG Gain EC, R

Choose the default value for ECG gain.
Choose from –20 to +10 in 2 digit increments.
t
Customize 75
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
ECG Position EC, R

Choose the default value for the ECG display position
(horizontal).
ECG Heart Rate Display EC

Choose to have the heart rate, calculated from the ECG
input, initially displayed on the monitor.
Off No heart rate displayed.

On Heart rate displayed.
ECG R Delay 1 [ms] EC, UP, R

Choose the default value in milliseconds for the R wave
Delay 1.
ECG R Delay 1 to 2 [ms] EC, UP, R

Choose the default value in milliseconds for the R wave delay
between Delay 1 and Delay 2.
ECG Audio Beat Sound EC, R

Choose as a default to represent the ECG input as an audio
tone.
Off No ECG audio tone.

On ECG represented as a tone.
ECG Audio Beat Sound Tone EC

Choose as a default the type of tone to be used to represent
the ECG input.
Choose tone-1, tone-2 or tone-3.
Customize 76 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
PCG Auto Display EC

Choose to have the PCG input initially displayed on the
monitor.
Off PCG not automatically displayed.

On PCG automatically displayed.
PCG Gain EC, R

Choose the default value for PCG gain.
PCG Position EC, R

Choose as a default the horizontal position of the PCG
waveform on the display.
AUX Auto Display EC

Choose to have the auxiliary signal input initially displayed on
the monitor.
Off Auxiliary signal not displayed.

On Auxiliary signal automatically displayed.
AUX Gain EC, R

Choose the default gain value for the auxiliary input signal.
AUX Position EC, R

Choose as a default the horizontal position of the auxiliary
waveform on the display.
t
Customize 77
2177611–100 Rev 0
Custom Display
Custom Display Page 17 is reserved for the 3D Imaging

option.
3D Imaging option is not available at this time.
Customize 78 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Overview
System Paramtr (parameters) in the Set Up Top Menu is six
pages of preset parameters that when set, are the same for
all exam categories and preset names. Changing system
parameters also affects these values found in factory default
presets.
Generally, these items are common to modes, probes,

formats and applications.
Illustration 232. Setup Sub-Menu (System Parameters)

available for that preset follows.
.
If a more detailed explanation of the preset choice is
required, it will immediately follow the brief description of the
preset.

System Parameters Sub-Menus, press Ctrl and 1
simultaneously.
A description of the parameter menu command lines and

instructions from customizing parameters is found on
Customize 16.
t
Customize 79
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
System Parameters Contents
Illustration 233. System Parameters Contents Page
The System Parameters Contents page shows a summary of

the six menu pages.
Customize 80 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Page 1 of 6 (System Setup)
Illustration 234. System Parameters Page 1
Hospital Name
Enter the desired hospital or facility name. This appears at
the top of all display screens and report pages.
Maximum of 34 alphanumeric characters.
Date Format
Choose the desired presentation format for all dates
displayed.
Year/Month/Day
Month/Day/Year
Day/Month/Year
t
Customize 81
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Time Format
Choose the desired presentation format for all time graphics
displayed.
24 H 24 hour clock
12 H 12 hour clock
Language
Choose the desired language for all displayed graphics.
English, French, German, Spanish or Italian.
Diag Category
Choose the desired default diagnostic category.
Rad/Abd Radiology/Abdomen
Obst Obstetrical
Gyne Gynecology
Card Cardiology
Vasc Vascular
Urol Urology
SmlPts Small Parts
Report Cursor Blink

Choose to have the report cursor blinking or solid.
Off Not Blinking

On Blinking
Report Cursor Type

Choose the style of report cursor desired.
Underscore
Block
Customize 82 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
CUA Selection Reset on New Patient

Choose to reset all Composite Ultrasound Age flags on the
OB Report pages to yes when New Patient is selected.
Off Do not reset on New Patient.

On Reset on New Patient.
Insite Access Enable

Choose to turn on or off the capability to access remote
diagnostics via telephone line.
Off Remote diagnostics disabled.

On Remote diagnostics enabled.
Keyboard LED Bright

Choose the amount of illumination desired for the keyboard
keys and switches.
Dark Dim for dark rooms.

Bright Brighter for well lighted rooms.
Keyboard Menu Bright

Choose the amount of illumination desired for the Soft Menu
Vacuum Florescent Display.
Dark Dim setting.

Mid1 Low medium setting.
Mid2 High medium setting.
Bright Brightest setting.
Keyboard Tab
Choose the comment cursor movement desired when using
the Tab key.
Normal Eight character spaces.

Word Next word (after a space).
t
Customize 83
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Operation Error Beep

Choose to disable the audio error beep or set the volume of
the tone that is heard when a keystroke error is made.
Off No error beep.

Low Low volume beep on error.
Loud High volume beep on error.
Standby Time [min]

The system can be set to go into stand-by mode if no
keyboard activity is sensed for a specific period of time.
5, 10, 15, 30, 45, 60 minutes

or INF (infinity-never)
Power on Memory Test

Choose to turn on or off the system memory test operation at
power up.
.
Off Do not run test.
On Run test.
NOTE: Selecting “ON” will cause a 0.5 second delay in the

power on time of the LOGIQ  500.
Power on Status
Choose to reset exam/system parameters at power up or set
to the parameters saved when power was turned off.
Keep-Latest Set to latest values.

Reset Reset to system defaults.
Customize 84 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
System Error Erase Interval

Set the time that a system error message will be displayed on
the monitor before it is erased.
0.1, 1, 10 minutes or infinity.

Infinity is until the next error occurs.
Display Probe Name

Choose to display the names of the probes attached to the
console in the soft menu when an available Probe Select key
is pressed.
Off Do not display Probe Names.

On Display Probe Names.
t
Customize 85
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Setup Blue Back Start

Choose to display a color for the background of the preset
menus. Color is set by Col BackGnd.
Off Background is transparent.

On Display a colored background.
Mask Image Characters

Choose to mask (disable) the graphic characters on the
image display.
Off Graphics displayed.

On Graphics not displayed.
Customize 86 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
PCG Filter
Choose the desired level of PCG (Physiological Signal)
filtering.
Low Low level filtering.

Mid1 Medium level filtering.
Delay Trigger Source

Choose the source for the cardiac trigger delay.
ECG Electrocardiogram input.

AUX Auxiliary signal input.
ID/Name Prohibition After Measurement

Choose to be able to use the ID/Name Key to change patient
information after a measurement has been taken or lockout
the use of the ID/Name key after a measurement is taken.
Off ID/Name Key functional after measurement.

On ID/Name Key not functional after
measurement.
BSA Type
Choose the formula used to calculate Body Surface Area.
Oriental Asian formula.

Occidental USA formula.
OB Report Format
Choose the format for calculation and display of OB
measurements.
Tokyo Tokyo University Method.

Osaka Osaka University Method.
USA United States Method.
Europe European Method.
t
Customize 87
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
EFBW Form (Europe)

Choose the method for calculating estimate fetal birth weight
for the European method.
Shep/Wars Shepherd/Warshoff Method.

Rich/Berk Richards/Berkowitz Method.
Hadlock Hadlock Method.
German German Accepted Method.
Merz German Method
EFBW Form (Tokyo)

Choose the formula to be used for calculating the estimate
fetal birth weight for the Tokyo method.
Tokyo Tokyo University

Tokyo–S1 Tokyo Sinozuka EFW1
Col BackGnd
Choose the color for the background of Preset and Patient
Entry menus displayed on the monitor.
Color options are:

BLK Black
GRY Gray
ULB Ultramarine Blue
BLU Blue
PWB Periwinkle Blue
MGR Moss Green
MNK Mink
MRN Maroon
Customize 88 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Col Sys Inf

Choose the color for all alphanumeric system information
displayed on the monitor.
Color options are:

WHT White
YLW Yellow
GRN Green
LGR Light Green
PBL Pale Blue
PNK Baby Pink
RED Vermilion
YOR Yellow Orange
Col Imag Crs

Choose the color for the image characters on the display
(Probe Orientation, Zoom Depth, and Image Recall graphics).
See color options under Col Sys Inf on Customize 89.
Col Scale
Choose the color for the scale markers on the display. See
color options under Col Sys Inf on Customize 89.
Col Comment
Choose the color for comments and annotations entered on
the display. See color options under Col Sys Inf on
Customize 89.
Col Mes Crs

Choose the color for the fixed measurement cursor on the
display. See color options under Col Sys Inf on
Customize 89.
t
Customize 89
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Col Applcat
Choose the color for completed measurement information
displayed on the monitor. See color options under Col Sys
Inf on Customize 89.
Col Moving
Choose a color for the active movable cursor on the display.
Col Aux
Choose a color for all auxiliary signal information displayed
on the monitor (ECG, AUX, and PCG). See color options
under Col Sys Inf on Customize 89.
Col Dop Trac

Choose a color for the Doppler Spectrum Trace function.
Customize 90 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
User Define Key No. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6

Choose to be able to lockout the ability to reprogram a user
define key sequence once it has been saved.
Unlock Key may be reprogrammed.

Lock Key may NOT be reprogrammed until it is set
to unlock.
t
Customize 91
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Page 4 of 6 (System Setup – Body Pattern)
Body Pattern Package 1–8

Choose up to 16 body patterns (2 sub-menu pages) for each
of the 8 packages. Eight custom body pattern packages are
then available for selection to be displayed in the Set Up/
Preset Program Menus, page one.
An illustration of each body pattern available is shown on

Basic Scan 59. To select the body pattern package to be
used for each user preset within an exam category, refer to
Customize 107.
Customize 92 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Body pattern package (1–8) customization
Choose the Set Up Top Menu, then choose System Paramtr

(system parameters) from the Set Up Sub-Menu and go to
page 4.
Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to the word

“Submenu” of the desired body pattern package number to
be customized.
Press Set. The body pattern selection Sub-Menu appears.
Illustration 238. Initial Body Pattern Sub-Menu
The rectangle in the display represents space for two rows of

body patterns (two Sub-Menu display pages). There is a
space for eight body patterns in each row.
Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to a desired

body pattern location.
Press Set. A box appears around a Body Pattern or blank

space if no pattern is programmed.
(continued)
t
Customize 93
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Body pattern package (1–8) customization (cont’d)
Illustration 239. Adding Body Patterns
Use the Ellipse rocker switch to cycle through the body

pattern choices.
↑
↓
When the desired body pattern is displayed, use the

Trackball and Zoom Size/Rotation knob to position the
probe orientation marker to the desired default position on
the body pattern.
.
Press Set to complete the selection for that menu position.
NOTE: As many as sixteen selections (two rows of eight)

can be made for each body pattern package.
Customize 94 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Body Pattern Deletion
Use the Trackball to position the arrow cursor over the

pattern to be deleted.
Press Set. A box appears around the Body Pattern.
Use the Ellipse rocker switch to cycle to the blank body

pattern selection.
↑
↓
Press Set to record a blank space for that body pattern

location.
t
Customize 95
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Body Pattern Probe Change Erase

Choose to erase the displayed body pattern when a probe is
changed or have the body pattern remain after a probe
change.
Off Body pattern remains.

On Body pattern is erased.
Body Pattern Unfreeze Erase

Choose to erase the body pattern when the system exits the
freeze function or have the body pattern remain after
unfreeze.
Off Body pattern remains.

On Body pattern is erased.
Body Pattern Copy To Active Side

Choose to have the selected body pattern copied to the
active side during dual format displays.
Off Do not copy to active side.

On Copy to active side.
Customize 96 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Page 5 of 6 (System Setup – Recording)
Report Video Inverse to Printer

Send calculation summary report video to the print device in
inverse (reverse) video.
Off Do not send inverse video to the printer.

On Send inverse video to the printer.
Record 1 B&W or Color

Choose the type of device to be controlled by the Record 1
key for black and white or color images. Use the Ellipse
rocker switch to cycle through the selections.
Black and White Polaroid Camera, Color Polaroid Camera,

Black and White Printer, Color Printer, Multi Image Camera,
Image Archive or Computer.
t
Customize 97
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Record 2 B&W or Color

Choose the type of device to be controlled by the Record 2
key for black and white or color images. Use the Ellipse
rocker switch to cycle through the selections.

Black and White Printer, Color Printer, Multi Image Camera,
Image Archive or Computer.
Report
Choose the type of device that will be used to print the
calculation summary report pages.

Black and White Printer, Color Printer, Multi Image Camera or
Image Archive.
External Video Signal

Choose the type of video signal, from an external source, that
t
is being put into the LOGIQ 500.
S-Video Two component video.

RGB Red, green, blue and sync.
Col-Comp Composite color signal.
Color Printer Type

Choose the type of color printer (option) that is attached to
t
the LOGIQ 500.
UP3030 Sony UP-3030MD.

UP1850 Sony UP-1800/UP-1850.
UP1850P Sony UP–1850P.
Customize 98 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Color Printer Memory

Choose how printer memory will be divided and thus how the
color print will be formatted.
Single One picture per sheet.

Quad–Frm Four pictures per sheet with frame.
Quad–Frmls Four pictures per sheet without frame.
Color Printer Signal

Choose the type of video signal being sent to the color
printer.
RGB Red, green, blue and sync.

Video Composite Video.
S-Video Two component video.
Plug 1–BW
Choose which device has its record/expose cable connected
to plug one.
B&W–Prnt Black and white video page printer.

B&W–Pola Black and white Polaroid camera.
Col–Pola Color Polaroid camera.
Plug 2–CLR
Choose which device has its record/expose cable connected
to plug two.
B&W–Prnt Black and white video page printer.

B&W–Pola Black and white Polaroid camera.
Col–Pola Color Polaroid camera.
t
Customize 99
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Port MIC
Choose the type of device that has a remote control cable
connected to the multi-image camera port.
Off No connection.
MIC Multi Image Camera.
VCR Video Cassette Recorder.
Col–Prnt Color Printer.
Computer Data Management Center Computer
Port A/B
Choose the type of device that has a remote control cable
connected to VCR/printer ports A and B.
Off No connection.
MIC Multi Image Camera.
VCR Video Cassette Recorder.
Col–Prnt Color Printer.
Computer Data Management Center Computer
Maskline Record
Mask or hide the operator message area on the display
during the record function.
Off Message will not show during record.

On Message will be displayed during record.
B&W Printer Exposure Pulse Length [msec]

Set the exposure pulse length needed to trigger the B&W
printer print function.
Choose from 50 to 500 ms in 50 ms intervals.
B&W Printer Exposure Min Interval [sec]

Set the minimum interval in seconds between B&W printer
exposure capabilities.
Choose from 1 to 10 in 0.5 sec intervals.
Customize 100 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Page 6 of 6 (System Setup – User ID and Password)
Password Ask
Choose to use the password security option at power up by
asking for the user ID and password to be typed in.
.
Off Do not ask for the password.
On Ask for the password.
NOTE: Refer to Getting Started 14 for usage of the

password function.
t
Customize 101
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
USER ID :
PASSWORD: Version 3.10
Illustration 242. System Startup Screen with Password Ask on
User ID 1–8
As many as eight user ID codes can be entered into the
system parameters. These can be used for security
purposes. When used with an accompanying password, user
ID establishes limited access to the system at power up.
Maximum of eight alphanumeric characters for each user ID.
Customize 102 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Password 1–8
As many as eight passwords can be entered to correspond
with the eight user ID codes. These must be used when
password ask is on.
.
Maximum of eight alphanumeric characters for each
password.
Initially, User ID Codes are blank. A User ID must be entered

before a password can be recorded.
Selecting an ID
S Select the desired User ID number on page 6 of the

Set Up/System Parameter Menu, by moving the arrow
cursor over the User ID number and press Set.
S The User ID entry area is highlighted.
S Type in a maximum of 8 characters for the User ID.
Press Return.
The User ID is now recorded and displayed on the

System Parameter Menu.
Entering a Password
Once a User ID is established or changed, a password can

be entered.
S Move the arrow cursor to the desired password and press

Set.
S Type in the new password. Press Return.
.
S Type in the new password a second time for
re-confirmation. Press Return.
NOTE: The password function is upper and lower case
sensitive.
The Password function is not active unless “Password Ask” in

page five of system parameter menu is set to On.
t
Customize 103
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Parameters
Changing/Deleting a Password
To change or delete a password:
S Move the arrow cursor to the desired password and press

Set.
S In the highlighted password area, type the old password.
Press Return.
S To change a password, type in the new characters. Press
Return. To delete a password, type in eight spaces.
Press Return.
S Type the new password or eight spaces a second time for
confirmation. Press Return.
The password is now changed or deleted.
Changing/Deleting a User ID
To change or delete a User ID:
S Move the arrow cursor to the desired User ID and press

Set.
S Input the old password. Press Return.
S Type in the new User ID to change or type in spaces to
.
delete the User ID. Press Return.
The User ID is now changed or deleted.
NOTE: If the User ID is deleted (all spaces), the

corresponding password is also deleted.
If no password is selected with the User ID, the ID
can be changed or deleted directly. There is no
requirement to enter the old password.
Customize 104 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Overview
Preset Program in the Set Up top menu is nine pages of
preset parameters that are generally considered application
parameters. They are exam category and preset name
dependent.
Special features in the Preset Program Sub-Menus are:
S Annotation Library script designation

S Summary report display format editing
S User programmable OB table editing
S Calculation sequence programming
S Mode measurement menu customizing
Illustration 243. Set Up Top Sub-Menus (Preset Program)

available for that preset follows. (Refer to Index of Preset
Parameters, Overview for key to parameter codes.)
.
If a more detailed explanation of the preset choice is
required, it will immediately follow the brief description of the
preset.

Preset Program Sub-Menus, press Ctrl and 1 simultaneously.
A description of the parameter menu command lines and

instructions from customizing parameters is found on
Customize 16.
t
Customize 105
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Preset Program Contents
Illustration 244. Preset Program Contents Page
The Preset Program Contents pages shows a summary of

the nine menu pages.
Customize 106 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Page 1 of 9 (Application)
Illustration 245. Preset Program Page 1
Body Pattern Probe Mark Preset EC, UP

Choose to enable/disable the preset position of the probe
marker graphic with the body pattern.
Off Do not use the preset position.

On Use the preset position.
Body Pattern Package EC, UP

Choose one of the 8 customized body pattern packages to be
displayed with the current application preset.
Body pattern package 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8.
Refer to Customize 92 for details on programming the

contents of each body pattern package.
t
Customize 107
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Comment Erase at Display Change EC

Choose to erase all comments when a change is made in
scan mode.
Off Do not erase at mode change.

On Erase at mode change.
Comment Home Position Horizontal EC, R

Choose a point on the horizontal axis for the comment cursor
home position.
Comment Home Position Vertical EC, R

Choose a point on the vertical axis for the comment cursor
home position.
Comment Clear Key Function EC

Choose to erase all comments with the Clear key or just the
line of comments that the cursor is on.
All Erase all comments on the screen.

Line Erase the comments on the cursor line. The
second time Clear is pressed, all comments
will be erased.
Trackball Function at Freeze EC

Choose the function assigned to the Trackball when the
image is frozen.
No No function assigned.
Measure Trackball assigned to the measurement
function.
Comment Trackball assigned to the comment function.
Body Trackball assigned to the body pattern
function.
Customize 108 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Page 2 of 9 (Application)
VCR Rec Audio Doppler EC

Choose the format for audio recording in Doppler mode on
the VCR.
Stereo Right/left channel separation.
Dop–L/Voice–R Doppler on left channel and voice on

the right channel.
t
Customize 109
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
VCR Play Audio EC

Choose how to playback VCR recorded audio.
Stereo Left and right separation.

Mono–L Left speaker only.
Mono–R Right speaker only.
VCR Play Audio Volume [%] EC, R

Choose the default or initial percentage of volume level for
VCR playback audio.
Image Archive Compression EC

Choose to compress the image archive data or not.
.
No No data compression.
Yes Data compression for the DEFF format.
NOTE: If image compression is used, images saved by the

LOGIQ  500 cannot be read on other TIFF Readers, DEFF
devices or the LOGIQ  700. However, they can be read on
the LOGIQ  400.
B/W Image & Color Graphics EC

Choose to archive the image graphics as black and white or
color.
B/W Black and White Graphics.

Color Color graphics as displayed on the monitor.
Customize 110 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Page 3 of 9 (Application – Measurement)
Time Unit EC
Choose the unit of display for all time measurements.
ms milliseconds.
sec seconds.
Length Unit EC
Choose the unit of display for all length (distance)
measurements.
mm millimeters.
cm centimeters.
t
Customize 111
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Circ/Area Method EC
Choose the method to be used for circumference/area
measurements.
Trace Manually trace with the Trackball.

Ellipse Ellipse method.
Circle Circle method.
2 Dist Two diameter (distance) method.
Diameter Single distance method.
Echo Level Method EC

Choose the size of the echo level measurement box cursor.
Box 3mm 3mm x 3mm box.

Heart Rate Method EC

Choose the method for measuring heart rate.
Auto Automatic.
Manual Manual.
VCRPB Calib Method EC, R

Choose the default method for VCR playback calibration.
Auto Automatic Calibration.

Manual Manual Calibration.
Average Activity EC
Choose to enable or disable the calculation summary report
page measurement averaging function.
Off Measurement averaging off.

On Measurement averaging on.
Customize 112 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Max Velocity (Advanced Vascular)

This selection is used with the Advanced Vascular option only
(LOGIQ 500 MD). When turned on it overrides the Average
Activity preset to cause the Advanced Vascular report page
to display maximum velocity rather than latest or average.
Off No effect on averaging activity selection

On Max Velocity displayed on report page.
Average Number EC
Choose how many measurements will be used in the
averaging function.
Enter 1, 2 or 3.
Mask Image EC
Choose to put the measurement/calculation results in a
colored box over the image or just the graphic characters
over the image.
Off Graphics are placed on top of the image.

On Graphics are placed in a colored box on top of
the image.
TA Max Auto EC
Choose to enable or disable the automatic measurement of
TAMAX (Time Averaged Maximum).
Off Automatic off.

On Automatic on.
t
Customize 113
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Add 1 Week to EDD EC

Choose to add an additional week to the displayed estimated
date of delivery.
Off Do Not add 1 week.

On Add one week to the calculated EDD.
Display EDD with GA Value EC

Choose to display or not to display the estimated EDD.
Off Do Not display EDD with GA.

On Display EDD with GA.
Diastole/Systole Determination EC
Used with Advanced Cardiac Calculation option. Determine
if measurement is systole or diastole automatically from the
measurements relationship to the ECG wave.
Manual Automatic determination disabled.

Auto Automatic determination enabled.
R Delay Time of End Systole Prior Edge EC, UP

Used with automatic determination of systole/diastole in the
Advanced Cardiac Calculation option. Sets the delay time on
the ECG wave to ensure systole will be properly determined.
Use the Ellipse rocker switch to enter a number between 0

and 2000 msecs.
Customize 114 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
End Systole Period from Prior Edge EC, UP

Used with Automatic determination of Systole/Diastole in the
Advanced Cardiac Calculation option. Sets the delay time
on the ECG wave to ensure diastole will be properly
determined.
Use the Ellipse rocker switch to enter a number between 0

and 2000 msecs.
Media Selection for Fetal Trend EC

Used with the Fetal Growth Trend option. Sets the media to
be used to store patient data. The hard drive has a much
limited capacity.
HD System Hard Drive.

MO Magnetic Optical Disk (removeable).
Measurement Clear Operation EC

When Clear is pressed, decide if it will erase measurements
only or measurements and comments.
Meas.–only Erase only measurements not comments.

with–Comment Erase measurements and comments
simultaneously.
t
Customize 115
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Page 4 & 5 of 9 (Application – Measurement Sub-Menu)
Illustration 248. Preset Program Pages 4 and 5
Customize 116 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Cardiac Measurement Choices EC, UP

Used with Advanced Cardiac Calculation option. Determine
if the measurement will be used in the automatic M-Mode
calculation sequence.
Off Automatic measurement callout will NOT be

made.
On Automatic measurement callout WILL be
made.
t
Customize 117
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Page 6 of 9 (Application – Measurement Submenu)
Report Format EC
If the current exam category has an associated summary
report page, select this menu option to change the vertical (y)
position of the measurement elements on the report page.
The elements that can be edited depend on each report
page.
Advanced Report Formatting
t
The LOGIQ 500 allows for user control of each exam
category summary report measurement display format.
Except for the protected 5 lines of each report page (that has
hospital and patient information) and the bottom area for
calculations and comments, the vertical position (“y”) of the
measurements can be customized by the user.
Factory default items can be deleted or user desired items

added.
Customize 118 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Example report format change
Exam Category: OB
OB measurements are limited to changes in the vertical

position (“y”) on the report page.
To change the position of a measurement:
From Set Up/Preset Program Menu page 6, use the

Trackball to place the arrow cursor over Report Format and
press Set. The report format editor screen appears.
Illustration 250. Report Format Editor
Use the Trackball or Return to position the highlighted area

over the “Ypos” of the measurement to be changed.
Type the new position number.
(continued)
t
Customize 119
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Example report format change (cont’d)
Use the Trackball to highlight any additional positions to be

changed.
When all changes are complete, highlight Save and press

Set.
To exit the Report Format Editor and return to the Set Up/
Preset Program Menu, highlight Exit and press Set.
To Add or Delete a measurement:
Enter the Report Format Editor in the same manner as “To

change the position”.
Use the Trackball to highlight the desired measurement

name (to delete or change) or highlight a blank area (to add).
.
To delete a name, type in all spaces.
To change a name, type over the current name.
To add a name, type in the new name.
NOTE: When adding or changing a measurement name, it

must contain two important elements:
S Measurement type. For example, GS, BPD, CRL, HC.

S Author’s name. The author’s name must appear in
parentheses, for example (Hadlock), (Hellman).
Highlight Save and press Set to record all changes.
.
Highlight Exit and press Set to return to the Set Up/Preset
program menu.
NOTE: If two measurement names are placed in the same

position, an error message appears.
“More than 1 Measurement Field Name at the SAME Ypos”.
Customize 120 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
User Table Editor

If the factory preset OB tables are not suitable, the user can
input data for five OB tables. The titles given to these tables
appear as selections in the OB Calculations Soft-Menu when
displayed.
To program a user table
Select the Set Up Top Menu.
Illustration 251. Set Up Top Menu
Select Preset Program from the Set Up Sub-Menu. The

preset program selections are displayed over the image on
the monitor.
Use the Trackball to place the arrow cursor over User Table
Editor.
Press Set to display the User Table Programming Main

Menu.
t
Customize 121
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
To program a user table (cont’d)
The User Table Programming main menu appears as shown

in Illustration 252.
Illustration 252. User Table Programming
Use the Trackball to place the arrow cursor on the desired

table number TBL1 to TBL5.
Press Set to select the desired table.
Use the Trackball to place the arrow cursor on the desired

table dimension. The choices are Dist (mm) for distance in
millimeters, Circ (mm) for circumference in millimeters and
Area for area in square millimeters. Press Set when the
cursor is over the correct dimension.
Customize 122 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
To program a user table (cont’d)
Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to the title block.
Type in the desired table title (maximum 4 characters). Press
Return.
Type in the author’s name (maximum 8 characters). Press

Return.
Type in any desired notes (maximum 30 characters). Press

Return.
Type in the minimum or beginning data value for the table

(maximum 4 digits). Press Return.
Type in the interval value between each table data point

(maximum 4 digits). Press Return.
.
The selection “Table-Edit” should now be highlighted. Press
Set.
NOTE: The Return key or Trackball can be used to cycle

through the menu selections. To make a choice, press Set.
t
Customize 123
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
To enter table values
The Table-Edit Menu shown in Illustration 253 allows for

adding data, editing data or clearing (deleting) a User Table.
Illustration 253. Table Edit Menu
For each data point, the weeks (2 digits), days (1 digit) and
deviation (2 digits) must be entered.
The menu choices at the bottom allow:

SAVE Saves the table in its current form.
CLEAR Clears or deletes the entire table (and title).
SETUP Returns to the User Table Programming Setup
menu.
NEXT-PG Goes to the next page to continue data entry.
EXIT Exits the User Programmable Table function.
.
Trackball to one of the above choices and press Set. When
exit is selected without doing a “Save”, all additions or edits
are lost. The table reverts to its previous state.
NOTE: If a new table was added, the measurement can be

added to the summary report. Follow the instructions under
Report Format in the Set Up/Preset program.
Customize 124 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Sequence 1–8 EC (Auto Sequence Programming)

The user can program a maximum of eight calculation
sequences with a maximum of eight measurements per
sequence.
These are labeled Sequence 1–8 in the Set Up/Preset

Program Menu as USERSEQUENCE1–8 in the
Measurement Sub-Menu or in the Auto Sequence Top Menu.
When Sequence 1–8 is chosen from the Auto Sequences

Top Menu or the Measurement Sub-Menu, the system
automatically prompts the user through the calculations
previously programmed.
Program a Sequence

sequence number (1–8) on page 6 of the Set Up/Preset
Program Menus.
Press Set. The first page of the eight Measurement

Sequence Sub-Menus is displayed.
t
Customize 125
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Program a User Sequence (cont’d)
.
Illustration 254. Measurement Sequence Sub-Menu
NOTE: The first row under the sub-menu title line shows
three important items:
************* Measurement Sequence Submenu *****************************

USERSEQUENCE2 8 UNDEFINED NEXT CALC
Illustration 255. Sequence Sub-Menu Status Line
8 is the order in which the measurement or calculation will

be made in USERSEQUENCE 2. 1 is first, 2 is second.....8 is
last.
UNDEFINED is the current measurement in that sequence

location. Undefined means it is blank.
NEXTCALC allows the user to cycle through the eight pages

of measurements and calculations available to be
programmed.
Customize 126 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Use the Ellipse rocker switch to cycle to the desired

usersequence measurement number (1–8).
↑
↓

measurement/calculation.
. Move the arrow cursor to Next Calc and press Set if a

sub-menu page change is necessary.
Press Set when the arrow cursor is over the desired

The newly selected measurement/calculation appears as the

current measurement for the highlighted USERSEQUENCE
number replacing undefined.
Repeat the previous steps as necessary to program

additional sequence number locations for any of the 8 user
sequences.
Hints USERSEQUENCE1–8 are choices that can be programmed

in the Measurement Menus for each mode (B, M, D, and
CFM) per exam category.
Auto Sequence Top Menu choices are exam category

dependent. Sequences programmed in Vascular are not
available when the Cardiac exam category is selected.
UNDEFINED means no measurement/calculation is in that

location.
Use UNDEFINED to delete a desired measurement.
t
Customize 127
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
To customize the Usersequence/Auto Sequence name:
Move the Trackball to the USERSEQUENCE# at the top of

one of the eight Calculation menus.
Press Set.
Type in the name of the Usersequence. The space available

is two lines of seven characters each.
Move the Trackball to SAVE.
Press Set.
Customize 128 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Performing an Auto Sequence (USERSEQUENCE)
Select an Auto Sequence, or a user programmable mode

measurement menu selection, the system automatically
prompts the user to do the first measurement in the
sequence.
After the first measurement/calculation is completed, the

system automatically prompts the user to do the second
measurement in the sequence.
This continues until all measurements are completed.
Sequence Modification
During the Auto Sequence function:
Press the top of the Elllipse rocker switch to skip a desired

measurement and advance to the next measurement in the
↑ sequence.
↓
Press the bottom of the Ellipse rocker switch to skip back to

a previous measurement in the sequence.
Measurements skipped will appear again at the end of the

sequence. This gives the user a second chance to make the
measurements prior to exiting the Auto Sequece function.
t
Customize 129
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
rMeasurement Menu B/M/D/CFM EC, UP

Each exam category has a set of factory default
measurements/calculations. The four measurement menu
modes allow the user to add a maximum of four new pages
to the measurement sub-menus per exam category per mode
within a user application preset. With 8 items per page, a
.
total of 32 measurements/calculations can be added for each
exam category in B, M, D, which is distinct and separate from
those that can be programmed into CFM-Mode.
NOTE: Measurements and Calculations setup for

Measurement Menu B are not transferred to Menu M, D, or
CFM. Each one is separate.
Organization
There are four pages of space available for the user to add
measurements and calculations to an exam category
measurement menu.
These pages do not appear in the Soft Menu display unless

items are placed in the number location of that page.
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Sub Menu page 1 of 4 Sub Menu page 2 of 4
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
Sub Menu page 3 of 4 Sub Menu page 4 of 4
Illustration 256. Measurement Menu Key Numbers
The spaces available for calculations are called Key

Numbers. Key Numbers 1 through 8 are on page 1,
9 through 16 on page 2 etc. (See Illustration 256).
Customize 130 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Programming Measurements

Measurement Menu (B, M, D, or CFM) on page 6 of the
Set Up/Preset Program menus.
Press Set. The last page viewed of the four measurement

pages is displayed.
Illustration 257. Measurement Setup Sub-Menu
t
Customize 131
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
.
Programming Measurements (cont’d)
NOTE: The first row under the sub-menu title line shows
three important items.
************* Measurement VFD Softmenu Setup Submenu*******************

KEY NUMBER 1 USERSEQUENCE1 NEXT CALC
Illustration 258. Sequence Sub-Menu Status Line
1 is the position in the soft menu where the measurement

for key number one will be displayed.
USERSEQUENCE1, or the customized name, is the current

measurement sequence in that key number location.
NEXTCALC allows the user to cycle through the four pages

of measurements and calculations available.
Remembering how the key numbers are organized (see

Illustration 256), use the Ellipse rocker switch to change to
the desired key number.
Move the arrow cursor to NEXTCALC and press Set if a

sub-menu page change is necessary.
Press Set when the arrow cursor is over the desired

.
The newly selected measurement/calculation appears in the
highlighted key number location.
NOTE: If key number is desired to be empty (blank, deleted)

choose UNDEFINED.
Factory default measurements/calculations are protected and

cannot be changed.
Adding authors to a measurement menu does NOT

automatically add the measurement to the report page.
Repeat the previous steps to program any key number in any

mode menu. Be sure to use the Save function prior to exiting
the Calculation menus and the Preset Program menus.
Customize 132 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Cardiac Calculation
This sub menu can be used to rearrange the order of the
automatic cardiac measurement prompts for the Advanced
Cardiac Calculation option.
Refer to Cardiology 94 for details on measurement sequence

modification.
t
Customize 133
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Page 7 & 8 of 9 (Application – Annotation Library)
Illustration 259. Preset Program Pages 7 and 8
Customize 134 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Annotation Library 1–24 EC, UP

Type in the desired (most commonly used) display
annotations. There is space for a maximum of 20 characters
(numbers, letters and spaces) for each library script.
A maximum of 24 annotation library scripts is available per
exam cagegory.
Simply place the arrow cursor across from the desired

annotation library number and press Set.
Type the desired script.
Press Set to complete the entry.
t
Customize 135
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Page 9 of 9 (Application – Patient Information)
New Patient Y/N Ask EC

In the new patient entry menu, choose to ask to erase all
current patient data or not.
Off Do not ask, automatically erase all patient

data.
On Ask to erase data Y/N.
Display Unit Age 1–4 EC

Choose the priority for the units to be used to display patient
age. Age 1 is the highest priority. Age 4 is the lowest priority.
year Display age in years.

month Display age in months.
week Display age in weeks.
day Display age in days.
nodisp No display.
Customize 136 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Display Unit Height 1–3 EC

Choose the priority to be used for the units to display the
patient’s height.
cm Centimeters
inch Inches
feet-inch Feet and inches
nodisp No display
Display Unit Weight 1–2 EC

Choose the priority to be used for the units to display the
patient’s weight.
kg Kilograms
lbs Pounds
none None
t
Customize 137
2177611–100 Rev 0
Preset Program
Customize 138 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Save Values
Overview
Save Values is a selection in the Set Up Menu that allows for
the quick retention of a current system settings and preset
parameters.
It works like the Save command in the Custom Display,

System Parameter or Preset Program sub-menus.
Illustration 261. Set Up Sub-Menu
Saving Scan Values

If at any time during a scan it is felt that the system settings
are optimized and should be saved as an Exam Applications
Preset, simply select Save Values.
The system will start the process of saving all of the current
settings as a User Exam Applications Preset.
If a factory default applications preset is active when Save

Values is selected, the message:
“Input User Preset Number (1-8)”
appears at the bottom of the screen. Enter the preset

position number 1 through 8. The data is saved and
available for recall at the designated preset location.
t
Customize 139
2177611–100 Rev 0
Save Values
Saving Scan Values (cont’d)

If a User Preset is active when Save Values is selected, the
message:
“Overwrite existing data ‘Y’ or ‘N’”
appears at the bottom of the screen.
.
Choose ‘Y’ to overwrite data in the current preset location or
‘N’ to designate a new preset location 1 through 8.
NOTE: See Customize 141 for more details on Exam

Applications Presets.
Customize 140 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Overview
The top menu Preset selection will display a maximum of
eight factory application preset choices for each exam
category.
Factory default presets can only be changed by the user

using System Parameters.
The user may define a maximum of eight user application

presets for display on the Preset sub-menu which will be
designated as page one.
Preset parameters that are exam category dependent and

available for customization are found in the Preset Program
and Custom Display menus described earlier in this chapter.
Some parameters are also probe dependent within the
application preset.
Items found under System Parameters affect each exam

category, application preset or probe.
Defining a User Preset

User presets appear on page one of the Preset Sub-Menu.
They will appear on the Soft Menu Display, as shown in
Illustration 262.
Illustration 262. User Preset Configuration
t
Customize 141
2177611–100 Rev 0
Defining a User Preset (cont’d)

To define a User Preset (1–8), first ensure that the system:
S is set to the proper exam category by using New Patient

or ID/Name keys
S is the desired probe connected and activated.
S has all keyboard controls (mode, depth, gain, etc.) set to
the desired values.
Illustration 263. Set Up Top Menu Selection
Select the Set Up Top Menu. From the Setup Sub-Menu,

select Custom Display or Preset Program.
Make all desired changes to the parameters in the Custom

Display and Preset Parameter Sub Menus.
Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to Save.
Press Set. The message “Input User Preset Number (1–8)”

appears at the bottom of the monitor.
Enter the desired preset number.
The Preset Name at the top of the menu now displays the
number entered (1–8).
(continued)
Customize 142 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
. NOTE: If a user application preset was used at the start of

the process, the system prompt states: “Overwrite Existing
Data? ‘y’ or ‘n’”
Enter ‘y’ to write over the existing user preset.
Enter ‘n’ to get the message: “Input User Preset Number
(1-8)” and create a new user preset.
Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor over the Preset
Name area.
Press Set.
Type in the desired name for the User Preset in the

designated exam category.
Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to Save and

press Set.
Answer Yes to the question “Overwrite existing data? ‘Y’ or

‘N’” to save your new User Preset name.
All parameters in the Preset Program and Custom Display

Menus can now be customized for the new user preset.
.
This preset appears on page one of the Preset Sub-Menu for
the current exam category.
NOTE: If new data is not saved, all changes will be lost

when another preset or New Patient is selected.
t
Customize 143
2177611–100 Rev 0
.
IMPORTANT To complete the User Preset save process, return to the
Setup Sub Menu.
STEPS Select System Parameters (any page 1–6)
Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to Save and

press Set. Answer yes to the question “Overwrite existing
data? ‘Y’ or ‘N’ ” to ensure your new User Preset name is
saved.
Naming a User Preset

The Input User Preset Number 1-8 can be replaced with a
custom description. To give the user preset a name instead
of a number:
While in a Custom Display or Preset Program menu page,

use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor over the Preset
Name area. Press Set.
Type in the desired name for the User Preset in the

designated exam category.
Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to SAVE and

press Set.
.
Answer Yes to the question “ Overwrite existing data? ‘Y’ or
‘N’ ” to save the new User Preset name.
IMPORTANT NOTE: To ensure that all parameters and the

user preset name are saved by the LOGIQ 500 before
exiting the Set Up function:
S select System Parameters, any menu pages 1/6

through 6/6.
S Trackball to the SAVE function in the System
Parameters menu and press Set.
S IMPORTANT: Answer ‘Y’ to overwrite existing data
again.
These steps are important to ensure that the new user preset
name is saved.
Customize 144 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Deleting User Presets and Names

Display any Set Up/Custom Display or Preset Program sub
menu page.
S Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to the preset

name and press Set.
S Type in the User Preset position number (1–8) and use
the Space Bar to delete the rest of the name.
S Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to Delete
menu selection and press Set.
S Answer Yes to the question. “ Delete data? ‘Y’ or ‘N’ ”.
S Select System Parameters, any menu page 1–6.
S Trackball to the SAVE function in the System Parameters
menu and press Set.
S Answer Yes to the question “Overwrite existing data? ‘Y’
or ‘N’” to save the new User Preset name.
The last three steps are important to ensure that the User
Preset name is cleared.
Recall Preset
Recall Preset is a selection found on page 3 of the Preset
Sub-Menu. Recall Preset can be used during an examination
to return the majority of the parameters to the latest saved
preset values.
If front panel and soft menu values were changed while

scanning, Recall Preset quickly resets these values.
Recall Preset does not recover preset data that was changed
with the Save function or was deleted.
t
Customize 145
2177611–100 Rev 0
Customize 146 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
User Define Keys
Overview
Six keys in the middle of the right side of the console
keyboard may be programmed to duplicate a single
keystroke or a sequence of keystrokes.
Illustration 264. User Define Keys
A keystroke is considered to be a press of a key, one

movement of a knob or movement of the Trackball.
Each of the six User Define Keys can be programmed to

duplicate a sequence of 64 keystrokes (maximum).
Programming User Define Keys

S Access the User Define function by pressing the Set Up
Top Menu Select key.
S Select User Define from the Set Up Sub-Menu.
S Perform the keystroke or sequence of keystrokes to be
programmed.
S When complete, press the desired User Define Key
number to record the programming.
t
Customize 147
2177611–100 Rev 0
User Define Keys
Programming User Define Keys (cont’d)

S The system will ask: “Save data? ‘Y’ or ‘N’.” Press ‘Y’ on
the keyboard to save the user define sequence. Press ‘N’
to cancel the user define programming function.
S Press the Mode Top Menu Select function to return to the
previous scan mode, if necessary.
The next time a programmed User Define Key is pressed, the
recorded keystroke or keystroke sequence will be performed
by a single key operation.
User Define keys that have been programmed will be half

lighted (back lit).
Hints Ctrl, 1
If selecting Set Up Top Menu with Custom Display, System
Parameter or Preset Program as part of the User Define
Sequence, press Ctrl and 1 simultaneously to set the
sub-menu page to one. Press Set the appropriate number of
times to ensure proper movement to the desired sub-menu
page.
Blue Shift, S
A pause can be valuable in a User Define Key sequence,
especially if it is desired to program a key to toggle functions
on/off, between two different settings or between selections.
Enable the Blue Shift key and press S to add a pause in the
User Define Key programming sequence.
With a pause in the user define sequence, the first time the
User Define Key is pressed, all steps will be executed up to
the pause. The next time the key is pressed, all steps will be
executed from the pause to the end (or next pause). This is
especially useful in programming “toggle” functions.
Customize 148 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
User Define Keys
User Define Key Program Example

The following is a brief example of programming a user
define sequence showing the use of Ctrl, 1 and Blue Shift, S.
As an example, assume that it is desired to turn the

measurement “Average Activity” on and off. This parameter
is in the Set Up/Preset Program menu page 3. Perform the
following steps to program a User Define Key to toggle
Average Activity:
S Press the Set Up top menu key.

S Select and highlight User Define in the Set Up Sub-menu.
S Select and highlight Preset Program in the Set Up
Sub-menu.
S Press Ctrl, 1 simultaneously (this ensures that the menu
page displayed is number one).
S Press Set twice.
S Trackball to “Average Activity OFF” and press Set.
S Trackball to “Exit” and press Set.
S Enable the Blue Shift key (key is lighted) and press S.
This adds the pause to the sequence.
S Disable the Blue Shift key (key is not lighted).
S Select and highlight Preset Program in the Set Up
Sub-menu.
S Press Ctrl, 1 simultaneously (this ensures that the menu
page displayed is number one).
S Press Set twice.
S Trackball to “Average Activity ON” and press Set.
S Trackball to “Exit” and press Set.
S Press the desired User Define Key number. This ends
the programming operation.
The first time the User Define Key is pressed, Average
Activity will be set to OFF. The second time the User Define
Key is pressed, Average Activity will be set to ON. The third
time the User Define Key is pressed, Average Activity will be
set to OFF. Each press of the User Define Key toggles the
Average Activity setting.
t
Customize 149
2177611–100 Rev 0
User Define Keys
User Define Lock/Unlock

Parameters on the Set Up/System Parameters menu page 3
allow the user to lock a key, keeping it from being deleted or
reprogrammed.
Deleting User Define Functions

To delete a User Define Key sequence:
S Ensure that the User Define Key to be deleted is

unlocked.
S Select Set Up Top Menu.
S Select User Define function.
S Press the User Define Key number to be deleted.
S Press ‘Y’ (for Yes) to overwrite current data.
A User Define Key can also be re-programmed by writing
over (replacing) the existing sequence.
Customize 150 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
User Data Back-up
Overview
The Set Up/Utility Menu, option #04 allows the user to
back-up (save) all user preset data to MOD. In the event of a
system upgrade or catastrophic hard drive failure, the user
application presets can be easily loaded back to the system if
they have been previously saved to MOD.
Once presets have been backed up, the user data back-up
should be performed periodically to update any changes that
have been made to the user preset parameters.
Saving Presets
Before saving presets, the MOD must first be initialized
(formatted) prior to saving user application preset data.
S Select Set Up/Utility Menu.

S Select #09 Media Initialize and press Return.
S Insert a MOD into the drive and press Return.
.
The system then takes the time to format the MOD (approx.
12 minutes).
NOTE: If presets have already been saved on the MOD, the

MOD should be initialized again to ensure that old preset
data has been deleted from the MOD.
To save presets:
S Enter #04 User Data Backup from the Utility Menu and
press Return.
S Enter # 1 (Save) and press Return.
t
Customize 151
2177611–100 Rev 0
User Data Back–up
Saving Presets (cont’d)

S Set media to drive (ensure the MOD is in the drive) and
press Return.
S Select the exam category name to be saved (01–08) or
“All System & Application Data” (09), enter its number
and press Return.
The system takes a few minutes to save the selected item to
the MOD. A succeed or fail message will be displayed.
Eject the MOD, label it and store it in a secure place for

future reference.
Loading Presets
To load presets back onto the system:
S Type #04 User Data Backup from the Utility Menu and
press Return.
S Type #02 Load and press Return.
S Set the media to the drive (ensure the MOD is in the
drive) and press Return.
S Select the application destination and press Return.
S Eject the MOD and store it in a secure place.
The system will take a few minutes to load the presets from
the MOD to the system hard drive.
Customize 152 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Overview
The LOGIQ 500 system ID number is assigned at the
factory. A System ID should be unique for a system. A
system ID number can be assigned in the range of 00000 to
16383. This number is used by the system when initializing a
video tape or MOD (image archive option) for image storage.
If there is more than one system at a facility, the ID numbers

should be set the same. A scanner will not write to a tape or
MOD if the media was initialized on a different scanner
(different ID number).
Enter/Display System ID Number

To display or enter a System ID number:

S Select Utility from the Set Up Sub Menu.
t
Customize 153
2177611–100 Rev 0
Enter/Display System ID Number (cont’d)
S Enter number 10 (System ID Entry/Display) and press

Return.
S Enter number 1 (ID Entry) or 2 (ID Display) and press
Return.
S Enter an ID number in the range of 00000–16383 and
press Return. If the ID was displayed, make a mental
note or record the number for future reference.
.
S Press Ctrl, R simultaneously to exit the Utility menu and
return to the previous scan mode.
NOTE: Images which are not stored on the GE LOGIQ 
series systems will not be listed by the patient search
function or displayed on a LOGIQ  series machine.
If there is more than one LOGIQ  400 or LOGIQ  500 in a

facility or group of hospitals, each system should have it’s
own unique System ID number.
Customize 154 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
General Measurements
and Calculations
Introduction
B-Mode Measurements
Doppler Mode Measurements
M-Mode Measurements
CFM B-Mode Measurements
This section describes the General Measurements and Calculations available that
are not specific to an exam category or calculation menu.
The basic measurements available depend on the mode of operation when the
measurement key is pressed.
t
Gen. Meas/Calcs 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
General Measurements and Calculations
Gen. Meas/Calcs 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
Overview
Measurements and calculations derived from ultrasound
images are intended to supplement other clinical procedures
available to the attending physician. The accuracy of
measurements is not only determined by system accuracy,
but also by the use of proper medical protocols by the user.
When appropriate, be sure to note any protocols associated
with a particular measurement or calculation. Formulas and
databases used within the system software that are
associated with specific investigators are so noted. Be sure
to refer to the original article describing the investigator’s
recommended clinical procedures.
General Instructions
Measurements can be made in all modes and image formats,
including real-time, freeze, CINE or VCR playback. The
selected application defines the default calculations displayed
on the Softkey Sub-Menu.
Measurement values update on the display until the

measurement has been completed. Twenty lines of
measurements can be displayed on the screen at one time.
(This is not likely to be done, but it is possible.)
Record all desired measurements displayed on the screen

before erasing them. The measurement cursor is not
automatically fixed when the Record key is pressed.
t
Gen. Meas/Calcs 3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
Erasing Measurements
The following actions erase measurements from the system’s
memory:
S Pressing Clear erases all measurements and calculations

on the display. Measurements and calculations, however,
remain on the report pages.
S Rotating the Cine Scroll knob erases measurements.
S Pressing New Patient erases all measurements and
calculations on the display and clears the report pages.
S Unfreezing the image erases measurements from the
display only, not from the report pages.
S Adding a new measurement that exceeds the maximum
number of allowable measurements erases the first or
oldest measurement.
“Measurement Clear Operation” is a parameter found in the

have only measurements erased with the Clear key or
measurements and comments.
To edit/delete a measurement from a report page, highlight

the measured value, Back Space or Space out the value
and press Set to delete.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
Locating measurement controls
↑
↓
Illustration 266. Locating Measurement Controls
Measurement Enables specific measurement functions and calculation soft

menus.
Ellipse Enables ellipse measurements.
Trackball Used to move the measurement cursors.
Set Fixes the cursor for measurements or completes the

Clear Erases measuring cursor and measurement data from the

display during a measurement sequence. Clears all cursors
and measurements from the display when not performing a
t
Gen. Meas/Calcs 5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
Measurement Key
The following table indicates the types of generic
measurements available when the Measurement key is
pressed and no specific calculation is chosen. The type of
measurement depends on the current scan mode and the
number of times the Measurement key is pressed .
MODE
Key Pressed B Doppler M CFM
(with B) (with B) (with B)
Once Distance Peak Velocity Tissue Depth Distance
Ellipse/Circle (Distance) Ellipse/Circle
Twice Trace/Circle TAMAX Time Interval Trace/Circle
Three Times Gray Scale 2 Velocities Depth Point Velocity
Echo Level Slope/Time Difference
Interval Slope/Time
Interval
Four Times Time Interval Gray Scale
Echo Level
Table 20. General Measurements by Mode
Cursors
During the measurement process, the fixed and active
cursors are an “X” symbol. The color of the active and fixed
cursors is selected in the Set Up/System Parameter Menu
page 2.
Once the measurement sequence is complete, the cursor

symbol changes to one of the eight shown below.
These symbols appear in the sequence shown.
Illustration 267. Measurement Completed Cursors
Gen. Meas/Calcs 6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
B-Mode Measurements
Distance Measurement
Distance Measurements are typically made in the B-Mode
portion of the image. To make a distance measurement:

"❙A

Press the Measurement key once to display a “ ” cursor on
the screen, and to display distance in cm on the bottom part
of screen.

Use the Trackball to move the “ ” cursor to the
measurement start point.
Press Set to fix the measurement start point cursor and to

display a second cursor.

Use the Trackball to move the second “ ” cursor to the
measurement end point.
(continued)
t
Gen. Meas/Calcs 7
2177611–100 Rev 0
B–Mode Measurements
Distance Measurement (cont’d)
Press Measurement to toggle between activating the two
.
cursors for fine adjustment.
NOTE: Press Clear once to erase the second measuring

marker and the current data measured and start the
measurement again.
Press Set to complete the measurement and fix the Distance

value displayed on the bottom part of the screen.
Pressing Clear after the sequence is complete erases all

data that has been measured to this point, but not data
entered on to report pages.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement

An ellipse can also be used to measure the circumference
and area of an organ. To measure with an ellipse:

"❙A
Press Measurement to set up the measurement mode. The

“ ” cursor appears on the display.

Use the Trackball to move the “ ” cursor to either end of the
major axis of the area to measure.
Press Set to fix the start point cursor.
Use the Trackball to move the second cursor to the major

axis measurement end point.
Press the top of the Ellipse rocker switch. An ellipse having

an initial circle shape appears.
↑
↓
Use the Trackball to position the ellipse, as necessary, and

to size the measured axis.
(continued)
t
Gen. Meas/Calcs 9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement (cont’d)
Press the Measurement key to toggle the activation of the

measurement cursors.
Press the top of the Ellipse rocker switch to increase the size
of the minor axis.
.
↑
↓ Press the bottom of the Ellipse rocker switch to decrease the
size of the minor axis.
NOTE: Press Clear once to erase the ellipse and the current
data measured. The original cursor is displayed to
restart the measurement.
Press Set to complete the ellipse measurement and display

the circumference and area.
Pressing Clear a second time exits the measurement

function without completing the measurement.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Circumference/Area (Trace) Measurement

To trace the circumference of a portion of the anatomy and
calculate its area:

"❙A
Press Measurement twice to display a dot “ ” cursor on the

screen. The display on the bottom of the screen shows the
circumference in cm.
Use the Trackball to move the dot “ ” cursor to the


Press Set to change the dot “ ” cursor to a “ ” cursor.
Use the Trackball to trace the measurement area. The

circumference displayed on the bottom of the screen will
.
change with the tracing.
NOTE: Press Clear to erase the measuring marker and the

current data measured and redo the measurement.
Press Set to fix the Circumference value displayed on the

bottom of the screen and calculate the area.
t
Gen. Meas/Calcs 11
2177611–100 Rev 0
Circumference/Area (Trace) Measurement (cont’d)
.
Press Clear to erase all data that has been measured.
NOTE: When using the trace method, the Zoom

Size/Rotation knob can be used to edit the trace line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to erase the line (bit by bit)
back from its current point. This erase function is limited to a
small portion of the most recent trace.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Echo Level Measurement

To make an echo level measurement:

"❙A
Press Measurement three times to enable the echo level

V
function. A box “ ” cursor appears.
V
Use the Trackball to move the box “ ” cursor over the
measurement area.
. NOTE: Press Clear to erase the measuring marker and the

current data measured.
Press Set to fix the Echo value displayed.
Press Clear to erase all data that has been measured.
t
Gen. Meas/Calcs 13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Echo Level Measurement (cont’d)
Hints S The size of the box cursor can be changed by using the
Set Up/Preset Program menu page 3.
S The box is actual size and will appear to get larger or
smaller with changes in depth (scale).
S The echo level measurement is only available on a frozen
image, not on a B-paused image.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Overview
Basic measurement taken in Doppler Mode or the Doppler
Spectrum portion of the display are:
S Peak Velocity
S TAMAX (Trace)
S Two Velocities with the Slope and Time Interval between
them.
S Time Interval
Peak Velocity
To measure peak velocity:

"❙A

Press Measurement. The “ ” cursor with a vertical dotted
line appears.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the desired point of

measurement in the Doppler Spectrum.
Press Set to fix the velocity cursor. The velocity

measurement in m/s or cm/s will be displayed at the bottom
of the screen.
t
Gen. Meas/Calcs 15
2177611–100 Rev 0
TAMAX (Manual or Auto Trace)

To trace TAMAX:

"❙A
Press Measurement twice. A dot “ ” cursor appears if the

default method is manual. A “ ” cursor with a vertical dotted
line appears if the trace default method is auto.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the trace start point
in the Doppler spectrum.
Press Set to fix the start point.
If Auto Trace is the default method or TAMAX Auto is on, use

the Trackball to position the vertical cursor at the second
value (end point).
Press Set. The system automatically fixes both cursors and

traces the maximum value between the two points. That
value is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
If Manual Trace is the default method, use the Trackball to

trace the maximum values of the desired portion of the
spectrum.
Press Set to complete the measurement.
2177611–100 Rev 0
.
TAMAX (Manual or Auto Trace) (cont’d)
NOTE: When using the manual trace method, the Zoom
Size/Rotation knob can be used to edit the trace line.
Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to erase the line (bit by

bit) back from its current point. This erase function is limited
to a small portion of the most recent trace.
The “D Realtime Trace Method” can be selected in the Set

Up/Custom Display menu page 12. The selections available
are peak, floor, mean and mode.
t
Gen. Meas/Calcs 17
2177611–100 Rev 0
Slope/Time Interval
Two velocity values, the time interval (sec) and slope (m/s2)
can be measured by:

"❙A

Press Measurement three times. A “ ” cursor with vertical
dotted lines appears.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the measurement

start point.
Use the Trackball to move the end cursor to the

The two peak end point velocities, time interval and slope are
displayed.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Time Interval
To measure a horizontal time interval:

"❙A

Press Measurement four times. A “ ” cursor with a vertical
dotted line appears when the cursor is in the Doppler
spectrum portion of the display.

start point.
Press Set to fix the first cursor.

The time interval between the two cursors is displayed at the

bottom of the screen.
t
Gen. Meas/Calcs 19
2177611–100 Rev 0
2177611–100 Rev 0
M-Mode Measurements
Overview
Basic measurements that can be taken in the M-Mode
portion of the display are:
S Tissue Depth (Distance)

S Time Interval
S Depth Difference with Time Interval and Slope
t
Gen. Meas/Calcs 21
2177611–100 Rev 0
M–Mode Measurements
Tissue depth
Tissue depth measurement in M-Mode functions the same as
the distance measurement in B-Mode. It measures only
vertical distance between points.
Scan patient with M-Mode timeline displayed.

"❙A

Press Measurement once. A “ ” cursor with a vertical
dotted line appears.

Use the Trackball to move the “ ” cursor to the most
anterior point to be measured.
Use the Trackball to move the second point to the most

posterior point to be measured.
The vertical distance between the two points is displayed at

the bottom of the screen.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Time Interval
To measure a horizontal time interval:

"❙A

Press Measurement twice. A “ ” cursor with a vertical
dotted line appears when the cursor is in the M-Mode portion
of the display.

start point.

The time interval between the two cursors is displayed at the

bottom of the screen.
t
Gen. Meas/Calcs 23
2177611–100 Rev 0
Depth Difference with Time and Slope

To measure depth difference:

"❙A
Press Measurement three times. With the cursor in the

M-Mode timeline area, a “ ” cursor with a vertical dotted line
is displayed.
Use the Trackball to position the measurement start point.
Use the Trackball to position the measurement end point.
The depth difference, time interval and slope between the

two end points is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
2177611–100 Rev 0
CFM B-Mode Measurements
Overview
While in the Color Flow and B-Mode combination, four basic
measurements can be taken. They are:
S Distance
S Trace (circumference/area)
S Gray Scale Echo Level
S Velocity Point
Distance
Distance is measured the same as B/W B-Mode. Refer to
Gen. Meas/Calcs 7.
Trace
Circumference and area are measured the same as in B/W
B-Mode. Refer to Gen. Meas/Calcs 9.
Gray Scale Echo Level

Gray scale echo level is measured the same as in B/W
B-Mode. Refer to Gen. Meas/Calcs 13.
t
Gen. Meas/Calcs 25
2177611–100 Rev 0
CFM B–Mode Measurements
Velocity point
This measurement provides an estimate of the average (or
mean) velocity at one point in the CFM B-Mode display. This
is achieved by calculating the numerical value equivalent to
the color at the selected point in the display and adjusting it
to the selected flow angle. This procedure cannot be used to
determine maximum, minimum or other specific velocity
estimates.
To measure the velocity at a certain point in the color display:

"❙A

Press Measurement three times. A “ ” cursor appears.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the desired portion

of the display.
Use the Zoom Size/Rotation control to adjust to the angle of

blood flow.
Press Set to complete the measurement and to display the

velocity and angle values.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Velocity point (cont’d)

CAUTION Potential for misdiagnosis. The CFM B-Mode velocity point
measurement only provides an average velocity estimate and
should not be used as a substitute for PW Doppler velocity
measurement. Use PW Doppler Mode to obtain
measurements from specific portions of the Doppler
spectrum.
t
Gen. Meas/Calcs 27
2177611–100 Rev 0
2177611–100 Rev 0
Abdomen and
Small Parts
(Radiology/Abdomen and Small Parts)
Urology Calculations
This section describes the factory default measurements and calculations for the
Rad/Abd (Radiology/Abdomen), Small Parts, and Urology exam categories.
t
Abdom/Small Parts 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Abdomen and Small Parts
Abdom/Small Parts 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Overview
The General Calculations Sub-Menu can be invoked from the
Rad/Abdomen exam category. The calculations available
are:
Illustration 268. General Calculations Sub-Menu (Page 1)
Measuring Volume
The volume calculation can be made from one, two or three
distances, from one distance and an ellipse, from a single
ellipse or from two ellipse measurements.
.
General Measurements and Calculations details how to make
distance and ellipse measurements.
IMPORTANT NOTE: When a volume calculation is desired,

the necessary measurements or combination of
measurements must be made BEFORE selecting VOLUME
in the Sub-menu.
t
Abdom/Small Parts 3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Examples
When a volume calculation is desired:
1. Make one distance measurement.

Select VOLUME from the General Calculation
Sub-Menu.
A volume will be calculated using the single distance
formula.
–OR–
2. Make two distance measurements.
Sub-Menu.
A volume will be calculated using the two distance
formula.
–OR–
3. If one ellipse is measured, the formula for a single
ellipse will be used to calculate volume.
Sub-Menu.
formula.
.
–OR–
4. Make three distance measurements.
NOTE: This should be done in the dual format mode (side by
side images). One measurement is usually made in
the sagittal plane and two measurements in the axial
plane.
Sub-Menu.
A volume will be calculated using the three distance
formula.
–OR–
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring Volume (cont’d)

5. If one distance and an ellipse is measured, the
formula for distance/ellipse will be used to calculate
volume.
Sub-Menu.
formula.
–OR–
6. If two ellipsoids are measured, the formula for two
ellipsoids will be used to calculate volume.
Sub-Menu.
formula.
Formulas used in calculations are found in this section.
Hints S Volumes are most accurate when measurements are

taken in the sagittal and axial scan planes.
S Use the side by side dual format option to display sagittal
and axial plane images simultaneously.
S Make all necessary measurements before selecting
volume.
S See General Measurements and Calculations for details
on the steps to take when doing basic distance and
ellipse measurements.
S An overflow error message (OOR) will occur during a two
ellipse, or one ellipse/one distance volume calculation if:
the minor (small) axis of the large ellipse is equal to/less
than the major (large) axis of the small ellipse (d1), or
equal to/less than the single distance measurement (d2).
d1 d2
Illustration 269. Volume Calculation Error Possibilities
t
Abdom/Small Parts 5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Volume Calculation Formulas
Input
Calc Mnemonic Calc Name Measurements Formula
Vol Volume (spherical) one distance Vol[ml]=(p/6)xd^3
Vol Volume (prolate two distances, Vol[ml]=
spheroidal) d1>d2 (p/6)xd1xd2^2
Vol Volume (prolate one ellipse, d1 major Vol[ml]=
spheroidal) axis, d2 minor axis (p/6)xd1xd2^2
Vol Volume (spheroidal) three distances Vol[ml]=
(p/6)xd1xd2xd3
Vol Volume (spheroidal) one distance d1, one Vol[ml]=
ellipse, d2 major (p/6)xd1xd2xd3
axis, d3 minor axis
Vol Volume (spheroidal) two ellipse, ellipse 1 Vol[ml]=
with axes d1 and d2, (p/6)xd1xd2xd4
ellipse 2 with axes (d3 is not used, as-

d3 and d4, with suming it is close to
|d2–d3| |d1–d4| d2)
and d2>d3
Table 21. Volume Calculation Formulas
Illustration 270. Volume Calculation Examples
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring Angle
This function is intended to measure the angle between two
intersecting planes:
Illustration 271. General Calculations Sub-Menu (ANGLE)
Select ANGLE from the General Calculations Sub-Menu


The Angle Calculation Mode is set and a “ ” cursor with a
vertical dashed line appears. The displayed angle is zero
degrees.
Use the Trackball to position the line cursor and the Zoom
Size/Rotation control to adjust the angle of the line cursor.
Press Set to fix the position of the first cursor.
Use the Trackball to position the second line cursor and the
Zoom Size/Rotation control to adjust the angle of the
second line cursor. The angle between the two cursors is
constantly updated on the display.
(continued)
t
Abdom/Small Parts 7
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring Angle (cont’d)
If a fine adjustment of the two cursors is needed, press

Measurement to toggle which line cursor is active. Adjust
the active cursor with the Trackball and Zoom Size/Rotation
control.
Press Set to complete the angle measurement.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring Stenosis Ratio (% stenosis)

To calculate percent stenosis in a B-Mode image:
Scan the patient to display a B-Mode image of a blood vessel

having a stenosis.
Press Freeze to acquire a cross sectional view of the vessel.

"❙A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function.
The area of the blood vessel can be measured by the ellipse,

trace, circle, 2 distance or 1 distance methods. The Set
Up/Preset Program page 3 defines the default method.
CAUTION When using a distance measurement to calculate area for

% stenosis, the measurement should always be taken from a
cross sectional view of the vessel.
Do NOT take a distance measurement from a longitudinal

view for an area calculation. This may lead to an inaccurate
assessment of % stenosis.
Ellipse method
Illustration 272. General Calculations Sub-Menu (% STENO)
Select % Steno in the General Calculations Sub-Menu page

necessary, to display page one. The % stenosis

measurement mode is set and a “ ” cursor appears.
t
Abdom/Small Parts 9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Ellipse method (cont’d)

S Measurement of the residual area of the blood vessel is
first.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the
stenosed region.
Press Set. The start-point cursor is set and an end-point

cursor appears.
Use the Trackball to move the end-point cursor to the other

end of the long axis of the residual area of the vessel being
measured.
Press the top of the Ellipse rocker switch. A circle is

displayed.
↑
↓
Press the top of the Ellipse rocker switch to increase the
ellipse size.
.
Press the bottom of the Ellipse rocker switch to decrease the
ellipse size.
NOTE: Use the Measurement key to toggle activation of the

measurement cursors. Use the Ellipse rocker switch
to adjust the size, if necessary.
Press Set. The calculation of the residual area of the blood

vessel (having no stenosis) is complete and the “ ” cursor
appears again.
(continued)
2177611–100 Rev 0

S Measurement of the lumen area of the blood vessel is
second.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the start point on the
vessel wall.

cursor appears.

end of the long axis of the vessel being measured.
Press Ellipse. An ellipse having the long axis as its diameter

is displayed.
↑
↓
ellipse size.
.
ellipse size.

measurement cursors. Use the Ellipse rocker switch
to adjust the size, if necessary.
Press Set to complete the second ellipse and the % Stenosis
measurement appears.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Trace method
Select % STENO from the General Calculation Sub-Menu
necessary, to display page one. The % stenosis
S Measurement of the residual area of the blood vessel

having no stenosis is first.
stenosed region.

Press Set. The start-point cursor changes to a “ ” cursor

and is fixed. An end-point (“ ”) cursor appears.
Use the Trackball to trace the residual area.
Press Set. The trace start-point and end point are connected
to each other and the calculation of the residual area of the
blood vessel (having no stenosis) is complete. At the same
time, an “ ” cursor appears.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Trace method (cont’d)

second.
vessel wall.


Use the Trackball to trace the vessel wall.
and the measurement of the lumen area of the vessel is
complete.
The % Stenosis is displayed.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio or PI

To measure the systolic/diastolic ratio, resistance index,
velocity ratio and pulsatility index:
Scan the patient in B plus Doppler Mode.

"❙A
Press Clear to reset measurement operation.
Illustration 273. General Calculations Sub-Menu
Select S/D RATIO, RI, A/B RATIO or PI from the General
.
Calculations Sub-Menu page two to display this calculation
on the screen. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if

necessary, to display page two. A “ ” cursor appears.
NOTE: General Calculations Sub-Menu page two is

composed of Doppler spectrum measurements.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio or PI (cont’d)
Doppler waveform. This would be systole for S/D ratio, peak
velocity for RI, “A” velocity for A/B ratio and VMAX for PI.
Press Set to fix the start-point cursor. An end-point cursor

appears.
Use the Trackball to move the end-point cursor to the end

point of the Doppler waveform. This would be diastole for
S/D ratio, minimum velocity for RI, “B” velocity for A/B ratio
.
and VMIN for PI.
NOTE: For the PI calculation, if TAMAX Auto is off, use the

Trackball manually to trace the waveform between
VMAX and VMIN .
If two velocity measurements are made prior to
selecting S/D ratio, A/B ratio or RI, the system
automatically calculates S/D ratio, A/B ratio or RI from
the last two velocity measurements recorded.
.
Press Set to complete the measurement. The calculation is
displayed on the screen.
NOTE: For the PI calculation, if TAMAX Auto is on, the

system automatically traces the waveform when Set is
pressed to fix VMIN .
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring heart rate (HR)

To calculate the Heart Rate:
Scan the patient.

"❙A
Illustration 274. General Calculations Sub-Menu (HR)
Select HEART RATE from the General Calculations

Sub-Menu page two. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker
switch, if necessary, to display page two. The Heart Rate

calculation mode is set and a “ ” cursor appears.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring heart rate (HR) (cont’d)

Use the Trackball to move the cursor to a point on the
Doppler spectrum where the Heart Rate measurement is to
start.
Press Set. The start-point cursor is fixed and an end-point

cursor appears.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the same position on

the Doppler waveform, two heartbeats from the start point.
See Illustration 275.
Press Set. The HR calculation is complete.
X X
Illustration 275. Two Heart Beat Reference
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Time averaged maximum velocity (TAMAX) measurement

method
To choose a method to measure the time averaged maximum
velocity:
Illustration 276. General Calculation Sub-Menu (TAMAX AUTO)
Use the TAMAX, AUTO (Automatic/Manual) Sub-Menu

selection to choose the method by which the TAMAX trace is
made.
If TAMAX Auto is highlighted, the maximum velocity envelope

is automatically traced between the two velocity points set
during the PI measurement.
If TAMAX Auto is not highlighted, the operator has to

manually trace, with the “ ” cursor and Trackball, the
maximum velocity envelope between the two points fixed
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring the Max PG

To measure MAX PG (Maximum Pressure Gradient):
Scan the patient in Doppler Mode (Spectrum Display).

"❙A
Illustration 277. General Calculations Sub-Menu (MAX PG)
Select MAX PG from the General Calculations Sub-Menu

page three. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if
necessary, to display page three. A horizontal dotted line
cursor appears.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring the Max PG (cont’d)

Use the Trackball to place the cursor at a peak in the
Doppler spectrum waveform.
Press Set to fix the first cursor. A second cursor appears

and VMAX is displayed.
Use the Trackball to place the second cursor at the lowest

level in the measured Doppler waveform.
Press Set to fix the second cursor. VMIN is displayed. MAX

PG is calculated and displayed.
Automatic Calculation of Max PG

If TAMAX was previously measured and calculated in
Doppler Mode, MAX PG is calculated from the VMAX and
VMIN measurements taken for TAMAX when MAX PG is first
selected in the General Calculations Sub-Menu.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring the Mean PG

To measure Mean PG (Mean Pressure Gradient):

"❙A
Illustration 278. General Calculations Sub-Menu (MEAN PG)
Select MEAN PG from the General Calculations Sub-Menu

necessary, to display page three. A horizontal dotted line
cursor appears in the Doppler spectrum.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring the Mean PG (cont’d)

Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the waveform trace
start point.
If TAMAX AUTO is enabled, a second cursor appears. Use

the Trackball to move this cursor to the measurement end
point.
Press Set to complete the Doppler waveform trace.
If TAMAX AUTO is disabled, use the Trackball to trace the

Doppler waveform.
Automatic Calculation of Mean PG

Doppler Mode, Mean PG is calculated from the TAMAX value
when Mean PG is first selected in the General Calculations
Sub-Menu.
The waveform is automatically traced. TAMAX and Mean PG

are also displayed on the screen.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring cardiac output (CO)

To measure CO (Cardiac Output), a TAMAX (Time Average
Maximum) measurement is taken in the Doppler Spectrum.
An FCA (Flow Cross Sectional Area) is measured on the
vessel in B-Mode. These two measurements are used to
calculate SV (Stroke Volume). Finally, a HR (Heart Rate)
measurement is taken in the Doppler Spectrum. SV and HR
are then used to calculate cardiac output.
Scan the patient to display a B-Mode with Doppler spectrum

image.

"❙A
Illustration 279. General Calculations Sub-Menu (CO)
Select CO from General Calculation Sub-Menu page three.

display page three. The trace cursor (horizontal dotted line)
appears in the Doppler spectrum.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the TAMAX

Press Set. The first cursor is fixed and a second is active.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring cardiac output (CO) (cont’d)

If TAMAX AUTO is enabled, use the Trackball to move the
second cursor to the TAMAX measurement end point.
Press Set. The waveform maximum velocities are

automatically traced and a TAMAX value is displayed.

waveform.
Press Set. The trace waveform is fixed and the TAMAX

value is displayed.
A cross-point cursor appears in the B-Mode image to

measure FCA.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to a point on the vessel

wall.
Press Set to fix the start point cursor. Use the Ellipse or
Trace method to measure the circumference and area of the
vessel as described on Abdom/Small Parts 9.
Press Set to complete the circumference/area measurement.

The FCA (Flow Cross Sectional Area) is displayed.
The SV (Stroke Volume) is also computed and displayed

from TAMAX and FCA values.
A vertical line cursor appears in the Doppler spectrum to

measure Heart Rate.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring cardiac output (CO) (cont’d)

Use the Trackball to locate a start point on the Doppler
waveform to measure HR (Heart Rate).

Press Set to fix the start point. The second cursor “ ”
appears.
Use the Trackball to move the measurement cursor to the

HR end point (one 2–beat time interval).
Press Set to complete the HR measurement. The heart rate

is displayed.
CO (Cardiac Output) is computed from the SV and HR values

and is displayed.
Automatic CO calculation
If the following measurements have previously been made in
any order, CO (Cardiac Output) automatically calculates
when it is selected from the Calculation Sub-Menu:
S TAMAX in Doppler Mode

S Functional Cross Sectional Area in B-Mode
(Circumference/Area)
S Heart Rate in Doppler Mode
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring stroke volume ratio (SV)

To measure stroke volume, a TAMAX (Time Averaged
Maximum) measurement is taken in the Doppler spectrum.
An FCA (Flow Cross Sectional Area) is measured on the
vessel in B-Mode. The TAMAX and FCA is then used to
calculate SV (Stroke Volume).

image.

"❙A
Illustration 280. General Calculations Sub-Menu (SV)
Select SV from General Calculation Sub-Menu page three.

Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the TAMAX

2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring stroke volume ratio (SV) (cont’d)

If TAMAX AUTO is enabled, use the Trackball to move the
second cursor to the TAMAX measurement end point.
Press Set. The waveform maximum velocities are

automatically traced and a TAMAX value is displayed.

waveform.
Press Set. The trace waveform is fixed and the TAMAX

value is displayed.
A cross-point cursor appears in the B-Mode image to

measure FCA.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to a point on the vessel

wall.

The FCA (Flow Cross Sectional Area) is displayed.
The SV (Stroke Volume) is also computed and displayed

from TAMAX and FCA values.
Automatic SV calculation
If TAMAX was previously measured while in Doppler Mode
and the cross sectional area of a vessel was measured while
in B-Mode, stroke volume will be automatically calculated
from these previously measured values when SV is selected
from the General Calculation Sub-Menu.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0

Refer to the procedure found on Abdom/Small Parts 16.
Measuring flow volume (FV)

This measurement is used to measure the flow volume in a
vessel on the Doppler spectrum. It is measured in milliliters.
When the FV measurement is made, FVO is automatically
calculated.
To measure flow volume:

image.

"❙A
Illustration 281. General Calculations Sub Menu (SV)
Select FV from General Calculation Sub Menu page three.

Press the Sub Menu Select rocker switch, if necessary, to
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring flow volume (FV) (cont’d)

Doppler spectrum.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the end point on the
Doppler spectrum.
.
Press Set.
NOTE: If Auto Trace is not selected, trace the desired

portion of the spectrum and press Set and use the Trackball
to trace the waveform.
The cursor moves to the B-Mode area.
vessel wall.
The flow volume (FV) is calculated and displayed in milliliters.

The flow volume output (FVO) is also calculated and
displayed in milliliters/minute.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Time averaged maximum velocity (TAMAX) measurement

method
Refer to the procedure found on Abdom/Small Parts 18.
Measuring flow volume output (FVO)

This measurement is used to measure the flow volume
output in a vessel on the Doppler spectrum. It is measured in
milliliters/minute. When the FVO measurement is made, FV
is automatically calculated.
Refer to the FV measurement on Abdom/Small Parts 28 for

details.
Helpful hints
Hints The following hints can help when taking a measurement:
S If PRINT is pressed while making a measurement, the

system completes the measurement and sends the data
to the report page (unless the VCR is assigned to the
PRINT key).
S Prior to making measurements, use the Cine function, if
necessary, to display the best image.
S Measurements can continue to be made until all
measurement/calculation cells are filled. The cells are
displayed at the bottom center of the display.
S Once all measurement/calculation cells are filled on the
display, any further measurements will cause the top
(first) cell to be erased and the new measurement added
last (“first in, first out”).
S If there is a series of measurements/calculations that are
routinely taken in a specific sequence, the auto sequence
feature of the system can be used to program these
measurements/calculations to automatically appear on
the display in the desired order. Refer to Customize 125
for details on programming an auto sequence.
2177611–100 Rev 0
General Calculation Formulas
Calc Input
Mnemonic Calc Name Measurements Formula
MaxPG Maximum Pressure two Doppler blood flow MaxPG[mmHg]=4x(v1^2–
Gradient peak velocities v2^2)
MeanPG Mean Pressure Gra- flow velocities from one MeanPG[mmHg]=
dient time marker to another n
time marker in a Doppler 4x ȍ (Vi^2)/n
display i=1
SV Stroke Volume flow velocities from one SV[ml]= (sum{Vt^2} from
time marker to another t1 to t2)x a1
time marker in a Doppler
display and one area
CO Cardiac Output two distances and one CO[1/min]=
2 beat time interval SVxHR/1000
FV Flow Volume flow velocities from one FV [ml] = (sum{Vt[m/s]}
time marker to another from t1 to t2) x a1[cm^2]
FVO Flow Volume Output flow velocities from one FVO [ml/min] = FV [ml] /
time marker to another (t2–t1) x 60000
% Stenosis Ratio two areas (by ellipse, % Stenosis= [1–(Aresidual/
Stenosis trace, circle or distance) Alumen)]x100
PI Pulsatility Index two Doppler blood flow PI=(Vmax–Vmin)/
peak velocities and TA- TAMAX
MAX
RI Resistivity Index two Doppler blood flow RI=(Vmax–Vmin)/Vmax
peak velocities
HR Heart Rate (beats/ one 2 beat time interval HR[BPM]=120[sec]/
minute) 2beat time [sec]
A/B Velocities Ratio two Doppler blood flow A/B=V1/V2
Ratio peak velocities
Table 22. General Calculation Formulas
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
2177611–100 Rev 0
Overview
The Urology Calculations factory default Sub-Menu consists
of two pages.
The calculations available are the same as the general menu

for Radiology/Abdomen and Small Parts.
The two menus are:
Page One Page Two
Illustration 282. Urology Calculation Menus
Refer to the General Calculations section of this chapter for

steps to perform these measurements and calculations.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB/GYN
(Basic OB software option)
Exam Preparation
Fetal Doppler
Acoustic Output
OB Measurements and Formulas
OB Summary Reports
Anatomical Survey
OB Graphs
Fetal Trend Management
Multigestational Option
Data Management Center (DMC)
GYN Measurements
.
GYN Summary Report
If none of the OB software options are installed, the General

Calculation Menu will appear for the OB exam category.
This section discusses the precautions to take during an obstetrical exam. It also
illustrates the use of the optional basic OB measurement menus and summary
reports provided by the system software for four different regional methods. Basic
fetal growth curve graphs are outlined as well as the fetal trend management
option. The differences found with the multigestational option are also outlined.
The end of this section shows the measurements and report relating to the GYN
exam category.
t
OB/GYN 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB/GYN
OB/GYN 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Exam Preparation
Overview
Prior to an ultrasound examination, the patient should be
informed of the clinical indication, specific benefits, potential
risks, and alternatives, if any. In addition, if the patient
requests information about the exposure time and intensity, it
should be provided. Patient access to educational materials
regarding ultrasound is strongly encouraged to supplement
the information communicated directly to the patient.
Furthermore, these examinations should be conducted in a
manner and take place in a setting which assures patient
dignity and privacy.
S Prior material knowledge and approval of the presence of

nonessential personnel with the number of such
personnel kept to a minimum.
S An intent to share with the parents, either during the
examination or shortly thereafter, the information derived.
S An offer of choice about viewing the fetus.
S An offer of choice about learning the sex of the fetus, if
such information becomes available.
Ultrasound examinations performed solely to satisfy the
family’s desire to know the fetal sex, to view the fetus or to
obtain a picture of the fetus should be discouraged.
t
OB/GYN 3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Exam Preparation
OB/GYN 4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Fetal Doppler
Doppler Mode for Fetal Exams
Indications for Fetal Doppler use

The LOGIQ 500 system can be used for fetal examination
in Pulsed Wave Doppler, Continuous Wave Doppler, Color
Flow Doppler and Color M-Mode for the diagnosis of:
S Structural fetal cardiac anomalies (18 weeks gestation to

term) for high-risk patients.
S Intrauterine growth retardation (IUGR) (28 weeks
gestation to term) for high-risk patients with one or more
of the following known or suspected conditions:
S Multiple pregnancy
S Maternal hypertension
S Hydrops
S Diabetes
S Lupus
S Placenta abnormality.
Contraindications
Pulsed Wave Doppler, Continuous Wave Doppler, Color Flow
Doppler and Color M-Mode are not intended for routine fetal
examination or screening nor are they intended for fetal
examination in a low-risk population. The use of Doppler,
even at minimal output levels, in fetal examination must be
adjunctive with conventional fetal echocardiography and
other clinical diagnostic methods, for high risk patients only.
t
OB/GYN 5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Fetal Doppler
OB/GYN 6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Acoustic Output
Considerations
General warning
CAUTION The LOGIQ 500 system is a multi-use device which is

capable of exceeding FDA Pre-enactment acoustic output
(spatial peak-temporal average) intensity limits for fetal
applications.
Prudent use
It is prudent to conduct an exam with the minimum amount
and duration of acoustic output necessary to optimize the
image’s diagnostic value.
Concerns surrounding fetal exposure

Always be aware of the acoustic output level by observing
the Acoustic Output Display. Review the Acoustic Output
considerations section of Appendix A, namely:
S Output considerations
S Clinical instructions for fetal use
S Efficacy of fetal Doppler
S Variance studies.
In addition, become thoroughly familiar with the Acoustic

Output Display and equipment controls affecting output.
Training
It is recommended that all users receive proper training in
fetal Doppler applications before performing them in a clinical
setting. Please contact a local sales representative for
training assistance.
t
OB/GYN 7
2177611–100 Rev 0
Acoustic Output
OB/GYN 8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
measurements is not only determined by the system
accuracy, but also by use of proper medical protocols by the
user. When appropriate, be sure to note any protocols
associated with a particular measurement or calculation.
Formulas and databases used within the system software
that are associated with specific investigators are so noted.
Be sure to refer to the original article describing the
investigator’s recommended clinical procedures.
If obstetrics was selected as the exam category on the

Patient Entry Menu, the OB Menu automatically appears in
the Soft-Menu when the Measurement key is pressed.
OB Format Selection
Four types of OB measurements and report pages can be
selected from the Set Up/System Parameter Sub-Menu
page 2.
The user may choose to measure and report items based on

Tokyo University, Osaka University, USA or European
methods.
t
OB/GYN 9
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Measurement Soft Menus and Formulas

The factory default measurement menus are shown in
Illustration 283 through Illustration 286. The user should be
familiar with how to do basic distance and circumference
measurements, as described in the Basic Measurements and
Calculations chapter in Volume 2 of this manual set.
Tokyo University Method
Page One Page Two
Page Three Page Four
.
Illustration 283. Tokyo University Sub-Menus
NOTE: Tokyo EFBW selection is made in the Set Up/System

Parameters menu page 2.
OB/GYN 10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Tokyo University Method (cont’d)
Calc Input Author

Mnemonic Calc Name Measurements Formula Reference
HR Heart Rate one 2 beat time HR[BPM]= n/a
(beats/minute) (Measured manually 120[sec]/
or automatically) 2beat time[sec]
GS Gestational one distance Curve data is Tokyo
Sac available in University
Appendix F Method 1986,
Univ of
6 by Univ.
CRL Crown Rump one distance Curve data is
Tokyo
Length available in
Appendix F
FL Femur Length one distance Curve data is
available in
Appendix F
BPD Biparietal one distance Curve data is
Diameter available in
Appendix F
LV Length of one distance Curve data is
Vertebra available in
Appendix F
APTD Antero one distance APTD = input
posterior
Trunk
Diameter
TTD Transverse one distance TTD = input
Trunk
Diameter
EFBW Estimated Average of BPD, EFBW =
Fetal Body Average of APTD, 1.07 x BPD^ 3
Weight Average of TTD +3.42 x APTD x
and TTD x FL
Average of FL
Table 23. OB Calculation Formulas—Tokyo University Factory Defaults
t
OB/GYN 11
2177611–100 Rev 0
Tokyo University Method (cont’d)
Calc Input Author

CTAR Cardio– four distances or two CTAR = Y.Chiba Fetal
Thoracic Area areas (d1 x d2) / (d3 x d4) Diagn Ther
Ratio x 100 1990 : 5 : 175 –
or a1 / a2 x 100 188
PLI Preload Index two Doppler blood PLI = | v1 / v2 | Y.Chiba Fetal
flow velocities Diagn Ther
1990 : 5 : 168 –
174
EF Ejection two distances on EF = (1 – Ds^3 / n/a
Fraction M-Mode Dd^3)
(End-diastolic
dimension and
End-systolic
dimension on
M-Mode)
Vmax Maximum one Doppler blood Vmax = input n/a
Velocity in flow peak velocities
descending
aorta
S/D Ratio Systolic / two Doppler blood S/D = Vsystolic / n/a
Diastolic Ratio flow peak velocities Vdiastolic
A/B Ratio Velocities two Doppler blood A/B = V1/V2 n/a
Ratio flow peak velocities
Pl Pulsatility two Doppler blood Pl = (Vmax – Vmin)/ n/a
Index flow peak velocities TA_MAX
and TA_MAX
RI Resistivity two Doppler blood RI = (Vmax – Vmin)/ n/a
Index flow peak velocities Vmax
Table 23. OB Calculation Formulas—Tokyo University Factory Defaults (cont’d)
OB/GYN 12 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Osaka University Method
Page One Page Two
Illustration 284. Osaka University Sub-Menus
t
OB/GYN 13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Osaka University Method (cont’d)
Calc Input Author

CRL Crown Rump one distance Curve data is Osaka
Length available in University
Univ of
3 by Univ.
Osaka
available in
Appendix F
Appendix F
HL Humerus one distance Curve data is
Length available in
Appendix F
FTA Fetal Trunk one area APTD = input
Cross
Sectional Area
EFBW Estimated Average of BPD, EFBW=1.25647x
Fetal Body Average of FTA BPD^3+3.50655
Weight and Average of FL x FTA x FL+6.3
(<5000g)
IUGR=1.229 x
BPD^3+3.063 x
FTA x FL–24.6
Curve data is
available in
Appendix F
Table 24. OB Calculation Formulas—Osaka University Factory Defaults
OB/GYN 14 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Osaka University Method (cont’d)
Calc Input Author

CTAR Cardio– four distances or two CTAR = Y.Chiba Fetal
Thoracic Area areas (d1 x d2) / (d3 x d4) Diagn Ther
Ratio x 100 1990 : 5 : 175 –
or a1 / a2 x 100 188
PLI Preload Index two Doppler blood PLI = | v1 / v2 | Y.Chiba Fetal
flow velocities Diagn Ther
1990 : 5 : 168 –
174
EF Ejection two distances on EF = (1 – Ds^3 / n/a
Fraction M–Mode Dd^3)
(End–diastolic
dimension and
End–systolic
dimension on
M–Mode)
Vmax Maximum one Doppler blood Vmax = input n/a
Velocity in flow peak velocities
descending
aorta
S/D Ratio Systolic / two Doppler blood S/D = Vsystolic / n/a
Pl Pulsatility two Doppler blood Pl = (Vmax – Vmin) n/a
Index flow peak velocities / TA_MAX
and TA_MAX
RI Resistivity two Doppler blood RI = (Vmax – Vmin) n/a
Index flow peak velocities / Vmax
Table 24. OB Calculation Formulas—Osaka University Factory Defaults (cont’d)
t
OB/GYN 15
2177611–100 Rev 0
USA Method
Page One Page Two
S/D
Illustration 285. USA Sub-Menus
Calc Input Author


(beats/minute) (Measured manually 120[sec]/2 beat
or automatically) time[sec]
GS Gestational three distances GS=(d1+d2+d3)/3 Hellman, A/
Sac + 3.6225 OG, 103:
789,1969
CRL Crown Rump one distance CRL=1.684969+ Hadlock,
Length 0.315646xd1+ Radiology,
0.049306xd1^2+ 182:501,
0.004057xd1^3+ 1992
0.000120456xd1^4
FL Femur Length one distance FL = –3.91 + 0.427 Hadlock et al,
(GA) – 0.0034 Radiology,
(GA)2 152:497–501,
BPD Biparietal one distance BPD = –3.08+0.41 1984
Diameter (GA) – 0.000061
(GA)3
AC Abdominal circumference by AC = –13.3 + 1.61
Circumference trace, ellipse, circle or (GA) – 0.00998
two distances (GA)2
Table 25. OB Calculation Formulas Part 1—USA Version Factory Defaults
OB/GYN 16 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
USA Method (cont’d)
Calc Input Author

HC Head circumference by HC = –11.48 + Hadlock et al,

Circumference trace, ellipse, circle or 1.56 (GA) – Radiology,
two distances 0.0002548 (GA)3 152:497–501,
1984
OFD Occipito Frontal HC by ellipse or two Longest axis from n/a
Diameter distance HC measurement
S/D Ratio Systolic/ two Doppler blood S/D=Vsystolic/ n/a
A/B Ratio Velocities Ratio two Doppler blood A/B = V1/V2 n/a
flow peak velocities
PI Pulsatility Index two Doppler blood PI=(Vmax–Vmin)/ n/a
flow peak velocities TAMAX
and TAMAX
RI Resistivity In- two Doppler blood RI=(Vmax–Vmin)/ n/a
dex flow peak velocities Vmax
EFW #1 Estimated Fetal Average of BPD and EFW=10^(-1.7492 Shepard,
Weight Average of AC +0.166*BPD+ AJOG,
(0.046*AC)– 142:47, 1982
((2.646*AC*BPD)/
1000))
EFW #2 Estimated Fetal Average of FL and EFW=10^(1.304+ Hadlock-
Weight Average of AC (0.05281*AC)+ Radiology
(0.1938*FL)– 150:535,
(0.004* AC*FL)) 1984
EFW #3 Estimated Fetal Average of BPD, EFW=10^(1.335–0. Hadlock,
Weight Average of AC and 0034*AC*FL)+ AJOG,
Average of FL (0.0316*BPD)+ 151:333,
0.0457*AC)+ 1985
(0.158* FL)
EFW #4 Estimated Average of FL, EFW=10^(1.326– Hadlock,
Fetal Weight Average of AC and (0.00326*AC*FL)) + AJOG,
Average of HC (0.0170*HC)+ 151:333,
(0.0438*AC)+ 1985
(0.158*FL))
EFW #5 Estimated Fetal Average of FL, EFW=10^(1.3596– Hadlock,
Weight Average of AC, (0.00386*AC*FL))+ AJOG,
Average of HC and (0.0064*HC)+ 151:333,
Average of BPD (0.00061*BPD*AC) 1985
+(0.0424*AC)+
(0.174*FL)
Table 25. OB Calculation Formulas Part 1—USA Version Factory Defaults (cont‘d)
t
OB/GYN 17
2177611–100 Rev 0
Calc Author
Mnemonic Calc Name Formula Reference
CUA Composite 1. CUA=10.85+0.060(HC)(FL)+ “Sonograph-

Ultrasound 0.670(BPD)+0.1680(AC) ic Estimation
Age 2. CUA=10.58+0.005(HC)^2+0.3635(AC)+ of Fetal Age
0.02894(BPD)(AC) and Weight”,
Hadlock, Ra-
3. CUA=10.33+0.031(HC)(FL)+ diology Clin-
0.361(HC)+0.0298(AC)(FL) ics of North
4. CUA=11.38+0.07(HC)(FL)+0.98(BPD) America,
5. CUA=10.61+0.175(BPD)(FL)+ 1990.
0.297(AC)+0.71(FL)
6. CUA=10.47+0.442(AC)+0.314(FL)^2–
0.0121(FL)^3
7. CUA=11.19+0.07(HC)(FL)+0.263(HC)
8. CUA=10.31+0.012(HC)^2+0.385(AC)
9. CUA=10.5+0.197(BPD)(FL)+0.95(FL)+
0.73(BPD)
10. CUA=10.32+0.009(HC)^2+1.32(BPD)+
0.00012(HC)^3
11. CUA=9.57+0.524(AC)+0.122(BPD)^2
12. CUA=10.4+2.256(FL)+0.195(FL)^2
13. CUA=6.8954+2.6345(BPD)+0.008771
(BPD)^3
14. CUA=7.61+0.7645(AC)+0.00393(AC)^2
FL/AC FL/AC FL/AC Hadlock, AJR
ratio 141:979,
1983
FL/HC FL/HC FL/HC Hadlock,
ratio JUM 3:439,
1984
FL/BPD FL/BPD FL/BPD Hadlock,
ratio AJOG
141:759,
1987
CI Cephalic BPD/OFD short distance HC/long distance Hadlock, AJR
Index HC 137:83, 1981
Table 26. OB Calculation Formulas Part 2—USA Version Factory Defaults
OB/GYN 18 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Calc Author
Mnemonic Calc Name Formula Reference
HC/AC HC/AC HC/AC Campbell,

ratio BRJ.OG
84:165,1977
AFI* Amniotic AFI=AFI1 (distance) + AFI2 (distance) + Dr. Ruther-
Fluid Index AFI3 (distance) + AFI4 (distance) ford/Dr. Phe-
lan, Obstet-
rics & Gy-
necology
Volume 70,
No. 3, Part
1, p. 353–6,
Sept. 1987.
Dr. C. C.
Smith, The
Female Pa-
tient, Volume
15, p. 85-97,
March 1990.
* The skip function using the Ellipse rocker switch is not available for AFI.
Table 26. OB Calculation Formulas Part 2—USA Version Factory Defaults (cont’d)
t
OB/GYN 19
2177611–100 Rev 0
European Method
Page One Page Two
Illustration 286. European Sub-Menus
OB/GYN 20 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
European Method (cont’d)
Calc Input Author

GS Gestational one distance Curve data is Tokyo
Sac available in University
6 by Univ. of
Tokyo
CRL Crown Rump one distance Curve data is JEANTY :
Length available in Radiology, 143
Appendix F : 513, 1982
Appendix F
HC Head circumference by Curve data is
Circumference trace, ellipse, circle available in
or two distances Appendix F
AC Abdominal circumference by Curve data is
Circumference trace, ellipse, circle available in
available in
Appendix F
BD Binocular one distance Curve data is
Distance available in
Appendix F
TAD Transverse one distance Curve data is ERIKSEN
Abdominal available in
Diameter Appendix F
OFD Occipito one distance Known LMP Hansmann:
Frontal Case: Ultraschalldiag–
Diameter nostik in
Unknown LMP B hilf und
Begurtshilfe d
Case: Gynakologie
1985
Table 27. OB Calculation Formulas—European Version Factory Defaults
t
OB/GYN 21
2177611–100 Rev 0
European Method (cont’d)
Calc Input Author

Ft Foot Distance one distance Curve data is PARIS
available in
Appendix F
EFW Estimated
Fetal Weight
Average of BPD and
Average of AC [cm] ƞ
EFW[g] =
10 (1.7288 +
Shepard/
Warsoff
0.09184*BPD +
(0.02581* AC) +
(0.00011*BPD*A
C))
FL/AC FL/AC ratio Average of FL and FL/AC Hadlock, AJR,
Average of AC 141 : 979, 1983
FL/BPD FL/BPD ratio Average of FL and FL/BPD Hadlock,
Average of BPD AJOG, 141 :
759, 1987
CI Cephalic Average of BPD and BPD/OFD short Hadlock, AJR,
Index Average of OFD distance HC/long 137 : 83, 1981
distance HC
HC/AC HC/AC ratio Average of HC and HC/AC
Average of AC
FL/Ft FL/Ft ratio Average of FL and FL/Ft
Average of Ft
BD/BPD BD/BPD ratio Average of BPD and BD/BPD
Average of BD
D/S Ratio Diastolic/ two Doppler blood D/S = V diastolic/ n/a
Systolic Ratio flow peak velocities Vsystolic
Pl Pulsatility two Doppler blood Pl = (Vmax – n/a
Index flow peak velocities Vmin)/TA_MAX
and TA_MAX
RI Resistivity two Doppler blood RI = (Vmax – n/a
Index flow peak velocities Vmin)/Vmax
Table 27. OB Calculation Formulas—European Version Factory Defaults
OB/GYN 22 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Other OB Calculation Formulas
Calc Input Author

BPD Biparietal one distance Curve data is CAMPBELL :
Diameter available in King’s College
Appendix F Hosp. London
(Am J obst
(Am.J.
gynecol).
available in
Oct. 1, 1982
Appendix F
Appendix F
GS Gestational one distance Curve data is HANSMANN: M
Sac available in and Al :
Appendix F Geburtsch, u,
Frauenheilk 39 :
656, 1979
CRL Crown Rump one distance Curve data is ROBINSON:
Length available in Robins on and
Appendix F Al: Br J Gynecol,
82 : 702, 1975
CRL Crown Rump one distance Curve data is PARIS
Length available in
Appendix F
Appendix F
TAD Transverse one distance Curve data is
Abdominal available in
Diameter Appendix F
available in
Appendix F
BPD Biparietal one distance Curve data is SOSTOA:
Diameter available in Hospital de la
Appendix F Santa Cruzy
San Pablo,
HC Head circumference by Curve data is servieio de
Circumference trace, ellipse, circle available in obst. y gynecol.
Table 28. OB Calculation Formulas—Other Selections
t
OB/GYN 23
2177611–100 Rev 0
Other OB Calculation Formulas (cont’d)
Calc Input Author

AC Abdominal circumference by Curve data is SOSTOA:
Circumference trace, ellipse, circle available in Hospital de la
or two distances Appendix F Santa Cruzy
San Pablo,
Pablo
servieio de
available in
obst. y gynecol.
Appendix F
Appendix F
OFD Occipito one distance Curve data is
Frontal available in
Diameter Appendix F
FL Femur Length one distance Curve data is Hadlock, AJR,
available in 138 : 875, 1982
Appendix F
BPD Biparietal one distance Curve data is Hadlock, JUM
Diameter available in 1:97, 1982
Appendix F
AC Abdominal circumference by Curve data is Hadlock, AJR,
Circumference trace, ellipse, circle available in 139 : 367, 1982
HC Head circumference by Curve data is Hadlock, AJR,
Circumference trace, ellipse, circle available in 138 : 649, 1982
CRL Crown Rump one distance Curve data is NELSON
Length available in
Appendix F
BPD Biparietal one distance Curve data is KURTZ
Appendix F
BD Binocular one distance Curve data is BERKOWITZ
Appendix F
Table 28. OB Calculation Formulas—Other Selections (cont’d)
OB/GYN 24 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Calc Input Author

EFW Estimated Average of BPD and EFW[kg] = German
Fetal Weight Average of TAD [mm] 0.515263
–(0.105775*BPD)
+
(0.000930707*
(BPD)2) +
(0.0649145*TAD)
– (0.00020562*
(TAD[mm])2)
EFW Estimated
Fetal Weight
Average of BPD and
Average of AC [cm] ƞ
EFW [g] = Shepard :
10 (3–1.7492 + Richards/
0.046*AC + Berkowitz
0.166*BPD –
0.002646*AC*BP
D)
EFW Estimated
Fetal Weight
Average of FL,
Average of AC and ƞ
EFW [g] =
10 (1.5662 –
Hadlock,
Radiology,
Average of HC [cm] (0.0108*HC) + 150 : 535, 1984
(0.0468*AC) +
(0.171*FL) +
(0.00034*(HC)2)
–
(0.003685*AC*FL
))
FL/HC FL/HC ratio Average of FL and FL/HC Hadlock, JUM,
Average of HC 3 : 439, 1984
GS Gestational one distance Known LMP Rempen
Sac Case:
Unknown LMP
Case:
CRL Crown Rump one distance Known LMP Rempen
Length Case:
Unknown LMP
Case:
BPD Biparietal one distance Known LMP Rempen
Diameter Case:
Unknown LMP
Case:
t
OB/GYN 25
2177611–100 Rev 0
Calc Input Author

BPD Biparietal one distance Known LMP Case: Hansmann:
Diameter Ultraschalldiag
Ultraschalldiag–
Unknown LMP
nostik in
Case:
Begurtshilfe und
CRL Crown Rump one distance Known LMP Case: Gynakologie
Length 1985
Unknown LMP
Case:
HC(*1) Head Average of BIP HC [mm = 2.325*
Circumference Average of FRO (BPD [mm] ^2 +
OFD [mm] ^2)^0.5
ThD Transverse one distance Known LMP Case:
Thorax
Unknown LMP
Diameter
Case:
FL Femur Length one distance Known LMP Case:
Unknown LMP
Case:
AC Abdominal one distance Known LMP Case:
Circumference
Unknown LMP
Case:
EFW Estimated Average of BPD EFW[g] = Merz, et al.,
Fetal Weight Average of AC –3200.40479 + Womens
157.07186 * Hospital,
AC[cm] + 15.90391 University of
* BPD [cm] Mainz
BPD Biparietal one distance Curve data is Tokyo
Diameter available in Shinozuka
Appendix F Method, 1996
APTD x Antero two distance Curve data is
TTD (AxT) Posterior available in
Trunk Appendix F
Diameter
Transverse
Trunk
Diameter
OB/GYN 26 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Calc Input Author

AC Abdominal circumference by Curve data is Tokyo
Circumference trace, ellipse, circle available in Shinozuka
or two distance Appendix F Method, 1996
available in
Appendix F
CRL Crown Rump one distance Curve data is
Length available in
Appendix F
EFW1 Estimated four distance EFW1 [gram] =
Fetal Weight 1.07 * BPD^3 +
3.42*APTDxTTD
*FL
G = [day] , BPD =
[cm], FL = [cm],
APTDxTTD = [cm2]
EFW2 Estimated 2 distance and 1 EFW2 [gram] =
Fetal Weight circumference 1.07 * BPD^3 +
0.30 * AC^2 * FL
G = [day], BPD =
[cm], AC = [cm], FL
= [cm]
EFW3 Estimated four distance EFW3 [gram] =
Fetal Weight 1.07 * BPD^3 +
2.91*APTDxTTD*
LV
G = [day], BPD =
[cm], LV = [cm],
APTDxTTD = [cm2]
BPD Biparietal one distance Curve data is ASUM
Diameter available in D. Robinson et
Appendix F al, 1990.8
CRL Crown Rump one distance Curve data is ASUM
Length available in Silva et al
Appendix F 1991.6
AC Abdominal circumference by AC (mm) = –56.582 ASUM
Circumference trace, ellipse, circle + 11.402 * (GA–2) Deler
or two distance GA = [week]
t
OB/GYN 27
2177611–100 Rev 0
GS Measurement
GS Measurement for the Tokyo University and European
methods requires only one distance measurement.
GS Measurement for the USA method requires three
distance measurements obtained from longitudinal and
transverse images. The three measurements are
anterior–posterior, transverse and longitudinal. It is
advantageous to use the dual-image (split screen) feature for
this GS measurement.
User-Programmed Calculations (Tables)

User-programmed calculation tables are displayed in the
measurement menus only after they are entered by the user.
The User Table Editor is found in the Set Up/Preset Program

Sub-Menu page 6. Refer to Customize 121 on how to define
these user selections and program the user tables.
OB/GYN 28 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Select Locatn
This choice is used to select one of three locations at which
S/D (D/S) Ratio, A/B Ratio, RI and PI can be taken and
recorded on the report page.
The locations are numbered 1, 2 and 3 as a default from the

factory. However, the user can customize each location
designation with a six character name. This customization
edit is done in any report page that displays S/D (D/S) Ratio,
A/B Ratio, RI or PI. Changes will be permanently saved even
after system power down.
Up to three measurements can be taken for S/D (D/S) Ratio,

A/B Ratio, RI or PI. The latest value or measurement
average can be reported. Averaging depends upon the
average activity preset selection in the Set Up/Preset
Program page 3.
To select a location:

"❙A
Illustration 287. European OB Calculation Sub-Menu

display page three. Press the Select Locatn rocker switch to
change the location number as necessary. Refer to
Illustration 287.
t
OB/GYN 29
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring S/D (D/S) Ratio, A/B Ratio, RI or PI

To measure the systolic/diastolic (diastolic/systolic) ratio,
a/b ratio, resistance index and pulsatility index:

"❙A
Illustration 288. OB Calculation Sub-Menu
Select S/D (D/S) RATIO, A/B RATIO, RI or PI from the OB

Calculation Sub-Menu page three to record this calculation in
the OB Summary Report. Press the Sub-Menu Select
rocker switch, if necessary, to display page three. A “ ”
cursor appears.
Doppler waveform. This would be systole for S/D ratio
(diastole for a D/S ratio), ‘A’ velocity for A/B ratio, peak velocity
for RI, and VMAX for PI.

appears.
(continued)
OB/GYN 30 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring S/D (D/S) Ratio, A/B Ratio, RI or PI (cont’d)

S/D ratio (systole for a D/S ratio), ‘B’ velocity for A/B ratio,
.
minimum velocity for RI, and VMIN for PI.

Trackball manually to trace the waveform between
VMAX and VMIN .
If two velocity measurements are made prior to
selecting S/D (D/S) ratio or RI, the system
automatically calculates S/D (D/S) ratio or RI from the
last two velocity measurements recorded.
.
displayed on the screen and recorded in the OB Summary
Report.

t
OB/GYN 31
2177611–100 Rev 0

To choose the method to measure the time averaged
maximum velocity:
Illustration 289. European OB Calculation Sub-Menu (TAMAX)
Use the TAMAX AUTO (Automatic) Soft-Menu selection to

choose the method by which the TAMAX trace will be made.

will be automatically traced between the two velocity points
set during the PI measurement.
If TAMAX Auto is not highlighted, the operator will have to

OB/GYN 32 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Fetal Heart Rate Measurement

The fetal heart rate is typically taken in M-Mode, though it
also can be performed in Doppler Mode. It is found on OB
Calculation Sub-Menu page four.
To measure the fetal heart rate:
Scan to display a B-Mode image of the fetal heart.
Press M-Mode. The M-Mode cursor appears in the B-Image.
Use the Trackball to position the M-Mode cursor over the

B-Mode image of the fetal heart.
Press M-Mode a second time. The M-Mode timeline appears

on the bottom of the screen (or as designated by the
Set Up/Preset menu).

"❙A
Press the Measurement key to activate the measurement

function and display the measurement sub-menus.
Illustration 290. OB Calculation Sub-Menu (HEART RATE) USA Method
Select HEART RATE from the OB Calculation Sub-Menu

page four. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if

necessary, to display page four. A “ ” cursor with vertical
dotted lines appears.
t
OB/GYN 33
2177611–100 Rev 0
Fetal heart rate measurement (cont’d)

M-Mode waveform where it is desired to start the Heart Rate
measurement.

appears.
Use the Trackball to move the end-point cursor to the same

point on the M-Mode waveform two heartbeats from the
measurement start point. See Illustration 291.
The heart rate appears on the display and is also recorded

on the report page.
X X
OB/GYN 34 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Helpful Hints
Hints S Any measurement can be repeated by selecting that

measurement again from the Soft-Menu.
S The system displays several measurements, but the
summary report retains only the last three measurements
of each type.
S The three report page measurements can be averaged and
the average used in other calculations. This averaging
selection is made in the Set Up/Preset Program page 3.
Average activity on/off and average number (number of
measurements averaged) can be set to the user’s
preference. Other presets on this page that affect OB
measurements for the European method are Add 1 week to
EDD and Display EDD with GA value.
S If results are displayed as question marks, the
measurement is not within the table range.
S If there is a series of measurements/calculations that are
measurements/calculations to automatically appear on
the display in the desired order. Refer to Customize 125
for details on programming an auto sequence.
t
OB/GYN 35
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB/GYN 36 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Summary Reports
Starting an Exam
.
Accurate and complete Summary Report presentation starts
at the beginning of the patient exam. Always begin an exam
by entering as much new patient information as possible.
NOTE: Refer to the Beginning a New Patient section of

Basic Scan for instructions.
After selecting the OB exam type, fill in the following

information after PT Name, PT ID, Notes, and Oper ID:
1. AGE. Type the woman’s age.

2. PREGNANCY Enter 1 for LMP, 2 for BBT (not in USA
ORIGIN DATA version), 3 for EDC (EDD in Europe)
SELECTION and 4 for GA.
. Type in the required information
for category selected.
3. GRAVIDA. Type the number of pregnancies.
4. PARA. Type the number of live births.
5. AB. Type the number of abortions,
miscarriages, etc.
6. ECTOPIC. Type the number of pregnancies
outside the uterus.
7. REF. MD. Type the name of the woman’s
physician.
8. COMMENT Type any pertinent medical history with
regard to this pregnancy, e.g.,
diabetes, bleeding.
.
9. EXIT Press Return after having completed
filling in this information.
NOTE: If patient information needs to be edited, use the

ID/Name key to display the patient entry menu for editing
information.
t
OB/GYN 37
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Summary Report
OB Report Page Layout

The basic OB Report format consists of two pages for each
region available (USA, Europe, Tokyo University and Osaka
University).
The first page consists of four basic areas. The first, or top
portion, is generally patient data that was entered on the
patient entry menu at the beginning of the exam. This area
cannot be edited.
The second is the measurements area. It varies by region

format. Generally this area contains measurement titles, the
last three measurements made, the measurement average (if
averaging is used), estimated gestational age and the ability
to choose if the measurement is used in the calculation of the
composite age. This area can be edited by deleting
measurements, selecting yes/no for composite age or
rearranging the vertical location of a measurement using the
Report Format Editor in Set Up/Preset Program page 6.
The third area is calculations. It varies by region format.

These items are results of measurements or patient data
entered on the Patient Entry Menu. This area cannot be
edited.
The fourth area is comments. The same amount of area is

available for user comments for each region. The user can
edit this area freely. Comments made on page 1 are not
reflected on page 2. Therefore, comments on each page can
be edited individually.
OB/GYN 38 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Summary Report
OB Report Page 1
.
Illustration 292. USA Basic OB Summary Report Page 1
NOTE: When the head circumference (HC) is measured by

the ellipse or two distance method, the longer axis will
automatically be assigned as the OFD measurement.
<AVG> or <LAST> indicates that the Average or Latest value

will be displayed in this column. This depends on the preset,
Average Activity, in the Setup/Preset Program menu page 3.
t
OB/GYN 39
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Summary Report
OB Report Page 1 (cont’d)
Illustration 293. European Basic OB Report Page 1
Illustration 294. Tokyo University Basic OB Report Page 1
OB/GYN 40 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Summary Report
OB Report Page 1 (cont’d)
Illustration 295. Osaka University Basic OB Report Page 1
Composite Age Determination
The composite fetal age is displayed as CUA (Composite

Ultrasound Age) on the USA Report and CGA (Composite
Gestational Age) on the European, Tokyo University and
Osaka University Reports.
The CUA or CGA field can be edited on the report page by

the designation ‘Y’ for yes or ‘N’ for no.
‘Y’ will include the last measurement or measurement
.
average in the calculation composite age. Changing the
CUA/CGA designation to ‘N’ will exclude the measurement
from the composite age calculation. The default value is ‘Y’.
NOTE: There is a preset selection on Set Up/System

Parameters page one that allows for the resetting of the CUA
fields at New Patient selection (Reset on or off).
t
OB/GYN 41
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Summary Report
Measurement Edits
Measurements on the OB Report Page can only be edited by

deletion. After a measurement is deleted, the average or
other related calculations will be recomputed and the report
page displayed again.
Operator Entered Values
In the calculations section of the report page, if the value is a

result of operator entered data (generally from the patient
entry menu) and not measurements, the designation “OPE” is
seen after the calculation name.
An example would be EDD (OPE). This means the estimate

date of delivery was a value entered by the operator on the
patient entry menu.
Fetal Weight Estimates
The estimated fetal birth weight calculation varies by region.

EFW or EFBW is calculated for:
USA Version—The system automatically selects one of the

five available formulas based on the measurements taken.
Tokyo or European Version—It is based on the formula

selected in the Set Up/System Parameter menu page 2.
Osaka University Version—It is based on a single formula

listed on OB/GYN 14.
OB Report Page 2
SITE represents a Doppler site that the user can edit

with a maximum of six characters. Factory default
labels are 1, 2 and 3.
OB/GYN 42 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Summary Report
OB Report Page 2
Illustration 296. USA Basic OB Summary Report Page 2
Illustration 297. Basic OB Report Page 2 for Europe, Tokyo

University and Osaka University
t
OB/GYN 43
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Summary Report
Biophysical Profile
A biophysical profile source is available to evaluate the well

being of the fetus. The user can rate the fetus with a score of
0, 1 or 2 on the following items:
S Movement Rate fetal physical activity

S Tone Rate fetal heart tone
S Breathing Rate fetal breathing movement
S Fluid Rate fetal amniotic fluid
S Reactive NST Rate a Reactive Non-Stress Test
A sum of the above five items is then displayed as an overall
biophysical profile score.
If any value is entered other than 0, 1 or 2 for each of the five

items, an error message “Invalid, Input a proper data (0–2)” is
displayed.
HR, PI, RI, S/D Ratio and A/B Ratio
The largest portion of page two displays the last three

measurements and latest/average value for HR, PI, RI, S/D
(D/S) Ratio and A/B Ratio. The last four measurements can
be taken at three different sites on the fetus.
The factory default for these site fields is 1, 2 and 3.

However, the user can freely edit these site fields on the
Report Page. For some regions, these site fields may be
common between page 1 and page 2. If this is the case,
edits on either page are reflected on the other. These edits
are remembered after power down. The maximum length of
the site field is six characters.
The comments section can be edited freely using the

alphanumeric keyboard or annotation library. Simply move
the highlight cursor into the comment area and press the
Comment key. The system is now in the annotation mode.
When the highlight cursor leaves the comment area, the
system exits the annotation mode. These comments are
seperate from those on page 1.
OB/GYN 44 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Summary Report
USA Only
Two items are different on the OB Summary Report page 2

for the USA version.
1. The third line of the top portion will display all of the
LMP, GA and EDD data based on the operator’s
input. For example, if LMP was entered:
LMP (OPE) mm/dd/yy GA (LMP) ##W#D EDD (LMP) mm/dd/yy
will be displayed.
2. Amniotic Fluid Index (AFI) displays the sum of the
four measurements and the four individual
measurement values.
Editing the Report
Cursor Movement
Movement of the edit cursor on the report page can be
accomplished by using the Trackball or the up/down/right/left
cursor arrow keys on the keyboard.
Edit Actions
When positioned on a measurement field the Back Space or
Space keys will delete the current value in that field. After
pressing Back Space or Space, the only options remaining
are to press Set or Esc.
.
Set deletes the old value.
Esc returns the old value to the report page.
NOTE: Any calculations relating to the deleted measurement

field are recomputed.
t
OB/GYN 45
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Summary Report
Logic Field Edits

The CUA/CGA field requires a “Y” or “N” to be entered in
either upper or lower case.
.
When the cursor is positioning in the desired field, press “Y”
or “N”. Once yes or no has been entered, press Return to
record that entry and proceed to the next edit field.
NOTE: Calculations affected are recomputed.
Comment Edits
The comment field consists of two lines with a total of
120 characters. Use normal keyboard functions to type
necessary comments.
Comments made on each report page are not reflected on

the other report pages. Therefore, comments on each page
can be edited individually.
When finished, press Return to complete the comment edit

function. Since this is the last edit field on the report page,
the cursor moves to the first edit field.
Recording Summary Reports

The summary report can be saved like any ultrasound image.
Once it is displayed on the screen, it can be recorded on the
VCR, printed on the B/W or color page printer, photographed
by the multi-image camera or stored on a MOD with the
Image Archive option.
OB/GYN 46 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Anatomical Survey
Overview
The Anatomical Survey page provides a checklist that
promotes a thorough routine reporting of OB exams.
The header of the page is patient data similar to the

corresponding OB Report page. This information can only be
edited by using the New Patient or ID Name keys.
The third line of the header will be different depending on the

type of OB Report Format selected.
There are thirteen pre-programmed and a maximum of six

user programmer anatomical features.
Illustration 298. Anatomical Survey Page
t
OB/GYN 47
2177611–100 Rev 0
Anatomical Survey
Editing
When the Anatomical Survey Page is enabled from the OB
calculation menu, the highlight cursor appears at the YES/NO
field of the first feature on the checklist. Both Yes and No are
displayed for all items on the list.
The highlight cursor is moved by the Trackball or the

up/down/left/right arrow keys.
Select yes by pressing ‘Y’ on the keyboard. When yes is

selected, no will be erased. The cursor automatically moves
to the comments field.
In the comments field, comments can be entered by typing or

selecting annotations from the Soft-Menu. One line of
comments is available for each anatomical feature.
When Return is pressed after comments are completed or
.
when the comments cursor exits the right end of the line, the
cursor moves to the yes/no field of the next anatomical
feature.
NOTE: Any meaningless entries will display the message:

“Please select ‘y’ or ‘n’.” or “Please select ‘n’ or ‘a’.”
OB/GYN 48 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Anatomical Survey
User Programmed Features

The user can program six anatomical feature fields. The
maximum number of characters is 19.
To enter a user feature:
Trackball the highlight cursor to a User Field.
Type in the desired feature name and press Return. The

highlight cursor moves to the Yes/No field.
Repeat the steps as necessary for any additional feature

fields.
The entires will be saved and retained even after the system
is powered down.
Hints S YES/NO will appear in the “IMAGED?” column even if

there is no entry in the user programmed fields.
S While in a user programmed field, rolling the Trackball
up/down or pressing the up/down arrow keys have no
effect on cursor position. Only motion of the Trackball to
the left/right or pressing the left/right arrow keys will work.
t
OB/GYN 49
2177611–100 Rev 0
Anatomical Survey
OB/GYN 50 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Graphs
Overview
t
The LOGIQ 500 can display a fetal growth curve graph (OB
Graph) from data in each measurement table for fetal age.
The graphic displays a horizontal scale for gestational weeks

and a vertical scale for the measurement value.
The curve graphic shows the standard values with two

additional curves representing the standard deviation.
If information was entered on the patient data entry menu

that allows for the estimation of a gestational age, an
asterisk (*) is displayed on the graph to show the current
status of the fetus relative to the measurement table.
The OB graph page also has patient data fields,

measurement/calculation data fields and a comment field.
.
The system does not allow any field on the OB graph to be
edited.
NOTE: In many cases, the LMP (or any form of estimated

gestational age) is required in order to properly compute the
OB Graph. Ensure that the LMP is properly entered in the
Patient Entry Menu.
t
OB/GYN 51
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Graphs
OB Graph Selection
OB Graph is a factory default selection in the measurement
menus. Use the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if
necessary, to display page 2 of the factory default menus and
select OB Graph.
.
Illustration 299. Basic OB Graph Display (Osaka University)
NOTE: The label in the upper left corner of the graph

indicates the standard deviation used to plot the graph.
OB Graph Labeling
Table 29 is a summary of the labeling found in the OB Graph
for deviation.
OB/GYN 52 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Graphs
OB Graph Labeling (cont’d)
Author Measurement table Deviation Deviation Label
Hadlock BPD, HC, AC, FL Vertical +2SD/–2SD
CRL ––– No Label
EFW Vertical +2SD/–2SD
Hellman GS ––– No Label
ASUM BPD, AC Horizontal +2SD/–2SD(WEEK)
CRL ––– No Label
Tokyo GS, CRL, BPD, FL, LV Horizontal Deviation(WEEK)
Tokyo–S (Shinozuka) CRL, BPD, FL, AC, Vertical +1.64SD/–1.64SD

AxT(APTDxTTD), EFW
Osaka CRL, BPD, FL, HL, FTA, EFBW Vertical +1.5SD/–1.5SD
Hansmann BPD, CRL, OFD, HC, TThd, FL Vertical 95%/5%
GS, TAD Vertical 90%/10%
AC ––– No Label
Rempen GS, CRL, BPD Vertical 95%/5%
Campbell BPD, CRL, FL Vertical 90%/10%
BD ––– No Label
Berkowitz BD ––– No Label
Eriksen TAD ––– No Label
Kurtz BPD Vertical 90%/10%
Nelson CRL Vertical 90%/10%
Robinson CRL Vertical 90%/10%
Jeanty CRL, BPD, FL, AC, HC Vertical 90%/10%
BD ––– No Label
Paris CRL, BPD, FL, Ft Vertical 90%/10%
TAD ––– No Label
Sostoa BPD, FL, AC, HC Vertical 90%/10%
BD, OFD ––– No Label
User Table USA Horizontal Deviation(WEEK)
User Table TOKYO Horizontal Deviation(WEEK)
User Table OSAKA Vertical +1.5SD/–1.5SD
User Table Europe Vertical 90%/10%
Table 29. OB Graph Deviation Labeling
t
OB/GYN 53
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Graphs
Changing OB Graph Selection
Select OB Graph from the OB Calculation Sub-Menu page

two. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if necessary,
to display page two. The OB Graph selection is highlighted.
After the OB graph has been displayed, the user can change
or select which measurement parameter is to be used to
display a graph.
To change the graph:
With the OB graph displayed, CHANGE GRAPH will be in

reverse video.
Press Return. The graphic is deleted and a measurement

selection menu appears.
Illustration 300. European OB Graph Change Selection
OB/GYN 54 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Graphs
Changing OB Graph Selection (cont’d)

Use the Trackball to select the desired measurement value.
Press Return. The new measurements, calculations and

graphic are displayed.
To exit the OB Graph display, select OB Graph in the OB

Calculation Sub-Menu again. OB Graph is not highlighted.
Hints The user is not allowed to edit any field on the OB Graph
display except the Comments section. Comments on the OB
Graph page are different from any other OB Report Page.
If the user does not enter an estimated gestational age on the

Patient Entry Menu screen, the mark (*) indicating the current
status of the fetus will not be displayed on the graph.
t
OB/GYN 55
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Graphs
OB/GYN 56 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
(software option)
Overview
Fetal Trend Management is an option to the LOGIQ 500 OB
Calculation package that enhances the user’s ability to
monitor the development of the fetus.
If patient data, measurements and calculations are saved

during the initial examination, this information can be
compared to results of follow up examinations. The OB
Graph function can be used to display the current data or
combine the current data with past data to show a fetal
growth trend.
Storing Patient Information

After an OB examination, the user can save the resultant
patient data to two different types of media.
The user can save the patient data to the system hard disk.
While this offers the convenience of not maintaining
removable media, the system hard disk’s storage capacity is
very limited.
A Magnetic Optical Disk (MOD) would be the best storage

media. Although this removable disk must be maintained by
the user, it offers far greater storage capacity. Approximately
one year’s worth of information can be stored on one disk.
t
OB/GYN 57
2177611–100 Rev 0
Data Storage Estimations

If the following standard assumptions are made:
S Work days/week = 5
S Patients/day = 30
S Diagnosis/patient = 5
S Measurements/patient = 5
then approximately one year’s worth of studies can be stored
on the hard drive.
When hard drive capacity is reached, the message “Data is

full. Delete needless data” is displayed.
However, the average MOD can store more than 30 years

worth of data using the same assumptions.
Media Selection Preset Parameter

The user must choose the type of media that will store the
patient OB information. This is done in the Set Up/Preset
Program sub-menu page 3. The parameter is:
Media Selection for Fetal Trend : HD MO

Select HD for the system hard drive (limited storage space)
or MOD for a removable magnetic optical disk (much greater
storage space).
OB/GYN 58 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Saving Data
Before the diagnosis is complete, ensure that all patient
information such as Name, ID, Ref MD and EDC has been
entered. If it has not, use the ID/Name key to enter this
necessary information. Select the OB Graph function from
the OB Calculation soft menu.
Five additional commands are displayed on the OB Graph

that relate to the Fetal Trend Management option as shown in
Illustration 301. These commands are:
LIST–ID Displays a list by patient ID number.
LIST DATA Displays data for a specified patient.
TREND–BOTH Shows data points on the OB graph

based on current and past data.
TREND–PRESENT Shows data points on the OB graph

based on current data only.
SAVE Saves Patient information to specified

media.
CHANGE GRAPH Changes the measurement value

graphed (performs the same function
as in the basic OB calculation
package).
t
OB/GYN 59
2177611–100 Rev 0
Saving Data (cont’d)
Illustration 301. OB Graph Display
Type of Data Saved
The type of data that is recorded during the SAVE function is:
1. Date and Time

2. Patient Name and ID
3. Calculated EDC or EDD
4. Measurement Author’s Name
5. Measured or Calculated Data
OB/GYN 60 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
.
Save Command
NOTE: To avoid any trouble in searching later, it is better to

have all patient information entered before saving.
Use the Trackball to highlight the SAVE command and press

Set.
If patient information has been entered, the patient data,

measurements and calculations will be saved to the
designated media (HD or MOD).
If there are similar files in the data list (i.e. same ID but Name
and EDC are different), the system displays the Patient List
Menu (LIST-ID). The user will have to select the file to which
the data will be added.
If the user does not input the ID, the system displays the
List-Data Menu. The user will then have to input the ID.
If the user does not input other patient data, the system
displays the List-Data menu. The user will then have to input
the patient data.
If more than one candidate is available on the list, the system
.
first displays the Patient List Menu. The user then has to pick
the proper file in which the current data will be added.
NOTE: If measurement averaging is turned on, only the

average value is saved. If measurement averaging is turned
off, only the last measured or calculated value is saved.
t
OB/GYN 61
2177611–100 Rev 0
Save Function Messages
If patient information has not been entered, the message

displayed is:
“Input patient’s information:”
If a patient ID number is not entered, the message displayed is:
.
“Input ID:”
NOTE: The ID number is necessary or the SAVE function

CANNOT be accomplished. It is possible to save data
without a patient name or EDC but the information displayed
with the LIST–DATA function is limited.
If all of the data is the same as a file on the data list, the
message displayed is:
“Overwrite existing data? ‘y’ ‘n’. ”
where ‘y’ replaces the archived file with the new file.
‘n’ causes the system to do nothing. This cancels the SAVE
function request.
If the storage media is full, especially in the case of the

limited capacity of the hard drive, the message displayed is:
“Data is full. Delete needless data.”
Eliminating needless spaces in the data entered will help to

conserve storage space.
OB/GYN 62 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Growth Trending
The default command after the OB Graph is displayed is
TREND–PRESENT. This will display an OB Graph for the
current author/measurement selected.
However, after additional examinations, the user can recall

past data and display it with the current data to show a trend
in fetal growth.
When the user selects the TREND–BOTH command from the

OB Graph display, the system automatically searches the
storage media and gets the data and displays the OB Trend
Graph as shown in Illustration 302.
Illustration 302. OB Trend Graph
The system will search for like data displayed on the OB

Graph. If Hadlock BPD is the data displayed, then the
current patient’s Hadlock BPD data is used with the past
Hadlock BPD data to display the trend on the graph.
t
OB/GYN 63
2177611–100 Rev 0
Growth Trending (contd.)

If the user wants to trend different author/measurement data,
that graph must be displayed first before the TREND–BOTH
command is selected.
An asterisk (*) is used to show the present data point on the

graph while the pound sign (+) is used for all past data points.
List ID Management
The system allows the user to manage the data that was
previously stored using the Patient ID List.
Choose LIST–ID from the OB Graph display. The system

displays all data found on the storage media. The oldest
data will have the first order number. The newest data is
displayed on the last page as shown in Illustration 303.
Illustration 303. LIST–ID Data Display
OB/GYN 64 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
List ID Commands
The commands at the bottom of the List–ID page allow the
user to perform the following functions:
CTRL, N Displays the next page

CTRL, P Displays the previous page
CTRL, A Allows the user to rearrange the order of
the display list
CTRL, L Displays the selected patients data list
CTRL, D Deletes saved patient data
CTRL, S Searches the ID List for desired patient
information
CTRL, M Allows the user to modify the patient data
of a selected file (ie. Name, ID & EDD)
CTRL, K Saves the current patient data
CTRL, C Cancels the current process
CLEAR Clears entered characters
Control, K
The Control, K function operates like the SAVE command on

the OB Graph display. Pressing these two keys
simultaneously from the PATIENT LIST MENU display
causes the system to save the current patient data. See
Storing Patient Information on OB/GYN 57 for details.
Control, A
The Control, A function is used to control the order in which

the LIST–ID data is displayed.
Press Ctrl, A simultaneously. The cursor moves to the

number window as shown in Illustration 304.
t
OB/GYN 65
2177611–100 Rev 0
Control, A (cont’d)
[PATIENT LIST MENU]
PT NAME :
PT ID :
EDD (MM / DD / YY) : 95/03/03
NUMBER : Arrange : 1–ID 2–Name 3–EDC +R–REV

PAGE :###/###
NO ID NAME EDC
00001 A1234567890123 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA 95/09/15
00002 B9876543210987 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB 95/09/23
00003 C6754321897653 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC 95/09/28
00015 Z3456188273653 ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 95/09/13

Ctrl+N:Next Page Ctrl+L:Data List Ctrl+M:Modify
Ctrl+P:Prvs Page Ctrl+D:Delete Ctrl+K:Save
Ctrl +A:Arrange Ctrl +S:Search Ctrl +C:Cancel
CLEAR:Clear entered characters

Operator Message Area
Illustration 304. List Arrangement Selections
The following message is displayed:
“Arrange : 1–ID 2–Name 3–EDC +R–REV”
1 = Rearrange by ID number smallest to largest

1R = Rearrange by ID number largest to smallest
2 = Rearrange by name A to Z.
2R = Rearrange by name Z to A.
3 = Rearrange by EDD newest to oldest
3R = Rearrange by EDD oldest to newest.
“R” added to the number selection means reverse order.
Type in the number or number/letter for the list display

arrangement desired and press Return.
The temporary file sort for display begins. The time required
depends on the amount of information in the data base.
OB/GYN 66 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Control, M
The Control, M function allows the user to modify the patient

data (Name, ID & EDD) on any file in the data base. This will
be helpful if the patient information was not entered
EXACTLY the same for each exam.
Press Ctrl, M simultaneously. The cursor moves to the

number window as shown in Illustration 305.
PT NAME :
PT ID :
EDD (MM / DD / YY) :
NUMBER : Modify :
Illustration 305. Modified Data Entry
Type in the number from the list displayed on the screen and
press Return.
The selected patient information is displayed and the cursor

moves to the PT NAME window.
Use the Trackball to highlight the desired window and

change the necessary information with the alphanumeric
keys. Once the Return key is pressed while in the EDD
window or the Trackball is used to move the cursor outside
of the patient information area, the following message
appears:
“ Are you sure to modify the previous data? (y/n) ”
where ‘y’ means modify the old data and save it. The cursor
moves to the PT Name window.
‘n’ means do nothing. The cursor moves to the PT Name

window.
t
OB/GYN 67
2177611–100 Rev 0
Control, M (cont’d)
If the desired modifications will create a file exactly like a

current existing file, the following message appears:
“Same data exists.”
At this point the user may:
#C – Combine a selected number data file with

the one being modified. The file being
modified will be added to the file number
selected.
.
Q – This will quit the sub mode operation and
return to the previous modification mode.
NOTE: Caution should be used when modifying files so as
not to change/delete existing files or create false ones.
OB/GYN 68 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Control, S
The Control, S function allows the user to quickly search the

PATIENT LIST MENU data base for a specific patient file.
Press Ctrl, S simultaneously. The cursor moves to the PT

Name window as shown in Illustration 306.
PT NAME :
PT ID :
EDD (MM / DD / YY) :
NUMBER :
Illustration 306. Search Data Entry
Use the Trackball to highlight the desired window and type

the necessary information with the alphanumeric keys. Once
the Return key is pressed while in the EDD window or the
Trackball is used to move the cursor outside of the patient
information area, the search functions begin.
When the search has ended, the list is displayed on the

screen.
If the search ends in failure, the system may beep or the

cursor remains at the PT Name window and the following
message is displayed:
“No data exists. Input other information.”
At the end of the search, the patient information is placed in

the windows (Name, ID & EDD) of the file that most closely
matches the search criteria.
t
OB/GYN 69
2177611–100 Rev 0
Control, L
The Control, L function allows the user to display the data list
for a selected patient file.
Press Ctrl, L simultaneously. The cursor moves to the

number window.
press Return.
The data list for the patient selected is displayed on the

screen as shown in Illustration 307.
[DATA LIST MENU]
PT NAME : 12345678901234567890123456789
PT ID : 12345678901234
EDD (MM / DD / YY) : 12 / 31 / 93
NUMBER :
List–Page :###/### Meas–Page :###/###
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No GA MEAS1 MEAS2 MEAS3 MEAS4 MEAS5 MEAS6 MEAS7 MEAS8
UNIT1 UNIT2 UNIT3 UNIT4 UNIT5 UNIT6 UNIT7 UNIT8
AUTH1 AUTH2 AUTH3 AUTH4 AUTH5 AUTH6 AUTH7 AUTH8
123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.#
123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.#
123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.#
123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.#
123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.#
Ctrl+N: Next Page Ctrl+G: Graph Ctrl+K: Save
Ctrl+P: Prvs Page Ctrl+D: Delete Ctrl +C: Cancel
Ctrl+F: Forward Page Ctrl+B: Backward Page
Illustration 307. Patient List-Data Menu
Page two of the Data List Menu shows the Number of

studies, Gestational Age (by LMP), Tech ID and Reference
MD information.
OB/GYN 70 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Control, D
The Control, D function allows the user to delete specified

files from the LIST–ID data base (HD or MOD).
Press Ctrl, D simultaneously. The cursor moves to the

number window.
press Return.
Before deleting any data, the following message is displayed:
“Are you sure to delete the data ? (y/n)”
where ‘y’ means to proceed with deleting the data.
‘n’ means do nothing.
The data selected is then deleted from the data base.
If the user is cleaning up the media, especially in the case of

the Hard Drive, the following can be entered instead of a
number:
# Select Delete selected file numbers

A-All Delete ALL files from the media data base.
P-Page Delete ALL files on the current page
displayed.
t
OB/GYN 71
2177611–100 Rev 0
Data List Management

The LIST–DATA function allows the user to manage the
measurement/calculation data stored in a specific patient file.
Choose LIST–DATA from the OB Graph or the Control, L

function from the LIST–ID display. The system displays past
gestational age data for the same patient criteria displayed
on the OB Graph or for the information that was entered in
the List–ID display. Refer to Illustration 308.
The measurement/calculation list order is based on

gestational age and cannot be rearranged.
[PATIENT DATA MENU]
PT NAME : 12345678901234567890123456789
PT ID : 12345678901234
EDD (MM / DD / YY) : 12 / 31 / 93
NUMBER :
List–Page :###/### Meas–Page :###/###
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No GA MEAS1 MEAS2 MEAS3 MEAS4 MEAS5 MEAS6 MEAS7 MEAS8
UNIT1 UNIT2 UNIT3 UNIT4 UNIT5 UNIT6 UNIT7 UNIT8
AUTH1 AUTH2 AUTH3 AUTH4 AUTH5 AUTH6 AUTH7 AUTH8
123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.#
123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.#
123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.#
123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.#
123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.#
Ctrl+N:Next Page Ctrl+L:Data List Ctrl+M:Modify
Ctrl+P:Prvs Page Ctrl+D:Delete Ctrl+K:Save
Ctrl +A:Arrange Ctrl +S:Search Ctrl +C:Cancel
CLEAR:Clear entered characters
Illustration 308. List-Data Menu
OB/GYN 72 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Data List Commands

Some functions at the bottom of the data list screen operate
the same as those on the LIST–ID screen:
CTRL, N Displays the next page

CTRL, P Displays the previous page
CTRL, D Deletes saved patient data.
CTRL, K Saves the current patient data.
CTRL, C Cancels the current process
CLEAR Clears entered characters
Functions specific to the LIST–ID display are:
CTRL, F Moves to the right for the displayed page

CTRL, B Moves to the left for the displayed page
CTRL, G Displays the OB Graph
Control, F and Control, B
Since only eight measurements/calculations can be displayed

on the screen at one time, Control F and Control B allow the
user to move to the right and left, respectively, to display
additional measurements/calculations.
Control, G
Control, G enables the OB Graph function for the number of

files selected.
Press Ctrl, G simultaneously. The cursor moves to the

number window.
press Return.
The selected OB Graph will be displayed and the

TREND–BOTH selection is highlighted.
t
OB/GYN 73
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB/GYN 74 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Basic OB–Multigestational
(software option)
Overview
The LOGIQ 500 offers an optional calculation package that
allows the user to measure and report multiple fetus
development. The system is capable of reporting a
maximum of four fetuses.
Patient Entry Menu

If the Multigestational Option has been purchased, an extra
entry appears on the Patient Entry Menu to the right of
“RefMD:”. This entry is called “FETUS NUMBER:”. The
factory default number is one.
Entering Fetus Number

It is generally during the first exam that the user recognizes a
multiple gestation. If during the first exam more than one
fetus is imaged, the user can use the ID/Name key to return
to the Patient Entry Menu and enter the necessary number of
fetuses.
.
For subsequent exams the user enters the correct number of
fetuses when the New Patient key is used.
NOTE: Data Management Center transfer function will not

work if the fetus number is greater than one. An error
message will appear:
“Multigestation data transfer is not supported”
DMC data transfer will function normally if the fetus number is

set to one.
t
OB/GYN 75
2177611–100 Rev 0
Distinguishing Each Fetus

For measurements/calculations and report page displays, the
fetuses are labeled A, B, C and D.
Each fetus is distinguished on the report pages by its letter and

total number of fetuses. For example, a report page could be
noted as FETUS:A/3. This is fetus A from a total of 3.
Following this fetal number designation, the user can use

twelve characters to describe the position and twelve
characters to describe placenta location of the fetus. This is
displayed as:
POS: ############ PLAC: ############
Measurements/Calculations
During measurements/calculations, all measurements are
performed on fetus A first. The user then switches to fetus B
and performs the same measurements, etc.
.
The user can switch between fetuses by pressing Blue Shift
and then N.
NOTE: A fetus change can be accomplished at anytime

during the exam. However, the Blue Shift, N function is NOT
available while a measurement cursor is active.
After changing to the next fetus, any measurements made

will be recorded and reported to the new designated fetus.
Any active measurement or calculation not completed will be
cancelled when the fetus number is changed.
OB/GYN 76 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Change the Number of Fetuses

In the ID/Name function the user can increase or decrease
the fetus number or cancel the Multigestational function. This
would need to be accomplished due to the demise of a fetus
or error in the definition of the fetus number.
Number Increase
If the fetus number is increased, the message:
“Are you sure to change the number? (y/n)”
is displayed.
‘y’ will create the report pages for the new fetus.
‘n’ returns to the previous number.
If a fetus number increase is not available, the message:

“Data range over. Input proper data.” is displayed.
Number Decrease
If the fetus number is decreased because some
measurement has already been completed or the fetus
number was fixed in a previous exam, the message
“Are you sure to change the number? (y/n)”
is displayed.
‘y’ prompts the user to select which fetus to delete (A, B, C

or D).
‘n’ returns to the previous number.
The data of deleted fetuses is deleted for the measurement

result window and report pages. If the fetus number is
reduced to one, the multigestation function is cancelled.
After the decrease in fetus number, there is no need to adjust

the IDs (A, B, C or D) of the remaining fetuses. The same ID
for the remaining fetuses can be maintained and used.
t
OB/GYN 77
2177611–100 Rev 0
Report Page Layout

The Multigestational Option adds additional pages to the OB
Report displays.
Pages one and two of the Multigestational Option appear the

same as the Basic OB Reporting package; except, pages
one and two will be generated for each fetus. They will have
the fetus identifying information between the heading and
measurements. The fetal information displayed is:
“Fetus : $/% POS: ############ PLAC: ############”
$ = Fetal ID (A, B, C or D)
% = Total number of fetuses
The second to last page, depending on the number of

fetuses, is a summary of the measurements and calculations
found on page one. However, all fetuses (maximum of 4) are
dipslayed on this page. Since page one is different by
region, page three is also different by region selected (i.e.
USA, European, Tokyo University or Osaka University).
The last page, depending on the number of fetuses, is a

summary that compares all fetuses. The heading is different
by region. It contains the following:
Fetus Pos: Fetus position. This 12 character string is

common between pages 1, 2 and 4.
Fluid: An estimate of the amount of aminotic

fluid. Common between pages 2 and 4.
Biophys: Total biophysical profile score from page 2.
HR (BPM): Heart rate in beats per minute from page 2.
AFI (USA Only): Amniotic Fluid Index summary from page 2.
Placenta: Shows location fetus, grade and previa

(yes, no or partial)
Membrane: Shows location between fetus to fetus.
OB/GYN 78 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Graph
With the Multigestational Option, the OB Graph selection
includes pages to display graphs for individual fetuses as well
as a graph to plot all fetuses simultaneously.
For individual fetus reports, the fetus is designated by fetus

ID and total number of fetuses (i.e. Fetus: A/3 or Fetus: B/2)
Change the fetus pages by moving the highlight cursor to ←

or → and press Set.
Illustration 309. OB Graph Multigestational Option (Osaka

University Version)
t
OB/GYN 79
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Graph (cont’d)
If all fetuses are displayed simultaneously, different symbols
are used to mark each fetus. The symbols are:
Fetus Present
A
*
B
C
D
Illustration 310 OB Graph Multigestational Option (Osaka

University Version)
Only gestational age, based on operator’s input, is displayed

for simultaneous plotting.
OB/GYN 80 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Fetal Trend Management (Multigestational Option)

Fetal Trend Management with the Multigestational Option
operates much like the basic fetal trend package described
earlier. Illustration 311 shows an example of the
Multigestational Fetal Trend Graph.
Illustration 311. Fetal Trend Graph Multigestational Option

(Hadlock-USA Version)
t
OB/GYN 81
2177611–100 Rev 0
Save Function
The SAVE command on the trend graph display or Ctrl + K in
the Data List display will cause the system to compare the
current fetus combination between present and past data. If
patient data and fetus number are compatible, the data is saved.
If there is any mismatch in data, the message:
“Incompatible data. Do you save? (y/n)”
is displayed.
‘y’ = Saves data as it is
‘n’ = Cancel save function
Data List Menu

The Data List Menu of fetal trend information is slightly
different with the Multigestational Option. Each fetus has it’s
own display page as shown in Illustration 312.
Illustration 312. Multigestational Data List Menu
OB/GYN 82 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Data Management Center (DMC)
Overview
The LOGIQ 500 is capable of interfacing with a personal
computer (PC). This interface is used to send OB
measurement and calculation data from the LOGIQ 500 to
the PC for display, processing and evaluation.
.
Additionally, the LOGIQ 500 can accept patient data from a
personal computer (PC) and transfer it to the patient entry
menu.
NOTE: Data Management Center transfer function will not

work if the fetus number is greater than one with the
Multigestation Option. An error message will appear:
“Multigestation data transfer is not supported”
DMC data transfer will function normally if the fetus number is

set to one.
Operational Setup
The PC must be connected to Port A or B of the
LOGIQ 500 by an RS-232C interface cable. “Computer”
must be selected for Port A or B on the Set Up/System
Parameters page 5.
The Record 1 or Record 2 keys must be assigned to the

computer selection. The Record 1 and Record 2 presets are
found on Set Up/Systems Parameters page 5.
t
OB/GYN 83
2177611–100 Rev 0
Data Management Center
Operational Setup
Transferring OB Data
Data transfer from the LOGIQ 500 to the DMC computer
(PC) will only occur while operating in the OB Exam category.
The user should input all necessary information into the

Patient Entry Menu. Scan the patient. Measure and
calculate all the desired parameters.
.
Press Record 1 or Record 2, depending on the key
assignment. Communication with the PC will start by displaying
the message: “Communicating with computer now”.
NOTE: Normal system operation is suspended during the

transfer of data.
When all data has been transferred with no errors, the

message “Communication was completed” is displayed.
Refer to the DMC User Manual for processing exam data on

the PC.
OB/GYN 84 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Error Messages
If an anomaly occurs in the communication or transfer of data
between the LOGIQ 500 and the PC, an error message will
be displayed on the LOGIQ 500 screen. Possible error
messages are:
Message Possible Cause

Check Computer. No power. PC power is off. Interface cable broken or
disconnected.
Check Computer. Bad condition. PC is busy. LOGIQ 500 senses the PC
cannot accept data.
Check Computer. Abnormal response. LOGIQ 500 senses an abnormal re-
sponse from the PC.
Check Computer. Checksum Error oc- LOGIQ 500 senses an abnormal ac-
curred. knowledgement from the PC after all data
has been sent.
Check Computer. No response. LOGIQ 500 senses no
acknowledgement from the computer after
all data has been sent.
Can’t send data to Computer in this User is trying to send data to the PC in an
category. exam category other than OB.
System doesn’t have option. The OB calculation option for the
LOGIQ 500 has been turned off.
SYSTEM ERROR: CANNOT A LOGIQ 500 system error has occurred
COMMUNICATE WITH COMPUTER. that will not allow communication with the
computer to begin.
This function is not available. This function is not available in some
situations.
Table 30. Data Management Center Error Messages
t
OB/GYN 85
2177611–100 Rev 0
Error Messages (cont’d)
Hints S Data transfer can only be accomplished in the OB Exam

category.
S Date is always transferred as Year–Month–Day. Time is
transferred as 24 hour time (i.e. 00:00 to 23:59).
S Gestational Age Data is always transferred in weeks and
days.
S The LOGIQ 500 can store three values of the same
measurement. Only the average of selected
measurements will be transferred.
S The system keyboard is locked out during the transfer of
data.
S Only the Record 1 or Record 2 keys can start the data
transfer.
S The following DMC items are not sent by the
LOGIQ 500:
S Serial No.
S DateRep
S TimeRep
S RepPtName
S RefMDID
S History
S
.
FetusPos
S FetusSex.
NOTE: Currently, the transfer of multi-fetus information is not

compatible with the DMC. If it is desired to use the DMC with
multiple fetuses, each fetus should be treated individually by
using a unique Patient ID number for each.
OB/GYN 86 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Patient Data Input

The PC (personal computer) can be used to read patient data
cards and transfer that data to the Patient Entry menu via the
DMC serial port connection.
Preparation
Connect the PC and LOGIQ 500 using an isolated RS232C
cable and serial ports equivalent to the DMC cabling.
Assign “Computer” to the proper LOGIQ 500 serial port in

the Setup/System Parameter Menu page 5.
Display the New Patient Entry Menu on the LOGIQ 500.
Send Data
On the PC, read the hospital ID card with patient data and
transfer that data to the LOGIQ 500. The transfer starts by
displaying the following message on the LOGIQ 500
monitor:
“Communicating with Computer now.”
When the reception is complete with no errors, the the

following message on the LOGIQ 500 monitor:
“Communication was Completed.”
The patient data received is then displayed on the Patient

Entry Menu.
Data Transferred
The data items transferred and accepted by the LOGIQ 500
are:
S Patient Name
S Patient ID Number
S Patient Age
S Patient Sex
S Patient Birthday
t
OB/GYN 87
2177611–100 Rev 0
Error Messages
Refer to Table 30 on OB/GYN 85 for error messages in
patient data transfer.
If the New Patient Entry Menu is not displayed when the PC

tries to send data, the error message:
“Can’t receive data. Return to New Patient Menu.”
is displayed.
Hints If data is omitted, only the items sent by the PC will be

displayed in the Patient Entry Menu.
If both age and birthday are transferred to the LOGIQ 500,

the system will use the birth date to calculate the age.
All LOGIQ 500 keys cannot be used while the data transfer
is in progress.
OB/GYN 88 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
GYN Measurements
B-Mode
Ovarian Length, Height, and Width

The length, height and width of the left and right ovaries can
be measured and recorded on the GYN summary report.
Each measurement is a typical distance measurement made

on a B-Mode image in the appropriate scan plane.
Typically, the height and width are measured on the axial

plane while the length is measured on the sagittal plane.
To measure ovarian length:
Scan the patient’s right or left ovary in the sagittal plane.

"❙A
Lt Ov–L Lt Ov–H Lt Ov–W
Rt Ov–L Rt Ov–H Rt Ov–W GYN

Report
Illustration 314. GYN Calculation Sub-Menu (Ovarian)
t
OB/GYN 89
2177611–100 Rev 0
GYN Measurements
Ovarian Length, Height, and Width (cont’d)
Select Rt Ov-L or Lt Ov-L from the GYN Calculation

Sub-Menu page one. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker

switch, if necessary, to display page one. A “ ” cursor
appears.
start point.

appears.
Use the Trackball to move the end-point cursor to the

. NOTE: If a fine adjustment of the two cursors is desired,

press Measurement to toggle which cursor is active and
adjust with the Trackball.
Press Set to complete the measurement. The cursor and
measured Rt Ov-L or Lt Ov-L value are fixed.
OB/GYN 90 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
GYN Measurements
Ovarian Length, Height, and Width (cont’d)
To measure ovarian height and width:
Scan the patient’s right or left ovary in the axial plane.

"❙A
Select Rt Ov-H, Rt Ov-W, Lt Ov-H or Lt Ov-W from the GYN

Calculation Sub-Menu. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker

switch, if necessary, to display page one. A “ ” cursor
appears.
Follow the distance measurement steps outlined in the

ovarian length measurement.
All right/left length, height or width measurements are

recorded on the GYN Summary Report Page as selected
from the GYN Calculation Sub-Menu prior to measuring.
t
OB/GYN 91
2177611–100 Rev 0
GYN Measurements
Uterine Length, Height, and Width

The GYN Calculation Sub-Menu page two allows for
measurements to be recorded as uterine length (Ut-L), height
(Ut-H) or width (Ut-W).
Once again, length is typically measured in the sagittal plane

while height and width are measured in the axial plane.
Scan the patient in the appropriate scan plane.

"❙A
Ut–L Ut–H Ut–W
Endo GYN
Report
Illustration 315. GYN Calculation Sub-Menu (Uterine)
Select the desired measurement from the GYN Calculation

Sub-Menu page two (Ut-L, Ut-H or Ut-W). Press the
page two.
Follow the distance measurement steps as outlined in

ovarian measurements.
Measurements are recorded on the GYN Summary Report.

The last three measurements of each type can be averaged
by the Summary Report Page.
OB/GYN 92 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
GYN Measurements
Endometrium Thickness
An endometrium thickness measurement is also available on
page two of the GYN Calculation Sub-Menu.
Scan the patient.

"❙A
Ut–L Ut–H Ut–W
Endo GYN
Report
Illustration 316. GYN Calculation Sub-Menu (Endo)
Select ENDO from the GYN Calculation Sub-Menu page two.


display page two. A “ ” cursor appears.
t
OB/GYN 93
2177611–100 Rev 0
GYN Measurements
Endometrium Thickness (cont’d)

start point.

appears.

Press Set to complete the measurement. The measured

value is displayed on the screen and recorded on the GYN
Report Page.
OB/GYN 94 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
GYN Measurements
Doppler Mode
Three GYN related measurements can be taken in Doppler
Mode and recorded on the GYN Summary Report. These
are resistive index measurements for a left ovarian vessel,
uterine vessel and right ovarian vessel.
Resistive index
RI measurements are velocity values measured on the
Doppler Spectrum for vessels in the ovaries and uterus.
They are found on page three of the GYN Calculation
Sub-Menu.
To make GYN Resistive Index measurements:
Scan the patient in B-Mode to locate the desired vessel.
Press PD to enable the pulsed Doppler mode and place the

Doppler cursor in the blood flow of the desired vessel. Press
PD a second time to display a Doppler spectrum.
Obtain a good spectrum display of blood flow velocities within

the vessel and press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"❙A
Select the desired RI measurement from the GYN

Calculation Sub-Menu page three. Press the Sub-Menu
Select rocker switch, if necessary, to display page three.
t
OB/GYN 95
2177611–100 Rev 0
GYN Measurements
Resistive index (cont’d)
Lt Ov– Ut– R Ov– TAMAX

RI RI RI Auto
GYN
Report
Illustration 317. GYN Calculation Sub-Menu (RI)
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the peak point of the
Doppler waveform where it is desired to start the RI
measurement.

appears.

diastolic point of the Doppler waveform.
Press Set to complete the measurement. A calculated value

is displayed and stored in the GYN Summary Report.
Helpful Hints
Hints If there is a series of measurements/calculations that are

measurements/calculations to automatically appear on the
display in the desired order. Refer to Customize 125 for
details on programming an auto sequence.
OB/GYN 96 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
GYN Summary Report
GYN Report Layout
Illustration 318. GYN Report Page
The top portion of the report contains patient information

entered into the Patient Entry Menu.
The middle portion of the report (measurements) shows the

last three measurement values made. <AVG> or <LAST>
indicates that the Average or Latest value will be displayed in
this column. This depends on the preset, Average Activity, in
the Setup/Preset Program menu page 3.
The calculation section shows Doppler measurements and

their average, while the comments area provides two lines of
comment data.
t
OB/GYN 97
2177611–100 Rev 0
GYN Summary Report
GYN Calculation Formulas
Calc Calc Name Input Formula

Mnemonic Measurements
UT-L Uterine Length one distance Ut-L[cm or mm]=d1
UT-H Uterine Height one distance Ut-H[cm or mm]=d1
UT-W Uterine Width one distance Ut-W[cm or mm]=d1
Endo Endometrium one distance Endo[cm or mm]=d1
Thickness
Lt. Ov-L Left Ovarian one distance Lt. Ov-L[cm or mm]=d1
Length
Lt. Ov-H Left Ovarian one distance Lt. Ov-H[cm or mm]=d1
Height
Lt. Ov-W Left Ovarian one distance Lt. Ov-W[cm or mm]=d1
Width
Rt. Ov-L Right Ovarian one distance Rt. Ov-L[cm or mm]=d1
Length
Rt. Ov-H Right Ovarian one distance Rt. Ov-H[cm or mm]=d1
Height
Rt. Ov-W Right Ovarian one distance Rt. Ov-W[cm or mm]=d1
Width
Lt. Ov-RI Left Ovarian two Doppler blood Lt. Ov-RI=
Vessel Resistive flow peak (Vmax–Vmin)/Vmax
Index velocities
Ut-RI Uterine Vessel two Doppler blood Ut-RI= (Vmax–Vmin)/Vmax
Resistive Index flow peak
velocities
Rt. Ov-RI Right Ovarian two Doppler blood Rt. Ov-RI=
Vessel Resistive flow peak (Vmax–Vmin)/Vmax
Index velocities
Table 31. GYN Calculation Formulas
OB/GYN 98 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Vascular
(software option)
Exam Preparation
Measurements
Vascular Summary Report
. If the Vascular software option is not installed, the General

Calculation Menu will appear for that exam category.
This section describes measurements and calculations specific to vascular exams

and the vascular software option. It shows how to make vascular measurements
and the information available on the Vascular Summary Report.
t
Vascular 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Vascular
Vascular 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Exam Preparation
Introduction
measurements is not only determined by the system
accuracy, but also by use of proper medical protocols by the
user. When appropriate, be sure to note any protocols
associated with a particular measurement or calculation.
Formulas and databases used within the system software
that are associated with specific investigators are so noted.
Be sure to refer to the original article describing the
investigator’s recommended clinical procedures.
General Guidelines
Any measurement can be repeated by selecting that
measurement again from the Sub-Menu.
The system will retain as many as eight measurements, but

the summary report retains only the last three measurements
of each type.
The three report page measurements can be averaged and

the average used in other calculations.
t
Vascular 3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Exam Preparation
Vascular 4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Starting an Exam
Always begin an exam by selecting New Patient, which
deletes all old patient information, allowing the new patient
data to be entered.
Outline
Vascular calculations are intended for use to evaluate
peripheral blood vessels such as the carotid artery, femoral
artery, etc.
t
Vascular 5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Vascular calculations
Vascular measurements are available on three Sub-Menu
pages.
The Vascular measurements and calculations that can be

made from the Sub-Menu selections are:
1. RT (LT) ECA : Right (left) exterior carotid artery

velocity
2. RT (LT) CCA : Right (left) common carotid
artery velocity
3. RT (LT) BIFURC : Right (left) carotid artery
bifurcation velocity
4. RT (LT) ICA : Right (left) interior carotid artery
velocity
5. RT (LT) ICA/CCA : Right (left) interior carotid artery
velocity/common carotid artery
velocity ratio
6. TAMAX : Time Averaged Maximum
(velocity)
7. PI : Pulsatility Index
8. A/B Ratios : Velocity ratios
9. RI : Resistivity Index
10. % Steno : Percent Stenosis
11. Heart Rate : Heart rate in BPM
12. S/D Ratios : Systolic velocity/diastolic velocity
ratios
Vascular 6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Carotid Artery Measurements

S The following calculations are done in the Doppler
spectrum.
S When operating in B/PD-Mode, display a Doppler
spectrum and move the cursor to a Doppler spectrum
S Page one of the Vascular Sub-Menu contains
measurements for the patient’s right side. Page two of
the Sub-Menu contains identical left side measurements.
t
Vascular 7
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring ECA, CCA, Bifurc and ICA

To measure the velocity of the blood through the right/left
external carotid artery, common carotid artery, carotid artery
bifurcation or internal carotid artery:
Scan the patient in B-Mode to image the appropriate artery.
Press PD and move the Doppler cursor into the desired

vessel. Press PD again to display B-Mode plus Doppler
spectrum. Scan until the desired Doppler spectrum is
displayed.
"❙A
Page One Page Two

Illustration 319. Vascular Calculation Sub-Menu
Select the appropriate measurement from the Vascular

Calculation Sub-Menu page one or two. Press the
Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if necessary, to display the
appropriate page. The calculation mode is set and a “ ”
cursor with a vertical dotted line appears.
Vascular 8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring ECA, CCA, Bifurc and ICA (cont’d)

Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the desired position
on the Doppler spectrum.
Press Set. The measurement is completed and recorded on

the Vascular Summary Report.
t
Vascular 9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring RT (LT) ICA/CCA

To calculate a velocity ratio between the right (left) interior
carotid artery and common carotid artery:
Display a B-Mode image of the right or left internal carotid

artery.
Press PD and move the Doppler cursor into the desired

vessel. Press PD again to display B-Mode plus Doppler
spectrum. Scan until the desired Doppler spectrum is
displayed.
"❙A
Page One Page Two

Illustration 320. Vascular Calculation Sub-Menus (ICA/CCA)
Select RT ICA/CCA from page one or LT ICA/CCA from

page two of the Vascular Calculation Sub-Menus. Press the
appropriate page.

The ICA/CCA calculation mode is set and a “ ” cursor with a
vertical dotted line appears.
Vascular 10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring RT (LT) ICA/CCA (cont’d)

Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the peak point of the
interior carotid artery Doppler spectrum with which the
ICA/CCA calculation is to be done.
Press Set. The ICA/CCA calculation is set.
Unfreeze the image by pressing Freeze. Image the common

carotid artery and press Freeze again.
"❙A
Press the Measurement key. The CCA measurement can

now be made.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the peak point

(velocity) on the Doppler spectrum of the common carotid
artery.
Press Set. The ICA/CCA calculation is complete and a
.
calculated value be displayed.
NOTE: If ICA and CCA measurements were already made,

the ICA/CCA will be automatically calculated from previous
measurements.
t
Vascular 11
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio or PI

To measure the systolic/diastolic ratio, resistance index,
velocity ratio and pulsatility index:

"❙A
Illustration 321. Vascular Calculation Sub-Menu
Select S/D RATIO, RI, A/B RATIO or PI from the Vascular

Calculation Sub-Menu page three to display this calculation
on the screen. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if

necessary, to display page three. A “ ” cursor appears.
Vascular 12 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio or PI (cont’d)
Doppler waveform. This would be systole for S/D ratio, peak
velocity for RI, “A” velocity for A/B ratio and VMAX for PI.

appears.

S/D ratio, minimum velocity for RI, “B” velocity for A/B ratio
.
and VMIN for PI.

Trackball manually to trace the waveform between VMAX and
VMIN .
If two velocity measurements are made prior to selecting S/D

ratio, A/B ratio or RI, the system automatically calculates S/D
ratio, A/B ratio or RI from the last two velocity measurements
recorded.
.

t
Vascular 13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring Stenosis Ratio (% stenosis)


having a stenosis.

"❙A



Ellipse method
Illustration 322. Vascular Calculation Sub-Menu (% STENO)
Select % STENO from the Vascular Calculations Sub-Menu

necessary, to display page three. The % stenosis

Vascular 14 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements

first.
stenosed region.

cursor appears.

measured.

displayed.
↑
↓
ellipse size.
.
ellipse size.

measurement cursors. Use the Ellipse rocker switch to
adjust the size, if necessary.

appears again.
(continued)
t
Vascular 15
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements

second.
vessel wall.

cursor appears.


is displayed.
↑
↓
ellipse size.
.
Press the bottom of the Ellipse rocker switch to decrease
the ellipse size.


Vascular 16 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Trace method
Select % STENO from the Vascular Calculations Sub-Menu

necessary, to display page three. The % stenosis

stenosed region.


t
Vascular 17
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements

second.
vessel wall.


complete.
Vascular 18 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring Heart Rate (HR)

To calculate the Heart Rate:
Scan the patient.

"❙A
Illustration 323. Vascular Calculation Sub-Menu (HR)
Select HEART RATE from the Vascular Calculation

Sub-Menu page three. The Heart Rate calculation mode is

set and a “ ” cursor appears.
t
Vascular 19
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring Heart Rate (HR) (cont’d)

Doppler spectrum where the Heart Rate measurement is to
start.

cursor appears.

the Doppler waveform, two heartbeats from the start point.
See Illustration 324.
Press Set.
The HR calculation is complete.
X X
Vascular 20 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Time Averaged Maximum Velocity (TAMAX)

To choose the method to measure the time averaged
maximum velocity:
Illustration 325. Vascular Calculation Sub-Menu (TAMAX)
Use the TAMAX, AUTO (Automatic/Manual) Sub-Menu

selection to choose the method by which the TAMAX trace is
made.

is automatically traced between the two velocity points set
If TAMAX Auto is not highlighted, the operator has to

Helpful Hints

t
Vascular 21
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Vascular 22 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
The vascular summary report is structured to automatically
display vascular measurements made at specific anatomical
sites. An average of the three measurements is also
displayed. Calculated ratios are automatically summarized
and displayed.
Displaying the Summary Report

The summary report can be displayed at any time during the
exam by selecting VASC REPORT from the Vascular
Calculation Sub-Menu.
Data entered as new patient data is automatically

summarized at the top of the summary report.
Measurements are summarized below the patient data.
Calculations and ratios appear at the bottom of the summary
report.
To exit the summary report display and resume scanning,

select VASC REPORT from the Sub-Menu to deactivate it.
t
Vascular 23
2177611–100 Rev 0
Displaying the Summary Report (cont’d)
Illustration 326. Vascular Report Page

Vascular 24 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Editing the Summary Report

New patient data cannot be edited. Measurements can be
edited by the operator.
To edit a measurement:
Select VASC REPORT from any page of the Vascular

Calculation Sub-Menu.
Use the Trackball or Return key to move the cursor
to the measurement that is to be edited.
The measurement can be deleted by pressing the
BackSpace or Space bar and then Set.
The average measurements, calculations and ratios
are automatically updated to reflect the edited values.
When editing is complete, select Exit to leave the
summary report and resume imaging.
Printing the Summary Report

The summary report can be saved like any image for
archival. Simply display the summary report on the screen.
The report can then be recorded on video tape, multi-image
camera or page printer.
t
Vascular 25
2177611–100 Rev 0
Vascular Calculation Formulas
Calc Input Formula

Mnemonic Calc Name Measurements
RT ECA Right Exterior Carotid one Doppler blood RT ECA=v1
Artery Velocity flow peak velocity [cm/s or m/s]
RT CCA Right Common Carotid one Doppler blood RT CCA=v1
RT BIFURC Right Carotid Bifurcation one Doppler blood RT BIFURC=v1
Velocity flow peak velocity [cm/s or m/s]
RT ICA Right Interior Carotid one Doppler blood RT ICA=v1
TAMAX Time Averaged Maximum two time marks in a TAMAX=sum{Vt}
Velocity Doppler display from t1 to t2/(t2–t1)
[cm/s or m/s]
RT ICA/CCA Right Interior Carotid Artery two Doppler blood flow RT ICA/
Velocity/Common Carotid peak velocities CCA=VICA/VCCA
Artery Velocity Ratio
LT ECA, Same as above, for Left Same as above Same as above
LT CCA, Carotid Artery
LT BIFURC,
LT ICA,
LT ICA/CCA
A/B Ratio Velocities Ratio two Doppler blood flow A/B=V1/V2
peak velocities
% Stenosis Stenosis Ratio two areas (by % Stenosis=
ellipse, trace, [1–(Aresidual/
circle or distance) Alumen)]x100
S/D Ratio Systolic Velocity/Diasto- two Doppler blood S/D=Vsystolic/
(for GEMS-Am licVelocities Ratio flow peak velocities Vdiastolic
& GEMS-A)
D/S Ratio Diastolic Velocity/Systolic two Doppler blood D/S=Vdiastolic/
(Only for Velocities Ratio flow peak velocities Vsystolic
GEMS-E)
PI Pulsatility Index two Doppler blood PI=(Vmax–Vmin)/TA-
flow peak velocities MAX
and TAMAX
RI Resistivity Index two Doppler blood RI=(Vmax–Vmin)/
flow peak velocities Vmax
HR Heart Rate (beats/minute) one 2 beat time HR[BPM]=120[sec]/
interval (measured 2beat time[sec]
manually or
automatically)
Table 32. Vascular Calculation Formulas
Vascular 26 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Advanced Vascular
(software option)
Overview
The Advanced Vascular software option provides increased
measurement and reporting capabilities for vascular and
venous studies.
Menu Selections
The Advanced Vascular menu selections offer more flexibility
than the Basic Software package.
In the Advanced Menus, the user can select
S left/right side on menu page one.

S three Doppler sites on page three.
S three stenosis sites on page four.
Each Doppler and Stenosis site can be edited (5 characters

maximum) on the Vascular Report pages.
The menus displayed will depend on the preset for

determination of systole/diastole (auto/manual) in the Set Up/
Preset Program page 3 as shown in Illustration 327 and
Illustration 328.
t
Vascular 27
2177611–100 Rev 0
Advanced Vascular
Menu Selections (cont’d)
Select Rt Rt Venous Rt Rt Venous

Side DICAd MICAd Report PICAd ECAd Report
Rt Rt Carotid Rt Rt Carotid
DICAs MICAs Report PICAs ECAs Report
RIGHT
Page One Page Two
Rt Rt Rt Venous Rt ICA Venous

DCCAd MCCAd PCCAd Report /CCAd Report
Rt Rt Rt Carotid Rt Rt Rt ICA Carotid

DCCAs MCCAs PCCAs Report VERT SUBC /CCAs Report
Select Rt S/D Rt A/B TAMAX Select Rt HEART Venous

Location Ratio Ratio AUTO Location %Sten RATE Report
Rt Rt Carotid Carotid
RI PI Report Report
$$$$$ #####
Page Five Page Six

$$$$$ = Doppler Sample Site ##### = Stenosis Site
Illustration 327. Vascular Calculation Sub-Menu Manual Determination Systole/Diasatole
Vascular 28 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Advanced Vascular
Menu Selections (cont’d)
Select Rt Rt Rt Rt Rt Rt Venous
Side DCIA PICA DCCA MCCA VERT SUBC Report
Rt Rt Carotid Rt Rt Carotid
MICA ECA Report PCCA ICA/CCA Report
RIGHT
Page One Page Two
Select Rt S/D Rt A/B TAMAX Select Rt HEART Venous

Location Ratio Ratio AUTO Location %Sten RATE Report
Rt Rt Carotid Carotid
RI PI Report Report
$$$$$ #####

$$$$$ = Doppler Sample Site ##### = Stenosis Site
Illustration 328. Vascular Calculation Sub-Menu Auto Determination Systole/Diastole
t
Vascular 29
2177611–100 Rev 0
Advanced Vascular
Report Page Layout

Unlike the Basic Vascular Option, Advanced Vascular offers
three report pages.
Advanced Vascular Report Page 1

Page one is a summary of the left and right carotid
measurements plus Doppler measurements and % Stenosis
at three different sites.
Illustration 329. Vascular Report Page 1
Provisions are made to annotate the vertebral artery in

diastole as: A = Antegrade, R = Retrograde or B = Biphasic.
The Subclavian Artery can be labelled as: T= Triphasic,
B = Biphasic or M = Monophasic.
Comments can be added in the Vascular diagram area.
Vascular 30 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Advanced Vascular
Advanced Vascular Report Page 1 (cont’d)

To note one of the three choices for Vert and Subc:
Use the Trackball or Arrow keys to place the cursor on top

of the desired letter.
Press Set.
The desired letter will be placed in brackets (i.e. A<R>B or

T B<M>).
The user can freely edit the stenosis location names

(%A1%%) and Doppler site names (%B1%%). A maximum
of five characters can be used for each site name.
t
Vascular 31
2177611–100 Rev 0
Advanced Vascular

Page two is a list for the left and right sides of the last three
calculations with maximum average or latest values for
% stenosis and the three designated Doppler sites.
Illustration 330 shows an example of the layout for page two.
Vascular 32 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Advanced Vascular

Page three is a list of the last three measurements, with the
maximum, average, or latest, for the carotid measurements
taken in systole/diastole on the left and right sides.
Illustration 331 shows an example of the layout for page
three.
On pages two and three, the user can choose to display the
maximum, average or latest value. The preset “Average
Activity: OFF/ON” in the Set Up/Preset Program menu
page 3 controls AVG/LAST.
ON = AVG value
OFF = LAST value
The preset “MAX Velocity (Advanced Vascular) : OFF/ON”
overrides Average Activity.
ON = MAX value
OFF = Average Activity selection
t
Vascular 33
2177611–100 Rev 0
Advanced Vascular
Venous Comments
The Advanced Vascular Option also provides a Venous
Comments page to report observations made during an
exam. Illustration 332 shows the layout of the Venous
Comments page.
Illustration 332. Venous Comment Report Page
Vascular 34 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Advanced Vascular
Abbreviations
Abbreviations found on the Venous Comments page
designate the following:
CFV = Common Femoral Vein

SFV = Superficial Femoral Vein
PROFV = Profunda Femoris Vein
PopV = Popliteal Vein
PTV = Posterior Tibial Vein
PerV = Peroneal Vein
GSAPH = Greater Saphenous Vein
Prefixes found on some abbreviations designate:
P = Proximal
M = Mid
D = Distal
Observations
Observations can be noted for each vein for both the left and
right sides. The first section of observations denotes
compressability (Comp?) of the vein. The user can note if
compression could be accomplished on the vein by
designating one of the following:
Y = Yes
N = No
P = Partial
In the second part, the user can comment on observations

made during the Doppler study. The user can select one or
more of the following designations:
Sp = Spontaneous Indicates the vein is easily

imaged without aids.
Ag = Augmented Velocity signal achieved by
distal limb compression or
release of proximal limb
compression.
Ph = Phasicity Indicates the waxing and
waning of the velocity signal
with respiration.
t
Vascular 35
2177611–100 Rev 0
Advanced Vascular
Observations (cont’d)
Rf = Reflux Indicates reverse or backward
venous flow was observed.
Cn = Continuous Indicates no change in velocity
signal after compression.
Pl = Pulsatility Indicates the vein responds to
the cardiac cycle and not to the
respiratory cycle.
Selecting Abbreviations
In order to select abbreviations on this comment page:
S Move the highlight cursor to the desired abbreviation and

press Set.
S The abbreviation will be enclosed by brackets “< >”.
S To cancel the brackets, move the highlight cursor to the
bracketed abbreviation and press Set.
S The brackets are deleted.
Comments
General Comments can be written at the bottom of each
Vascular Report page. The comments are seperate for each
page. Individual notes can be entered on each one.
Vascular 36 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Advanced Vascular
Vascular Calculation Formulas
Calc Input
Rt DICAd Right Distal Interior one Doppler blood RT DICAd=v1
Carotid Artery Velocity, flow peak velocity [cm/s or m/s]
diastole
Rt DICAs Right Distal Interior one Doppler blood RT DICAs=v1
systole
Rt MICAd Right Mid-Interior Carotid one Doppler blood RT MICAd=v1
Artery Velocity, diastole flow peak velocity [cm/s or m/s]
Rt MICAs Right Mid-Interior Carotid one Doppler blood RT MICAs=v1
Artery Velocity, systole flow peak velocity [cm/s or m/s]
Rt PICAd Right Proximal Interior one Doppler blood RT PICAd=v1
diastole
Rt PICAs Right Proximal Interior one Doppler blood RT PICAs=v1
systole
Rt ECAd Right Exterior Carotid one Doppler blood RT ECAd=v1
Artery Velocity, diastole flow peak velocity [cm/s or m/s]
Rt ECAs Right Exterior Carotid one Doppler blood RT ECAs=v1
Artery Velocity, systole flow peak velocity [cm/s or m/s]
Rt DCCAd Right Distal Common one Doppler blood RT DCCAd=v1
diastole
Rt DCCAs Right Distal Common one Doppler blood RT DCCAs=v1
systole
Rt MCCAd Right Mid-Common one Doppler blood RT MCCAd=v1
diastole
Rt MCCAs Right Mid-Common one Doppler blood RT MCCAs=v1
systole
Rt PCCAd Right Proximal Common one Doppler blood RT PCCAd=v1
diastole
Rt PCCAs Right Proximal Common one Doppler blood RT PCCAs=v1
systole
Table 33. Advanced Vascular Calculation Formulas
t
Vascular 37
2177611–100 Rev 0
Advanced Vascular
Vascular Calculation Formulas (cont’d)
Calc Input
Rt ICA/CCAd Right Interior Carotid Artery two Doppler blood flow RT XICA/XCCA=
Velocity/Common Carotid peak velocities VxICA/VxCCA
Rt ICA/CCAs Artery Velocity Ratio
Rt VERT Right Vertebra Artery one Doppler blood RT VERT=v1
Velocity, systole flow peak velocity [cm/s or m/s]
Rt SUBC Right Subclavian Artery one Doppler blood RT SUBC=v1
Velocity, systole flow peak velocity [cm/s or m/s]
Rt PI Right Pulsatility Index two Doppler blood Rt PI=(Vmax–
flow peak velocities Vmin)/TAMAX
and TAMAX
Rt RI Right Resistivity Index two Doppler blood Rt RI=(Vmax–Vmin)/
flow peak velocities Vmax
Rt S/D Ratio Right Systolic Velocity/ two Doppler blood Rt S/D=Vsystolic/
(for GEMS-Am DiastolicVelocities Ratio flow peak velocities Vdiastolic
& GEMS-A)
Rt D/S Ratio Right Diastolic Velocity/ two Doppler blood Rt D/S=Vdiastolic/
(Only for Systolic Velocities Ratio flow peak velocities Vsystolic
GEMS-E)
Rt A/B Ratio Right side Velocities Ratio two Doppler blood flow Rt A/B=V1/V2
peak velocities
% Stenosis Stenosis Ratio two areas (by % Stenosis=
ellipse, trace, [1–(Aresidual/
circle or distance) Alumen)]x100
HR Heart Rate (beats/minute) one 2 beat time HR[BPM]=2beat
interval (measured time[sec]/120[sec]
manually or
automatically)
TAMAX Time Averaged Maximum two time marks in a TAMAX=sum{Vt}
Velocity Doppler display from t1 to t2/(t2–t1)
[cm/s or m/s]
Same as Same as above, but for Same as above Same as above
above, but for Left Carotid Artery
Left Carotid
Artery
Table 33. Advanced Vascular Calculation Formulas (cont’d)
Vascular 38 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Cardiology
(software option)
Introduction
Basic Measurements
Additional Cardiology Calculations
ECG Option
Advanced Cardiac Calculations Option
. If the Basic or Advanced Cardiology software option is not

installed, the General Calculation Menu will appear for the
Cardiology exam category.
This section describes the left ventricular measurements and calculations available
t
in the LOGIQ 500 basic cardiology package. These LV measurements can be
made by six different methods. ECG Option Menu choices are described as well as
the suggested placement of ECG leads.
The last part of this section describes the operation of the Advanced Cardiac
Calculations (AMCAL) option.
t
Cardiology 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Cardiology
Cardiology 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
Overview
t
The basic cardiac calculation option for the LOGIQ 500
offers limited cardiac measurement and calculation
capabilities. Analysis of the left ventricle can be performed
by six different methods.
S Cubed method
S Teichholz method
S Bullet method
S Modified Simpson’s Rule method
S Single-plane method
S Biplane ellipsoid method
Cardiology should be the chosen exam category. In all

measurements, press Freeze to stop acquisition of the
desired image. Press Measurement to activate the
measurement function.
Selection of the LV measurement method is made from the

initial Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu.
Illustration 333. Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu (LV Measurements)
Once the LV measurement method is chosen, a Sub-Menu

with the necessary measurement selections appears.
t
Cardiology 3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
General Guidelines
Any measurement can be repeated by selecting that
measurement again from the Sub-Menu.
The system retains as many as twenty lines of

measurements, but the summary report retains only the last
three measurements of each type.
The three report page measurements can be averaged and

the average used in other calculations.
.
NOTE: After displaying an LV Summary Report, the

calculation method can be changed by moving the
highlighted cursor to “Change Method” and pressing Set.
The current report will be cleared and a method selection

menu appears. Use the Trackball to select a new LV
.
method and press Set.
After pressing Set the new LV method report is displayed.
NOTE: Once an LV method has been chosen, the system will

prompt the User through a sequence of LV measurements to
perform.
Cardiology 4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
General Guidelines (cont’d)
Illustration 334. Report Page Change Method
t
Cardiology 5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
BSA Calculation Methods

The LOGIQ 500 can calculate BSA (Body Surface Area) by
two different formulas, depending on the method selected in
the Set Up/System Parameter Menu page 2.
Oriental Formula
BSA [m2] = (Height [cm]).03 x (Weight [g])A x 3.207x10–4
A = 0.7285 – 0.0188 x log (Weight [g])
Occidental Formula
.
BSA [m2] = (0.425 x log (Weight [g])+ 0.725 x
log (Height [cm]) + 1.8654) x 10–4
NOTE: 1 inch = 2.54 cm

1 lb = 453.59243 g
g = grams
cm = centimeters
Cardiology 6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Basic Measurements
Cubed and Teichholz Methods

The Cubed and Teichholz Methods consist of B-Mode (2D) or
M-Mode measurements.
Measurements found on the Cubed and Teichholz Methods

Sub-Menus are:
LVIDd : Left ventricular internal diameter, diastole

LVIDs : Left ventricular internal diameter, systole
IVSd : Interventricular septal thickness, diastole
IVSs : Interventricular septal thickness, systole
LVPWd : Left ventricle posterior wall thickness, diastole
LVPWs : Left ventricle posterior wall thickness, systole
Items calculated and found on the Cubed and Teichholz

Methods LV Summary Reports are:
HR : Heart rate
EdV : End diastole volume
EsV : End systole volume
SV : Stroke volume
CO : Cardiac output
EF : Ejection fraction
FS : Fractional shortening
Calculation formulas can be found at the end of this section.
B-Mode M-Mode
Illustration 335. Cubed and Teichholz Methods Measurements
t
Cardiology 7
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring LVID, IVS or LVPW

The following LV measurements for the Cubed and Teichholz
Methods are basic distance measurements. These
measurements are taken from images acquired in diastole
and systole.
To measure LVID, IVS or LVPW:
Scan the patient.
Press Freeze or use the ECG trigger option to stop image

"❙A acquisition in systole or diastole.
Select the Cubed or Teichholz Method from the Cardiac

Calculation LV Sub-Menu.
Press Clear ONLY if it is desired to disable the system’s

cardiac auto-measurement sequence.
Illustration 336. Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu
Select the appropriate measurement from the Cardiac

Calculation Sub-Menu. The distance measurement mode is

Cardiology 8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring LVID, IVS or LVPW (cont’d)

start point.

cursor appears.

point.
Press Set. The appropriate measurement is completed,

displayed and recorded on the report page.
t
Cardiology 9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring Heart Rate (HR)

To measure heart rate, display an M-Mode image with at
least two consecutive heartbeats.
Scan the patient.

"❙A


auto-measurement sequence.
Illustration 337. Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu (HEART RATE)
Select HEART RATE from the Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu.

The HR measurement mode is set and a “ ” cursor appears.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to a point in the

M-Mode image where the HR measurement is to start.
(continued)
Cardiology 10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements

cursor appears.

the mode image two heartbeats from the start point. See
Illustration 338.
Press Set. The HR measurement is complete.
X X
t
Cardiology 11
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Cubed and Teichholz Report Page Displays
Illustration 339. Cubed Report Page Display
Illustration 340. Teichholz Report Page Display
Cardiology 12 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Bullet and Modified Simpson’s Rule Methods

Bullet and Modified Simpson’s Rule Methods consist of
B-Mode (2D) measurements.
Measurements found on the Bullet Method Sub-Menu are:
LVLd : Left ventricular length, diastole

LVLs : Left ventricular length, systole
LVAMd : Left ventricular area mitral valve, diastole
LVAMs : Left ventricular area mitral valve, systole
Measurements found on the Modified Simpson’s Rule

Sub-Menu are:

LVAPd : Left ventricular area papillary muscles, diastole
LVAPs : Left ventricular area papillary muscles, systole
Items calculated and found on the Bullet and Modified

Simpson’s Rule Methods LV Report Pages are:
HR : Heart rate
SV : Stroke volume
CO : Cardiac output
LVAMd LVAMs LVAPd LVAPs

LVLd LVLs
Illustration 341. Bullet and Modified Simpson’s Rule Methods Measurements
t
Cardiology 13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring LVL
The following LV measurements for the Bullet and Modified
Simpson’s Rule Methods are basic distance measurements.
These measurements are taken from images acquired in
diastole and systole.
To measure LVL:
Scan the patient.

Select the Bullet or Modified Simpson’s Rule Method from the

Cardiac Calculation LV Sub-Menu.

cardiac auto-measurement sequence
Bullet Method Modified Simpson’s Rule Method

Illustration 342. Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menus


Cardiology 14 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring LVL (cont’d)

start point.

cursor appears.

point.

t
Cardiology 15
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring LVAM or LVAP

The following LV measurements for the Bullet and Modified
Simpson’s Rule Methods are basic circumference area
.
measurements that can be performed by either the ellipse or
trace method. These measurements are taken from images
acquired in diastole and systole.
NOTE: The default method (ellipse or trace) is designated in

the Set Up/Preset program menu page 3.

Ellipse method
Scan the patient.




Calculation Sub-Menu. The area measurement mode is set

and a “ ” cursor appears.
Cardiology 16 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements

start point of the major axis.

cursor appears.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the other end of the
major axis of the region to be measured.

displayed.
↑
↓ Press the top of the Ellipse rocker switch to increase the
ellipse size.
.
ellipse size.

Press Set. The appropriate measurement is computed,

t
Cardiology 17
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Trace method
Scan the patient.




and a circle cursor appears.

start point.


Use the Trackball to trace the region to be measured.
Press Set. The trace start and end points are connected to
each other and the measured value computed, displayed and
Cardiology 18 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements



Scan the patient.

"❙A



(continued)
t
Cardiology 19
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements

cursor appears.

Illustration 345.
X X
Cardiology 20 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Bullet and Modified Simpson’s Rule Report Page Displays
Illustration 346. Bullet Report Page Display
Illustration 347. Modified Simpson’s Rule Report Page Display
t
Cardiology 21
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Single and Bi Plane Ellipsoid Methods

Single and Bi Plane Ellipsoid Methods consist of B-Mode
(2D) measurements.
Measurements found on the Single Plane Ellipsoid Method

Sub-Menu are:

LVAd : Left ventricular area, diastole
LVAs : Left ventricular area, systole
Measurements found on the Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method

Sub-Menu are:
LVMLd : Left ventricular medial-lateral dimension, diastole

LVMLs : Left ventricular medial-lateral dimension, systole
LVAd : Left ventricular area, diastole
LVAs : Left ventricular area, systole
Items calculated and found on the Single and Bi Plane

Ellipsoid Methods LV Report Page are:
HR : Heart Rate
SV : Stroke volume
CO : Cardiac output
LVLd LVLs LVMLd LVMLs LVAd LVAs LVAMd LVAMs
Illustration 348. Single and Bi Plane Ellipsoid Methods Measurements
Cardiology 22 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring LVL or LVML

The following LV measurements for the Single and Bi Plane
Ellipsoid Methods are basic distance measurements. These
measurements are taken from images acquired in diastole
and systole.
To measure LVL or LVML:
Scan the patient.

Select the Single or Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method from the


cardiac auto-measurement sequence
Single Plane Ellipsoid Method Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method




start point.
(continued)
t
Cardiology 23
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring LVL or LVML (cont’d)

cursor appears.

point.

Cardiology 24 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring LVA or LVAM

The following LV measurements for the Single and Bi Plane
Ellipsoid Methods are basic circumference area
.
measurements that can be performed by either the ellipse or
trace method. These measurements are taken from images
acquired in diastole and systole.
NOTE: The default method (ellipse or trace) is designated in

the Set Up/Preset program menu page 3.

Ellipse method
Scan the patient.





and a “ ” cursor appears.
t
Cardiology 25
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements

start point of the major axis.

cursor appears.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the other end of the
major axis of the region to be measured.

displayed.
↑
↓ Press the top of the Ellipse rocker switch to increase the
ellipse size.
.
ellipse size.

Press Set. The appropriate measurement is computed,

Cardiology 26 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Trace method
Scan the patient.




and a circle cursor appears.

start point.


Use the Trackball to trace the region to be measured.
Press Set. The trace start and end points are connected to
each other and the measured value computed, displayed and
t
Cardiology 27
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements

Scan the patient.

"❙A





(continued)
Cardiology 28 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Measuring heart rate (HR) (cont’d)

cursor appears.

Illustration 352.
X X
t
Cardiology 29
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
Single and Bi Plane Ellipsoid Report Page Displays
Illustration 353. Single Plane Ellipsoid Report Page Display
Illustration 354. Bi Plane Ellipsoid Report Page Display
Cardiology 30 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
LV Calculation Formulas (Cubed Method)
Input
LVIDd Left Ventricular one distance LVIDd=d1[cm or mm]
Internal Diameter,
Diastole
LVIDs Left Ventricular one distance LVIDs=d1[cm or mm]
Internal Diameter,
Systole
IVSd Interventricular one distance IVSd=d1[cm or mm]
Septal Thickness,
Diastole
IVSs Interventricular one distance IVSs=d1[cm or mm]
Septal Thickness,
Systole
LVPWd Left Ventricle one distance LVPWd=d1[cm or
Posterior Wall mm]
Thickness, Diastole
LVPWs Left Ventricle one distance LVPWs=d1[cm or
Posterior Wall Thick- mm]
ness, Systole
EdV End Diastole Volume one distance EdV[ml]=LVIDd^3
EsV End Systole Volume one distance EsV[ml]=LVIDs^3
SV Stroke Volume two distance SV[ml]=EdV–EsV
CO Cardiac Output two distances and CO[1/min]=
one 2 beat time in- SVxHR/1000
terval
EF Ejection Fraction two distances EF=SV/EdVx100
FS Fractional Shorten- two distances FS=(1–LVIDs/
ing LVIDd)x100
HR Heart Rate (beats/ one 2 beat time in- HR[BPM]=/120
minute) terval [sec]/2 beat time
[sec]
PHT Pressure Half Time one time interval PHT=t1[ms orsec]
MVA Mitral Valve Area one pressure half MVA[cm^2]=
time interval 220/PHT
ET Ejection Time one time interval ET=t1[ms or sec]
Table 34. Cubed Method Formulas
t
Cardiology 31
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
LV Calculation Formulas (Teichholz Method)
Input
Internal Diameter,
Diastole
Internal Diameter,
Systole
IVSd Interventricular Sep- one distance IVSd=d1[cm or mm]
tal Thickness, Dias-
tole
IVSs Interventricular Sep- one distance IVSs=d1[cm or mm]
tal Thickness, Sys-
tole
Posterior Wall mm]
Thickness, Diastole
Posterior Wall Thick- mm]
ness, Systole
EdV End Diastole one distance EdV[ml]=LVIDd^3x7/
Volume (2.4+LVIDd)
EsV End Systole one distance EsV[ml]=LVIDs^3x7/(
Volume 2.4+LVIDs)
SV Stroke Volume two distances SV[ml]=EdV–EsV
one 2 beat time SVxHR/1000
interval
ing LVIDd)x100
HR Heart Rate (beats/ one 2 beat time HR=120[sec]/
minute) interval 2 beat time[sec]
Table 35. Teichholz Method Formulas
Cardiology 32 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
LV Calculation Formulas (Bullet Method)
Input
LVLd Left Ventricular one distance LVLd=d1[cm or mm]
Length, Diastole
LVLs Left Ventricular one distance LVLs=d1[cm or mm]
Length, Systole
LVAMd Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAMd=a1[cm ^2]
Mitral Valve, Diastole trace or circle)
LVAMs Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAMs=a1[cm ^2]
Mitral Valve, trace or circle)
Systole
EdV End Diastole Volume one distance and EdV[ml]=5xLVLd
one area (by ellipse, xLVAMd/6
trace or circle)
EsV End Systole Volume one distance and EsV[ml]=5xLVLs
one area (by ellipse, xLVAMs/6
trace or circle)
SV Stroke Volume two distances and SV[ml]=EdV–EsV
two areas (by ellipse,
trace or circle)
two areas (by ellipse, SVxHR/1000
trace or circle) and
one 2 beat time
interval
EF Ejection Fraction two distances and EF=SV/EdVx100
trace or circle)
HR Heart Rate (beats/ one 2 beat time HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/
minute) interval 2 beat time [sec]
Table 36. Bullet Method Formulas
t
Cardiology 33
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
LV Calculation Formulas (Modified Simpson’s Rule Method)
Input
Length, Diastole
Length, Systole
Mitral Valve, Systole trace or circle)
LVAPd Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAPd=a1[cm ^2]
Papillary Muscles, trace or circle)
Diastole
LVAPs Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAPs=a1[cm ^2]
Systole
EdV End Diastole Volume one distance and EdV[ml]=LVLd/3
two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAMd+(LVAMd+
trace or circle) LVAPd)/2+ LVAPd/3)
EsV End Systole Volume one distance and EsV[ml]=LVLs/3
two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAMs+(LVAMs+
trace or circle) LVAPs)/2+ LVAPs/3)
four areas (by
ellipse, trace or
circle)
four areas (by SVxHR/1000
ellipse, trace or
circle) and one 2
beat time interval
four areas (by ellipse
or trace or circle)
HR Heart Rate (beats/ one 2 beat time HR=120[sec]/
Table 37. Modified Simpson’s Rule Method Formulas
Cardiology 34 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
LV Calculation Formulas (Single Plane Ellipsoid Method)
Input
Length, Diastole
Length, Systole
LVAd Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAd=a1[cm ^2]
Diastole trace or circle)
LVAs Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAs=a1[cm ^2]
Systole trace or circle)
EdV End Diastole Volume one distance and EdV[ml]=8/(3 p)
two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAd)^2/LVLd
trace or circle)
EsV End Systole Volume one distance and EsV[ml]=8/(3 p)
two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAs)^2/LVLs
trace or circle)
four areas (by
ellipse, trace or
circle)
ellipse, trace or
circle) and one 2
beat time interval
four areas (by
ellipse, trace or
circle)
Table 38. Single Plane Ellipsoid Method Formulas
t
Cardiology 35
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurements
LV Calculation Formulas (Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method)
Input
LVMLd Left Ventricle Medial- one distance LVMLd=d1[cm or
Lateral Dimension, mm]
Diastole
LVMLs Left Ventricle Medial- one distance LVMLs=d1[cm or
Systole
LVAd Left Ventricle Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAd=a1[cm ^2]
LVAs Left Ventricle Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAs=a1[cm ^2]
two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAdxLVAMd)/
trace or circle) LVMLd
two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAsxLVAMs)/
trace or circle) LVMLs
four areas (by ellipse,
trace or circle)
ellipse, trace or
circle) and one 2
beat time interval
four areas (by
ellipse, trace or
circle)
Table 39. Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method Formulas
Cardiology 36 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
In addition to the LV calculations found on page one of the

Cardiology Calculations Sub-Menu, measurements are
available on pages 2, 3, and 4 of the Sub-Menu. The three
choices on page 2 are Volume, Angle and % Stenosis. The
three choices on page 3 are PHT (Pressure Half Time), MVA
(Mitral Value Area) and ET (Ejection Time). Page 4 choices
are S/D Ratio, PI (Pulsitility Index), A/B Ratio, RI (Resistivity
Index), Heart Rate, and TAMAX Auto. LV Report appears on
all sub-menu pages.
Volume
"❙A
Illustration 355. Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu (Volume)
Select VOLUME from the Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu

page two. Use the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if
necessary, to display page two.
The volume calculation can be made from one, two or three

distances, from one distance and an ellipse, from a single
ellipse or from two ellipse measurements.
General Measurements and Calculations details how to make

distance and ellipse measurements.
t
Cardiology 37
2177611–100 Rev 0
.
Volume
IMPORTANT NOTE: When a volume calculation is desired, the
necessary measurements or combination of measurements
must be made BEFORE selecting volume in the sub-menu.
Examples
When a volume calculation is desired:
1. Make one distance measurement.

Select VOLUME from the Cardiac Calculation
Sub-Menu.
A volume will be calculated using the single distance
formula.
–OR–
2. Make two distance measurements.
Sub-Menu.
formula.
–OR–
3. If one ellipse is measured, the formula for a single
ellipse will be used to calculate volume.
Sub-Menu.
formula.
.
–OR–
4. Make three distance measurements.
NOTE: This should be done in the dual format mode (side by
side images). One measurement is usually made in the
sagittal plane and two measurements in the axial plane.
Sub-Menu.
formula.
–OR–
Cardiology 38 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Examples (cont’d)
5. If one distance and an ellipse are measured, the
formula for distance/ellipse is used to calculate
volume.
Sub-Menu.
formula.
–OR–
6. If two ellipsoids are measured, the formula for two
ellipsoids is used to calculate volume.
Sub-Menu.
formula.
Formulas used in calculations are found in this section.
Hints S Volumes are most accurate when measurements are

taken in the sagittal and axial scan planes.
S Use the side by side dual format option to display sagittal
and axial plane images simultaneously.
S Make all necessary measurements before selecting
volume.
S See General Measurements and Calculations for details
on the steps to take when doing basic distance and
ellipse measurements.
S An overflow error message (OOR) will occur during a two
ellipse, or one ellipse/one distance volume calculation if:
the minor (small) axis of the large ellipse is equal to/less
than the major (large) axis of the small ellipse (d1), or
equal to/less than the single distance measurement (d2).
d1 d2
Illustration 356. Volume Calculation Error Possibilities
t
Cardiology 39
2177611–100 Rev 0
Volume Calculation Formulas
Input
Vol Volume (spherical) one distance Vol[ml]=(p/6)xd^3
Vol Volume (prolate two distances, Vol[ml]=
spheroidal) d1>d2 (p/6)xd1xd2^2
Vol Volume (prolate one ellipse, d1 major Vol[ml]=
spheroidal) axis, d2 minor axis (p/6)xd1xd2^2
Vol Volume (spheroidal) three distances Vol[ml]=
(p/6)xd1xd2xd3
Vol Volume (spheroidal) one distance d1, one Vol[ml]=
ellipse, d2 major (p/6)xd1xd2xd3
axis, d3 minor axis
Vol Volume (spheroidal) two ellipse, ellipse 1 Vol[ml]=
with axes d1 and d2, (p/6)xd1xd2xd4
ellipse 2 with axes (d3 is not used,

d3 and d4, with assuming it is close
|d2–d3| |d1–d4| to d2)
and d2>d3
Table 40. Volume Calculation Formulas
Illustration 357. Volume Calculation Examples
Cardiology 40 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Angle
This function is intended to measure the angle between two
intersecting planes.
Press Freeze to acquire a cross sectional view of a vessel.

"❙A
Illustration 358. Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu (ANGLE)
Select ANGLE from the Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu page

two. The Angle Calculation Mode is set and a dashed line
cursor appears. The displayed angle is zero degrees.
Use the Trackball to position the line cursor and the Zoom
Size/Rotation control to adjust the angle of the line cursor.
Press Set to fix the position of the first cursor.
(continued)
t
Cardiology 41
2177611–100 Rev 0
Angle (cont’d)
Use the Trackball to position the second line cursor and the
Zoom Size/Rotation control to adjust the angle of the
second line cursor. The angle between the two cursors is
constantly updated on the display.
If a fine adjustment of the two cursors is needed, press

Measurement to toggle which line cursor is active. Adjust
the active cursor with the Trackball and Zoom Size/Rotation
control.
Press Set to complete the angle measurement.
Cardiology 42 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring the % stenosis (stenosis ratio)


having a stenosis.

"❙A



Ellipse method
Illustration 359. Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu (% STENO)
Select % STENO from the Cardiac Calculations Sub-Menu

necessary, to display page two. The % stenosis

t
Cardiology 43
2177611–100 Rev 0

first.
stenosed region.

cursor appears.

measured.

displayed.
↑
↓
ellipse size.
.
ellipse size.


appears again.
(continued)
Cardiology 44 t
2177611–100 Rev 0

second.
vessel wall.

cursor appears.


is displayed.
↑
↓
ellipse size.
.
ellipse size.


t
Cardiology 45
2177611–100 Rev 0
Trace method
Select % STENO from the Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu
necessary, to display page two. The % stenosis

stenosed region.


and is fixed. An end-point “ ” cursor appears.
Cardiology 46 t
2177611–100 Rev 0

second.
vessel wall.


and is fixed. An end-point “ ” cursor appears.
complete.
t
Cardiology 47
2177611–100 Rev 0
PHT (Pressure Half Time)

A PHT measurement is used to calculate Mitral Valve Area
(MVA). The measurement is taken on the Doppler spectral
display of the mitral valve.
Illustration 360. PHT Measurement on Mitral Valve Waveform
Scan the patient to display a Doppler spectrum of the mitral

valve.

"❙A
Select PHT from of the Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu page

three. Use the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if necessary,
to display page three.
Illustration 361. Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu (PHT)
Cardiology 48 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
PHT (Pressure Half Time) (cont’d)

Use the Trackball to move the first cursor with a horizontal
line to the peak of the mitral valve waveform.
Press Set to fix the first cursor and enable the second.
Use the Trackball to move the second cursor with a

horizontal line to a point halfway down the mitral valve
waveform slope.
Press Measurement to toggle between activation of the two

cursors for fine adjustments.
Press Set to complete the PHT measurement.
MVA (Mitral Valve Area)

A Mitral Valve Area is calculated from the pressure half time
measurement. If PHT was selected, MVA is also calculated.
If MVA is selected, PHT must be measured in order to
calculate MVA.
t
Cardiology 49
2177611–100 Rev 0
ET (Ejection Time)
Ejection time for the left ventricle is the time during which the
aortic valve is open. It is measured on a Doppler Spectrum
display. The time between the two cursors is ejection time (ET).
Illustration 362. Ejection Time for Aortic Valve
With cardiology selected as the exam category, press the

Measurement key.
Select ET from of the Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu page

three. Use the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if necessary,
to display page three.
Illustration 363. Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu (ET)
Cardiology 50 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
ET (Ejection Time) (cont’d)

Use the Trackball to move the first cursor with a horizontal
line at the opening of the aortic valve.
Press Set to fix the first cursor and enable the second.
Use the Trackball to move the second cursor with a

horizontal line at the closing of the aortic valve.
Press Measurement to toggle between activation of the two

cursors for fine adjustments.
Press Set to complete the ET measurement.
t
Cardiology 51
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring the Max PG

To measure MAX PG (Maximum Pressure Gradient):

"❙A
Illustration 364. Cardiac Calculations Sub-Menu (MAX PG)
Select MAX PG from the Cardiac Calculations Sub-Menu

necessary, to display page three. A horizontal line cursor
appears.
Cardiology 52 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring the Max PG (cont’d)

Use the Trackball to place the cursor at a peak in the
Doppler spectrum waveform.
Press Set to fix the first cursor. A second cursor appears

and VMAX is displayed.
Use the Trackball to place the second cursor at the lowest

level in the measured Doppler waveform.
Press Set to fix the second cursor. VMIN is displayed. MAX

PG is calculated and displayed.
Automatic Calculation of Max PG

Doppler Mode, MAX PG is calculated from the VMAX and
VMIN measurements taken for TAMAX when MAX PG is first
selected in the Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu.
t
Cardiology 53
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring the Mean PG

To measure MEAN PG (Mean Pressure Gradient):

"❙A
Illustration 365. Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu (MEAN PG)
Select MEAN PG from the Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu

necessary, to display page three. A horizontal line cursor
Cardiology 54 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measuring the Mean PG (cont’d)

Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the waveform trace
start point.
If TAMAX AUTO is enabled, a second cursor appears. Use

the Trackball to move this cursor to the measurement end
point.

Doppler waveform.
Automatic Calculation of Mean PG

Doppler Mode, Mean PG is calculated from the TAMAX value
when Mean PG is first selected in the Cardiac Calculation
Sub-Menu.
The waveform is automatically traced. TAMAX and Mean PG

are also displayed on the screen.
t
Cardiology 55
2177611–100 Rev 0
S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio, PI

Scan the patient in B Plus Doppler Mode.

"❙A
LV
Illustration 366. Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu Page 4
S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio and PI are accessible from the
Cardiac Calculation Sub-Menu page four. Use the
page four.
S/D Ratio, PI, A/B Ratio and RI are the same procedures as
outlined in the Vascular Calculation Sub-Menu. Refer
to Vascular 12.
Heart Rate and TAMAX Auto

With cardiology selected as the exam category, press
Measurement.
Heart Rate and TAMAX Auto are accessible from the Cardiac
Calculation Sub-Menu page four (Illustration 366). Use the
page four.
Heart Rate and TAMAX Auto are the same as those outlined
in the Vascular Calculation Sub-Menu. Refer to Vascular 19
and Vascular 21, respectively.
Cardiology 56 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
ECG Option
Overview
A physiological input panel is available for the LOGIQ 500.
This panel has inputs for ECG, physiological and auxiliary
signals.
The ECG Soft-Menu controls the signals connected to the

Physiological panel.
Approved accessory cables provide the proper signals to the

Physiological Panel.
ECG
PCG
Aux
.
Illustration 367. Optional Physiological Input Panel
t
NOTE: The LOGIQ 500 can calculate heart rate in BPM
from the ECG waveform. See Set Up/Custom Display
page 16 to turn ECG Heart Rate Display on or off.
WARNING Do not use with defibrillator.
t
Cardiology 57
2177611–100 Rev 0
ECG Option
Physio Sweep Speed

The sweep speed of the physio signal on the B-Mode image
can be set independent of the timeline (M-Mode and Doppler)
sweep speed.
This is accomplished using the preset parameter “Physio

Sweep Speed on B”. It is found on Set Up/Custom Display
page 3.
ECG Sub-Menu
The three pages of the ECG Sub-Menus provide for control
of the physiological input signals. In each case, select the
proper sub-menu page by pressing the Sub-Menu Select
rocker switch.
Cardiology 58 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
ECG Option
ECG Lead Placement

The three patient ECG leads are color coded white, black
and green.
White is connected to the patient’s right arm, black to the left

arm, and green (ground) to the right foot (often placed on the
right side of the abdomen). The right arm connection may
change if the patient is in the decubitus position. Refer to
Illustration 369.
WHITE
BLACK
GREEN
Patient in Patient in
Prone Position Decubitus Position
Illustration 369. Common ECG Lead Placement
Once the leads are connected to the patient and the

LOGIQ 500, the ECG waveform amplifier needs about
10 seconds to stabilize the waveform on the CRT before
adjustments are made.
t
Cardiology 59
2177611–100 Rev 0
ECG Option
Single
Description
Single updates the B-Mode image at the R1 time. Each time
the R1 point is reached on the ECG, PCG, or AUX
Waveform, the B-Mode image changes. In between R1
trigger points, the B-Mode image is frozen. The display
shows the delay value as S1.
Illustration 370. ECG Sub-Menu (Single)
Accessing/Changing
Select Single from the ECG Sub-Menu page one. Press the
page one.
.
Each press of the Single rocker switch turns the single
trigger function on or off.
NOTE: The Trackball can be used to change the value of the

active delay.
Benefits
Allows for the acquisition of an image at a specific point in the
Cardiac Cycle.
Values
If Single is highlighted, the one-trigger function is on.
If Single is not highlighted, the function is off.

If Dual was highlighted when single is pressed, the Dual
function is turned off and the Single function turned on.
Cardiology 60 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
ECG Option
Dual
Description
Dual updates the B-Mode image at the R1 and R2 times.
.
Each time the R1 and R2 points are reached on the ECG,
PCG, or Aux waveform, the B-Mode image changes. In
between each trigger time, the B-Mode image is frozen.
NOTE: R2 on the ECG will be marked with a vertical dotted

line. The display shows the delays as S1 and S2.
Illustration 371. ECG Sub-Menu (Dual)
Accessing/Changing
Select Dual from the ECG Sub-Menu page one. Press the
.
page one.
Each press turns the Dual function on or off.
NOTE: The Trackball can be used to change the value of the

active delay.
Benefits
Allows for the acquisition of an image at two points in the
Cardiac Cycle.
Values
If Dual is highlighted, the two-trigger function is on. If Dual is
not highlighted, the two-trigger function is off.

If Single is highlighted when Dual is pressed, the single
function is turned off and the Dual function turned on.
t
Cardiology 61
2177611–100 Rev 0
ECG Option
Sync Selectn
Description
In the Single trigger mode, Sync Selection allows for the
choice of triggering on R1 or R2.
In the Dual trigger mode, Sync Selection toggles trackball

control of the S1 or S2 delays displayed in the upper left
corner of the monitor.
Illustration 372. ECG Sub-Menu (Sync Selection)
Accessing/Changing
Select Sync Selectn from the ECG Sub-Menu page one.
display page one.
Each press of the Sync Selectn rocker switch affects the

Sync as described above.
Benefits
Provides trackball control of delay and selection of update
trigger point.
Values
R1 or R2 trigger select or variable delay adjustment.

Changes trigger point in Single Trigger Mode. Changes
Trackball control of delays in Dual Mode.
Cardiology 62 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
ECG Option
Ref Scan (Reference Scan)
Description
Reference Scan provides the ability to display both an active
and trigger updated image simultaneously in the Dual
B-Mode display format. Reference Scan functions in the
Single trigger Mode only. A real-time image can not be
obtained in Dual Trigger Mode.
Illustration 373. ECG Sub-Menu (Ref Scan)
Accessing/Changing
Select Ref Scan from the ECG Sub-Menu page one. Press
page one.
Each press of the Ref Scan rocker switch turns Ref Scan on
or off if proper conditions exist.
In dual image mode, press Left to display a trigger updated

image on the left and active image on the right.
Press Right to display a trigger updated image on the right

and active image on the left.
t
Cardiology 63
2177611–100 Rev 0
ECG Option
Benefits
Provides the ability to view the real-time image while
simultaneously acquiring images at a trigger point on the
ECG, PCG or Aux waveform.
These images are best recorded on video tape.
Values
The Reference Scan function is on when the Sub-Menu is
highlighted.
.
The function is off when the Sub-Menu selection is not
highlighted.
NOTE: The real-time image will only update at each trigger

point. The image is paused between the trigger points.
Cardiology 64 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
ECG Option
R Delay
Description
R Delay assigns Trackball Control to the adjustment of the
trigger delays for R1(S1) or R2 (S2). The graphic display of
the delay is found in the upper left corner of the monitor.
Illustration 374 ECG Sub-Menu (R Delay)
Accessing/Changing
Select R Delay from the ECG Sub-Menu page one. Press
page one.
Each press of the R Delay rocker switch turns R Delay on or

off.
Benefits
Allows for the easy adjustment of the R1 (S1) or R2 (S2)
delays while scanning.
Values
When R Delay is highlighted, the Trackball controls the
adjustment of the delays.
.
If R Delay is not highlighted, the delays cannot be adjusted
with the Trackball.
NOTE: R Delay is automatically activated when SINGLE or

DUAL trigger modes are selected.
t
Cardiology 65
2177611–100 Rev 0
ECG Option
ECG Wave, PCG Wave, Aux Wave
Description
These three menu selections provide the ability to turn each
waveform on for display on the monitor.
Illustration 375. ECG Sub-Menu (ECG Wave, PCG Wave, Aux Wave)
Accessing/Changing
Select the appropriate waveform (ECG Wave, PCG Wave or
Aux Wave) from the ECG Sub Menu page one. Press the
page one.
Press the appropriate rocker switch to activate or deactivate

the waveform display.
Benefits
Allows for the choice to display a waveform.
Values
On or Off.
Cardiology 66 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
ECG Option
ECG Gain, PCG Gain, Aux Gain
Description
Allows for the amplitude control of the ECG, PCG or Aux
waveform.
Page Two Page Three
Illustration 376. ECG Sub-Menu (ECG Gain, PCG Gain, Aux Gain)
Accessing/Changing
Select the gain selection (ECG Gain, PCG Gain or Aux Gain)
from the ECG Sub-Menu page two or three. Press the
appropriate page.
Press the top of the appropriate rocker switch to increase

gain. Press the bottom of the appropriate rocker switch to
decrease gain.
Benefits
Allows for amplitude adjustment to compensate for different
levels of ECG, PCG or Aux output.
Values
.
The PCG & AUX gain can be adjusted from –10 to +10 in
2-digit increments. EGC gain can be adjusted from –20 to
+10 in 2-digit increments.
NOTE: ECG, PCG and Aux default gain setting can be

changed in the Set Up Custom Display menu page 16.
t
Cardiology 67
2177611–100 Rev 0
ECG Option
ECG Positn, PCG Positn, Aux Positn (Position)
Description
Allows for the vertical positioning of the ECG, PCG or Aux
waveform on the image display.
Page Two Page Three
Illustration 377. ECG Sub-Menu (ECG Positn, PCG Positn, Aux Positn)
Accessing/Changing
Select the positn selection (ECG Positn, PCG Positn, Aux
Positn) from the ECG Sub-Menu page two or three. Press
the appropriate page.
Press the top of the appropriate rocker switch to move the

waveform position up. Press the bottom of the appropriate
rocker switch to move the waveform position down.
Benefits
Allows for positioning of the ECG, PCG or Aux waveform to
minimize impact on the scan image. Adjustable to user
requirements.
.
Values
Changes display position of the waveform.
NOTE: ECG, PCG and Aux default position can be changed

in the Set Up Custom Display menu page 16.
Cardiology 68 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
ECG Option
ECG/Cine Gauge/Image Tracking

When an ECG waveform is displayed with the cine gauge, an
arrow pointer will appear above the ECG waveform.
As the cine gauge marker is moved with the Cine Scroll

control, the arrow above the ECG waveform will move to
indicate where on the ECG cycle the displayed image was
taken.
t
Cardiology 69
2177611–100 Rev 0
ECG Option
Cardiology 70 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Advanced Cardiac Calculations
(AMCAL option)
Overview
This option to the LOGIQ 500 provides expanded
measurement, calculation and report capabilities to the
Left-Ventricular calculations found in the basic cardiac option
package.
Added to the basic package is the Gibson method of LV

calculations. A page of measurements is also added to the
cardiac calculation menu. This page varies with scan mode.
The scan mode measurement categories are:
B-Mode Parasternal Long Axis (PLAX), Parasternal

Short Axis (PSAX) Aortic Valve, PSAX Mitral
Valve, PSAX Papillary Muscles, Apical 4
chamber, Apical 2 chamber
M-Mode Left/Right Ventricles, Mitral Valve, Aortic Valve,

Pulmonic Valve, Tricuspid Valve
D-Mode Mitral Valve, Aortic Valve, Pulmonic Valve,

Tricuspid Valve
The number and type of measurements vary for each

calculation. The formulas used are shown in the calculation
specification tables in this chapter.
t
Cardiology 71
2177611–100 Rev 0
Measurement Sequences
Each of the titles found in the first layer of the cardiac menu
consists of a sequence of measurements. The second layer
Sub-Menu consists of individual measurements/calculations
that can be performed in sequence or individually.
If the measurements are performed in sequence, the display

automatically returns to the first layer menu when all are
complete.
If the second layer Sub-Menu measurements are performed

individually, only those items measured are recorded on the
report page.
Sequence Philosophy
The primary philosophy of the cardiac calculation package is
for the user to select an item from the first menu layer. The
system then prompts the user to perform a series of
measurements in sequence. This measurement sequence
can be modified by the user if the factory sequence is not
satisfactory.
This operation should not be confused with the Auto

Sequence top menu selection. Items programmed into an
auto sequence can consist of first layer sequences as well as
individual measurements. Together these form a sequence
of measurements and calculations that may be performed
automatically.
Hints If a measurement in a sequence has already been made, it

may be skipped. The system will invoke the next
Pressing the top of the Ellipse rocker switch skips a

Pressing the bottom of the Ellipse rocker switch moves back

to measurements previously skipped.
Press the Clear key to quit a sequence at any time. The final
calculation result can not be obtained.
Cardiology 72 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Re-measurement
Overview
Values obtained during Advanced Cardiac calculations or
after a calculation sequence has been completed can be
re-measured as long as those measurement results remain
However, once the measured values are deleted from the

display by the CLEAR function or by scrolling off the top of
the measurement display area, re-measurement is not
possible.
Operation Method
1. Complete the calculation or calculation sequence.
2. Measurements and resultant calculations will be
displayed in the designation area. Only those
measurements displayed are available for
re-measurement.
3. Press the Measurement key and the top of the
Ellipse rocker switch. The first measurement
available to be re-measured will be highlighted and
the name is duplicated at the bottom of the
measurement display area.
4. Use the Ellipse rocker switch to select the desired
value to re-measure.
Calculations and generic measurements are not
available to be re-measured and will be skipped in the
selection process.
t
Cardiology 73
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operation Method (cont’d)

5. Perform the necessary measurement steps for the
selected value using the Trackball and Set key.
When the Set key is pressed to complete the
re-measurement:
S The resultant value of the selected item and all
related calculations will be recalculated and
S The new result will be entered on the report page.
S The old measurement is deleted from the screen
and report page as it is replaced by the new value.
If additional re-measurements need to be performed, repeat
the previous steps.
Hints Each value of an M-Mode continuous sequence can be

remeasured separately.
If a measurement is selected from the soft-menu during the

re-measure process, the re-measurement process is
cancelled and the old value is restored.
After a re-measurement is complete (fixed), the old graphic is

erased and the same cursor symbols are used for the
remeasured value.
If two or more identical measurement items are displayed in

the calculation result area, only the last one supports
re-measurement.
The re-measurement of Heart Rate is always manual, even

though Auto Heart Rate is selected as a preset.
There is no automatic compare function for Systole/Diastole.
It is not possible to do re-measurements on VCR playback

values in Image Memory.
Re-measurement is not possible during a calculation

sequence. Only after the sequence is compiled.
Once cleared or erased, measurements cannot be recalled

for re-measurement.
Cardiology 74 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Automatic Determination of Systole and Diastole

The system can be programmed to automatically determine
the cardiac phase as systole or diastole. The parameter in
the Setup/Preset Program Sub-Menu page 3 used to make
this selection is:
Diastole/Systole Determination : Manual Auto

The auto determination of systole/diastole can be fine tuned
using the following parameters also found in Set Up/Preset
Program page 3:
R Delay Time of End Systole Prior Edge : 0–2000msec

End Systole Period from Prior Edge : 0–2000msec
Automatic
If Auto is selected, the determination is made by comparing
the displayed B-Mode or M/D Mode image frames with the
R-point on the ECG wave. Therefore, ‘s’ for systole and ‘d’
for diastole is added automatically to the measurement or
calculation name.
If phase cannot automatically be determined, the system

displays the following message:
“Diastole (‘d’) or Systole (‘s’) ?”
Entering ‘d’ or ‘s’ are the only two acceptable inputs.
‘s’ Erases the message, recognizes the

phase as systole and adds a ‘s’ to the end
of the measurements or calculations.
‘d’ Erases the message, recognizes the
phase as diastole and adds a ‘d’ to the end
of the measurements or calculations.
The user will not be able to perform measurements of the
opposite phase until the next image change is made.
t
Cardiology 75
2177611–100 Rev 0
Automatic (cont’d)
When the measurement phase requested by the system is
different than the phase of the cursor position, the following
“Display ######### image”
######### represents the phase opposite of the one just

completed.
Auto determination of systole/diastole is only available on a

frozen image. It cannot be done on a recalled image or one
from an external video input.
Manual
If Manual is selected, each measurement has a ‘s’ or ‘d’ at
the end of it’s name. The system will not determine the
phase or ask the operator to make that determination.
Auto Trace Measurements

Doppler measurement menus (D-AV, D-MV, D-PV and D-TV)
each have a selection called Auto Trace. When the user
selects Auto Trace, the start point and end point of a
measurement is set. After the end point is set, the system
traces the waveform and automatically calculates the values
as follows:
Ao Auto Trace: (Set start and end points for FVI-AV)

Calculates: MaxPG, MeanPG, Ejection Time, AccT
and DecT
MV Auto Trace: (Set start and end points for FVI)

Calculates: MaxPG, MeanPG, Pressure Half Time,
MV Area, AccT and DecT
PV Auto Trace: (Set start and end points for FVI-AV)

Calculates: MaxPG, MeanPG, AccT and DecT
TV Auto Trace: (Set start and end points for FVI)

Calculates: MaxPG, MeanPG, Pressure Half Time,
AccT and DecT
Cardiology 76 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Continous M-Mode Measurements

When M-Mode measurements can be taken on the same
timeline, the system will support a continuous measurement
of all values along that line.
This can be done because the end point of one measurement

is the start point of the next measurement. After the end
point of the last measurement is set, keystrokes are reduced
by not having to set the next start point.
RVDd RV
IVSd IVS
LVIDd LV
LVPWd LVPW
Illustration 378. Continuous M-Mode Measurements
This type of M-Mode measurements is supported by

M-LV/RV, Teichholz, Cubed and Gibson menu selections.
After selecting the measurement sequence, use the

Trackball to position the first cursor and press Set. The
name of the first value appears; use the Trackball to
position the cursor at the end of the first measurement and
press Set. This is the start point of the next measurement.
The name of the next measurement appears; use the
Trackball to position the end point of the second
measurement and press Set.
This process continues until all measurements are taken.
t
Cardiology 77
2177611–100 Rev 0
Continous M-Mode Measurements (cont’d)
Hints The Ellipse rocker switch is used to skip measurements or

move back to measurements that were skipped.
Before the end point is set, uncompleted measurements can

be removed by pressing Clear once. That measurement can
then be started again.
Measurements can be taken in Zoom mode as long as the

magnification is not changed during the measurement
process.
Measurements can be programmed not to appear in the

continuous measurement sequence in the Set Up/Preset
Program menu pages 4 and 5.
If the measurement is set to OFF in the Preset Program

menus, it will not appear in the continuous sequence.
Additional Set points will have to be made if measurements
are skipped in the continuous sequence.
Cardiology 78 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Advanced Cardiac Calculations Measurement Menus

The illustrations that follow show the Advanced Cardiac
Calculation measurement Sub-Menus that are available with
the AMCAL option.
Each selection in the first layer of Sub-Menus will yield a

second layer of Sub-Menus. This second layer contains
measurements and calculations necessary to complete the
category or goal selected in the first layer.
The illustrations shown are those that result if the

determination of systole/diastole is set to Automatic and then
Manual.
AMCAL Sub-Menus (First Layer)
Illustration 379. First Layer Sub-Menus
t
Cardiology 79
2177611–100 Rev 0
AMCAL Sub-Menus (Second Layer)—Automatic Determination of

Systole/Diastole
Illustration 380. Cubed, Teichholz and Gibson Sub-Menus
Illustration 381. LV Bullet Sub-Menus
Cardiology 80 t
2177611–100 Rev 0

Systole/Diastole (cont’d)
Illustration 382. Modified Simpson’s Rule Sub-Menus
Illustration 383. Single Plane Ellipsoid Sub-Menus
t
Cardiology 81
2177611–100 Rev 0

Illustration 384. Biplane Ellipsoid Sub-Menus
Illustration 385. PLAX Sub-Menus
Illustration 386. PSAX-AV Sub-Menus
Cardiology 82 t
2177611–100 Rev 0

Illustration 387. PSAX-MV Sub-Menus
Illustration 388. PSAX-PAP Sub-Menus
Illustration 389. AP-4CH Sub-Menus
t
Cardiology 83
2177611–100 Rev 0

Illustration 390. AP-2CH Sub-Menus
Illustration 391. M-LV/RV Sub-Menus
Illustration 392. M-MV Sub-Menus
Illustration 393. M-AV Sub-Menus
Cardiology 84 t
2177611–100 Rev 0

Illustration 394. M-PV Sub-Menus
Illustration 395. M-TV Sub-Menus
Illustration 396. D-MV Sub-Menus
t
Cardiology 85
2177611–100 Rev 0

Illustration 397. D-AV Sub-Menus
Illustration 398. D-TV Sub-Menus
Cardiology 86 t
2177611–100 Rev 0

Illustration 399. D-PV Sub-Menus
t
Cardiology 87
2177611–100 Rev 0
AMCAL Sub-Menus (Second Layer)—Manual Determination of

Systole/Diastole
Illustration 400. Cubed, Teichholz and Gibson Sub-Menus
Illustration 401. Bullet Sub-Menus
Cardiology 88 t
2177611–100 Rev 0

Illustration 402. Modified Simpson’s Rule Sub-Menus
Illustration 403. Single Plane Ellipsoid Sub-Menus
t
Cardiology 89
2177611–100 Rev 0

Illustration 404. Biplane Ellipsoid Sub-Menus
Illustration 405. PLAX Sub-Menus Manual Determination
Illustration 406. PSAX-AV Sub-Menus Manual Determination
Cardiology 90 t
2177611–100 Rev 0

Illustration 407. PSAX-MV Sub-Menus Manual Determination
Illustration 408. PSAX-PAP Sub-Menus Manual Determination
Illustration 409. AP-4CH Sub-Menus Manual Determination
t
Cardiology 91
2177611–100 Rev 0

Illustration 410. AP-2CH Sub-Menus Manual Determination
Illustration 411. M-LV/RV Sub-Menus Manual Determination
Cardiology 92 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Cardiac Measurements
Measurements taken in the Advanced Cardiac Calculation
option are the same type of measurements taken in the basic
package.
The user should review and become familiar with how to

make measurements as shown in chapters titled Basic
Measurements/Calculations and Cardiology in Volume 2 of
this manual set.
The system will prompt the user for any measurements

necessary to complete a selected sequence.
t
Cardiology 93
2177611–100 Rev 0
Customizing Measurement Sequences

The sequence in which the second layer of
measurements/calculations is presented may be customized
by the user. This is done by using the Set Up/Preset
Program Sub-Menu page 6. The selection is called:
Cardiac Calculation : Submenu
Selecting this preset displays the calculation sequence

Set Up menu.
Illustration 412. Calculation Sequence Set Up Menu
Cardiology 94 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Pop up Menus
The main menu (B-Mode, M-Mode, etc.) and the Sub-Menu
(Aortic Valve, Mitral Valve, etc.) are pop-up menus that
provide the ability to quickly display the measurements and
their sequence.
To display a pop up menu, use the Trackball to move the

highlight cursor to the main or Sub-Menu area. Press Set.
The pop up menu is displayed.
While the pop up menu is displayed, use the up/down

Trackball motion or the Up/Down arrow keys to select the
desired menu item.
Use the Set key to activate the menu choice.
Page Numbers
The page number area not only shows the Present

Page/Total Pages, but this area is used to navigate through
the display of available pages.
Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to highlight the

navigation arrows on either side of the page numbers.
Press Set to display the previous or next page.
t
Cardiology 95
2177611–100 Rev 0
New Measurement Sequence
ORDER Command
After selecting the desired Main Menu and Sub-Menu, the

calculations are displayed in the top half of the menu.
Use the Trackball to highlight the desired calculation and

press Set. Measurement and calculation items are displayed
on the bottom half of the menu. The order in which they are
executed is shown to their left.
To change the order or omit undesired items from the

sequence, use the ORDER command. Trackball the
highlight cursor to ORDER and press Set.
All measurements and calculations on the bottom half of the

menu no longer have a number to their left.
Use the Trackball to move the highlight cursor to the first

measurement to be made in the customized sequence.
Press Set. The number one is placed to the left of that item.
Use the Trackball to move the highlighted cursor to the
.
second item in the new sequence and press Set.
Continue the process until all desired items are designated.
NOTE: Items not designated will be deleted from the sequence.
Use the SAVE command to store the new custom sequence.
Hints S The customized sequence is saved until the ORDER

command is used to generate a new sequence.
S Items not designated will not automatically appear as a
measurement prompt.
RESET Command
The RESET command resets the measurement sequence to

the factory defaults. Prior to resetting, the following message
is displayed:
“Reset? Press ‘ESC’ to cancel. ‘SET’ to confirm”
Set resets the order to factory defaults. Esc causes nothing

to happen.
Cardiology 96 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
SAVE Command
The SAVE command will save the changes as the new

measurement sequence. Prior to saving, the following
“Overwrite? Press ‘ESC’ to cancel. ‘SET’ to confirm.”
Set saves the order changes. Esc causes nothing to

happen.
If the rearrangement process was not completed, the

“Complete the re–arrangement first.”
EXIT Command
If the exit command is selected before choosing, completing

or saving the order, the following message is displayed:
“Quit? Press ‘ESC’ to cancel. ‘SET’ to confirm.”
Set exits from this screen. Esc causes nothing to happen.
If a new sequence programming was completed but not

saved, the message displayed is:
“Overwrite? Press ‘ESC’ to cancel. ‘SET’ to confirm.”
Set saves the order changes and exits. Esc causes nothing
to happen.
t
Cardiology 97
2177611–100 Rev 0
Auto Sequence Programming

Advanced Cardiac Specification Tables

The following tables show each first layer menu selection
with the measurements and calculations found in it’s second
layer menu.
The tables show the mnemonic, a description of that

mnemonic (calc name), input measurements required and
formula used.
Cardiology 98 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
LV Calculation Formulas (Cubed Method)
B-Mode M-Mode
Illustration 413. Cubed Method Measurements
Input
Internal Diameter,
Diastole
Internal Diameter,
Systole
Septal Thickness,
Diastole
Septal Thickness,
Systole
Posterior Wall mm]
Thickness,
Diastole
Posterior Wall mm]
Thickness, Systole
Table 41. Cubed Method Measurement Formulas
t
Cardiology 99
2177611–100 Rev 0
LV Calculation Formulas (Cubed Method) (cont’d)
Input
EdV End Diastole one distance EdV[ml]=LVIDd^3
Volume
EsV End Systole one distance EsV[ml]=LVIDs^3
Volume
FS Fractional two distances FS=(1–LVIDs/
Shortening LVIDd)x100
interval
SI Stroke Volume Index body surface area SI[ml/m^2]=
and SV SV/BSA
CI Cardiac Index body surface area CI[ml/min/m^2]=
and CO CO/BSA
MVCF Mean Vcf two distances & one MVCF[circ/s]=
time interval (LVIDd-LVIDs)/
(LVIDd x ET)
LVM Left Ventricle three distances LVM[g]=1.04*[(IVSd+
Cardiac Mass LVPWd+LVIDd)^3–
LVIDd^3]–13.6
Table 42. Cubed Method Calculation Formulas
Cardiology 100 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
LV Calculation Formulas (Teichholz Method)
B-Mode M-Mode
Illustration 414. Teichholz Method Measurements
Input
Internal Diameter,
Diastole
Internal Diameter,
Systole
Septal Thickness,
Diastole
Septal Thickness,
Systole
Posterior Wall mm]
Thickness, Diastole
Posterior Wall mm]
Thickness, Systole
HR Heart Rate (beats/ one 2 beat time HR[BPM]=120[sec]/
Table 43. Teichholz Method Measurement Formulas
t
Cardiology 101
2177611–100 Rev 0
LV Calculation Formulas (Teichholz Method) (cont’d)
Input
EdV End Diastole one distance EdV[ml]=LVIDd^3x7/
Volume (2.4+LVIDd)
EsV End Systole one distance EsV[ml]=LVIDs^3x7/
Volume (2.4+LVIDs)
ing LVIDd)x100
interval
SI Stroke Volume Index body surface area SI[ml/m^2]=SV/BSA
and SV
and CO CO/BSA
(LVIDd x ET)
LVIDd^3]–13.6
Table 44. Teichholz Method Calculation Formulas
Cardiology 102 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
LV Calculation Formulas (Bullet Method)
LVAMd LVAMs
LVLd LVLs
Illustration 415. Bullet Method Measurements
Input
Length, Diastole
Length, Systole
LVAMd Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAMd=a1[cm^2]
LVAMs Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAMs=a1[cm^2]
Table 45. Bullet Method Measurement Formulas
t
Cardiology 103
2177611–100 Rev 0
LV Calculation Formulas (Bullet Method) (cont’d)
Input
EdV End Diastole one distance and EdV[ml]=5xLVLd
Volume one area (by ellipse, xLVAMd/6
trace or circle)
EsV End Systole one distance and EsV[ml]=5xLVLs
Volume one area (by ellipse, xLVAMs/6
trace or circle)
trace or circle)
trace or circle)
one 2 beat time
interval
and SV
and CO CO/BSA
Table 46. Bullet Method Calculation Formulas
Cardiology 104 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
LVAMd LVAMs LVAPd LVAPs

LVLd LVLs
Illustration 416. Modified Simpson’s Rule Method Measurements
Input
Length, Diastole
Length, Systole
LVAPd Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAPd=a1[cm^2]
Diastole
LVAPs Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAPs=a1[cm^2]
Systole
HR Heart Rate (beats/ one 2 beat time HR[BPM]=120[sec]/
Table 47. Modified Simpson’s Rule Method Measurement Formulas
t
Cardiology 105
2177611–100 Rev 0

(cont’d)
Input
EdV End Diastole one distance and EdV[ml]=LVLd/3 x
Volume two areas (by ellipse, [LVAMd+ (LVAMd+
trace or circle)
LVAPd)/2+ LVAPd/3]
EsV End Systole one distance and EsV[ml]=LVLs/3
Volume two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAMs+
trace or circle)
(LVAMs+LVAPs)/2+
LVAPs/3)
trace or circle)
trace or circle)
one 2 beat time
interval
and SV
and CO CO/BSA
Table 48. Modified Simpson’s Rule Method Calculation Formulas
Cardiology 106 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
LV Calculation Formulas (Single Plane Ellipsoid Method)
LVLd LVLs LVAd LVAs
Illustration 417. Single Ellipsoid Method Measurements
Input
Length, Diastole
Length, Systole
LVAd Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAd=a1[cm^2]
LVAs Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAs=a1[cm^2]
Table 49. Single Plane Ellipsoid Method Measurement Formulas
t
Cardiology 107
2177611–100 Rev 0
LV Calculation Formulas (Single Plane Ellipsoid Method) (cont’d)
Input
two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAd)^2/LVLd
trace or circle)
two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAs)^2/LVLs
trace or circle)
trace or circle)
EF Ejection Fraction two distances and EF[%]=SV/EdVx100
trace or circle)
one 2 beat time
interval
and SV
and CO CO/BSA
Table 50. Single Plane Ellipsoid Method Calculation Formulas
Cardiology 108 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
LV Calculation Formulas (Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method)
LVMLd LVMLs LVAd LVAs LVAMd LVAMs
Illustration 418. Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method Measurements
Input
LVMLd Left Ventricle Medial- one distance LVMLd=d1[cm or
Diastole
LVMLs Left Ventricle Medial- one distance LVMLs=d1[cm or
Systole
LVAd Left Ventricle Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAd=a1[cm^2]
LVAs Left Ventricle Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAs=a1[cm^2]
Table 51. Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method Measurement Formulas
t
Cardiology 109
2177611–100 Rev 0
LV Calculation Formulas (Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method) (cont’d)
Input
EdV End Diastole Volume one distance and EdV[ml]=8/(3 π)
two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAdxLVAMd)/
trace or circle) LVMLd
EsV End Systole Volume one distance and EsV[ml]=8/(3 π)
two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAsxLVAMs)/
trace or circle) LVMLs
trace or circle)
trace or circle)
one 2 beat time
interval
and SV
and CO CO/BSA
Table 52. Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method Calculation Formulas
Cardiology 110 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
LV Calculation Formulas (Gibson Method)
B-Mode M-Mode
Illustration 419. Gibson Method Measurements
Input
Internal Diameter,
Diastole
Internal Diameter,
Systole
Septal Thickness,
Diastole
Septal Thickness,
Systole
Posterior Wall mm]
Thickness, Diastole
Posterior Wall mm]
Thickness, Systole
Table 53. Gibson Method Measurement Formulas
t
Cardiology 111
2177611–100 Rev 0
LV Calculation Formulas (Gibson Method) (cont’d)
Input
EdV End Diastole Volume three distances EdV[ml]=π/6 x
(LVIDd)^2 x (0.98 x
LVIDd + 0.59)
EsV End Systole Volume three distances EsV[ml]=π/6 x
(LVIDs)^2 x (1.14 x
LVIDs + 4.18)
ing LVIDd)x100
interval
and SV
and CO CO/BSA
(LVIDd x ET)
LVIDd^3]–13.6
Table 54. Gibson Method Calculation Formulas
Cardiology 112 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
B-Mode Analysis – Parasternal Long Axis
IVSd
AOd LVIDs ALSs AOs
LVIDd
LADs
LVPWd
DIASTOLE SYSTOLE
Illustration 420. PLAX Measurements
Input
AOd Aortic Root one distance AOd=d1[cm or mm]
Dimension, Diastole
IVSd Interventricular Septal one distance IVSd=d1[cm or mm]
Dimension at Diastole
LVPWd Left Ventricular Pos- one distance LVPWd=d1[cm or
terior Wall Thickness mm]
at Diastole
Interior Dimension
at Diastole
AOs Aortic Root Dimension one distance AOs=d1[cm or mm]
at Systole
LVIDs Left Ventricular Interior one distance LVIDs=d1[cm or mm]
Dimension at Systole
ALSs Aortic Valve Leaflet one distance ALSs=d1[cm or mm]
Seperation, Systole
LADs Left Atrial one distance LADs=d1[cm or mm]
LVOTs LV Outflow Tract one distance LVOTs=d1 [cm or
Diameter at Systole mm]
AAs Aortic Area at Sys- one distance (AOs) AAs[cm2]=
tole (p/4)x(AOs)2
LVOTA LV Outflow Tract one distance LVOTA [cm2]=

Area at Systole (p/4)x(LVOTs)2

Table 55. Parasternal Long Axis (PLAX)
t
Cardiology 113
2177611–100 Rev 0
B-Mode Analysis – Parasternal Short Axis (PSAX-AV)
RVOTd
PADd PADs
AOs
AOd LADMLs
DIASTOLE SYSTOLE
Illustration 421. PSAX–AV Measurements
Input
Dimension, Diastole
PADd Pulmonary Artery Di- one distance PADd=d1[cm or mm]
ameter, Diastole
RVOTd Right Ventricular one distance RVOTd=d1[cm or
Outflow Tract mm]
Diameter, Diastole
AOs Aortic Root one distance AOs=d1[cm or mm]
PADs Pulmonary Artery Di- one distance PADs=d1[cm or mm]
ameter at Systole
LADML Left Atrium Medial- one distance LADML=d1[cm or
Lateral Diameter at mm]
Systole
RVOTs Right Ventricle Out- one distance RVOTs=d1 [cm or
flow Tract Diameter mm]
at Systole
RVOTA Right Ventricle Out- one distance RVOTA [cm2]=
flow Tract Area at (π/4)x(RVOTs)2
Systole
PAAs Pulmonary Artery one distance (PADs) PAAs[cm^2]=
Area at Systole (π/4)x(PADs) ^2
AAs Aortic Area at one distance (AOs) AAs[cm^2]=
Systole (π/4)x(AOs) ^2
Table 56. Parasternal Short Axis - Aortic Valve (PSAX-AV)
Cardiology 114 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
B-Mode Analysis – Parasternal Short Axis (PSAX-MV)
ÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
LVAMd LVAMs
MVOA
DIASTOLE SYSTOLE
Illustration 422.PSAX–MV Measurements
Input
Diastole
Systole
MVOA Mitral Valve Maxi- one area (by ellipse, MVOA=a1[cm^2]
mum Orifice Area at trace or circle)
Diastole
Table 57. Parasternal Short Axis - Mitral Valve (PSAX-MV)
t
Cardiology 115
2177611–100 Rev 0
B-Mode Analysis – Parasternal Short Axis (PSAX-PAP)
LVAPd LVAPs
DIASTOLE SYSTOLE
Illustration 423. PSAX–PAP Measurements
Input
LVAPd Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAPd=a1[cm^2]
Papillary Muscles at trace or circle)
Diastole
LVAPs Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, LVAPs=a1[cm^2]
Papillary Muscles at trace or circle)
Systole
Table 58. Parasternal Short Axis - Papillary Muscles (PSAX-PAP)
Cardiology 116 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
B-Mode Analysis – Apical 4 Chamber (AP-4CH)
RVLd LVLd
RVAd LVAd
LVMLd
RVMLd
Illustration 424. AP–4CH Measurements (Diastole)
Input
Length Dimension,
Diastole
LVMLd Left Ventricular one distance LVMLd=d1[cm or
Medial-Lateral mm]
Dimension, Diastole
RVAd Right Ventricle Area, one area (by ellipse, RVAd=a1[cm^2]
RVLd Right Ventricular one distance RVLd=d1[cm or mm]
Length Dimension,
Diastole
RVMLd Right Ventricular one distance RVMLd=d1[cm or
Medial-Lateral mm]
Dimension, Diastole
Table 59. Apical 4 Chamber (AP-4CH) Diastole
t
Cardiology 117
2177611–100 Rev 0
B-Mode Analysis – Apical 4 Chamber (AP-4CH) (cont’d)
RVLs LVLs
RVAs LVAs
RVMLs LVMLs
TAML
Illustration 425. AP–4CH Measurements (Ventricular Systole)
Input
Length Dimension,
Systole
LVMLs Left Ventricular one distance LVMLs=d1[cm or
Medial-Lateral mm]
Dimension, Systole
RVAs Right Ventricle Area, one area (by ellipse, RVAs=a1[cm^2]
RVLs Right Ventricular one distance RVLs=d1[cm or mm]
Length Dimension at
Systole
RVMLs Right Ventricular one distance RVMLs=d1[cm or
Medial-Lateral mm]
Dimension, Systole
TAML Tricuspid Annulus one distance TAML=d1[cm or mm]
Medial-Lateral
Dimension, Systole
Table 60. Apical 4 Chamber (AP-4CH) Ventricular Systole
Cardiology 118 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
B-Mode Analysis – Apical 4 Chamber (AP-4CH) (cont’d)
RADMLs LADMLs
RAAs LAAs
RADSIs LADSIs
Illustration 426. AP–4CH Measurements (Atrial Systole)
Input
LAA Left Atrial Area, one area (by ellipse, LAA=a1[cm^2]
LADML Left Atrial Medial- one distance LADML=d1[cm or
Systole
LADSI Left Atrial Superior– one distance LADSI=d1[cm or
Inferior Dimension, mm]
Systole
RAA Right Atrial Area, one area (by ellipse, RAAs=a1[cm^2]
RADML Right Atrial Medial- one distance RADML=d1[cm or
Systole
RADSI Right Atrial one distance RADSI=d1[cm or
Superior–Inferior mm]
Dimension, Systole
Table 61. Apical 4 Chamber (AP-4CH) Atrial Systole
t
Cardiology 119
2177611–100 Rev 0
B-Mode Analysis – Apical 2 Chamber (AP-2CH)
LVLd LVLs
LVAd LVAs
LVMLd LVMLs
DIASTOLE SYSTOLE
Illustration 427. AP–2CH Measurements
Input
Length Dimension,
Diastole
LVMLd Left Ventricular one distance LVMLd=d1[cm or
Medial-Lateral mm]
Dimension, Diastole
Length Dimension at
Systole
LVMLs Left Ventricular one distance LVMLs=d1[cm or
Medial-Lateral mm]
Dimension, Systole
HR Heart Rate (beats/ one 2 beat time HR[BPM]=120
minute) interval [sec]/2 beat time
[sec]
Table 62. Apical 2 Chamber (AP-2CH)
Cardiology 120 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
M-Mode Analysis – Left/Right Ventricle (M-LV/RV)
RVAW
RVDd RV
IVSd IVSs IVS
LVIDd LVIDs LV
LVPWd LVPWs LVPW
PCG
ECG
Illustration 428. M-LV/RV Measurements
Input
RVDd Right Ventricular one distance RVDd=d1[cm or mm]
Dimension, Diastole
Septal Thickness,
Diastole
Interior Dimension,
Diastole
LVPWd Left Ventricular one distance LVPWd=d1[cm or
Posterior Wall mm]
Thickness at
Diastole
Septal Thickness,
Systole
LVPWs Left Ventricular one distance LVPWs=d1[cm or
Posterior Wall mm]
Thickness at Systole
Interior Dimension
at Systole
Table 63. Left/Right Ventricle (M-LV/RV)
t
Cardiology 121
2177611–100 Rev 0
M-Mode Analysis – Left/Right Ventricle (M-LV/RV) (cont’d)
Input
IVS/PW Interventricular two distances IVS/PW[%]=
Septum/Left (IVSd & LVPWd) IVSd/LVPWd x 100
Ventricle Posterior
Ratio at Diastole
FS Left Ventricle two distances FS[%]=
Internal Dimension (LVIDd & LVIDs) [(LVIDd-LVIDs)/
Fractional
LVIDd] x 100
Shortening
%STIVS Interventricular two distances %STIVS[%]=
Shortening (IVSd & IVSs) [(IVSs-IVSd)/IVSd]
x 100
%STPW Left Ventricle two distances %STPW[%]=
Posterior Wall (LVPWd & LVPWs) [(LVPWs-LVPWd)/
Shortening LVPWd] x 100
LVM Left Ventricle three distances LVM[g]=1.04x[(IVSd
Cardiac Mass (LVPWd, LVIDd & +LVPWd+LVIDd)^3-
IVSd) LVIDd^3]–13.6
Table 63. Left/Right Ventricle (M-LV/RV) (cont’d)
Cardiology 122 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
M-Mode Analysis – Mitral Valve (M-MV)

RVAW
RV
G IVS
E A LVOT
D
F
C AML
E LV
LVPW
PCG
P R
ECG
Illustration 429. M-MV Measurements
Input
EPSS E point Septal one distance EPSS=d1[cm or mm]
Separation
V_EF Mitral Valve E-F one slope V_EF=s1[cm/s]
Velocity
V_DE Mitral Valve D-E one slope V_DE=s1[cm/s]
Velocity
D_DE Mitral Valve D-E one distance V_DE=d1[cm or mm]
Separation
D_CE Mitral Valve C-E one distance D_CE=d1[cm or mm]
Separation
T_AC Mitral Valve A-C one time interval T_AC=t1[msec or sec]
Interval
P-R P-R Interval one time interval P-R=t1[msec or sec]
A/E Mitral Valve A/E two distances A/E[%]= (D_AC/
Ratio (A-C & D-E) D_DE) x 100
PR-AC Mitral Valve PR-AC two time intervals PR-AC[msec or
Interval sec]=P-R - T_AC
.
Table 64. Mitral Valve (M-MV)
V_DE measurement calculates D_DE simultaneously.

D_DE measurement calculates V_DE simultaneously.
T_AC measurement calculates D_AC simultaneously.
V_EF, V_DE, D_DE, D_CE and T_AC measurement results

should be performed through the slope measurement.
t
Cardiology 123
2177611–100 Rev 0
M-Mode Analysis – Aortic Valve (M-AV)
A H G
E
K
F
C
B D
Illustration 430. M-AV Measurements
Input
Dimension, A-B
Diastole
ALSs Aortic Valve one distance ALSs=d1[cm or mm]
Leaflet Seperation, E-F
Systole
LADs Left Atrium one distance LADs=d1[cm or mm]
Dimension, Systole C-D
RVOTs Right Ventricular one distance RVOTs=d1[cm or
Outflow Tract G-H mm]
Diameter at
Systole
LVPEP Left Ventricle Pre- one time interval LVPEP=t1[msec or
Ejection Period Q-I sec]
LVET Left Ventricle one time interval LVET=t1[msec or
Ejection Time I-K sec]
LA/AO LADs/AOd Ratio two distances LA/AO[%]=LADs/
(LADs & AOd) AOd x 100
PEP/ET Left Ventricle Systole two distances PEP/ET[%]=
Time Interval Ratio (LVPEP & LVET) (LVPEP/LVET) x 100
Table 65. Aortic Valve (M-AV)
Cardiology 124 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
M-Mode Analysis – Pulmonic Valve (M-PV)
G
PVAW
A E
B PV
D PVPW
PCG
ECG
Q
Illustration 431. M–PV Measurements
Input
PADs Pulmonic Artery one distance PADs=d1[cm or mm]
Diameter at Systole
RVPEP Right Ventricle one time interval RVPEP=t1[msec or
Pre-Ejection Period sec]
RVET Right Ventricle one time interval RVET=t1[msec or
Ejection Time sec]
aWAVE Pulmonic Valve one distance aWAVE=d1[cm or
a-Wave Amplitude mm]
PAAs Pulmonary Artery one distance (PADs) PAAs[cm^2]=
Area at Systole (p/4)x(PADs) ^2
PEP/ET Right Ventricle Sys- two distances PEP/ET[%]=

tole Time Interval (RVPEP & RVET) (RVPEP/RVET)x100
Ratio
Table 66. Pulmonic Valve (M-PV)
t
Cardiology 125
2177611–100 Rev 0
M-Mode Analysis – Tricuspid Valve (M-TV)
E
A RVOT
D F
ATL
C
RA
RAPW
PCG
P R
ECG
Illustration 432. M-TV Measurements
Input
TV_EF Tricuspid Valve E-F one slope TV_EF=v1[cm/s or
Velocity m/s]
TV_DE Tricuspid Valve D-E one distance TV_DE=d1[cm or
Amplitude mm]
TV_CE Tricuspid Valve C-E one distance TV_CE=d1[cm or
Amplitude mm]
TV_AC Tricuspid Valve A-C one time interval TV_AC=t1[msec or
Interval sec]
P-R P-R Interval one time interval P-R=t1[msec or sec]
TV-A/E Tricuspid Valve A/E one distance TV-A/E[%]=
Ratio (TV<D-E>) (D<TV_AC>/TV_DE)
x 100
TPR-AC Tricuspid Valve PR- two time intervals TPR-AC[ms or sec]=
AC Interval P-R - TV_AC
.
Table 67. Tricuspid Valve (M-TV)
TV_AC measurement calculates D_AC simultaneously.
TV_DE, TV_EF, TV_AC and TV_CE measurement results

should be performed through the slope measurement.
Cardiology 126 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Doppler Analysis – Mitral Valve (D-MV)
P
Vp a d
F
2
2
O
s e
R
1
Illustration 433. D-MV Measurements
Input
MVOA Mitral Valve Orifice one area (by ellipse, MVOA=a1[cm ^2]
Area at Diastole trace or circle)
PFVMV Peak Flow Velocity one velocity PFV–MV=v1[cm/s or
at the Mitral Valve m/s]
PFVLA Peak Flow Velocity one velocity PFV–LA=v1[cm/s or
at Left Atrium m/s]
FVI Flow Velocity flow velocities FVI[mm or cm]=
Integral sVdt
Table 68. Mitral Valve (D-MV)
t
Cardiology 127
2177611–100 Rev 0
Doppler Analysis – Mitral Valve (D-MV) (cont’d)
Input
AccT Flow Acceleration one time interval AccT[msec or sec]=
Time t<PFV-MV>-ts<ET>
DecT Flow Deceleration one time interval DecT[msec or sec]=
Time te<ET>-t<PFV-MV>
PkFVI Peak Flow Velocity one velocity, PkFVI[cm/s or
Intergal one time interval m/s]=1.14 x PFV-MV
x ET/20+0.3
MeanFV Mean Flow Velocity flow velocities, one MeanFV [cm/s or
area (by ellipse, m/s]= FVI/t<FVI>
trace or circle)
SV Stroke Volume flow velocities and SV[ml]=FVI x MVOA
one area (by ellipse,
trace or circle)
and SV
CO Cardiac Output flow velocities, one CO[1/min]=
area (by ellipse, SVxHR/1000
one time interval
and CO CO/BSA
MaxPG Maximum Pressure two velocities MaxPG[mmHg]=
Gradient 4 x (PFV-MV^2)
MeanPG Mean Pressure Gra- flow velocities MeanPG[mmHg]=
dient n
4 x Σ (V^2/n)
i=1
MVA Mitral Valve Area one time interval MVA[cm^2]=
220/PHT
Table 68. Mitral Valve (D-MV) (cont’d)
Cardiology 128 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Doppler Analysis – Aortic Valve (D-AV)
P
Vp a d
2 F
AOPFV s e O
R
LOPFV
Illustration 434. D-AV Measurements
Input
AOs Aortic Root one distance AOs=d1[cm or mm]
Dimension, Systole
FVI-AV Flow Velocity flow velocities FVI-AV[mm or cm]=
Intergal at Aortic sVdt
Valve
FVI-LV Flow Velocity flow velocities FVI-LV[mm or cm]=
Intergal at Left sVdt
Ventricular Outflow
Tract
PFVAV Peak Flow Velocity one velocity PFVAV=v1[cm/s or
at Aortic Valve m/s]
PFVLV Peak Flow Velocity one velocity PFVLV=v1[cm/s or
at Left Ventricular m/s]
Outflow Tract
S–E
Table 69. Aortic Valve (D-AV)
t
Cardiology 129
2177611–100 Rev 0
Doppler Analysis – Aortic Valve (D-AV) (cont’d)
Input
AV-A Aortic Valve Area by one distance AV-A[mm or cm]=
cont’Eq two velocities LVOT-A x PFV-LV/
PFV-AV
LVOTA Left Ventricular LVOTs of PLAX LVOTA[cm^2]=
Outflow Tract Area at π x (LVOTs)^2 /4
Systole
AccT Flow Acceleration two time intervals AccT[msec or sec]=
Time t<PFV-AV>-ts<ET>
DecT Flow Deceleration two time intervals DecT[msec or sec]=
Time te<ET>-t<PFV-AV>
PkFVI Peak Flow Velocity one velocity, PkFVI[mm or cm]=
Intergal one time interval 1.14 x PFV–AV x ET/
20+.03
MeanFV Mean Flow Velocity flow velocities, MeanFV[cm/s or
one time interval m/s]=FVI/t<FVI>
QP:QS QP:QS Ratio two CO QP:QS=CO(PV)/
CO(AV)
Gradient 4 x (PFV-AV^2)
MeanPG Mean Pressure flow velocities MeanPG[mmHg]=
Gradient n
4 x Σ (V^2/n)
i=1
SV Stroke Volume flow velocities, one AV–A is calculated.
area (by ellipse or SV[ml]=FVI–AV x
trace or circle) AV–A
else
SV[ml]=FVI–AV x
(π/4) X (AOs)^2
and SV SV/BSA
CO Cardiac Output flow velocities, one CO[ml]=
one time interval
and CO CO/BSA
Table 69. Aortic Valve (D-AV) (cont’d)
Cardiology 130 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Doppler Analysis – Pulmonic Valve (D-PV)
ROPFV P
PAPFV Vp a d
2 F
s O
e
R
Illustration 435. D-PV Measurements
Input
PADs Pulmonary Artery one distance PADs=d1[cm or mm]
Diameter at Systole B-Mode
FVI-PV Flow Velocity one FVI FVI-PV= sVdt
Integral at
Pulmonic Valve
FVI-PA Flow Velocity one FVI FVI-PA= sVdt
Integral at
Pulmonic Aorta
FVI-RV Flow Velocity one FVI FVI-RV=sVdt
Integral at Right Ven-
tricle Outflow Tract
PFVPA Peak Flow Velocity one velocity PFVPA=v1[cm/s or
at Pulmonic Aorta m/s]
PFVRV Peak Flow Velocity one velocity PFVRV=v1[cm/s or
at Right Ventricle m/s]
Outflow Tract
S–E
PHT Pressure Half Time one time interval PHT=t1[ms or sec]
PV-A Pulmonic Valve Area one distance PV-A[cm^2]=
by cont’Eq two velocities (π/4) x (PADs)^2 x
PFV-PA/PFV-RV
Time t<PFV-PA>-ts<ET>
Time te<ET>-t<PFV-PA>
Table 70. Pulmonic Valve (D-PV)
t
Cardiology 131
2177611–100 Rev 0
Doppler Analysis – Pulmonic Valve (D-PV) (cont’d)
Input
PkFVI Peak Flow Velocity one velocity and one PkFVI[mm or cm]=
Integral time interval 1.14 x PFV-PA x
ET/20+0.3
MeanFV Mean Flow flow velocities and MeanFV[mm or cm]=
Velocity one time interval FVI/t<FVI>
QP:QS QP:QS Ratio two CO QP:QS=CO(PV)/
CO(AV)
CO Cardiac Output flow velocities, one CO[ml]=
one time interval
and CO CO/BSA
MaxPG Maximum two velocities MaxPG[mmHg]=
Pressure Gradient 4 x (PFV-PA^2)
Gradient n
4 x Σ (V^2/n)
i=1
SV Stroke Volume flow velocities SV[ml]=FVI–PV x
RVOTA of PLAX–AV RVOTA
and SV
Table 70. Pulmonic Valve (D-PV) (cont’d)
Cardiology 132 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Doppler Analysis – Tricuspid Valve (D-TV)
P
Vp a d
2 F
e
O
s
R
Illustration 436. D-TV Measurements
Input
TAML Tricuspid Annulus one distance TAML=d1[cm or mm]
Medial-Lateral
Dimension, Systole
FVI Flow Velocity flow velocities FVI[mm or cm]=
Integral sVdt
PFVTV Peak Flow Velocity one velocity PFVTV=v1[cm/s or
at Tricuspid Valve m/s]
PFVRA Peak Flow Velocity one velocity PFVRA=v1[cm/s or
at Right Atrial m/s]
PHT Pressure Half Time one time interval PHT=t1[ms or sec]
HR Heart Rate (beats/ one 2 beat time in- HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/
minute) terval 2 beat time [sec]
Time t<PFVTV>-ts<ET>
Time te<ET>-t<PFVTV>
Table 71. Tricuspid Valve (D-TV)
t
Cardiology 133
2177611–100 Rev 0
Doppler Analysis – Tricuspid Valve (D-TV) (cont’d)
Input
PkFVI Peak Flow Velocity one velocity, one PkFVI[cm/s or m/s]=
Integral time interval 1.14 x PFVTV x
ET/20+0.3
MeanFV Mean Flow Velocity one velocity, one MeanFV[cm/s or
time interval m/s]=FVI/t<FVI>
Gradient 4 x (PFV-TV^2)
Gradient n
4 x Σ (V^2/n)
i=1
SV Stroke Volume flow velocities, one SV[ml]=(π/4) x FVI x
distance (TAML)^2
and SV SV/BSA
CO Cardiac Output flow velocities, one CO[1/min]=
distance and one SVxHR/1000
time interval
and CO CO/BSA
Table 72. Tricuspid Valve (D-TV) (cont’d)
Cardiology 134 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Advanced Cardiac Reports
Overview
Two types of report formats are supported by the
LOGIQ 500 Advanced Cardiac Calculation option.
The first format is the standard display that shows a separate

page for each of the first layer menu choices (i.e. Cubed
Method, Bullet Method, PSAX-AV, D-MV, etc.). Along with
the patient information are the measured values, their
average and the calculated values.
Two examples are shown in Illustration 437 and

Illustration 438.
Illustration 437. Standard Cubed Method Report Page

t
Cardiology 135
2177611–100 Rev 0
Overview (cont’d)
Illustration 438. Standard PSAX-AV Report Page
The second report format is the list of measured and

calculated values. When a measurement is made, it is
entered into each report page that displays that
measurement. If the standard report format is used, many
unnecessary report pages could be generated. The List type
of reporting can be customized to the user’s needs,
eliminating unnecessary printing requirements.
A List type report page is shown in Illustration 439.
Cardiology 136 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Overview (cont’d)
Hospital Name Tech. ID: 1 2 3 4 10 / 18 / 93

ID: Patient ID NAME: Patient Name AGE: ###
SEX: 1 HEIGHT: 123cm WEIGHT: 123.45kg BSA: 12.34m2
Ref MD: NOTE:
[ M-Mode ] [ Aortic Valve ] ← ## / ##→
AOd ###.#mm (###.# ###.# ###.#)
ALSs ###.#mm (###.# ###.# ###.#)
LADs ###.#mm (###.# ###.# ###.#)
RVOTs ###.#mm (###.# ###.# ###.#)
LA/AO ###.#%
[ D-Mode ] [ Tricuspid Valve ]

TAML ###.#mm (###.# ###.# ###.#)
FVI ###.#cm (###.# ###.# ###.#)
ET ###.#ms (###.# ###.# ###.#)
PHT ###.#ms (###.# ###.# ###.#)
MeanV #.##cm/s
MeanPG #.##mmHg
SV #.#ml
CO #.##l/min
COMMENTS: [ RETURN ] [ S–RP ] [ AUTO–P ]
Comments Area
Illustration 439. List Type Report Page
Standard Report
The fifth line of the standard report page layout has three
important areas of information.
Main Menu Shows the main or first

layer category (D-Mode)
Sub-Menu Shows the sub or second
layer category (Aortic Valve)
Page Number Shows present page
number and total pages
t
Cardiology 137
2177611–100 Rev 0
Pop up Menus
The Main and Sub-Menus are pop-up menus that provide the
ability to quickly display reports.
To display a pop up menu, use the Trackball to move the

highlight cursor to the main or Sub-Menu area. Press Set.
The pop up menu is displayed.
While the pop up menu is displayed, use the up/down

Trackball motion or the Up/Down arrow keys to select the
desired menu item.
Use the Set key to activate the menu choice.
Page Numbers
The page number area not only shows the Present

Page/Total Pages, but this area is used to navigate through
the display of available pages.
Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to highlight the

navigation arrows on either side of the page numbers.
Press Set to display the previous or next page.
Report Page Commands
Four commands at the bottom of the report page allow the

user to:
List Change the report format to the LIST type.

Edit Allows for deleting measurement data on
the report page
S–RP Used to select the titles and order of report
page printing.
Auto–P Automatically prints out all reports,
selected by the S–RP function, in
sequential order.
Use the Trackball to highlight the desired command and
press Set.
Cardiology 138 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
List Type Reports

The List type report displays only those measurements or
calculations actually performed. The section order of the list
is the same that was programmed by the S–RP command.
The item order is the same as the standard report.
All commands are the same as the standard report. The

difference is the Return command. Selecting Return
changes the display to the standard format.
Hints When the amount of section information will not fit on one
page, a new page is generated so that all will fit on the same
page.
Select Reports (S–RP)

The customization of the cardiac calculation reporting is
accomplished with this function.
Select S–RP from any standard report display. The screen

for selecting the report order is displayed as shown in
Illustration 440.
t
Cardiology 139
2177611–100 Rev 0
Select Reports (S–RP)
Illustration 440. Select Report Display Order
Commands at the bottom of this Select Report Display allow

the user to:
ORDER Erases all previous print order numbers

and starts the order selection process.
RESET Resets the print order to the factory
default.
SAVE Saves the chosen combination.
EXIT Exits the S–RP Process and changes to
the previous screen.
Cardiology 140 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operation and Messages
ORDER
The ORDER command is used to erase all previous

designations and commence the order selection process.
Select the ORDER command from the bottom menu. The
Set erases the old order and starts the order selection
process. Esc causes nothing to happen.
To designate a new order, use the Trackball to move the

cursor to the desired selection.
Press Set. The order number is placed to the left of the

measurement group name. The highlighted cursor stays in
it’s position until it is moved by the Trackball to the next
selection.
.
Continue this process until the desired selections have been
made in the preferred order.
NOTE: If Apical 4 Chamber–Diastole is selected, the same

order number will be assigned to Apical 4 Chamber–Systole
and vice-versa.
Measurement groups not selected will not be printed.
RESET
The RESET command resets the displayed combination to

the factory defaults. Prior to resetting, the following message
is displayed:
Set resets the order to factory defaults. Esc causes nothing

to happen.
t
Cardiology 141
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operation and Messages
SAVE
The SAVE command will save the changes as the new report
printing configuration. Prior to saving, the following message
is displayed:
“Overwrite? Press ‘ESC’ to cancel. ‘SET’ to confirm”
Set saves the order changes. Esc causes nothing to

happen.
If the Order process was not completed, the following

“Complete the present set up first.”
EXIT
If the exit command is selected before choosing, completing

or saving a new sequence program, the following message is
displayed:
“Quit? Press ‘ESC’ to cancel. ‘SET’ to confirm”
Set exits from this screen. Esc causes nothing to happen.
If a new sequence program was completed but not saved,

the following message is displayed:
“Overwrite? Press ‘ESC’ to cancel. ‘SET’ to confirm”
Set saves the order changes and exits. Esc causes nothing
to happen.
Cardiology 142 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Index
Index

546L, Probes 32
Safety, Safety 19

t
Index 1
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

Auto Sequence
Aux
B510, Probes 43
Bioeffects A–1
Depth, B-Mode 10
Index 2 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
OB, OB/GYN 1
t
Index 3
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

B–Mode, B-Mode 30
Doppler, Doppler 45
Index 4 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

Control Panel
Date, Basic Scan 15
DF, Basic Scan 23
GA, Basic Scan 15
PRF, Basic Scan 23
Name, Basic Scan 15
t
Index 5
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

Doppler 23
Typical Exam
CWD, Doppler 10
PWD, Doppler 6
B Pause, Doppler 30
Dual, Cardiology 61
Continuous Wave
E
E721, Probes 29
High PRF, Doppler 8
Edge Enhance
HPRF, Doppler 48
B–Mode, B-Mode 39
M–Mode, M-Mode 17
Pulsed Wave
Index 6 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

Parts 30

M–Mode, M-Mode 21
Focus
RI, OB/GYN 95
Gain
t
Index 7
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

Started 43
I739, Probes 31
L764, Probes 34
LA39, Probes 36
K
Index 8 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

M–Mode Analysis
M–Mode, M-Mode 8
LT ECA, Vascular 8
Cardiology 53
t
Index 9
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

PHT, Cardiology 48
Memory
Cine, Basic Scan 72
Color Flow
Cardiology 105
M–Mode
OB, OB/GYN 1
Multigestation
GS, OB/GYN 28
Hints, OB/GYN 35
HR, OB/GYN 33
Locatn, OB/GYN 29
OB Graph, OB/GYN 79
Index 10 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

N
Basic Scan 4

Height, OB/GYN 91
Width, OB/GYN 91
O
P
OB, OB/GYN 37
Editing, OB/GYN 48
Locatn, OB/GYN 29
t
Index 11
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

M–Mode
Peripherals C–6
Index 12 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
Linear
S316, Probes 40
Applying, Probes 22

B–Mode, B-Mode 37
B–Mode, B-Mode 16
Q RI, OB/GYN 95
RT CCA, Vascular 8
Maintenance 38 S
t
Index 13
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

EMC, Safety 14
Doppler
Set–Up
Cardiology 107
HPRF, Doppler 48
Slant Scan
Doppler, Doppler 33
Index 14 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

Sweep Speed
Doppler, Doppler 39
M–Mode, M-Mode 19
System
OB, OB/GYN 1
Customize 79
Color 34
M–Mode, M-Mode 23
TAMAX, Vascular 21

Basic Scan 47
t
Index 15
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

Operation H–21
User
Tables, OB/GYN 28
VTR. See VCR
Ut–H, OB/GYN 92
Ut–L, OB/GYN 92 W
Height, OB/GYN 92
Warranties
Z
Index 16 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
GE Medical Systems
Technical
Publications
2177611-100
Revision 0
LOGIQt 500
Users Manual
Volume 3
Copyright

GE Medical Systems

78533 BUC Cedex
Revision History


VOLUME 3:
Title Page 0
Safety 1 thru 28 0
BĆMode 1 thru 40 0
Probes 1 thru 46 0
Doppler 1 thru 54 0
MĆMode 1 thru 24 0
Index 1 thru 16 0
OB/GYN 1 thru 98 0
t
Revision History A
2177611–100 Rev 0
Revision History
2177611–100 Rev 0
Biopsy Procedures
Special Concerns
Guidelines
t
The LOGIQ 500 probes currently available all have biopsy capabilities. This
section describes some special concerns, biopsy kits and accessories as well as
basic procedures for attaching a biopsy guide to the different types of probes.
Please consult any documentation that comes with the probes or biopsy kits for
more details.
t
Biopsy 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Biopsy Procedures
Biopsy 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Special Concerns
Precautions Concerning the Use of Biopsy Procedures

WARNING Do not freeze the image during a biopsy procedure. The
image must be live to avoid a positioning error.
Biopsy guidelines are intended to assist the user in

determining optimal probe placement and approximate the
needle path. However, actual needle movement is likely to
deviate from the guideline. Always monitor the relative
positions of the biopsy needle and the subject mass during
the procedure.
CAUTION The use of biopsy devices and accessories that have not
been evaluated for use with this equipment may not be
compatible and could result in injury. Refer to the list of
recommended accessories and supplies in Appendix D,
Assistance.
CAUTION The invasive nature of biopsy procedures requires proper

preparation and technique to control infection and disease
transmission. Equipment must be cleaned as appropriate for
the procedure prior to use.
S Follow the probe cleaning and disinfection procedures

and precautions to properly prepare the probe.
S Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the cleaning of
biopsy devices and accessories.
S Use protective barriers such as gloves and probe
sheaths.
S After use, follow proper procedures for decontamination,
cleaning, and waste disposal.
CAUTION Improper cleaning methods and the use of certain cleaning
and disinfecting agents can cause damage to the plastic
components that will degrade imaging performance or
increase the risk of electric shock. Refer to probe safety and
handling precautions on Probes 13.
t
Biopsy 3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Special Concerns
Accessories and Supplies
Required supplies
The following supplies are typically used for a biopsy
procedure:
S Pre-packaged biopsy procedure kit with hospital

approved instrumentation.
S The probe to be used for the biopsy needle guidance.
S The mounting bracket, needle guides, and sterile probe
sheath kits for the specific probe to be used.
Ordering replacement supplies

Refer to Appendix D for more information.
Biopsy 4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines
Biopsy Procedure
A typical biopsy examination might proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that all supplies for the biopsy procedure are

on hand before beginning the imaging session.
2. Prepare the patient for the biopsy procedure
according to accepted practices at your facility.
3. Explain the biopsy procedure to the patient, along
with any other instructions.
4. Prepare the probe, biopsy guide, and probe sheath.
5. Follow the basic B-Mode scan procedures outlined in
Basic Scan and B-Mode to locate the anatomical site
to be biopsied.
To display the Biopsy Guidelines:
Access Biopsy Lines from the B-Mode Sub-Menu page two.

display page two.
Press the top of the Biopsy Lines rocker switch to display

the guidelines. The menu selection is highlighted.
Press the top of the Biopsy Lines rocker switch to disable

the guidelines. The menu selection is not highlighted.
The Biopsy Guidelines adjust along with image adjustments,

such as image inversion/rotations, zoom and depth changes.
t
Biopsy 5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines
Biopsy Procedure (cont’d)
BX-3
.
Illustration 442. Biopsy Guide Zone Example
NOTE: The acceptable deviation is between 2 mm and

4 mm. If the deviation is greater than this, call Service.
Biopsy 6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines
Needle Guide Type Preset

A preset is provided in Set Up/Custom Display page 1 to
choose the type of biopsy guide angle (guide zone) display to
conform with desired target depth/location. Selection for
respective probes is available from the chart below.
Depth in cm at Center Channel

Fixed–Angle Multi–Angle
Probe BX-1 BX-2 BX-3 MBX-1 MBX-2 MBX-3
C364/CBF n/a n/a 8.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
C551/CAE n/a n/a 7.0 4.0 5.5 7.0
C721 n/a 3.0 n/a n/a n/a n/a
C386 n/a n/a n/a 4.0 6.0 8.0
546L n/a n/a n/a 4.0 5.5 7.0
L764/LH 2.0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
739L 2.0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
LA39 1.5 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
S317 n/a n/a 8.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
T739 2.0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Table 73. Biopsy Guide Attachment Selection
needle to track a path outside the displayed lines.

.
on the guide, otherwise the needle will not follow the
displayed guide zone which could result in repeated biopsies
or patient injury.
NOTE: Although the multi-angle guides are compatible with

the Civco Ultrapro and Ultrapro II, it is recommended the
multi-angle guides only be used with the Ultrapro II.
t
Biopsy 7
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines
Needle Guide Type Preset (cont’d)
Illustration 443. Biopsy Guide Depth Selection
DANGER When the biopsy guidelines are displayed, the message:
“Confirm BX type of Bracket”
is displayed at the bottom of the screen with the angle

selected in the Custom Display Menu page 1.
Ensure that the (M)BX type selected for each probe in each
exam category for each preset is the same as the angle
selected on the biopsy guide.
Biopsy 8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines
E721 Type Selection

When the E721 probe is attached and active, the needle
guide type selection choices in Set Up/Custom Display
page 1 are:
S TV0° Reusable metal guide with a 0 degree offset angle.

S TR5° Civco disposable guide with a 5 degree offset angle.
Illustration 444. TV0° Biopsy Guide
Illustration 445. TR5° Biopsy Guide
t
Biopsy 9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines
Biopsy Guide Attachment

Convex, Sector and Linear probes have optional biopsy
guide attachments for each probe. The guide consists of a
non-disposable bracket to attach to the probe, disposable
needle clip to attach to the bracket, sheath, gel (sterile gel if
necessary) and disposable needle barrels.
The disposable needle barrels are available for a variety of

needle sizes.
Fixed Needle Guide Assembly

Identify the appropriate biopsy guide bracket by matching the
label on the bracket with the probe to be used.
Illustration 446. C551 Biopsy Guide Bracket
Biopsy 10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines
Fixed Needle Guide Assembly (cont’d)

Orient the bracket so that the needle clip attachment will be
on the same side as the probe orientation mark (ridge).
Probe Orientation
Mark
Bracket
Illustration 447. Probe/Bracket Alignment
Attach the biopsy bracket to the probe by sliding the bracket

over the end of the probe until it clicks or locks in place.
t
Biopsy 11
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines

Place an adequate amount of coupling gel on the face of the
probe.
Place the proper sanitary sheath over the probe and biopsy
bracket. Use the rubber bands supplied to hold the sheath in
place.
Illustration 448. Applying Sanitary Sheath
Biopsy 12 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines

Snap the fixed or adjustable needle clip onto the biopsy guide
bracket.
Sheath
Illustration 449. Fixed Needle Clip Attachment
Choose the desired gauge (size) needle barrel. Twist it back

and forth to remove it from the plastic tree.
Illustration 450. Needle Barrels
t
Biopsy 13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines

Place the needle barrel into the needle clip with the desired
gauge facing the needle clip and snap into place.
18
Illustration 451. Needle Barrel Installation
CAUTION Ensure that all guide parts are seated properly prior to
perfoming a biopsy.
Biopsy 14 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines
The Procedure
Place coupling gel on the scanning surface of the
probe/sheath/biopsy guide assembly.
Activate the biopsy guidelines on the system through the
B-Mode Sub-Menu page two. Press the Sub-Menu Select
rocker switch, if necessary, to display page two.
.
Scan to locate the target. Center the target in the electronic
guideline path.
NOTE: Enabling color flow would allow for visualization of

the vascular structure around the area to be biopsied.
Place the needle in the guide between the needle barrel and
needle clip.
Post Biopsy
When the biopsy is complete, remove the needle barrel,
needle clip and probe sheath. Properly dispose of these
items in accordance with current facility guidelines.
The biopsy bracket can be sterilized and reused.
t
Biopsy 15
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines
E721 Probe Biopsy Guide
Preparation
To prepare the E721 for use:
1. Remove the probe from the box and carefully

examine it for any damage.
2. If the biopsy guide is to be attached, use the filling
removal tool (Illustration 453) to clean out the
attachment area on the probe head.
Illustration 453. Attachment Filling Removal
. 3. Clean, then disinfect/sterilize the probe.
NOTE: Ensure that protective gloves are worn.
Biopsy 16 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines
Preparation (cont’d)
Install the sheath:
.
1. Remove the sheath from its package. Do not unroll
the sheath.
NOTE: Remember to rinse all sanitary probe sheaths of
powder before placing on the probe. Powder can
degrade the displayed image.
.
2. Place an adequate amount of ultrasound gel inside
the sheath tip (the gel is between the sheath inner
surface and the probe aperture).
NOTE: Ensure that only acoustic coupling gel is used for this
purpose.
3. Place the sheath tip over the probe aperture and then
pull the sheath end toward the probe handle.
4. Inspect the sheath.
Illustration 454. Probe with Sheath
5. Place a rubber band/twist lock or clamp over the

sheath end of the probe shaft (Illustration 454).
Ensure the rubber band/twist lock or clamp is tight
around the sheath. Rub a finger over the tip of the
probe to ensure all air bubbles have been removed.
t
Biopsy 17
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines
Preparation (cont’d)
Illustration 455. Reusable Metal Biopsy Guide 0° Angle
6. If a biopsy is to be performed, snap the metal or

plastic biopsy guide on to the probe over the sheath
(Illustration 455). Ensure the guide is properly
seated.
7. Place an adequate amount of ultrasound gel on the
gel-filled sheath tip outer surface.
Illustration 456. Civco Disposable Biopsy Guide 5° Angle
Biopsy 18 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines
Scanning
1. Scan the patient. The probe handle orientation mark
indicates the image scan plane. Be sure that the
Image Reverse function is Off.
Illustration 457. Probe and Guide Zone Alignment
2. Rotate, retract, or advance the probe, as necessary,

to see all pertinent anatomy.
3. If a biopsy is being performed, activate the biopsy
guidelines.
CAUTION Scan the patient to determine the correct puncture

depth and site before inserting the needle.
t
Biopsy 19
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines
Post Biopsy
If the exam is over:
1. Remove the biopsy guide and twist lock/clamp.

Remove and properly dispose of the sheath.
2. Thoroughly clean the probe and equipment. Refer to
your institution’s infection control guidelines for
disinfection/sterilization protocols.
3. After sterilization, return the probe to its carrying case.
Biopsy 20 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines
Biopsy Probes
Biopsy Guide Attachment

Probe Application Biopsy Needle Sizes Procedure
Guide Repl. Kit
C364 Abdominal, Civco 14, 16, 18, 20, Civco Ultra-
OB/GYN 22, 25 AWG Pro E8385LC
C551 Abdominal, Civco 14, 16, 18, 20, Civco Ultra-
OB/GYN 22, 25 AWG Pro E8385LC
C721 Neonatal Civco 14, 16, 18, 20, Civco Ultra–
22, 25 AWG Pro E8385LC
E721 Endocavitary YMS Requires 25 cm H46222AD
needles
Civco 18 AWG H4550BG
739L Small Parts, Civco 14, 16, 18, 20, Civco Ultra-
Peripheral 22, 25 AWG Pro E8385LC
Vascular
L764 Mammography Civco 14, 16, 18, 20, Civco Ultra–
Small Parts 22, 25 AWG Pro E8385LC
T739 Intra-operative Civco 14, 16, 18, 20, Civco Ultra-
22, 25 AWG Pro E8385LC
LA39 Small Parts Civco 14, 16, 18, 20, Civco Ultra-
Mammography 22, 25 AWG Pro E8385LC
Multi Angle Biopsy Guide Attachment

Probe Application Biopsy Needle Sizes Procedure
Guide (Not Included) Repl. Kit
C364 Abdominal, Civco 14, 15, 16, 17, Civco
OB/GYN 18, 19, 20, 21, Ultra-Pro II
22, 23AWG
C386 Abdominal, Civco 14, 15, 16, 17, Civco
OB/GYN 18, 19, 20, 21, Ultra-Pro II
22, 23AWG
546L Small Parts, Civco 14, 15, 16, 17, Civco
Peripheral 18, 19, 20, 21, Ultra-Pro II
Vascular 22, 23AWG
S317 Abdominal Civco 14, 15, 16, 17, Civco
Cardiac 18, 19, 20, 21, Ultra-Pro II
22, 23AWG
Table 74. Probe Biopsy Charts
t
Biopsy 21
2177611–100 Rev 0
Guidelines
Biopsy 22 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probes
Probe Overview
Probe Discussion
This section gives an overview and description of each probe available for
t
the LOGIQ 500.
t
Probes 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probes
Probes 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Ergonomics
Probes have been ergonomically designed to:
S Handle and manipulate with ease

S Connect to the system with one hand
S Be lightweight and balanced
S Have rounded edges and smooth surfaces.
Cables have been designed to:
S Connect to system with appropriate cable length

S Stand up to typical wear by cleaning and disinfectant
agents, contact with approved gel, etc.
Cable handling Take the following precautions with probe cables:
S Keep free from wheels

S Do not bend the cable acutely
S Avoid crossing cables between probes.
Probe orientation Each probe is provided with an orientation marking (refer to

Illustration 458). This mark is used to identify the end of the
probe corresponding to the side of the image having the GE
orientation marking.
t
Probes 3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Ergonomics (cont’d)
Orientation
Marking
Illustration 458. Orientation Marking on Probe
Labeling
Each probe is labeled with the following information:
S Seller’s name and manufacturer

S Operating frequency
S GE part number
S Probe serial number
S Month and year of manufacture
S Probe designation
Probe designation is provided on the probe grip and the
top of the connector housing, so that it is easily read
when mounted on the system and is also automatically
displayed on the screen when the probe is selected.
Probes 4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Labeling (cont’d)
GEMS–Am GEMS–E GEMS–A
MANUFACTURED
e.g. SEPTEMBER 1993
Also found on
Probe Connector
Illustration 459. Probe Adapter Label
Illustration 460. Probe Handle Labels
t
Probes 5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Labeling (cont’d)
3
2
GEMS–Am GEMS–E GEMS–A
3
!
MANUFACTURED Also found on

e.g. SEPTEMBER 1993
Probe Adapter
Illustration 461. Probe Connector Labels
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Active
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Probe Probe
Orientation Marker
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
>
Illustration 462. Displayed Probe Information
Probes 6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Applications
Below is a list of probes and their intended applications.
Probe B510 C364 C386 C551 C721 E721 I739 LA39 546L 739L
Application
Abdomen
Small Parts
Periph. Vasc.
Obstetrics
Gynecology
Pediatrics
Neonatal
Urology
Surgery
Cardiac
Endocavity
Biopsy
= Main Application = Alternative Application = Option Kit available
Probe L764 P509 S220 S222 S316 S317 S611 T739 CWD2 CWD5
Application
Abdomen
Small Parts
Periph. Vasc.
Obstetrics
Gynecology
Pediatrics
Neonatal
Urology
Surgery
Cardiac
Transcranial
Biopsy
= Main Application = Alternative Application = Option Kit available
Table 75. Probe Indications for Use
t
Probes 7
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Specifications
Principal Image Doppler

Probe Clinical Frequency Frequency
Designation Uses (MHz) (MHz)
B510 Cardiac 5.0 4.0
C364 Radiology/ 3.3 2.5
Obstetrics
C386 Abdom./OB/GYN 3.5 2.5
C551 Radiology/ 5.0 4.0
Obstetrics
C721 Neonatal 6.6 5.0
E721 Transvaginal 6.6 5.0
Transrectal
I739 Intra–operative 6.7 5.0
546L Deep Vascular/ 5.2 4.0
Small Parts
739L Peripheral Vascular/ 6.7 5.0
Small Parts
L764 Mammo, PV & 6.6 5.0
Small Parts
LA39 Small Parts 8.7 5.0
P509 Cardiac 5.0 3.5
S220 Cardiac 2.5 2.2
S222 Transcranial, 2.9 2.0
Cardiac
S317 Cardiac/Abdom. 3.3 2.5
T739 Intra–operative 6.7 5.0
B = Bipolar Sector C = Curved Array (Convex)
E = Endocavitary I = Intra–operative Linear
L = Linear Array P = Multiplane TEE
S = Phased Array Sector T = Intra–operative Linear
Table 76. System Probe Definitions
Probes 8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Specifications (cont’d)
System Operates
Adapter Designation Adaptable Probe Probe As:
PA 51 CBF C364
CAE C551
LH L764
MTZ E721
5S UC S316
W S220
Table 77. Probe Adapter Usage
Probe
Probe Material of Catalog Family
Name Headshell Use Type Number Mfg. by (Headshell) Part No.
B510 PU Intercavity Biplane H45202BT GEYMS 2123593
Sector
C364 PES Abdom. Convex H45202CF GEYMS CBF P9607AB
C386 NORYL Abdom./ Convex H45202CC GEYMS 2147187–2
OB/GYN
C551 PES Abdom. Convex H45202CE GEYMS CAE P9607AD
C721 NORYL Neonatal Convex H45202MN GEYMS MTZ 2121267-2
E721 PES Intercavity Convex H45202MT GEYMS MTZ P9607AF
I739 NORYL Intra–op. Linear H45202JG GEYMS 2147189–2
546L NORYL Abdom. Linear H45202LE GEYMS 2144266–2
Superficial
739L NORYL Superficial Linear H45202AG GEYMS 2107460–2
L764 PES Sm. Parts Linear H45202HP GEYMS LH 2121377-2
LA39 NORYL Superficial Linear H45202LA GEYMS 2155078–2
P509 PU Intercavity Multi H45202RT GEYMS 2169773
plane
Sector
S220 PES Cardiac Sector H45202WG GEYMS W 2121793–2
S222 NORYL Trans- Sector H45202TC GEYMS 2159263
cranial
Table 78. LOGIQ t 500 Probe List
t
Probes 9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Probe
Probe Material of Catalog Family
Name Headshell Use Type Number Mfg. by (Headshell) Part No.
S316 PES Cardiac/ Sector H45202SC GEYMS UC P9606AB
Abdom.
S317 NORYL Cardiac/ Sector H45202SD GEYMS 2144268–2
Abdom.
S611 NORYL Cardiac/ Sector H45202SF GEYMS 2144267–2
Neonatal/
Pediatric
T739 NORYL Intra–op. Linear H45202TG GEYMS 2147188–2
CWD2 NORYL Cardiac Single H45202DB GEYMS 2123594
CWD
CWD5 NORYL Peripheral Single H45202DE GEYMS 2123595
Vascular CWD
CBF PES Abdom. Convex H46022CB GEYMS P9603AD
CAE PES Abdom. Convex H46022CA GEYMS P9603AE
MTZ PES Intercavity Convex H46022MT GEYMS P9603AU
UC PES Cardiac/ Sector H4163B GEYMS P9600BE
Abdom.
LH PES Sm. Parts Linear H46022LH GEYMS P9601AS
W PES Cardiac Sector H4162C GEYMS P9600BH
Table 78. LOGIQ t 500 Probe List (cont’d)
Probes 10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Connecting and Disconnecting a Probe

When connecting or disconnecting a probe, the probe port
should not be active. To ensure that the ports are not active,
place the system in the image freeze condition. Ultrasound
transmission is stopped until the system is unfrozen.
When activating a probe, system preset parameters such as

Depth, Focal Zone Number and Position, and image
Rotation are also activated. Refer to Customizing Your
System for more information.
Selecting a probe
Hints S Always start out with a probe that provides optimum focal
depths and penetration for the patient size and
application.
.
S Begin the scan session using the default Acoustic Output
setting for the probe and application.
NOTE: Selecting a new probe unfreezes the image.
t
Probes 11
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Care and Maintenance
Inspecting probes
Inspect the probe’s lens, cable, and casing after each use.
Look for any damage that would allow liquid to enter the
.
probe. If any damage is found, do not use the probe until it
has been inspected and repaired/replaced by a GE Service
After Each Use Representative.
Keep a log of all probe maintenance, along with a picture of

any probe malfunction.
Storing probes
After scanning and cleaning of the probe is completed, put
the probe in its carrying case to ensure safe storage.
Transporting probes
Secure the probe in its holder for moving short distances.
When transporting a probe a long distance, store it in its
carrying case.
Environmental Requirements
Probes should be operated, stored, or transported within the
parameters outlined below.
Operational Storage Transport

Temperature _ _
10 - 40 C _ _
–10 - 60 C _ _
–40 - 60 C
_ _
50 - 104 F _ _
14 - 140 F _ _
–40 - 140 F
Humidity 30-85% 30-90% 30-90%
non-condensing non-condensing non-condensing
Pressure 700-1060hPA 700-1060hPA 700-1060hPA
Table 79. Probe Environmental Requirements
Probes 12 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Probe Safety
Handling precautions
WARNING Ultrasound probes are highly sensitive medical instruments

that can easily be damaged by improper handling. Use care
when handling and protect from damage when not in use.
DO NOT use a damaged or defective probe. Failure to follow
these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment
damage.
Electrical shock hazard

Electrical The probe is driven with electrical energy that can injure the
Hazard patient or user if live internal parts are contacted by
conductive solution:
S DO NOT immerse the probe into any liquid beyond the

level indicated by the immersion level diagram. Refer to
Illustration 463 on Probes 17. Never immerse the probe
connector or probe adaptors into any liquid.
S DO NOT drop the probes or subject them to other types
of mechanical shock or impact. Degraded performance
or damage such as cracks or chips in the housing may
result.
S Inspect the probe before and after each use for damage
or degradation to the housing, strain relief, lens, and seal.
A thorough inspection should be conducted during the
cleaning process.
S DO NOT kink, tightly coil, or apply excessive force on the
probe cable. Insulation failure may result.
S Electrical leakage checks should be performed on a
routine basis by GE Service or qualified hospital
personnel. Refer to the service manual for leakage check
procedures.
t
Probes 13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Mechanical hazards
CAUTION A defective probe or excessive force can cause patient injury

or probe damage:
S Observe depth markings and do not apply excessive

force when inserting or manipulating intercavitary probes.
S Inspect probes for sharp edges or rough surfaces that
could injure sensitive tissue.
Special handling instructions
Using protective sheaths
CAUTION Protective barriers may be required to minimize disease

transmission. Probe sheaths are available for use with all
clinical situations where infection is a concern. Use of legally
Biological marketed, sterile probe sheaths is strongly recommended for
Hazard intra-cavitary and intra-operative procedures. Use of legally
marketed, sterile, pyrogen free probe sheaths is REQUIRED
for neurological intra-operative procedures.
Instructions. Custom made sheaths are available for each

probe. Each probe sheath kit consists of a flexible sheath
used to cover the probe and cable and elastic bands used to
secure the sheath.
Sterile probe sheaths are supplied as part of biopsy kits for

those probes intended for use in biopsy procedures. In
addition to the sheath and elastic bands, there are associated
accessories for performing a biopsy procedure which are
included in the kit. Refer to the biopsy instructions for the
specific probes in the Discussion section of this chapter for
further information.
Reordering. To reorder sheaths, refer to Reordering

Supplies in Appendix D.
CAUTION Devices containing latex may cause severe allergic reaction

in latex sensitive individuals. Refer to FDA’s March 29, 1991
Medical Alert on latex products.
Probes 14 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Probe handling and infection control

This information is intended to increase user awareness of
the risks of disease transmission associated with using this
equipment and provide guidance in making decisions directly
affecting the safety of the patient as well as the equipment
user.
Diagnostic ultrasound systems utilize ultrasound energy that

must be coupled to the patient by direct physical contact.
Depending on the type of examination, this contact occurs
with a variety of tissues ranging from intact skin in a routine
exam to recirculating blood in a surgical procedure. The level
of risk of infection varies greatly with the type of contact.
One of the most effective ways to prevent transmission

between patients is with single use or disposable devices.
However, ultrasound transducers are complex and expensive
devices that must be reused between patients. It is very
important, therefore, to minimize the risk of disease
transmission by using barriers and through proper processing
between patients.
CAUTION Adequate cleaning and disinfection are necessary to prevent

disease transmission. It is the responsibility of the
equipment user to verify and maintain the effectiveness of the
infection control procedures in use. Always use sterile,
legally marketed probe sheaths for intra-cavitary and
intra-operative procedures.
For neurological intra-operative procedures, use of a legally

marketed, sterile, pyrogen free probe sheath is REQUIRED.
Probes for neuro surgical use must not be sterilized with
liquid chemical sterilants because of the possibility of neuro
toxic residues remaining on the probe.
t
Probes 15
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Probe Cleaning Process

To clean the probe:
1. After each use, disconnect the probe from the

ultrasound console and remove all coupling gel from
After Each Use the probe by wiping with a soft cloth and rinsing with
flowing water.
2. Wash the probe with mild soap in lukewarm water.
Scrub the probe as needed using a soft sponge,
gauze, or cloth to remove all visible residue from the
probe surface. Prolonged soaking or scrubbing with a
soft bristle brush (such as a toothbrush) may be
necessary if material has dried onto the probe
surface.
3. Rinse the probe with enough clean potable water to
.
remove all visible soap residue.
4. Air dry or dry with a soft cloth.
Special Cleaning Instructions for the E721(MTZ): When

cleaning the E721(MTZ) probe, it is important to be sure that
all surfaces are thoroughly cleaned. This probe has an
adjustable two-part handle that must be disassembled to gain
access to all surfaces. To disassemble the handle,
completely remove the handle adjustment screw located
mid-way between the cable entry and probe tip. The two
handle halves and adjustment screw must be thoroughly
cleaned along with the main probe shaft as described earlier
in step 2. After rinsing and drying is completed, the probe
handle can be loosely reassembled for the disinfection
process.
Probes 16 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Probe Cleaning Process (cont’d)
C364/CBF
C386 C721
C551/CAE
ÏÏÏ
L764/LH S316/UC
546L S220/W
739L S222
LA39 S317
S611
Contact face within

Fluid Level Aperature Patient Environment
Illustration 463. Probe Immersion Levels
t
Probes 17
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Probe Cleaning Process (cont’d)
CWD5 CWD2
E721/MTZ
P509
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
B510
ÏÏ
I739 T739
Contact face within

Fluid Level Aperature Patient Environment
Illustration 463. Probe Immersion Levels (cont’d)
Probes 18 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Disinfecting probes
Ultrasound probes can be disinfected using liquid chemical
germicides. The level of disinfection is directly related to the
duration of contact with the germicide. Increased contact time
produces a higher level of disinfection.
After Each Use 2% Glutaraldehyde-based solutions have been shown to be
very effective for this purpose. Cidex is the only germicide
that has been evaluated for compatibility with the material
used to construct the probes.
CAUTION In order for liquid chemical germicides to be effective, all

visible residue must be removed during the cleaning process.
Thoroughly clean the probe, as described earlier before
attempting disinfection.
1. Prepare the germicide solution according to the

manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure to follow all
precautions for storage, use and disposal.
2. Place the cleaned and dried probe in contact with the
germicide for the time specified by the germicide
manufacturer. High-level disinfection is
recommended for surface probes and is required for
endocavitary and intraoperataive probes (follow the
germicide manufacturer’s recommended time).
Probes for neuro surgical intra-operative use must
NOT be sterilized with liquid chemical sterilants
because of the possibility of neuro toxic residues
remaining on the probe. Neurological procedures
must be done with the use of legally marketed, sterile,
pyrogen free probe sheaths.
3. After removing from the germicide, rinse the probe
following the germicide manufacturer’s rinsing
instructions. Flush all visible germicide residue from
the probe and allow to air dry.
t
Probes 19
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
.
Disinfecting probes (cont’d)
Special Disinfecting Instructions for the E721(MTZ): To
properly disinfect the E721(MTZ) probe, the probe handle
can be reassembled loosely so that the entire probe with
handle can be immersed in the germicide solution. The
adjustment screw must be kept loose so that germicide can
penetrate to all surfaces. After immersing, rotate and shake
the probe while it is below the surface of the germicide to
eliminate air pockets. Allow the germicide to remain in
contact with the fully immersed probe, for high level
disinfection, according to the germicide manufacturer’s
recommended time. To remove all germicide residue, final
rinsing should be done following the germicide
manufacturer’s instructions. Remove excess water by
shaking and allow to air dry.
CAUTION CREUTZFIELD–JACOB DISEASE

Neurological use on patients with this disease must be
avoided. If a probe becomes contaminated, there is no
Biological adequate disinfecting means.
Hazard
Probes 20 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Disinfecting probes (cont’d)
WARNING Ultrasound transducers can easily be damaged by improper

handling and by contact with certain chemicals. Failure to
follow these precautions can result in serious injury and
equipment damage.
S Do not immerse the probe into any liquid beyond the level
specified for that probe. Never immerse the transducer
connector or probe adapters into any liquid.
S Avoid mechanical shock or impact to the transducer and
do not apply excessive bending or pulling force to the
cable.
S Transducer damage can result from contact with
inappropriate coupling or cleaning agents:
S Do not soak or saturate transducers with solutions
containing alcohol, bleach, ammonium chloride
compounds or hydrogen peroxide
S Avoid contact with solutions or coupling gels
containing mineral oil or lanolin
S Avoid temperatures above 60° C.
S Inspect the probe prior to use for damage or
degeneration to the housing, strain relief, lens and seal.
Do not use a damaged or defective probe.
t
Probes 21
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Overview
Coupling gels
Applying In order to assure optimal transmission of energy between

the patient and probe, a conductive gel or couplant must be
applied liberally to the patient where scanning will be
performed.
Precautions Coupling gels should not contain the following ingredients as

they are known to cause probe damage:
S Methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, or any other

alcohol-based product
S Mineral oil
S Iodine
S Lotions
S Lanolin
S Aloe Vera
S Methyl or Ethyl Parabens (para hydroxybenzoic acid)
Planned Maintenance
CAUTION The following maintenance schedule is suggested for the
system and probes to ensure optimum operation and safety.
Do the Daily After As Necessary

Following Each Use
Inspect the Probes X
Clean the Probes X
Disinfect Probes X
Table 80. Planned Maintenance Program
Probes 22 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
Introduction
The LOGIQ t 500 supports four types of probes:
S Curved Array (Convex). Curved Array (Convex) probes,
including ‘micro’ convex, are usually designated by the
prefix/suffix “C”; the endocavity probe is designated by
the prefix/suffix “E”.
S Linear Array. Linear Array probes are designated by the
prefix/suffix “L”; the linear intra-operative probes are
designated by the prefix/suffix “I” or “T”.
S Phased Array Sector. Phased Array Sector probes are
designated by the prefix/suffix “S”; the biplane TEE probe
is designated by the prefix/suffix “B”; the multi-plane TEE
probe is designated by the prefix/suffix “P”.
S Continuous Wave Doppler. Continuous Wave Doppler
probes are designated by the prefix/suffix “CWD”.
Probe naming conventions
TYPE
C364L *Type
B Biplane TEE
Array Aperture (mm) C Convex
Center Frequency
CWD Pencil CWD
Type
E Endo (TR/TV)
CWD2 I
L
I–shaped intra–operative
Linear
Center Frequency P Multiplane TEE
Type
S Sector
* Type can be a prefix or a suffix T T–shaped intra–operative
Table 81. Probe Naming Conventions
t
Probes 23
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
Curved Array (Convex) Probes

There are five convex probes for the system: the C364 (CBF),
C386, C551 (CAE), C721, and E721 (MTZ).
Biopsy Guide Zone

The type of guide displayed for the convex probes is
illustrated below.
Illustration 464. Typical Convex Probe Biopsy Guide Zone
Probes 24 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
C364 (CBF)
Description
The C364 probe is a general purpose probe for obtaining
B-Mode, Doppler, and Color Flow data for the intended uses
described in the table below.
Intended Capabilities
Uses and Features
General Purpose SWide field of view
Radiology SPenetration
SGood B-Mode Resolution
OB/GYN
SCFM/Doppler detectability
SErgonomics for scanning
and cleaning
Table 82. C364 Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
The C364 is capable of biopsies with a reusable Biopsy
Bracket and disposable needle barrels. Electronic guide
zone show the needle path.
Accessories
Biopsy Guides Disposable needle barrels for different size needles.
Sterile Sheaths Disposable sterile sheaths for infection prevention.
Illustration 465. C364 Probe
t
Probes 25
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
C386
Description
The C386 probe is a general purpose convex probe for
obtaining B-Mode, Doppler and Color flow data for the
intended uses described in the table below.
Uses and Features
OB/GYN SWideband for B-Mode reso-
General Abdominal lution & homogenity
SCFM/Doppler sensitivity
SWide field of view
SLarge radius for better
surface contact
and cleaning
Biopsy capability
The C386 is capable of biopsies with a reusable Bracket and
disposable Needle Barrels. Electronic guidezone shows the
needle path.
Accessories
Biopsy Guides Disposable needle barrels for different size needles. The
bracket is reuseable.
Probes 26 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
C551 (CAE)
Description
Uses and Features
General Purpose SWide field of view
Radiology SGood B-Mode Resolution
Obstetrics and Gynecology
and cleaning
Biopsy capability
Accessories
t
Probes 27
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
C721
Description
Uses and Features
Neonatal SSmall Footprint
Pediatrics SWide field of view
and cleaning
Biopsy capability
Accessories
ÎÎÎÎ
Probes 28 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
E721 (MTZ)
Description
The E721 probe is an endocavitary probe for obtaining
Uses and Features
Transvaginal SWide field of view
Transrectal SSmall headshell and probe
shaft
SAdjustable handle angle
and cleaning
Table 86. E721 Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
The E721 is capable of biopsies with a reusable biopsy
guide. Electronic guide zone show the needle path.
Accessories
Biopsy Guides Non-disposable metal guide. (See biopsy kit user manual for
cleaning and disinfection instructions.)
Illustration 469. E721 Probe
t
Probes 29
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
Linear Array Probes

There is currently six linear probes for the system: the I739,
546L, 739L and L764 (LH), T739 and LA39 probes.
Biopsy Guide Zone

The type of guide displayed for the linear probe is illustrated
below.
Illustration 470. Typical Linear Probe Biopsy Guide Zone
Probes 30 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
I739
Description
The I739 probe is a linear probe intended for intra-operative
applications as described in the table below:
Uses and Features
Intra-operative imaging SLow height “I” shaped
Superficial imaging for micro-case
organs with space SLong and light probe cable
constraints SWideband for B-Mode reso-
lution & homogenity
SSlant Scan
SCFM Doppler sensitivity
and cleaning
Table 87. I739 Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
No biopsy guide or guide zone display is available.
Illustration 471. I739 Probe
t
Probes 31
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
546L
Description
The 546L probe is a general purpose linear probe for
Uses and Features
Small Parts SWide field of view
Deep vessel vascular SSlant Scan
SGood penetration and
General Abdominal and resolution for deep vascular
OB/GYN
SWideband for B-Mode reso-
lution & homogenity
and cleaning
Table 88. 546L Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
The 546L is capable of biopsies with a reusable Bracket and
needle path.
Accessories
Illustration 472. 546L Probe
Probes 32 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
739L
Description
The 739L probe is a general purpose probe for obtaining
Uses and Features
Small Parts SWide field of view
Peripheral Vascular SSlant scan
lution & homogenity
and cleaning
Table 89. 739L Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
The 739L is capable of biopsies with a reusable Biopsy
Accessories
Illustration 473. 739L Probe
t
Probes 33
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
L764 (LH)
Description
The L764 probe is a general purpose probe for obtaining
Uses and Features
Mammography SWide field of view
Small Parts SGood B-Mode Resolution
SCFM Doppler detectability
Peripheral Vascular
and cleaning
Table 90. L764 Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
The L764 is capable of biopsies with a reusable Biopsy
Accessories
Illustration 474. L764 Probe
Probes 34 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
T739
Description
The T739 probe is a linear probe intended for intra-operative
applications as described in the table below:
Uses and Features
Intra-operative imaging SLow height “T” shaped
Superficial imaging for micro-case
organs with space SLong and light probe cable
constraints SSlant scan
lution & homogenity
and cleaning
Table 91. T739 Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
The T739 is capable of biopsies with a reusable Bracket and
needle path.
Accessories
Illustration 475. T739 Probe
t
Probes 35
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
LA39
Description
The LA39 probe is a general purpose linear probe for
Uses and Features
Intra-operative imaging SSlant scan
Superficial imaging for SWideband for B-Mode
organs with space resolution & homogenity
constraints SCFM Doppler sensitivity
and cleaning
Table 92. LA39 Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
The LA39 is capable of biopsies with a reusable Bracket and
disposable Needle Barrels.
Electronic guidezone shows the needle path.
Accessories
Illustration 476. LA39 Probe
Probes 36 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
Sector Probes
There is currently seven sector probes for the system: the
S220 (W), S222, S316 (UC), S317, S611, B510 and P509
probes.
The P509 probe is not available in the USA.
Biopsy Guide Zone

The type of guide displayed for the sector probes is illustrated
below.
Illustration 477. Typical Sector Probe Biopsy Guide Zone
t
Probes 37
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
S220 (W)
Description
The S220 probe is a general purpose probe for obtaining
Uses and Features
Cardiology SSmall footprint
General Abdominal SPenetration
SSteerable Doppler
and cleaning
Table 93. S220 Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
No biopsy guide or guide zone is available
Illustration 478. S220 Probe
Probes 38 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
S222
Description
Uses and Features
Transcranial SSmall footprint
SDedicated handle design for
Cardiology Transcranial
SWideband for B-Mode
resolution & homogenity
and cleaning
Biopsy capability
No biopsy guide or guidezone display is available.
t
Probes 39
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
S316 (UC)
Description
Uses and Features
General Abdominal SSteerable Doppler
and cleaning
Biopsy capability
Accessories
Probes 40 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
S317
Description
The S317 probe is a general purpose sector probe for
Uses and Features
General Abdomen SSteerable Doppler
lution & homogenity
SErgonomically designed mi-
cro-case for scanning and
cleaning
Biopsy capability
The S317 is capable of biopsies with a reusable Bracket and
needle path.
Accessories
t
Probes 41
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
S611
Description
The S611 probe is a general purpose sector probe for
Uses and Features
Cardiology, Pediatric and SSmall footprint
Neonatal SSteerable Doppler
Neonatal head SWideband for B-Mode reso-
lution & homogenity
SErgonomically designed
micro-case for scanning
and cleaning
Biopsy capability
Accessories
Sterile Sheaths Disposable sterile sheaths for infection prevention
Probes 42 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
B510
Description
The B510 probe is a Biplane Transesophageal probe for
obtaining B-Mode, Doppler, and Color Flow data within the
Uses and Features
Cardiology from the SSmall footprint
Esophagus SBiplane imaging
SSteerable Doppler
SErgonomics for one hand
manipulation of the
handle
Table 98. B510 Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
Accessories
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
.
Illustration 483. B510 Probe
NOTE: Refer to the User Manual that comes with the probe
for details on handling, operation and cleaning.
t
Probes 43
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
P509
Description
The P509 probe is a Multi-plane Transesophageal probe for
obtaining B-Mode, Doppler, and Color Flow data within the
The P509 probe is not available in the USA.
Uses and Features
Cardiology from the SSmall footprint
Esophagus SMultiplane imaging
SSteerable Doppler
SErgonomics for one hand
manipulation of the
handle
Table 99. P509 Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
Accessories
.
Illustration 484. P509 Probe
NOTE: Refer to the User Manual that comes with the probe
for details on handling, operation and cleaning.
Probes 44 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
CWD Probes
There is currently two pencil CWD probes for the system:
CWD2 and CWD5 probes.
CWD2
Description
The CWD2 probe is a pencil CWD probe for obtaining
Continous Wave Doppler data within the intended uses
Uses and Features
CW Doppler for Cardiology SHigh sensitivity
and Abdomen ST-bar support for holding
and cleaning
Table 100. CWD2 Intended Uses
Illustration 485. CWD2 Probe
t
Probes 45
2177611–100 Rev 0
Probe Discussion
CWD5
Description
The CWD5 probe is a pencil CWD probe for obtaining
Continous Wave Doppler data within the intended uses
Uses and Features
CW Doppler for Peripheral SHigh sensitivity
Vascular ST-bar support for holding
and cleaning
Table 101. CWD5 Intended Uses
Illustration 486. CWD5 Probe
Probes 46 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
User Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Operator Diagnostics
Quality Assurance
System Care and Maintenance
This section describes basic maintenance items available to the user. Error
messages are described, diagnostic tests available to the user are outlined,
suggested quality assurance checks are presented and routine system
maintenance is detailed.
t
User Maintenance 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
User Maintenance
User Maintenance 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
Introduction
Listed in this section are problem or system messages that
may be encountered, possible causes for the problem or
message, and the appropriate action to take to correct the
situation. If additional information or assistance is needed
contact your local Applications, Sales or Service
Representative.
t
User Maintenance 3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
Who To Contact
For additional information or assistance, please contact your
local distributor or the appropriate support resource listed
below:
USA
GE Medical Systems TEL: (1) 800–437–1171
Ultrasound Service Engineering FAX: (1) 414–647–4090
4855 W. Electric Avenue
Milwaukee, WI 53219
Customer Answer Center TEL: (1) 800–682–5327 or

(1) 414–524–5255
CANADA
Ultrasound Service Engineering
Milwaukee, WI 53219

(1) 414–524–5255
LATIN & SOUTH AMERICA

Ultrasound Service Engineering
Milwaukee, WI 53219

(1) 414–524–5255
EUROPE
GE Medical Systems Europe TEL: (33) (1) 30.70.40.40
European Support Center FAX: (33) (1) 30.70.42.50
283 rue de la Minière
BP 34
78533 BUC CEDEX
FRANCE
ASIA
GE Medical Systems Asia TEL: (81) 426–56–0033
Asia Support Center FAX: (81) 426–56–0053
67–4 Takakura cho, Hachiouji–shi
Tokyo, 192
JAPAN
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
Who To Contact (cont’d)
AUSTRIA
GE GesmbH Medical Systems Austria TEL: 0660 8651 toll free
Prinz Eugen Strasse 8/8 FAX: +43 1 505 38 74
A–1040 WIEN TLX: 136314
BELGIUM
GE Medical Systems Benelux TEL: +32 0 3 320 12 11
Gulkenrodestraat 3 FAX: +32 0 3 320 12 59
B–2160 WOMMELGEM TLX: 72722
DENMARK
GE Medical Systems Danmark TEL: +45 45 51 00 55
Skovlytoften 4 FAX: +45 42 42 59 89
DK–2840 HOLTE
FRANCE
GE Medical Systems TEL: +33 1 46 10 01 30
738 rue Yves Carmen FAX: +33 1 46 10 01 20
F–92658 BOULOGNE CEDEX
GERMANY
GE Medical Systems TEL: +49 69 9760 7380
Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG FAX: +49 69 7682 237
Praunheimer Landstrasse 50 TLX: 412002 GEGF D
D–60488 FRANKFURT AM MAIN
GREECE
GE Medical Systems Hellas TEL: +30 1 93 24 582
41, Nikolaou Plastira Street FAX: +30 1 93 58 414
G–171 21 NEA SMYRNI
ITALY
GE Medical Systems Italia TEL: +39 39 20 881
Via Monte Albenza 9 FAX: +39 39 73 37 86
I–20052 MONZA TLX: 3333 28
NETHERLANDS
GE Medical Systems Nederland B.V. TEL: +31 304 79711
Atoomweg 512 FAX: +31 304 11702
NL–3542 AB UTRECHT
POLAND
GE Medical Systems Polska TEL: +48 2 625 59 62
Krzywickiego 34 FAX: +48 2 615 59 66
P–02–078 WARSZAWA
t
User Maintenance 5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
Who to Contact (cont’d)

PORTUGAL
GE Medical Systems Portuguesa S.A. TEL: +351 2 2007696/97
Rua Sa da Bandeira, 585 FAX: +351 2 2084494
Apartado 4094 TLX: 22804
P–4002 PORTO CODEX
RUSSIA
GE VNIIEM TEL: +7 095 956 7037
Mantulinskaya UI. 5A FAX: +7 502 220 32 59
123100 MOSCOW TLX: 613020 GEMED SU
SPAIN
GE Medical Systems España TEL: +34 1 676 4012
Hierro 1 Arturo Gimeno +34 1 676 4047
Poligono Industrial I FAX: +34 1 675 3364
E–28850 TORREJON DE ARDOZ TLX: 22384 A/B GEMDE
SWEDEN
GE Medical Systems TEL: +46 87 50 57 00
PO–BOX 1243 FAX: +46 87 51 30 90
S–16428 KISTA TLX: 12228 CGRSWES
SWITZERLAND
GE Medical Systems (Schweiz) AG TEL: +41 41 425577
Sternmattweg 1 FAX: +41 41 421859
CH–6010 KRIENS
TURKEY
GE Medical Systems Turkiye A.S. TEL: +90 212 75 5552
Mevluk Pehliran Sodak FAX: +90 212 211 2571
Yilmaz Han, No 24 Kat 1
Gayretteppe
ISTANBUL
UNITED KINGDOM
IGE Medical Systems TEL: +44 753 874000
Coolidge House FAX: +44 753 696067
352 Buckingham Avenue
SLOUGH
Berkshire SL1 4ER
Manufacturer
GE YOKAGAWA MEDICAL SYSTEMS
67-4 Takakura cho, Hachiouji-shi TEL: (81) 426-56-0033
Tokyo, 192 FAX: (81) 426-56-0053
JAPAN
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
Trouble images
The LOGIQ 500 has the capacity to store as many as eight
trouble images. The trouble image files may be saved to
MOD for archival or loaded back into the system hard drive
for display and review. The trouble images on file can also
be retrieved for analysis through Insite, the exclusive
remote diagnostic capabilities of the LOGIQ family of
products.
To Store a Trouble Image to the Hard Drive

Should the LOGIQ 500 ever have a problem imaging, the
system has the capability of storing up to eight trouble
images on the hard disk drive. To store a trouble image:
1. Freeze the trouble image.

2. Press the Ctrl, W keys simultaneously.
The message “In progress. Please wait.” is displayed while
the image is being saved to the hard drive.
After the image has been saved, the message “ Input comment?
‘y’ or ‘n’ ” is displayed. Press ‘n’ for no comments. Press ‘y’ to
add a maximum of 42 characters as comments to the trouble
image file. Press Return after commenting is complete.
After image number eight is saved, there is a warning to

indicate the disk space is full. The ninth attempt to save a
trouble image will require writing over the first image, etc.
(first in, first out).
.
The message “ Overwrite the old image (DIAGIG00) ? ‘y’ or
‘n’ ” is displayed. Press ‘y’ to replace the old trouble image with
the new one. Press ‘n’ to cancel the trouble image store action.
NOTE: Trouble images do not display Patient Name, ID or

Hospital Name information. That portion of the image is
blanked out and will not be shown when the file is recalled for
display.
t
User Maintenance 7
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
To Save Trouble Images to MOD

To save trouble images to MOD:
S Select the Set Up Top menu.
.
S From the Set Up Sub-Menu, select Utility. The Utility
NOTE: MOD media used to save trouble images must first
be initialized (formatted) in the utility menu selection “09
Media Initialization”.
S From the Utility menu select “03 Trouble Image

Save/Load/Display” . Enter menu number 03 and press
Return.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
To Save Trouble Images to MOD (cont’d)

S From the Trouble Image Save/Load/Display menu select
“1: Save”. Enter menu number 1 and press Return.
Illustration 488. Trouble Image Save/Load/Display Menu
S A message will be displayed to place an MOD disk in the

drive and press any key to continue.
The system will read all trouble images from the hard drive
and display the image menu in two pages of four files
each. The line available under the file number, date/time
and mode information is the 42 character comment line.
t
User Maintenance 9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
Illustration 489. Saved Trouble Image Menu
Trouble image files must be saved one at a time.

S Enter the number of the file (i.e. “01”) and press Return.
The message “Saving now” is displayed.
The system will take a few moments to save the image file.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting

After the save operation is complete, the message “Press
‘Y’ to continue, or ‘Ctrl+R’ to return.” is displayed. Pressing
‘Y’ will prompt for another file menu number to be saved.
Pressing Ctrl+R will return to the previous menu screen.
Illustration 490. Trouble Image Save Complete
t
User Maintenance 11
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
To Load Trouble Images from MOD

Trouble images can be loaded from the MOD to the hard
drive. To load trouble images from the MOD:
S From the Set Up/Utility menu select “03 Trouble Image

Return.
“2: Load”. Enter menu number 2 and press Return.
S A message will be displayed to place an MOD disk in the
drive and press any key to continue.
The system will read all trouble images from the MOD
and display the image menu in two pages of four files
each. The line available under the file number, date/time
and mode information is the 42 character comment line.
Trouble image files must be loaded one at a time.
S Enter the number of the file to be loaded (i.e. “01”)
and press Return.
The message “Loading now” is displayed.
The system will take a few moments to load the image
file.
After the load operation is complete, the message “Press
‘Y’ to continue, or ‘Ctrl+R’ to return.” is displayed. Pressing
‘Y’ will prompt for another file menu number to be loaded.
Pressing Ctrl+R will return to the previous menu screen.
To Display Trouble Images

Trouble images can only be displayed from the files stored on
the hard drive.
S From the Set Up/Utility menu select “03 Trouble Image

Return.
“3: Display”. Enter menu number 3 and press Return.
A menu of the trouble Image files on the hard drive is
displayed in two pages of four files each if necessary.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
To Display Trouble Images (cont’d)
Illustration 491. Trouble Image Display Menu
S Enter the number of the file to be displayed (i.e. “01”)

and press Return.
The image will be displayed on the monitor for analysis.
Loose cables
If ECG cables are loose:
1. Check the ECG cable lead connection

OR
2. Check the connection on the back panel.
If peripheral cables are loose:
1. Check the connections on the back of the peripheral

OR
2. Check the connection on the back panel.
t
User Maintenance 13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
Display Messages
The LOGIQ 500 provides a variety of messages concerning
the status of the system’s operation.
S System Error Messages are displayed when a hardware

problem is detected.
S Operation Error Messages are displayed when the user
selects a control that is not appropriate to the current
scan mode or function.
S Operation Guide Messages are displayed to inform the
operator of a completed task or required action.
S Warning Messages are displayed for patient safety or
system failure reasons.
S System Preparation Message is displayed when the
system powers up.
These messages are displayed in the single line message
area at the bottom of the display. The message display time
varies depending on the type of message. Some messages
may be accompanied by an audio tone.
For Operation Error Messages, the user can choose to turn

on/off the audio tone that accompanies the display in Set
Up/System Parameters page 1.
The User can turn on/off the recording of the error message
line in Set Up/System Parameters page 4 (Maskline Record).
The following tables outline the error messages, their

possible cause and cure.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
System Error Message Description
Possible
Problem/ Possible Corrective
Category Message Cause Action
General SYS ERROR: BUS Bus error detected.
ERROR. *
PC: ########
AD: ########
SYS ERROR: FILE Requested file not
NOT FOUND. found. *
FILE: ############
SYS ERROR: BOARD Hardware board is non
NON EXISTENT. existent. *
BOARD: #####
SYS ERROR: Unexpected CPU
UNEXPECTED CPU exception is *
EXCEPTION. encountered.
SYS ERROR: File format is illegal.
ILLEGAL FILE *
FORMAT.
FILE: ############
SYS ERROR: SCSI SCSI device error is
ERROR. encountered. *
DEVICE: ###
CODE: ########
SYS ERROR: LOCAL Local CPU error is
CPU ERROR. encountered. *
BOARD: #####
SYS ERROR: Time out of waiting
INTERRUPT TIME interrupt. *
OUT.
BOARD: #####
VECTOR: ##
Table 102. System Error Message Description
* If System Error Message occurs, record the message and

contact a Service Representative. Be aware that the
system may be operating at reduced capabilities, some
functions inoperative or not operating at all.
t
User Maintenance 15
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
Operation Error Message Description
Possible
General Register is filled. Cannot register any
more because *
registration function
has reached its limit.
Register is empty. Cannot delete any
more because *
registration function is
empty.
Save data? ‘y’ or ‘n’. System requires Y to save data,
operator reaction to N to not save data.
save some data.
Overwrite existing There is pre-existing Y to save changes,
data? ‘y’ or ‘n’. customized data when N to ignore
saving. changes.
Please Select ‘y’ or ‘n’. A key other than those Enter Y or N.
specified was pressed.
Improper Data The data input is not Enter correct data.
Selected. correct.
Table 103. Operation Error Message Description
* If System Error Message occurs, record the message and

contact a Service Representative. Be aware that the
system may be operating at reduced capabilities, some
functions inoperative or not operating at all.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
Operation Error Message Description (cont’d)
Possible
Recording Check Printer. Paper Paper in the printer is Locate and clear the
Devices is jammed. jammed. paper jam.
Color Video Printer Check Printer. Ribbon Something is wrong Remove ribbon and
Cassette error. with the ribbon re-install.
cassette or its setting.
Check Printer. Paper The paper cassette Remove cassette, set
Cassette error. setting is wrong. and re-install.
Check Printer, Paper The printer is out of Add paper.
Supply empty. paper.
Shut the top hatch of The top hatch of the Open/shut top hatch.
printer. printer is open.
Shut the bottom hatch The bottom hatch of Open/shut bottom
of printer. the printer is open. hatch.
Check Printer, Paper is The placing of paper is Remove casette, adjust
incorrect. incorrect. and reinstall.
Check Printer. There is no response Turn power off and on
from the printer. again.
Table 103. Operation Error Message Description (cont’d)
t
User Maintenance 17
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
Possible
Recording Check M.I.C., No The maximum number Reverse cassette or
Devices Exposures Left. of prints have been install a new cassette.
Multi Image made.
Camera Check M.I.C., No Video There is no video Check all video
Input. signal being input to connections.
the M.I.C.
Check M.I.C. There is no response Turn power off, turn
from the M.I.C. power on.
Recording Check VCR. There is no response Check all VCR
Devices from the VCR. controls.
VCR Check VCR. No The VCR has no tape. Insert tape.
Cassette.
This function is not The function selected Perform from VCR
available. is not available in some front panel.
situations.
Protected. Check This tape has been Use non protected
Tape. write protected. tape.
Measurement & Measurement(s) The system requires Input necessary
Calculation Required. the operator to input measurements.
measurement(s).
Press ‘FREEZE’ to The system requires Freeze before all
complete. the operator to press measurements.
FREEZE before
completing measure-
ments.
No correct data left. The system no longer Enter new
has correct data. measurements.
Barcode sum check There is something Retry, use manual
error. wrong with the barcode calibration.
data.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
Possible
Scanning Transducer Calibration Probe change is taking Wait for process to
Function in Process. place. complete.
New Patient, Invalid, Input a proper Improper data has Input valid data.
ID/Name Function data. been input.
Press ’RETURN’ to An invalid key has Press Return.
exit. been pressed.
Data range over, Input The input data is too Numbers too large.
proper data. large.
Please answer ’y’ or A key other than those Y for yes, N for no.
’n’. specified was pressed.
Improper Data Improper data has Input proper data.
Selected. been input.
Miscellaneous (Y/N) Operator Decision Type in either
Requested Y or y for Yes
N or n for No
t
User Maintenance 19
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
Operation Guide Message Description
Possible
Preset & Setup Data is saved. The system completed NA
Function saving the data that
was requested.
Input value by Rocker The operator can use Use the Ellipse rocker
Button. the rocker button to switch.
input the value.
Input character strings. The operator needs to Type in characters.
input some character
strings.
Select an initial data. The operator needs to Input proper data.
select initial data.
’TRACKBALL’ and The operator can use NA
’SET’ are available. the Trackball and Set
key to operate the
function.
Recommended value The system completed NA
are copyed. copying the data that
was requested.
Scan Guide Invalid CFM image was The PRF is changed, NA
cleared. and invalid CFM image
is cleared.
Miscellaneous In progress. Please The system needs NA
wait. several seconds to do
something.
Table 104. Operation Guide Message Description
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
Operation Guide Message Description (cont’d)
Possible
VCR Search Searching. The VCR is searching NA
Guide the tape.
Search was completed. The VCR search is NA
completed.
Requested information The patient image Perform a system
doesn’t exist on the doesn’t exist on the search.
tape. tape.
Requested information The information doesn’t Check all patient
doesn’t exist in exist on the hard drive. information.
System.
Can not read Tape ID. The tape ID cannot be “Yes” to register new
Register the new tape? read. tape, “No” to cancel.
(y/n)
Retry to read Tape ID? The tape ID cannot be “Yes” to retry, “No” to
(y/n) read. cancel.
Please play VCR The operator has Press Play and
image and freeze at retried to read the tape Freeze.
the other frame. ID.
Save patient The operator pressed “Yes” to continue, “No”
information on VCR the key for saving to cancel.
Tape? (y/n) patient information on
the VCR tape.
Save patient The operator pressed “Yes” to save, “No” to
information to System? the key for saving cancel.
(y/n) patient information on
the hard drive.
System ID = ##### The tape was mounted NA
Tape ID = ##### or the new tape was
registered.
System ID = ##### The tape was mounted. NA
New Tape ID = #####
Table 104. Operation Guide Message Description (cont’d)
t
User Maintenance 21
2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
Warning Message Description
Possible
Temperature WARNING: System internal Reduce room
Safety Temperature error. temperature is at a temperature.
maximum, but not
caused by fan failure.
WARNING
WARNING: Cooling System fan has Call service.
Fan Failure. stopped working
properly.
WARNING: Cooling System internal Reduce room
Fan Failure. temperature is at a temperature; call
Temperature error. maximum, caused by service.
the fan not working
properly.
WARNING: HV The High Voltage is Call service.
Abnormal. abnormal.
WARNING: Probe The probe temperature Call service.
Temperature error. is at a maximum.
WARNING: NOW The system shutdown Call service.
START THE POWER process has begun.
OFF PROCESS.
Table 105. Warning Message Description
2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction
Refer to Section 4–3 of the LOGIQ t 500 Service Manual
(P9030TA).
The user is able to run diagnostic tests such as:
System Test 1 (reduced version)

Black & White Test Pattern
Color Test Pattern
Graphics Test Pattern
The test patterns can be used to adjust the display monitor or

peripheral displays. The system test provides a reduced
(pass/fail) version of the diagnostic used to check the
t
LOGIQ 500 software.
Probe Selection
Connect and select the C364 probe for diagnostic test
purposes.
t
User Maintenance 23
2177611–100 Rev 0
Accessing Diagnostics
To access the available diagnostics, select the Set Up Top Menu.
When Set Up is selected, the Set Up Sub-Menu is displayed.
Illustration 492. Set Up Sub-Menu
Select DIAG from the Set Up Sub-Menu. The diagnostic test

menu appears on the screen.
Illustration 493. Diagnostic Test-Menu
Type in the desired test number and press Return. The test
begins running or the test pattern is displayed.
EXE TIME is the test execution time. (The time needed to

run the test.)
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Test 1 (reduced)

Select number one from the diagnostic test menu.
System Test 1 is a collection of 24 individual tests that are

run in sequence. These are the full or reduced versions of
the hardware tests.
The diagnostics in System Test 1 are:
TEST NUMBER TEST NAME

03 Beam Former Test 1
05 Log Test
06 Frequency Characteristics Test
08 Doppler Test 1
09 Doppler Test 2
11 Color Flow Test 1
13 TLMP Test (Reduced)
14 DDSC Test (Reduced)
15 CINE Test (Reduced)
16 VIDO Test (Reduced)
17 VIDO & VPBM Test (Reduced)
18 EXBO Test (Reduced)
19 RCTL Test (Reduced)
20 PIOP Test (Reduced)
21 Keyboard RAM Test (Reduced)
27 Power Supply & Thermal Test
29 B-Mode Noise Floor Test
30 D-Mode Noise Floor Test
31 CFM Mode Noise Floor Test
Three possible messages will be displayed to the right of the

test name.
RUNNING – The test is in progress.
FAILED – The test was not completed successfully for

some reason.
PASSED – The test was run and completed successfully.
t
User Maintenance 25
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Test 1 (reduced) (cont’d)

Illustration 494 shows the screen display during system
Test 1 operation.
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS 03/21/94 01: 31: 50

System Test
03 Beam Former Test 1 Running
05 Log Test
06 Frequency Characteristic Test
08 Doppler Test 1
09 Doppler Test 2
13 TLMP Test (Reduced)
14 DDSC Test (Reduced)
15 CINE Test (Reduced)
16 VIDO Test (Reduced)
17 VIDO & VPBM Test (Reduced)
18 EXBO Test (Reduced)
19 RCTL Test (Reduced)
20 PIOP Test (Reduced)
21 Keyboard RAM Test (Reduced)
27 Power Supply & Thermal Test
29 B Mode Noise Floor Test
30 D Mode Noise Floor Test
31 CFM Mode Noise Floor Test
Illustration 494. System Test 1 Screen Display
Should any test fail, consider that the system may be

operating at reduced capabilities. Record the System Test 1
results and contact a local service representative.
Total run time for System Test 1 is approximately 15 minutes.
Test Pattern Black & White

Select number two from the Diagnostic Test Menu.
A black/white test pattern is displayed.
This pattern can be used to adjust the LOGIQ t 500 monitor

or peripheral displays.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Test Pattern Color

Select number three from the Diagnostic Test Menu.
A color video test pattern is displayed.
This pattern can be used to adjust the LOGIQ t 500 or

peripheral output devices.
Test Pattern Graphics

Select number four from the Diagnostic Test Menu.
A graphic video test pattern is displayed.
This checks the graphics generator of the LOGIQ t 500 and

can be used for monitors or peripheral devices.
t
User Maintenance 27
2177611–100 Rev 0
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Introduction
A good Quality Assurance Evaluation program consists of
planned systematic actions that provide the user with
adequate confidence that their diagnostic ultrasound system
will produce consistently high quality images and quantitative
information.
Therefore, it is in the best interests of every ultrasound user

to routinely monitor equipment performance.
The frequency of Quality Assurance evaluations should be

based on user’s specific needs and clinical practice.
Periodic monitoring is essential in order to detect the

performance changes that occur through normal aging of
.
system components. Routine equipment evaluations may
also reduce the duration of exams, number of repeat exams,
and maintenance time required.
Refer to the System Care and Maintenance section of this

chapter for system and peripheral routine preventive
maintenance instructions.
t
User Maintenance 29
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Typical Tests to Perform

Quality assurance measurements provide results relating to
system performance. Typically these are:
S Axial Measurement Accuracy

S Lateral Measurement Accuracy
S Axial and Lateral Resolution
S Penetration
S Functional & Contrast Resolution
S Gray Scale Photography.
With these tests, a performance baseline can be set at

installation with the phantom in your department. Future test
results can be compared to the baseline in order to maintain
a record of system performance trends.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Frequency of tests
Quality assurance tests are used to determine whether a
scanner is providing the same level of performance from day
to day.
Every 3 Months The frequency of testing varies with the amount of system
Or usage and modes to be tested. It is recommended that the
Every 400 Patients user perform quality assurance tests at least every three
Or
If system months or every 400 patient studies. Tests should also be
performance performed when a question about system performance
in question exists.
A mobile system may require more frequent tests.
Image quality should also be tested immediately after the

following events:
S Service calls
S System upgrades/modifications
S Dropped probe, power surge, etc.
t
User Maintenance 31
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Phantoms
Quality Assurance Evaluations should be done with
phantoms and test objects that are applicable to the
parameters being evaluated or to the user’s clinical practice.
Typical phantoms are composed of material that acoustically

mimic human tissue. Pins, anechoic and echogenic targets
are physically positioned to provide information for a variety
of tests.
Doppler phantoms are currently expensive and complicated

to deal with on the user level. If a problem with any Doppler
parameters or measurement is suspected, contact a local
service representative for evaluation.
The RMI 430GS phantom is recommended. It is the most

current one recommended to our field service personnel and
will provide the necessary targets and extended life
necessary for consistent system testing.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Lateral Distance
Measurement
Penetration
2
Axial Distance
Measurement 4
Contrast
Resolution
& 6
Gray Scale
Photography 4 3 2 1
8 Functional
Resolution
10
Lateral
Resolution 12
14
Axial 16
Resolution
RMI 403GS
Illustration 495. Typical Phantom
t
User Maintenance 33
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Baselines
An absolute necessity for a quality assurance program is
establishing baselines for each test or check. Baselines are
established after the system has been verified to be working
properly at installation or after a repair. If a probe or major
assembly is replaced, new baselines should be generated.
Baselines can be made by adjusting system parameters to

prescribed levels or to the best possible image. The key
factor to remember is reproducibility. The same conditions
must be reproduced for each periodic check.
All system parameters not displayed on the monitor should

be recorded for the permanent record.
Periodic Checks
Periodic checks are performed on a regular basis as
previously recommended. For the data to be valid, periodic
checks should mimic the baseline setup parameters.
The resulting image, when scanning the phantom exactly as

before, should be recorded and compared to the baseline.
When a matching image is obtained, it can be assumed that
the system performance has not degraded from the baseline.
If a significant difference between the baseline and periodic

check is noted, double check the system setup and repeat
the test. If the difference between the baseline and periodic
check persists, contact a local Service Representative.
Failing to reproduce the control settings as in the baselines

will introduce errors in the data and potentially invalidate the
results.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Results
Lack of standardization among test instruments, the wide
range of acceptance criteria, and incomplete knowledge
regarding the significance of certain performance parameters
prohibit the establishment of absolute performance criteria for
these tests.
Quality Assurance Evaluation results should be compared to

previously-recorded results.
Performance trends can then be detected. Unacceptable

performance or diminishing trends should be identified for
maintenance or repair before a malfunction or inappropriate
diagnosis occurs.
The user should determine the best method for recording and
archiving the baseline and periodic checks. In most cases
the choice is hard copy.
It is important to maintain good consistent records for

inspections that may arise, as well as to detect system
performance trends.
t
User Maintenance 35
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
System Setup
The user should tailor the tests to their particular needs. It is
certainly not necessary to make all checks with all probes. A
representative example, with the probes used most often by
the customer, should be adequate in judging system
performance trends.
Use a gray scale phantom as the scan object for the tests.
Commercial phantoms are supplied with its own operator
manual. Be familiar with proper phantom operating
procedures prior to use for quality assurance evaluations.
1. Adjust image monitor. Brightness and contrast should

be set to the normal viewing of a good gray scale
image.
2. Check all recording devices for proper duplication of
image monitor. Ensure that what is seen is what is
recorded. Check the B/W or Color page printer, VCR,
MIC, or Laser camera.
3. Annotate non-displayed image processing controls.
4. Set TGC slide pots to center (detent) position.
5. Place focal zone marker(s) in area of interest for an
optimum image.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Test Procedures
The following are recommended Quality Assurance tests. A
brief description of the test, the benefit it provides and steps
to accomplish the test are supplied.
The importance of recording scan parameters and consistent

record keeping cannot be stressed enough. Reproducibility
to monitor system trends is the key to quality assurance
evaluations.
Using the system’s dual image display format is often very

convenient and saves recording media.
t
User Maintenance 37
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Axial distance measurements

Description Axial measurements are the distance measurements
obtained along the sound beam.
Benefit The accurate measurement of the size, depth and volume of

a structure is a critical factor in determining a proper
diagnosis. Most imaging systems use depth markers and/or
electronic calipers for this purpose.
Method Axial distance should be measured in the near, mid and far
fields as well as in zoom. If necessary, different depths or
fields of view can be tested.
Procedure To measure axial distance:
1. Scan a test phantom with precisely-spaced vertical

pin targets.
2. Adjust all scan controls, as necessary, for the best
image of the pin targets to typical depths for the probe
being used.
3. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
4. Perform a standard distance measurement between
the pins at different points in the image. Record all
images for archiving.
5. Scan the vertical pins in zoom or at different
depth/scale factors.
6. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition; repeat the
distance measurements between pins and record the
7. Document the measurements for reference and future
comparison.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Axial distance measurements (cont’d)
Axial Distance
Measurement
.
Illustration 496. Example of Axial Distance Measurement
Contact a Service Engineer if vertical measurements differ by

more than 1.5% of the actual distance.
t
User Maintenance 39
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Lateral distance measurements

Description Lateral measurements are distance measurements obtained
perpendicular to the axis of the sound beam.
Benefit The purpose is the same as vertical measurements.

Precisely-spaced horizontal pin targets are scanned and
results compared to the known distance in the phantom.
Method Lateral distance should be measured in the near, mid and far
fields as well as in zoom. If necessary, different depths of
fields of view can be tested.
Procedure To measure lateral distance:

1. Scan a test phantom with precisely-spaced horizontal
pin targets.
image of the pin targets from side to side.
4. Perform a standard distance measurement between
the pins at different points in the image. Record all
5. Scan the horizontal pins in zoom or at different
distance measurements between pins and record the
comparison.
Lateral Distance
Measurement
.
Illustration 497. Example of Lateral Distance Measurement
Contact a Service Engineer if horizontal measurements differ

by more than 3mm or 3% of that depth, whichever is greater.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Axial resolution
Description Axial resolution is the minimum reflector separation between
two closely-spaced objects to produce discrete reflections
along the axis of the sound beam. It can also be monitored
by checking the vertical size of known pin targets.
Axial resolution is affected by the transmitting section of the

system and the probe.
Benefit In clinical imaging, poor axial resolution displays small

structures lying close together as a single dot. This may lead
to improper interpretation of the ultrasound image.
Procedure To measure Axial resolution:
1. Scan a test phantom with precisely-spaced vertical

pin targets.
image of the pin targets to typical depths for the probe
being used.
4. Perform a standard distance measurement of the pin
vertical thickness at different points in the image.
Record all images for archiving.
5. Scan the vertical pins in zoom or at different
vertical thickness measurements of the pins and
record the images for archiving.
comparison.
t
User Maintenance 41
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Axial resolution (cont’d)
Axial 1mm
Resolution
.
Illustration 498. Example of Axial Resolution
Axial resolution should remain stable over time. Contact a

Service Engineer if any changes are observed.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Lateral resolution
Description Lateral resolution is the minimum reflector separation
between two closely spaced objects to produce discrete
reflections perpendicular to the axis of the sound beam. It
can also be monitored by checking the horizontal size of
known pin targets.
Lateral resolution is dependent upon the beam width

produced by the probe. The narrower the beam, the better
the lateral resolution.
The beam width is affected by the frequency, degree of

focusing, and distance of the object from the face of the
probe.
Benefit Clinically, poor lateral resolution will display small structures

lying close together as a single dot. This may lead to
improper interpretation of the ultrasound image.
Procedure To measure lateral resolution:
1. Scan a test phantom with precisely-spaced horizontal

pin targets.
image of the pin targets from side to side.
4. Perform a standard distance measurement of the
horizontal thickness of a pin at different points in the
image. Record all images for archiving.
5. Scan the horizontal pins in zoom or at different
horizontal thickness measurements of the pins and
record the images for archiving.
comparison.
t
User Maintenance 43
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Lateral resolution (cont’d)
Lateral
Resolution
1mm
.
Illustration 499. Example of Lateral Resolution
"
Pin width should remain relatively constant over time
( 1mm). Dramatic changes in pin width may indicate
beamforming problems. Contact a Service Engineer if beam
width changes consistently over 2 to 3 periodic tests.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Penetration
Description Penetration is the ability of an imaging system to detect and
display weak echoes from small objects at large depths.
Penetration can be affected by the system’s:
S Transmitter/receiver
S Degree of probe focusing
S Attenuation of the medium
S Depth and shape of reflecting object
S Electromagnetic interference from local surroundings.
Benefit Weak reflecting echoes are commonly produced from the

internal structure of organs. Definition of this tissue texture is
important in the interpretation of the ultrasound findings.
Method Scan a phantom to see how echoes begin to fade as depth is

increased. The maximum depth of penetration is the point at
which homogeneous material in the phantom begins to lose
brightness.
Procedure To measure penetration:
1. Set the front panel TGC slide pots to their center

(detent) position.
2. Gain and acoustic output can be adjusted, as
necessary, since these values are displayed on the
monitor.
3. Scan a test phantom along the vertical pin targets to
typical depths for the probe being used.
4. Perform a standard distance measurement from the
top of the image displayed to the point at which
homogeneous material in the phantom begins to lose
brightness.
5. Document the depth measurement for reference and
future comparison.
t
User Maintenance 45
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Penetration (cont’d)
Penetration
.
Illustration 500. Example of Penetration
Contact a Service Engineer if the depth of penetration shifts

more than one centimeter (1cm) when using the same probe
and same system settings.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Functional resolution
Description Functional resolution is an imaging system’s ability to detect
and display the size, shape, and depth of an anechoic
structure, as opposed to a pin target.
The very best possible image is somewhat less important

than reproducibility and stability over time. Routine tests at
the same settings should produce the same results.
Benefit The data obtained will give a relative indication of the

smallest structure the system is capable of resolving at a
given depth.
Procedure To measure functional resolution:

(detent) position.
2. Gain and acoustic output can be adjusted as
monitor.
3. Scan a test phantom with a vertical row of anechoic
cyst targets to typical depths for the probe being
used.
4. Evaluate the cysts at various depths for a good
(round) shape, well-defined borders and no fill in.
Remember, TGC slide pots are centered and should
remain fixed. This may NOT provide optimal cystic
clearing.
5. Document all results for future reference and
comparison.
Functional
Resolution
.
Illustration 501. Example of Functional Resolution
Contact a Service Engineer if a greatly distorted image is

obtained.
t
User Maintenance 47
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Contrast resolution
Description Contrast resolution is the ability of an imaging system to
detect and display the shape and echogenic characteristics
of a structure.
Specific values measured are less important than stability

over time. Routine tests at the same settings should produce
the same results.
Benefit A correct diagnosis is dependent upon an imaging system’s

ability to differentiate between a cystic or solid structure
versus echo patterns from normal surrounding tissue.
Method A phantom with echogenic targets of different sizes and

depths should be used.
Procedure To measure contrast resolution:

(detent) position. Set dynamic range to 54 db.
2. Gain and acoustic output can be adjusted, as
monitor.
3. Scan a test phantom with echogenic targets at the
depths available.
4. Evaluate the echogenic targets for contrast between
each other and between the surrounding phantom
material. Remember, TGC slide pots are centered
and should remain fixed. This may NOT provide an
optimal scan image.
comparison.
Contrast
Resolution
4 3 2 1
.
Illustration 502. Example of Contrast Resolution
Contact a Service Engineer if the echogenic characteristics

or shapes of the targets appear distorted.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Gray Scale photography

Description Poor photography will cause loss of low level echoes and the
lack of contrast between large amplitude echoes.
Benefit When photographic controls and film processors are properly

adjusted, weak echoes, as well as strong echoes, are
accurately recorded on film.
Procedure 1. Adjust the camera according to the manufacturer’s

instructions until the hard copy and video display are
equal.
2. Scan the phantom and it’s echogenic contrast targets.
3. Make a hard copy photograph of the display and
compare it to the image on the video monitor for
contrast and weak echo display.
comparison.
Gray Scale
Photography
4 3 2 1
.
Illustration 503. Example of Gray Scale Photography
Contact a Service Engineer if camera cannot duplicate what

is on the image monitor.
NOTE: Optimization of brightness/contrast controls on the

display monitor is imperative in order to make sure that the
hardcopy and monitor look alike.
The display monitor is adjusted first. The hardcopy camera

or printer is adjusted to match the display monitor.
t
User Maintenance 49
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Setting up a Record Keeping System
Preparation
The following is needed:
S Quality Assurance binder

S Magnetic photo pages for hard copy images, or
Floppy disk holder for archived images
S Quality Assurance Checklists.
Display the following information while testing quality

assurance:
S Acoustic Output
S Gain
S Depth
S Probe
S Dynamic Range
S Set up new patient to be the name of the test.
Annotate the following:
S Any control where its value is NOT displayed.

S Significant phantom information.
Record Keeping
Complete the following:
1. Fill out the Ultrasound Quality Assurance Checklist for

each probe, as scheduled.
2. Make a hard copy or archive the image.
3. Compare images to baseline images and acceptable
values.
4. Evaluate trends over previous test periods.
5. File hard copy/archive floppy and checklist in Quality
Assurance binder.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
Ultrasound Quality Assurance Checklist
Performed By Date
System Serial Number
Probe Type Probe Model Serial Number
Phantom Model Serial Number Room Temperature
Acoustic Output Gain Focal Zone
Gray Map TGC Depth
Monitor Settings
Peripheral Settings
Other Image Processing Control Settings
Baseline Image Service

Value Tested Hard Copy/ Acceptable? Called Date
Test Range Value Archived Yes/No (Date) Resolved
Vertical
Measurement
Accuracy
Horizontal
Measurement
Accuracy
Axial
Resolution
Lateral
Resolution
Penetration
Functional
Resolution
Contrast
Resolution
Gray Scale
Photography
t
User Maintenance 51
2177611–100 Rev 0
Quality Assurance
2177611–100 Rev 0
Overview
t
Refer to Section 7 of the LOGIQ 500 Service Manual
(P9030TA) for any additional maintenance guidance.
Contact the local Service Representative for parts or planned

maintenance inspections. It is recommended that planned
maintenance be performed on the system every six months.
Inspecting the System

Examine the following on a monthly basis:
S Connectors on cables for any mechanical defects.

S Entire length of electrical and power cables for cuts or
abrasions.
S Equipment for loose or missing hardware.
S Control panel and keyboard for defects.
S Casters for proper locking operation.
DANGER To avoid electrical shock hazard, do not remove panels or

covers from console. This servicing must be performed by
qualified service personnel. Failure to do so could cause
serious injury.
Electrical If any defects are observed or malfunctions occur, do not

Hazard operate the equipment but inform a qualified service person.
Contact a Service Representative for information.
t
User Maintenance 53
2177611–100 Rev 0
Weekly Maintenance
t
The LOGIQ 500 system requires weekly care and
maintenance to function safely and properly. Clean the
following:
S System cabinet
S Monitor
S Operator control panel
S Foot switch
S Video Cassette Recorder (VCR)
S Multi Imaging Camera (MIC)
S Video Page Printer
Failure to perform required maintenance may result in

unnecessary service calls.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Cleaning the system

Prior to cleaning any part of the system:
1. Turn off the system power.
System cabinet To clean the system cabinet:
1. Moisten a soft, non-abrasive folded cloth with a mild,

general purpose, non-abrasive soap and water
solution.
.
2. Wipe down the top, front, back, and both sides of the
system cabinet.
NOTE: Do not spray any liquid directly into the unit.
Monitor To clean the monitor face and filter:
Remove the monitor filter as shown in Illustration 504.
Illustration 504. Monitor Filter Removal
1. Slide the filter clamps towards the monitor sides.

2. Pull the filter clamps out.
t
User Maintenance 55
2177611–100 Rev 0
Cleaning the system (cont’d)
Monitor (cont’d)
Use a soft, folded cloth and a glass cleaner solution. Apply

the glass cleaner to the cloth. Gently wipe the monitor face
and filter.
CAUTION Do Not use a glass cleaner that has a hydrocarbon base

(such as Benzene, Methyl Alcohol or Methyl Ethyl Ketone) on
monitors with the filter (anti-glare shield). Prolonged use of
.
such cleaners will damage the filter (anti-glare shield). Hard
rubbing will also damage the filter.
NOTE: When cleaning the monitor, make sure not to scratch

the monitor.
After cleaning the monitor face and filter, re-install the filter on
.
the monitor by reversing the removal procedure in
Illustration 504. Insert the filter clamps and slide them
inwards securely.
NOTE: Make sure that the filter is securely fixed by the filter
clamps. These are important to prevent a hazard from the
filter falling. A “click” sound will be heard when the filter
clamp is secured by the lock mechanism.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operator Controls To clean the operator control panel:

solution.
2. Wipe down operator control panel.
.
3. Use a cotton swab to clean around keys or controls.
Use a toothpick to remove solids from between keys
and controls.
NOTE: When cleaning the operator control panel, make sure

not to spill or spray any liquid on the controls, into the system
cabinet, or in the probe connection receptacle.
Foot Switch To clean the foot switch:

solution.
2. Wipe the external surfaces of the unit then dry with a
soft, clean, cloth.
VCR To clean the VCR:
1. Turn off the VCR power. If possible, disconnect the

power cord.
.
2. Wipe the external surfaces of the unit with a soft,
clean, dry cloth.
NOTE: Do not use a wet cloth or any cleaning fluid because it
may enter and damage the unit.
3. Clean the record and playback heads with a soft,
non-abrasive cleaning system, according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
For more See the VCR’s Operator Manual.

information
t
User Maintenance 57
2177611–100 Rev 0
Multi Image Camera To clean the MIC:

solution.
2. Wipe down the top, front, back, and both sides of the
unit.
For more Review the Multi Image Camera’s Operator Manual for
information details.
Video Page Printer To clean the external surface of the video page printer:
1. Turn off the power. If possible, disconnect the power

cord.
2. Wipe the external surfaces of the unit with a soft,
clean, dry cloth.
.
3. Remove stubborn stains with a cloth lightly dampened
with a mild detergent solution.
NOTE: Never use strong solvents, such as thinner or

benzine, or abrasive cleansers because they will damage the
cabinet.
No further maintenance, such as lubrication, is required.
To clean the surface of the print head:
1. Run the cleaning sheet (provided with the printer)

through the printer.
For more Review the Video Page Printer’s Operator Manual for details.
information
2177611–100 Rev 0
Other Maintenance
Cleaning the air filters
Clean the system’s air filters to ensure that a clogged filter
does not cause the system to overheat and reduce system
performance and reliability. It is recommended the filters be
cleaned quarterly (once every three months).
Quarterly
Locating The three air filters are located in the front and back of the
system:
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
LOGIQ 500
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Accessory
Panel For
Foot Switch
Connector
Store
Foot Switch
Here
Console Air
Filter Screen
1 ON
ON
Power Supply 0 OFF
Air Filter
Illustration 505. Location of Air Filters
t
User Maintenance 59
2177611–100 Rev 0
Removing To remove the console air filters:
1. Lift up on the Velcro tab securing the air filter.

2. Pull out the filter.
To remove the power supply air filter:
1. Pull out and up on the filter cover.

2. Pull the filter screen out.
Illustration 506. Filter Screen Removal
Cleaning To clean the filter:
1. Be sure to shake the filter in an area away from the

system.
.
2. Wash the filter in a mild soapy solution, rinse and air
dry or dry with a cloth.
NOTE: Allow wet filter to dry thoroughly before installing.
3. Slide the filter back into the system.
4. Secure the filter with the Velcro tab or cover.
Replacing illuminated key caps/lamps

Contact a local Service Representative when a key cap or
lamp needs to be replaced.
As Necessary
2177611–100 Rev 0
Planned Maintenance
The following maintenance schedule is suggested for the
system and probes to ensure optimum operation and safety.
Do the
Following Weekly Monthly Quarterly
Inspect the Unit X
Clean Air Filters X
Clean Foot switch X
Clean MIC X
Clean Monitor X
Clean Operator X
Control Panel
Clean Page Printer X
Clean System X
Cabinet
Clean VCR X
Table 106. Planned Maintenance Program
t
User Maintenance 61
2177611–100 Rev 0
2177611–100 Rev 0
Appendices
Bioeffects (A)
System Data (B)
Peripherals (C)
Assistance (D)
Warranties (E)
OB Tables (F)
Glossary (G)
VCR Operation (H)
t
This section provides supplemental information about the LOGIQ 500. The
Bioeffects sections contain acoustic output tables in the FDA and IEC formats.
t
Appendices 1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Appendices
Appendices 2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Concerns Surrounding the Use of Diagnostic Ultrasound

During a diagnostic ultrasound examination, high frequency
sound penetrates and interacts with tissue in and around the
area of anatomy to be imaged. Only a small portion of this
sound energy is reflected back to the probe for use in
constructing the image while the remainder is dissipated
within the tissue. The interaction of sound energy with tissue
at sufficiently high levels can produce biological effects (aka
bioeffects) of either a mechanical or thermal nature. Although
.
the generation of bioeffect is intentional with therapeutic
ultrasound, it is generally undesired in diagnostic applications
and may be harmful in some conditions.
NOTE: The American Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine has

published a document entitled ”Medical Ultrasound Safety”.
This three part document covers Bioeffects and Biophysics,
Prudent Use and Implementing ALARA.
Ultrasound users should order this document from the AIUM

to become more familiar with Ultrasound safety.
In the USA, contact the AIUM by telephone at 1-800-638-5352.

To write them concerning their publications, use the following
address:
AIUM
14750 Sweitzer Lane
Suite 100
Laurel, MD, USA 20707–5906
t
Bioeffects A–1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Thermal Bioeffect
As with most forms of energy, ultrasound is attenuated as it
passes through tissue and is converted to heat, which, if
produced at sufficient rates, will increase tissue temperature
to a point where tissue damage may result. Major factors
contributing to thermal bioeffect can be categorized as tissue
characteristics or control parameters:
S Physical tissue characteristics like acoustic impedance,

attenuation, absorption, and perfusion determine the
rates of heat production and heat transfer. The
susceptibility of some tissues to injury from heat, such as
developing fetal tissue, further complicate the concern for
long-term effects.
S The time-average density of available ultrasound energy
is mainly determined by acoustic parameters like output
frequency, pulse amplitude, pulse duration, duty cycle,
beam shape, and beam motion. These parameters are
controlled by the operator through equipment selections
such as probe type, operating mode, focal depth, sample
volume location, and output control settings. The operator
also has significant influence by controlling probe motion
and dwell time. These “Control Parameters” form the
means through which the operator can minimize thermal
bioeffect.
Bioeffects A–2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Mechanical Bioeffect
In a similar manner, the interaction of ultrasound energy with
tissue can produce a number of non-thermal or mechanical
effects. The most significant is cavitation which results from
the action of the oscillating ultrasound pressure on tiny gas
bubbles within the tissues. Cavitation has caused mechanical
damage on a cellular level such as microscopic tears and
hemorrhage in laboratory tests with small animals. The major
contributing factors can again be categorized as either tissue
characteristics or control parameters:
S The physical characteristics of tissue such as the

presence and size of microscopic gas bubbles and the
sensitivity of the tissue to the effects of cavitation will
influence the potential for and magnitude of cavitation.
S Acoustic field parameters like output frequency, peak
pulse amplitudes, and perhaps pulse length are the
primary parameters affecting the onset of cavitation.
These are controllable by the operator through
appropriate equipment selections.
Although it is generally accepted that no harmful biological
effects have been demonstrated at the frequency, intensity,
and exposure times used in diagnostic examinations,
research into the potential for harmful effects continues. The
operator is encouraged to survey the literature for future
developments on bioeffects and to become familiar with the
references at the end of this section.
t
Bioeffects A–3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Operator Awareness and Actions to Minimize Bioeffect

The operator must be aware of the particular conditions that
exist during the examination to recognize the potential for
bioeffect and then take appropriate action to reduce the risk.
The recognition of potential harm comes from an
understanding of tissue characteristics and a real-time
knowledge of acoustic output. Taking appropriate action
requires familiarity with equipment operation and examination
skills like implementing alternative techniques for obtaining
the same diagnostic information.
Bioeffects A–4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Tissue characteristics
Tissue characteristics vary considerably throughout the body.
They influence the acoustic field and determine the
heating/cooling rates and cavitation potential. Ultrasound
energy dissipates as it passes through the tissue causing the
deeper tissue to encounter much lower levels. Some tissues
like bone readily convert ultrasound energy to heat, while
others like blood and amniotic fluid pass the energy on to
adjacent tissue relatively unattenuated.
A particular situation that represents a tissue combination

requiring extra precaution is a third trimester transabdominal
fetal examination where there is a very thin abdominal wall
and a long fluid path. The relative lack of attenuating tissue
along the acoustic path will significantly increase the
available energy in the fetal tissue. Additionally, fetal tissues
are more susceptible to long term injury due to nature of
developing tissue. Focusing the ultrasound beam on or near
fetal bone further increases the risk.
Other than fetal tissue, there is increased susceptibility for

heating in any tissue that cannot easily conduct or distribute
heat due to low blood perfusion. As the examination
progresses, the operator must be aware of changing tissue
conditions.
t
Bioeffects A–5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Acoustic output
Awareness of the acoustic output level can be a difficult task
for the operator, especially when the objective is to obtain a
quality image. Older ultrasound equipment had limited
means, if any, for indicating the acoustic output level. In most
cases, the operator had to be familiar with the output
intensities as described in the operator manual. To improve
operator awareness of acoustic output, this system
incorporates an output display that directly indicates the
potential for mechanical and thermal bioeffects as equipment
controls are adjusted.
The output display consists of four numeric index values that

indicate the potential for producing bioeffects (three indices
are for heating effect and one for cavitation). As the user
changes equipment settings that alter the acoustic output, the
output display indices are immediately updated to reflect the
change in potential for producing bioeffect. The indices are
based on mathematical models and each is normalized so
that the potential for bioeffect becomes more significant as
the indices reach a value 1.0 or larger.
A mechanical index (MI) provides an indication of the

potential for the possible onset of transient cavitation within
tissue while the three thermal indices provide an indication of
the potential for heat generation within tissue. The different
thermal indices may be used depending on the type of tissue
being examined:
S Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS) is used as an indicator of

the potential to generate heat within soft tissues. This is
the most used thermal indicator.
S Bone Thermal Index (TIB) is used as an indicator of the
potential to generate heat at the beam focus when
focusing on or near bone that is adjacent to very sensitive
tissue. This index is intended as a thermal indicator for
second and third trimester fetal examination or
transfontanelle neonatal cephalic exams.
S Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC) is used as an indicator
of the potential to generate heat in the near-field when the
beam passes through bone at the surface as with adult or
pediatric cranial applications.
Bioeffects A–6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Acoustic output (continued)

Tissue heating is more of a concern when the acoustic beam
is stationary, so the thermal index is likely to increase when
Doppler or M-Modes are selected. The influence of specific
operator controls on acoustic output is described along with
the functional purpose of the control throughout the user
manual and a summary is provided in Safety.
The operator now has easy access to the status of acoustic

output and, when combined with the knowledge of tissue
characteristics and beam location, the risk of potential
bioeffect can be readily assessed. This display conforms to
the AIUM/NEMA Output Display Standard [1] for ultrasound
imaging equipment.
t
Bioeffects A–7
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Operator intervention
When conditions indicate a potential for harmful bioeffect, the
operator should take action promptly to reduce the risk by
changing equipment settings or altering procedural
techniques:
S Output display index values much greater than 1.0

represent an increased risk for tissues in particular beam
locations. The potential for heating will normally only
occur near the surface or at the focus, while the potential
for cavitation is reduced away from the focus. Selecting
non-scan operating modes such as PW or CW Doppler
and M-Mode will significantly increase the thermal index
because the beam is stationary.
S Optimize gain and other image enhancement features
before increasing the acoustic output control or other
equipment controls that significantly affect the output
level. Become thoroughly familiar with all controls that
affect output and observe the output display for results.
Controls affecting output are described throughout the
user manual.
Bioeffects A–8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Operator intervention (continued)

S Develop and practice skills to localize anatomy and
optimize image quality rapidly, then freeze the image as
soon as the necessary diagnostic information is obtained.
It takes time for tissue temperatures to increase, so
reducing exposure time can significantly reduce the
potential for injury.
S Avoid susceptible tissues, if possible, by changing probe
position, entrance angles or probe type. Higher frequency
probes will not penetrate as deep while linear probes
have lower near-field energy density. Avoid focusing on
bone or poorly perfused tissue. Do not allow the acoustic
beam to penetrate or focus on or near the eye.
Although choices like probe selection, mode of operation and
other control adjustments have a significant affect on output
levels, the ability to change these selections is often
restricted by the type of examination or clinical objectives.
Therefore, some examinations may require relatively high
output levels to achieve success.
The decision to raise acoustic output to potentially harmful

levels must include an assessment of the risk/benefit
potential. Such decisions are routine with imaging modalities
incorporating ionizing radiation such as Nuclear Medicine,
X-ray and CT. The principle of ALARA is widely used in these
modalities for minimizing the exposure risk and is now a
recommended practice with high-level diagnostic ultrasound.
CAUTION During each ultrasound examination, the clinical user is

expected to weigh the medical benefit of the diagnostic
information obtained against the risk of harmful effects. Once
an optimal image is achieved the need for increasing
acoustic output or prolonging the exposure can not be
justified. It is important, therefore, for the user to be familiar
with system controls that affect image quality as well as
acoustic output. Complete descriptions of image optimization
and acoustic output controls are provided in the user
instructions.
t
Bioeffects A–9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Implementing ALARA Methods

The primary objective for any ultrasound examination is to
obtain diagnostic information of sufficient quality to benefit
the patient. Image quality can usually be improved by
increasing the acoustic output or taking more time to refine
the image. These same actions, however, will also increase
the risk of harmful bioeffects when imaging sensitive tissues
or when high output levels are used. The operator is
therefore encouraged to use the lowest acoustic output
setting necessary to produce clinically acceptable data.
The principle of ALARA, which stands for As Low As

Reasonably Achievable, is to keep the radiation exposure at
the minimum level necessary to obtain the diagnostic
information. This principle is widely practiced in medical x-ray
protection where exposure at any level is potentially harmful.
Historically, ALARA was initiated as a cautious approach for
dealing with uncertain hazards but has since become the
principle method for reducing the risk of injury from hazards
that do not have safe minimum threshold.
While no minimum thresholds for harmful bioeffects have

been established with the use of diagnostic ultrasound, the
principle of ALARA can be readily implemented on equipment
incorporating an output display. As the operator adjusts the
equipment to optimize the image quality, the display
interactively updates to indicate the effect on output.
Controls that have no noticeable impact on image quality

should be set to minimize the output while controls that
improve the image quality and also increase acoustic output
should be set no higher than needed to achieve a diagnostic
quality image. If the output display indicates values much
greater than 1.0, the operator should reduce the exposure
time and freeze the image as soon as possible.
At very low levels (< 0.4), the display is inactive and the
potential for harmful bioeffect is negligible. More detailed
information concerning the use of ALARA in medical practice
can be found in NCRP Report No. 1072.
Bioeffects A–10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Clinical instructions for fetal use

Following are illustrative examples of clinical instructions for
fetal Doppler use which were prepared by Harold Schulman,
M.D. and John Hobbins, M.D.3
Umbilical artery
To obtain a signal:
For continuous wave Doppler instrument, place the pencil

probe with appropriate conducting gel on the maternal
abdomen. The volume should be at a comfortable level and
the power output and gain at a mid-setting. Slowly move the
pencil probe by changing the angle or location on the
maternal abdomen until the characteristic sound of the fetal
umbilical flow can be heard. This is a swishing sound with a
rate usually between 120 and 160 BPM. It should be lacking
in discernible clicks or sounds similar to valve movement on
cardiac auscultation. When the image is obtained, adjust the
controls in order to optimize the image by reducing the power
output to the lowest setting at which a good quality signal is
obtained. The gain setting should also be reduced to make
the signal appear crisp with minimal background noise. If
diastolic flow signals are not obtained, the angle of the beam
incident to the umbilical cord may be too high and another
area of cord should be examined to determine whether
diastolic flow is present. When a good quality signal is
obtained all the way across the display screen, the image
may be frozen.
Prior to taking measurements, the signals should be

examined to ensure that the variations in waveform size that
may be caused by fetal breathing movements are not
present. Fetal breathing movements will invalidate any
measurements due to the variations they cause in umbilical
flow.
t
Bioeffects A–11
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Umbilical artery (cont’d)
If a duplex Doppler system is being used, then the umbilical

cord should be visualized and attempted to be seen in as
much of its length as is feasible, considering its usual coiling.
The sample volume of the pulsed Doppler or the sample line
if a duplex continuous wave instrument is being used should
be placed over one of the two smaller vessels in the umbilical
cord. The sample volume size (“gate”) should be adjusted to
encompass the entire vessel. If this vessel is being seen only
in cross section, and diastolic flow is not seen, this may be an
artifact caused by the angle between the beam and the
vessel and another sampling site should be examined. When
this cross sectional view is obtained, rotating the transducer
90 degrees may bring a greater length of the cord into view
and permit examination of an area where the artery can be
seen at a more advantageous angle. Indices of pulsatility, if
calculated, should be determined for each of several
heartbeats and averaged.
Uterine artery
For continuous wave Doppler systems, place the pencil

probe in the lower lateral portion of the mother’s abdomen,
generally just above the groin and directed toward the cervix.
Adjust the angle or position until the characteristic waveform
of the uterine/arcuate artery is obtained. Without
visualization, it is important to search carefully for the
waveform with the greatest amount of diastolic flow as
proximal vessels in the uterine system (internal iliac and
hypogastric arteries) may have diminished diastolic flow
compared to the systolic flow in a way that might appear
abnormal if obtained from the uterine artery itself. The power
and gain settings should be adjusted to the lowest levels at
which adequate signals are obtained with a minimal amount
of noise relative to the signal. The image may be frozen when
the desired number of waveforms are present on the screen.
Bioeffects A–12 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Uterine artery (cont’d)
For pulsed Doppler systems, place the transducer in the

lower outer portion of the maternal abdomen. The orientation
should be towards the parametria with some parts of the
amniotic sac visualized. The parametria area can then be
examined by maneuvering the sample volume until the
characteristic waveforms are obtained. Examination should
be confined to the area that is composed of the myometrium
and may be most fruitful close to the placenta. Indices of
pulsatility, if calculated, should be determined for each of
several heartbeats and averaged.
Fetal heart
Fetal cardiac Doppler studies can be performed only with

duplex ultrasound systems. The fetal heart should be
carefully examined in all standard planes to determine
whether or not the anatomy is normal. These planes should
include: four-chamber view, long axis left ventricles, short
axis of the ventricles, short axis of the great vessels, aortic
arch, and pulmonary artery-ductus views. The area for
sampling should be visualized as clearly as possible with the
anticipated flow direction at as low an angle as possible to
the ultrasound beam. The sample volume should be placed
in this area with an appropriate size selected to sample as
desired. Power output control should be at the lowest setting
compatible with obtaining an adequate image and the gain
setting should be maintained to keep an adequate signal
without excessive noise. Excluding the actual valves from the
sample volume will help to minimize unnecessary noise from
the signals obtained.
t
Bioeffects A–13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Efficacy of Fetal Doppler

The following are clinical obstetrical conditions where there
are experimental data that demonstrate the efficacy of
Doppler. Provided by John C. Hobbins, M.D. and Peter
Burns, Ph.D.4
IUGR
Many studies have shown a good correlation between

abnormal waveform (or decreased blood flow) and increased
perinatal mortality5, fetal hypoxia6,7,8, and neonatal events
such as necrotizing enterocolitis (NEC), and interventricular
hemorrhage (IVH).8 It must be pointed out that the Doppler
studies initially designed to identify altered fetal growth had a
predictably low sensitivity9 because the category of small for
dates frequently includes genetically small but completely
normal fetuses and neonates. Thus far, all studies have
shown that the rare Doppler pattern of reverse diastolic flow
in the umbilical artery has been very highly correlated with
adverse outcome10,11 and may warrant immediate
intervention. Conversely, a normal waveform in the umbilical
artery has been rarely associated with stillbirth in a high risk
pregnancy.
Cardiac Anomalies
Doppler has become an integral part of fetal

echocardiographic studies. Its use has been directly derived
from well-documented pediatric and adult Doppler research.
The etiology and seriousness of fetal arrhythmias is relatively
easy to determine with pulsed Doppler interrogation of
ventricular diastolic filling patterns.12–15 Benign patterns such
as premature atrial extrasystoles can be more easily
diagnosed with Doppler than with the older approach of
M-Mode echocardiography. Doppler has proven useful as
well in the understanding and interpretation of structural heart
disease in the fetus. A close correlation has been found
between atrioventricular valve regurgitation in the fetus with
structural heart disease and the appearance of non-immune
hydrops16. Improved diagnostic and prognostic ability has
permitted more accurate counseling of parents whose
fetuses have structural cardiac abnormalities.
Bioeffects A–14 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Summary
It is important to realize that current investigation DOES NOT

support the concept that Doppler waveform analysis in the
above obstetrical conditions provides information that is
meant to replace other conventional tests, or the biophysical
profile, also, it should not replace classical non-Doppler
ultrasound scanning methods. Rather, it appears that Doppler
is of value when used in conjunction with these other tests.
Lastly, there is little data to suggest that an isolated Doppler
examination of the fetus can be used as a screening tool in a
low-risk population to identify the compromised fetus.
As with the evolution of any new diagnostic technique, the

indications for use may change when new experimental data
become available.
t
Bioeffects A–15
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Suggested Guidelines
Following are suggested guidelines prepared by Harold
Schulman, M.D17
Overview
There are two types of Doppler instruments, continuous wave

(CW) and pulsed. Modern instruments use directional
Dopplers, that is they portray forward and reverse flow on a
split screen. The CW Doppler transverses the entire vessel
diameter and summarizes a variety of reflections, including
those from the vessel wall and neighboring vessels. The
pulsed Doppler is focused and may sample the red cell flow
in different loci within the radius, but has the advantage of
rejecting extraneous signals from other vessels. Its
disadvantage is in that some current instrumentation utilize
output energies which exceed guidelines for safety on
obstetric ultrasound.
Bioeffects A–16 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Methodology
Doppler studies on the umbilical arteries are carried out after

manual palpation of the uterus and fetus. In pregnancies
before 28 weeks, the fetus cannot be easily felt hence the
probe is placed on the upper third of the uterus at the midline.
The probe is gently rotated until the umbilical signal is heard
and clearly identified on the screen. There should be 3-4
clear dense waveforms of equal amplitude. If there is fetal
breathing, the waveforms will not be equal in intensity or
frequency; hence, measurements must be postponed until
the fetus is quiet. If there is tachycardia or bradycardia, the
measurements have no clear meaning because now the
waveform represents a complex mixture of resistance,
cardiac output, and time needed to empty a vascular region.
The image is frozen and the measurements are taken. We
have found it useful to continuously record the examination
on audiotape because the signal is immediately captured and
not lost when the fetus or cord moves.
This process is repeated at least twice more and the results

from the three studies are averaged. Although the S/D ratio
is, in theory, an angle-independent measurement, there may
be differences in the ratio when the artery is studied near the
abdomen or near the insertion in the placenta. When three
different angle measurements are taken, we found an
average experimental error of 6% and a maximum error of
16%. The uterine artery signals may be more difficult to
obtain and require more training to develop expertise. The
probe is directed in the lower quadrants at the paracervical
area where the uterine artery enters the uterus. Three
potential signals may be encountered, hence the examiner
should be persistent until the correct waveform is identified.
The mature waveform is generally present by 20 weeks, but
should be achieved no later than 26 weeks. The pulse wave
frequency should coincide with the maternal pulse and 4
equal and dense images should be seen on each side of the
uterus. The results from both sides are averaged to give a
single number. The S/D ratio appears to provide a simple and
reproducible measurement, but a number of other
calculations have also been proposed. Interobserver error
with this technique is 4% with a maximum error of 10%.
t
Bioeffects A–17
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Variance studies for fetal Doppler measurements

The following guidance17 is provided to help users assess
the potential variation of results when performing fetal
Doppler measurements among the same or between different
users. In order to complete this assessment, each clinic
intending to use this system for fetal Doppler should conduct
a clinical trial to establish the intra- and inter-operator
variances.
The recommended protocol for such a clinical trial is:
1. Select at least 20 high-risk patients.

2. For each patient, select at least one Doppler
waveform from the same fetal artery.
3. For each waveform, have each of at least three
trained sonographers independently complete at least
three repeat measurements for each of the Doppler
calculations (e.g., S/D Ratio, PI, RI, etc.).
4. Perform an appropriate Analysis of Variance (ANOVA)
over all 20 patient waveforms and also for each
patient waveform separately.
5. Use the results of the ANOVA to estimate both intra-
and inter-operator error variance components. (The
SAS procedure VARCOMP may be used.)
Bioeffects A–18 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Training and User Assistance

Maintaining awareness of potentially harmful bioeffects and
being able to recognize contributing conditions is essential to
minimize the risk. Gaining experience with the system and
becoming familiar with controls affecting output by observing
the output display will improve the user’s confidence to
determine the presence of risk and how to reduce it. The user
manual instructions and applications training are the best
methods for learning these basic skills. Get fully acquainted
with the user manual and review it frequently. Contact a
representative at any time to request additional training or
assistance.
As indicated by their titles, the following references are

intended to provide additional detailed information concerning
bioeffects.
1. Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal and

Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic
Ultrasound Equipment, AIUM/NEMA, 19921
2. Implementation of the Principle of As Low As
Reasonably Achievable (ALARA) for Medical and
Dental Personnel, National Council on Radiation
Protection and Measurements (NCRP), Report
No.107, December 31, 1990.2
3. Biological Effects of Ultrasound: Mechanisms and
Clinical Implications, NCRP Report No. 74, December
30, 1983.18
4. Exposure Criteria for Medical Diagnostic Ultrasound:
I. Criteria Based on Thermal Mechanisms, NCRP
Report No. 113, June 1, 1992.19
5. Bioeffects Considerations for the Safety of Diagnostic
Ultrasound, Journal of Ultrasound in Medicine, AIUM,
September 1988.20
6. Geneva Report on Safety and Standardization in
Medical Ultrasound, WFUMB, May 1990.21
t
Bioeffects A–19
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Acoustic Output Tables
Maximum output summary
The following tables list the typical maximum acoustic output

t
levels achievable with the LOGIQ 500 for all probes and
operational modes. It is intended that this information be
useful in making ALARA decisions and selecting the most
appropriate probe for the application. In accordance with US
FDA Guidelines, the overall maximum acoustic SPTA
t
intensity for LOGIQ 500 is limited to 720 mW/cm2 and MI is
limited to 1.9. Modes for which TI does not exceed 1.0 are
indicated by <1.0.
B510
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

Mode MI Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan TIC ISPTA.3 ISPPA.3
B-Mode 0.42 0.25 – – 0.27 8.90 103.10
M-Mode 0.42 – 0.02 0.04 0.02 9.60 106.70
B/M-Mode 0.42 0.17 0.02 0.04 0.20 15.53 106.70
Pulsed Wave Doppler 0.50 – 0.21 0.32 0.24 101.80 157.60
B/Pulsed Wave Doppler 0.50 0.17 0.21 0.32 0.41 107.73 157.60
B/Color Flow Doppler 0.42 0.28 – – 0.30 46.93 103.10
B/Color Flow Doppler/ 0.50 0.22 0.11 0.16 0.36 77.33 157.60
Pulsed Wave Doppler
M-Mode/Color M-Mode 0.35 – 0.11 0.11 0.13 19.20 49.40
Color Flow with M Doppler 0.35 – 0.11 0.11 0.13 19.20 49.40
CW Doppler 0.02 – 0.36 0.67 0.40 147.26 –
Table 107. B510 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
CWD2
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

Color Flow with M Doppler 0.098 – 0.49 3.296 1.21 280.805 –
Table 108. CWD2 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
Bioeffects A–20 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
CWD5
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

Color Flow with M Doppler 0.06 – 1.919 3.549 3.557 485.1999 –
Table 109. CWD5 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
C364
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

B-Mode 0.68 0.27 – – 0.34 22.8 142.2
M-Mode 0.68 – 0.02 0.20 0.09 63.0 142.2
B/M-Mode 0.68 0.18 0.02 0.20 0.31 78.3 142.2
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Table 110. C364 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
C386
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

B-Mode 0.62 0.25 – – 0.52 4.5 163.2
M-Mode 0.62 – <0.1 0.17 0.10 51.7 133.3
B/M-Mode 0.62 0.17 <0.1 0.17 0.45 54.7 163.2
B/Color Flow Doppler/ 0.85 0.78 <0.1 0.46 1.44 259.7 163.2
Pulsed Wave Doppler
t
Bioeffects A–21
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
C551
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

B-Mode 0.48 0.25 – – 0.42 23.8 149.4
M-Mode 0.48 – <0.1 0.11 <0.1 29.3 149.4
B/M-Mode 0.48 0.17 <0.1 0.11 0.37 45.2 149.4
Pulsed Wave Doppler
C721
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

B-Mode 0.46 0.35 – – 0.34 10.3 127.6
M-Mode 0.35 – < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 15.6 122.1
B/M-Mode 0.46 0.23 < 0.1 < 0.1 0.26 22.4 127.6
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Bioeffects A–22 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
E721
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

B-Mode 0.66 0.38 – – 0.33 3.1 148.8
M-Mode 0.66 – <0.1 0.10 <0.1 34.1 148.8
B/M-Mode 0.66 0.25 <0.1 0.10 0.28 36.2 148.8
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Table 114. E721 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
I739
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

B-Mode 0.68 0.16 – – 0.16 25.2 151.7
M-Mode 0.68 – <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 34.8 153.1
B/M-Mode 0.68 0.11 <0.1 <0.1 0.13 51.6 153.1
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Table 115. I739 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
t
Bioeffects A–23
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
546L
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

B – Mode 0.63 0.18 – – 0.19 16.1 129.4
M – Mode 0.63 – < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 36.5 129.4
B/M – Mode 0.63 0.12 < 0.1 < 0.1 0.17 47.2 129.4
Pulsed Wave Doppler
M – Mode/Color M – 0.62 – 1.11 1.17 1.08 243.9 100.5

Mode
Color Flow / M Doppler 0.62 – 1.11 1.17 1.08 243.9 100.5
Table 116. 546L Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
739L
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

B-Mode 0.41 0.15 – – 0.16 13.8 185.6
M-Mode 0.41 – <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 24.8 185.6
B/M-Mode 0..41 0.10 <0.1 <0.1 0.13 34.0 185.6
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Table 117. 739L Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
Bioeffects A–24 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
L764
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

B-Mode 0.4 0.2 – – 0.2 4.4 126.9
M-Mode 0.4 – < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 2.8 127.9
B/M-Mode 0.4 0.2 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 7.1 128.4
Pulsed Wave Doppler
M-Mode/Color M-Mode 0.4 – < 0.1 < 0.1 0.3 44.5 138.6
Color Flow with M Doppler 0.4 0.5 < 0.1 < 0.1 0.5 48.8 140.5
Table 118. L764 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
LA39
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

B-Mode 0.77 <0.1 – – 0.09 10.3 188.7
M-Mode 0.77 – <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 22.6 188.7
B/M-Mode 0.77 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 29.5 188.7
B/Pulsed Wave Doppler 0.77 <0.1 0.21 1.13 0.84 533.7 188.7
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Table 119. LA39 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
t
Bioeffects A–25
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
P509
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

B-Mode 0.88 0.25 – – 0.26 287.1 167.2
M-Mode 0.88 – < 0.1 0.18 < 0.1 43.9 167.2
B/M-Mode 0.88 0.16 < 0.1 0.18 0.26 235.3 167.2
Pulsed Wave Doppler
CWD < 0.1 – 1.33 1.73 2.49 232.8 –
Table 120. L764 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
S220
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

B-Mode 0.51 0.44 – – 0.64 201.50 103.30
M-Mode 0.51 – 0.07 0.20 0.10 53.80 103.30
B/M-Mode 0.51 0.29 0.07 0.20 0.52 188.13 103.30
Pulsed Wave Doppler
CW Doppler 0.03 – 0.84 1.16 2.17 183.66 –
Table 121. S220 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
Bioeffects A–26 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
S222
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

B-Mode 0.67 0.24 – – 0.35 36.1 178.4
M-Mode 0.67 – <0.1 0.21 0.13 40.4 178.4
B/M-Mode 0.67 0.16 <0.1 0.21 0.36 64.5 178.4
Pulsed Wave Doppler
CW Doppler 0.15 – 2.20 2.25 4.32 406.6 –
S316
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

B-Mode 0.64 0.16 – – 0.26 24.6 178.1
M-Mode 0.64 – <0.1 0.14 <0.1 40.3 178.1
B/M-Mode 0.64 0.11 <0.1 0.14 0.25 56.7 178.1
B/Color Flow Doppler/ 0.72 0.67 <0.1 0.44 1.05 167.7 178.1
Pulsed Wave Doppler
CW Doppler 0.02 – 0.8 0.5 3.1 268 –
t
Bioeffects A–27
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
S317
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

B-Mode 0.63 0.15 – – 0.17 18.0 166.3
M-Mode 0.63 – <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 12.2 167.2
B/M-Mode 0.63 0.10 <0.1 <0.1 0.13 24.2 167.2
Pulsed Wave Doppler
CW Doppler 0.05 – 1.33 2.84 2.21 590.1 –
S611
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

B-Mode 0.74 0.44 – – 0.48 89.5 186.4
M-Mode 0.74 – <0.1 0.13 <0.1 57.4 186.3
B/M-Mode 0.74 0.29 <0.1 0.13 0.37 117.1 186.4
Pulsed Wave Doppler
CW Doppler 0.05 – 1.21 2.85 2.41 579.6 –
Bioeffects A–28 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
T739
TIS/TIB TIS TIB

B-Mode 0.72 0.13 – – 0.13 22.9 177.0
M-Mode 0.72 – <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 25.5 178.3
B/M-Mode 0.72 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 0.11 40.8 178.3
B/Pulsed Wave Doppler 0.72 <0.1 0.28 0.98 0.64 489.4 183.4
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Table 126. T739 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
t
Bioeffects A–29
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Summary of system control settings that yield maximum output
Operating B510 C364 C386 C551 C721

Mode
B-Mode Depth=4 Depth=16 Depth=10 Depth=5 Depth=4
M-Mode Depth=4 Depth=16 Depth=10 Depth=5 Depth=4
B/M-Mode Depth=4 Depth=16 Depth=10 Depth=5 Depth=4
CWD-Mode Depth=5.4 Depth= na Depth=na Depth= na Depth= na
Pulsed Wave "
Vel Scale= 0.33 "
Vel Scale= 7.9 "
Vel Scale= 3.96 "
Vel Scale= 1.72 Vel Scale= 3.0 "
Doppler SV=2 SV=2 SV=2 SV=2 SV=2
Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=Off Penet=On Penet=Off
B/Pulsed Wave "
Vel Scale= 0.33 "
Vel Scale= 7.9 "
Vel Scale= 3.96 "
Vel Scale= 1.72 Vel Scale= 3.0 "
Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=Off Penet=On Penet= Off
B/Color Flow "
Vel Scale= 1.3 "
Vel Scale= 5.2 "
Vel Scale= 0.21 " "
Vel Scale= 0.57 Vel Scale= 0.98
Doppler Penet=Off Penet=Off Penet=On Penet=On Penet=On
ROI=Min ROI=Min ROI=Min ROI=Min ROI=Max
PS=8 PS=16 PS=16 PS=16 PS=10
B/Color Flow "
Vel Scale= 1.3 "
Vel Scale= 5.2 "
Vel Scale= 0.21 " "
Doppler/ Penet=Off Penet=Off Penet=On Penet=On Penet=On
Pulsed Wave ROI=Min ROI=Min ROI=Min ROI=Min ROI=Max
Doppler PS=8 PS=16 PS=16 PS=16 PS=10
M-Mode/ "
Vel Scale= 1.3 "
Vel Scale= 5.2 "
Vel Scale= 0.21 " "
Color M-Mode Penet=Off Penet=Off Penet=On Penet=On Penet=On
Depth=4 Depth=10 Depth=10 Depth=5 Depth=6
PS=16 PS=16 PS=16 PS=16 PS=10
Color Flow with "
Vel Scale= 1.3 "
Vel Scale= 5.2 "
Vel Scale= 0.21 " "
M Doppler Penet=Off Penet=Off Penet=On Penet=On Penet=On
PS=16 PS=16 PS=16 PS=16 PS=10
Table 127. Maximum Output Control Settings (continued on next page)
Bioeffects A–30 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Summary of system control settings that yield maximum output (cont’d)
Operating E721 I739 546L 739L L764

Mode
B-Mode Depth=6 Depth=4 Depth=16 Depth=4 Depth=4
M-Mode Depth=6 Depth=4 Depth=16 Depth=4 Depth=4
B/M-Mode Depth=6 Depth=4 Depth=16 Depth=4 Depth=4
CWD-Mode Depth= na Depth=na Depth=na Depth=na Depth= na
Pulsed Wave "
Vel Scale= 2.62 "
Vel Scale= 9.1 "
Vel Scale= 7.9 "
Vel Scale= 0.86 "
Vel Scale= 2.0
Penet=On Penet=On Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=On
B/Pulsed Wave "
Vel Scale= 2.62 "
Vel Scale= 9.1 "
Vel Scale= 7.9 "
Vel Scale= 0.86 "
Vel Scale= 2.0
Penet=On Penet=On Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=On
B/Color Flow "
Vel Scale= 0.98 "
Vel Scale= 1.30 "
Vel Scale= 1.13 "
Vel Scale= 0.33 "
Vel Scale= 5.2
Doppler Penet=On Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=Off Penet=Off
ROI=Max ROI=Min ROI=Min ROI=Min ROI=Min
PS=10 PS=16 PS=16 PS=16 PS=16
B/Color Flow "
Vel Scale= 0.98 "
Vel Scale= 1.30 "
Vel Scale= 1.13 "
Vel Scale= 0.33 "
Vel Scale= 5.2
Doppler/ Penet=On Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=Off Penet=Off
Pulsed Wave ROI=Max ROI=Min ROI=Min ROI=Min ROI=Min
Doppler PS=10 PS=16 PS=16 PS=16 PS=16
M-Mode/ "
Vel Scale= 0.98 "
Vel Scale= 1.30 "
Vel Scale= 1.13 "
Vel Scale= 0.74 "
Vel Scale= 5.2
Color M-Mode Penet=On Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=Off Penet=Off
PS=10 PS=16 PS=16 PS=16 PS=16
Color Flow with "
Vel Scale= 0.98 "
Vel Scale= 1.30 "
Vel Scale= 1.13 "
Vel Scale= 0.74 "
Vel Scale= 5.2
M Doppler Penet=On Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=Off Penet=Off
PS=10 PS=16 PS=16 PS=16 PS=16
Table 127. Maximum Output Control Settings (cont’d)
t
Bioeffects A–31
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Operating P509 S220 S316 S317

Mode
B-Mode Depth=24 Depth=10 Depth=6 Depth=7
M-Mode Depth=24 Depth=10 Depth=6 Depth=7
B/M-Mode Depth=24 Depth=10 Depth=6 Depth=7
CWD-Mode Depth=11.9 Depth=10 Depth=6 Depth=17.4
Pulsed Wave "
Vel Scale= 3.0 "
Vel Scale= 2.0 "
Vel Scale= 2.28 "
Vel Scale= 3.44
Doppler SV=4 SV=6 SV=2 SV=1
Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=Off Penet=Off
B/Pulsed Wave "
Vel Scale= 3.0 "
Vel Scale= 2.0 "
Vel Scale= 2.28 "
Vel Scale= 3.44
Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=Off Penet=Off
B/Color Flow "
Vel Scale= 2.98 "
Vel Scale= 3.4 "
Vel Scale= 2.6 "
Vel Scale= 3.42
Doppler Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=Off Penet=Off
ROI=Min ROI=Min ROI=Min ROI=Min
PS=14 PS=14 PS=14 PS=14
B/Color Flow "
Vel Scale= 2.98 "
Vel Scale= 3.4 "
Vel Scale= 2.6 "
Vel Scale= 3.42
Doppler/ Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=Off Penet=Off
Pulsed Wave ROI=Min ROI=Min ROI=Min ROI=Min
Doppler PS=14 PS=14 PS=14 PS=14
M-Mode/ "
Vel Scale= 2.98 "
Vel Scale= 3.4 "
Vel Scale= 2.6 "
Vel Scale= 3.42
Color M-Mode Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=Off Penet=Off
Depth=24 Depth=14 Depth=6 Depth=8
PS=14 PS=14 PS=14 PS=14
Color Flow with "
Vel Scale= 2.98 "
Vel Scale= 3.4 "
Vel Scale= 2.6 "
Vel Scale= 3.42
M Doppler Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=Off Penet=Off
PS=14 PS=14 PS=14 PS=14
Bioeffects A–32 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Operating S611 T739 S222 LA39

Mode
B-Mode Depth=4 Depth=4 Depth=10 Depth=4
M-Mode Depth=4 Depth=4 Depth=10 Depth=4
B/M-Mode Depth=4 Depth=4 Depth=10 Depth=4
CWD-Mode Depth=6.4 Depth=na Depth=10 Depth=na
Pulsed Wave "
Vel Scale= 0.75 "
Vel Scale= 9.1 "
Vel Scale= 0.86 "
Vel Scale= 9.1
Penet=Off Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=On
B/Pulsed Wave "
Vel Scale= 0.75 "
Vel Scale= 9.1 "
Vel Scale= 0.86 "
Vel Scale= 9.1
Penet=Off Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=On
B/Color Flow "
Vel Scale= 2.98 "
Vel Scale= 1.30 "
Vel Scale= 2.98 "
Vel Scale= 0.57
Doppler Penet=On Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=On
PS=8 PS=16 PS=16 PS=16
B/Color Flow "
Vel Scale= 2.98 "
Vel Scale= 1.30 "
Vel Scale= 2.98 "
Vel Scale= 0.57
Doppler/ Penet=On Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=On
Pulsed Wave ROI=Min ROI=Min ROI=Min ROI=Min
Doppler PS=8 PS=16 PS=16 PS=16
M-Mode/ "
Vel Scale= 2.98 "
Vel Scale= 1.30 "
Vel Scale= 2.98 "
Vel Scale= 0.74
Color M-Mode Penet=On Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=On
PS=8 PS=16 PS=16 PS=16
Color Flow with "
Vel Scale= 2.98 "
Vel Scale= 1.30 "
Vel Scale= 2.98 "
Vel Scale= 0.74
M Doppler Penet=On Penet=On Penet=Off Penet=On
PS=8 PS=16 PS=16 PS=16
t
Bioeffects A–33
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Maximum Thermal Indices

Indices for probe/mode combinations not shown are less than
1.0 for all control settings. Refer to the Key to Tables on
Bioeffects A–61.
B510
Min of Dimen- FL
Imaging Scanning Max W.3(z1) sions of Focal
Mode Mode TIS fc W0 ITA.3(z1) z1 zbp Aaprt Zone
Pulsed Wave Doppler Scan – – – – – – – –
Non–Scan 0.21 4.02 11.04 4.34 – 1.76 1.00 3.70
B/Pulsed Wave Scan 0.17 4.38 8.33 3.44 – 1.76 1.00 6.15
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.21 4.02 11.04 4.34 – 1.76 1.00 3.88
B/Color Flow Doppler/ Scan 0.22 4.04 11.25 4.71 – 1.76 1.00 3.70
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.11 4.02 5.52 2.17 – 1.76 1.00 3.88
Color Flow with Scan – – – – – – –
M Doppler
Non-Scan 0.11 4.04 5.86 2.53 – 1.76 1.00 3.70
CW Doppler Scan – – – – – – – –
Non-Scan 0.36 4.01 18.76 7.67 – 1.76 1.00 5.40
Table 128. B510 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Dimen-
Imaging Scanning Maximum sions of deq@PIIm
Mode Mode TIB fc W0 zsp deq(zsp) Aaprt ax
Pulsed Wave Doppler Scan – – – – – – –

Non-Scan 0.32 4.02 11.04 3.36 0.52 1.00 –
B/Pulsed Wave Scan 0.17 4.38 8.33 3.02 1.51 1.00 –
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.32 4.02 11.04 3.36 0.52 1.00 –
B/Color Flow Doppler/ Scan 0.22 4.04 11.25 3.07 0.61 1.00 –
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.16 4.02 5.52 3.36 0.52 1.00 –
M Doppler
Non-Scan 0.11 4.86 4.64 3.30 0.65 1.00 –
CW Doppler Scan – – – – – – –
Non-Scan 0.67 4.01 18.76 3.23 0.56 1.00 –
Table 129. B510 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)
Bioeffects A–34 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
B510 (cont’d)
Imaging Maximum Dimensions of FL

Mode TIC fc W0 Aaprt Focal Zone
Pulsed Wave Doppler 0.24 4.02 11.04 1.00 3.88
B/Pulsed Wave Doppler 0.41 4.02 19.37 1.00 3.88
B/Color Flow Doppler/ .036 4.02 16.78 1.00 3.88
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Color Flow with M Doppler 0.13 4.04 5.86 1.00 3.70
CW Doppler 0.40 4.01 18.76 1.00 5.40
Table 130. B510 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
t
Bioeffects A–35
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
C364
Min of Dimen- FL
B–Mode Scan 0.27 3.36 16.97 5.86 – 1.87 1.22 4.20
M–Mode Non–Scan 0.02 3.34 4.36 1.57 – 1.87 1.22 4.20
B/M–Mode Scan 0.18 3.36 11.31 3.91 – 1.87 1.22 4.20
Non–Scan 0.02 3.34 4.36 1.57 – 1.87 1.22 4.20
Pulsed Wave Doppler Non–Scan 1.06 3.29 66.92 42.30 – 1.21 0.51 2.30
Doppler
Non-Scan 1.06 3.29 66.92 42.30 – 1.21 0.51 2.30
B/Color Flow Doppler Scan 1.01 3.31 63.73 36.46 – 1.21 0.51 2.30
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.53 3.29 33.46 21.15 – 1.21 0.51 2.30
M/M–CFM Non-Scan 0.34 3.31 24.24 13.85 – 1.21 0.51 2.30
M–CFM/PD Non-Scan 0.34 3.31 24.24 13.85 – 1.21 0.51 2.30
Table 131. C364 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Dimen-
B–Mode Scan 0.27 3.36 16.97 4.61 0.98 1.22 –

M–Mode Non–Scan 0.20 3.34 4.36 4.57 0.32 1.22 –
B/M–Mode Scan 0.18 3.36 11.31 4.61 0.98 1.22 –
Non–Scan 0.20 3.34 4.36 4.57 0.32 1.22 –
Pulsed Wave Doppler Non-Scan 3.23 3.29 66.92 1.91 0.38 0.51 0.38
Doppler
Non-Scan 3.23 3.29 66.92 1.91 0.38 0.51 0.38
B/Color Flow Doppler Scan 1.01 3.31 63.73 1.97 0.78 0.51 –
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 1.61 3.29 33.46 1.91 0.38 0.51 0.38
M/M–CFM Non-Scan 1.99 3.31 24.24 1.97 0.21 0.51 0.20
M–CFM/PD Non-Scan 1.99 3.31 24.24 1.97 0.21 0.51 0.20
Table 132. C364 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)
Bioeffects A–36 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
C364 (cont’d)

B–Mode 0.34 3.36 16.97 1.22 4.20
M–Mode 0.09 3.34 4.36 1.22 4.20
B/M–Mode 0.31 3.36 15.68 1.22 4.20
B/Color Flow Doppler 1.85 3.31 63.73 0.51 2.30
B/Color Flow Doppler/ 2.08 3.29 70.98 0.51 2.30
Pulsed Wave Doppler
M/M–CFM 0.70 3.31 24.24 0.51 2.30
M–CFM/PD 0.70 3.31 24.24 0.51 2.30
Table 133. C364 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
t
Bioeffects A–37
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
C386
Min of Dimen- FL
Non–Scan 0.15 3.4 43.9 8.9 – 2.7 2.6 6.0
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.15 3.4 43.9 8.9 – 2.7 2.6 7.8
Non–Scan – – – – – – – –
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan <0.1 3.4 21.9 4.5 – 2.7 2.6 7.8
Color M-Mode Scan – – – – – – – –
Non-Scan 0.45 2.6 100.6 36.6 – 2.4 2.0 6.0
Color Flow with Scan – – – – – – – –
M Doppler
Non-Scan 0.45 2.6 100.6 36.6 – 2.4 2.0 6.0
Dimen-

Non-Scan 0.93 3.4 43.9 7.3 0.4 2.6 –
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.93 3.4 43.9 7.3 0.4 2.6 –
Non-Scan – – – – – – –
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.46 3.4 21.9 7.3 0.4 2.6 –
Color M-Mode Scan – – – – – – –
Non-Scan 0.97 2.6 100.6 6.1 1.5 2.0 –
M Doppler
Non-Scan 0.97 2.6 100.6 6.1 1.5 2.0 –
Bioeffects A–38 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
C386 (cont’d)

Pulsed Wave Doppler
Color M-Mode 1.58 2.6 100.6 2.0 6.0
t
Bioeffects A–39
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
C551
Min of Dimen- FL
B–Mode Scan 0.25 4.46 16.16 4.46 – 1.44 0.72 4.20
M–Mode Non–Scan < 0.1 4.32 3.37 1.12 – 1.44 0.72 4.20
B/M–Mode Scan 0.17 4.46 10.77 2.97 – 1.44 0.72 4.20
Non–Scan < 0.1 4.32 3.37 1.12 – 1.44 0.72 4.20
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.80 4.00 41.97 13.46 – 1.57 0.86 4.20
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.40 4.00 20.98 6.73 – 1.57 0.86 4.20
M/M–CFM Non-Scan 1.77 4.01 92.87 31.81 – 1.57 0.86 4.20
M–CFM/PD Non-Scan 1.77 4.01 92.87 31.81 – 1.57 0.86 4.20
Dimen-
B–Mode Scan 0.25 4.46 16.16 4.23 1.15 0.72 –

M–Mode Non–Scan 0.11 4.32 3.37 4.01 0.39 0.72 –
B/M–Mode Scan 0.17 4.46 10.77 4.23 1.15 0.72 –
Non–Scan 0.11 4.32 3.37 4.01 0.39 0.72 –
Pulsed Wave Doppler Non-Scan 1.56 4.00 41.97 4.07 0.35 0.86 –
Doppler
Non-Scan 1.56 4.00 41.97 4.07 0.35 0.86 –
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.78 4.00 20.98 4.07 0.35 0.86 –
M/M–CFM Non-Scan 1.94 4.01 92.87 4.06 0.73 0.86 –
M–CFM/PD Non-Scan 1.94 4.01 92.87 4.06 0.73 0.86 –
Bioeffects A–40 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
C551 (cont’d)

B–Mode 0.42 4.46 16.16 0.72 4.20
M–Mode < 0.1 4.32 3.37 0.72 4.20
B/M–Mode 0.37 4.46 14.14 0.72 4.20
Pulsed Wave Doppler
M/M–CFM 2.22 4.01 92.87 0.86 4.20
M–CFM/PD 2.22 4.01 92.87 0.86 4.20
t
Bioeffects A–41
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
C721
Min of Dimen- FL
Non-Scan 0.31 6.6 9.8 1.9 – 1.3 0.6 3.0
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.31 6.6 9.8 1.9 – 1.3 0.6 3.0
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.15 6.6 4.9 0.9 – 1.3 0.6 3.0
M Doppler
Non-Scan 0.62 5.1 25.8 8.4 – 1.3 0.6 3.0
Dimen-

Non-Scan 0.24 6.6 9.8 3.6 0.6 0.6 –
B/Pulsed Wave Scan 0.23 5.3 9.2 3.5 1.8 0.8
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.24 6.6 9.8 3.6 0.6 0.6 –
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.12 6.6 4.9 3.6 0.6 0.6 –
M Doppler
Non-Scan 0.52 5.1 25.8 3.1 0.7 0.6 –

Pulsed Wave Doppler
Bioeffects A–42 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
E721
Min of Dimen- FL
Non-Scan 0.37 5.06 15.33 6.10 – 1.32 0.61 2.70
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.37 5.06 15.33 6.10 – 1.32 0.61 2.70
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.18 5.05 7.67 3.05 – 1.32 0.61 3.00
M Doppler
Non-Scan 0.90 5.05 37.08 11.91 – 1.32 0.61 3.00
Table 143. E721 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Dimen-

Non-Scan 0.90 5.06 15.33 3.38 0.39 0.61 –
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.90 5.06 15.33 3.38 0.39 0.61 –
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.45 5.06 7.67 3.38 0.39 0.61 –
M Doppler
Non-Scan 0.82 5.05 37.08 3.27 0.83 0.61 –
Table 144. E721 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)

Pulsed Wave Doppler
Table 145. E721 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
t
Bioeffects A–43
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
I739
Min of Dimen- FL
Non-Scan 0.36 5.1 15.0 7.0 – 0.8 0.2 1.6
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.36 5.1 15.0 7.0 – 0.8 0.2 1.6
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.18 5.1 7.5 3.5 – 0.8 0.2 1.6
M Doppler
Non-Scan 0.59 5.1 21.4 18.1 – 0.8 0.2 1.6
Table 146. I739 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Dimen-

Non-Scan 0.96 5.1 15.0 1.7 0.3 0.2 –
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.96 5.1 15.0 1.7 0.3 0.2 –
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.48 5.1 7.5 1.7 0.3 0.2 –
M Doppler
Non-Scan 0.89 5.1 21.4 1.8 0.5 0.2 –
Table 147. I739 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)

Pulsed Wave Doppler
Table 148. I739 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
Bioeffects A–44 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
546L
Imaging Scanning Max fc Wo Min of Z1 Zbp Dimen– FL

Mode Mode TIS W.3(Z1) sions of Focal
ITA.3(Z1) Aaprt Zone
B–Mode Scan 0.18 4.9 7.9 2.5 – 1.6 0.9 3.3

M–Mode Non–Scan < 0.1 4.9 1.9 0.6 – 1.6 0.9 3.3
B/M–Mode Scan 0.12 4.9 5.3 1.6 – 1.6 0.9 3.3
Non–Scan < 0.1 1.9 0.6
Pulsed Wave Dopper Non–Scan 1.62 4.0 81.5 43.4 – 1.6 0.8 7.4
Doppler Non–Scan 1.62 4.0 81.5 43.4 0.8 7.4
B/CFM–Mode Scan 1.23 5.0 51.1 19.1 – 1.6 0.9 8.2

Pulsed Wave Doppler Non–Scan 0.81 4.0 40.8 21.7 0.8 7.4
M/M–CFM Non–Scan 1.11 5.0 45.9 17.4 – 1.6 0.9 8.2

M–CFM/PD Non–Scan 1.11 5.0 45.9 17.4 – 1.6 0.9 8.2
Table 149. 546L Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Imaging Scanning Max fc Wo Zsp deq(Zsp) Dimen– deq

Mode Mode TIB sions of @PIImax
Aaprt
B–Mode Scan 0.18 4.9 7.9 3.6 1.3 0.9 –

M–Mode Non–Scan < 0.1 4.9 1.9 3.6 0.3 0.9 –
B/M–Mode Scan 0.12 4.9 5.3 3.6 1.3 0.9 –
Non–Scan < 0.1 1.9 0.3
Pulsed Wave Doppler Non–Scan 2.87 4.0 81.5 2.3 0.6 0.8 0.5
Doppler Non–Scan 2.87 4.0 81.5 2.3 0.6 0.8 0.5
B–CFM Scan 1.23 5.0 51.1 2.6 0.5 0.9 0.8

B/Color Flow Dopper/ Scan 0.68 5.0 28.2 2.6 0.5 0.9 0.8
Pulsed Wave Non–Scan 1.43 4.0 40.8 2.3 0.6 0.8 0.5
M/M–CFM Non–Scan 1.17 5.0 45.9 2.6 0.7 0.9 0.6

M–CFM/PD Non–Scan 1.17 5.0 45.9 2.6 0.7 0.9 0.6
Table 150. 546L Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)
t
Bioeffects A–45
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
546L (cont’d)
Imaging Max fc Wo Dimensions FL

Mode TIC of Aaprt Focal Zone
B–Mode 0.19 4.9 7.9 0.9 3.3

M–Mode < 0.1 4.9 1.9 0.9 3.3
B/M–Mode 0.17 4.9 7.2 0.9 3.3
B/Color Flow Dopper 1.20 5.0 51.1 0.9 8.2
Pulsed Wave Doppler
M/M–CFM 1.08 5.0 45.9 0.9 8.2

M–CFM/PD 1.08 5.0 45.9 0.9 8.2
Table 151. 546L Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
Bioeffects A–46 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
739L
Min of Dimen- FL
B–Mode Scan 0.15 7.12 5.87 1.61 – 1.35 0.63 2.70
M–Mode Non–Scan < 0.1 7.09 0.81 0.22 – 1.35 0.63 2.70
B/M–Mode Scan 0.10 7.12 3.92 1.08 – 1.35 0.63 2.70
Non–Scan < 0.1 7.09 0.81 0.22 – 1.35 0.63 2.70
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.46 6.63 14.92 6.25 – 0.79 0.22 1.60
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.23 6.63 7.46 3.13 – 0.79 0.22 1.60
M/M–CFM Non-Scan 0.86 6.62 27.22 11.41 – 0.79 0.22 1.60
M–CFM/PD Non-Scan 0.86 6.62 27.22 11.41 – 0.79 0.22 1.60
Table 152. 739L Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Dimen-
B–Mode Scan 0.15 7.12 5.87 2.76 0.94 0.63 –

M–Mode Non–Scan < 0.1 7.09 0.81 2.76 0.26 0.63 –
B/M–Mode Scan 0.10 7.12 3.92 2.76 0.94 0.63 –
Non–Scan < 0.1 7.09 0.81 2.76 0.26 0.63 –
Doppler
Non-Scan 1.13 6.63 14.92 1.90 0.20 0.22 –
B–CFM Scan 0.91 6.62 29.59 1.84 0.68 0.22 –
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.56 6.63 7.46 1.90 0.20 0.22 –
M/M–CFM Non–Scan 0.80 6.62 27.22 1.84 0.58 0.22 –
Color Flow with Non-Scan 0.80 6.62 27.22 1.84 0.58 0.22 –
M Doppler
Table 153. 739L Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)
t
Bioeffects A–47
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
739L (cont’d)

B–Mode 0.16 7.12 5.87 0.63 2.70
M–Mode < 0.1 7.09 0.81 0.63 2.70
B/M–Mode 0.13 7.12 4.73 0.63 2.70
Pulsed Wave Doppler
M/M–CFM 1.27 6.62 27.22 0.22 1.60
Table 154. 739L Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
Bioeffects A–48 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
L764
Min of Dimen- FL
Pulsed Wave Doppler Scan NA – – – – – – –
Non-Scan 0.2 5.16 5.9 – – – 0.8x0.7 2.88
B/Pulsed Wave Scan 0.2 6.12 6.1 – – – 0.9x0.7 3.48
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.2 5.16 5.9 – – – 0.8x0.7 2.88
B/Color Flow Doppler/ Scan 0.3 6.12 10.0 – – – 0.9x0.7 3.48
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.2 5.16 5.9 – – – 0.8x0.7 2.88
Color Flow with Scan 0.3 6.45 10.1 – – – 0.8x0.7 2.88
M Doppler
Non-Scan < 0.1 6.45 0.9 – – – 0.8x0.7 2.72
Table 155. L764 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Dimen-
Pulsed Wave Doppler Scan NA – – – – – –

Non-Scan 0.5 5.17 5.9 2.5 0.1 0.8x0.7 0.1
B/Pulsed Wave Scan 0.1 6.10 6.1 – – 0.9x0.7 –
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.5 5.17 5.9 2.5 0.1 0.8x0.7 0.1
B/Color Flow Doppler/ Scan 0.3 6.10 17.0 – – 0.9x0.7 –
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.5 5.17 5.9 2.5 0.1 0.8x0.7 0.1
Color Flow with Scan 0.3 6.10 10.9 – – 0.8x0.7 –
M Doppler
Non-Scan < 0.1 6.10 0.9 2.5 0.1 0.8x0.7 0.1
Table 156. L764 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)

Pulsed Wave Doppler 0.2 5.16 5.9 0.8x0.7 2.9
B/Pulsed Wave Doppler 0.4 5.16 17.0 0.9x0.7 2.9
B/Color Flow Doppler/ 0.7 5.16 22.9 0.9x0.7 2.9
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Color Flow with M Doppler 0.3 6.30 6.9 0.8x0.7 2.9
Table 157. L764 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
t
Bioeffects A–49
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
LA39
Min of Dimen- FL
Pulsed Wave Doppler Scan
Non-Scan 0.21 5.32 8.10 5.92 – 0.39 0.05 0.68
B/Pulsed Wave Scan <0.1 8.18 1.19 0.68 – 0.78 0.21 1.30
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.21 5.32 8.10 5.92 – 0.39 0.05 0.68
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.10 5.32 4.05 2.96 – 0.39 0.05 0.68
Color Flow with Scan
M Doppler
Non-Scan 0.63 5.31 25.30 20.13 – 0.97 0.33 3.80
Table 158. LA39 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Dimen-

Non-Scan 1.13 5.32 8.10 0.82 0.14 0.05 0.12
B/Pulsed Wave Scan <0.1 8.18 1.19 1.37 0.50 0.21 –
Doppler
Non-Scan 1.13 5.32 8.10 0.82 0.14 0.05 0.12
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.57 5.32 4.05 0.82 0.14 0.05 0.12
M Doppler
Non-Scan 1.17 5.31 25.30 1.31 0.78 0.05 0.78
Table 159. LA39 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)

Pulsed Wave Doppler
Table 160. LA39 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
Bioeffects A–50 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
P509
Imaging Scanning Max fc Wo Min of Z1 Zbp Dimen– FL

Mode Mode TIS W.3(Z1) sions of Focal
ITA.3(Z1) Aaprt Zone
B–Mode Scan 0.25 4.93 11.03 5.37 – 1.57 0.86 2.00

M–Mode Non–Scan < 0.1 4.93 3.72 1.81 – 1.57 0.86 2.00
B/M–Mode Scan 0.16 4.93 7.35 3.58 – 1.57 0.86 2.00
Non–Scan < 0.1 4.93 3.72 1.81 1.57 0.86 2.00
Pulsed Wave Dopper Non–Scan 0.56 4.02 29.55 16.28 – 1.68 0.99 2.00
Doppler Non–Scan 0.56 4.02 29.55 16.28 1.68 0.99 2.00
B/CFM–Mode Scan 0.63 4.05 31.52 17.76 – 1.68 0.99 2.00

Pulsed Wave Doppler Non–Scan 0.28 4.02 14.77 8.14 1.68 0.99 2.00
M/M–CFM Non–Scan 0.48 4.05 24.14 13.47 – 1.68 0.99 2.00

M–CFM/PD Non–Scan 0.48 4.05 24.14 13.47 – 1.68 0.99 2.00
CWD Non–Scan 1.33 4.00 69.43 36.62 – 1.05 0.38 11.90
Table 161. P509 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Imaging Scanning Max fc Wo Zsp deq(Zsp) Dimen– deq

Mode Mode TIB sions of @PIImax
Aaprt
B–Mode Scan 0.25 4.93 11.03 2.06 0.36 0.86 –

M–Mode Non–Scan 0.18 4.93 3.72 2.06 0.35 0.86 –
B/M–Mode Scan 0.16 4.93 7.35 2.06 0.36 0.86 –
Non–Scan 0.18 4.93 3.72 2.06 0.35 0.86 –
Pulsed Wave Doppler Non–Scan 1.63 4.02 29.55 2.20 0.31 0.99 –
Doppler Non–Scan 1.63 4.02 29.55 2.20 0.31 0.99 –
B–CFM Scan 0.63 4.05 31.52 2.13 0.38 0.99 –

B/Color Flow Dopper/ Scan 0.40 4.05 19.44 2.13 0.38 0.99 –
Pulsed Wave Non–Scan 0.82 4.02 14.77 2.20 0.31 0.99 –
M/M–CFM Non–Scan 1.56 4.05 24.14 2.13 0.33 0.99 –

M–CFM/PD Non–Scan 1.56 4.05 24.14 2.13 0.33 0.99 –
CWD Non–Scan 1.73 4.00 69.43 2.42 0.83 0.38 0.83
Table 162. P509 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)
t
Bioeffects A–51
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
P509 (cont’d)
Imaging Max fc Wo Dimensions FL

Mode TIC of Aaprt Focal Zone
B–Mode 0.26 4.93 11.03 0.86 2.00

M–Mode < 0.1 4.93 3.72 0.86 2.00
B/M–Mode 0.26 4.93 11.08 0.86 2.00
Pulsed Wave Doppler
M/M–CFM 0.54 4.05 24.14 0.99 2.00

M–CFM/PD 0.54 4.05 24.14 0.99 2.00
CWD 2.49 4.00 69.43 0.38 11.90
Table 163. P509 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
Bioeffects A–52 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
S220
Min of Dimen- FL
Non–Scan 0.59 2.49 85.73 29.04 2.87 2.87 2.87 6.75
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.59 2.49 85.73 29.04 2.87 2.87 2.87 6.75
B/Color Flow Doppler/ Scan 0.71 2.27 72.80 23.15 3.07 3.07 3.28 6.75
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.29 2.49 42.86 14.52 2.87 2.87 2.87 6.75
M Doppler
Non-Scan 0.53 2.27 75.76 26.09 3.07 3.07 3.28 6.75
Non-Scan 0.84 2.50 117.15 35.20 4.5 2.03 1.43 10.00
Table 164. S220 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Dimen-

Non-Scan 2.52 2.22 66.01 5.95 0.77 2.87 1.18
Doppler
Non-Scan 2.52 2.22 66.01 5.95 0.77 2.87 0.33
B/Color Flow Doppler/ Scan 0.71 2.27 72.80 6.78 1.16 2.87 1.18
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 1.26 2.22 33.01 5.95 0.77 2.87 0.33
M Doppler
Non-Scan 2.71 2.27 75.76 6.78 0.79 3.28 1.18
Non-Scan 1.61 2.50 117.15 6.97 0.97 1.23 0.97
Table 165. S220 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)

Pulsed Wave Doppler
CW Doppler 2.17 2.50 117.15 1.43 10.00
Table 166. S220 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
t
Bioeffects A–53
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
S222
Min of Dimen- FL
Non–Scan 0.22 2.49 61.79 18.68 – 2.76 2.66 7.30
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.22 2.49 61.79 18.68 – 2.76 2.66 7.30
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.11 2.49 30.89 9.34 – 2.76 2.66 7.30
M Doppler
Non-Scan 0.24 2.49 70.43 20.23 – 2.76 2.66 7.30
CW Doppler Scan
Non-Scan 2.02 2.51 194.47 40.43 – 1.69 1.00 10.00
Dimen-

Non-Scan 2.27 2.49 61.79 7.16 0.51 2.66 0.88
Doppler
Non-Scan 2.27 2.49 61.79 7.16 0.51 2.66 0.41
B/Color Flow Doppler/ Scan 1.17 2.49 102.64 7.32 1.16 2.66 0.88
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 1.14 2.49 30.89 7.16 0.51 2.66 0.41
M Doppler
Non-Scan 2.17 2.49 70.43 7.32 0.42 2.66 0.38
CW Doppler Scan
Non-Scan 2.25 2.51 194.47 7.61 1.33 1.00 1.33

Pulsed Wave Doppler
CW Doppler 4.32 2.51 194.47 1.00 10.00
Bioeffects A–54 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
S316
Min of Dimen- FL
B–Mode Scan 0.16 3.42 16.83 4.68 – 2.44 2.08 5.77
M–Mode Non–Scan < 0.1 3.36 5.00 1.38 – 2.44 2.08 5.77
B/M–Mode Scan 0.11 3.42 11.22 3.12 – 2.44 2.08 5.77
Non–Scan < 0.1 3.36 5.00 1.38 – 2.44 2.08 5.77
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.11 3.00 27.98 7.71 – 2.32 1.89 5.00
B/CFM–Mode Scan 1.24 2.98 91.88 28.66 – 2.32 1.89 5.00
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan < 0.1 3.00 13.99 3.86 – 2.32 1.89 5.00
M/M–CFM Non–Scan 0.16 2.98 36.42 11.42 – 2.32 1.89 5.00
M–CFM/PD Non-Scan 0.16 2.98 36.42 11.42 – 2.32 1.89 5.00
Table 170 S316 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Dimen-
B–Mode Scan 0.16 3.42 16.83 5.89 1.29 2.08 –

M–Mode Non–Scan 0.14 3.36 5.00 5.57 0.46 2.08 –
B/M–Mode Scan 0.11 3.42 11.22 5.89 1.29 2.08 –
Non–Scan 0.14 3.36 5.00 5.57 0.46 2.08 –
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.88 3.00 27.98 6.23 0.49 1.89 –
B–CFM Scan 1.24 2.98 91.88 5.75 1.46 1.89 –
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.44 3.00 13.99 6.23 0.49 1.89 –
M/M–CFM Non–Scan 0.66 2.98 36.42 5.75 0.79 1.89 –
M–CFM/PD Non-Scan 0.66 2.98 36.42 5.75 0.79 1.89 –
t
Bioeffects A–55
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
S316 (cont’d)

B–Mode 0.26 3.42 16.83 2.08 5.77
M–Mode < 0.1 3.36 5.00 2.08 5.77
B/M–Mode 0.25 3.42 16.22 2.08 5.77
B–CFM 1.47 2.98 91.88 1.89 5.00
Pulsed Wave Doppler
M/M–CFM 0.58 2.98 36.42 1.89 5.00
Bioeffects A–56 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
S317
Min of Dimen- FL
Non–Scan 0.36 3.0 40.9 13.5 – 2.5 2.2 6.2
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.36 3.0 40.9 13.5 – 2.5 2.2 6.2
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.18 3.0 20.4 6.7 – 2.5 2.2 6.2
M Doppler
Non-Scan 1.33 2.9 54.9 16.2 2.5 2.5 2.2 6.2
Non-Scan 1.33 2.9 96.6 25.4 1.6 1.6 0.9 17.4
Dimen-

Non-Scan 1.61 3.0 40.87 6.2 0.3 2.2 –
Doppler
Non-Scan 1.61 3.0 40.87 6.2 0.3 2.2 –
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.80 3.0 20.44 6.2 0.3 2.2 –
M Doppler
Non-Scan 2.12 2.9 54.91 6.2 0.4 2.2 –
Non-Scan 2.84 2.9 96.57 6.1 1.1 0.9 –

Pulsed Wave Doppler
CW Doppler 2.21 2.9 96.6 0.9 17.4
t
Bioeffects A–57
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
S611
Min of Dimen- FL
Non–Scan 0.96 5.0 40.5 8.7 – 1.6 0.9 7.5
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.96 5.0 40.5 8.7 – 1.6 0.9 4.5
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.48 5.0 20.3 4.4 – 1.6 0.9 4.5
M Doppler
Non-Scan 1.38 4.0 72.3 14.4 – 1.6 0.9 7.5
Non-Scan 1.21 4.0 63.3 33.0 – 1.0 0.3 6.4
Dimen-

Non-Scan 1.57 5.0 40.55 4.5 0.4 0.9 –
Doppler
Non-Scan 1.57 5.0 40.55 4.5 0.4 0.9 –
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.78 5.0 20.27 4.5 0.4 0.9 –
M Doppler
Non-Scan 2.16 4.0 72.26 5.1 0.4 0.9 –
Non-Scan 2.85 4.0 63.31 2.0 0.5 0.3 –

Pulsed Wave Doppler
CW Doppler 2.41 4.0 63.3 0.3 6.4
Bioeffects A–58 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
T739
Min of Dimen- FL
Non-Scan 0.28 5.1 11.8 5.5 – 0.8 0.2 1.6
B/Pulsed Wave Scan <0.1 7.0 2.6 1.0 – 1.1 0.4 2.1
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.28 5.1 11.8 5.5 – 0.8 0.2 1.6
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.14 5.1 5.9 2.7 – 0.8 0.2 1.6
M Doppler
Non-Scan 0.39 5.1 15.7 14.8 – 0.8 0.2 1.6
Table 179. I739 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Dimen-

Non-Scan 0.98 5.1 11.8 1.7 0.2 0.2 –
B/Pulsed Wave Scan <0.1 7.0 2.6 2.1 0.9 0.4 –
Doppler
Non-Scan 0.98 5.1 11.8 1.7 0.2 0.2 –
Pulsed Wave Doppler
Non-Scan 0.49 5.1 5.9 1.7 0.2 0.2 –
M Doppler
Non-Scan 0.89 5.1 15.7 1.8 0.4 0.2 –
Table 180. I739 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)

Pulsed Wave Doppler
Table 181. T739 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
t
Bioeffects A–59
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
CWD2
Min of Dimen- FL
CW Doppler Scan
Non-Scan 0.49 2.00 51.19 44.56 1.59 1.59 0.88 1.00
Table 182. CWD2 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Dimen-
CW Doppler Scan
Non-Scan 3.30 2.00 51.19 1.00 7.22 0.88 7.22
Table 183. CWD2 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)

CW Doppler 1.21 2.00 3.48 0.88 1.00
Table 184. CWD2 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
CWD5
Min of Dimen- FL
CW Doppler Scan
Non-Scan 1.92 5.00 80.41 56.90 0.85 0.85 0.25 1.00
Table 185. CWD5 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Dimen-
CW Doppler Scan
Non-Scan 3.55 5.00 80.41 1.00 2.39 0.25 2.39
Table 186. CWD5 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)

CW Doppler 3.56 5.00 80.41 0.25 1.00
Table 187. CWD5 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
Bioeffects A–60 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Key to Tables
Symbol Units Description

Output Display Indices:
MI n/a Mechanical Index
TISscan n/a Soft Tissue Thermal Index (scanning mode)
TISnon-scan n/a Soft Tissue Thermal Index (non-scanning mode)
TIB n/a Bone Thermal Index
TIC n/a Cranial Thermal Index
Intensity, Power, and Pressure Parameters:
ISPTA.3 mW/cm2 Spatial Peak-Temporal Average Intensity derated to 0.3 dB/cm
/MHz
ISPPA.3 W/cm2 Spatial Peak-Pulse Average Intensity derated to 0.3 dB/cm/MHz
ITA.3 mW/cm2 Time average Intensity, derated to 0.3 dB/cm/MHz
PIImax n/a Maximum free-field pulse intensity integral
W0 mW Ultrasonic Power
W.3(z1) mW Derated ultrasonic power at axial distance z1
Pr MPa Peak rarefactional pressure
Pr.3 MPa Peak rarefactional pressure, derated to 0.3 dB/cm/MHz
Transmit Parameters:
fc MHz Center Frequency
PD ms Pulse Duration
PRF kHz Pulse Repetition Frequency
Distance/Depth and Area Parameters:
deq(z) cm Equivalent beam diameter as a function of z, =
[(4/p)(W0/ITA(z))]1/2
zsp cm Axial distance to spatial peak
Axial distance to the location of max[min(W.3(z), ITA.3(z) x 1 cm2)]

z1 cm
where z zbp
zbp cm Break point depth = 1.69(Aaprt)1/2
ROC cm Radius of curvature
FL cm Focal Length
Aaprt cm2 Area of Active Aperture
Table 188. Index Tables Key
t
Bioeffects A–61
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Measurement Precision and Uncertainty

Precision and measurement uncertainty of the system used
to measure the acoustic output is provided in the following
table. These values are determined in accordance with
Section 6.4 of the Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal
and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic
Ultrasound Equipment, AIUM/NEMA 1992 and the Acoustic
Output Measurement Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound
Equipment, NEMA 1992.
Peak
Center Acoustic Rarefactional Acoustic
Frequency Power Pressure Intensity
Precision 4.4% 1.5% 2.6% 5.1%
Measurement 10.0% 3.4% 6.0% 11.6%
Uncertainty
Table 189. Measurement Precision and Uncertainty
Acoustic Output Display Operation and Accuracy

The Acoustic Output display will show MI (Mechanical Index)
while in B-Mode. When other modes are selected TIS, TIB or
TIC will be displayed. The Setup/Custom Display menu
page 9 will determine which value (TIS, TIB or TIC) is
displayed.
Display increments are 0.2 for values of one or less and 1.0
for values greater than one. Display accuracy is
+100%/–80% at a maximum display value. It is +60%/–70%
at mid-range display values.
Bioeffects A–62 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Endnotes
1Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal and Mechanical
Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic Ultrasound
Equipment, AIUM/NEMA, 1992
2Implementation of the Principle of As Low As Reasonably
Achievable (ALARA) for Medical and Dental Personnel,
National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements
(NCRP), Report No.107, December 31, 1990.
3FDA Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH),
510(k) Guidance for Diagnostic Ultrasound and Fetal Doppler
Ultrasound Medical Devices, September 8, 1989 draft.
4FDA Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH),
510(k) Guidance for Diagnostic Ultrasound and Fetal Doppler
Ultrasound Medical Devices, September 8, 1989 draft.
5Rochelson BL, Schulman H, Fleischer A, Farmakides G,
Bracero L, Ducey J, Winter D, Penny B: The clinical;
significance of Doppler umbilical artery velocimetry in the
small for gestational age fetus. Am J Obstet Gynecol
156:1223-1226, 1987.
6Soothill PW, Nicolaides KH, Bilardo CM, Campbell S:
Relation of fetal hypoxia in growth retardation to mean blood
velocity in the fetal aorta. Lancet 2:1118-1119, 1986.
7JouppilaP, Kirkinen P: Increased vascular resistance in the
descending aorta of the human fetus in hypoxia. R J Obstet
Gynecol 91:853-856, 1984.
8Reuwer PJHM, Rietman GW, Sijmons EA, et al: Intrauterine
growth retardation: Prediction of perinatal distress by Doppler
ultrasound. Lancet 2:415-418, 1987.
9Copel JA, Grannum PA, Hobbins JC, Cunningham FG:
Doppler Ultrasound in Obstetrics. In: Pritchard, MacDonald,
GNT (eds) Williams Obstetrics Seventeenth Edition,
Philadelphia, PA, Appleton & Lange, 1988, Supplement No.
16.
10Rochelson B, Schulman H, Farmakides G, et al: The
significance of absent end-diastolic velocity in umbilical artery
velocity waveforms. Am J Obstet Gynecol 156:1213, 1987.
t
Bioeffects A–63
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Endnotes (cont’d)
11Woo JSK, Liang ST, Lo RLS: Significance of an absent or
reversed end diastolic flow in Doppler umbilical waveforms. J
Ultrasound Med 6:291, 1987.
12Kleinman CS, Weinstein EM, Copel JA: Pulsed Doppler
Analysis of human fetal blood flow. Clin Diagnostic
Ultrasound 17:173-185, 1986.
13Strasburger JF, Huhta JC, Carpenter RJ, et al: Doppler
echocardiography in the diagnosis and management of
persistent fetal arrhythmias. J Am Coll Cardiol 7:1386-1391,
1986.
14SteinfeldL. Rappaport HL, Rossbach HC, Martinez E:
Diagnosis of fetal arrhythmias using echocardiographic and
Doppler techniques. J Am Coll Cardiol 9:1425-1433, 1986.
15Reed KL, Sahn DJ, Marx GR, et al: Cardiac Doppler flows
during fetal arrhythmias: Physiologic consequences. Obstet
Gynecol 70:1-6, 1987.
16Silverman NH, Kleinman CS, Rudolph AM, et al: Fetal
atrioventricular valve insufficiency associated with
non-immune hydrops: a two-dimensional echocardiographic
and pulsed Doppler ultrasound study. Circulation 72:825-832,
1985.
17FDA/CDRH, 510(k) Diagnostic Ultrasound Guidance
Update of 1991, April 26, 1991 draft.
18Biological Effects of Ultrasound: Mechanisms and Clinical
Implications, NCRP Report No. 74, December 30, 1983.
19Exposure Criteria for Medical Diagnostic Ultrasound: I.
Criteria Based on Thermal Mechanisms, NCRP Report No.
113, June 1, 1992.
20BioeffectsConsiderations for the Safety of Diagnostic
Ultrasound, Journal of Ultrasound in Medicine, AIUM,
September 1988.
21Geneva Report on Safety and Standardization in Medical
Ultrasound, WFUMB, May 1990.
Bioeffects A–64 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
IEC Acoustic Output Tables
Acoustical parameters represent the maximum values for a
probe/mode combination; other parameters refer to the
operating conditions which yield these maximum acoustic
parameters.
Key to Tables
Parameter Unit Description

P_ (MPa) Peak-negative acoustic pressure in the plane perpen-
dicular to the beam-alignment axis containing the
maximum pulse-pressure-squared integral (or maxi-
mum mean square acoustic pressure for continuous
wave systems) in the whole ultrasonic field.
Ispta mW/cm2 Spatial-peak temporal-average derived intensity in
the whole ultrasonic field.
Ip mm Distance from the transducer output face to the point
of maximum pulse-pressure-squared integral (or
maximum mean square acoustic pressure for contin-
uous wave systems).
wpb6 mm –6 dB pulse beam-width at the point of maximum
pulse-pressure-squared integral (or maximum mean
ă
(||)
( ) square acoustic pressure for continuous wave sys-
ă
tems). These directions shall be parallel (||) and per-
pendicular ( ) to the reference direction.
prr KHz Pulse repetition rate for non-scanning modes.
srr Hz Scan repetition rate (srr) for scanning modes.
Output Beam mm Dimensions parallel and perpendicular to the refer-
Dimensions ence direction.
fawf MHz Arithmetic-mean acoustic-working frequency mea-
sured by a hydrophone placed at the point of maxi-
mum pulse-pressure-squared integral (or maximum
mean square acoustic pressure for continuous wave
systems).
APF % Acoustic power-up fraction.
AIF % Acoustic initialization fraction.
Table 190. Key to IEC Table Value
t
Bioeffects A–65
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Key to Tables (cont’d)
Parameter Unit Description

Maximum Power mW Maximum temporal-average power output. For scan-
ning modes, this shall be the total power output of all
the acoustic pulses.
Iob mW/cm2 Output beam intensity.
Power-up Mode In systems in which the user defines the power-up
mode, this shall be stated as either “user defined” or
“not applicable” (n/a).
Initialization Mode In systems in which the user defines the initialization
mode, this shall be stated as either “user defined” or
“not applicable” (n/a).
Acoustic Output If the system has acoustic output freeze, then this
Freeze shall be stated as “yes;” otherwise, it shall be stated
as “no.”
Itt mm Transducer to transducer-output-face distance.
Its mm Typical value for the transducer stand-off distance. If
the transducer assembly is normally used in contact
with the patient, then this shall be specified “contact”
system.
Table 190. Key to IEC Table Value (cont’d)
Bioeffects A–66 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
C364 Probe
Parameter B M B+M D B+D

P_ (MPa) 1.89 1.89 1.89 1.90 1.90
Ispta (mW/cm2) 75.0 177.0 407.6 851.2 1081.8
Ip (mm) 46.1 45.7 46.1 19.1 19.1
wpb6
1.9 1.8 1.9 1.9 1.9
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 2.5 2.5 2.5 7.1 7.1
prr (kHz) – 0.89 0.89 15.72 15.72

srr (Hz) 70 – 70 – 70
Output Beam Dim.
10.2 10.2 10.2 10.2 10.2
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 12.0 12.0 12.0 5.0 5.0
fawf (MHz) 3.36 3.34 3.36 3.29 3.29

APF (%) na na na na na
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
AIF (%) na na na na na
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 16.97 4.36 15.68 66.92 78.23
Iob (mW/cm2) 13.86 3.57 12.81 131.22 140.46
Power-up Mode na na na na na
Initialization Mode na na na na na
Acoustic Output yes yes yes yes yes
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Its (mm) contact contact contact contact contact
Table 191. C364 IEC Acoustic Output Information
t
Bioeffects A–67
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
C364 Probe(cont’d)
Parameter B+rD B+rD+D M+cM cM+D

P_ (MPa) 1.89 1.90 1.89 1.89
Ispta (mW/cm2) 434.6 758.2 1228.7 1228.7
Ip (mm) 19.7 19.7 19.7 19.7
wpb6
1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.4
prr (kHz) 10.40 10.40 10.40 10.40

srr (Hz) 9 9 – –
Output Beam Dim.
10.2 10.2 10.2 10.2
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
fawf (MHz) 3.31 3.31 3.31 3.31

APF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
AIF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 63.73 70.98 24.24 24.24
Iob (mW/cm2) 112.01 126.24 42.53 42.53
Power-up Mode na na na na
Initialization Mode na na na na
Acoustic Output yes yes yes yes
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Its (mm) contact contact contact contact
Table 196. C364 IEC Acoustic Output Information (cont’d)
Bioeffects A–68 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
C551 Probe

P_ (MPa) 1.81 1.81 1.81 1.95 1.95
Ispta (mW/cm2) 78.7 89.2 141.6 1512.5 1565.0
Ip (mm) 42.3 40.1 42.3 40.7 40.7
wpb6
1.9 1.9 1.9 1.6 1.6
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 2.6 3.2 2.6 2.4 2.4
prr (kHz) – 1.03 1.03 3.42 3.42

srr (Hz) 105 – 105 – 105
Output Beam Dim.
9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 8.0 8.0 8.0 9.6 9.6
fawf (MHz) 4.46 4.32 4.46 4.00 4.00

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 16.16 3.37 14.14 41.97 52.74
Iob (mW/cm2) 22.44 4.67 19.63 48.58 63.53
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
t
Bioeffects A–69
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
C551 Probe(cont’d)

P_ (MPa) 1.87 1.95 2.30 2.30
Ispta (mW/cm2) 486.4 1025.7 894.1 894.1
Ip (mm) 40.6 40.6 40.6 40.6
wpb6
1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3
prr (kHz) 1.14 1.14 1.48 1.48

srr (Hz) 28 28 – –
Output Beam Dim.
9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 9.6 9.6 9.6 9.6
fawf (MHz) 4.01 4.01 4.01 4.01

APF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
AIF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 96.78 74.76 92.87 92.87
Iob (mW/cm2) 114.51 89.02 108.27 108.27
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Bioeffects A–70 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
C386 Probe

P_ (MPa) 2.82 2.82 2.82 2.67 2.82
Ispta (mW/cm2) 28.76 330.33 349.51 1938.30 1957.48
Ip (mm) 70.30 70.30 70.30 73.20 73.20
wpb6
2.11 2.11 2.11 2.46 2.46
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 1.64 1.64 1.64 1.75 1.75
prr (kHz) – 0.87 0.87 7.86 7.86

srr (Hz) 29.00 – 29.00 – 29.00
Output Beam Dim.
17.10 17.10 17.10 19.80 17.10
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 13.00 13.00 13.00 13.00 13.00
fawf (MHz) 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.36 3.36

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 42.09 6.68 34.74 43.86 71.92
Iob (mW/cm2) 18.96 3.01 15.65 17.19 29.83
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
t
Bioeffects A–71
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
C386 Probe (cont’d)

P_ (MPa) 2.82 2.82 2.19 21.9
Ispta (mW/cm2) 421.78 1189.63 523.13 523.13
Ip (mm) 60.50 60.50 60.50 60.50
wpb6
2.77 2.77 2.77 2.77
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 2.19 2.19 2.19 2.19
prr (kHz) 0.42 0.42 0.42 0.42

srr (Hz) 7.00 7.00 – –
Output Beam Dim.
17.10 17.10 19.80 19.80
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 13.00 13.00 13.00 13.00
fawf (MHz) 2.55 2.55 2.55 2.55

APF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
AIF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 128.68 100.30 100.62 100.62
Iob (mW/cm2) 63.23 46.53 53.60 53.60
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Bioeffects A–72 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
C721 Probe

P_ (MPa) 1.70 1.15 1.70 1.66 1.70
Ispta (mW/cm2) 44.32 54.41 83.96 453.84 483.39
Ip (mm) 35.20 35.20 35.20 36.10 36.10
wpb6
1.26 1.26 1.26 1.43 1.43
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 1.79 1.79 1.79 1.69 1.69
prr (kHz) – 0.90 0.90 5.95 5.95

srr (Hz) 34.00 – 34.00 – 34.00
Output Beam Dim.
10.29 10.29 10.29 7.64 10.29
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 8.00 8.00 8.00 8.00 8.00
fawf (MHz) 5.25 5.25 5.25 6.63 6.63

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 13.83 1.38 10.60 9.80 19.02
Iob (mW/cm2) 16.80 1.68 12.88 16.03 27.24
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
t
Bioeffects A–73
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
C721 Probe (cont’d)

P_ (MPa) 1.94 1.94 1.20 1.20
Ispta (mW/cm2) 156.46 319.92 262.89 262.89
Ip (mm) 31.00 31.00 31.00 31.00
wpb6
1.63 1.63 1.63 1.63
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15
prr (kHz) 1.96 1.96 1.96 1.96

srr (Hz) 9.00 9.00 – –
Output Beam Dim.
10.29 10.29 7.64 7.64
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 8.00 8.00 8.00 8.00
fawf (MHz) 5.07 5.07 5.07 5.07

APF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
AIF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 10.98 15.00 25.80 25.80
Iob (mW/cm2) 53.43 40.33 42.23 42.23
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Bioeffects A–74 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
E721 Probe

P_ (MPa) 2.74 2.74 2.74 2.24 2.74
Ispta (mW/cm2) 11.7 109.2 117.0 743.7 751.4
Ip (mm) 31.3 30.8 31.3 33.8 33.8
wpb6
1.1 1.1 1.1 1.5 1.5
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.2 2.2
prr (kHz) – 0.81 0.81 5.21 5.21

srr (Hz) 150 – 150 – 150
Output Beam Dim.
8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 10.3 10.3 10.3 7.6 7.6
fawf (MHz) 5.94 5.71 5.94 5.06 5.06

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 13.46 2.55 11.52 15.33 24.31
Iob (mW/cm2) 16.35 3.09 13.99 25.10 36.00
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 195. E721 IEC Acoustic Output Information
t
Bioeffects A–75
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
E721 Probe (cont’d)

P_ (MPa) 2.74 2.74 2.74 2.74
Ispta (mW/cm2) 14.9 383.2 549.8 549.8
Ip (mm) 32.7 32.7 32.7 32.7
wpb6
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1
prr (kHz) 1.96 1.96 1.96 1.96

srr (Hz) 9 9 – –
Output Beam Dim.
8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6
fawf (MHz) 5.05 5.05 5.05 5.05

APF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
AIF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 38.90 31.60 37.08 37.08
Iob (mW/cm2) 59.89 47.95 59.62 59.62
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 196. E721 IEC Acoustic Output Information (cont’d)
Bioeffects A–76 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
546L Probe

P_ (MPa) 2.43 2.43 2.43 2.02 2.43
Ispta (mW/cm2) 58.29 123.07 161.93 804.12 842.98
Ip (mm) 36.43 36.43 36.43 22.95 22.95
wpb6
0.91 0.91 0.91 9.17 9.17
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 2.01 2.01 2.01 1.71 1.71
prr (kHz) – 0.94 0.94 15.72 15.72

srr (Hz) 28.00 – 28.00 – 28.00
Output Beam Dim.
14.88 14.88 14.88 13.92 13.92
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
fawf (MHz) 4.88 4.88 4.88 4.01 4.01

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 7.89 1.91 7.18 81.51 86.78
Iob (mW/cm2) 8.87 2.15 8.06 97.04 102.95
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 196. 546L IEC Acoustic Output Information
t
Bioeffects A–77
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
546L Probe (cont’d)

P_ (MPa) 2.43 2.43 2.07 2.07
Ispta (mW/cm2) 840.26 841.62 604.69 604.69
Ip (mm) 26.01 26.01 26.01 26.01
wpb6
10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
prr (kHz) 2.26 2.26 2.26 2.26

srr (Hz) 14.00 14.00 – –
Output Beam Dim.
14.88 14.88 14.88 14.88
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
fawf (MHz) 4.99 4.99 4.99 4.99

APF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
AIF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 51.15 68.96 45.89 45.89
Iob (mW/cm2) 57.27 80.11 53.51 53.51
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 196. 546L IEC Acoustic Output Information (cont’d)
Bioeffects A–78 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
L764 (LH) Probe

P_ (MPa) 4.44 4.44 4.44 3.64 4.44
Ispta (mW/cm2) 40.96 94.91 122.22 749.20 776.51
Ip (mm) 27.46 27.46 27.46 24.70 25.00
wpb6
1.36 1.36 1.36 1.17 1.17
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 1.39 1.39 1.39 1.43 1.43
prr (kHz) – 0.87 0.87 2.00 2.00

srr (Hz) 33.00 – 33.00 – 33.00
Output Beam Dim.
1.36 – 1.36 – 1.36
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 1.39 – 1.39 – 1.39
fawf (MHz) 6.36 6.36 6.36 5.06 5.06

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 7.16 7.16 11.93 9.16 13.93
Iob (mW/cm2) 11.36 11.36 18.93 14.53 22.10
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 197. L764 (LH) IEC Acoustic Output Information
t
Bioeffects A–79
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
L764 (LH) Probe (cont’d)

P_ (MPa) 4.44 4.44 3.02 3.02
Ispta (mW/cm2) 185.91 481.21 1502.80 1502.80
Ip (mm) 25.00 25.00 25.00 25.00
wpb6
0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 1.44 1.44 1.44 1.44
prr (kHz) 10.40 10.40 10.40 10.40

srr (Hz) 35.00 35.00 – –
Output Beam Dim.
0.94 0.94 – –
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 1.44 1.44 – –
fawf (MHz) 5.16 5.16 5.16 5.16

APF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
AIF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 18.40 16.16 13.63 13.63
Iob (mW/cm2) 29.21 25.66 21.64 21.64
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 197. L764 (LH) IEC Acoustic Output Information (cont’d)
Bioeffects A–80 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
739L Probe

P_ (MPa) 2.30 2.30 2.30 2.12 2.30
Ispta (mW/cm2) 49.8 91.6 124.8 1219.5 1252.7
Ip (mm) 27.6 27.6 27.6 19.0 19.0
wpb6
0.8 0.8 0.8 1.2 1.2
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.9 1.9
prr (kHz) – 0.92 0.92 1.71 1.71

srr (Hz) 57 – 57 – 57
Output Beam Dim.
6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 10.6 10.6 10.6 3.7 3.7
fawf (MHz) 7.12 7.09 7.12 6.63 6.63

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 5.87 0.81 4.73 14.92 18.84
Iob (mW/cm2) 9.26 1.28 7.46 67.99 74.17
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 198. 739L IEC Acoustic Output Information
t
Bioeffects A–81
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
739L Probe (cont’d)

P_ (MPa 2.30 2.30 2.34 2.34
Ispta (mW/cm2) 291.6 772.1 465.5 465.5
Ip (mm) 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.4
wpb6
1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
prr (kHz) 0.66 0.66 1.48 1.48

srr (Hz) 10 10 – –
Output Beam Dim.
6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7
fawf (MHz) 6.62 6.62 6.62 6.62

APF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
AIF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 29.59 24.21 27.22 27.22
Iob (mW/cm2) 123.16 98.66 121.61 121.61
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 199. 739L IEC Acoustic Output Information (cont’d)
Bioeffects A–82 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
LA39 Probe

P_ (MPa) 4.08 4.08 4.08 1.98 4.08
Ispta (mW/cm2) 21.2 39.8 276.1 689.8 926.1
Ip (mm) 13.7 13.7 13.7 8.2 8.2
wpb6
0.6 0.6 0.6 1.4 1.4
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.2 1.2
prr (kHz) – 0.86 0.86 18.12 18.12

srr (Hz) 57 – 57 – 57
Output Beam Dim.
3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 6.5 6.5 6.5 1.6 1.6
fawf (MHz) 8.18 8.18 8.18 5.32 5.32

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 1.79 0.18 1.37 8.10 9.30
Iob (mW/cm2)33 8.48 0.84 6.50 153.41 159.06
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 199. LA39 IEC Acoustic Output Information
t
Bioeffects A–83
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
LA39 Probe (cont’d)

P_ (MPa 4.08 4.08 4.08 4.08
Ispta (mW/cm2) 1065.5 995.8 252.7 252.7
Ip (mm) 13.1 13.1 7.9 7.9
wpb6
8.8 83.8 1.3 1.3
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.3
prr (kHz) 1.14 1.14 1.70 1.70

srr (Hz) 11 11 – –
Output Beam Dim.
3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 10.2 10.2 1.6 1.6
fawf (MHz) 5.31 5.31 5.31 5.31

APF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
AIF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 26.31 17.81 25.12 25.12
Iob (mW/cm2) 81.72 120.39 76.91 76.91
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 199. LA39 IEC Acoustic Output Information (cont’d)
Bioeffects A–84 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
I739 Probe

P_ (MPa) 3.02 3.02 3.02 2.64 3.02
Ispta (mW/cm2) 58.28 83.35 122.21 831.40 870.26
Ip (mm) 20.90 20.90 20.90 16.60 16.60
wpb6
1.11 1.11 1.11 1.35 1.35
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 0.84 0.84 0.84 1.50 1.50
prr (kHz) – 0.87 0.87 18.12 18.12

srr (Hz) 57.00 – 57.00 – 57.00
Output Beam Dim.
7.30 7.30 7.30 3.70 7.30
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
fawf (MHz) 6.99 6.99 6.99 5.07 5.07

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 4.87 0.46 3.71 9.61 12.86
Iob (mW/cm2) 11.09 1.05 8.44 43.80 51.19
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 200. I739 IEC Acoustic Output Information
t
Bioeffects A–85
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
I739 Probe (cont’d)

P_ (MPa) 3.02 3.02 2.16 2.16
Ispta (mW/cm2) 474.36 672.31 601.95 601.95
Ip (mm) 17.60 17.60 17.60 17.60
wpb6
1.35 1.35 1.35 1.35
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
prr (kHz) 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84

srr (Hz) 10.00 10.00 – –
Output Beam Dim.
7.30 7.30 3.70 3.70
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
fawf (MHz) 5.11 5.11 5.11 5.11

APF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
AIF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 24.62 18.74 21.37 21.37
Iob (mW/cm2) 104.78 77.98 98.43 98.43
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 200. I739 IEC Acoustic Output Information (cont’d)
Bioeffects A–86 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
T739 Probe
Parameter B M B+M D B+D B+rD

P_ (MPa) 3.45 3.45 3.45 2.82 3.45 3.45
Ispta (mW/cm2) 54.48 65.96 102.28 784.40 820.72 527.22
Ip (mm) 21.40 21.40 21.40 17.30 17.30 18.40
wpb6
1.29 1.29 1.29 1.57 1.57 1.57
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 0.85 0.85 0.85 1.55 1.55 1.55
prr (kHz) – 0.87 0.87 18.10 18.10 6.84

srr (Hz) 57.00 – 57.00 – 57.00 10.00
Output Beam Dim.
7.30 7.30 7.30 3.70 7.30 7.30
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
fawf (MHz) 6.96 6.96 6.96 5.07 5.07 5.08

APF (%) na na na na na na
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
AIF (%) na na na na na na
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 3.91 0.54 3.15 11.78 14.39 18.30
Iob (mW/cm2) 8.92 1.22 7.16 53.68 59.62 77.44
Power-up Mode na na na na na na
Initialization Mode na na na na na na
Acoustic Output yes yes yes yes yes yes
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Its (mm) contact contact contact contact contact contact
Table 201. T739 IEC Acoustic Output Information
t
Bioeffects A–87
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
T739 Probe (cont’d)

P_ (MPa) 3.45 3.45 2.65 2.65
Ispta (mW/cm2) 527.22 673.97 767.06 767.06
Ip (mm) 18.40 18.40 18.40 18.40
wpb6
1.57 1.57 1.57 1.57
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 1.55 1.55 1.55 1.55
prr (kHz) 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84

srr (Hz) 10.00 10.00 – –
Output Beam Dim.
7.30 7.30 3.70 3.70
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
fawf (MHz) 5.08 5.08 5.08 5.08

APF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
AIF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 18.30 16.34 15.69 15.69
Iob (mW/cm2) 77.44 68.53 72.72 72.72
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 201. T739 IEC Acoustic Output Information (cont’d)
Bioeffects A–88 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
S316 Probe

P_ (MPa) 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.05 2.15
Ispta (mW/cm2) 92.8 148.7 210.6 851.8 913.7
Ip (mm) 58.9 55.7 58.9 62.3 62.3
wpb6
2.0 1.7 2.0 2.3 2.3
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 3.7 4.5 3.7 3.1 3.1
prr (kHz) – 0.89 0.89 4.53 4.53

srr (Hz) 112 – 112 – 112
Output Beam Dim.
13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 16.0 16.0 16.0 14.5 14.5
fawf (MHz) 3.42 3.36 3.42 3.00 3.00

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 16.83 5.00 16.22 27.98 39.20
Iob (mW/cm2) 8.09 2.40 7.80 14.84 20.24
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 202. S316 IEC Acoustic Output Information
t
Bioeffects A–89
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
S316 Probe (cont’d)

P_ (MPa) 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15
Ispta (mW/cm2) 257.2 585.5 436.3 436.3
Ip (mm) 57.5 57.5 57.5 57.5
wpb6
1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6
prr (kHz) 5.20 5.20 5.20 5.20

srr (Hz) 39 39 – –
Output Beam Dim.
13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5
fawf (MHz) 2.98 2.98 2.98 2.98

APF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
AIF (%) na na na na
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 91.88 65.54 36.42 36.42
Iob (mW/cm2) 48.18 34.21 19.07 19.07
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 203. S316 IEC Acoustic Output Information (cont’d)
Bioeffects A–90 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
S317 Probe

P_ (MPa) 1.86 1.86 1.86 2.37 2.37
Ispta (mW/cm2) 73.45 68.56 117.53 1878.40 1927.37
Ip (mm) 58.70 58.50 58.70 62.00 62.00
wpb6
0.25 0.25 0.25 0.26 0.26
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.16 0.16
prr (kHz) – 0.80 0.80 6.83 6.83

srr (Hz) 106.00 – 106.00 – 106.00
Output Beam Dim.
17.90 17.90 17.90 17.90 17.90
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00
fawf (MHz) 3.53 3.53 3.53 3.04 3.04

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 11.29 1.44 8.97 40.87 48.40
Iob (mW/cm2) 5.25 0.67 4.17 19.01 22.51
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
t
Bioeffects A–91
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
Parameter B+rD B+rD+D M+cM cM+D cwD

P_ (MPa) 2.80 2.80 2.78 2.78 0.28
Ispta (mW/cm2) 421.47 1174.42 2512.96 2512.96 2274.65
Ip (mm) 61.90 61.90 62.20 62.20 6.10
wpb6
0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.50
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.40
prr (kHz) 6.84 6.84 6.84 6.84 –

srr (Hz) 48.00 48.00 – – –
Output Beam Dim.
17.90 17.90 17.90 17.90 7.84
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00
fawf (MHz) 2.94 2.94 2.94 2.94 2.90

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 62.44 55.42 54.91 54.91 96.57
Iob (mW/cm2) 29.04 25.77 26.21 26.21 102.74
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Bioeffects A–92 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
S220 (W) Probe

P_ (MPa) 2.74 2.74 2.74 2.54 2.74
Ispta (mW/cm2) 682.46 182.47 637.44 1518.40 1973.38
Ip (mm) 73.00 73.00 73.00 63.00 63.00
wpb6
3.01 3.01 3.01 2.70 2.70
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 4.42 4.42 4.42 6.25 6.25
prr (kHz) – 0.87 0.87 3.40 3.40

srr (Hz) 85.00 – 85.00 – 85.00
Output Beam Dim.
3.01 – 3.01 – 3.01
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 4.42 – 4.42 – 4.42
fawf (MHz) 2.44 2.44 2.44 2.49 2.49

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 52.37 7.81 42.72 85.73 120.64
Iob (mW/cm2) 15.98 2.38 13.04 2.90 13.56
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 204. S220 (W) IEC Acoustic Output Information
t
Bioeffects A–93
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
S220 (W) Probe (cont’d)

P_ (MPa) 3.56 3.56 3.56 3.56 0.21
Ispta (mW/cm2) 1410.08 1691.73 2157.20 2157.20 1340.20
Ip (mm) 67.70 67.70 67.75 67.75 68.50
wpb6
3.12 3.12 3.12 3.12 0.06
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 4.15 4.15 4.15 4.15 0.06
prr (kHz) 6.80 6.80 6.80 6.80 –

srr (Hz) 45.00 45.00 – – –
Output Beam Dim.
3.12 3.12 – – –
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 4.15 4.15 – – –
fawf (MHz) 2.27 2.27 2.27 2.27 2.48

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 110.67 115.66 75.76 75.76 103.44
Iob (mW/cm2) 33.77 23.66 23.12 23.12 84.18
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 204. S220 (W) IEC Acoustic Output Information (cont’d)
Bioeffects A–94 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
S222 Probe

P_ (MPa) 1.81 1.81 1.81 2.24 2.24
Ispta (mW/cm2) 144.3 123.2 445.1 1818.9 2140.8
Ip (mm) 58.9 58.5 58.9 71.6 71.6
wpb6
1.9 2.0 1.9 2.2 2.2
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 2.6 2.7 2.6 3.4 3.4
prr (kHz) – 0.89 0.89 1.71 1.71

srr (Hz) 85 – 85 – 85
Output Beam Dim.
13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 17.9 17.9 17.9 20.5 20.5
fawf (MHz) 30.7 2.90 30.7 2.49 2.49

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 24.19 8.66 24.79 61.79 77.91
Iob (mW/cm2) 10.38 3.72 10.64 23.21 30.13
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
t
Bioeffects A–95
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects

P_ (MPa) 2.24 2.24 1.81 2.24 0.17
Ispta (mW/cm2) 1414.3 1777.5 2144.4 2144.4 990.8
Ip (mm) 73.2 73.2 73.2 73.2 76.1
wpb6
2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 0.0
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 0.0
prr (kHz) 5.96 5.96 5.96 5.96 –

srr (Hz) 22 22 – – –
Output Beam Dim.
13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 20.5 20.5 20.5 20.5 7.7
fawf (MHz) 2.49 2.49 2.49 2.49 2.51

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 189.15 133.53 61.77 61.77 194.47
Iob (mW/cm2) 71.91 51.02 26.92 26.92 194.79
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Bioeffects A–96 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
S611 Probe

P_ (MPa) 2.59 2.59 2.59 2.96 2.96
Ispta (mW/cm2) 295.29 199.40 396.26 2358.70 2555.56
Ip (mm) 37.10 37.10 37.10 45.00 45.00
wpb6
1.14 1.14 1.14 1.33 1.33
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 2.22 2.22 2.22 1.94 1.94
prr (kHz) – 0.85 0.85 1.49 1.49

srr (Hz) 142.00 – 142.00 – 142.00
Output Beam Dim.
11.50 11.50 11.50 11.20 11.50
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 8.00 8.00 8.00 8.00 8.00
fawf (MHz) 4.43 4.43 4.43 4.98 4.98

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 20.88 2.25 16.17 40.55 54.47
Iob (mW/cm2) 22.69 2.50 17.63 44.56 59.68
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
t
Bioeffects A–97
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects

P_ (MPa) 2.59 2.96 2.10 2.10 0.17
Ispta (mW/cm2) 1092.16 1823.86 2994.90 2994.90 956.60
Ip (mm) 51.40 51.40 51.40 51.40 19.80
wpb6
3.05 3.05 3.05 3.05 5.00
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 2.47 2.47 2.47 2.47 2.00
prr (kHz) 5.96 5.96 5.96 5.96 –

srr (Hz) 66.00 66.00 – – –
Output Beam Dim.
11.50 11.50 11.20 11.20 5.04
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 8.00 8.00 8.00 8.00 8.00
fawf (MHz) 4.02 4.02 4.02 4.02 4.00

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 86.18 70.32 72.26 72.26 63.31
Iob (mW/cm2) 93.67 76.68 81.04 81.04 186.21
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Bioeffects A–98 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
B510 Probe

P_ (MPa) 3.22 3.22 3.22 2.57 3.22
Ispta (mW/cm2) 32.22 23.90 45.38 258.70 280.18
Ip (mm) 40.30 4.03 40.30 3.36 3.36
wpb6
2.54 1.61 2.54 1.73 1.73
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 1.99 3.93 1.99 2.73 2.73
prr (kHz) – 869.00 869.00 0.66 0.66

srr (Hz) 26.00 – 26.00 – 26.00
Output Beam Dim.
2.54 – 2.54 – 2.54
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 1.99 – 1.99 – 1.99
fawf (MHz) 4.38 4.38 4.38 4.02 4.02

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 12.49 0.99 9.31 11.04 19.37
Iob (mW/cm2) 12.49 0.99 9.31 11.04 19.37
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 207. B510 IEC Acoustic Output Information
t
Bioeffects A–99
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
B510 Probe (cont’d)

P_ (MPa) 3.22 3.22 1.77 1.77 0.11
Ispta (mW/cm2) 117.08 198.63 57.30 57.30 358.80
Ip (mm) 3.07 3.07 3.30 3.30 3.23
wpb6
1.69 1.69 1.51 1.51 4.17
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 3.54 3.54 3.19 3.19 2.37
prr (kHz) 0.28 0.28 2.60 2.60 –

srr (Hz) 20.00 20.00 – – –
Output Beam Dim.
1.69 1.69 – – –
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) 3.54 3.54 – – –
fawf (MHz) 4.05 4.05 4.86 4.86 4.01

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) 14.18 16.78 5.86 5.86 18.76
Iob (mW/cm2) 14.18 16.78 5.86 5.86 18.76
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 207. B510 IEC Acoustic Output Information (cont’d)
Bioeffects A–100 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
P509 Probe

P_ (MPa) 2.55 2.55 2.55 2.15 2.55
Ispta (mW/cm2) 544.9 90.9 454.1 624.9 988.2
Ip (mm) 20.6 20.6 20.6 22.0 22.0
wpb6
ă
(||) (mm) 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4 5.4
( )(mm) 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0
prr (kHz) – 0.90 0.90 5.95 5.95
srr (Hz) 43 – 43 – 43
Output Beam Dim.
ă
(||) (mm) 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
( )(mm) 8.6 8.6 8.6 9.9 9.9
fawf (MHz) 4.93 4.93 4.93 4.02 40.2
APF (%) n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
AIF (%) n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power 11.03 3.72 11.08 29.55 36.9
(mW)
Iob (mW/cm2) 12.85 4.34 12.90 29.97 38.54
Power-up Mode n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Initialization Mode n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Table 208. P509 IEC Acoustic Output Information
t
Bioeffects A–101
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
P509 Probe (cont’d)

P_ (MPa) 2.55 2.55 2.55 2.55 0.11
Ispta (mW/cm2) 963.5 975.8 819.8 819.8 401.9
Ip (mm) 21.3 21.3 21.3 21.3 24.2
wpb6
ă
(||) (mm) 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.6
( )(mm) 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.7
prr (kHz) 5.96 5.96 5.96 5.96 –
srr (Hz) 33 33 – – –
Output Beam Dim.
ă
(||) (mm) 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
( )(mm) 9.9 9.9 9.9 9.9 3.8
fawf (MHz) 4.05 4.05 4.05 4.05 4.00
APF (%) n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
AIF (%) n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power 31.52 34.21 24.14 24.14 69.43
(mW)
Iob (mW/cm2) 33.08 35.81 25.05 25.05 181.93
Power-up Mode n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Initialization Mode n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Table 208. P509 IEC Acoustic Output Information (cont’d)
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
CWD2 Probe

P_ (MPa) na na na na na
Ispta (mW/cm2) na na na na na
Ip (mm) na na na na na
wpb6
na na na na na
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) na na na na na
prr (kHz) na na na na na
srr (Hz) na – na – na
Output Beam Dim.
na – na – na
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) na – na – na
fawf (MHz) na na na na na
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) na na na na na
Iob (mW/cm2) na na na na na
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 209. CWD2 IEC Acoustic Output Information
t
Bioeffects A–103
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
CWD2 Probe (cont’d)

P_ (MPa) na na na na 0.16
Ispta (mW/cm2) na na na na 322.58
Ip (mm) na na na na 10.00
wpb6
na na na na 8.00
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) na na na na 5.00
prr (kHz) na na na na –
srr (Hz) na na na na –
Output Beam Dim.
na na – – –
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) na na – – –
fawf (MHz) na na 2.01

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) na na na na 51.19
Iob (mW/cm2) na na na na 57.97
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 209. CWD2 IEC Acoustic Output Information (cont’d)
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
CWD5 Probe

P_ (MPa) na na na na na
Ispta (mW/cm2) na na na na na
Ip (mm) na na na na na
wpb6
na na na na na
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) na na na na na
prr (kHz) na na na na na
srr (Hz) na – na – na
Output Beam Dim.
na – na – na
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) na – na – na
fawf (MHz) na na na na na
(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) na na na na na
Iob (mW/cm2) na na na na na
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 210. CWD5 IEC Acoustic Output Information
t
Bioeffects A–105
2177611–100 Rev 0
Bioeffects
CWD5 Probe (cont’d)

P_ (MPa) na na na na 0.19
Ispta (mW/cm2) na na na na 686.50
Ip (mm) na na na na 10.00
wpb6
na na na na 3.00
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) na na na na 3.00
prr (kHz) na na na na –
srr (Hz) na na na na –
Output Beam Dim.
na na – – –
ă
(||) (mm)
( )(mm) na na – – –
fawf (MHz) na na 5.02

(Acoustic Power
up Fraction)
(Acoustic
Initialization
Fraction)
Maximum Power
(mW) na na na na 80.41
Iob (mW/cm2) na na na na 320.09
Freeze
Itt (mm) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 210. CWD5 IEC Acoustic Output Information (cont’d)
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Data
Specifications
System Dimensions Measurements
S 51 inches High S Distance
S 21 inches Wide S Circumference (Ellipse/Trace)
S 37 inches Deep S Area (Ellipse/Trace)
Display Monitor S Volume (Ellipsoid)

S Angle Between Two Lines (B-Mode)
S Single 12” Color Display
S Time & Slope (M-Mode)
S 512 Lines
S Single Velocity (Doppler)
S NTSC & PAL Color Formats
S Time Average Maximum Velocity
S Interlace
Weight
Operating/Display
Approximately 397 lbs. (180 kg) for fully
S B-Mode
configured console.
S M-Mode
Image Processing
S PW Doppler
S Color Flow S 64 Displayed Gray Levels
S Simultaneous B/D & B/CF S Dynamic Range
S Colorized B & M Display S Acoustic Zoom
S Steerable CW (Sector only) S Image Invert & Rotate
S Non-Imaging Single CW S Independent Dual Image Displays
Doppler Linear Imaging
S Steerable Sample Volume (SV) S Steerable B, Doppler, CF: "30_

S Variable SV Sizing S Slant Scan Imaging
S Variable Spectral Scaling S Independent B/CF Steering
S Selectable Spectral Smoothing S 3.5 –6.7 MHz
S Doppler Angle Correction with Calibrated

Velocity Scaling
S Variable Sample Size
S Variable Wall Filter
S Scrolling Memory
t
System Data B–1
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Data
Convex Imaging Sector Imaging
S Variable Angle: 20_ – 80_ S Variable Angle: 20_–90_
S Steerable Scan Angle S Steerable Scan Angle
S 3.5 – 5.0 MHz S Trapezoidal and Slant Scan Imaging
Color Flow Doppler S 3.3 – 7.5 MHz
S Selectable Wall Rejection Micro-Convex Imaging

S Variable FOV Size & Position S Variable Angle: 20_ – 120_
S Selectable Color Maps S Steerable Scan Angle
S Color Baseline Shift S 3.5 – 6.7 MHz
S Color Velocity Tag CINE Memory
S CINE Memory
S 8 Megabyte Frame Memory (std.)
Calculations S Optional 40 megabyte Frame Memory
S Heart Rate (BPM, M-Mode) S 8 megabyte Frame B + CF Memory
S Fetal Age (GS, CRL, FL, BPD) S Dual Image CINE Display
S Estimated Fetal Weight S Measurement/Calculation & Annotations
S PI (Vascular) on CINE
S RI (Vascular) S Loop Editing
S FVI (Vascular) S Variable Speed Display
S Percent Stenosis (Vascular) Data Display

S Two-Velocity Ratio S Biopsy Guidelines with integrated
distance measure
Electrical Power
S New Patient Data Entry
S 120/220-240 Vac
S OB Summary Report
S 50/60 Hz
S GYN Summary Report
S 1350 VA Max Power Draw
S LV Cardiac Summary Report
Transducer Types S Vascular Summary Report
S Phased Array Sector S User Programmable Annotation Libraries
S Convex Array for each application
S Linear Array
S Micro-Convex Endocavity (TV/TR) Array
S Pencil CWD
System Data B–2 t

2177611–100 Rev 0
System Data
LOGIQ t 500 Clinical Measurement Accuracy

Basic Measurements
The following information is intended to provide guidance to
the user in determining the amount of variation or
measurement error that should be considered when
performing clinical measurements with this equipment. Error
can be contributed by equipment limitations and improper
user technique. Be sure to follow all measurement
instructions and develop uniform measurement techniques
among all users to minimize the potential operator error.
Also, in order to detect possible equipment malfunctions that
could affect measurement accuracy, a quality assurance (QA)
plan should be established for the equipment that includes
routine accuracy checks with tissue mimicking phantoms.
Please be advised that all distance and Doppler related

measurements through tissue are dependent upon the
propagation velocity of sound within the tissue. The
propagation velocity usually varies with the type of tissue, but
an average velocity for soft tissue is assumed. This
equipment is designed for, and the accuracy statements
listed below are based on, an assumed average velocity of
1540 m/s. The percent accuracy when stated applies to the
measurement obtained (not the full scale range). Where the
accuracy is stated as a percent with a fixed value, the
expected inaccuracy is the greater of the two.
t
System Data B–3
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Data
Basic Measurements (cont’d)
Limitations
Useful or
Measurement Units Range Accuracy Conditions
Depth mm Full Screen " 5 % or 1 mm
" 5 % or 1 mm
Distance:
" 5 % or 1 mm
Axial mm Full Screen
" 5 % or 1 mm
Lateral mm Full Screen Linear Probes
" 5 % or 1 mm
Lateral mm Full Screen Convex Probes
Lateral mm Full Screen Sector Probes
Circumference:
" 5 % or 1 mm
Trace
" 5 % or 1 mm
Ellipse mm Full Screen
mm Full Screen
" 5 % or 1 mm
Area:
mm2 2
" 5 % or 1 mm
Trace Full Screen
Ellipse mm2 Full Screen 2
Time s Timeline Display " 5% M or Doppler
Slope s Timeline Display " 5% M-Mode Only
Doppler SV mm Full Screen " 1 mm Any Direction

Position
Velocity cm/s From 0 to 100 "3% PW Doppler
"5%
cm/s Color Flow
From 100 to 130
cm/s
Doppler Angle cm/s From 0 to 80 "5%

Correction degrees
Table 211. System Measurements and Accuracies
System Data B–4 t

2177611–100 Rev 0
System Data
LOGIQ t 500 Clinical Calculation Accuracy

The following information describes the method used to
implement the stated clinical calculation and provides the
user with an indication of error likely to be contributed by the
equipment due to the system (computer) implementation of
the stated formula or method. These accuracy statements
assume that input values are correct. Estimate the overall
inaccuracy of a combined measurement and calculation by
including the stated inaccuracy from the basic measurement
accuracy statements.
CAUTION Diagnostic errors may result from the inappropriate use of
.
clinical calculations. Review the referenced source of the
stated formula or method to become familiar with the
intended uses and possible limitations of the calculation.
Calculation formulas and databases are provided as a tool to

assist the user, but should not be considered an undisputed
database, in making a clinical diagnosis. The user is
encouraged to research the literature and judge the
equipment capabilities on an ongoing basis in order to
assess its utility as a clinical tool.
t
System Data B–5
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Data
Fetal age measurements
Measure- User Range Accuracy Formula Source

ment Input or Method
Gestational Mean of 3 10-60 mm " 1 Wk GS=(d1+d2+d3)/ Hellman,
Sac Distances 3+3.6225 AJOG,
(GS) 103:789,
1969
Crown Rump 1 Distance 0.2-10.1 cm " 1 Wk CRL=1.684969 + Hadlock,
Length 0.315646 x d1 + Radiology,
(CRL) 0.049306 x d12 + 182:501,
0.004057 x d13 + 1992
0.000120456 x d14
" 0.3 Wk
"0.8@12-1
Biparietal 1 Distance SD= BPD=6.8954 + Hadlock,
Diameter 2.6345 x d1 + JUM,
0.008771 x d13
"1,39@18-
(BPD) 8wk 1:97,
1982
"1.34@24-
24wk
"2.0@30-3
30wk
"3.6@36-4
6wk
2wk
Head Circumfer- SD=1.18 " 0.01 Wk HC=8.8 + 0.55 x Hadlock,
Circumfer- ence by 2 c AJR,
ence Distances, + 2.8 x 10-4x c3 138:649,
(HC) Trace, or 1982
Ellipse
Abdominal Circumfer- SD=1.2 " 0.1 Wk AC=7.607 + Hadlock,
Circumfer- ence by 2 0.7645 AJR,
ence Distances, x c + 0.00393 x 139:367,
(AC) Trace, or c2 1982
Ellipse
" 0.02 Wk
"9.5d@12-
Femur 1 Distance SD= FL=10.38 + Hadlock,
Length 0.2256 AJR,
"22d@23-
(FL) 23wk x d + 0.001948 x 138:875,
d2 1982
40wk
Table 212. Fetal Age Measurements
An AC of 9.9 cm calculates an age of 15.6 weeks; this should

be out of range.
System Data B–6 t

2177611–100 Rev 0
System Data
OB Calculations
Calculation Formula Accuracy Source

Heart Rate (HR) HR[BPM]=2beat " 0.2 BPM n/a
time[sec]/ 120[sec]
Biparietal BPD=6.8954 + " 0.3 Wk Hadlock,
Diameter 2.6345 x d + JUM,
(BPD) 0.008771 x d3 1:97,1982
v "
"
Uterine Systolic/ UT-S/D=Vsystolic/ For v 100 cm/s, 4% n/a
u
Diastolic Ratio Vdiastolic (vacc= 2%)
) *
(UT-S/D) For v 100 cm/s,
"
15% 13%
(vacc= 7%)
For vv100 cm/s, " 4%
(v ="2%)
Umbilical Cord UT-S/D=Vsystolic/ n/a
For vu100 cm/s,

Systolic/ Vdiastolic acc
)15% *13%
Diastolic Ratio
(v ="7%)
(CRD-S/D)
acc
For vv100 cm/s, "2%
For vu100 cm/s, "7%
Time Averaged TA MAX=sum{Vt} from t1 n/a
Maximum to t2/
Velocity (t2 – t1)
(TAMAX)
v " 4%
u " 15%
Pulsatility Index PI=(Vmax – Vmin)/ For v 100 cm/s, n/a
(PI) TA MAX For v 100 cm/s,
For vv100 cm/s, " 4%
(v ="2%)
Resistivity Index RI=(Vmax – Vmin)/ n/a
For vu100 cm/s,

(RI) Vmax acc
)15% *13%
(v ="7%)
acc
Table 213. Obstetric Formulas and Calculations
Timeline scale markers are accurate to " 6.25%.
t
System Data B–7
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Data
PV and Cardiac Calculations
Calculation Formula Range Accuracy

v " 2%
u " 7%
Right Exterior RT ECA=Input For v 100 cm/s . . . . . .
Carotid Artery For v 100 cm/s . . . . . .
Velocity
(RT ECA)
v " 2%
u " 7%
Right Common RT CCA=Input For v 100 cm/s . . . . . .
Velocity
(RT CCA)
v " 2%
u " 7%
Right Carotid RT BIFURC=Input For v 100 cm/s . . . . . .
Artery Bifurca– For v 100 cm/s . . . . . .
tion Velocity
(RT BIFURC)
v " 2%
u " 7%
Right Interior RT ICA=Input For v 100 cm/s . . . . . .
Velocity
(RT ICA)
v " 2%
u " 7%
Time Averaged TA MAX=sum{Vt} from t1 For v 100 cm/s . . . . . .
Maximum to t2/ For v 100 cm/s . . . . . .
Velocity (t2 – t1)
(TAMAX)
v " 4% (v ="2%)
u )15%*13%(v =
Right Interior RT ICA/CCA=VICA/ For v 100 cm/s . . . . . . acc
"7%)
Carotid Artery VCCA For v 100 cm/s . . . . . . acc
Velocity/
Common
Carotid Artery
Velocity Ratio
(RT ICA/CCA)
v " 2%
u " 7%
LT ECA, LT CCA, Same as above, for For v 100 cm/s . . . . . .
LT BIFURC, Left Carotid Artery For v 100 cm/s . . . . . .
LT ICA,
LT ICA/CCA
v " 4% (v ="2%)
u )15%*13%(v =
Velocities Ratios A/B=V1/V2 For v 100 cm/s . . . . . . acc
"7%)
(A/B RATIOS) For v 100 cm/s . . . . . . acc
Table 214. Peripheral Vascular Formulas and Calculations
System Data B–8 t

2177611–100 Rev 0
System Data
PV and Cardiac Calculations (cont’d)

Stenosis Ratio % STENO=[1 – (Aresidual/ "0.1%
(% STENO) Alumen)] x 100
v " 4% (v ="2%)
u )15%*13%(v =
Systolic Velocity/ S/D RATIOS=Vsystolic/ For v 100 cm/s . . . . . . acc
"7%)
Diastolic Velocity Vdiastolic For v 100 cm/s . . . . . . acc
Ratio
(S/D RATIOS)
v " 4%
u " 15%
Pulsatility PULSE INDEX=(Vmax – For v 100 cm/s . . . . . .
Index Vmin)/ For v 100 cm/s . . . . . .
(PULSE INDEX) TA MAX
For vv100 cm/s . . . . . . " 4% (v ="2%)
For vu100 cm/s . . . . . . )15%*13%(v =
Resistivity Index RESIS INDEX=(Vmax – acc
"7%)
(RESIS INDEX) Vmin)/ acc
Vmax
Heart Rate (HR) HR[BPM]=2beat " 0.2 BPM
time[sec]/ 120[sec]
Table 214. Peripheral Vascular Formulas and Calculations (cont’d)
Timeline scale markers are accurate to " 6.25%.
t
System Data B–9
2177611–100 Rev 0
System Data
Gynecological

Uterine Length UT-L=Input Full Screen "1 mm
(UT-L)
Uterine Height UT-H=Input Full Screen "1 mm
(UT-H)
Uterine Width UT-W=d1 Full Screen "1 mm
(UT-W)
Endometrial ENDO=d1 Full Screen "1 mm
Thickness
(ENDO)
Left Ovarian LT OV-L=d1 Full Screen "1 mm
Length (LT OV-L)
Left Ovarian LT OV-H=d1 Full Screen "1 mm
Height (LT OV-H)
Left Ovarian LT OV-W=d1 Full Screen "1 mm
Width (LT OV-W)
Right Ovarian RT OV-L=d1 Full Screen "1 mm
Length (RT OV-L)
Right Ovarian RT OV-H=d1 Full Screen "1 mm
Height (RT OV-H)
Right Ovarian RT OV-W=d1 Full Screen "1 mm
Width (RT OV-W)
v " 4% (v ="2%)
u )15%*13%(v =
Left Ovarian LT OV-RI=(Vmax – Vmin)/ For v 100 cm/s . . . . . . acc
"7%)
Vessel Resistive Vmax For v 100 cm/s . . . . . . acc
Index (LT OV-RI)
For vv100 cm/s . . . . . . " 4% (v ="2%)
For vu100 cm/s . . . . . . )15%*13%(v =
Uterine Vessel UT-RI=(Vmax – Vmin)/ acc
"7%)
Resistive Index Vmax acc
(UT-RI)
For vv100 cm/s . . . . . . " 4% (v ="2%)
For vu100 cm/s . . . . . . )15%*13%(v =
Right Ovarian RT OV-RI=(Vmax – Vmin)/ acc
"7%)
Vessel Resistive Vmax acc
Index (RT OV-RI)
Table 215. Gynecologic Formulas and Calculations
System Data B–10 t

2177611–100 Rev 0
Peripherals
Peripheral Listing
CAUTION DO NOT connect any probes or accessories without approval
by GE.
All peripherals are considered options to the console. Those

listed in this section have been tested and verified to be
t
compatible with the LOGIQ 500 system. Please refer to
the local Sales or Field Service representative for the latest
list of approved peripherals.
Type Manufacturer Model

VCR Sony SVO-9500MD
B&W Printer Sony UP-890
Color Printer Sony UP-1800
Multi-image International IIE 460
Camera Imaging
Table 216. Approved Peripherals
Safety Precautions
WARNING When using any peripheral device or accessory, observe all
.
danger messages, warnings, and cautions given in peripheral
operator manuals.
Refer to the Service Manual (P9030TA) for more information.
t
Peripherals C–1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Peripherals
Peripheral Configurations
Black/White Video Printer

The Sony UP-890 Black and White Video Page Printer is
t
mounted on the left side of the LOGIQ 500 under the
keyboard. The Sony connections are Video, AC power, and
Remote Shutter (Expose).
LOGIQ 500
LOGIQ
B/W Page
Printer
Illustration 507. B/W Page Printer Location
Peripherals C–2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Peripherals
Black/White Video Printer (cont’d)
Sony UP–890
Illustration 508. B/W Printer Connections
t
Peripherals C–3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Peripherals
Color Video Printer

The Sony UP-1800 Color Video Page Printer is mounted
behind the keyboard under the monitor. It is mounted facing
the front of the system. The Sony UP-1800 connections are
Red, Green, Blue, Sync, and RS-232 Remote Control.
LOGIQ 500
LOGIQ
Illustration 509. Color Page Printer Location, Front Mount
Peripherals C–4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Peripherals
Color Video Printer (cont’d)
Illustration 510. Connections to LOGIQ t 500
Illustration 511. Connections to Color Page Printer
t
Peripherals C–5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Peripherals
S-VHS Video Cassette Recorder

The Sony SVO-9500MD is mounted behind the keyboard and
under the monitor This recorder takes advantage of all the
t
advanced tracking features of the LOGIQ 500. The Sony
SVO-9500MD connections are S-VHS Video In/Out, Audio
In/Out, and RS-232 Remote Control.
LOGIQ 500
LOGIQ
Illustration 512. VCR Location
Peripherals C–6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Peripherals
S-VHS Video Cassette Recorder (cont’d)
Illustration 513. VCR Wiring Diagram
t
Peripherals C–7
2177611–100 Rev 0
Peripherals
S-VHS Video Cassette Recorder (cont’d)
Illustration 514. LOGIQ t 500 VCR Connections
Illustration 515. VCR Connections
Peripherals C–8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Peripherals
Multi-Image Camera
An International Imaging Electronics Multi-Image Camera can
t
be attached to the LOGIQ 500. Contact a Sales or Service
representative for details.
The Multi-Image Camera Connections are Composite Video

and RS-232 Remote Control.
LOGIQ 500
LOGIQ
Illustration 516. Multi-Image Camera Location
t
Peripherals C–9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Peripherals
Multi-Image Camera (cont’d)
Illustration 517. Multi-Image Camera Wiring Diagram
Peripherals C–10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Peripherals
Illustration 518. LOGIQ t 500 Connections for Multi-Image Camera
t
Peripherals C–11
2177611–100 Rev 0
Peripherals
Illustration 519. Multi-Image Camera Connections
2177611–100 Rev 0
Peripherals
VCR and Color Page Printer
.
Both the Sony UP-1800 Color video Page Printer and Sony
SVO-9500MD can be mounted behind the keyboard, under
the monitor.
NOTE: Wiring for the combination of peripherals is the same

as for individual peripherals shown in previous sections.
LOGIQ 500
LOGIQ
Illustration 520. VCR and Color Page Printer Locations
t
Peripherals C–13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Peripherals
Video Signal Specifications

Table 217 gives the video specifications of the Ultrasound
system. This data may be needed when interfacing the
system with OEM cameras or recording devices.
NTSC PAL
Total Lines per Frame [line] 525 625
Vertical Field Frequency [Hz] 60 50
Horizontal Scanning Frequency [Hz] 15.733 15.625
Displayed Image Pixels [mm] 207.0 by 157.3 207.0 by 157.3
Total Horizontal Line Time [ms] 63.56 64.00
Horizontal Display [ms] 49.54 48.81
Front Porch Width [ms] 2.76 3.09
Sync Pulse Width [ms] 4.73 4.68
Back Porch Width [ms] 6.53 7.42
Total Horizontal Blanking [ms] 14.02 15.19
Vertical Blanking Interval [H] 31.50 38.50
Vertical Front Porch Width [H] 6.5 9.0
Vertical Sync Width [H] 3 2.5
Vertical Back Porch Width [H] 22 27
Table 217. Video Signal Specifications
Maintenance
Consult the peripheral device operator manual for necessary
routine maintenance.
2177611–100 Rev 0
Assistance
Clinical Questions
.
For information, call your local Applications, Sales or Service
Representative.
For USA GE Clinical Answer Center at 1–800–682–5327 or

Only 414–524–5255.
.
Service Questions
For service, call your local Service Representative.
For USA GE CARES at 1–800–437–1171

Only
Literature
.
To request the latest GE Accessories catalog or equipment
brochures, call your local Applications, Sales or Service
Representative.
For USA Response Center at 1–800–643–6439

Only
Accessories
.
To place an order, call your local Applications, Sales or
Service Representative.
.
For USA GE Access Center at 1–800–472–3666.
Only
Refer to the User Maintenance (Volume 3) for additional
information.
t
Assistance D–1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Assistance
Supplies/Accessories
CAUTION DO NOT connect any probes or accessories without approval

by GE.
The following supplies/accessories have been verified to be

t
compatible with the LOGIQ 500 system:
CAUTION The LOGIQ t 500 ultrasound system complies with

regulatory requirements of , except Gel, Disinfectant,
Biopsy Kits, Sheath Sets and B510 probe.
Peripherals
Accessory Units Catalog Number

S-VHS VCR Tapes 60 Minute S-VHS tape E7010GG
126 Minute S-VHS tape E7010GF
Sony VCR Each H4550MA
Model SVO-9500MD
Sony B&W Printer Each E8310KA
Model UP-890
Sony Color Printer Each H4550MB
Model UP-1800
IIE Multi Image Camera Each H4550KF
Model IIE 460
Sony UP-1800 Paper Color E8310JH
B/W E8310JJ
Sony UP-890 Paper E8310FA
Table 218. Peripherals and Accessories
Console

Foot Switch Each H40582L
Vinyl Cover Each H40642L
Extended Cine Memory Kit H40592L
Table 219. Console Accessories
Assistance D–2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Assistance
Probes

B510 Each H45202BT
C364 Each H45202CF
C386 Each H45202CC
C551 Each H45202CE
C721 Each H45202MN
E721 Each H45202MT
I739 Each H45202JG
LA39 Each H45202LA
546L Each H45202LE
739L Each H45202AG
L764 Each H45202HP
P509 Each H45202RT
S220 Each H45202WG
S222 Each H45202TC
S316 Each H45202SC
S317 Each H45202SD
S611 Each H45202SF
T739 Each H45202TG
CWD2 Each H45202DB
CWD5 Each H45202DE
PA51 Adapter Each H45202PA
S5 Adapter Each H46322AC
Probe Cable Arm Each H40622L
Left Side Holder Each H40602L
Special TV/TR Holder Each H40612L
Table 220. Probes and Accessories
t
Assistance D–3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Assistance
Gel
Accessory Units Catalog Numbers

Thermasonic Gel Holds three plastic bottles E8365BH
Warmer (250 ml or 8 oz).
Aquasonic 100 Scan Gel 5 liter jug E8365AF
250 ml plastic bottles E8365BA
(12/case)
Scan Ultraound Gel 8 oz plastic bottles E8365BC
(12/case)
1 gallon plastic jug E8365BD
Four 1-gallon plastic jugs E8365BK
Table 221. Gel
Disinfectant

Cidex Activated 16/1 qt. bottles E8386EB
Dialdeh de
Dialdehyde 4/1 gal. bottles E8386EC
2/2.5 gal bottles E8386ED
Table 222. Disinfectant
Assistance D–4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Assistance
Civco Biopsy Starter Kits (includes bracket)

C364 Probe Biopsy Kit Kit E8385MD
C551 Probe Biopsy Kit Kit E8385MF
S316 Probe Biopsy Kit Kit E8385MK
739L Probe Biopsy Kit Kit E8385MC
E721 Probe Biopsy Kit Kit (GEYMS) H46222AD
Kit (Civco) H4550BG
C721 Probe Biopsy Kit Kit H40252L
L764 Probe Biopsy Kit Kit E8385LA
T739 Probe Biopsy Kit Kit H45262L
LA39 Probe Biopsy Kit Kit E8385MM
Table 223. Probe Biopsy Brackets
Multi-Angle Brackets

S317 Probe Each E8385PD
C364 Probe Each E8385PA
C386 Probe Each E8385PB
546L Probe Each E8385PC
Table 224. Multi-Angle Brackets
Biopsy Replacement Kits

Civco UltraPro Kit E8385LC
Civco UltraPro II Kit E8385PE
Civco Cleaning Brush 5 Brushes Per Set E8323GE
for E721 Biopsy Guide
Table 225. Biopsy Kits
t
Assistance D–5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Assistance
Ultrasound Probe and Cord Sheath Sets

Sterile Ultrasound 20 Per Set E8385CA
Probe Sheath Set
Sterile Ultrasound Cord 20 Per Set E8385CB
Sheath Set
Sanitary Rectal/Vaginal 20 Per Set E8385CC
Probe Cover
Sterile Combination 12 Per Set E8385CE
Probe and Cord Cover
Set
Sterile Ultrasound 20 Per Set E8385CF
Probe Sheath Set for
Wide (2.5 and 3.5)
Aperture Sector Probes
Table 226. Biopsy Sheath Kits
Physio Accessories

Physio Input Panel Kit H40552L
ECG Cables Set H40562L
PCG Sensor Each H40572L
Table 227. Patient ECG Lead Wires
Patient Electrodes

Adult Box/300 E8811EE
Pediatric Box/300 E8811EN
Adult/off center Box/500 E8365DA
Pediatric/off center Box/1000 E8365DB
Table 228. Patient ECG Electrodes
Contact the distributor, GE affiliate or sales representative for

approved peripherals.
Assistance D–6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Warranties
Scope and Duration of Warranties
Product warranties
GE warrants that the ultrasound products are:
1. Free from defects in material, workmanship, and title.

2. Conform to our published product specifications in
effect on the date of shipment of the products. The
product specifications are available on request.
Patent and copyright warranty

GE warrants that when delivered, the products will not be
subject to any valid patent or copyright infringement claim.
The warranty period for all warranties, except the warranty of

title and the patent and copyright warranty, is limited in time
as shown below:
Ultrasound Part Time Limit

Ultrasound systems, 12 Months
components, modules, and
upgrades
Ultrasound probes and 12 Months
transducers
Ultrasound water path 3 Months
attachment kit
.
Table 229. Warranty Time Limits
NOTE: If a maintenance agreement is desired to extend

coverage beyond the manufacturer’s warranty, please
contact the local service or sales representative.
t
Warranties E–1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Warranties
Patent and copyright warranty (cont’d)

The warranty period begins on the date the products are
delivered. But, if GE assembles the products, the warranty
period begins on the earlier of:
1. Five (5) days after the date GE notifies you that we

have completed assembly and the products are
operating in accordance with our published product
specifications
OR
2. The date you first use the products for patient use.
If assembly is delayed for 30 days or more after the date of

delivery for a reason beyond our reasonable control, the
warranty period will begin on the thirtieth day after the date of
delivery.
The warranty period for any product or part furnished to

correct a warranty failure will be the unexpired term of the
warranty applicable to the repaired or replaced products.
Warranties E–2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Warranties
Warranty Exclusions
.
These warranties are exclusive and in lieu of all other
warranties, whether written, oral, expressed, implied, or
statutory.
No warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular

purpose applies.
The warranties DO NOT cover:
1. Any defect or deficiency (including failure to conform

to product specifications) which results, in whole or in
part, from:
a. Any alteration, improper storage, handling, use or
maintenance, or any extraordinary use of the
products, by anyone other than GE.
b. Failure to follow any of GE’s written
recommendations or instructions.
c. Combining the products with products of others or
with incompatible GE products.
d. Any of your designs, specifications or instructions.
OR
e. Any cause external to the products as furnished
by GE or beyond our reasonable control.
2. Ultrasound supplies and accessories identified by
catalog numbers which start with the letter “E” (which
are covered by a separate printed warranty).
3. Products which are not listed in our price pages at the
time of sale. Non-listed products are provided with
the manufacturer’s warranties, if any, GE is permitted
to pass on to you. Otherwise, non-listed products are
provided AS IS.
4. The payment and reimbursement of any facility costs
arising from repair or replacement of the products or
parts.
t
Warranties E–3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Warranties
Exclusive Warranty Remedies
Product warranties
If you promptly notify us of your warranty claim and make the
product available for service, GE will at our option, repair,
adjust, or replace (with new or exchange replacement parts)
the non-conforming product or parts of the product. Warranty
service will be performed without charge from 8:00 am to
5:00 pm, Monday through Friday, excluding our holidays, and
outside those hours at our prevailing service rates and
subject to the availability of personnel.
Patent and copyright warranty

GE will defend or settle any suit against you to the extent it is
based on an infringement claim which would be a breach of
the patent and copyright warranty. If the infringement claim is
valid, GE will pay all damages and costs awarded against
you due to the breach. In addition, GE will obtain a license
for you to continue using the infringing product, provide a
non-infringing replacement, alter the product so that it is
non-infringing, or remove the infringing product and refund
the price (less reasonable depreciation) and any return
transportation costs paid by you.
The above describes your exclusive remedies and our sole

liability for any warranty claims. You agree that GE and our
representatives have no liability to you for:
1. Any penal, incidental, or consequential damages such

as lost profit or revenue.
2. Any assistance not required under our quotation.
3. Anything occurring after the warranty period ends.
Warranties E–4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
List of OB Tables
Table 1. BD : Berkowitz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–3
Table 2. BPD : Campbell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–3
Table 3. BD : Campbell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–4
Table 4. CRL : Campbell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–4
Table 5. FL : Campbell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–5
Table 6. TAD : Eriksen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–5
Table 7. AC : Hadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–6
Table 8. BPD : Hadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–6
Table 9. CRL : Hadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–7
Table 10. FL : Hadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–7
Table 11. HC : Hadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–8
Table 12. AC : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–9
Table 13. BPD : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–10
Table 14. CRL : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–11
Table 15. FL : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–12
Table 16. GS : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–12
Table 17. HC : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–13
Table 18. OFD : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–13
Table 19. TAD : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–14
Table 20. ThD : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–14
Table 21. GS : Hellman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–15
Table 22. AC : Jeanty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–15
Table 23. BD : Jeanty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–16
Table 24. BPD : Jeanty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–16
Table 25. CRL : Jeanty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–17
Table 26. FL : Jeanty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–17
Table 27. HC : Jeanty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–18
Table 28. BPD : Kurtz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–18
Table 29. CRL : Nelson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–19
Table 30. BPD : Osaka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–19
Table 31. CRL : Osaka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–20
Table 32. EFBW : Osaka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–20
Table 33. FL : Osaka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–21
Table 34. FTA : Osaka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–22
Table 35. HL : Osaka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–22
Table 36. BPD : Paris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–23
t
LOGIQ 500 User Manual OB Tables F–1
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
OB Tables (cont’d)
Table 37. CRL : Paris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–23
Table 38. FL : Paris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–24
Table 39. Ft : Paris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–24
Table 40. TAD : Paris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–25
Table 41. BPD : Rempen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–25
Table 42. CRL : Rempen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–26
Table 43. GS : Rempen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–27
Table 44. CRL : Robinson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–28
Table 45. AC : Sostoa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–28
Table 46. BD : Sostoa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–29
Table 47. BPD : Sostoa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–29
Table 48. FL : Sostoa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–30
Table 49. HC : Sostoa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–30
Table 50. OFD : Sostoa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–31
Table 51. BPD : Tokyo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–31
Table 52. CRL : Tokyo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–32
Table 53. FL : Tokyo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–32
Table 54. GS : Tokyo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–33
Table 55. LV : Tokyo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–33
Table 56. FL/HC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–34
Table 57. HC/AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–34
Table 58. EFW : Tokyo Shinozuka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–35
Table 59. APTDxTTD (AxT): Tokyo Shinozuka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–35
Table 60. FL : Tokyo Shinozuka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–36
Table 61. AC : Tokyo Shinozuka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–36
Table 62. BPD : Tokyo Shinozuka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–37
Table 63. CRL : Tokyo Shinozuka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–37
Table 64. AC : Australia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–38
Table 65. CRL : Australia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–38
Table 66. BPD : Australia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F–39
OB Tables F–2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
BD : Berkowitz Unit : BD (mm) BPD : Campbell Unit : BPD (mm)

Age (Day) King’s College Hosp. Age (Day)
SD (mm) London SD (mm)
(Am.J.obst.gynecol).
Oct 1, 1982
BD Age SD BD Age SD BPD Age SD BPD Age SD

<13 n/a ––– 53 230 0 <20 n/a ––– 60 173 4
13 81 0 54 237 0 20 80 3 61 175 4
14 82 0 55 244 0 21 82 3 62 177 4
15 84 0 56 251 0 22 84 3 63 180 4
16 86 0 57 258 0 23 86 3 64 182 4
17 88 0 58 266 0 24 89 3 65 184 4
18 91 0 59 275 0 25 91 3 66 187 5
19 95 0 >59 n/a ––– 26 93 3 67 189 5
20 98 0 27 96 3 68 192 5
21 102 0 28 98 3 69 195 5
22 105 0 29 100 3 70 198 5
23 109 0 30 103 3 71 201 5
24 110 0 31 105 3 72 204 5
25 112 0 32 107 3 73 207 5
26 116 0 33 110 3 74 210 5
27 120 0 34 112 3 75 213 5
28 124 0 35 114 3 76 216 5
29 128 0 36 117 3 77 219 5
30 130 0 37 119 3 78 222 5
31 132 0 38 121 3 79 225 5
32 135 0 39 124 3 80 228 5
33 138 0 40 126 3 81 231 5
34 142 0 41 128 3 82 234 5
35 145 0 42 131 3 83 237 5
36 149 0 43 133 4 84 240 5
37 152 0 44 135 4 85 243 5
38 155 0 45 138 4 86 246 5
39 159 0 46 140 4 87 249 5
40 162 0 47 142 4 88 252 5
41 166 0 48 145 4 89 255 5
42 169 0 49 147 4 90 258 5
43 173 0 50 149 4 91 261 5
44 179 0 51 152 4 92 264 5
45 185 0 52 154 4 93 267 5
46 191 0 53 156 4 94 270 5
47 197 0 54 159 4 95 273 5
48 202 0 55 161 4 96 276 5
49 207 0 56 163 4 97 279 5
50 212 0 57 166 4 >97 n/a –––
51 217 0 58 168 4
52 223 0 59 170 4
Table 1. BD : Berkowitz Table 2. BPD : Campbell
t
OB Tables F–3
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
BD : Campbell Unit : BD (mm) CRL : Campbell Unit : CRL (mm)

King’s College Hosp. Age (Day) King’s College Hosp. Age (Day)
London SD (mm) London SD (mm)
(Am.J.obst.gynecol). (Am.J.obst.gynecol).
Oct 1, 1982 Oct 1, 1982
BD Age SD BD Age SD CRL Age SD CRL Age SD

<14 n/a ––– 54 237 0 <10 n/a ––– 50 79 7
14 81 0 55 245 0 10 49 5 51 80 7
15 84 0 56 252 0 11 49 5 52 81 7
16 87 0 57 260 0 12 50 5 53 81 7
17 90 0 58 267 0 13 51 5 54 82 7
18 93 0 59 275 0 14 52 5 55 82 7
19 96 0 >59 n/a ––– 15 53 5 56 83 7
20 99 0 16 54 5 57 83 7
21 102 0 17 55 5 58 84 7
22 105 0 18 56 5 59 85 7
23 108 0 19 57 5 60 85 7
24 111 0 20 58 5 61 86 7
25 114 0 21 59 5 62 86 7
26 117 0 22 59 6 63 87 7
27 120 0 23 60 6 64 88 7
28 123 0 24 61 6 65 88 7
29 126 0 25 62 6 66 89 7
30 129 0 26 63 6 67 89 7
31 132 0 27 64 6 68 90 7
32 135 0 28 65 6 69 90 7
33 138 0 29 66 6 70 91 7
34 141 0 30 67 6 71 92 7
35 145 0 31 68 6 72 92 7
36 148 0 32 69 6 73 93 7
37 151 0 33 70 7 74 93 7
38 154 0 34 70 7 75 94 7
39 157 0 35 71 7 76 95 7
40 160 0 36 71 7 77 95 7
41 163 0 37 72 7 78 95 7
42 166 0 38 72 7 79 96 7
43 170 0 39 73 7 80 96 7
44 175 0 40 74 7 81 96 7
45 181 0 41 74 7 82 97 7
46 186 0 42 75 7 83 97 7
47 192 0 43 75 7 84 97 7
48 198 0 44 76 7 85 98 7
49 203 0 45 76 7 >85 n/a –––
50 209 0 46 77 7
51 215 0 47 78 7
52 222 0 48 78 7
53 230 0 49 79 7
Table 3. BD : Campbell Table 4. CRL : Campbell
OB Tables F–4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
FL : Campbell Unit : FL (mm) TAD : Eriksen Unit : TAD (mm)

King’s College Hosp. Age (Day) Age (Day)
London SD (mm) SD (mm)
(Am.J.obst.gynecol).
Oct 1, 1982
FL Age SD FL Age SD TAD Age SD TAD Age SD TAD Age SD

<16 n/a ––– 56 203 5 <23 n/a –– 63 171 0 104 261 0
16 100 4 57 205 5 23 91 0 64 173 0 105 263 0
17 102 4 58 208 5 24 93 0 65 175 0 106 266 0
18 104 4 59 211 5 25 95 0 66 177 0 107 268 0
19 106 4 60 214 5 26 97 0 67 179 0 108 270 0
20 109 4 61 218 5 27 99 0 68 182 0 109 273 0
21 111 4 62 222 5 28 101 0 69 184 0 110 275 0
22 113 4 63 226 5 29 103 0 70 186 0 111 277 0
23 116 4 64 230 5 30 105 0 71 188 0 112 280 0
24 118 4 65 234 5 31 107 0 72 190 0 >112 n/a –––
25 120 4 66 238 5 32 109 0 73 192 0
26 123 4 67 242 5 33 111 0 74 195 0
27 125 4 68 246 5 34 113 0 75 197 0
28 127 4 69 250 5 35 115 0 76 199 0
29 130 4 70 255 5 36 117 0 77 201 0
30 132 4 71 260 5 37 119 0 78 203 0
31 134 4 72 265 5 38 120 0 79 206 0
32 137 4 73 270 5 39 122 0 80 208 0
33 139 4 74 275 5 40 124 0 81 210 0
34 141 4 75 280 5 41 126 0 82 212 0
35 144 4 76 285 5 42 128 0 83 214 0
36 146 4 >76 n/a 5 43 130 0 84 217 0
37 148 4 44 132 0 85 219 0
38 151 5 45 134 0 86 221 0
39 154 5 46 136 0 87 223 0
40 157 5 47 138 0 88 225 0
41 160 5 48 140 0 89 228 0
42 163 5 49 142 0 90 230 0
43 166 5 50 144 0 91 232 0
44 169 5 51 146 0 92 234 0
45 172 5 52 148 0 93 236 0
46 175 5 53 150 0 94 239 0
47 178 5 54 152 0 95 241 0
48 181 5 55 154 0 96 243 0
40 184 5 56 156 0 97 245 0
50 186 5 57 158 0 98 247 0
51 189 5 58 161 0 99 250 0
52 192 5 59 163 0 100 252 0
53 194 5 60 165 0 101 254 0
54 197 5 61 167 0 102 256 0
55 200 5 62 169 0 103 259 0
Table 5. FL : Campbell Table 6. TAD : Eriksen
t
OB Tables F–5
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
AC : Hadlock Unit : AC (mm) BPD : Hadlock Unit : BPD (mm)

Hadlock, AJR, 139: Age (Week) Hadlock, JUM, 1: Age (Week)
367,1982 SD (Week) 97,1982 SD (Week)
AC Age SD AC Age SD BPD Age SD BPD Age SD BPD Age SD
<80 n/a ––– 280 32.1 ± 1.2 <20 n/a ––– 60 24.6 ±1.5 >100 n/a –––
80 13.8 ± 1.2 285 32.6 ± 1.2 20 12.2 ±1.5 61 25.0 ±1.5
85 14.2 ± 1.2 290 33.1 ± 1.2 21 12.5 ±1.5 62 25.3 ±1.5
90 14.6 ± 1.2 295 33.6 ± 1.2 22 12.8 ±1.5 63 25.7 ±1.5
95 15.0 ± 1.2 300 34.1 ± 1.2 23 13.1 ±1.5 64 26.1 ±1.5
100 15.6 ± 1.2 305 34.6 ± 1.2 24 13.3 ±1.5 65 26.4 ±1.5
105 16.1 ± 1.2 310 35.1 ± 1.2 25 13.6 ±1.5 66 26.8 ±1.5
110 16.5 ± 1.2 315 35.6 ± 1.2 26 13.9 ±1.5 67 27.2 ±1.5
115 16.9 ± 1.2 320 36.1 ± 1.2 27 14.2 ±1.5 68 27.6 ±1.5
120 17.3 ± 1.2 325 36.6 ± 1.2 28 14.5 ±1.5 69 28.0 ±1.5
125 17.8 ± 1.2 330 37.1 ± 1.2 29 14.7 ±1.5 70 28.3 ±1.5
130 18.2 ± 1.2 335 37.6 ± 1.2 30 15.0 ±1.5 71 28.7 ±1.5
135 18.6 ± 1.2 340 38.1 ± 1.2 31 15.3 ±1.5 72 29.1 ±1.5
140 19.1 ± 1.2 345 38.7 ± 1.2 32 15.6 ±1.5 73 29.5 ±1.5
145 19.5 ± 1.2 350 39.2 ± 1.2 33 15.9 ±1.5 74 29.9 ±1.5
150 20.0 ± 1.2 355 39.7 ± 1.2 34 16.2 ±1.5 75 30.4 ±1.5
155 20.4 ± 1.2 360 40.2 ± 1.2 35 16.5 ±1.5 76 30.8 ±1.5
160 20.8 ± 1.2 365 40.8 ± 1.2 36 16.8 ±1.5 77 31.2 ±1.5
165 21.3 ± 1.2 >365 n/a ––– 37 17.1 ±1.5 78 31.6 ±1.5
170 21.7 ± 1.2 38 17.4 ±1.5 79 32.0 ±1.5
175 22.2 ± 1.2 39 17.7 ±1.5 80 32.5 ±1.5
180 22.6 ± 1.2 40 18.0 ±1.5 81 32.9 ±1.5
185 23.1 ± 1.2 41 18.3 ±1.5 82 33.3 ±1.5
190 23.6 ± 1.2 42 18.6 ±1.5 83 33.8 ±1.5
195 24.0 ± 1.2 43 18.9 ±1.5 84 34.2 ±1.5
200 24.5 ± 1.2 44 19.2 ±1.5 85 34.7 ±1.5
205 24.9 ± 1.2 45 19.5 ±1.5 86 35.1 ±1.5
210 25.4 ± 1.2 46 19.9 ±1.5 87 35.6 ±1.5
215 25.9 ± 1.2 47 20.2 ±1.5 88 36.1 ±1.5
220 26.3 ± 1.2 48 20.5 ±1.5 89 36.5 ±1.5
225 26.8 ± 1.2 49 20.8 ±1.5 90 37.0 ±1.5
230 27.3 ± 1.2 50 21.2 ±1.5 91 37.5 ±1.5
235 27.7 ± 1.2 51 21.5 ±1.5 92 38.0 ±1.5
240 28.2 ± 1.2 52 21.8 ±1.5 93 38.5 ±1.5
245 28.7 ± 1.2 53 22.2 ±1.5 94 38.9 ±1.5
250 29.2 ± 1.2 54 22.5 ±1.5 95 39.4 ±1.5
255 29.7 ± 1.2 55 22.8 ±1.5 96 39.9 ±1.5
260 30.1 ± 1.2 56 23.2 ±1.5 97 40.5 ±1.5
265 30.6 ± 1.2 57 23.5 ±1.5 98 41.0 ±1.5
270 31.1 ± 1.2 58 23.9 ±1.5 99 41.5 ±1.5
275 31.6 ± 1.2 59 24.2 ±1.5 100 42.0 ±1.5
Table 7. AC : Hadlock Table 8. BPD : Hadlock
OB Tables F–6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
CRL : Hadlock Unit : CRL (mm) FL : Hadlock Unit : FL (mm)

Age (Week) Hadlock, AJR, 138: Age (Week)
SD (Week) 875,1982 SD (Week)
CRL Age SD CRL Age SD CRL Age SD FL Age SD

<2 n/a ––– 42 11.1 ± 0.5 83 14.2 ± 0.6 <10 n/a –––
2 5.7 ± 0.3 43 11.2 ± 0.5 84 14.3 ± 0.6 10 12.8 ±1.2
3 5.9 ± 0.3 44 11.2 ± 0.5 85 14.4 ± 0.6 12 13.4 ±1.2
4 6.1 ± 0.3 45 11.3 ± 0.5 86 14.5 ± 0.6 14 13.9 ±1.2
5 6.2 ± 0.3 46 11.4 ± 0.5 87 14.6 ± 0.6 16 14.5 ±1.2
6 6.4 ± 0.3 47 11.5 ± 0.5 88 14.7 ± 0.7 18 15.1 ±1.2
7 6.6 ± 0.3 48 11.6 ± 0.5 89 14.8 ± 0.7 20 15.7 ±1.2
8 6.7 ± 0.3 49 11.7 ± 0.5 90 14.9 ± 0.7 22 16.3 ±1.2
9 6.9 ± 0.3 50 11.7 ± 0.5 91 15.0 ± 0.7 24 16.9 ±1.2
10 7.1 ± 0.3 51 11.8 ± 0.5 92 15.1 ± 0.7 26 17.6 ±1.2
11 7.2 ± 0.3 52 11.9 ± 0.5 93 15.2 ± 0.7 28 18.2 ±1.2
12 7.4 ± 0.3 53 12.0 ± 0.5 94 15.3 ± 0.7 30 18.9 ±1.2
13 7.5 ± 0.3 54 12.0 ± 0.5 95 15.3 ± 0.7 32 19.6 ±1.2
14 7.7 ± 0.3 55 12.1 ± 0.5 96 15.4 ± 0.7 34 20.3 ±1.2
15 7.9 ± 0.4 56 12.2 ± 0.5 97 15.5 ± 0.7 36 21.0 ±1.2
16 8.0 ± 0.4 57 12.3 ± 0.5 98 15.6 ± 0.7 38 21.8 ±1.2
17 8.1 ± 0.4 58 12.3 ± 0.5 99 15.7 ± 0.7 40 22.5 ±1.2
18 8.3 ± 0.4 59 12.4 ± 0.6 100 15.9 ± 0.7 42 23.3 ±1.2
19 8.4 ± 0.4 60 12.5 ± 0.6 101 16.0 ± 0.7 44 24.1 ±1.2
20 8.6 ± 0.4 61 12.6 ± 0.6 102 16.1 ± 0.7 46 24.9 ±1.2
21 8.7 ± 0.4 62 12.6 ± 0.6 103 16.2 ± 0.7 48 25.7 ±1.2
22 8.9 ± 0.4 63 12.7 ± 0.6 104 16.3 ± 0.7 50 26.5 ±1.2
23 9.0 ± 0.4 64 12.8 ± 0.6 105 16.4 ± 0.7 52 27.4 ±1.2
24 9.1 ± 0.4 65 12.8 ± 0.6 106 16.5 ± 0.7 54 28.2 ±1.2
25 9.2 ± 0.4 66 12.9 ± 0.6 107 16.6 ± 0.7 56 29.1 ±1.2
26 9.4 ± 0.4 67 13.0 ± 0.6 108 16.7 ± 0.7 58 30.0 ±1.2
27 9.5 ± 0.4 68 13.1 ± 0.6 109 16.8 ± 0.7 60 30.9 ±1.2
28 9.6 ± 0.4 69 13.1 ± 0.6 110 16.9 ± 0.8 62 31.9 ±1.2
29 9.7 ± 0.4 70 13.2 ± 0.6 111 17.0 ± 0.8 64 32.8 ±1.2
30 9.9 ± 0.4 71 13.3 ± 0.6 112 17.1 ± 0.8 66 33.8 ±1.2
31 10.0 ± 0.4 72 13.4 ± 0.6 113 17.2 ± 0.8 68 34.7 ±1.2
32 10.1 ± 0.5 73 13.4 ± 0.6 114 17.3 ± 0.8 70 35.7 ±1.2
33 10.2 ± 0.5 74 13.5 ± 0.6 115 17.4 ± 0.8 72 36.7 ±1.2
34 10.3 ± 0.5 75 13.6 ± 0.6 116 17.5 ± 0.8 74 37.7 ±1.2
35 10.4 ± 0.5 76 13.7 ± 0.6 117 17.6 ± 0.8 76 38.8 ±1.2
36 10.5 ± 0.5 77 13.8 ± 0.6 118 17.7 ± 0.8 78 39.8 ±1.2
37 10.6 ± 0.5 78 13.8 ± 0.6 119 17.8 ± 0.8 80 40.9 ±1.2
38 10.7 ± 0.5 79 13.9 ± 0.6 120 17.9 ± 0.8 82 41.9 ±1.2
39 10.8 ± 0.5 80 14.0 ± 0.6 121 18.0 ± 0.8 >82 n/a –––
40 10.9 ± 0.5 81 14.1 ± 0.6 >121 n/a –––
41 11.0 ± 0.5 82 14.2 ± 0.6
Table 9. CRL : Hadlock Table 10. FL : Hadlock
t
OB Tables F–7
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
HC : Hadlock Unit : HC (mm)

Hadlock, AJR, 138: Age (Week)
649,1982 SD (Week)
HC Age SD HC Age SD
<80 n/a ––– 280 30.3 ± 1.2

80 13.4 ± 1.2 285 31.0 ± 1.2
85 13.7 ± 1.2 290 31.6 ± 1.2
90 14.0 ± 1.2 295 32.2 ± 1.2
95 14.3 ± 1.2 300 32.8 ± 1.2
100 14.6 ± 1.2 305 33.5 ± 1.2
105 15.0 ± 1.2 310 34.2 ± 1.2
110 15.3 ± 1.2 315 34.9 ± 1.2
115 15.6 ± 1.2 320 35.5 ± 1.2
120 15.9 ± 1.2 325 36.3 ± 1.2
125 16.3 ± 1.2 330 37.0 ± 1.2
130 16.6 ± 1.2 335 37.7 ± 1.2
135 17.0 ± 1.2 340 38.5 ± 1.2
140 17.3 ± 1.2 345 39.2 ± 1.2
145 17.7 ± 1.2 350 40.0 ± 1.2
150 18.1 ± 1.2 355 40.8 ± 1.2
155 18.4 ± 1.2 360 41.6 ± 1.2
160 18.8 ± 1.2 >360 n/a –––
165 19.2 ± 1.2
170 19.6 ± 1.2
175 20.0 ± 1.2
180 20.4 ± 1.2
185 20.8 ± 1.2
190 21.2 ± 1.2
195 21.6 ± 1.2
200 22.1 ± 1.2
205 22.5 ± 1.2
210 23.0 ± 1.2
215 23.4 ± 1.2
220 23.9 ± 1.2
225 24.4 ± 1.2
230 24.9 ± 1.2
235 25.4 ± 1.2
240 25.9 ± 1.2
245 26.4 ± 1.2
250 26.9 ± 1.2
255 27.5 ± 1.2
260 28.0 ± 1.2
265 28.1 ± 1.2
270 29.2 ± 1.2
275 29.8 ± 1.2
Table 11. HC : Hadlock
OB Tables F–8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
AC : Hansmann
Hansmann : M and AI : Geburtsh, u, Frauenheilk 39 : 656,1979
Unit : AC (mm) Age (Weeks/Days) SD (mm)
AC Age SD AC Age SD AC Age SD AC Age SD AC Age SD AC Age SD

<53 n/a –– 97 15W1D 0 142 19W5D 0 187 24W5D 0 232 29W2D 0 277 34W1D 0
53 11W1D 0 98 15W2D 0 143 19W6D 0 188 24W5D 0 233 29W3D 0 278 34W2D 0
54 11W2D 0 99 15W2D 0 144 20W0D 0 189 24W6D 0 234 29W3D 0 279 34W2D 0
55 11W2D 0 100 15W3D 0 145 20W1D 0 190 25W0D 0 235 29W4D 0 280 34W3D 0
56 11W3D 0 101 15W4D 0 146 20W2D 0 191 25W1D 0 236 29W4D 0 281 34W3D 0
57 11W3D 0 102 15W5D 0 147 20W2D 0 192 25W2D 0 237 29W5D 0 282 34W4D 0
58 11W4D 0 103 15W5D 0 148 20W3D 0 193 25W2D 0 238 29W6D 0 283 34W4D 0
59 11W4D 0 104 15W6D 0 149 20W3D 0 194 25W3D 0 239 30W0D 0 284 34W5D 0
60 11W5D 0 105 16W0D 0 150 20W4D 0 195 25W4D 0 240 30W1D 0 285 34W6D 0
61 11W6D 0 106 16W0D 0 151 20W4D 0 196 25W4D 0 241 30W2D 0 286 35W0D 0
62 12W0D 0 107 16W1D 0 152 20W5D 0 197 25W5D 0 242 30W3D 0 287 35W1D 0
63 12W1D 0 108 16W2D 0 153 20W6D 0 198 25W5D 0 243 30W3D 0 288 35W2D 0
64 12W2D 0 109 16W3D 0 154 21W0D 0 199 25W6D 0 244 30W4D 0 289 35W3D 0
65 12W2D 0 110 16W3D 0 155 21W1D 0 200 26W0D 0 245 30W5D 0 290 35W3D 0
66 12W3D 0 111 16W4D 0 156 21W2D 0 201 26W0D 0 246 30W6D 0 291 35W4D 0
67 12W3D 0 112 16W5D 0 157 21W2D 0 202 26W1D 0 247 30W6D 0 292 35W5D 0
68 12W4D 0 113 16W6D 0 158 21W3D 0 203 26W2D 0 248 31W0D 0 293 35W6D 0
69 12W5D 0 114 16W6D 0 159 21W3D 0 204 26W3D 0 249 31W1D 0 294 35W6D 0
70 12W5D 0 115 17W0D 0 160 21W4D 0 205 26W3D 0 250 31W2D 0 295 36W0D 0
71 12W6D 0 116 17W1D 0 161 21W4D 0 206 26W4D 0 251 31W3D 0 296 36W1D 0
72 12W6D 0 117 17W2D 0 162 21W5D 0 207 26W5D 0 252 31W3D 0 297 36W2D 0
73 13W0D 0 118 17W2D 0 163 21W6D 0 208 26W6D 0 253 31W4D 0 298 36W2D 0
74 13W0D 0 119 17W3D 0 164 22W0D 0 209 26W6D 0 254 31W5D 0 299 36W3D 0
75 13W1D 0 120 17W3D 0 165 22W1D 0 210 27W05 0 255 31W6D 0 300 36W3D 0
76 13W2D 0 121 17W4D 0 166 22W2D 0 211 27W1D 0 256 31W6D 0 301 36W4D 0
77 13W2D 0 122 17W4D 0 167 22W3D 0 212 27W2D 0 257 32W0D 0 302 36W4D 0
78 13W3D 0 123 17W5D 0 168 22W4D 0 213 27W2D 0 258 32W1D 0 303 36W5D 0
79 13W3D 0 124 17W6D 0 169 22W5D 0 214 27W3D 0 259 32W2D 0 304 36W6D 0
80 13W4D 0 125 18W0D 0 170 22W5D 0 215 27W4D 0 260 32W2D 0 305 37W0D 0
81 13W4D 0 126 18W1D 0 171 22W6D 0 216 27W4D 0 261 32W3D 0 306 37W1D 0
82 13W5D 0 127 18W2D 0 172 23W0D 0 217 27W5D 0 262 32W3D 0 307 37W2D 0
83 13W6D 0 128 18W3D 0 173 23W1D 0 218 27W5D 0 263 32W4D 0 308 37W3D 0
84 14W0D 0 129 18W3D 0 174 23W2D 0 219 27W6D 0 264 32W4D 0 309 37W3D 0
85 14W1D 0 130 18W4D 0 175 23W2D 0 220 28W0D 0 265 32W5D 0 310 37W4D 0
86 14W2D 0 131 18W5D 0 176 23W3D 0 221 28W0D 0 266 32W6D 0 311 37W5D 0
87 14W2D 0 132 18W6D 0 177 23W3D 0 222 28W1D 0 267 33W0D 0 312 37W6D 0
88 14W3D 0 133 18W6D 0 178 23W4D 0 223 28W2D 0 268 33W1D 0 313 37W6D 0
89 14W3D 0 134 19W0D 0 179 23W4D 0 224 28W3D 0 269 33W2D 0 314 38W0D 0
90 14W4D 0 135 19W1D 0 180 23W5D 0 225 28W4D 0 270 33W3D 0 315 38W1D 0
91 14W5D 0 136 19W2D 0 181 23W6D 0 226 28W5D 0 271 33W3D 0 316 38W2D 0
92 14W5D 0 137 19W2D 0 182 24W0D 0 227 28W5D 0 272 33W4D 0 317 38W4D 0
93 14W6D 0 138 19W3D 0 183 24W1D 0 228 28W6D 0 273 33W5D 0 318 38W5D 0
94 14W6D 0 139 19W3D 0 184 24W2D 0 229 29W0D 0 274 33W6D 0 319 39W0D 0
95 15W0D 0 140 19W4D 0 185 24W3D 0 230 29W1D 0 275 33W6D 0 320 39W1D 0
96 15W0D 0 141 19W4D 0 186 24W4D 0 231 29W2D 0 276 34W0D 0 >320 n/a ––
Table 12. AC : Hansmann
t
OB Tables F–9
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
BPD : Hansmann
Unit : BPD (mm) Age (Week/sDays) 2SD (mm or day)
2SD = mm 2SD = day
BPD Age 2SD BPD Age 2SD BPD Age 2SD BPD Age 2SD BPD Age 2SD
<14 n/a ––– 58 22W2D 5 <14 n/a ––– 58 22W5D 9 103 40W0D 19
14 10W0D 0 59 22W4D 5 14 9W1D 7 59 23W0D 10 104 40W1D 19
15 10W1D 0 60 22W6D 5 15 9W3D 7 60 23W2D 10 105 40W2D 17
16 10W2D 0 61 23W1D 5 16 9W5D 7 61 23W4D 10 >105 n/a –––
17 10W5D 0 62 23W4D 5 17 10W0D 7 62 24W0D 10
18 10W6D 0 63 23W6D 5 18 10W2D 7 63 24W2D 10
19 11W1D 0 64 24W1D 6 19 10W4D 7 64 24W4D 10
20 11W3D 0 65 24W4D 6 20 10W6D 7 65 24W6D 10
21 11W5D 0 66 24W6D 6 21 11W1D 7 66 25W1D 11
22 12W0D 0 67 25W1D 6 22 11W3D 7 67 25W3D 12
23 12W2D 0 68 25W3D 6 23 11W5D 7 68 25W6D 10
24 12W4D 5 69 25W5D 6 24 12W0D 7 69 26W1D 10
25 12W6D 5 70 26W1D 6 25 12W2D 7 70 26W3D 10
26 13W1D 5 71 26W3D 6 26 12W4D 7 71 26W5D 12
27 13W2D 5 72 26W6D 6 27 12W6D 7 72 27W1D 11
28 13W4D 4 73 27W1D 6 28 13W1D 7 73 27W3D 13
29 13W6D 4 74 27W3D 6 29 13W3D 8 74 27W6D 12
30 14W1D 4 75 27W6D 6 30 13W5D 7 75 28W1D 12
31 14W3D 4 76 28W1D 6 31 14W0D 8 76 28W4D 13
32 14W4D 4 77 28W4D 6 32 14W2D 8 77 28W6D 13
33 14W6D 4 78 28W6D 6 33 14W4D 9 78 29W2D 15
34 15W2D 4 79 29W2D 6 34 15W0D 9 79 29W5D 16
35 15W4D 4 80 29W5D 6 35 15W2D 8 80 30W0D 15
36 15W6D 4 81 30W0D 6 36 15W4D 9 81 30W3D 15
37 16W1D 4 82 30W3D 6 37 16W0D 8 82 31W0D 15
38 16W3D 4 83 30W5D 6 38 16W2D 9 83 31W2D 16
39 16W5D 4 84 31W2D 6 39 16W4D 9 84 31W6D 17
40 17W0D 4 85 31W5D 6 40 17W0D 9 85 32W2D 17
41 17W2D 4 86 32W1D 6 41 17W2D 9 86 32W5D 18
42 17W4D 4 87 32W4D 6 42 17W4D 9 87 33W2D 20
43 17W6D 4 88 33W0D 7 43 17W6D 9 88 33W5D 19
44 18W1D 4 89 33W3D 7 44 18W1D 9 89 34W2D 19
45 18W3D 4 90 33W6D 7 45 18W4D 9 90 34W5D 19
46 18W5D 4 91 34W3D 7 46 18W6D 9 91 35W1D 25
47 19W0D 4 92 34W6D 7 47 19W1D 10 92 35W6D 24
48 19W2D 5 93 35W3D 7 48 19W3D 10 93 36W5D 21
49 19W4D 5 94 36W0D 7 49 19W5D 10 94 37W3D 19
50 19W6D 5 95 36W3D 7 50 20W0D 10 95 38W3D 22
51 20W1D 5 96 37W1D 7 51 20W3D 10 96 38W6D 25
52 20W3D 5 97 37W6D 7 52 20W5D 10 97 39W0D 22
53 20W6D 5 98 38W4D 7 53 21W0D 11 98 39W2D 20
54 21W1D 5 99 39W3D 7 54 21W3D 10 99 39W3D 22
55 21W2D 5 100 40W3D 7 55 21W5D 10 100 39W4D 20
56 21W4D 5 101 41W3D 7 56 22W0D 9 101 39W5D 20
57 21W6D 5 >101 n/a ––– 57 22W2D 9 102 39W6D 19
Table 13. BPD : Hansmann—Known LMP (left)—Unknown LMP (right)
OB Tables F–10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
CRL : Hansmann
Unit : BPD (mm) Age (Weeks/Days) 2SD (mm or day)
2SD = mm 2SD = day
BPD Age 2SD BPD Age 2SD BPD Age 2SD BPD Age 2SD BPD Age 2SD BPD Age 2SD
<13 n/a –– 57 12W2D 16 102 15W6D 10 147 20W2D 17 <6 n/a –– 86 14W4D 12
13 7W4D 0 58 12W2D 16 103 15W6D 10 148 20W2D 17 6 6W1D 7 90 14W6D 12
14 7W5D 0 59 12W3D 16 104 16W0D 10 149 20W3D 17 7 6W2D 7 93 15W1D 12
15 8W0D 0 60 12W3D 16 105 16W1D 10 150 20W4D 17 8 6W4D 7 96 15W3D 12
16 8W1D 0 61 12W4D 15 106 16W2D 10 151 20W4D 0 9 6W6D 7 100 15W5D 12
17 8W2D 0 62 12W4D 15 107 16W2D 10 152 20W5D 0 10 7W0D 7 103 16W0D 13
18 8W3D 0 63 12W5D 15 108 16W3D 10 153 20W5D 0 11 7W2D 7 106 16W2D 13
19 8W4D 7 64 12W5D 15 109 16W3D 10 154 20W6D 0 12 7W3D 7 110 16W4D 14
20 8W5D 7 65 12W6D 15 110 16W4D 10 155 21W0D 0 13 7W4D 7 113 17W0D 14
21 8W6D 8 66 12W6D 15 111 16W4D 11 156 21W0D 0 14 7W6D 7 116 17W2D 14
22 9W0D 8 67 13W0D 15 112 16W5D 11 157 21W1D 0 15 8W0D 7 120 17W4D 14
23 9W1D 10 68 13W1D 15 113 16W5D 11 158 21W1D 0 16 8W2D 7 123 18W0D 14
24 9W2D 10 69 13W1D 15 114 16W6D 11 159 21W2D 0 17 8W3D 7 126 18W2D 14
25 9W3D 11 70 13W2D 15 115 17W0D 11 160 21W3D 0 18 8W4D 7 130 18W6D 14
26 9W4D 11 71 13W3D 15 116 17W1D 12 161 21W3D 0 19 8W5D 7 133 19W1D 15
27 9W4D 11 72 13W3D 15 117 17W2D 12 162 21W4D 0 20 8W6D 7 136 19W4D 16
28 9W5D 11 73 13W4D 15 118 17W2D 12 163 21W4D 0 21 9W0D 7 140 20W0D 16
29 9W6D 11 74 13W4D 15 119 17W3D 12 164 21W5D 0 22 9W1D 7 143 20W3D 16
30 10W0D 12 75 13W5D 15 120 17W3D 12 165 21W6D 0 23 9W2D 7 146 20W6D 16
31 10W0D 12 76 13W5D 15 121 17W4D 13 166 21W6D 0 24 9W3D 7 150 21W3D 15
32 10W1D 12 77 13W6D 15 122 17W5D 13 167 22W0D 0 26 9W5D 7 >150 n/a ––
33 10W2D 12 78 13W6D 15 123 17W5D 13 168 22W0D 0 28 10W0D 8
34 10W3D 12 79 14W0D 15 124 17W6D 13 169 22W1D 0 30 10W2D 8
35 10W3D 13 80 14W0D 15 125 18W0D 13 170 22W1D 0 32 10W3D 8
36 10W4D 13 81 14W1D 13 126 18W1D 14 171 22W2D 0 34 10W5D 8
37 10W5D 13 82 14W1D 13 127 18W1D 14 172 22W2D 0 36 10W6D 8
38 10W5D 13 83 14W2D 13 128 18W2D 14 173 22W3D 0 38 11W1D 8
39 10W6D 13 84 14W2D 13 129 18W2D 14 174 22W3D 0 40 11W2D 8
40 10W6D 13 85 14W3D 13 130 18W3D 15 175 22W4D 0 42 11W3D 8
41 11W0D 14 86 14W3D 13 131 18W4D 15 >175 n/a –– 44 11W4D 9
42 11W1D 14 87 14W4D 13 132 18W4D 15 46 11W6D 9
43 11W1D 14 88 14W4D 13 133 18W5D 15 48 12W0D 9
44 11W2D 14 99 14W5D 13 134 18W6D 15 50 12W1D 9
45 11W2D 14 90 14W6D 13 135 19W0D 15 52 12W2D 9
46 11W3D 14 91 14W6D 12 136 19W1D 15 54 12W3D 9
47 11W3D 15 92 15W0D 12 137 19W1D 15 56 12W4D 9
48 11W4D 15 93 15W0D 12 138 19W2D 15 58 12W5D 9
49 11W4D 15 94 15W1D 12 139 19W3D 15 60 12W6D 9
50 11W5D 15 95 15W2D 12 140 19W4D 15 63 13W0D 10
51 11W5D 15 96 15W3D 11 141 19W4D 16 66 13W2D 10
52 11W6D 15 97 15W3D 11 142 19W5D 16 70 13W3D 10
53 11W6D 15 98 15W4D 11 143 19W5D 16 73 13W5D 11
54 12W0D 15 99 15W4D 11 144 19W6D 16 76 13W6D 11
55 12W1D 16 100 15W5D 11 145 20W0D 16 80 14W1D 11
56 12W1D 16 101 15W5D 10 146 20W1D 17 83 14W2D 12
Table 14. CRL : Hansmann—Known LMP (left)—Unknown LMP (right)
t
OB Tables F–11
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
FL : Hansmann GS : Hansmann Unit : GS (mm)

Unit : FL (mm) Hansmann : M Age (Day)
Age (Weeks/Days) and AI : Geburtsh, u, SD (mm)
2SD (mm) Frauenheilk 39 :
FL Age 2SD FL Age 2SD 656,1979
<12 n/a ––– 52 27W5D 5
GS Age SD GS Age SD
12 13W4D 0 53 28W1D 5
13 13W6D 0 54 28W4D 5 <10 n/a ––––– 38 60 5
14 14W1D 0 55 29W0D 6 10 33 5 39 61 5
15 14W3D 0 56 29W3D 6
11 34 5 40 62 5
16 14W5D 5 57 29W6D 6
17 15W1D 5 58 30W2D 6
12 35 5 41 63 5
18 15W2D 4 59 30W5D 5 13 36 5 42 64 5
19 15W5D 4 60 31W2D 5
14 37 5 43 65 5
20 16W0D 4 61 31W5D 5
15 38 5 44 66 5
21 16W2D 4 62 32W1D 5
22 16W4D 4 63 32W5D 5 16 39 5 45 67 5
23 16W6D 4 64 33W1D 6 17 40 5 46 68 5
24 17W2D 4 65 33W5D 6
18 41 5 47 69 5
25 17W4D 4 66 34W1D 6
19 42 5 48 70 5
26 17W6D 4 67 34W5D 6
27 18W2D 4 68 35W1D 6 20 43 5 49 71 5
28 18W4D 4 69 35W5D 6 21 44 5 50 72 5
29 18W6D 4 70 36W1D 6
22 45 5 51 73 5
30 19W2D 4 71 36W5D 6
31 19W4D 4 72 37W2D 6
23 46 5 52 74 5
32 20W0D 4 73 37W6D 6 24 47 5 53 75 5
33 20W3D 4 74 38W3D 7 25 48 5 54 76 5
34 20W5D 4 75 39W0D 7
26 49 5 55 77 5
35 21W1D 5 >75 n/a –––
36 21W3D 5
27 50 5 56 78 5
37 21W6D 5 28 51 5 57 79 5
38 22W1D 5 29 52 5 58 80 5
39 22W4D 5
30 53 5 59 81 5
40 22W6D 5
41 23W2D 5 31 54 5 60 82 5
42 23W5D 5 32 55 5 61 83 5
43 24W0D 5
33 56 5 62 84 5
44 24W3D 5
34 57 5 63 85 5
45 24W6D 5
46 25W2D 5 35 58 5 64 86 5
47 25W4D 5 36 58 5 65 87 5
48 26W0D 5
37 59 5 >65 n/a –––––
49 26W3D 5
50 26W6D 5 Table 16. GS : Hansmann
51 27W3D 5
Table 15. FL : Hansmann

Known/Unknown LMP
OB Tables F–12 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
HC : Hansmann OFD : Hansmann

Unit : HC (mm) Unit : OFD (mm)
Age (Weeks/Days) Age : (Weeks/Days)
2SD (mm) 2SD (mm)
HC Age 2SD HC Age 2SD OFD Age 2SD HC Age 2SD HC Age 2SD
<105 n/a –– 305 30W5D 19 <34 n/a –– 74 23W1D 7 115 39W0D 8

105 14W0D 0 310 31W2D 19 34 13W5D 0 75 23W2D 7 >115 n/a ––
110 14W3D 0 315 32W1D 19 35 14W0D 0 76 23W4D 7
115 14W6D 14 320 32W5D 20 36 14W2D 0 77 23W6D 7
120 15W3D 14 325 33W3D 20 37 14W4D 5 78 24W1D 7
125 15W5D 14 330 34W2D 20 38 14W4D 5 79 24W2D 7
130 16W1D 14 335 35W1D 20 39 14W6D 5 80 24W4D 7
135 16W4D 14 340 36W2D 20 40 15W1D 5 81 24W6D 7
140 17W0D 14 345 37W6D 20 41 15W3D 5 82 25W1D 7
145 17W3D 15 >345 n/a –– 42 15W5D 5 83 25W2D 7
150 17W6D 15 43 16W0D 5 84 25W4D 7
155 18W1D 16 44 16W1D 5 85 25W6D 7
160 18W4D 16 45 16W3D 5 86 26W1D 7
165 19W0D 16 46 16W4D 5 87 26W3D 7
170 19W0D 16 47 16W6D 5 88 26W5D 7
175 19W3D 16 48 17W1D 5 89 27W0D 7
180 19W5D 16 49 17W3D 5 90 27W2D 7
185 20W1D 17 50 17W4D 5 91 27W4D 8
190 20W4D 17 51 17W6D 5 92 27W6D 8
195 21W0D 17 52 18W1D 5 93 28W1D 8
200 21W2D 17 53 18W2D 5 94 28W3D 8
205 21W5D 17 54 18W4D 5 95 28W5D 8
210 22W1D 17 55 18W6D 5 96 29W0D 8
215 22W4D 17 56 19W0D 6 97 29W3D 8
220 23W0D 17 57 19W2D 6 98 29W5D 8
225 23W3D 17 58 19W3D 6 99 30W0D 8
230 23W5D 18 59 19W5D 6 100 30W3D 8
235 24W1D 18 60 20W0D 6 101 30W5D 8
240 24W4D 18 61 20W1D 6 102 31W1D 8
245 25W0D 18 62 20W2D 6 103 31W4D 8
250 25W3D 18 63 20W4D 6 104 32W0D 8
255 25W6D 18 64 20W6D 6 105 32W3D 8
260 26W2D 18 65 21W0D 6 106 32W6D 8
265 26W5D 18 66 21W2D 6 107 33W3D 8
270 27W1D 18 67 21W4D 6 108 33W6D 8
275 27W4D 19 68 21W5D 6 109 34W3D 8
280 28W1D 19 69 22W0D 6 110 35W0D 8
285 28W5D 19 70 22W1D 7 111 35W4D 8
290 29W1D 19 71 22W3D 7 112 36W2D 8
295 29W5D 19 72 22W4D 7 113 37W0D 8
300 30W2D 19 73 22W6D 7 114 38W0D 8
Table 17. HC : Hansmann Table 18. OFD : Hansmann

Known/Unknown LMP Known/Unknown LMP
t
OB Tables F–13
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
TAD : Hansmann Unit : TAD (mm) ThD : Hansmann

Hansmann : M Age (Day) Unit : THQ (mm)
and Al : Geburtsh, u, SD (mm) Age (Weeks/Days)
Frauenheilk 2SD (mm)
THQ Age 2SD THQ Age 2SD THQ Age 2SD

BPD Age SD BPD Age SD BPD Age SD
<20 n/a –– 60 24W6D 7 101 39W3D 12
<20 n/a ––– 49 148 4 79 217 5
20 12W4D 0 61 25W1D 7 102 39W6D 14
20 87 4 50 150 4 80 220 5 21 12W6D 0 62 25W3D 7 103 40W2D 14
22 13W1D 0 63 25W5D 7 104 40W5D 14
21 89 4 51 152 4 81 222 5
23 13W3D 4 64 26W1D 7 105 41W2D 14
22 91 4 52 155 4 82 225 5
24 13W4D 4 65 26W3D 7 >105 n/a ––
23 93 4 53 157 4 83 227 5 25 13W6D 4 66 26W5D 7
24 95 4 54 159 4 84 230 5 26 14W1D 4 67 27W0D 7

27 14W3D 4 68 27W3D 8
25 97 4 55 161 4 85 232 5
28 14W6D 4 69 27W5D 8
26 99 4 56 164 4 86 235 5 29 15W1D 4 70 28W0D 8
27 101 4 57 166 4 87 237 5 30 15W2D 4 71 28W3D 8

31 15W4D 4 72 28W5D 8
28 103 4 58 168 4 88 240 5
32 15W6D 4 73 29W1D 8
29 105 4 59 170 4 89 242 5
33 16W2D 4 74 29W3D 8
30 107 4 60 173 4 90 245 5 34 16W4D 4 75 29W5D 8
35 16W5D 4 76 30W1D 8
31 109 4 61 175 4 91 247 5
36 17W1D 5 77 30W3D 8
32 111 4 62 177 4 92 250 5
37 17W3D 5 78 30W5D 8
33 113 4 63 179 4 93 252 5 38 17W5D 5 79 31W1D 8
34 115 4 64 182 4 94 255 5 39 18W1D 5 80 31W3D 8

40 18W3D 5 81 31W5D 8
35 117 4 65 184 4 95 258 5
41 18W5D 5 82 32W1D 9
36 119 4 66 186 4 96 261 5 42 19W0D 5 83 32W4D 9
37 122 4 67 188 4 97 264 5 43 19W3D 5 84 32W6D 9

44 19W5D 5 85 33W1D 9
38 124 4 68 191 5 98 267 5
45 19W6D 5 86 33W4D 9
39 126 4 69 193 5 99 270 5 46 20W2D 5 87 33W6D 9
40 128 4 70 195 5 100 273 5 47 20W4D 6 88 34W2D 9

48 20W6D 6 89 34W4D 9
41 130 4 71 198 5 101 276 5
49 2W12D 6 90 35W0D 9
42 132 4 72 200 5 102 279 5
50 21W4D 6 91 35W3D 10
43 135 4 73 203 5 103 282 5 51 21W6D 6 92 35W5D 10
52 22W1D 6 93 36W1D 10
44 137 4 74 205 5
53 22W4D 6 94 36W3D 10
45 139 4 75 208 5
54 22W6D 6 95 36W6D 10
46 141 4 76 210 5 55 23W1D 6 96 37W1D 10
47 143 4 77 212 5 56 23W3D 6 97 37W4D 10

57 23W6D 7 98 38W1D 11
48 146 4 78 215 5
58 24W1D 7 99 38W4D 11
Table 19. TAD : Hansmann 59 24W3D 7 100 38W6D 11
Table 20. ThD : Hansmann

Known/Unknown LMP
OB Tables F–14 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
GS : Hellman Unit : GS (mm) AC : Jeanty Unit : AC (mm)

Age (Week) Jeanty : Radiology Age (Day)
( SD: Standard Deviation ) SD (Week) 143 : 513,1982 SD (mm)
GS Age SD GS Age SD AC Age SD AC Age SD
<10 n/a ––––– 36 8.8 ± 1.0
<50 n/a ––––– 185 169 22
10 5.0 ± 1.0 37 8.9 ± 1.0
50 79 22 190 172 22
11 5.2 ± 1.0 38 9.0 ± 1.0
55 82 22 195 176 22
12 5.3 ± 1.0 39 9.2 ± 1.0
13 5.5 ± 1.0 40 9.3 ± 1.0 60 85 22 200 179 22

14 5.6 ± 1.0 41 9.5 ± 1.0 65 89 22 205 182 22
15 5.8 ± 1.0 42 9.6 ± 1.0 70 92 22 210 186 22
16 5.9 ± 1.0 43 9.7 ± 1.0
75 95 22 215 189 22
17 6.0 ± 1.0 44 9.9 ± 1.0
80 99 22 220 192 22
18 6.2 ± 1.0 45 10.0 ± 1.0
85 102 22 225 196 22
19 6.3 ± 1.0 46 10.2 ± 1.0
20 6.5 ± 1.0 47 10.3 ± 1.0 90 105 22 230 199 22

21 6.6 ± 1.0 48 10.5 ± 1.0 95 109 22 235 203 22
22 6.8 ± 1.0 49 10.6 ± 1.0 100 112 22 240 206 22
23 6.9 ± 1.0 50 10.7 ± 1.0
105 115 22 245 210 22
24 7.0 ± 1.0 51 10.9 ± 1.0
110 119 22 250 214 22
25 7.2 ± 1.0 52 11.0 ± 1.0
26 7.3 ± 1.0 53 11.2 ± 1.0

115 122 22 255 218 22
27 7.5 ± 1.0 54 11.3 ± 1.0 120 125 22 260 222 22

28 7.6 ± 1.0 55 11.5 ± 1.0 125 129 22 265 226 22
29 7.8 ± 1.0 56 11.6 ± 1.0 130 132 22 270 230 22
30 7.9 ± 1.0 57 11.7 ± 1.0
135 135 22 275 234 22
31 8.0 ± 1.0 58 11.9 ± 1.0
140 139 22 280 239 22
32 8.2 ± 1.0 59 12.0 ± 1.0
33 8.3 ± 1.0 60 12.2 ± 1.0

145 142 22 285 244 22
34 8.5 ± 1.0 >60 n/a ––––– 150 146 22 290 249 22

35 8.6 ± 1.0 155 149 22 295 254 22
Table 21. GS : Hellman 160 152 22 300 259 22

165 156 22 305 265 22
170 159 22 310 272 22
175 162 22 315 279 22
180 166 22 >315 n/a –––––
Table 22. AC : Jeanty
t
OB Tables F–15
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
BD : Jeanty Unit : BD (mm) BPD : Jeanty Unit : BPD (mm)

Jeanty : Radiology Age (Day) Jeanty : Radiology Age (Day)
143 : 513,1982 SD (mm) 143 : 513,1982 SD (mm)
BD Age SD BD Age SD BPD Age SD BPD Age SD BPD Age SD
<15 n/a ––––– 41 181 0 <10 n/a ––– 39 119 3 69 187 5
10 64 3 40 121 3 70 189 5
15 73 0 42 185 0
11 65 3 41 123 3 71 192 5
16 77 0 43 189 0
12 67 3 42 125 3 72 195 5
17 81 0 44 193 0
13 69 3 43 127 3 73 198 5
18 85 0 45 197 0
14 71 3 44 129 3 74 201 5
19 89 0 46 201 0
15 73 3 45 131 3 75 204 5
20 93 0 47 206 0
16 75 3 46 133 3 76 206 5
21 97 0 48 210 0 17 77 3 47 135 3 77 209 5
22 102 0 49 214 0 18 79 3 48 137 3 78 212 5
23 106 0 50 218 0 19 81 3 49 139 4 79 215 5
24 110 0 51 222 0 20 83 3 50 141 4 80 218 5
25 114 0 52 226 0 21 85 3 51 143 4 81 221 5
26 118 0 53 231 0 22 87 3 52 146 4 82 224 5
23 89 3 53 148 4 83 227 5
27 122 0 54 235 0
24 90 3 54 151 4 84 230 5
28 127 0 55 239 0
25 92 3 55 153 4 85 234 5
29 131 0 56 243 0
26 94 3 56 155 4 86 237 5
30 135 0 57 247 0
27 96 3 57 158 4 87 240 5
31 139 0 58 251 0
28 98 3 58 160 4 88 244 5
32 143 0 59 256 0
29 100 3 59 163 4 89 247 5
33 147 0 60 260 0
30 102 3 60 165 4 90 251 5
34 152 0 61 264 0 31 104 3 61 167 4 91 254 5
35 156 0 62 268 0 32 106 3 62 170 4 92 257 5
36 160 0 63 272 0 33 108 3 63 172 4 93 261 5
37 164 0 64 276 0 34 110 3 64 175 4 94 264 5
38 168 0 65 281 0 35 112 3 65 177 4 95 268 5
39 172 0 >65 n/a ––––– 36 114 3 66 179 4 >95 n/a –––
37 115 3 67 182 4
40 177 0
38 117 3 68 184 4
Table 23. BD : Jeanty
Table 24. BPD : Jeanty
OB Tables F–16 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
CRL : Jeanty Unit : CRL (mm) FL : Jeanty Unit : CRL (mm)

Jeanty : Radiology Age (Day) Jeanty : Radiology Age (Day)
143 : 513,1982 SD (mm) 143 : 513,1982 SD (mm)
CRL Age SD CRL Age SD FL Age SD FL Age SD FL Age SD
<10 n/a ––– 34 146 5 59 215 5

<5 n/a ––––– 30 69 7
10 88 4 35 149 5 60 218 5
5 44 4 31 70 7
11 90 4 36 152 5 61 221 5
6 45 4 32 70 7
12 92 4 37 154 5 62 224 5
7 46 4 33 71 7 13 95 4 38 157 5 63 227 5
8 48 4 34 72 7 14 97 4 39 160 5 64 230 5
9 50 4 35 73 7 15 100 4 40 162 5 65 233 5
16 102 4 41 165 5 66 236 5

10 51 4 36 73 7
17 104 4 42 168 5 67 239 5
11 52 4 37 74 7
18 107 4 43 170 5 68 242 5
12 53 4 38 75 7
19 109 4 44 173 5 69 245 5
13 54 4 39 76 7 20 112 4 45 176 5 70 248 5
14 55 4 40 76 7 21 114 4 46 178 5 71 251 5
15 56 5 41 76 7 22 116 4 47 181 5 72 254 5
23 119 4 48 184 5 73 257 5

16 57 5 42 77 7
24 121 4 49 186 5 74 260 5
17 58 5 43 77 7
25 124 4 50 189 5 75 263 5
18 59 5 44 78 7
26 126 4 51 192 5 76 266 5
19 60 5 45 79 7 27 128 4 52 194 5 77 270 5
20 61 5 46 79 7 28 131 4 53 197 5 78 274 5
21 62 6 47 80 7 29 133 4 54 200 5 79 277 5
30 136 5 55 203 5 80 280 5

22 63 6 48 81 7
31 138 5 56 206 5 >80 n/a –––
23 64 6 49 81 7
32 141 5 57 209 5
24 65 6 50 82 7
33 144 5 58 212 5
25 66 6 51 83 7
26 67 7 52 83 7 Table 26. FL : Jeanty
27 67 7 53 84 7
28 67 7 54 85 7
29 68 7 >54 n/a –––––
Table 25. CRL : Jeanty
t
OB Tables F–17
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
HC : Jeanty Unit : HC (mm) BPD : Kurtz Unit : BPD (mm)

Jeanty : Radiology Age (Day) Age (Day)
143 : 513,1982 SD (mm) SD (mm)
HC Age SD HC Age SD BPD Age SD BPD Age SD BPD Age SD
<80 n/a ––––– 225 169 22 <21 n/a ––– 47 139 4 74 204 5
80 93 15 230 173 22 21 84 4 48 141 4 75 207 5
85 95 16 235 176 22 22 87 4 49 143 4 76 210 5
90 98 18 240 180 22 23 91 4 50 145 4 77 213 5
95 100 18 245 184 22 24 93 4 51 147 4 78 216 5
100 102 18 250 188 22 25 95 4 52 149 4 79 219 5

105 104 18 255 192 22
26 97 4 53 151 4 80 222 5
110 107 18 260 196 22
27 99 4 54 153 4 81 225 5
115 109 18 265 200 22
28 101 4 55 155 5 82 229 5
120 111 18 270 204 22
29 103 4 56 157 5 83 232 5
125 114 18 275 208 22
30 105 4 57 160 5 84 235 5
130 116 18 280 213 22
31 107 4 58 162 5 85 238 5
135 119 19 285 217 22
140 121 19 290 221 22 32 109 4 59 165 5 86 241 5
145 124 19 295 225 22 33 111 4 60 168 5 87 244 5
150 126 19 300 230 22 34 113 4 61 170 5 88 248 5
155 129 19 305 235 22 35 115 4 62 173 5 89 252 5
160 131 20 310 240 22 36 117 4 63 175 5 90 257 5
165 134 20 315 245 22 37 119 4 64 178 5 91 262 5
170 136 20 320 250 22 38 121 4 65 181 5 92 267 5

175 139 20 325 255 22
39 123 4 66 183 5 93 272 5
180 141 20 330 260 22
40 125 4 67 186 5 94 276 5
185 144 21 335 265 22
41 127 4 68 188 5 95 280 5
190 146 21 340 270 22
42 129 4 69 191 5 96 284 5
195 149 21 345 275 22
43 131 4 70 194 5 97 288 5
200 151 21 350 281 22
44 133 4 71 196 5 98 293 5
205 154 22 355 286 22
210 157 22 360 292 22 45 135 4 72 199 5 >98 n/a –––
215 161 22 >360 n/a ––––– 46 137 4 73 201 5
220 165 22
Table 28. BPD : Kurtz
Table 27. HC : Jeanty
OB Tables F–18 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
CRL : Nelson Unit : CRL (mm) BPD : Osaka Unit : BPD (mm)
Age (Day) Age (Day)
SD (mm) SD (mm)
CRL Age SD CRL Age SD CRL Age SD BPD Age SD BPD Age SD BPD Age SD
<3 n/a ––– 27 67 5 52 82 7 <13 n/a ––– 40 122 2.6 68 185 3.3
3 53 4 28 67 5 53 82 7
13 70 1.9 41 124 2.7 69 187 3.3
4 53 4 29 68 5 54 83 7
14 71 1.9 42 126 2.7 70 190 3.4
5 54 4 30 69 5 55 84 7
15 73 1.9 43 128 2.7 71 193 3.4
6 54 4 31 69 6 56 84 7
16 75 1.9 44 130 2.7 72 195 3.4
7 55 4 32 70 6 57 85 7
8 55 4 33 70 6 58 85 7 17 77 2.0 45 132 2.8 73 198 3.4
9 56 4 34 71 6 59 86 7 18 78 2.0 46 135 2.8 74 200 3.5
10 57 4 35 72 6 60 87 7 19 80 2.0 47 137 2.8 75 203 3.5

11 57 4 36 72 6 61 87 7
20 82 2.1 48 139 2.8 76 206 3.5
12 58 4 37 73 6 62 88 7
21 84 2.1 49 141 2.9 77 209 3.5
13 58 4 38 73 6 63 88 7
22 86 2.1 50 143 2.9 78 212 3.5
14 59 4 39 74 6 64 89 7
15 60 4 40 75 6 65 90 7 23 88 2.1 51 145 2.9 79 214 3.6
16 60 4 41 75 6 66 90 7 24 90 2.2 52 148 2.9 80 217 3.6
17 61 5 42 76 6 67 91 7 25 92 2.2 53 150 3.0 81 220 3.6
18 61 5 43 76 6 68 91 7
26 94 2.2 54 152 3.0 82 224 3.6
19 62 5 44 77 6 69 92 7
27 96 2.3 55 154 3.0 83 227 3.6
20 63 5 45 78 7 70 93 7
28 98 2.3 56 157 3.0 84 230 3.7
21 63 5 46 78 7 71 93 7
29 99 2.3 57 159 3.1 85 234 3.7
22 64 5 47 79 7 72 94 7
23 64 5 48 79 7 73 95 7 30 101 2.3 58 161 3.1 86 237 3.7
24 65 5 49 80 7 >73 n/a ––– 31 103 2.4 59 164 3.1 87 238 3.7
25 66 5 50 81 7 32 105 2.4 60 166 3.1 88 245 3.7
26 66 5 51 81 7 33 107 2.4 61 168 3.2 89 249 3.8
34 109 2.5 62 171 3.2 90 254 3.8

Table 29. CRL : Nelson
35 112 2.5 63 173 3.2 91 259 3.8
36 114 2.5 64 175 3.2 92 265 3.8
37 116 2.5 65 178 3.3 93 273 3.9
38 118 2.6 66 180 3.3 94 280 3.9
39 120 2.6 67 182 3.3 >94 n/a –––
Table 30. BPD : Osaka
t
OB Tables F–19
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
CRL : Osaka Unit : CRL (mm) EFBW : Osaka Unit : EFBW (gram)
Age (Day) Age (Day)
SD (mm) SD (gram)
CRL Age SD CRL Age SD CRL Age SD EFBW Age SD EFBW Age SD EFBW Age SD
<9 n/a ––– 27 68 4.5 46 80 6.3 <137 n/a ––– 430 148 61 780 171 102
9 50 1.7 28 69 4.6 47 80 6.3 137 112 29 440 149 63 800 173 106
10 52 2.0 29 69 4.6 48 81 6.4 140 113 29 450 149 63 820 174 108
11 53 2.2 30 70 4.8 49 82 6.6 150 115 29 460 150 65 840 175 110
12 55 2.5 31 71 4.9 50 83 6.7 160 116 30 470 151 66 860 176 112
13 56 2.6 32 71 4.9 51 83 6.7 170 118 30 480 152 68 880 177 114
14 57 2.8 33 72 5.1 52 83 6.7 180 120 31 490 153 69 900 178 116
15 58 2.9 34 73 5.2 53 84 6.9 190 121 32 500 153 69 920 179 118
16 59 3.1 35 73 5.2 54 85 7.0 200 123 33 510 154 71 940 180 120
17 60 3.2 36 74 5.4 55 85 7.0 210 124 34 520 155 73 960 181 123
18 61 3.4 37 74 5.4 56 86 7.2 220 126 35 530 155 73 980 182 125
19 62 3.5 38 75 5.5 57 86 7.2 230 127 36 540 156 74 1000 183 127
20 63 3.7 39 76 5.7 58 87 7.3 240 128 37 550 157 76 1020 185 131
21 63 3.7 40 76 5.7 59 87 7.3 250 130 39 560 157 76 1040 186 133
22 64 3.8 41 77 5.8 60 88 7.5
260 131 40 570 158 78 1060 187 135
23 65 4.0 42 77 5.8 61 89 7.6
270 132 41 580 159 80 1080 188 138
24 66 4.1 43 78 6.0 62 89 7.6
280 133 42 590 160 81 1100 189 140
25 66 4.1 44 79 6.1 63 90 7.8
290 134 43 600 160 81 1120 190 142
26 67 4.3 45 79 6.1 >63 n/a –––
300 135 44 610 161 83 1140 191 144
Table 31. CRL : Osaka 310 136 45 620 162 85 1160 192 146
320 137 46 630 162 85 1180 193 149
330 138 48 640 163 87 1200 194 151
340 139 49 650 164 89 1220 195 153
350 140 50 660 164 89 1240 195 153
360 141 51 670 165 91 1260 196 155
370 142 53 680 165 91 1280 197 158
380 143 54 690 166 92 1300 198 160
390 144 56 700 167 94 1320 199 162
400 145 57 720 168 96 1340 200 164
410 146 58 740 169 98 1360 201 167
420 147 60 760 170 100 1380 202 169
Table 32. EFBW : Osaka
OB Tables F–20 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
EFBW : Osaka (cont’d) Unit : FL : Osaka Unit : FL (mm)

EFBW (gram) Age (Day)
Age (Day) SD (mm)
SD (gram)
EFBW Age SD EFBW Age SD EFBW Age SD FL Age SD FL Age SD FL Age SD
1400 203 171 2020 229 234 2640 254 302 <9 n/a ––– 30 140 2.4 52 202 2.6
1420 203 171 2040 229 234 2660 254 302 9 91 2.1 31 142 2.4 53 205 2.8
1440 204 174 2060 230 237 2680 255 305 10 93 2.1 32 145 2.4 54 209 2.8
1460 205 176 2080 231 239 2700 256 308 11 95 2.1 33 147 2.4 55 212 2.8
1480 206 178 2100 232 242 2720 257 311 12 97 2.2 34 150 2.4 56 216 2.8
1500 207 181 2120 233 244 2740 258 314 13 99 2.2 35 152 2.5 57 220 2.8
1520 208 183 2140 233 244 2760 259 317 14 102 2.2 36 155 2.5 58 223 2.9
1540 209 185 2160 234 247 2780 259 317 15 104 2.2 37 158 2.5 59 227 2.9
1560 210 188 2180 235 250 2800 260 320 16 106 2.2 38 162 2.5 60 230 2.9
1580 210 188 2200 236 252 2820 261 323 17 108 2.2 39 163 2.5 61 235 2.9
1600 211 190 2220 236 252 2840 262 326 18 110 2.2 40 166 2.5 62 239 2.9
1620 212 192 2240 237 255 2860 263 329
19 113 2.2 41 169 2.6 63 242 3.0
1640 213 195 2260 238 257 2880 264 332
20 115 2.3 42 172 2.6 64 247 3.0
1660 214 197 2280 239 260 2900 265 335
21 118 2.3 43 175 2.6 65 250 3.0
1680 215 200 2300 240 263 2920 266 339
22 120 2.3 44 178 2.6 66 255 3.0
1700 216 202 2320 241 265 2940 266 339
23 122 2.3 45 181 2.6 67 258 3.0
1720 216 202 2340 241 265 2960 267 342
24 125 2.3 46 184 2.6 68 260 3.1
1740 217 204 2360 242 268 2980 268 345
25 127 2.3 47 186 2.6 69 269 3.1
1760 218 207 2380 243 271 3000 269 348
26 130 2.3 48 190 2.7 70 274 3.1
1780 219 209 2400 244 274 3020 270 352
27 132 2.3 49 193 2.7 71 279 3.2
1800 220 212 2420 245 276 3040 271 355
28 135 2.4 50 196 2.7 >71 n/a –––
1820 220 212 2440 245 276 3060 272 358
29 137 2.4 51 199 2.7
1840 221 214 2460 246 279 3080 273 362
1860 222 217 2480 247 282 3100 274 365 Table 33. FL : Osaka
1880 223 219 2500 248 285 3120 275 369
1900 224 222 2520 249 288 3140 276 372
1920 224 222 2540 249 288 3160 277 376
1940 225 224 2560 250 290 3180 278 379
1960 226 227 2580 251 293 3200 279 383
1980 227 229 2600 252 296 3220 280 387
2000 228 232 2620 253 299 >3220 n/a –––
Table 32. EFBW : Osaka (cont’d)
t
OB Tables F–21
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
FTA : Osaka Unit : FTA (mm2) HL : Osaka Unit : HL (mm)

Age (Day) Age (Day)
SD (mm2) SD (mm)
FTA Age SD FTA Age SD FTA Age SD
HL Age SD HL Age SD
<560 n/a ––– 3300 175 400 6200 231 710
<10 n/a ––––– 37 164 2.4
560 98 120 3400 177 410 6300 233 720
10 91 2.0 38 167 2.4
600 100 120 3500 179 420 6400 235 730
11 93 2.0 39 170 2.4
700 103 130 3600 181 430 6500 237 750
12 96 2.0 40 174 2.4
800 108 150 3700 183 440 6600 238 750
13 98 2.1 41 178 2.4
900 113 160 3800 185 450 6700 240 760
14 100 2.1 42 182 2.5
1000 115 170 3900 187 460 6800 242 780
15 103 2.1 43 185 2.5
1100 117 170 4000 189 470 6900 244 790
16 105 2.1 44 188 2.5
1200 122 190 4100 191 480 7000 246 800
17 108 2.1 45 192 2.5
1300 125 200 4200 193 490 7100 248 820
18 110 2.1 46 196 2.5
1400 128 210 4300 195 500 7200 250 830
19 113 2.1 47 200 2.5
1500 130 220 4400 197 510 7300 252 840
20 115 2.1 48 204 2.6
1600 134 230 4500 199 520 7400 254 860
21 117 2.1 49 208 2.6
1700 137 240 4600 201 530 7500 256 870
22 121 2.2 50 213 2.6
1800 139 250 4700 203 540 7600 258 880
23 123 2.2 51 217 2.6
1900 142 260 4800 205 560 7700 260 900
24 126 2.2 52 222 2.6
2000 145 270 4900 207 570 7800 262 910
25 129 2.2 53 227 2.7
2100 147 280 5000 209 580 7900 264 930
26 132 2.2 54 232 2.7
2200 150 290 5100 211 590 8000 265 930
27 134 2.2 55 237 2.7
2300 152 300 5200 213 600 8100 268 960
28 137 2.2 56 242 2.7
2400 155 310 5300 215 610 8200 270 970
29 140 2.3 57 248 2.8
2500 157 330 5400 216 620 8300 273 990
30 143 2.3 58 254 2.8
2600 159 330 5500 218 630 8400 274 100
0 31 145 2.3 59 260 2.8
2700 162 340 5600 220 640 8500 276 101
0 32 149 2.3 60 267 2.9
2800 164 350 5700 222 650 8600 279 104
0 33 151 2.3 61 275 2.9
2900 166 360 5800 224 670 8660 280 104
0 34 155 2.3 62 280 2.9
3000 168 370 5900 226 680 >8660 n/a –––
35 158 2.3 >62 n/a –––––
3100 170 380 6000 227 680
36 161 2.4
3200 173 390 6100 229 700
Table 35. HL : Osaka
Table 34. FTA : Osaka
OB Tables F–22 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
BPD : Paris Unit : BPD (mm) CRL : Paris Unit : CRL (mm)
Age (Day) Age (Day)
SD (mm) SD (mm)
BPD Age SD BPD Age SD BPD SD Age CRL Age SD CRL Age SD CRL Age SD
<13 n/a ––– 39 123 3 66 187 4 <5 n/a ––– 32 70 7 60 86 7
13 77 3 40 126 4 67 189 4 5 42 4 33 70 7 61 87 7
14 78 3 41 128 4 68 192 4 6 43 4 34 71 7 62 87 7
15 79 3 42 130 4 69 194 4 7 44 4 35 71 7 63 88 7
16 80 3 43 133 4 70 197 4 8 46 4 36 72 7 64 88 7
17 81 3 44 135 4 71 199 4 9 47 4 37 73 7 65 89 7
18 82 3 45 137 4 72 202 4 10 49 4 38 73 7 66 89 7
19 83 3 46 140 4 73 204 4 11 50 4 39 74 7 67 90 7
20 84 3 47 142 4 74 207 4 12 51 4 40 74 7 68 90 7
21 85 3 48 144 4 75 210 5 13 52 4 41 75 7 69 91 7
22 87 3 49 147 4 76 213 5 14 53 4 42 76 7 70 91 7
23 89 3 50 149 4 77 217 5 15 54 4 43 76 7 71 91 7
24 91 3 51 151 4 78 220 5 16 55 5 44 77 7 72 92 7
25 93 3 52 154 4 79 224 5 17 56 5 45 77 7 73 92 7
26 95 3 53 156 4 80 227 5 18 57 5 46 78 7 74 93 7
27 97 3 54 158 4 81 231 5 19 58 6 47 79 7 75 93 7
28 100 3 55 161 4 82 234 5 20 59 6 48 79 7 76 94 7
29 102 3 56 163 4 83 238 5 21 60 6 49 80 7 77 94 7
30 104 3 57 165 4 84 242 5 22 61 6 50 80 7 78 94 7
31 106 3 58 168 4 85 247 5 23 63 6 51 81 7 79 95 7
32 108 3 59 170 4 86 252 5 24 63 7 52 82 7 80 95 7
33 110 3 60 172 4 87 256 5 25 64 7 53 82 7 81 96 7
34 113 3 61 175 4 88 261 5 26 65 7 54 83 7 82 96 7
35 115 3 62 177 4 89 266 5 27 66 7 55 84 7 83 97 7
36 117 3 63 179 4 90 287 5 28 66 7 56 84 7 84 97 7
37 119 3 64 182 4 >90 n/a ––– 29 67 7 57 85 7 85 98 7
38 121 3 65 184 4 30 68 7 58 85 7 >85 n/a –––
31 69 7 59 86 7
Table 36. BPD : Paris
Table 37. CRL : Paris
t
OB Tables F–23
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
FL : Paris Unit : FL (mm) Ft : Paris Unit : Ft (mm)

Age (Day) Age (Day)
SD (mm) SD (mm)
FL Age SD FL Age SD FL Age SD FT Age SD FT Age SD FT Age SD
<15 n/a ––– 36 150 5 58 213 5 <13 n/a ––– 34 144 4 56 199 4
15 98 4 37 153 5 59 217 5 13 91 2 35 147 4 57 202 4
16 100 4 38 156 5 60 219 5 14 94 2 36 149 4 58 205 4
17 102 4 39 159 5 61 221 5 15 97 2 37 151 4 59 208 4
18 105 4 40 161 5 62 224 5 16 100 2 38 154 4 60 211 4
19 107 4 41 164 5 63 231 5 17 103 3 39 156 4 61 215 4

20 109 4 42 167 5 64 234 5 18 106 3 40 158 4 62 218 4
21 112 4 43 170 5 65 238 5
19 109 3 41 161 4 63 221 4
22 114 4 44 172 5 66 241 5
20 112 4 42 163 4 64 224 4
23 116 4 45 175 5 67 245 5
21 114 4 43 165 4 65 227 4
24 119 4 46 178 5 68 248 5
22 116 4 44 168 4 66 231 5
25 121 4 47 181 5 69 252 5
23 119 4 45 170 4 67 234 5
26 123 4 48 183 5 70 255 5
24 121 4 46 173 4 68 238 5
27 126 5 49 186 5 71 259 5
25 123 4 47 175 4 69 242 5
28 128 5 50 189 5 72 262 5
26 126 4 48 178 4 70 246 5
29 131 5 51 192 5 73 266 5
27 128 4 49 180 4 71 250 5
30 134 5 52 194 5 74 271 5
28 130 4 50 183 4 72 254 5
31 137 5 53 197 5 75 276 5
29 133 4 51 185 4 73 258 5
32 139 5 54 200 5 76 281 5
30 135 4 52 188 4 74 262 5
33 142 5 55 203 5 77 287 5
31 137 4 53 190 4 75 266 6
34 145 5 56 206 5 >77 n/a –––
32 140 4 54 193 4 >75 n/a –––
35 148 5 57 210 5
33 142 4 55 196 4
Table 38. FL : Paris

Table 39. Ft : Paris
OB Tables F–24 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
TAD : Paris Unit : TAD (mm) BPD : Rempen Unit : GS (mm)

Age (Day) Age (Weeks/Days) 2SD (mm or day)
SD (mm)
TAD Age SD TAD Age SD TAD Age SD 2SD = mm 2SD = day
<10 n/a ––– 39 131 0 69 207 0
CRL Age 2SD CRL Age 2SD
10 84 0 40 133 0 70 209 0 <2 n/a ––– <3 n/a –––
2 6W2D 4 3 6W6D 8
11 84 0 41 136 0 71 212 0
3 6W4D 4 4 7W1D 8
12 85 0 42 138 0 72 214 0 4 6W6D 4 5 7W3D 8
13 86 0 43 141 0 73 217 0 5 7W1D 4 6 7W5D 8

6 7W4D 4 7 8W0D 8
14 87 0 44 143 0 74 219 0
7 7W6D 4 8 8W2D 8
15 87 0 45 146 0 75 222 0 8 8W1D 4 9 8W4D 8
9 8W3D 4 10 8W6D 8
16 88 0 46 148 0 76 224 0
10 8W5D 4 11 9W1D 8
17 89 0 47 151 0 77 227 0
11 9W1D 4 12 9W3D 8
18 90 0 48 153 0 78 229 0 12 9W3D 4 13 9W5D 8
13 9W5D 4 14 10W0D 8
19 91 0 49 156 0 79 232 0
14 10W0D 4 15 10W2D 8
20 92 0 50 158 0 80 234 0 15 10W2D 4 16 10W4D 8
21 94 0 51 161 0 81 237 0 16 10W5D 4 17 10W6D 8

17 11W0D 4 18 11W1D 8
22 96 0 52 163 0 82 239 0
18 11W2D 4 19 11W3D 8
23 98 0 53 166 0 83 242 0 19 11W5D 4 20 11W5D 8
20 12W0D 4 21 12W0D 8
24 100 0 54 169 0 84 245 0
21 12W2D 4 22 12W2D 8
25 102 0 55 171 0 85 248 0 22 12W4D 4 23 12W4D 8
26 104 0 56 174 0 86 252 0 23 13W0D 4 24 12W6D 8

24 13W2D 4 25 13W1D 8
27 106 0 57 176 0 87 255 0
>24 na – 26 13W3D 8
28 108 0 58 179 0 88 259 0 27 13W5D 8
>27 na –
29 110 0 59 181 0 89 262 0
30 112 0 60 184 0 90 266 0
31 114 0 61 186 0 91 269 0
32 116 0 62 189 0 92 273 0
33 118 0 63 191 0 93 276 0
34 120 0 64 194 0 94 280 0
35 122 0 65 196 0 95 283 0
36 124 0 66 199 0 96 287 0
37 126 0 67 201 0 >96 n/a –––
38 128 0 68 204 0
Table 40. TAD : Paris

Table 41. BPD : Rempen
Known LMP (left)—Unknown LMP (right)
t
OB Tables F–25
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
CRL : Rempen
Unit : GS (mm) Age (Weeks/Days) 2SD (mm or day)
2SD = mm 2SD = day
CRL Age 2SD CRL Age 2SD CRL Age 2SD CRL Age 2SD
<1 n/a ––– 45 11W2D 8 <2 n/a ––– 46 11W2D 7
1 5W5D 8 46 11W2D 8 2 6W0D 6 47 11W2D 7
2 5W6D 8 47 11W3D 8 3 6W1D 6 48 11W3D 6
3 6W0D 8 48 11W4D 8 4 6W2D 6 49 11W4D 7
4 6W1D 8 49 11W4D 8 5 6W3D 6 50 11W4D 6
5 6W2D 8 50 11W5D 8 6 6W4D 6 51 11W5D 6
6 6W3D 8 51 11W6D 8 7 6W5D 6 52 11W5D 7
7 6W4D 8 52 12W0D 8 8 6W6D 6 53 11W6D 6
8 6W6D 8 53 12W0D 8 9 7W0D 6 54 12W0D 7
9 6W6D 8 54 12W1D 8 10 7W1D 6 55 12W0D 7
10 7W0D 8 55 12W2D 8 11 7W2D 6 56 12W1D 6
11 7W2D 8 56 12W2D 8 12 7W3D 6 57 12W1D 7
12 7W2D 8 57 12W3D 8 13 7W4D 7 58 12W2D 6
13 7W4D 8 58 12W3D 8 14 7W5D 7 59 12W3D 7
14 7W4D 8 59 12W4D 8 15 7W6D 7 60 12W3D 6
15 7W5D 8 60 12W5D 8 16 7W6D 7 61 12W4D 7
16 7W6D 8 61 12W5D 8 17 8W0D 7 62 12W4D 6
17 8W0D 8 62 12W6D 8 18 8W1D 6 63 12W5D 7
18 8W1D 8 63 13W0D 8 19 8W2D 6 64 12W5D 7
19 8W2D 8 64 13W0D 8 20 8W3D 6 65 12W6D 6
20 8W3D 8 65 13W1D 8 21 8W4D 7 66 12W6D 7
21 8W4D 8 66 13W2D 8 22 8W5D 7 67 13W0D 6
22 8W5D 8 >66 n/a ––– 23 8W5D 7 68 13W0D 7
23 8W6D 8 24 8W6D 7 69 13W1D 6
24 8W6D 8 25 9W0D 6 70 13W1D 7
25 9W0D 8 26 9W1D 6 71 13W2D 7
26 9W1D 8 27 9W2D 7 72 13W2D 6
27 9W2D 8 28 9W3D 7 73 13W3D 7
28 9W3D 8 29 9W3D 7 74 13W3D 6
29 9W4D 8 30 9W4D 7 75 13W4D 7
30 9W4D 8 31 9W5D 7 76 13W4D 6
31 9W5D 8 32 9W6D 7 77 13W4D 7
32 9W6D 8 33 9W6D 7 78 13W5D 6
33 10W0D 8 34 10W0D 6 >78 n/a –––
34 10W1D 8 35 10W1D 6
35 10W1D 8 36 10W2D 7
36 10W2D 8 37 10W2D 7
37 10W3D 8 38 10W3D 6
38 10W4D 8 39 10W4D 6
39 10W4D 8 40 10W5D 7
40 10W5D 8 41 10W5D 7
41 10W6D 8 42 10W6D 6
42 11W0D 8 43 11W0D 7
43 11W0D 8 44 11W0D 7
44 11W1D 8 45 11W1D 6
Table 42. CRL : Rempen—Known LMP (left)—Unknown LMP (right)
OB Tables F–26 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
GS : Rempen
Unit : GS (mm) Age (Weeks/Days) 2SD (mm or day)
2SD = mm 2SD = day
GS Age 2SD GS Age 2SD GS Age 2SD GS Age 2SD

<1 n/a ––– 45 10W2D 11 <1 n/a ––– 45 10W0D 10
1 4W4D 11 46 10W3D 11 1 4W5D 10 46 10W1D 10
2 4W5D 11 47 10W4D 11 2 4W6D 10 47 10W2D 10
3 4W6D 11 48 10W6D 11 3 5W0D 10 48 10W3D 10
4 5W0D 11 49 11W0D 11 4 5W1D 10 49 10W4D 10
5 5W0D 11 50 11W1D 11 5 5W2D 10 50 10W5D 10
6 5W1D 11 51 11W2D 11 6 5W2D 10 51 10W6D 10
7 5W2D 11 52 11W4D 11 7 5W3D 10 52 11W0D 10
8 5W3D 11 53 11W5D 11 8 5W4D 10 53 11W1D 10
9 5W3D 11 54 12W0D 11 9 5W5D 10 54 11W2D 10
10 5W4D 11 55 12W1D 11 10 5W5D 10 55 11W3D 10
11 5W5D 11 56 12W2D 11 11 5W6D 10 56 11W4D 10
12 5W6D 11 57 12W4D 11 12 6W0D 10 57 11W5D 10
13 6W0D 11 58 12W5D 11 13 6W1D 10 58 11W6D 10
14 6W0D 11 59 13W0D 11 14 6W2D 10 59 12W0D 10
15 6W1D 11 60 13W1D 11 15 6W2D 10 60 12W1D 10
16 6W2D 11 >60 n/a ––– 16 6W3D 10 61 12W2D 10
17 6W3D 11 17 6W4D 10 62 12W3D 10
18 6W4D 11 18 6W5D 10 63 12W4D 10
19 6W5D 11 19 6W6D 10 64 12W5D 10
20 6W6D 11 20 6W6D 10 65 12W6D 10
21 6W6D 11 21 7W0D 10 66 13W0D 10
22 7W0D 11 22 7W1D 10 67 13W1D 10
23 7W1D 11 23 7W2D 10 68 13W2D 10
24 7W2D 11 24 7W3D 10 69 13W3D 10
25 7W3D 11 25 7W4D 10 70 13W4D 10
26 7W4D 11 26 7W4D 10 71 13W5D 10
27 7W5D 11 27 7W5D 10 72 14W0D 10
28 7W6D 11 28 7W6D 10 73 14W1D 10
29 8W0D 11 29 8W0D 10 >73 n/a –––
30 8W0D 11 30 8W1D 10
31 8W1D 11 31 8W2D 10
32 8W2D 11 32 8W3D 10
33 8W3D 11 33 8W3D 10
34 8W4D 11 34 8W4D 10
35 8W5D 11 35 8W5D 10
36 8W6D 11 36 8W6D 10
37 9W0D 11 37 9W0D 10
38 9W1D 11 38 9W1D 10
39 9W2D 11 39 9W2D 10
40 9W4D 11 40 9W3D 10
41 9W5D 11 41 9W4D 10
42 9W6D 11 42 9W5D 10
43 10W0D 11 43 9W6D 10
44 10W1D 11 44 9W6D 10
Table 43. GS : Rempen—Known LMP (left)—Unknown LMP (right)
t
OB Tables F–27
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
CRL : Robinson Unit : CRL (mm) AC : Sostoa Unit : AC (mm)

Robinson : Age (Day) Sostoa : Hospital Age (Day)
Robinson and AI SD (mm) de la Santa Cruzy San SD (mm)
BrJGynecol,82 Pablo, serviejo de
702, 1975 obst.ygynecol
CRL Age SD CRL Age SD CRL Age SD AC Age SD AC Age SD
<7 n/a ––– 32 69 7 58 85 7
<70 n/a ––––– 210 180 22
7 45 4 33 70 7 59 85 7
70 98 22 215 184 22
8 46 4 34 70 7 60 86 7
9 47 4 35 71 7 61 86 7
75 101 22 220 187 22
10 48 4 36 72 7 62 87 7 80 105 22 225 190 22
11 50 4 37 72 7 63 88 7 85 107 22 230 194 22
12 52 4 38 73 7 64 89 7
90 109 22 235 197 22
13 53 4 39 74 7 65 90 7
95 110 22 240 200 22
14 54 4 40 74 7 66 90 7
100 113 22 245 204 22
15 55 4 41 75 7 67 90 7
16 56 4 42 75 7 68 91 7 105 116 22 250 207 22

17 57 4 43 76 7 69 91 7 110 119 22 255 210 22
18 58 4 44 77 7 70 91 7 115 123 22 260 214 22
19 59 4 45 77 7 71 92 7
120 126 22 265 217 22
20 60 4 46 78 7 72 92 7
125 129 22 270 220 22
21 60 4 47 79 7 73 93 7
22 61 4 48 79 7 74 93 7
130 132 22 275 223 22
23 62 4 49 80 7 75 93 7 135 136 22 280 229 22
24 63 5 50 81 7 76 94 7 140 139 22 285 233 22
25 64 5 51 82 7 77 94 7
145 141 22 290 236 22
26 64 5 52 83 7 78 95 7
150 143 22 295 239 22
27 65 5 53 83 7 79 95 7
155 145 22 300 242 22
28 66 6 54 83 7 80 96 7
29 67 6 55 84 7 81 97 7 160 147 22 305 245 22

30 68 6 56 84 7 82 98 7 165 150 22 310 248 22
31 69 7 57 84 7 >82 n/a ––– 170 153 22 315 251 22
Table 44. CRL : Robinson 175 157 22 320 256 22
180 160 22 325 261 22
185 163 22 330 266 22
190 167 22 335 271 22
195 170 22 340 276 22
200 173 22 344 280 22
205 177 22 >344 n/a –––––
Table 45. AC : Sostoa
OB Tables F–28 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
BD : Sostoa Unit : BD (mm) BPD : Sostoa Unit : BPD (mm)

Sostoa : Hospital Age (Day) Sostoa : Hospital Age (Day)
de la Santa Cruzy San SD (mm) de la Santa Cruzy San SD (mm)
Pablo, serviejo de Pablo, serviejo de
obst.ygynecol obst.ygynecol
BPD Age SD BPD Age SD BPD Age SD BPD Age SD BPD Age SD
<23 n/a ––––– 42 189 0 <24 n/a ––– 46 147 5 69 198 5
23 119 0 43 192 0 24 98 4 47 149 5 70 200 5
24 122 0 44 196 0 25 100 4 48 151 5 71 203 5
25 126 0 45 199 0 26 102 4 49 153 5 72 206 5
26 128 0 46 203 0 27 104 4 50 155 5 73 209 5
27 130 0 47 206 0 28 106 4 51 158 5 74 212 5
28 133 0 48 210 0 29 108 4 52 160 5 75 215 5
29 136 0 49 213 0 30 110 4 53 162 5 76 218 5
30 140 0 50 217 0 31 112 4 54 164 5 77 221 5
31 143 0 51 224 0
32 114 4 55 167 5 78 224 5
32 147 0 52 231 0
33 116 4 56 169 5 79 227 5
33 150 0 53 238 0
34 119 4 57 171 5 80 230 5
34 154 0 54 245 0
35 121 4 58 173 5 81 233 5
35 157 0 55 252 0
36 123 4 59 176 5 82 236 5
36 161 0 56 255 0
37 125 4 60 178 5 83 239 5
37 164 0 57 259 0
38 127 4 61 180 5 84 242 5
38 168 0 58 266 0
39 129 4 62 182 5 85 245 5
39 175 0 59 273 0
40 131 4 63 185 5 86 252 5
40 182 0 60 280 0
41 133 4 64 187 5 87 259 5
41 185 0 >60 n/a –––––
42 135 4 65 189 5 88 266 5
Table 46. BD : Sostoa
43 137 4 66 191 5 89 273 5
44 140 5 67 194 5 90 280 5
45 143 5 68 196 5 >90 n/a –––
Table 47. BPD : Sostoa
t
OB Tables F–29
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
FL : Sostoa Unit : FL (mm) HC : Sostoa Unit : HC (mm)

Sostoa : Hospital Age (Day) Age (Day)
de la Santa Cruzy San SD (mm) SD (mm)
Pablo, serviejo de
obst.ygynecol
FL Age SD FL Age SD HC Age SD HC Age SD

<10 n/a ––––– 41 178 4 <93 n/a ––––– 220 171 22
10 98 4 42 181 4 93 98 15 225 174 22
11 100 4 43 183 4
95 99 15 230 177 22
12 103 4 44 186 4
100 104 17 235 180 22
13 105 4 45 189 5
14 108 4 46 192 5 105 106 18 240 183 22
15 111 4 47 196 5 110 109 19 245 186 22
16 113 4 48 199 5 115 111 19 250 189 22
17 116 4 49 203 5
120 113 20 255 192 22
18 118 4 50 206 5
125 116 21 260 195 22
19 121 4 51 210 5
20 124 4 52 213 5 130 118 21 265 198 22
21 126 4 53 217 5 135 121 22 270 201 22
22 129 4 54 220 5 140 124 22 275 204 22
23 131 4 55 224 5
145 127 22 280 207 22
24 134 4 56 227 5
150 130 22 285 210 22
25 137 4 57 231 5
26 139 4 58 234 5 155 133 22 290 215 22
27 142 4 59 238 5 160 136 22 295 219 22
28 144 4 60 241 5 165 139 22 300 224 22
29 147 4 61 245 5
170 142 22 305 228 22
30 150 4 62 248 5
175 145 22 310 233 22
31 152 4 63 252 5
32 155 4 64 255 5 180 148 22 315 240 22
33 157 4 65 259 5 185 151 22 320 247 22

34 160 4 66 263 5 190 154 22 325 254 22
35 163 4 67 267 5 195 157 22 330 261 22
36 165 4 68 271 5
200 160 22 335 268 22
37 168 4 69 275 5
205 163 22 340 275 22
38 170 4 70 280 5
39 173 4 >70 n/a ––––– 210 165 22 343 280 22
40 176 4 215 168 22 >343 n/a –––––
Table 48. FL : Sostoa Table 49. HC : Sostoa
OB Tables F–30 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
OFD : Sostoa Unit : OFD (mm) BPD : Tokyo Unit : BPD (mm)
Age (Day) Age (Day)
SD (mm) SD (Day)
OFD Age SD OFD Age SD OFD Age SD BPD Age SD BPD Age SD BPD Age SD
<28 n/a ––– 55 146 0 83 195 0 <20 n/a ––– 44 135 ±5 69 194 ±7
20 85 ±6 45 138 ±6 70 196 ±7
28 98 0 56 147 0 84 197 0
21 87 ±6 46 140 ±6 71 199 ±8
29 99 0 57 149 0 85 199 0
22 89 ±6 47 142 ±6 72 201 ±8
30 101 0 58 151 0 86 201 0
23 92 ±6 48 144 ±6 73 204 ±8
31 103 0 59 153 0 87 202 0
24 94 ±6 49 146 ±6 74 207 ±8
32 105 0 60 154 0 88 204 0 25 96 ±6 50 148 ±6 75 210 ±8
33 106 0 61 156 0 89 206 0 26 98 ±6 51 151 ±6 76 213 ±8
34 108 0 62 158 0 90 208 0 27 100 ±6 52 153 ±6 77 216 ±8
28 102 ±6 53 154 ±6 78 218 ±8

35 110 0 63 160 0 91 210 0
29 102 ±6 54 157 ±6 79 221 ±8
36 112 0 64 162 0 92 212 0
30 106 ±5 55 160 ±6 80 225 ±8
37 114 0 65 163 0 93 215 0
31 108 ±5 56 162 ±6 81 228 ±8
38 115 0 66 165 0 94 218 0 32 110 ±5 57 164 ±6 82 231 ±8
39 117 0 67 167 0 95 221 0 33 112 ±5 58 167 ±6 83 234 ±9
40 119 0 68 169 0 96 224 0 34 114 ±5 59 169 ±6 84 238 ±9
35 116 ±5 60 171 ±6 85 241 ±9

41 121 0 69 170 0 97 226 0
36 118 ±5 61 174 ±7 86 245 ±9
42 122 0 70 172 0 98 229 0
37 120 ±5 62 176 ±7 87 249 ±9
43 124 0 71 174 0 99 232 0
38 123 ±5 63 179 ±7 88 253 ±9
44 126 0 72 176 0 100 235 0
39 125 ±5 64 181 ±7 89 258 ±9
45 128 0 73 178 0 101 238 0 40 127 ±5 65 183 ±7 90 262 ±9
46 130 0 74 179 0 102 243 0 41 129 ±5 66 186 ±7 >90 n/a ––––
47 131 0 75 181 0 103 248 0 42 131 ±5 67 188 ±7
48 133 0 76 183 0 104 253 0

43 133 ±5 68 191 ±7
49 135 0 77 185 0 105 259 0
50 137 0 78 186 0 106 264 0 Table 51. BPD : Tokyo

51 138 0 79 188 0 107 269 0
52 140 0 80 190 0 108 274 0
53 142 0 81 192 0 109 280 0
54 144 0 82 194 0 >109 n/a –––
Table 50. OFD : Sostoa
t
OB Tables F–31
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
CRL : Tokyo Unit : CRL (mm) FL : Tokyo Unit : FL (mm)

Age (Day) Age (Day)
SD (Day) SD (Day)
CRL Age SD CRL Age SD FL Age SD FL Age SD

<13 n/a ––––– 32 73 ±7
<33 n/a ––––– 53 207 ±7
13 55 ±8 33 74 ±7
33 143 ±6 54 210 ±7
14 56 ±9 34 74 ±7
15 57 ± 10 35 75 ±7
34 146 ±6 55 214 ±7
16 58 ±8 36 76 ±7 35 149 ±6 56 217 ±7
17 59 ±9 37 77 ±7 36 153 ±6 57 220 ±7
18 60 ± 10 38 78 ±7
37 156 ±6 58 224 ±7
19 61 ±8 39 78 ±7
38 159 ±6 59 228 ±8
20 62 ±9 40 79 ±7
21 63 ±7 41 80 ±7
39 162 ±6 60 231 ±8
22 64 ±7 42 81 ±7 40 166 ±6 61 235 ±8
23 65 ±7 43 81 ±7 41 169 ±6 62 239 ±8
24 66 ±7 44 82 ±7
42 172 ±6 63 243 ±8
25 67 ±7 45 83 ±7
43 175 ±6 64 247 ±8
26 68 ±7 46 84 ±7
27 68 ±7 47 84 ±7
44 178 ±6 65 251 ±8
28 69 ±7 48 85 ±7 45 181 ±6 66 256 ±8
29 70 ±7 49 86 ±7 46 185 ±7 67 260 ±8
30 71 ±7 50 86 ±7
47 188 ±7 68 266 ±7
31 72 ±7 >50 n/a –––––
48 191 ±7 69 271 ±7
Table 52. CRL : Tokyo
49 194 ±7 70 278 ±7
50 197 ±7 71 286 ±6
51 200 ±7 >71 n/a –––––
52 204 ±7
Table 53. FL : Tokyo
OB Tables F–32 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
GS : Tokyo Unit : GS (mm) LV : Tokyo Unit : LV (mm)

Tokyo University Age (Day) Age (Day)
Method 1986,6 by SD (Day) SD (Day)
Univ. of Tokyo
GS Age SD GS Age SD LV Age SD LV Age SD

<12 n/a ––––– 32 55 ± 0X <44 n/a ––––– 66 213 ± 10
12 31 ±7 33 56 ± 0X 44 154 ±5 67 217 ± 10
13 32 ±7 34 57 ± 0X 45 157 ±5 68 220 ± 10
14 33 ±7 35 58 ± 0X 46 159 ±5 69 224 ± 10
15 34 ±7 36 59 ± 0X 47 161 ±5 70 227 ± 11
16 36 ±7 37 60 ± 0X 48 163 ±5 71 231 ± 11
17 37 ±7 38 61 ± 0X 49 166 ±6 72 234 ± 11
18 38 ±7 39 62 ± 0X 50 168 ±6 73 238 ± 11
19 40 ±7 40 63 ± 0X 51 171 ±6 74 241 ± 11
20 41 ±7 41 64 ± 0X 52 173 ±6 75 245 ± 11
21 42 ±7 42 65 ± 0X 53 176 ±7 76 249 ± 11
22 43 ±7 43 65 ± 0X 54 178 ±7 77 252 ± 11
23 44 ±7 44 66 ± 0X 55 181 ±7 78 256 ± 11
24 46 ±7 45 67 ± 0X 56 183 ±8 79 260 ± 10
25 47 ±7 46 68 ± 0X 57 186 ±8 80 264 ± 10
26 48 ±8 47 69 ± 0X 58 189 ±8 81 267 ± 10
27 49 ±9 48 70 ± 0X 59 192 ±8 82 271 ± 10
28 50 ± 10 49 71 ± 0X 60 195 ±9 83 275 ± 10
29 51 ± 0X 50 72 ± 0X 61 198 ±9 84 278 ± 10
30 52 ± 0X >50 n/a ––––– 62 201 ±9 85 282 ± 10
31 53 ± 0X 63 204 ±9 86 285 ± 10
64 207 ± 10 >86 n/a –––––
Table 54. GS : Tokyo
65 210 ± 10
Table 55. LV : Tokyo
t
OB Tables F–33
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
FL/HC HC/AC
GA (weeks) GA (weeks)
GA Min Max GA Min Max GA Min Max

<15 n/a ––––– 29 19.6 20.8 <13 n/a –––––
15 15.3 17.1 30 19.2 21.4 13 1.14 1.31
16 13.3 16.5 31 19.3 21.3 15 1.05 1.39
17 14.6 17.6 32 19.1 21.3 17 1.07 1.29
18 15.8 18.0 33 19.9 21.5 19 1.09 1.26
19 16.1 18.3 34 19.4 21.8 21 1.06 1.25
20 16.8 19.8 35 20.1 22.3 23 1.05 1.21
21 15.9 20.3 36 20.1 22.1 25 1.04 1.22
22 18.4 20.2 37 20.8 22.6 27 1.05 1.22
23 19.2 20.8 38 20.9 22.7 29 0.99 1.21
24 18.7 20.9 39 20.6 23.4 31 0.96 1.17
25 18.7 20.3 40 20.7 22.5 33 0.96 1.11
26 18.6 20.4 41 21.6 23.2 35 0.93 1.11
27 18.6 20.4 42 20.1 23.9 37 0.92 1.05
28 18.8 20.6 >42 n/a –––– 39 0.87 1.06
Table 56. FL/HC 41 0.93 1.00

>41 n/a ––––
Table 57. HC/AC
OB Tables F–34 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
EFW : Tokyo Shinozuka APTDxTTD (AxT) : Tokyo Shinozuka

Unit : EFW (grams) Unit : APTDxTTD (mm)
Age (Day) Age (Day)
1SD (grams) 1SD (cm2)
EFW2 Age 1SD EFW Age 1SD AxT Age 1SD AxT Age 1SD
<250 n/a ––– 2250 34W4D 264 <10 n/a ––– 90 39W2D 12.0
250 19W3D 45 2300 34W6D 269 10 16W1D 2.5 >90 n/a –––
300 20W0D 51 2350 35W1D 274 12 17W0D 2.7
350 20W4D 58 2400 35W3D 279 14 17W6D 2.9
400 21W2D 66 2450 35W5D 284 16 18W4D 3.1
450 21W5D 71 2500 35W7D 290 18 19W3D 3.4
500 22W2D 78 2550 36W2D 295 20 20W1D 3.6
550 22W6D 85 2600 36W4D 301 22 20W6D 3.8
600 23W2D 90 2650 36W6D 306 24 21W4D 4.0
650 23W6D 98 2700 37W2D 314 26 22W2D 4.3
700 24W2D 103 2750 37W4D 320 28 22W6D 4.4
750 24W5D 109 2800 37W6D 325 30 23W4D 4.7
800 25W2D 116 2850 38W1D 331 32 24W1D 4.9
850 25W5D 122 2900 38W4D 340 34 24W5D 5.1
900 26W1D 128 2950 38W6D 345 36 25W2D 5.3
950 26W4D 134 3000 39W2D 354 38 25W6D 5.5
1000 26W6D 138 >3000 n/a ––– 40 26W3D 5.7
1050 27W2D 145 42 27W0D 6.0
1100 27W5D 151 44 27W3D 6.1
1150 28W0D 155 46 28W0D 6.4
1200 28W3D 162 48 28W4D 6.6
1250 28W5D 166 50 29W0D 6.8
1300 29W1D 173 52 29W3D 7.0
1350 29W3D 177 54 30W0D 7.2
1400 29W5D 181 56 30W3D 7.4
1450 30W0D 186 58 31W0D 7.7
1500 30W2D 191 60 31W3D 7.9
1550 30W5D 197 62 31W6D 8.1
1600 31W0D 202 64 32W3D 8.4
1650 31W2D 207 66 32W6D 8.6
1700 31W4D 211 68 33W3D 8.8
1750 31W6D 216 70 33W6D 9.1
1800 32W1D 221 72 34W2D 9.3
1850 32W3D 226 74 34W6D 9.6
1900 32W5D 231 76 35W3D 9.9
1950 32W7D 236 78 35W6D 10.1
2000 33W1D 238 80 36W3D 10.2
2050 33W3D 243 82 37W0D 10.7
2100 33W5D 248 84 37W4D 11.0
2150 34W0D 253 86 38W1D 11.3
2200 34W2D 258 88 38W5D 11.7
Table 58. EFW : Tokyo Shinozuka Table 59. APTDxTTD (AxT): Tokyo Shinozuka
t
OB Tables F–35
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
FL : Tokyo Shinozuka AC : Tokyo Shinozuka

Unit : (mm) Unit : (cm)
Age (Day) Age (Day)
1SD (mm) 1SD (cm)
FL Age 1SD FL Age 1SD AC Age 1SD

<20 n/a ––– 60 33W3D 3.2 <10 n/a –––
20 16W1D 2.6 61 34W0D 3.2 10 15W3D 0.5
21 16W3D 2.7 62 34W4D 3.3 11 16W4D 0.6
22 16W6D 2.7 63 35W1D 3.3 12 17W4D 0.6
23 17W1D 2.7 64 35W5D 3.3 13 18W4D 0.7
24 17W3D 2.7 65 36W2D 3.3 14 19W4D 0.7
25 17W6D 2.7 66 37W0D 3.3 15 20W3D 0.8
26 18W1D 2.7 67 37W4D 3.4 16 21W3D 0.8
27 18W3D 2.7 68 38W1D 3.4 17 22W3D 0.9
28 18W6D 2.7 69 38W5D 3.4 18 23W3D 0.9
29 19W1D 2.7 70 39W3D 3.4 19 24W3D 1.0
30 19W4D 2.8 >70 n/a ––– 20 25W3D 1.0
31 20W0D 2.8 21 26W3D 1.1
32 20W2D 2.8 22 27W3D 1.1
33 20W5D 2.8 23 28W4D 1.2
34 21W1D 2.8 24 29W4D 1.2
35 21W3D 2.8 25 30W5D 1.3
36 21W6D 2.8 26 31W6D 1.3
37 22W2D 2.9 27 33W1D 1.4
38 22W5D 2.9 28 34W2D 1.4
39 23W1D 2.9 29 35W4D 1.5
40 23W4D 2.9 30 37W0D 1.6
41 24W0D 2.9 31 38W2D 1.6
42 24W3D 2.9 32 39W6D 1.7
43 24W6D 2.9 33 41W2D 1.8
44 25W3D 3.0 >33 n/a –––
45 25W6D 3.0
46 26W2D 3.0
47 26W5D 3.0
48 27W5D 3.0
49 28W2D 3.0
50 28W5D 3.1
51 29W2D 3.1
52 29W5D 3.1
53 30W2D 3.1
54 30W5D 3.1
55 31W2D 3.1
56 31W6D 3.2
57 32W3D 3.2
58 32W3D 3.2
59 33W0D 3.2
Table 60. FL : Tokyo Shinozuka Table 61. AC : Tokyo Shinozuka
OB Tables F–36 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
BPD : Tokyo Shinozuka CRL : Tokyo Shinozuka

Unit : (mm) Unit : (mm)
Age (Day) Age (Day)
1SD (mm) 1SD (mm)
BPD Age 1SD BPD Age 1SD CRL Age 1SD CRL Age 1SD
<13 n/a ––– 53 22W1D 3.0 <5 n/a ––– 45 11W6D 6.9
13 10W1D 2.3 54 22W3D 3.0 5 6W3D 1.1 46 11W6D 6.9
14 10W3D 2.3 55 22W5D 3.0 6 6W4D 1.3 47 12W0D 7.1
15 10W5D 2.3 56 23W1D 3.0 7 6W6D 1.6 48 12W1D 7.2
16 11W0D 2.3 57 23W3D 3.0 8 7W0D 1.7 49 12W1D 7.2
17 11W2D 2.4 58 23W5D 3.1 9 7W1D 1.9 50 12W2D 7.4
18 11W4D 2.4 59 24W1D 3.1 10 7W2D 2.0 >50 n/a –––
19 11W6D 2.4 60 24W3D 3.1 11 7W3D 2.2
20 12W1D 2.4 61 24W5D 3.1 12 7W4D 2.3
21 12W3D 2.4 62 25W1D 3.1 13 7W5D 2.5
22 12W6D 2.4 63 25W3D 3.1 14 7W6D 2.6
23 13W1D 2.5 64 25W5D 3.2 15 8W1D 2.9
24 13W3D 2.5 65 26W1D 3.2 16 8W2D 3.1
25 13W5D 2.5 66 26W3D 3.2 17 8W3D 3.3
26 14W0D 2.5 67 26W6D 3.2 18 8W4D 3.4
27 14W2D 2.5 68 27W2D 3.3 19 8W5D 3.6
28 14W4D 2.5 69 27W4D 3.3 20 8W6D 3.7
29 14W6D 2.6 70 28W0D 3.3 21 9W0D 3.9
30 15W1D 2.6 71 28W3D 3.3 22 9W1D 4.0
31 15W3D 2.6 72 28W5D 3.3 23 9W2D 4.2
32 15W5D 2.6 73 29W1D 3.4 24 9W3D 4.3
33 16W0D 2.6 74 29W4D 3.4 25 9W4D 4.5
34 16W2D 2.6 75 30W0D 3.4 26 9W4D 4.5
35 16W4D 2.7 76 30W3D 3.4 27 9W5D 4.6
36 16W6D 2.7 77 30W6D 3.4 28 9W6D 4.8
37 17W1D 2.7 78 31W2D 3.5 29 10W0D 4.9
38 17W4D 2.7 79 31W5D 3.5 30 10W1D 5.1
39 17W6D 2.7 80 32W1D 3.5 31 10W2D 5.2
40 18W1D 2.7 81 32W5D 3.6 32 10W3D 5.4
41 18W3D 2.8 82 33W1D 3.6 33 10W4D 5.5
42 18W5D 2.8 83 33W5D 3.6 34 10W5D 5.7
43 19W0D 2.8 84 34W2D 3.6 35 10W6D 5.9
44 19W2D 2.8 85 34W6D 3.7 36 10W6D 5.9
45 19W4D 2.8 86 35W3D 3.7 37 11W0D 6.0
46 20W0D 2.8 87 36W0D 3.7 38 11W0D 6.0
47 20W2D 2.9 88 36W5D 3.8 39 11W1D 6.2
48 20W4D 2.9 89 37W4D 3.8 40 11W2D 6.3
49 20W6D 2.9 90 38W3D 3.9 41 11W3D 6.5
50 21W1D 2.9 >90 n/a ––– 42 11W3D 6.5
51 21W3D 2.9 43 11W4D 6.6
52 21W6D 2.9 44 11W5D 6.8
Table 62. BPD : Tokyo Shinozuka Table 63. CRL : Tokyo Shinozuka
t
OB Tables F–37
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
AC : Australia CRL : Australia

Unit : (mm) Unit : (mm)
Age (Day) Age (Day)
2SD (Day) 2SD (Day)
AC Age SD CRL Age SD CRL Age SD

<35 n/a ––– <2 n/a ––– 51 82 *
35 70 8 2 42 * 53 83 *
46 77 8 3 43 * 55 84 *
57 84 8 4 44 * 57 85 *
69 91 8 5 45 * 58 86 *
80 98 9 6 46 * 60 87 *
92 105 9 7 47 * 62 88 *
103 112 9 8 48 * 64 89 *
114 119 9 9 49 * 66 90 *
126 126 10 10 50 * 68 91 *
137 133 10 11 51 * 70 92 *
149 140 10 12 52 * 72 93 *
160 147 10 13 53 * 74 94 *
171 154 10 14 54 * 76 95 *
183 161 10 15 55 * 78 96 *
194 168 12 16 56 * 80 97 *
206 175 12 17 57 * 82 98 *
217 182 12 18 58 * >82 n/a –––
228 189 14 19 59 *
240 196 14 20 60 *
251 203 14 22 61 *
263 210 14 23 62 *
274 217 14 24 63 *
285 224 16 25 64 *
297 231 16 26 65 *
308 238 18 27 66 *
320 245 18 29 67 *
331 252 18 30 68 *
342 259 18 31 69 *
354 266 20 33 70 *
365 273 20 34 71 *
377 280 20 36 72 *
>377 n/a ––– 37 73 *
38 74 *
40 75 *
41 76 *
43 77 *
45 78 *
46 79 *
48 80 *
50 81 *
Table 64. AC : Australia Table 65. CRL : Australia * : No Data
OB Tables F–38 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
BPD : Australia
Unit : (mm)
Age (Day)
2SD (Day)
BPD Age 2SD CRL Age 2SD

<20 n/a ––– 60 169 13
20 84 4 61 171 13
21 86 4 62 173 13
22 88 4 63 176 14
23 90 4 64 178 14
24 92 5 65 181 14
25 94 5 66 183 14
26 95 5 67 186 15
27 97 5 68 188 15
28 99 5 69 191 15
29 101 6 70 193 15
30 103 6 71 196 16
31 105 6 72 199 16
32 107 6 73 201 16
33 109 7 74 204 16
34 111 7 75 206 17
35 113 7 76 209 17
36 115 7 77 212 17
37 117 8 78 214 17
38 119 8 79 217 17
39 121 8 80 220 18
40 123 8 81 222 18
41 126 9 82 225 18
42 128 9 83 228 18
43 130 9 84 231 19
44 132 9 85 234 *
45 134 9 86 237 *
46 136 10 87 240 *
47 139 10 88 244 *
48 141 10 89 247 *
49 143 10 90 251 *
50 145 11 91 255 *
51 147 11 92 259 *
52 149 11 93 264 *
53 152 11 94 270 *
54 154 12 95 276 *
55 157 12 96 284 *
56 159 12 97 292 *
57 161 12 98 301 *
58 164 13 >98 n/a –––
59 166 13
Table 66. BPD : Australia * : No Data
t
OB Tables F–39
2177611–100 Rev 0
OB Tables
OB Tables F–40 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
List of terms
absolute maximum: The largest possible value of a specified quantity, either for an
individual instrument or for all instruments of a given generic type.
This value shall include effects of inaccuracies and imprecision of
the measurement process(es) used to determine it.
absolute minimum: The smallest possible value of a specified quantity, either for an
individual instrument or for all instruments of a given generic type.
This value shall include effects of inaccuracies and impression of
the measurement process(es) used to determine it.
absorption: The process by which energy is deposited in the medium

through which it propagates. The absorbed energy is ultimately
converted to thermal energy (heat).
acceleration: The rate of change of velocity. Acceleration is a vector quantity

measured in meters per second squared (m/s2).
acoustic, acoustical: The qualifying adjectives “acoustic” and “acoustical” mean

containing, producing, arising from, actuated by, related to or
associated with sound. Acoustic is used when the term being
qualified designates something that has the properties,
dimensions, or physical characteristics associated with sound
waves; acoustical is used when the term being qualified does
not designate explicitly something that has such properties,
dimensions, or physical characteristics.
acoustic attenuation: The reduction of intensity of an acoustic signal as it propagates

through a material. It includes the effects of absorption,
scattering, and beam divergence.
acoustic energy: Mechanical energy transported by an acoustic wave. The unit is

the joule (J).
acoustic enhancement: A manifestation of increased acoustic signal amplitude returning

from regions lying beyond an object which causes little or no
attenuation of the sound beam. Contrasts with acoustic shadow.
Acoustic enhancement is one type of sonographic artifact.
acoustic field: The distribution of acoustic energy in space and time.
t
Glossary G–1
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
acoustic impedance: The resistance that a material offers to the passage of a sound
wave (colloquial). A property of a medium computed as the
product of density and sound propagation speed (characteristic
acoustic impedance). The ratio of the instantaneous acoustic
pressure at a point to the instantaneous particle velocity
(specific acoustic impedance). Discontinuities in acoustic
impedance are responsible for the echoes on which ultrasound
imaging and Doppler flow detection are based.
acoustic impedance match: The condition in which two contiguous media have equal or near
equal characteristic acoustic impedances, thereby minimizing
reflection of acoustic energy at the interface. See impedance ratio.
acoustic impedance mismatch: The condition in which two contiguous media have different
characteristic acoustic impedances, thereby providing a source
for the production of ultrasonic echoes.
acoustic intensity: See intensity.
acoustic lens: A lens used to focus or diverge a sound beam. An acoustic lens
is usually made of plastic or epoxy and is mounted on the front
of a transducer. An acoustic lens can be simulated by
electronically delaying echo signals arriving at or emitted by
various transducer elements.
acoustic power: Acoustic energy transported per unit time (usually a temporal
average is quoted) (see average acoustic power). The unit is
the watt (W), where 1 watt = 1 joule per second.
acoustic pressure: The instantaneous value of the total pressure minus the ambient
pressure. The unit is the pascal (Pa), where 1 pascal = 1
newton per square meter.
acoustic shadow: Sonographic appearance of reduced echo amplitude from

regions lying beyond an attenuating object. It is important to
distinguish between acoustic shadows and regions of low
reflectivity. Contrasts with acoustic enhancement. Acoustic
shadow is one type of sonographic artifact.
acoustic wave: A mechanical disturbance which propagates through a

continuous medium.
acoustic waveform: See waveform.
acoustic wavelength: The distance between any two adjacent points at which the
phase, at the same instant, differs by 2p radians; it corresponds
to the distance traveled by the wave during one cycle; l = c/f,
where l is the wavelength, c is the speed of sound, and f is the
frequency. For water or tissue at 1 MHz, the wavelength is
approximately 1.5 mm.
active element: The region of a single transducer which is capable of being

energized.
aliasing: The introduction of artifactual frequency components as a result

of sampling a signal at a rate which is lower than twice the
highest frequency component in that signal. For example,
aliasing of a Doppler signal will result in an erroneous
representation of the Doppler shift frequency.
Glossary G–2 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
ambient: Refers to the local environment surrounding an object.
amorphous tissue: In the acoustical sense, tissue lacking echo-producing

structures. These tissues include fluid-filled structures such as
cysts, and other acoustically homogeneous regions.
amplifier: A device which magnifies the amplitude or power of its input signal.
anechoic: The property of appearing echo-free or without echoes on a

sonographic image. A clear cyst appears anechoic.
angle of incidence: The angle between the axis of an acoustic beam encountering an
interface, and the vector normal (perpendicular) to the interface.
anisotropic: Having acoustic properties which vary according to the direction

in which they are measured.
array: A spatial arrangement of two or more transducers or transducer

elements. The array may be a linear array (i.e., elements
arranged in a line), a rectangular array (i.e., transducers
arranged in a rectangular pattern), or may be formed in other
patterns such as hexagonal, annular, circular, etc.
artifact: An echo feature present or absent in a sonogram, which does

not correspond to the presence or absence of a real target.
Reverberations and shadowing are examples of such artifacts.
attack, angle of: The angle between the direction of movement of the reflector
and the effective direction of the ultrasonic beam. Also known
as Doppler angle.
attenuation: The decrease in intensity as sound travels through a material.

Attenuation is due to three factors: absorption, scattering, and
beam divergence.
attenuation coefficient: The quantitative measure of attenuation due to the medium and
not to beam divergence. The relative change in the acoustic
wave amplitude per unit path length in a medium. Commonly
employed units are dB/cm, and neper/cm. The attenuation
coefficient is specified for a given frequency.
attenuation compensation: Electronic compensation for attenuation due to media losses

and geometrical divergence of the acoustic beam along the
propagation pathway, introduced to produce equivalent acoustic
images of a reflector, that are independent of distance from the
transducer. This is also called time gain compensation (TGC),
depth compensation, or swept gain. See also ramp.
attenuator: A device or material which reduces the amplitude of a signal. A

step attenuator is a device which can reduce the signal
amplitude by specified stepwise amounts.
audio range: The audible range of sound frequencies. Usually taken to be

20 Hz to 20 kHz.
auto-scanning system: Ultrasonic B-Scan systems in which scanning is performed

mechanically or electronically but not manually. These
instruments include both real-time scanners and scanners
whose frame rate is less than 15 frames per second.
t
Glossary G–3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
autocorrelation: See correlation.
average acoustic power: The power output from an acoustic transducer averaged over time.
average intensity: See intensity.
axial resolution: The minimum separation between two equally reflecting point
targets along the direction of sound travel, such that each can
be separately distinguished on the display. (Same as depth
resolution, longitudinal resolution, and range resolution).
azimuthal resolution: The minimum angular separation between two equally reflecting
point targets at the same range such that each can be
separately distinguished on the display. The resolution is limited
by the beamwidth of the transducer at that range of the targets.
See lateral resolution.
B-Mode (brightness-mode): A method of image display in which the amplitude of the echo
signal is represented by modulation of the brightness of the
corresponding image point. The position of the echo, displayed
in the x-y plane, is determined from the position and angulation
of the transducer and the transit time of the acoustic pulse.
B-scan: Scanning with B-Mode display. A misnomer for a B-Mode scan

or image.
backscatter: Sound is scattered by small reflecting objects in all directions.

Backscatter is that part of the scattered sound that travels back
to the source transducer.
backscattered energy: The portion of the incident acoustic energy scattered back
toward the source.
bandwidth: The range of frequencies that a device is capable of passing

(colloquial). The transmitted bandwidth is that portion of the
frequency spectrum between upper and lower frequency bounds
F1 and F2. The bounds F1 and F2 are often set at the points
where the magnitude of the frequency spectrum is 71% (or -3 dB)
of its maximum value. Bandwidth is usually specified in MHz.
baseline shift (zero shift): A control that allows the axis representing Doppler shift
frequency on the spectral display to be allocated entirely to
forward flow, reverse flow or a mixture of the two. The effect is
to “shift” the zero frequency axis up or down. This procedure is
useful when aliasing is present in a signal representing
unidirectional flow. It does not affect the Nyquist limit.
beam: The directed acoustic field produced by a transducer.
beam axis: A straight line joining the points of maximum sound pressure
amplitude, at increasing distances from the source in the far
field, and extending back to the transducer assembly surface. In
pulse-echo situations, the above points of maximum spatial
pressure amplitude are replaced by the points of maximum
pulse-echo response from a specific reflector.
Glossary G–4 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
beam cross-sectional area: The area of that portion of a surface, in a plane perpendicular to
the beam axis, that is bounded by that contour of the pulse-echo
amplitude from a specified point or line reflector which is 25%
(-12 dB) of the maximum transducer signal in that plane.
Transmitted beam cross-sectional area is the area on the
surface of a plane perpendicular to the beam axis consisting of
all points where the acoustic pressure is greater than 50% of the
maximum acoustic pressure in that plane.
beam cross-sectional profile: The sound pressure amplitude distribution along a line
perpendicular to the beam axis. See pulse-echo response profile.
beam divergence: The full angle of beam spread in a particular plane containing
the beam axis. The orientation of the plane must be specified.
beam pattern: A description, often presented graphically, of the response of the

transducer as a function of angle with respect to the direction of
the transmitted or incident sound waves in a specified plane and
at a specified frequency. A complete description of the beam
pattern of a transducer would require a three-dimensional
presentation. The beam pattern is often shown as the response
relative to the maximum response.
beam width (transmission): The transverse distance between points on a specified beam
cross-sectional profile where the acoustic pressure is a specified
fraction of the maximum acoustic pressure on the profile. This
may also be expressed as the angle formed between lines from
the location of these two points to the point of intersection of the
beam axis and the surface of the transducer assembly.
Bernoulli effect: The reduction in pressure which accompanies an increase in

velocity of fluid flow.
Bernoulli equation: The equation which states that the total fluid energy per unit
volume along a streamline of fluid flow is constant. This is a
form of the more general law of conservation of energy.
bit: A contraction of “binary digit”. A bit can assume one of two

possible values usually represented by “0” and “1”.
boundary layer: The thin layer of stationary fluid in contract with the walls of the
containing vessel.
bruit: The name given to sounds sometimes associated with disturbed

and turbulent flow. The arise from the periodic variation in shear
stress on the vessel wall which causes it to vibrate.
Bragg diffraction: In acoustics, the process of scattering from an array of scatterers

such that, through constructive and destructive interference, there
results more sound energy in some directions and less in others.
brightness modulation: An echo display technique in which the brightness of a displayed

echo varies with the echo amplitude.
t
Glossary G–5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
calipers (electronic): Two electronic cursors generated on a display, which can be

manipulated to coincide with echoes of interest on the screen.
On an image, the distance between the cursors is calibrated to
provide the dimensions of the structure of interest. On a
M-Mode or Doppler display, calipers may be used to measure
such quantities as time, frequency or velocity.
cathode-ray tube (CRT): The display tube used in an oscilloscope. A television picture
tube is a special type of cathode-ray tube. In sonography, a
CRT is an electron beam tube designed for two-dimensional
display of signals as a function of their coordinates in space,
time, or both. It consists of an electron source (gun), a means
for deflecting the electron beam in the horizontal and vertical
directions, and a phosphor-coated screen upon which the
position of the electron beam is visible. The brightness of the
display can be modulated by varying the current to the electron
source, or the voltage on the grid of the CRT.
cavitation (acoustically induced): A phenomenon produced by sound in liquid or liquid-like media

involving the expansion and compression of bubbles or cavities
containing gas or vapor.
cavitation, stable: Steady oscillation of a bubble due to the passage of a sound

wave. Mechanical movements, such as acoustic streaming,
occur in the vicinity of the bubble.
cavitation, transient: A short-lived cavitation event initiated by the negative pressure

of the sound wave. The cavitation event is terminated by a rapid
collapse of the bubble. This is accompanied by high localized
pressure and temperature and the generation of a sonic shock
wave.
center frequency: The average frequency over the bandwidth of a signal. The sound
leaving a transducer in a pulse-echo system contains not one
frequency, but a spectrum of frequencies. The center frequency is
terminated by (F1 + F2)/2, where F1 and F2 are the frequencies
used in defining bandwidth. For a symmetrical spectrum the center
frequency is the frequency at which the amplitude is a maximum.
central axis: A convenient indicator of the direction of a sound beam. The

central axis is located at the center of an ultrasound beam and
points in the direction of sound propagation.
characteristic acoustic impedance: See acoustic impedance.
clipping: A form of limiting in which the amplitude of a signal exceeding a

specific level is reset to that level.
coarse gain: An operational control provided on some ultrasonic systems for

gross adjustments of amplifier gain. Generally, it is supplemented
by a fine gain control for more precise adjustment.
coherence: The situation describing the degree of phase consistency among

the signals making up a composite wave; if all the signals are in
phase, the wave is said to be coherent.
comet tail artifact: A reverberation type of sonographic artifact which appears as a

dense tapering trail of echoes just distal to strongly reflecting
structures.
Glossary G–6 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
compliance: The rate of change of volume of a distensible vessel with

pressure (“volume” compliance); the rate of change of
cross-sectional area with pressure (“area” compliance); or the
rate of change of diameter with pressure (“diameter”
compliance).
collimator: An acoustic lens used to focus an acoustic beam at infinity, i.e.,

to produce plane parallel waves. In practice, collimators may
provide weak focusing.
color-flow Doppler: The two-dimensional presentation of Doppler shift information

superimposed on a real-time, gray-scale anatomic
cross-sectional image. Flow directions toward and away from
the transducer, i.e., positive and negative Doppler shifts, are
presented as different colors on the display.
compound scan: A 2-dimensional echogram which combines at least two basic

scanning motions on the same image. Usually, a persistence
monitor or digitized frame memory is used to store the
overlapping images corresponding to the different scanning
motions.
compressional wave: A wave motion which is characterized by changes of density in

the medium. See longitudinal wave as an example.
condensations: When a sound beam passes through a material, the molecules

in some regions of the material are compressed while those in
other regions expand. The regions of compressed molecules
are called condensations. See also rarefactions.
contact coupling: Acoustical coupling of a transducer by direct contact with the

skin, using liquid or gel to exclude air from the space between
the transducer and skin.
continuous-wave (cw) ultrasound: A wave of constant or nearly constant amplitude which persists
for a large number of cycles.
contrast (display): The ratio of the brightness (or intensity) of a region of interest to
the brightness (or intensity) of the surrounding or adjacent region.
contrast agent: See contrast medium.
contrast-detail detectability: Contrast-detail detectability at a specified control setting and

range is the minimum diameter target which is just detectable, at
a specified level of confidence, in a tissue-mimicking
background as a function of the contrast of the target with the
background.
contrast medium: A material which when introduced into a region of interest results
in a greatly increased or a greatly decreased echo signal. A
contrast medium is used to enhance the difference in sonographic
luminance between an anatomic structure and the surrounding
tissue, thereby making the structure easier to detect.
contrast resolution: A measure of the ability of an imaging system to detect targets

of different contrasts. Contrast resolution is expressed as the
minimum detectable target size as a function of target contrast.
t
Glossary G–7
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
contrast (target): The ratio of the backscattered intensity from within a target
volume to the backscattered intensity from the background.
control settings: The settings of the controls on an ultrasound instrument. Such

controls would include the power output control, the focal zone
control, the imaging range control, etc.
coronal plane: Any plane perpendicular to a sagittal plane and parallel to the
long axis of the body. Coronal planes run from left to right
through the body.
correlation: For ultrasound, a mathematical procedure which is used to

quantify the similarity between two signals.
autocorrelation: A mathematical procedure whereby a waveform is multiplied by

successively time-shifted versions of itself. The autocorrelation
method can be used to quantify periodicity or time variation in an
ultrasound echo signal.
cross-correlation: A mathematical procedure whereby one waveform is multiplied

by successively time-shifted versions of another waveform.
Cross-correlation of successive ultrasound echoes can be used
to quantify movement of tissue, including blood.
coupling: The formation of a transmission path for a sound wave between

the transducer and the object being imaged. This is usually
accomplished by replacing the air between the transducer and
the object with a fluid.
coupling agent: A medium used to enhance transmission of sound from the

transducer into the body.
coupling method: The method by which ultrasound is transmitted from a

transducer to the subject and vice versa. These methods
include (1) contact coupling, (2) immersion coupling and (3)
liquid coupling.
critical stenosis: A stenosis of sufficient diameter reduction that flow rate and
pressure are significantly affected. Sometimes called
“hemodynamically significant” stenosis.
cross-sectional display: A display which presents echo data from a single plane within
the body.
cross-sectional echocardiography: See two dimensional echocardiography.
CRT: Abbreviation for cathode-ray tube.
crystal: A colloquial term for the piezoelectric element of the transducer.

Most piezoelectric elements are made of crystalline materials,
such as quartz and certain ceramics.
damping: Any mechanism which removes mechanical or electrical energy

from the transducer. This can include internal absorption in the
transducer as well as electrical or mechanical loading of a
transducer to produce a more rapid decrease in the trailing edge
of the transmitted acoustic pulse and the received echoes.
Damping is used to improve axial resolution, usually at the
expense of sensitivity.
Glossary G–8 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
dB: Abbreviation for decibel.
dead time: The time interval between the start of the transmitter complex
and the reception of the first identifiable echo. The dead time is
determined by such factors as the ring-down time of the
transducer and the recovery time of the receiving amplifier.
dead zone: Region close to the transducer in which imaging cannot be

performed due to a echo arrival during dead time.
decibel: A unit representing a ratio, used to express how much larger or

smaller a quantity is with respect to a reference quantity. The
precise definition is 10Slog10(I/Io) where I is the intensity of
interest and Io is reference intensity. This unit can be used for
other than intensity ratios, and is frequently used for defining the
magnitude of echoes. Because sound amplitude is proportional
to the square root of intensity, the formula for dB becomes
20Slog10(A/Ao) when comparing echo amplitudes. (A is the
amplitude of interest and Ao is the reference amplitude.)
delivered acoustic energy: The product of acoustic power and exposure time at the
prescribed site.
delivered acoustic pause energy: See energy per pulse.
demodulation: The removal of the carrier signal from a modulated wave to

produce a signal representing the desired information (e.g., the
Doppler shift or the amplitude of the echo).
density: Mass per unit volume.
depth: The distance along the sound path from the point of entry into
the patient, or other object being examined, to the point of
interest. Distance along the time axis of the display is assumed
to correspond proportionally to depth in the tissue.
depth gain compensation: See attenuation compensation.
depth of focus: The distance along the beam axis, for a focusing transducer
assembly, from the point where the beam cross-sectional area
first becomes equal to four times the focal area to the point
beyond the focal surface where the beam cross-sectional area
again becomes equal to four times the focal area. Alternatively
it is the distance between the two points along the beam axis
where intensity drops to 25% (-12 dB) of the value at the focal
point. Measurement should be specified as to whether the
depth of focus was done under one-way or round-trip
(pulse-echo) conditions. See focal zone.
depth of penetration: The maximum distance from the transducer into the medium
along the beam axis from which echoes can be detected. This
distance will increase with ultrasound beam intensity and
decrease with greater attenuation of the medium.
depth resolution: See axial resolution.
detector: A device that gives a measurable response upon the receipt of

energy and is used to detect the presence of a signal.
t
Glossary G–9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
differentiation: A mathematical operation for calculating the rate of change of a

variable. In ultrasound imaging, differentiation is used to
process signals to enhance edges of the structures. This is
accomplished by using circuits whose output depends on the
rate of change of the input.
diastole: The relaxation period in the cardiac cycle in which the ventricles
fill and the aortic and pulmonary valves are closed. Where
visible in the velocity pulse, the dicrotic notch forms a
convenient point making the beginning of diastole.
diffraction: The general term for various phenomena in which waves from
different parts of a source add or subtract. A redistribution in
space of the intensity of waves that result from the presence of
inhomogeneities causing variations in the phase of the waves.
For example, the ultrasonic field which appears in and near the
geometric shadow of an obstacle typically has a complex spatial
distribution which is explained by diffraction.
directional response: The variation of transducer sensitivity as a function of direction.
directivity function: The mathematical description of the dependence of acoustic

output of a transducer with direction.
directivity pattern: A beam pattern expressed in polar coordinates.
dispersion: The condition in which the speed of sound varies with frequency.
Dispersion is responsible, to a small extent, for the changes in
shape of a pulse waveform as it propagates.
display format: The manner in which information is presented to the

diagnostician, e.g., A-Mode, B-Mode, C-Mode, etc.
disturbed flow: Deviations from laminar flow consisting of oscillatory variations

in direction or the formation of vortices. Disturbance of blood
flow may be caused by high velocities, by curving, branching
and divergence of vessels or by projections in the vessel lumen.
divergence (beam): The continual widening of a sound beam as it travels.
Doppler angle: The angle between the direction of propagation of the

ultrasound and the direction of flow. As an approximation, the
angle between the axis of the ultrasound beam and the axis of
the vessel lumen is generally used.
Doppler effect: An apparent change in observed sound frequency caused by

relative motion between the sound source or reflector and the
observer.
Doppler frequency shift: The difference between the frequencies of transmitted and
received waves. The shift in frequency is proportional to the
velocity of relative motion between the transducer and the
reflector.
Doppler, pulsed: See pulsed Doppler.
Glossary G–10 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
Doppler shift frequency, maximum: The highest Doppler shift frequency at a moment in time or in
an individual Doppler spectrum. This corresponds to the fastest
moving target in the Doppler sample volume. Because of the
effect of noise, some form of signal conditioning is usually
performed before the maximum frequency is measured.
Doppler shift frequency, mean: The average Doppler shift frequency in a given power spectrum.
Doppler shift frequency, median: The Doppler shift frequency above and below which one-half of
the total power in the spectrum resides.
Doppler shift frequency, mode: The Doppler shift frequency with the greatest power in a given
spectrum.
Doppler ultrasound: Application of the Doppler effect in ultrasound to detect

movement of scatterers by the analysis of the change in
frequency of the returning echoes.
Doppler velocity signal: A signal whose instantaneous voltage is proportional to the

instantaneous Doppler frequency shift, derived by a
frequency-to-voltage conversion of the Doppler signal.
dosimetry: The quantitative determination of the radiation dose.
duplex scanner: An ultrasound instrument that has real-time imaging capability and
Doppler capability with either the imaging transducer or a separate
transducer used to collect continuous-wave or pulsed Doppler
signals, either simultaneously with imaging or sequentially.
dynamic focusing: A method of changing the effective focal zone of a transducer

assembly during reception of echoes following a single
transmitted pulse. It is also used in a more general sense to
refer to change in focusing as a function of time.
dynamic imaging: Imaging of an object in motion, a technique which is frequently

referred to as real-time imaging.
dynamic range: The ratio of the largest undistorted signal to the smallest
detectable signal in a system. The largest signal is usually
limited by saturation of the electronics and the smallest by the
background noise level.
dynamic range (amplifier): The ratio in decibels of the maximum to the minimum output signal
which can be identified above the noise levels at a fixed gain.
dynamic range (display): The ratio in decibels of the maximum input signal which can be
displayed without reaching saturation to the smallest input signal
which can be identified visually above the noise level.
echo: Acoustic signal received from scattering elements or a specular

reflector.
echocardiogram: An echogram of the heart. See two-dimensional

echocardiography.
echocardiograph: An instrument used to record an echocardiogram.
echocardiography: Examination of the heart by diagnostic ultrasound.
t
Glossary G–11
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
echoencephalography: Examination of the brain by diagnostic ultrasound. Often this

term is restricted to mean—A-Mode echoencephalography.
echogenic: Describes a structure or medium (e.g., tissue) that is capable of

producing echoes. Contrast with the terms hypoechoic,
hyperechoic and anechoic, which refer to the paucity,
abundance and absence of echoes displayed on the image.
echogram: A record obtained using acoustic reflection techniques with any

one of the various display modes.
echography: Any imagine method using reflected sound. See echo ranging.
echolucent: A misnomer for anechoic and/or transonic.
echo-ophthalmography: Examination of the eye and orbit by diagnostic ultrasound.
echoventriculography: A method for echoencephalographic measurements of the

cerebral ventricles, or measurement of other ventricles as
appropriate in the field of application.
echo ranging: A technique for measuring distances in materials of known

acoustic velocity by measuring the transit time for the sound to
propagate from the transducer to the target and return. Echo
ranging techniques, in particular pulse-echo ultrasound, form the
basis for most of the ultrasonic visualization systems.
echo (signal) shaping: Image modification in which the echo waveform is changed
using techniques such as limiting or differentiation.
echo strength: The magnitude of an echo.
elevational resolution: The resolution at right angles to the image plane. This is
sometimes referred to as orthogonal resolution, vertical
resolution or slice thickness resolution.
energizing pulse (transmitter An electrical pulse used to excite (or “shock”) an ultrasonic
pulse): transducer. Frequently, the pulse is an impulse or “spike” whose
rise time is short compared to the natural period for the
fundamental resonant oscillations of the transducer.
energy per pulse: The ratio of the average acoustic power to the pulse repetition
frequency, measured in joules.
entrance beam dimensions: The dimensions of the beam cross-sectional area where the beam
enters the patient. For contact transducers these dimensions can
be taken as the dimensions of the radiating element.
envelope: A continuous curve connecting the peaks of the successive

cycles of a waveform.
exposure time: The total amount of time the transducer assembly is delivering
ultrasonic energy to the subject. For a pulsed waveform, this
includes the time between pulses.
f-number The focal length of a focused transducer divided by the diameter

of its radiating surface. This ratio is a measure of the focusing
power of the lens.
Glossary G–12 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
false echoes: See artifact.
far field (Fraunhofer zone): The region of the ultrasound beam sufficiently far from the
transducer so that wave fronts arriving from different regions of
the transducer surface reinforce each other. An ultrasound
beam is conveniently divided into two regions. The region
farthest from the transducer in called the far field or sometimes
the Fraunhofer zone. For an unfocused circular transducer
assembly, the far field commonly is ascribed to range greater
than r2/λ, where r is the radius of the transducer and λ is the
acoustic wavelength in the medium.
fast Fourier transform (FFT): A rapid method for computing the Fourier transform of a
function. The Fourier transform is a mathematical operation
which decomposes a function into an equivalent group of
sinusoidal functions of various frequencies and amplitudes. The
amplitudes of the frequency components are often displayed as
a plot of relative amplitude vs. frequency, known as the
amplitude spectrum. The FFT is frequently used to compute the
frequency components of the Doppler signal.
field, far: See far field.
field, near: See near field.
filter: A device or material used for suppressing acoustic or

electromagnetic waves of certain frequencies while allowing
others to pass. In digital computing, a filter is often an algorithm
or program which is used to eliminate or modify specific types of
information in a file while leaving the remaining data more or
less intact.
filter bandpass: A device or material which allows a limited range of frequencies

to pass.
filter, high-pass: A device or material which allows high-frequency but not

low-frequency signals to pass. An example is the electrical filter
used in Doppler devices to eliminate low-frequency Doppler
shifts caused by arterial wall motion.
filter, low-pass: A device or material which allows low-frequency but not

high-frequency signals to pass. By preferentially attenuating
sound at higher frequencies, most tissues act as low-pass filters.
fixed-focus transducer: A transducer whose focal length does not vary. The sound
beam is focused by use of a plastic lens or by curving the
transducer surface. Contrast with dynamic focusing.
flicker: A visibly apparent brightness fluctuation due to a display frame

rate that is too low for visual perception of continuous
brightness. Typically this will occur when the frame rate is below
15 frames per second.
flow rate: The rate of transfer of volume of fluid with time. Measured in
liters/second or milliliters/minute.
t
Glossary G–13
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
flow separation: A phenomenon whereby a body of fluid travels at high velocity

adjacent to fluid traveling at a lower velocity. At the flow
separation boundary both a high velocity gradient and high
shear stress are present. Flow separation often occurs just
distal to a vessel stenosis.
focal area: The area of the focal surface. See focal surface.
focal length: The axial distance from the centroid of the radiating surface of a
focusing transducer assembly to the focal surface. For a
focused ultrasound transducer it is the distance from the surface
of the transducer assembly to the narrowest point (focus) of the
beam.
focal ratio: See f-number.
focal surface: The surface containing the smallest of all beam cross-sectional
areas of a focused transducer assembly.
focal zone: The volume lying within the depth of focus and the perimeters of
the beam cross-sectional areas.
focus (focal point): The point of the axis of an ultrasonic beam where the width of
the beam has a minimum value: generally, all the waves passing
through the focus are in phase in relation to the surface of the
transducer or to the electronic summing point of an electronically
focused array.
focus, depth of: See depth of focus.
focusing, dynamic: A method for controlling the axial position of the focus of an
ultrasonic beam: often realized by phase control of the signals
detected by a transducer array.
focus transducer assembly: A transducer assembly for which the ratio of the smallest beam
cross-sectional area (focal area) to radiating cross-sectional
area of the transducer is less than 0.5.
Fourier analysis: A mathematical technique for the representation of a periodic

function (such as a time-varying waveform) as a sum of
sinusoidal functions of different frequencies. Each of these
constituent functions has a frequency that is an exact multiple of
the same number, the fundamental frequency. Fourier analysis
allows the presentation of a Doppler signal in terms of the
relative amplitude of the various Doppler shift frequencies of
which it is composed.
frame: A single complete image. This term is usually used to designate

a single image in a sequence of many similar images.
frame rate: The rate at which pictures are refreshed on the display of a
real-time system. This would normally correspond to the scan
rate of the transducer. In some systems, such as television, a
single frame is comprised of two interlaced fields. The frame
rate of standard television is 30 frames per second. See scan
repetition rate.
Glossary G–14 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
frequency: Number of cycles of a periodic process per unit of time, usually

expressed in hertz (Hz), or multiples such as megahertz (1 MHz
= 106 Hz). 1 Hz = 1 cycle per second.
frequency, Doppler Shift: The difference between the frequencies of the transmitted wave
and those of the echo received from a moving target.
frequency, received: The frequency of the signal detected by the receiving transducer.
frequency spectrum, The range of frequencies present in a signal at some time.

instantaneous:
frequency spectrum, mean: The range of frequencies in a spectrum averaged over a (long)
period of time.
Fresnel zone (near field): See near field.
gain: The ratio of the output to input of an amplifying system,

generally expressed in decibels (dB).
gate: A device which can be switched electronically to control the

passage of a signal. A gate may select a part of the signal based
on frequency, amplitude of time interval during which the signal
was received. For example, a range gate may be designed to
accept signals only from a specific range, or an ECG triggered
gate may pass signals from a specified portion of the cardiac cycle.
GHz: Abbreviation for gigahertz, equal to one billion hertz. 1 GHz =

109 Hz.
grating lobes: Unwanted beams of sound radiating in directions different from

the primary beam resulting from the multielement structure of
transducer arrays. The grating lobes may be responsible for
introducing artifactual echoes into an ultrasound image.
gray scale: A display technique in which echo amplitude or intensity

information is recorded as variations in brightness (shades of gray).
gray scale stretching: An image transformation in which luminance on the display is

not proportional to echo amplitudes. For a given magnitude of
change in echo amplitude, gray scale stretching usually causes
larger changes in display brightness for small echo amplitudes
than for large echo amplitudes.
half-power distance: See half-value layer.
half-value layer: The distance an ultrasound pulse must travel in one direction in
a medium to reduce its power to one-half of its original value.
The half-value layer is a means for quantifying tissue
attenuation.
hard copy: A permanent visual record stored on materials such as paper,

radiographic film, or photographic film, as opposed to an image
displayed on a video screen or stored on magnetic tape.
harmonic: A whole number multiple of the fundamental frequency of a

periodic quantity. For example, the second harmonic of a
1-MHz piezoelectric element is at 2 MHz. (Subharmonics also
are possible e.g., at 1/2, 1/3, etc. of the fundamental frequency.)
t
Glossary G–15
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
hertz: The standard unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second.
holography: A two-stage process of imaging. The object to be visualized is

uniformly irradiated with ultrasound (or light) and the reflected or
transmitted waves are sampled over a large area. The resulting
image or hologram is generated by recording the sum of the
reflected or transmitted waves and a reference wave or signal.
This resulting image is an interference pattern where the
contours are lines of constant phase. Although holograms
contain three-dimensional data, they are usually reconstructed
in acoustics so that only two dimensions are displayed.
hydrophone: A transducer designed for underwater measurement of acoustic

fields. The diameter of a hydrophone is usually smaller than the
wavelength of ultrasound to be measured, and its bandwidth is
large.
hyperechoic: An adjective describing a region in a sonographic image where

the echoes are brighter than normal or brighter than surrounding
structures.
hypoechoic: An adjective describing a region in a sonographic image where

the echoes are not as bright as normal or less bright than
surrounding structures.
Hz: Abbreviation for hertz, the unit of frequency. One hertz is one
cycle per second.
immersion coupling: A method of coupling an ultrasonic transducer to an object by

placing both in a bath of the coupling medium.
impedance: See acoustic impedance.
impedance, acoustic: See acoustic impedance.
impedance, fluid: The ratio of pressure to flow rate expressed as a function of

frequency in time-varying flow. Impedance summarizes the
effect on flow rate of resistance, compliance, and inertia when
the pressure varies with time.
impedance ratio: The ratio Z2/Z1 where Z1 and Z2 are the characteristic acoustic
impedance of two contiguous media, respectively.
incoherence: A condition in which the component waves in a sound beam are

not in phase. This occurs, for example, when several
independent unsynchronized transducer outputs are combined
to produce a sound beam.
in phase: A condition in which the waves of a sound beam are

synchronized such that all wave maxima occur simultaneously.
integration: Mathematically, the reverse of the process of differentiation.

Integration of a mathematical function over an interval gives the
area under the function between the upper and lower limits of
the interval.
Glossary G–16 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
intensity: The intensity (I) of a wave is the rate of energy flow (power)
through a unit area perpendicular to the direction of propagation.
The unit of intensity is watts per square meter or, more
commonly, watts per square centimeter. The particular intensity
intended should be specified as defined below.
instantaneous intensity: The instantaneous acoustic power transmitted in a specified

direction per unit area normal to this direction at the point
considered. For measurement purposes, this point is restricted to
where it is reasonable to assume that the acoustic pressure and
particle velocity are in phase, viz, in the far-field or the area of the
focus. Under such conditions, the instantaneous intensity can be
expressed as: I = ρ2/pc where ρ is the instantaneous acoustic
pressure, p is the density of the medium, and c is the speed of
sound in the medium.
pulse-average intensity: The time-average of instantaneous intensity at a point in space,

when averaged over the pulse duration. (May be calculated
approximately as the ratio of the temporal average intensity to
duty factor).
spatial-average intensity: The same as the spatial-average temporal-average intensity.

Generally, this parameter is used when specifying the intensity for
continuous-wave (cw) ultrasound.
spatial-average pulse- The pulse average intensity averaged over the beam cross-
average intensity (SAPA): sectional area. (May be calculated as the ratio of acoustic power
to the product of duty factor and beam cross-sectional area).
spatial-average temporal- The temporal average intensity averaged over the beam cross-
average intensity (SATA): sectional area in a specified plane. (May be calculated as the
ratio of acoustic power to the beam cross-sectional area).
spatial-peak pulse- The value of the pulse average intensity at the point in the
average intensity (SPPA): acoustic field where the pulse average intensity is a maximum,
or is a local maximum within a specified region.
spatial-peak temporal- The temporal average intensity at the point in the acoustic field
average intensity (SPTA): where this intensity is a maximum or is a local maximum within a
specified region.
spatial-peak temporal- The value of temporal peak intensity at the point in the acoustic
peak intensity (SPTP): field where the temporal peak intensity is a maximum, or is a
local maximum within a specified region.
temporal average The time-average of instantaneous intensity at a point in space;

intensity: this is equal to the mean value of the instantaneous intensity at
the point considered. For non-auto-scanning systems, the
instantaneous intensity is averaged over one or more scan
repetition periods for a specified operation mode.
temporal peak intensity: The peak value of the instantaneous intensity at the point
considered. It is given by P2/ρc, where P is the peak
instantaneous acoustic pressure, ρ is the density of the medium,
and c is the speed of sound in the medium.
interface: A boundary between two materials. In acoustics, an interface is

the surface forming the boundary between two media having
different acoustic properties.
t
Glossary G–17
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
interference: The phenomenon in which two or more waves add together or

cancel each other, according to their amplitudes and phases.
interference, constructive: The phenomenon of interference in which the resultant wave

has an amplitude greater than that of either of the two interfering
waves alone.
interference, destructive: The phenomenon of interference in which the resultant wave

has an amplitude less than that of either of the two interfering
waves alone.
isotropic: Having nondirectional properties (i.e., physical properties that are

independent of direction). For example, the speed of sound is not
a function of the direction of propagation through an isotropic
material. In contrast, the velocity of sound in muscle differs when
propagating parallel to the fibers than when propagating at right
angle to the fibers; thus, muscle is anisotropic.
jet: A region of very high blood flow velocity extending downstream

from a vessel stenosis.
jitter: Small rapid irregularities in the registration of the image display

due to electronic noise, mechanical disturbance, supply voltage,
changes in properties of components, etc.
kHz: Abbreviation for one kilohertz (1000 Hz).
laminar flow: Flow in which there is smooth and gradual variation of velocity
with position. Flow may be thought of as comprising a series of
individual laminae, each moving at one velocity, with viscous
cohesion maintaining the flow of adjacent laminae at nearly the
same velocity.
lateral resolution: The minimum separation between two equally reflecting point
reflectors in a direction perpendicular to the beam axis at which
the individual reflectors can be distinguished in the image
display. See azimuthal resolution.
lead zirconate titanate: A ferroelectric ceramic used for piezoelectric elements in

transducer assemblies. PbNi03.
limiting: A technique which does not permit a voltage level to exceed a

specified value. This may be an inherent limitation of a
component or a system rather than a technique, per se.
linear amplifier: An amplifier for which the output amplitude varies linearly with
the input amplitude.
linear scan: The motion of a transducer at constant speed along a straight

line at right angles to the beam.
linear transducer array: A transducer array in which the transducer elements are
arranged in a single row.
logarithmic amplifier: An amplifier for which the output is proportional to the logarithm
of the ratio of an input voltage and a reference voltage.
Logarithmic amplifiers selectively enhance the distinguishability
of small echoes in gray scale displays.
Glossary G–18 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
longitudinal: Parallel with the beam axis, or with the long axis of the body or
other object of interest. For example, longitudinal scan or
longitudinal sound wave.
longitudinal image plane: Any image plane which passes through or which is parallel to
the long axis of the body. Sagittal and coronal planes are both
specific types of longitudinal image planes.
longitudinal resolution: See axial resolution.
longitudinal wave: Wave motion for which the particle displacement in the medium
is parallel to the direction of wave propagation.
M-Mode (motion-mode): A method of display in which tissue interface position is

displayed along one axis and time is displayed along the second
axis. M-Mode is used frequently to display echocardiographic
data in which heart wall motion and valve motion are displayed
as functions of time.
MHz: Abbreviation for one megahertz, or one million cycles per

second.
medium: Any material through which a sound wave travels.
mirror-image artifact (Doppler): Loss of directional resolution in a Doppler system employing

phase-quadrature detection, resulting in a “mirror image” of the
spectral display about the zero-frequency axis. The artifact may
be seen when the signal level is too great or when the Doppler
angle is near to 90°.
mirror-image artifact (imaging): A multiple path reflection artifact in which the sonographic image
of a structure is duplicated in a different location and appears as
a mirror-image of the original.
mixer: A device that combines two or more signals. In ultrasound

instrumentation, mixers multiply two signals to obtain one signal
which contains both the sum and the difference of the two input
frequencies.
monostable: An electrical circuit that produces a second pulse at a known

delay following the application of a triggering pulse.
narrowband: An adjective referring to the ability of a device to pass only a

very limited range of frequencies is a signal. The frequency
spectrum usually consists of a single narrow peak.
narrowband transducer: A transducer with a fractional bandwidth less than 15 percent.
near field (Fresnel zone): The region closest to the transducer is called the near field. In
contrast to the far field, the near field is characterized by its
great inhomogeneity in sound intensity. For a circular
transducer, the transition from the near field to the far field
occurs approximately at a range of r2/λ, where r is the radius of
the transducer and λ is the wavelength.
near gain: Amplification of echo signals arising from structures close to the
transducer. These signals tend to be larger than those received
from more distant structures because of attenuation in the
propagating medium.
t
Glossary G–19
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
noise: Unwanted, and usually random, signals.
noise, electrical: Noise signals arising within the electrical circuits.
normal: At right angles; perpendicular.
Nyquist criterion: The criterion that a continuously varying signal can only be
unambiguously represented by instantaneous samples if the
sampling rate is more than twice the maximum frequency
present in the signal.
Nyquist limit: The highest frequency in a sampled signal that can be represented
unambiguously: equal to one-half of the sampling frequency.
off-time: The duration of time that an acoustically coupled transducer is

not emitting sound. See on-time.
on-time: The time in which the transducer is actively emitting sound. The
sum of pulse durations during the total time that the transducer
is acoustically coupled to the subject or other object of interest.
Contrasted with “off-time” which is the sum of intervals between
pulses when the transducer is not electrically driven. Total time
= on-time + off-time.
operating condition: Any one of the possible control settings for an operating mode.
operating mode: Any one of the possible imaging modes of an ultrasound

instrument. Example are: A-Mode, M-Mode, B-scan, CW
Doppler, and pulsed Doppler modes.
orthogonal: At right angles; perpendicular.
overshoot: Those portions of a transient signal whose magnitudes are

greater than the steady state value.
parabolic mirror: A reflector or mirror that is curved such that all sound emanating
from a central focal point will be reflected into a collimated beam
leaving the mirror. The reflectors used in the head lamps of
automobiles are parabolic mirrors.
parasagittal plane: See sagittal plane.
particle: Any relatively small subdivision of matter, ranging in diameter

from a few angstroms (as with gas molecules) to a few
millimeters (as with large raindrops). In ultrasonics, the particle
is usually taken to have homogeneous composition and a
diameter which is much less than the wavelengths involved.
particle velocity: The instantaneous velocity of a particle, with reference to the

medium as a whole, due to the passage of a sound wave.
peak compressional pressure (pc): The spatial-peak temporal-peak positive pressure amplitude.
peak instantaneous intensity: See intensity and spatial peak.
peak intensity: See intensity and spatial peak.
peak rarefactional pressure (pr): The spatial-peak temporal-peak negative pressure amplitude.
Glossary G–20 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
phantom: A passive device which simulates some parameters of a human

body, allowing measurements of ultrasound system parameters
or visualization of simulated anatomical features. Phantoms are
useful for assessing the clinical performance of a diagnostic or
therapeutic ultrasound system.
phase angle: The difference between the phase of a sinusoidally varying

quantity and the phase of a second quantity which varies
sinusoidally at the same frequency. Also know as phase
difference. Expressed in degrees or in radians.
phase-quadrature: A signal-processing technique depending on an input signal

being available both with its original phase and shifted through
90 degrees of phase angle.
phase shift: A change in the phase of a periodic quantity. The term can be
applied to a pulsatile wave for which the phase shift can be
approximated as an integral number of cycles of a sinusoidal
wave. In passing through tissue, a phase shift can be
interpreted as a delay.
phased array: A transducer configuration which consists of several

piezoelectric elements which can be excited independently.
Using proper time delays of the excitations, a wavefront of the
desired configuration can be synthesized. Phased arrays have
been utilized for electronic beam steering and focusing.
piezoelectric effect: The property of certain crystals by which mechanical

deformation produces an electrical voltage across the crystals,
and vice versa.
pixel: A contraction of ‘picture element’. It is the smallest spatial unit

or cell size of a digitized, 2-dimensional array representation of
an image. Each pixel has an address, or set of x- and
y-coordinates corresponding to its position in the array, and a
specific brightness level assigned to this position.
plane wave: A wave associated with a unique direction such that the values
of the wave parameter (such as acoustic pressure) are identical
on any mathematical plane perpendicular to that direction.
power: The time rate of doing work. If one object does work on another,
then energy “flows” to the other: thus, power is sometimes
defined as the time rate of energy flow. The unit of power is the
watt, and 1 watt = 1 joule per second.
power spectrum: A graph showing the relative power of each frequency

component contained in a signal. For a Doppler signal, the
power spectrum gives the distribution of Doppler shift
frequencies present in the signal.
preamplifier: An electronic amplifier used prior to the main amplifier. In many

instruments, the preamplifier is separated from the rest of the
ultrasonic console and located in or near the transducer probe.
This provides the shortest possible path from transducer to input
circuit and is intended to achieve the best possible
signal-to-noise ratio.
pressure: See acoustic pressure.
t
Glossary G–21
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
pressure waves: Another name for acoustic waves.
pseudo-color: An addition of color coding in an image in which the color is

artificially encoded rather than existing naturally. Encoding
blood flow toward a transducer as red and that away as blue in
Doppler flow displays is an example of pseudo-color.
pulsatility index: A parameter used to quantify the pulsatile nature of a time-varying

waveform. Indices of pulsatility are usually ratios of Doppler shift
frequencies and are hence independent of Doppler angle. The
most common definition of pulsatility index (PI) of a waveform,
such as that defined by the maximum Doppler shift frequency, is
the difference between the maximum and minimum value divided
by the mean value of the waveform over the cardiac cycle.
pulse average intensity: See intensity.
pulse duration: The time interval beginning when the absolute value of the
acoustic pressure exceeds 31.6% (-10 dB) of the maximum
absolute value of the acoustic pressure and ending at the last
time the absolute value of acoustic pressure returns to this
value. This term is preferable to pulse length.
pulse-echo response profile: Graph of an echo signal parameter as a function of the position,
relative to the transducer, of a well-defined reflector.
pulse-echo technique: See echo ranging.
pulse intensity integral: The time integral of intensity, for any specific point and pulse,
integrated over the time in which the envelope of acoustic
pressure or hydrophone signal for the specific pulse is nonzero.
For a transducer assembly operating in a non-auto-scanning
mode, this is equivalent to the product of temporal average
intensity and pulse repetition period.
pulse length: See pulse duration.
pulse pair covariance: Particular type of autocorrelation processing in which signals

obtained from successive pulses are correlated.
pulse pressure: The difference between the peak systolic and minimum diastolic
pressures in the cardiac cycle.
pulse repetition frequency (PRF): The repetition rate of the transmission pulses of a pulse-echo
system; the inverse of the pulse repetition period. Typically, the
PRF of a system may be in the range from 1 kHz to 5 kHz.
pulse repetition period: The time interval between corresponding points on the
waveform of two successive pulses.
pulse repetition rate: The same as pulse repetition frequency.
pulse stretching: Increase in pulse duration due, for example, to the imposition of
a bandwidth limitation.
pulse waveform: The graphical record of the amplitude of a sound pulse as a

function of time.
Glossary G–22 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
pulse Doppler (range gated Doppler interrogation using a pulsed mode of transmission.
Doppler): Temporal gating of the returning echoes allows determination of
the Doppler shift from within a specific region at a known distance
from the transducer. This region is known as the sample volume.
PZT: See lead zirconate titanate.
quarter wavelength matching: The addition of a layer in front of a transducer with the thickness
of the layer equalling one fourth of the acoustic wavelength
within it. This layer is intended to result in the maximum transfer
of acoustic power to and from the transducer, thus providing the
greatest sensitivity. The impedance of the matching layer has to
be the geometric mean of the transducer and tissue impedance
for maximum power transfer. In more sophisticated transducers,
two such layers are sometimes used for improved performance.
quartz: A naturally occurring crystal with piezoelectric properties

formerly used in the construction of transducers.
radial mode: A mode of vibration in a piezoelectric disc in which all particle

motions are perpendicular to the axis of symmetry of the disk. It
does not contribute to the desired acoustic output of the
transducer. Therefore, it is regarded as a parasitic oscillation.
radiating cross-sectional area: The beam cross-sessional area at and parallel to the transducer
face consisting of all points where the acoustic pressure is
greater than 10 percent of the maximum acoustic pressure in
that plane. The area of the active element of the transducer
assembly may be taken as an approximation for the radiating
cross-sectional area.
radio frequency (RF): A frequency within the range utilized in radio broadcasting,
namely 10 kHz to 100,000 MHz. In ultrasonics, RF refers to the
frequency(ies) of signals from the transducer before detection.
radio frequency presentation: Display of the radio frequency signals prior to signal processing.
ramp: A linearly time varying waveform. For example, the linear time
base for an oscilloscope is generated by a ramp. See time gain
compensation.
random access memory: An information storage device which permits direct retrieval of
any bit of the information. This is the type of memory utilized in
a digital computer.
range: See depth.
range, dynamic: The range of values of a variable over which a change in input
produces a change in output.
range gating: An electronic process in which all echo signals are ignored
except for those occurring within a preselected “window”. This
is accomplished using an appropriate time delay circuit to select
for analysis a portion of an ultrasound signal according to its
depth along the ultrasound beam.
range resolution: See axial resolution.
t
Glossary G–23
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
rarefactions: When a sound beam passes through a medium, the material is

compressed in some regions and expanded in other regions.
Between the compressed regions, or molecular condensations,
are expanded regions in which the molecules are sparse.
These sparse regions are called rarefactions.
real-time: The scanning and display of ultrasonic images at a sufficiently

rapid rate that moving structures can be “seen” to move at their
natural rate. Frame rates of 15 frames per second or greater
are considered real-time.
real-time display: A display for which the image is continuously renewed, keeping
pace with changes in the object, and in which storage or
processing time does not delay appreciably the image
presentation. Images are renewed at a rate of at least 15
frames per second. The high data rate characteristic of
real-time displays results in the continuously updated image
analogous to television, so that moving structures, such as the
heart valves, can be visualized. The high frame rate is also
useful when using the scanning system in the search mode.
real-time ultrasonic visualization An ultrasound system providing a real-time display of ultrasonic

system: images.
receiving transducer: A transducer dedicated to receiving sound. In pulse-echo

systems, this device would receive returning echoes.
reciprocity: A physical principle stating that transmission characteristics of

any sound path are the same in either direction. One
application of this concept is that the directivity pattern of a
plane piston acting as a transmitting transducer is identical with
its directivity pattern when it is acting as a receiving transducer.
rectangular array: A multielement transducer array in which the piezoelectric

elements are arranged in a rectangular pattern.
rectangular scan format: The rectangular shaped image pattern resulting from a linear
sequentially fired transducer array.
rectification: An electronic processing technique in which all negative valued

portions of a signal are made to equal zero. In some cases, the
negative portions are included after an inversion in which all
negative values are changed to positive ones.
red cell stasis: An in vivo phenomenon (observed in the chick embryo irradiated
with cw ultrasound) wherein the erythrocytes within small
vessels stop flowing and collect in the low pressure regions
(nodes) of the standing wave field. (Judged not applicable to
pulsed diagnostic ultrasound systems).
reflected acoustic pulse: See echo.
Glossary G–24 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
reflection: Change in the direction of propagation of a component of a wave

that is propagating in one medium and encounters an extended
interface with another medium of different acoustic properties.
The amplitude of the reflected wave is related to the differences in
the densities and speeds of sound of the two media. The angle
of the reflection from a plane interface which is large compared to
the acoustic wavelength is equal to the angle (between the wave
vector and the normal to the interface) of the incident wave.
reflection coefficient (amplitude): The ratio, r, of the reflected to the incident wave pressure
amplitudes for normal incidence on a smooth planar interface
between two media. r = (Z2-Z1)/(Z2+Z1), where Z1 and Z2 are
the characteristic acoustic impedance of the first and second
media, respectively.
reflection coefficient (intensity): The ratio, R, of the reflected to the incident wave intensities for
normal incidence on a smooth planar interface between two
media. R=(Z2-Z1)2/(Z2+Z1)2, where Z1 and Z2 the characteristic
acoustic impedances of the first and second media, respectively.
reflection mode imaging: A technique which makes use of the reflected acoustic energy to
produce the image. Also called echo ranging.
reflection, specular: The phenomenon of reflection of a wave by a flat, smooth

surface large in relation to the wavelength.
reflectivity: The capability of reflecting sound.
refraction: The bending of sound waves as they cross interfaces or

boundaries. The phenomenon of changing the direction of
propagation as an obliquely incident acoustic wave propagates
from a medium of one speed of sound to a second medium of
different speed of sound.
refractive index: The ratio of speed of sound within an object to the speed in some
reference material. In optics, refractive index is referred to the
speed of light in a vacuum. In acoustics, there is no generally
accepted reference standard and the immediate surround is
usually utilized in calculating the refractive index. In the latter
case it is more proper to call this the relative refractive index.
registration accuracy: A quality of the display related to the accuracy of representation

of the position of acoustic targets. It generally refers to display
errors produced by refraction, position sensing and computation
devices for the B-Mode scanning arm, or inadequacy of the CRT
spot in representing the location of echo-producing interfaces.
rejection: A signal processing technique to improve the apparent

signal-to-noise ratio by eliminating low amplitude signals from a
display. This technique emphasizes strong echoes at the
expense of noise and weaker echoes.
relaxation: A class of processes by which acoustic energy is absorbed in a

medium.
resistance, fluid: With steady flow, the resistance is the ratio of pressure drop to
flow rate.
t
Glossary G–25
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
resistance index: An index of pulsatility defined as the difference between the

maximum and minimum Doppler shifts divided by the maximum.
Also known as the Pourcelot index.
resolution (spatial): A measure of the ability of a system to display distinguishable

images of two closely spaced point structures as discrete
targets. Also see azimuthal resolution, lateral resolution, axial
(longitudinal) resolution.
reverberation: The phenomenon of multiple reflections within a closed system.

This phenomenon causes echoes to be misplaced, thereby
presenting false information. Multiple reflections may be
identified in an image by moving the transducer relative to the
object. The multiple reflections will move faster than the primary
echoes because the primary echoes move a distance on the
display which is equivalent to twice the incremental distance,
while the first multiple reflection moves a distance equivalent to
four times the increment.
root mean square (RMS): The square root of the mean value of the square of the wave
amplitude.
s-d ratio: An index of pulsatility defined as the ratio of the maximum

(usually the peak systolic) to the minimum (usually the
end-diastolic) Doppler shift frequencies.
sagittal plane: Any one of a set of anterior-posterior planes parallel to the long
axis of the body. Sagittal planes not passing through the center
of the body are frequently called parasagittal planes.
sample volume: The region in space from which Doppler data are collected for
analysis in pulsed/range-gated Doppler systems. The size of
the sample volume is axially determined by the length of the
transmitted acoustic pulse and the length of the range gate. The
width is determined by the lateral width of the ultrasound beam.
sampling angle: The angle of incidence between the direction of flow and the
direction of sampling within the imaged plane. This angle may
be estimated during the Doppler examination. See Doppler
frequency shift.
SAR: See specific absorption rate (SAR).
scale factor: Generally, the relationship between the input and output of a
system. In ultrasound diagnosis, it commonly refers to the ratio
of the displayed size of an object to the real size of the object.
scan: The moving of an acoustic beam to produce an image, for which

the ultrasound beam and the display movements are
synchronized in space and time.
scan converter: An instrument or memory device to transform pictorial

information from one format into another. In diagnostic
ultrasound instrumentation, the scan converter takes echo
information at the rate and in the sequence that arrives from the
transducer and converts and sorts out this information into the
correct rate and spatial arrangement for display on a video or
oscilloscopic screen.
Glossary G–26 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
scan format: The two dimensional spatial pattern of a sonographic image

display. Scan formats include rectangular, sector and
trapezoidal types.
scan line: A B-Mode presentation of the echoes received in a specified

direction. B-Mode images are composed of many scan lines. In
general, the more scan lines an image has, the more detail that
can be portrayed.
scan repetition rate: The repetition rate of a complete frame, sector, or scan. The term
applies to automatic scanning systems only. See frame rate.
scanner: A device that moves an acoustic beam relative to a target. This

is accomplished mechanically or electronically using a
multielement transducer array.
scan cross-sectional area (for The area, on the surface considered, consisting of all points
auto-scanning systems): occurring within the beam cross-sectional area of any beam
passing through the surface during the scan.
scanning system: Any instrumentation which provides the ability to obtain

ultrasound scans.
scatter: Any directional change in all or part of an ultrasound beam due

to the existence of inhomogeneity in density and/or speed of
sound in the propagating medium.
scatterer: An object which causes scattering. See scatter.
scattering: The production of scatter. See scatter.
search mode: Optimizing the position and orientation of the scanning unit to
visualize structures of interest.
sector: An area having the shape of a piece of pie.
sector scan: A system of scanning in which the transducer or transmitted

beam is rotated through an angle.
sector scan format: The pie- or sector-shaped image pattern resulting from a sector
scan.
sensitivity time control (STC): See time gain compensation.
sequential access storage: An information storage device which requires the sequential
interrogation of information in the device until the sought-after
information is obtained. A magnetic tape is such a device.
Compare to random access memory.
shadowing: Reduction in echo amplitudes distal to a strongly attenuating or

reflecting structure.
shear stress: A stress in which the material on one side of a surface drags on
the material on the other side of the surface with a force which is
parallel to the surface. In a fluid, the name given to a force
acting in the direction of flow, tending to change the velocity
between adjacent laminae.
t
Glossary G–27
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
shock excitation: A manner of transducer excitation in which a very short electrical

impulse is applied to the transducer for the purpose of
generating a short sound pulse.
shock parameter (σ): A parameter characterizing the degree of nonlinearity in the

propagation of an ultrasound beam. A value of less than one
would indicate a linear condition and a value above three would
indicate a marked nonlinear condition.
short axis scan: A cardiac scan in which the scanning plane is at right angles to
the long axis of the heart (base to apex).
sideband: The components of a signal whose frequencies are either above

(upper sideband) or below (lower sideband) the frequency of the
transmitted (carrier) signal.
side lobe: Secondary beam generated by a transducer and which deviates

from the direction of the main beam. Usually the maximum
intensity of the side lobe is significantly less than that of the
main lobe. The presence of side lobes may be responsible for
introducing artifactual echoes into an ultrasound image.
signal (electrical): That component of a varying electrical voltage or current which

contains information, as opposed to containing noise.
signal-noise ratio (S/N): The ratio of the amplitude of a signal to that of noise. The larger
the signal-noise ratio, the easier it is to detect and measure a
signal. The sensitivity of any device is ultimately limited by the
signal-noise ratio. The S/N ratio is usually expressed in decibels.
single sweep scan: A scan mode (in a static B-scanner) in which the transducer is
passed only once over the tissue to be examined. This scan
mode may be used where relative motion of tissue could be
expected and where this motion would obscure the desired detail.
sonar: The term “sonar” is the generic term for echo ranging. Acronym
from sound navigation ranging.
sonic: An adjective relating to sound.
sonoencephalograph: See echoencephalography.
sonogram: The pictorial record of an ultrasound examination.
sonographer: A highly skilled professional qualified by technological education

to provide patient services using diagnostic ultrasound under the
supervision of a doctor of medicine or osteopathy.
Sonographers assist physicians in performing ultrasound
examinations and gathering sonographic data necessary to
reach diagnostic decisions.
sonography: Any imaging method using sound and yielding an image or a

graphical representation of the subject. This is a more inclusive
term than echography in as much as transmission sonography is
also included.
sonolucent: A misnomer for transonic or anechoic.
Glossary G–28 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
sonopaque: A misnomer for a region on a B-scan completely filled in with

echoes.
sound: Vibrational energy that propagates through a medium. Liquids and

gases support longitudinal (compressional) waves. Solids will
support other vibrational modes in addition to longitudinal waves.
sound pressure amplitude: The deviation from the ambient value of the pressure in a
medium due to the presence of an acoustic wave. It usually
refers to the peak instantaneous wave pressure, but also may
be the general instantaneous, or root-mean-square (RMS)
pressure. The pressure amplitude of an acoustic wave may be
measured with a linear device such as a hydrophone.
sound propagation speed: See speed of sound.
source: The origin of the wave in question: for example, the transmitting
transducer or the surface or object reflecting or scattering the
wave.
spatial-average intensity: Refers to the value of wave intensity averaged over the beam’s
cross-sectional area. An abbreviated form of spatial-average
temporal-average intensity. Generally, this parameter is used
when specifying a continuous waveform.
spatial-average pulse-average See this entry under intensity.

intensity (SAPA):
spatial-average temporal-average See this entry under intensity.

intensity (SATA):
spatial-peak pulse average See this entry under intensity.

intensity (SPPA):
spatial-peak temporal-average See this entry under intensity.

intensity (SPTA):
spatial-peak temporal-peak See this entry under intensity.

intensity (SPTP):
specific absorption rate (SAR): The rate at which energy is absorbed per unit mass of tissue.
SAR is expressed in units of watts per kilogram.
specific acoustic impedance: The ratio of instantaneous acoustic pressure to instantaneous

particle velocity. For a plane progressive wave in a lossless
medium, the specific acoustic impedance is numerically equal to
the characteristic acoustic impedance.
speckle: The granular appearance of an ultrasound image due to the

coherent addition (i.e., constructive and destructive interference)
of detected echo signals arising from randomly distributed
scatterers within a sample volume.
spectral broadening: The width of the Doppler spectrum on a sonogram display

corresponds to the range of Doppler shift frequencies present at
a given time. Spectral broadening will be seen when this range
is increased. It occurs, for example, when laminar flow changes
to turbulent flow.
t
Glossary G–29
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
spectral width: See bandwidth.
spectrum: The distribution of the amplitude (and sometimes phase) of the

components of the wave as a function of frequency. The set of
frequencies, wavelengths or related quantities involved in an
ultrasonic pulse or electronic signal.
specular reflection: Reflection of sound energy from a smooth surface which is large
compared to the wavelength. In contrast to diffuse reflection
from rough surfaces, specular reflection implies that the angle of
reflection equals the angle of incidence.
speed: Distance traveled per unit of time.
speed of sound: The speed at which sound travels through a material. The
speed of sound is a property of a material. In a fluid medium,
p
sound speed is determined by the properties of the propagation
medium: c= (K/p), where p is the mean density of the medium
and K is the adiabatic bulk modulus. Also called sound
propagation speed.
spherical wave: A wave which emanates from a point source and propagates
evenly in all directions producing a spherical wave front.
standing-wave field: The occurrence in a medium of two sound waves of equal

magnitude and frequency but traveling in opposite directions.
This results in a pattern of stationary pressure peaks and nodes
occurring at half wavelength intervals. In this situation, there is
no net flow of acoustic energy.
steady state: The stable existence of a situation stable enough to allow

variations with time to be neglected.
stenosis: The local narrowing of a vessel lumen, usually as the result of a

disease process.
stereoscopic: Pertaining to three-dimensional viewing.
strain: The change in shape of a structure due to an imposed stress.

The strain is termed elastic if the material returns to its original
shape after removal of the stress. The strain is called plastic if
the material does not return to its original shape.
streamline: A line which is everywhere parallel to the direction of fluid flow at

a given instant.
super position principle: A principle stating that if a linear physical system is acted upon
by a number of independent influences, the resultant response
is the sum of the responses from each of the influences acting
individually.
suppression: The elimination of undesired noise from the desired signal.

Rejection eliminates weak signals below a threshold level.
Logarithmic amplification suppresses large signals relative to
weak ones. Squaring the signals suppresses weak signals
relative to strong ones.
Glossary G–30 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
swept gain: The process by which the gain of a pulse-echo system is varied
with time to compensate for the effects of attenuation; also see
gain compensation or attenuation compensation.
systole: The pumping portion of the cardiac cycle during which the aortic
valve is open. Identifiable from the Doppler waveform as the
period from the foot of the velocity pulse to the dicrotic notch.
systolic window: See window, systolic.
target: A scatterer or ensemble of scatterers giving rise to a signal

within the effective ultrasonic beam.
temporal: Pertaining to time.
temporal average intensity: See this entry under intensity.
temporal peak intensity: See this entry under intensity.
test object: A simple device for the evaluation of one or more parameters of
an ultrasound system. In distinction to a phantom it does not
necessarily duplicate the acoustical properties of the human
body. It usually contains wires and possible other targets giving
rise to echoes in response to an ultrasonic pulse. See phantom.
texture pattern of echoes: The speckle pattern arising from an area of interest in the body.
The pattern depends primarily upon the transducer frequency
and beam characteristics, and secondarily upon the structure of
the scattering tissues.
theoretical angular beam width: The computed angle subtended by two far field, off-axis points in
a plane containing the beam axis, where the computed quantity
(specify pressure, velocity or intensity) is at its first null (or some
other specified value) of its axial magnitude; the angular beam
width is computed on the basis of continuous excitation unless
otherwise specified.
thermal energy: Energy due to random molecular motion.
through-transmission imaging: The process of imaging by transmitting the sound pulse through
the specimen and receiving the transmitted energy on a far
surface or a receiving transducer or array. See holography and
transsonogram.
time base: A device which moves the fluorescent spot repetitively across
the screen of the cathode-ray tube.
time-compensated gain: See time-gain compensation.
time constant: The time required for a device or process to fall to 36.8% of its
initial level following an excitation.
time-gain compensation (TGC): Increase in receiver gain with time to compensate for loss in
echo amplitude, usually due to attenuation, with depth. See
depth compensation, ramp, attenuation compensation and
swept gain.
t
Glossary G–31
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
time interval histogram: A kind of frequency spectral display in which the signal is
displayed as a histogram representing the frequency of
occurrence of a spectrum of bands of zero crossing frequencies.
tissue-mimicking material: A material possessing acoustic propagation properties such as

speed of sound, scatter and attenuation, similar to those of
tissue. This type of material is often used in the construction of
phantoms.
T-M mode: Synonym for M-Mode.
tomography: A method of imaging in which the contents of a tree-dimensional

“slice” of the patient are portrayed as a two-dimensional image.
Most contemporary ultrasound imaging is a form of tomopraphy.
transceiver: A transducer used both for transmission and reception of

acoustic energy. This is the customary configuration in
diagnostic ultrasonography.
transceiver voltage response: The ratio of the voltage amplitude of the energizing pulse to the
resulting voltage amplitude corresponding to the echo from a
perfect-planar reflector at a specified distance.
transducer: A device capable of converting energy from one form to another.

Specifically in ultrasonics, the device used to convert electrical
energy to mechanical energy and, reciprocally, to convert
mechanical energy to electrical energy. If the device is used
only to transmit or to receive, the device should be referred to as
the “transmitting” or “receiving” transducer. If, in the application,
the device performs both functions, the term may be left
unqualified, or called a transceiver.
transducer array: A group of transducers working together to form a functional

unit. Arrays may be of several types, depending on the
transducer configuration; linear, annular, rectangular, etc.
transducer assembly: The portion of a fully assembled ultrasonic diagnostic product

which is designed to emit and/or receive ultrasonic radiation and
which includes one or more ultrasonic transducers and any
associated electronic circuitry and housing. A transducer assembly
is attached to an ultrasound console by means of its cable.
transducer efficiency: The ratio of ultrasonic output power from a transmitting

transducer to the electrical input power. Also, the ratio of
electrical output power from a receiving transducer to the
ultrasonic input power. These ratios need not be equal.
transducer element: A piece of piezoelectric material in a transducer assembly.
Glossary G–32 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
transducer ring-down: The time course of the amplitude decay of oscillation of a

shock-excited transducer. When an ultrasonic transducer is
used in the pulsed mode, it is shock-excited by a voltage spike
which puts energy into the resonant mechanical system of the
transducer. This energy is dissipated by the combination of the
viscous damping in the transducer, the acoustic load at the front
and back of the transducer, and the dynamic damping provided
by the trailing edge of the excitation. The resulting damped
oscillation has been referred to by some authors as ring-down.
The total damping provides for improved axial resolution by
shortening the pulse duration.
transfer function: A mathematical formula used to characterized a system. It is

the ratio of output frequency spectrum to input frequency
spectrum and therefore permits the prediction of the output of
any linear system for any given input.
transient: A pulsed, damped oscillation or other temporary phenomenon

occurring in a system prior to reaching a steady-state condition.
transit time broadening: The spectral broadening that occurs as a consequence of the
movement of scatterers through a Doppler sample volume. The
smaller the sample volume, the greater the transit time broadening.
transition zone: That portion of the acoustic field between the Fresnel zone (near
field) and the Fraunhofer zone (far field) which encompasses the
last maximum occurring along the beam axis. The transition zone
has no distinct boundaries but frequently is taken to be centered
at the position of the last axial maximum. For a plane piston
source, this position is given by r2/λ where r is the transducer
radius and λ is the acoustic wavelength in the medium.
transmission: A general term implying passage of energy through a material.
transmission imaging: The production of an image by analysis of sound which

completely traverses the body and is detected by a second
transducer located on the opposite side.
transmitted acoustic pulse: The acoustic pulse transmitted from the transducer into the
medium following the application of an energizing pulse.
transmitter complex: The complex signal shown on an A-Mode display upon

application of the energizing pulse; the beam being directed into a
homogeneous medium such as degassed water. It includes
effects such as those caused by receiver overload and reflections
within the transducer assembly (transducer ring-down).
transmitter pulse: See energizing pulse.
transmitting transducer: A transducer dedicated to transmitting sound.
transonic: Describes a region of a relatively unattenuating medium. A

distinction should be made between a transonic region and a
shadowing region; generally, this is done by observing the back
boundary and underlying structures. See anechoic.
transsonogram: Acoustic image obtained using a through-transmission method.
turbulence: Disorganized or chaotic fluid flow.
t
Glossary G–33
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
two-dimensional echo- B-Mode imaging of the heart.

cardiography:
UCT: An acronym for “ultrasound computed tomography” in which the

image is reconstructed by computer in a manner analogous to
conventional x-ray CT reconstruction.
ultrasonic: Pertaining to sound at frequencies higher than that which can be

detected by the human ear. Usually refers to sound with a
frequency greater than 20 kHz.
ultrasonic pulse: A short burst of ultrasound which is transmitted into the body by
a pulse echo ultrasound instrument.
ultrasonic shadow: See acoustic shadow.
ultrasonic transducer: A device that converts ultrasonic energy into an electrical signal
and vice versa. See transducer.
ultrasonogram: Any image obtained from ultrasonic examination methods. The

term may be qualified by adjectives appropriate to the field of
application. The term includes both echograms and
transsonograms.
ultrasound: Sound at frequencies above the range of human (conventionally,

above 20 kHz).
uniform insonation method: An ultrasonic method for the estimation of volume flow rate in
single vessels. The average value of the product of the spatial
mean velocity and the cross-sectional area is calculated over
several cardiac cycles.
unipolar pulse or waveform: A waveform which has either positive or negative excursions
from the baseline but not both. A unipolar waveform can be
produced by rectification of radio frequency signals.
vector: Quantity defined with both the magnitude and the direction.
Velocity is a vector quantity: the Doppler shift frequency is
determined by the magnitude of the component of the velocity
vector along a line between the source and receiver of sound.
velocity: A vector, the magnitude of which is speed of a moving object

and the direction is that in which the object is moving.
velocity, critical: The flow velocity at which the Reynolds number attains its
critical value and the onset of turbulence occurs.
velocity gradient: The rate of change of velocity with position. With steady laminar
flow, this gradient is usually in a radial direction.
velocity of sound: The term “velocity” implies both direction and speed; the term
“speed of sound” should be used where direction is of no
concern. See speed of sound.
velocity profile: The variation of velocity with radial position for flow in a tube.
velocity profile, blunted: A modification of the parabolic flow profile which is commonly
encountered in physiological circumstances. The central
laminae move at almost one velocity.
Glossary G–34 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
velocity profile, parabolic: The form of the velocity profile found with idealized Poiseuillian
flow. The parabolic flow profile has the special property that the
average velocity across the vessel is exactly one-half of the
maximum velocity in the center stream.
video signal: The rectified and often filtered echo signals in an ultrasonic
imaging system generally are referred to as “video signals” by
analogy with television nomenclature.
viscosity: The tendency of a fluid to resist deformation, such as that

required to maintain laminar flow. Viscous forces have their
origin in the internal cohesion of the fluid.
vortex: A flow with streamlines of finite length and having no ends (as in
a whirlpool). Vortices are often seen in area of flow separation
and disturbance. The rotating flow of a vortex comprises a wide
range of velocities, aligned in both directions along a line
passing through its center. Doppler shifts from a vortex are thus
characterized by spectral broadening and simultaneous forward
and reverse flow.
wall thump: A strong, low-frequency clutter signal tending to obscure the

Doppler frequency spectrum of interest, arising from motion of
the walls of a blood vessel.
wall (thump) filter: A filter in a Doppler system which rejects echo information from
low-velocity reflectors such as stationary or slow-moving tissue.
This filtering is needed to keep high-amplitude tissue echoes
from saturating the Doppler receiver, masking
very-low-amplitude echoes from flowing blood.
water immersion: A situation in which part or all of a technique is performed under

water.
watt (W): The unit of power. 1 watt = 1 joule per second.
watt per square centimeter (W/cm2): A unit of intensity. 1 W/cm2 =104 W/m2.
wave: See acoustic wave.
waveform: The graphical representation of an acoustical or electrical

parameter as a function of time.
wavefront: An imaginary surface passing through all particles that are in the
same phase of vibration within a propagating sound wave.
wavelength: See acoustic wavelength.
wave reflection: As the velocity pulse of blood flow travels along the arterial tree,
reflections, consisting of waves traveling in a proximal direction,
occur at discontinuities of fluid impedance, mainly at branch points.
wave velocity: The velocity of propagation of a pulse, here of pressure and

velocity along the arterial tree. This velocity varies from about 5
m/s in the aorta to about 5 cm/s in small vessels.
t
Glossary G–35
2177611–100 Rev 0
Glossary
wideband: An adjective referring to the ability of a device to pass a very

wide range of frequencies in a signal. Wideband also refers to a
single which contains frequency components distributed over a
wide range.
window, systolic: A relatively single-free area between the arterial Doppler shift
signal and the baseline during the systolic portion of a Doppler
spectral display. The window tends to be obliterated by
turbulent flow.
zero-crossing counter: An electrical circuit that detects the frequency at which the value
of a time-varying signal crosses zero.
mm: Abbreviation for micrometer. This name is the preferred term

and replaces the older term micron.
Glossary G–36 t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Video Cassette Recorder
Operating Instructions
Operating Manuals
To use the LOGIQ 500 ultrasound system and video
cassette recorder (VCR) safely and properly, read this
appendix and the SVO-9500MD VCR Operating Manual.
Recording
When making important recordings, always make a trial
recording in advance to ensure normal video and audio
recording.
GE Medical Systems is not responsible for compensation for

a recording failure resulting from a problem in the VCR or
video tape during its use.
Cassette tapes
Use S-VHS video cassette tapes.
VTR–PB function
To use a search function in the LOGIQ 500 system, the
optional VTR-PB function is required. For details of the
VTR-PB function, contact the nearest GE Distributor, Affiliate
or Sales Representative.
t
VCR Operation H–1
2177611–100 Rev 0
VCR Operating Instructions
VCR Operation H–2 t

2177611–100 Rev 0
Introduction of VCR Features
Remote Control Function

Allows the LOGIQ 500 to remote control the following VCR
functions:
4. Ext Video (for switching between the scan image and

video image modes)
5. Play (playback)
6. Stop
7. Pause
8. Record
9. FF (fast forward)
10. REW (rewind)
11. FWD SEARCH (fast–forward search: forward speed
is variable from 1/30 time to 10 times the normal
playback speed)
12. REV SEARCH (reverse search: reverse speed is
variable from 1/30 time to 10 times the normal
playback speed)
13. FREEZE
14. FRAME SHIFT (frame forward/frame reverse)
Frame–forward search
When VCR image playback is paused, each time FRAME
SHIFT is pressed, the VCR will advance or rewind the
paused playback image one frame.
Variable–speed search function

When VCR image playback is paused, holding down
FRAME SHIFT allows the playback speed to vary from 1/30
time to 10 times the normal playback rate.
t
VCR Operation H–3
2177611–100 Rev 0
Tape search function

Allows the search of a tape number based on a patient
name or scan date. The VCR allows a maximum of 2,600
tapes to be registered or searched.
The optional VTR–PB function is required.
Image search function

Allows the advanced search of examination images based
on a patient name, ID or scan date. The VCR allows a
maximum of 39–patient examination images in each video
tape to be searched.
Saving of data to be searched

Writing the data to be searched to a video tape and saving it
on a hard drive allows another LOGIQ 500 to perform an
image search as well.
Playback with measurements

Images recorded by the LOGIQ 500 or LOGIQ 700 allow
a variety of frozen-image measurements and calculations
including the measurement of distance, area, circumference,
and other factors.
Image processing
Allows the writing of comments or display of a body pattern
on VCR playback images.

2177611–100 Rev 0
Safety
Operating Precautions
Applicable VCR
The Sony SVO-9500 MD is the only VCR recommended by
GE as a LOGIQ 500-connectable recording device.
The Sony SVO-9500 MD requires an interface/metal fitting

kit for installation on the CRT or console shelf. Commercially
available VCRs do not have a dedicated interface kit;
therefore, the LOGIQ 500 cannot support their remote
control.
For more information, contact a GE Distributor, Affiliate or

Sales Representative.
Installation
The VCR must be properly installed in an approved
configuration using the dedicated VCR metal fittings to
prevent accidents such as the VCR falling over, and to
prevent electromagnetic interference. Metal-fittings must be
installed by a qualified service engineer.
Power supply
To power the VCR, plug the power cable supplied with the
VCR into the power outlet for peripherals on the rear panel
of the LOGIQ 500. Do not use a power cable other than
the power cable supplied with the VCR. Do not plug in the
power cable to an outlet other than the power outlet for
peripherals.
t
VCR Operation H–5
2177611–100 Rev 0
Connections
Always use the cables supplied with the VCR to connect the
VCR to the LOGIQ 500. Do not use any other cables.
When the VCR is connected to the LOGIQ 500, do not
connect any VCR options, such as the remote control unit,
indicator unit and microphone.
Prohibition of modifications
The video cassette recorder, metal-fittings, power cable and
connection cables must not be modified in any way. Only
the specified connections should be made.
Prevention of Electromagnetic Interference

The LOGIQ 500 and the recommended peripherals, which
are approved by GEMS, will meet Voluntary Control for
Interference electronics Medical equipment (VCIM)
standards established by Electronic Industries Association of
Japan (EIAJ) for interference waves generated from a
medical electronic device, provided that they are properly
installed and connected using the specified connection
cables.
Using the equipment under any other conditions may

interfere with the receiving capability of radios, television
sets and other equipment.
The LOGIQ 500 and VCR must be properly operated and

used in accordance with the LOGIQ 500 User Manual and
VCR Operating Instructions.
Operation of the VCR

For the detailed operation of the VCR, see the SVO-9500MD
Operating Manual provided for the VCR.

2177611–100 Rev 0
Setting Up the VCR
VCR Part Names and Functions/Settings
Part Names and Functions of the VCR Front Panel
(2) (21)
Î
(22)
ÎÎÎ
(10) (11) (12)
ÎÎÎÎÎ (3) (9) ÎÎ

(13)
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
(14) (15) (16)
(4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(1)
(17), (18), (19), (20)
Illustration 521. VCR Front Panel
1. POWER switch. Setting fixed to ON.

The POWER switch must always be in the ON
position (recessed).
2. Cassette inlet.
.
3. EJECT button. Press this button to eject a video
cassette tape from the VCR.
NOTE: The EJECT function cannot be remote controlled
from the LOGIQ 500. To eject a video cassette tape from
the recorder, press <EJECT> on the VCR front panel.
4. STOP button (remote control only).
t
VCR Operation H–7
2177611–100 Rev 0
Part Names and Functions of the VCR Front Panel (cont’d)

5. REW (rewind) button/LED (light emitting diode)
(remote control only). The REW LED lights up during
rewinding.
6. PLAY (playback) button/LED (remote control only).
The PLAY LED lights up during playback.
7. F FWD (fast forward) button/LED (remote control
only). The F FWD LED lights up during fast-forward
operation.
8. PAUSE button/LED (remote control only).
The PAUSE LED lights up during pause.
9. REC (record) button/LED (remote control only).
The REC LED lights up during recording.
10. MONITOR (Need not be set).
11. AUDIO (Setting fixed to Hi–Fi).
12. Hi–Fi (Setting fixed to ON).
13. TRACKING control (Setting fixed to FIXED).
14. REMOTE terminal (Disabled).
15. FOOT SWITCH terminal (Disabled).
16. MIC (microphone) terminal (Disabled).
17. REV SEARCH (reverse search) button/LED (remote
control only). The REV SEARCH LED lights up
during a reverse search.
18. FWD SEARCH (forward search) button/LED (remote
control only). The FWD SEARCH LED lights up
during a forward search.
19. BLANK SEARCH button (Disabled).
20. FREEZE button (remote control only).
The FREEZE LED lights up during freezing.
.
21. PROGRAM switch (Setting fixed to OFF).
22. MARK IN A, B buttons (Disabled).
NOTE: If the setting of a switch is fixed, do not change it.
Functions in 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 17, 18, and 20 above are the

only functions available by remote control from the
LOGIQ 500.

2177611–100 Rev 0
Part Names and Functions of the VCR Front Panel (cont’d)
(23)
(24)
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
(25) (26) (27) (28)
Illustration 522. VCR Front Panel Indicators
23. Indicator block
Indicators Description
Lights up when a video cassette tape is in
the VCR.
AUTO OFF Lights up if there is condensation in the
VCR. If this indicator lights up, no cassette
tape can be inserted into the recorder.
S-VHS Lights up when a video cassette tape is re-
corded or played back in the S-VHS mode.
MARK Lights up during an index marker recording.
24. TAPE REMAIN (remaining volume of tape) indicator.

Indicates the percentage of tape volume remaining.
If almost 100% of a video cassette tape is
recordable, all five indicators will light up.
25. CTL/MENU switch (Setting fixed to CTL).
26. INDEX LED.
Lights up during a patient image search or index
search.
27. Time counter display. Indicates tape–running time in
.
hours, minutes, and seconds.
28. RESET button (Disabled).
NOTE: If the setting of a switch is fixed, do not change it.
t
VCR Operation H–9
2177611–100 Rev 0
Part Names and Functions of the VCR Rear Panel
(1) (2) (4) (5) (6)
ÑÑ
(11)
ÑÑÑ
ÑÑ MON-
Ó ÓÓ
(10) ITOR
(3) OUT
Ó ÓÓ
Ω Ω
INDICATE
(9)
(7)
(8)
Illustration 523. VCR Rear Panel
1. AUDIO IN (audio input) CH–1/L and CH–2/R

terminals. Connect these terminals to the Video Out
Audio terminals on the LOGIQ 500.
2. VIDEO IN (video input) terminals. Connect these
terminals to the Video Out S–Video terminals on the
LOGIQ 500.
3. 75–W terminator switch (Setting fixed to ON).
4. AUDIO OUT (audio output) CH–1/L and CH–2/R
terminals. Connect these terminals to the Video In
Audio terminals on the LOGIQ 500.
5. MONITOR OUT (monitor output) terminal (Disabled).
6. VIDEO OUT (video output) terminals. Connect these
terminals to the Video In S–Video terminals on the
LOGIQ 500.
7. AC IN (AC power input) terminal. Connect this power
inlet to a power outlet for peripherals on the rear
panel of the LOGIQ 500 using the cable supplied
with the VCR.

2177611–100 Rev 0
Part Names and Functions of the VCR Rear Panel (cont’d)

8. Ground terminal (Disabled).
9. INDICATE (indicator) terminal (Disabled).
ÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑ
ÑÑ
(11)
(10) ÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑ
Illustration 524. VCR Rear Panel (RS–232 Terminal & Dip Switch)
10. RS–232C (remote control) terminal. Connect this

terminal to the VCR/Color Printer Port A or B on the
LOGIQ 500 rear panel. The proper port must be
selected in the Set Up/System Parameters page 5
menu.
11. DIP switch (Settings fixed). When the VCR is
connected to the LOGIQ 500 for use, do not
change the settings of the DIP switch.
Settings:
SW1: OFF (down)
SW2: OFF (down)
SW3: OFF (down)
.
SW4: OFF (down) Remote/local switch
SW5: ON (up)
SW6: OFF (down)
NOTE: If the VCR is disconnected from the LOGIQ 500,
set SW4 to ON (up).
t
VCR Operation H–11
2177611–100 Rev 0
Connecting the VCR to the LOGIQ 500

Connect the cables from the VCR to the LOGIQ 500 by
referring to the VCR Part Names and Functions/Settings in
the previous section and the following connection diagram.
Illustration 525. VCR Connection Diagram

2177611–100 Rev 0
Setting up the LOGIQ 500

After the VCR is connected to the LOGIQ 500, the
LOGIQ 500 must also be set up.
Select the top menu Set Up from the software menu and
select System Parameters.
On page 5 of the System Parameters menu, set Port A or
.
Port B to VCR.
Then select SAVE to exit the menu.
NOTE: After changing the setting, turn OFF the system

power switch, then restart the system.
For reference, see Customizing Your System in Volume 2 of

the LOGIQ 500 User Manual.
Illustration 526. Set Up/System Parameters Menu Page 5
t
2177611–100 Rev 0

2177611–100 Rev 0
Starting the VCR
.
VCR Start-Up
NOTE: If an alphanumeric character (such as y and n)
needs to be typed in during the VCR operation, the system
must not be in the Blue Shift mode.
If the Blue Shift key is lit up, press Blue Shift to cancel the
Blue Shift mode.
After all connections and setups are completed, the VCR

can be started and will be recognized. The operation flow
from the moment the LOGIQ 500 Power/Stand-by switch is
turned on to the moment the VCR is set is summarized as
follows:
Checking Switches
ÖÖÖÖÖÖ
POWER
ÖÖ
Check that the LOGIQ 500 Power/Stand-by switch is in the
ÖÖ
ÖÖÖÖÖÖ
ÖÖ
Off/Stand-by position and that the VCR Power switch is in
ÖÖÖÖ
the ON (recessed) position.
At this time, the VCR power will still be off.
.
If the switch is lit, the VCR power cable has been connected
to an outlet other than the power outlet for peripherals on the
rear panel of the LOGIQ 500.
NOTE: For safety reasons, always connect the VCR power

cable to the power outlet for peripherals on the rear panel of
the LOGIQ 500.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Power On
ÖÖÖ
Turn the LOGIQ 500 system power on.
ÖÖÖ As soon as the system power is turned on, power will be fed
ÖÖÖ simultaneously to the VCR which will light up the VCR Power
ÖÖÖ
switch.
Check to ensure the power switch on the VCR panel is lit. If

not, check the following in order:
1. Check that the Power switch is in the ON (recessed)
.
position.
2. Check that the power cable is properly connected.
NOTE: If power is still not being fed to the VCR after
checking 1 and 2, the VCR may be defective. Contact an
authorized service personnel.
ÖÖÖÖÖ
Status Icon Display
ÖÖÖÖÖ When the VCR has been correctly connected and set up, the
ÖÖÖÖÖ VCR status icon EJECT ( ) will appear at the bottom left
ÖÖÖÖÖ
corner of the monitor upon completion of start–up.
If the VCR status icon has not appeared, check that the port
setting in the LOGIQ 500 System Parameters menu
page 5 has been set to VCR.
J
If the stop status icon ( ) has appeared instead of the VCR
status icon EJECT, a video tape is in the VCR. So that the
system will recognize the tape ID, eject the tape from the
recorder.
ÖÖ
Ext Video The Ext Video key on the control panel will be partially lit.
Ö If Ext Video is fully lit, the VCR video mode has been
selected. Press Ext Video to switch to the scan image
mode.
If Ext Video is not lit, the video tape or VCR has not been
recognized. If a video tape has already been inserted, eject
it from the recorder and check the tape.
When using a new Tape, proceed to Registering a New Tape

on page VCR Operation H–25.

2177611–100 Rev 0
Tape insertion
Insert a registered video tape into the VCR.
When a tape has been inserted, the VCR automatically

rewinds it up to the tape header so that the system can read
and collate the tape ID.
When rewinding is completed, the VCR will play it back to

read the tape ID. When the tape ID has been verified, the
following message appears at the bottom of the monitor.
ÖÖÖÖÖ System ID = #####, Tape ID = #####
ÖÖÖÖÖ
.
ÖÖÖÖÖ After confirming the ID, the VCR automatically fast forwards
ÖÖÖÖÖ
the tape to the position of the tape when it was first inserted.
NOTE: The time required for ID recognition and collation will

differ depending on the tape position upon insertion. It
usually takes at least one and half minutes. Do not press
any key until ID collation is completed.
Checking Pause/Record
When collation is completed, the Pause/Record key on the
control panel is partially lit.
If the Pause/Record key is not lit, the tape has not been
recognized. The message:
“Cannot read Tape ID. Register the new tape?(y/n)”
appears at the bottom of the monitor. The inserted tape may

be a new tape or unregistered tape.
If it is a new tape, type in “y” and proceed to Registering a

New Tape. See VCR Operation H–25 for details. In all other
cases, type in “n” and try to read the tape again.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Start-Up Final Check

If all the steps have been successfully completed up to this
point, the monitor and control panel status will be as follows:
1. Ext Video on the control panel is partially lit.

2. Pause/Record on the control panel is partially lit .
3. The monitor shows the stop VCR status icon ( ) and J
the VCR counter at the bottom left corner of the
screen.
If these conditions have not yet been established, verify the
procedure in Starting the VCR again.

2177611–100 Rev 0
VCR Status Icon

The VCR status icon will indicate the operation status of the
VCR. The icons are displayed at the bottom left corner of
the monitor screen.
VCR STATUS ICON DESCRIPTION

Tape Eject A video tape has not yet
been inserted
Stop Operation has stopped
Record Recording in progress
Record & Pause Recording has been paused
Fast Forward Fast forwarding

Rewind Rewinding
During the display of a VCR playback image, the icon (●)

indicating a recorded image appears on the monitor.
VCR Counter Display

The VCR counter display next to the status icon shows the
following information:
+
– . . . + (PLUS) / – (MINUS)
+
– H : M M : S S H . . . HOUR
M. . . MINUTE
F F S . . . SECOND
F . . . FRAME NUMBER
Illustration 527. VCR Counter Display
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
VCR Operations
The keys used for remote control of the VCR are as follows:
.
Illustration 528. VCR Remote Control (Control Panel/Keyboard)
NOTE: A video tape is ejected from the recorder using the

EJECT key on the front panel of the VCR.
Control Panel
Ext Video
ÖÖ
Ext Video Allows the selection of the video (VCR playback image)
mode or scan image mode.
When the video mode is activated, the image displayed on

the monitor is switched from scan image to VCR image. The
Ext Video key is fully lit in the video mode.
Under the condition in which the video mode can be

activated, Ext Video is partially lit. If the video mode cannot
be activated, Ext Video is not lit.
To return to the scan image mode, press Exit Video again.
Pressing Exit Video when the VCR is recording stops the

recording.
.
Pressing Exit Video when the VCR is playing back a tape
stops the playback and selects the scan image mode.
NOTE: A video tape must be inserted into or ejected from

the recorder in the scan image mode.
The Cine function cannot be activated in the video mode.

2177611–100 Rev 0
Mic
This is a microphone-activating switch.
Press this key to simultaneously record anything spoken in

the vicinity of the console during a recording.
.
The microphone is located on the bottom right side of the
monitor.
NOTE: Doppler audio will be recorded even if the Mic key is

not activated.
Stop/Play
Used to begin VCR playback or stop VCR operation.
Pressing the Stop/Play key while the VCR status icon is in a

J
stop condition ( ) begins playback.
Pressing Stop/Play key while the VCR is operating stops the

current VCR operation, changing the VCR status icon to . J
.
Stopping playback in the video mode (changing to J)
eliminates the image from the monitor.
NOTE: In the scan image mode, pressing Stop/Play to

J
begin playback while the VCR status icon is selects the
external video mode automatically.
Control Z
If the heading function (service software) is turned OFF, the

VCR tape counter can be reset by pressing Control Z.
If the heading function is turned ON to enable other VCR

controls, Control Z will NOT reset the counter
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Pause/Record
Used to begin a recording or pause operation.
In the scan image mode, pressing the Pause/Record key

J
while the VCR status icon is starts the recording process.
.
When recording starts, the tape position, patient name,
patient ID, and date are recorded in the system as data to
be searched.
NOTE: Recording is not possible in a system other than the

system on which the tape was registered. (The
Pause/Record key does not light up for any system other
than the system on which the tape was registered.)
● Pressing Pause/Record while the VCR is recording

pauses the recording.
.
Pressing Pause/Record when the VCR recording is
paused cancels the pause and resumes the
recording.
NOTE: When a recording resumes, the tape position (index)

and patient information will be re-recorded in the system.
A single tape can record up to 39 indexes. It is

recommended that recording not be paused (or stopped)
unnecessarily to ensure effective utilization of a video tape.
Pressing Pause/Record while the VCR is operating pauses

the recording or playback.
Fast forward or rewind cannot be paused. (Fast-forward

search/Reverse search can be paused.)
Pressing Pause/Record when the VCR operation is paused

cancels the pause and resumes the VCR operation.

2177611–100 Rev 0
Freeze
Enables or disables the freezing of a VCR playback image.

"❙A In the scan image mode, pressing the Freeze key stops
image acquisition.
.
To perform VCR playback with measurements, press Freeze
while a VCR image is being played back or VCR image
playback is paused. This freezes the VCR image.
NOTE: When a VCR image is frozen, Cine playback is not

available.
Blue Shift (Blue Shift mode)
To use the VCR control keys on the keyboard, press the
.
Blue Shift key to activate the Blue Shift mode (LED is lit up).
Blue
NOTE: To register a new tape or enter patient information,

the Blue Shift mode must be deactivated.
FF (Fast forward/fast–forward search)
Pressing the FF key while the VCR is stopped or rewinding

will activate fast forward.
A tape may also be fast forwarded in the scan image mode.
To stop fast forward, press Stop/Play.
Pressing FF while the VCR is playing, reverse searching or

paused will activate a fast-forward search.
To cancel the fast-forward search and return to normal

playback, press FF again.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Rev (Reverse/reverse search)
Pressing the Rev key while the VCR is stopped or fast

forwarding will begin reverse.
Tape reverse is also possible in the scan image mode.
To stop reverse, press Stop/Play.
Pressing Rev while the VCR is playing, fast-forward

searching or paused will activate a reverse search.
To cancel the reverse search and return to normal playback,

press Rev again.
Frame Shift (frame forward/frame reverse)
Pressing a Frame Shift key once when VCR playback is

paused or fast-forward search/reverse search is paused will
begin frame forward/frame reverse.
Holding down Frame Shift while VCR playback is paused or

fast-forward search/reverse search is paused changes the
playback speed of fast-forward search/reverse search.
Releasing the Frame Shift will return the image to the pause
status.
Record End Function (Rec-End)
With the heading function turned ON (service software), the

Rec-End function moves the tape to the position at the end
of the last recording.
If the heading function is turned OFF, recording can be

started at any position on the tape.

2177611–100 Rev 0
Registering a New Tape

To perform the image search functions described later with
the LOGIQ 500 system, the video tape to be recorded
must be registered in the system in advance.
To register a new video tape:
Power on
ÖÖ
Turn the LOGIQ 500 system power on.
ÖÖ When the VCR has been correctly connected and set up, the
ÖÖ
VCR status icon EJECT ( ) appears at the bottom left
ÖÖ
corner of the monitor upon completion of system start-up.
If this status icon does not appear, conduct a check in

accordance with Starting the VCR on page
VCR Operation H–15.
J
If the stop status icon ( ) has appeared, there is a video
tape in the VCR. Press <EJECT> to eject the tape from the
recorder.
Checking the scan mode

Check if the system is in the scan image mode.
ÖÖ
Ö
Ext Video Check that the screen displayed on the monitor is a normal
ÖÖ
Ö
live image and that Ext Video on the control panel is
partially lit.
If Ext Video is fully lit, press Ext Video to select the scan
image mode.
If Ext Video is not lit, conduct a check in accordance with

Starting the VCR on page VCR Operation H–15.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Inserting a tape
Insert a new S-VHS tape into the VCR.
The system automatically begins to play it back and attempts

to read tape information to see if the inserted tape has been
previously registered.
In the case of a new tape, the system takes about 30

seconds to complete the check and display the following
confirmation message, with a prompt to initiate registration
ÖÖÖÖÖ
procedures.
ÖÖÖÖÖ “Cannot read Tape ID. Register the new tape? (y/n)”
ÖÖÖÖÖ
ÖÖÖÖÖ
Type in “y” at the new tape registration confirmation
message.
This causes the system ID number and the new tape’s tape
.
ID number to appear on the screen.
“System ID = #####, New Tape ID = #####”
NOTE: New registration of a video tape takes about one

and half minutes. The monitor displays nothing during this
period. Wait until registration is completed.
Recording ID
This tape ID is the tape number that will be used for the tape
search function. Always write it down on the label to be
attached to the tape.

2177611–100 Rev 0
New Tape Registration Complete
.
Upon completing a new registration, the screen will display
J
the VCR status icon ( ) and VCR counter.
NOTE: The tape header contains the system ID and tape ID

registration number recorded. Thus, no data is recorded on
the tape header.
When all the steps up to this point have been successfully

completed, the monitor and control panel status is as
follows:
1. Ext Video on the control panel is partially lit.

2. Pause/Record on the control panel is partially lit.
3. The monitor shows the stop VCR status icon ( ) and J
VCR counter on the bottom left corner of the screen.
If these conditions have not yet been established,
conduct a check following the procedure in Registering a
New Tape on page VCR Operation H–25.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0

2177611–100 Rev 0
Recording/Playback/Image Search
In order to record, playback and image search, the Starting the
.
VCR procedures must be completed. The monitor shows the
J
stop VCR status icon ( ) and both the Ext Video and
Pause/Record keys on the control panel being partially lit.
NOTE: Recording is available only on the system if the tape

has been previously registered on that system.
Recording Procedure
Registering a new patient

When Ext Video is partially lit (the scan image mode), press
the New Patient key to enter new patient information.
The image search function, described later, enables tape

search/image search based on a patient name/patient ID
and scan date. Check the patient name/patient ID before
starting each patient examination.
Start the examination and scan the patient. Scanned

images are displayed on the monitor.
Start recording
Press Pause/Record to begin recording.
When recording begins:
S The Pause/Record key is fully lit.

S The VCR status icon changes to recording (●).
S The VCR counter is updated to indicate the recording
time.
The patient information and tape position acquired at the
beginning of a recording will be stored on the system
hard drive.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Start recording (cont’d)

If a paused recording restarts, the patient information
and tape position will also be stored in the system hard
drive. Therefore, each time the tape is paused/restarted
or stopped/restarted, the index heading markers are
generated with the current patient information.
.
Tape searches and image searches are performed
based on this information.
NOTE: A single video tape allows up to 39 index head
search markers to be recorded. More than 39 index markers
can be recorded, but the image search function can handle
only up to 39 index markers.
Recording audio
Doppler audio can be recorded in stereo or monaural, while
doing Pulsed or Color Doppler studies. The stereo/monaural
selection is found in the Set Up/Preset program menu
page two.
If there is a need to add audio to the video tape while

recording, press the Mic key. (Blue Shift key must be
enabled.)
Anything spoken in the vicinity of the console will be

recorded. The microphone is located on the bottom right
side of the monitor.
Recording Complete
Press the Stop/Play key to complete recording
OR
press the Pause/Record key to pause recording.
When recording is stopped, the VCR status icon changes to

J
stop ( ). For pause, the status icon changes to paused
recording ( ).
In both cases, press Pause/Record to restart recording.

2177611–100 Rev 0
Ejecting the tape

When the recording is completed, stop the VCR (status icon
J
changes to ), then press <EJECT> to eject the tape from
the recorder. Attach a label marked with the tape ID to the
tape for storage. Rewinding the tape before ejecting will
allow quicker ID identification when the tape is reinserted.
Playback Procedure
VCR playback
To playback VCR images, press the Stop/Play key.
When playback begins, the system automatically switches to

the video mode, displaying a VCR playback image on the
monitor.
The Ext Video key is fully lit in the video mode.
If nothing is recorded on the tape and/or during playback of

non-recorded areas, the monitor displays nothing. Moreover,
pressing Stop/Play during playback to stop VCR playback
will make the screen display nothing.
Audio volume control
Use the Audio Volume control, in the Doppler/CFM section

of the keyboard, to control the VCR playback volume.
Freezing a VCR image
During the playback of VCR images, a VCR image can be

frozen by pressing Freeze.
When an image is frozen, playback with measurements is

available.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Blue Shift mode
Pressing the Blue Shift key activates the Blue Shift mode.
Remote control of the VCR using the keyboard (FF/Rev/

Frame Shift) is available only in the Blue Shift mode (Blue
Shift key is fully lit).
Frame-forward search and variable speed search
While a playback image is paused, each time Frame Shift is

pressed, the paused playback image advances or rewinds
one frame.
Holding down Frame Shift changes the search (playback)

speed continuously from frame-shift speed to 10 times faster
than playback speed.
If Frame Shift is released, the playback image returns to the

pause status.
Stopping playback
Press Ext Video to return to the scan image mode.
When the system returns to the scan image mode, the

monitor displays a scan image and the VCR playback
automatically stops.
Ext Video is partially lit.

2177611–100 Rev 0
Playback with Measurements

Measurements of a frozen VCR playback image are
possible.
Press Freeze to stop image acquisition of a VCR playback

image, then press Measurement to activate the
measurement function.
The following measurements of playback images are not

available.
1. Echo-level measurement
2. CFM-point velocity measurement
3. Biopsy guide measurement
4. TAMAX Auto (Auto trace disabled)
To measure the TAMAX value or to take
measurements using the TAMAX value, the TAMAX
value must be obtained using manual trace.
Any measurements other than those above, can be
taken in the same way as measurements of normal
scan images.
Writing comments to a frozen image and display of a
body pattern are available.
.
Measurement results can also be reported in the
same way as in normal scan.
NOTE: When a VCR playback image is frozen, Cine review
is not available.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Precautions for playback with measurements

For an examination using a scan date (such as determining
the growth of a fetus), note that the scan date recorded on a
VCR image differs from the current date.
The measurement results of playback images can be output

in report form. The patient information and examination
category typed in using the New Patient function cannot be
modified even when the VCR is started.
Thus, press New Patient or ID/Name (depending on the

patient information/examination category of the VCR
playback images) to correct the patient information output in
report form.
If the message:
“Please play VCR image and freeze at the other frame”
appears when a measurement is being taken, this indicates

that measurement scale data has not been read in that
frame. In this case, advance the VCR image a few frames,
then freeze the VCR playback image and attempt the
measurement again.

2177611–100 Rev 0
Advanced Search
Image search
Activating Image Search
Pressing Ctrl and I with Ext Video On enables an image

search based on patient information and the scan date.
[ IMAGE SEARCH MENU ]
PT NAME :
PT ID :
DATE (MM / DD / YY) : / /
Illustration 529. Image Search Menu
The search conditions can be entered by typing in a patient

name, patient ID, scan date, or all three.
.
(An attempt to make a search with no information specified for
the search conditions, causes all the patient information on the
tape to appear in a list of the relevant patients.)
NOTE: Image search requires the VTR–PB function option.
The image search function cannot be activated in the scan

image mode.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Entering the search conditions
Use the Trackball or press Return to move the cursor to

either the PT NAME, PT ID or DATE field, depending on the
type of search being done.
For a search based on a patient name, enter the patient

name using the cursor in the PT NAME field of the image
search menu.
For a search based on a patient ID, enter the patient ID with

the cursor in the PT ID field of the image search menu.
For a search based on a scan date, enter a scan date with

the cursor in the DATE field of the image search menu.
.
Pressing Return when the cursor is to the right of the
appropriate field begins a search.
NOTE: A search based on a combination of patient name,

patient ID, and scan date is also possible.

2177611–100 Rev 0
Displaying the relevant patients
The system searches the data on the system hard drive and
displays a list of the relevant patients recorded on the tape.
PT NAME : 12345678901234567890123456789
PT ID : 12345678901234
DATE (MM / DD / YY) : 12 / 31 / 93
NUMBER :
NAME ID DATE
1 NNNNNNNNNNNNN . . . . . . . NNNNNNNNN IIIIIIIIIIIIII ## / ## / ##
.......
.......
.......
.......
Ctrl+N : Next Page Ctrl+P : Previous Page

Ctrl+Q : Quit Ctrl+C : Cancel
.
Illustration 530. List of relevant patients Screen
NOTE: The list displays the relevant patients in the order of

the latest scan dates.
To return from the list screen to the Search Conditions Input

Screen, press Ctrl and Q simultaneously.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Selecting the relevant patient
Select the relevant patient from the list, enter the number on
the list and press Return.
If the number of the relevant patients exceeds 10, press Ctrl

and N to display the next page of the patient list. To return
to the previous page of the patient list, press Ctrl and P.
If no relevant patient exists, the message
“Requested information doesn’t exist on the tape”
appears and the system returns to Image Search Menu (see

Illustration 529 on VCR Operation H–35.
Selecting the patient
If the patient is selected by entering the number or if only

one patient is present, the system displays the patient name,
patient ID, and scan date of the relevant patient. It then
begins a search.
PT NAME : 12345678901234567890123456789
PT ID : 12345678901234
DATE (MM / DD / YY) : 12 / 31 / 93
Illustration 531. Definite Patient Screen

2177611–100 Rev 0
Displaying the images
When the search is completed, the message:
“Search was completed.”
appears and the VCR image playback of the relevant patient

begins if a search was activated while the VCR was playing.
Hints S In a search using a patient name, upper-case and

lower-case letters are not differentiated.
S The system lists all search candidates whose names
include the entered word.
Example: Entering Yama as the patient name to conduct
a search displays all names containing those letters such
as YAMADA, yamamonto, and Nakayama as candidates
in the list.
S To exit the search menu, press Ctrl and C to cancel the
search function.
S Pressing Ctrl and Q returns to the previous entry screen.
If a mistake is made in data entry, press Back Space the
required number of times to erase any wrong characters,
then re-enter the correct characters.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Tape Search
Pressing Ctrl and T with Ext Video On enables a tape
search to be initiated based on patient information and scan
date.
[ TAPE SEARCH MENU ]
PT NAME : 12345678901234567890123456789
PT ID : 12345678901234
DATE (MM / DD / YY) : 12 / 31 / 93
Illustration 532. Tape Search Menu
The search conditions are entered by typing in a patient

name, patient ID, scan date, or all three.
(An attempt to conduct a search when no information is
.
specified for the search conditions causes all patient
information in the hard drive to appear in the list of relevant
patients.)
NOTE: A tape search requires the optional VTR-PB

function.
The tape search function cannot be activated in the scan

image mode.

2177611–100 Rev 0
Entering the search conditions
Use the Trackball or press Return to move the cursor.
1. For a search based on a patient name, enter the

patient name with the cursor in the PT NAME field of
the tape search menu.
2. For a search based on a patient ID, enter the patient
ID with the cursor in the PT ID field of the tape
search menu.
3. For a search based on a scan date, enter a scan
date with the cursor in the DATE field of the tape
search menu.
.
Pressing Return when the cursor is to the right of the DATE
field begins a search.
NOTE: A search based on a combination of patient name,

patient ID, and scan date is also possible.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Display of the relevant patients
The system searches the data on the system hard drive and
displays a list of the relevant patients recorded on the tape.
PT NAME : 12345678901234567890123456789
PT ID : 12345678901234
DATE (MM / DD / YY) : 12 / 31 / 93
NUMBER :
NAME ID
1 NNNNNNNNNNNNN . . . . . . . NNNNNNNNN IIIIIIIIIIIIII
.......
.......
.......
.......
Ctrl+N : Next Page Ctrl+P : Previous Page

Ctrl+Q : Quit Ctrl+C : Cancel
.
Illustration 533. List of Relevant Patients Screen
NOTE: The list displays the relevant patients in the order of

the latest scan dates.
Re-entering the search conditions
To return from the list screen to Tape Search Menu (see

Illustration 532 on VCR Operation H–40), press Ctrl and Q
simultaneously.

2177611–100 Rev 0
Selecting the relevant patient
Select the relevant patient from the list, enter the number on
the list and press Return.
If the number of the relevant patients exceeds 10, press Ctrl

and N to display the next page of the patient list. To return
to the previous page of the patient list, press Ctrl and P.
If no relevant patient exists, the message
“Requested information doesn’t exist on the tape”
appears and the system returns to the Tape Search Menu

(see Illustration 532 on VCR Operation H–40).
Selecting the patient
If the patient is selected by entering the number or if only

one patient is present, the system displays the patient
name/patient ID/scan date of the relevant patient and begins
a search.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Displaying the search results
When the search is completed, the system displays the

message:
“Search was completed.”
as well as the system ID and tape ID of the relevant tape.
PT NAME : 12345678901234567890123456789
PT ID : 12345678901234
DATE (MM / DD / YY) : 12 / 31 / 93
SYSTEM ID TAPE ID
XXXXX XXXX
Ctrl + Q : Quit Ctrl + C : Cancel
Illustration 534. Definite Tape ID
Hints S In a search using a patient name, upper-case and

lower-case letters are not differentiated.
S The system lists all search candidates whose names
include the entered word.
Example: Entering Yama as the patient name to conduct
a search displays all names containing those letters such
as YAMADA, yamamonto, and Nakayama as candidates
in the list.
S To exit the search menu in mid-course, press Ctrl and C
to cancel the search function.
S Pressing Ctrl and Q returns to the previous entry screen.
If a mistake is made in data entry, press Back Space the
required number of times to erase any wrong characters,
then re-enter the correct characters.

2177611–100 Rev 0
Saving/Reading the Data to be Searched

To conduct a search for a video tape recorded on another
LOGIQ 500, the index, patient information, and scan date
acquired when a recording is made are stored in the system
hard drive whenever recording begins. Also, an index
marker is recorded on the tape.
When an image search is initiated, the system conducts a

search of data in the system hard drive to determine the
index number of the relevant image, and transfers it to the
VCR. The VCR searches for the index marker on the tape in
.
accordance with the transferred index number. Thus, an
image search requires that the data being searched be
stored in the hard disk drive.
NOTE: To conduct an image search on a system other than

the system on which the relevant tape was registered, the
data to be searched needs to be copied onto the system in
which an image search is conducted.
In the LOGIQ 500 system, data in the system hard drive

can be saved on a video tape, then a system on which an
image search is to be conducted reads the data on the tape
to copy the data to be searched.
Saving the data to be searched

To save the data in the hard drive on a video tape, press Ctrl
and V simultaneously with Ext Video On. This causes the
following message to appear:
“Save patient information on VCR Tape? (y/n)”.
To save the data on the tape, type in “Y”. The system

automatically rewinds the tape up to the tape header and
records the data in the hard drive onto the tape in bar code.
When the data has been saved onto the tape, the VCR stop
J
(changing the status icon to ).
At this point, press Ext Video to place the system in the

scan image mode and then eject the tape from the recorder.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Reading the data to be searched

To store the data on a video tape in the system, press Ctrl
and S simultaneously with Ext Video On. This causes the
following message to appear:
“Save patient information to System? (y/n)”.
To cancel this function, press “N”
To read the data into the system, press “Y”. The system
automatically rewinds the tape up to the tape header, reads
the information on the tape and records it on the system
hard drive. When saving on the hard drive is complete, the
VCR stops (changing the status icon to ). J
.
At this point, press Ctrl and I simultaneously to initiate an
image search or Play to begin playback.
NOTE: Recording is available only on the system on which

the relevant tape was registered.
The data to be searched on a video tape cannot be written

back into the system on which the tape was registered.
The original data on the system hard drive cannot be

rewritten by rewriting the information (copied) on the tape.
If a read fails or if an attempt is made to read the information

from a video tape on which no data to be searched has been
saved, the VCR plays for about 2 minutes, then rewind the
tape to its initial point before stopping.

2177611–100 Rev 0
Troubleshooting
Inspection Sequence
If trouble is suspected, conduct a check in the following
order.
1. An operation guide/error message appears at the

bottom of the system monitor.
Refer to Operation Guide/Error Messages on
2. Check the items in A List of Problems and How To
Trouble Shoot Them on VCR Operation H–51.
3. Check the VCR switch settings.
Refer to Setting Up the VCR on
If the problem remains after conducting the above,
contact a qualified service representative.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Operation Guide/Error Messages

The table below shows each message and the appropriate
action to take. The message column lists the operation
guide/error messages displayed at the bottom of the monitor
during VCR operation.
No. Message Possible Cause Possible Corrective Action

(1) Cannot read Tape 1) An unregistered new Type “y” to register a new tape.
ID. Register the tape was inserted into Refer to Registering a New Tape
new tape? (y/n) the VCR. on VCR Operation H–25.
2) The tape ID could not Type “n” to proceed to message
be read. (08) to re-attempt reading the
tape drive.
(2) Check VCR. There is no signal input or 1) Check the VCR power cord
response from the VCR. and all the cable connec-
tions.
2) Check the settings of the
LOGIQ 500 System Pa-
rameters menu page 5.
Refer to Customizing Your
System in LOGIQ 500
User Manual Volume 2.
3) Check the VCR switch set-
tings. Refer to Setting Up the
VCR on
(3) Check VCR. No The VCR has no tape. Insert a tape into the VCR.
Cassette.
(4) Please play VCR The image information on Advance the tape a few frames,
image and freeze a tape cannot be read. then freeze the image.
at the other
frame.
(5) Protected. Check This tape has been write Use an un-protected tape.
Tape. protected.
Table 67. Operation Guide/Error Messages

2177611–100 Rev 0

(6) Requested in- The patient image is not 1) Verify search conditions and
formation doesn’t on the tape. re-attempt, if necessary.
exist on the tape. 2) When an inappropriate tape
is used, cancel image search
and press Ctrl and T to acti-
vate a tape search. Find the
tape on which the relevant
patient detected by the tape
search has been recorded.
Insert the relevant tape into
the VCR and re-attempt an
image search. Refer to Ad-
vanced Search on
(7) Requested in- The patient information is 1) Verify search conditions and
formation doesn’t not on the hard drive. re-attempt, if necessary.
exist in System. 2) When an inappropriate sys-
tem is used, cancel tape
search and re-attempt the
search on the correct system.
Refer to Tape Search on
(8) Searching Tape After Tape insertion
ID and System ID system searches
(9) Not registered on Tape ID and system ID do
this system. Can’t not match
record.
(10) Rewinding to be- Displayed during rewind
gining for Patient after #9 is displayed
Info.
(11) Reading Patient System reading info from
Information begining of tape
(12) Returning to tape Tape not recognized so
insertion position system fast forwards to
tape position when it was
inserted
(13) Recording is not Tape is not registered to Use new tape. Find proper
available the system and all system tape.
attempts to check have
been completed
Table 67. Operation Guide/Error Messages (cont’d)
t
2177611–100 Rev 0

(14) Re–attempt to The tape ID cannot be y) Type “y” to re-attempt read-
read Tape ID? read. ing the tape ID.
(y/n) n) Type “n” to cancel reading
the tape ID.
(15) Save patient in- The operator pressed Ctrl y) Type “y” to save information
formation on VCR and V to save patient in- on the tape.
Tape? (y/n) formation on the VCR n) Type “n” to cancel the save.
tape.
Refer to Saving/Reading the
Data to be Searched on
(16) Save patient in- The operator pressed y) Type “y” to save information
formation on Sys- Control and S to save pa- on the hard drive.
tem? (y/n) tient information on the n) Type “n” to cancel the save.
hard drive.
Refer to Saving/Reading the
Data to be Searched on
(17) Searching The VCR is searching the
tape. Wait for the search
to be completed.
(18) Search was com- The VCR search is com-
pleted. pleted.
(19) System ID = The tape was mounted.

#####,
Tape ID = #####
(20) System ID = A new tape was regis- NOTE: Enter the tape ID on the
#####, tered. label to be attached to the tape.
New Tape ID =
#####
(21) This function is The function selected is
not available. not available for some
reason (e.g., a function
disabling another function
from being activated si-
multaneously has been
initiated).
Table 67. Operation Guide/Error Messages (cont’d)

2177611–100 Rev 0
A List of Problems and How To Troubleshoot Them
Problem Possible Cause Possible Corrective Action

The screen displays nothing. Unregistered area is being If a tape advances to an un-
played back in the video registered area as a result of
image mode. playback or fast–forward
search, nothing will appear
on the screen and the VCR
counter will stop running.
Even under this condition,
the PLAY or FWD LED on
the VCR is lit. Rewind the
tape up to a recorded area.
The screen displays nothing. The VCR has stopped in the Check Ext Video. If it is fully
video image mode. lit, the system is in the video
mode. Press Ext Video to
select the scan image mode,
or Press Play to begin VCR
playback.
ÖÖÖÖ
VCR status icon doesn’t ap- The VCR has not been rec- Check the VCR connections
pear. ognized. and LOGIQ 500 settings,
ÖÖÖÖ then re-start the system fol-
ÖÖÖÖ lowing the procedure in
ÖÖÖÖ
Starting the VCR on
? VCR Operation H–15.
ÖÖÖÖ
The VCR status icon doesn’t New tape is being regis- Registration of a new tape
appear. tered. takes about one and half
ÖÖÖÖ minutes. During this time,
ÖÖÖÖ
the correct status icon
doesn’t appear.
ÖÖÖÖ
? Refer to Registering a New
Tape on
Table 68. Operation Guide/Troubleshooting Problems
t
2177611–100 Rev 0
Problem Possible Cause Possible Corrective Action

The VCR status icon doesn’t System ID and tape ID are When a tape is inserted into
appear.
ÖÖÖÖ being checked/collated. the VCR, the system auto-
ÖÖÖÖ
matically rewinds it to the
ÖÖÖÖ
tape header to conduct tape
ID check/collation. After
ÖÖÖÖ
?
checking/collating, the VCR
automatically fast forwards it
to the initial tape position
when the tape was inserted.
During this period, the cor-
rect status icon doesn’t ap-
pear on the screen. Wait for
the VCR to stop. When ID
checking/collation has been
completed, the message
System ID = #####,
Tape ID = #####
appears.
ID collation is complete, but A VCR-related key was Eject the tape from the
Ext Video doesn’t light up. pressed during ID collation. VCR, turn the system power
ÖÖ
Ext Video
ÖÖ
off, and re-start the system.
ÖÖ
Tape cannot be inserted into The VCR already has a Check the VCR for a tape.
the VCR. tape.
Tape cannot be inserted into Condensation has occurred If the VCR indicator AUTO
the VCR. in the VCR. OFF is lit, condensation has
occurred in the VCR. Wait
for the AUTO OFF LED to
go off.
Table 68. Operation Guide/Troubleshooting Problems (cont’d)
If the system has a problem or suffers a failure, contact a

qualified service representative or a sales representative for
assistance.

2177611–100 Rev 0
Helpful hints
Hints The following hints can help when using the VCR:
S S-VHS video tapes must be used to take full advantage

of the S-VHS features.
S Images taped on an S-VHS unit must be played back on
an S-VHS unit.
S VHS recorded images can be played on an S-VHS unit.
S S-VHS recorded tapes will not playback on standard
VHS recorders.
S VHS tapes can be used in an S-VHS unit; however, they
will not work in S-VHS Mode.
S Break out tab to disable Record.
S Tape over hole to record again.
S For keyboard entries like “Ctrl, I” or to answer “y/n”
questions, the Blue Shift key must be off.
S To use the VCR control keys, the Blue Shift key must be
on.
CAUTION The system can keep track of patient and tape information.
The system can search a tape for patient images. However,
the system CANNOT:
S Stop or indicate when it comes to the end of the last

study on the tape.
S Prevent recording over previous studies if record is
pressed while positioned in the middle of a study.
t
2177611–100 Rev 0

2177611–100 Rev 0
Index
Index

546L, Probes 32
Safety, Safety 19

t
Index 1
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

Auto Sequence
Aux
B510, Probes 43
Bioeffects A–1
Depth, B-Mode 10
Index 2 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
OB, OB/GYN 1
t
Index 3
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

B–Mode, B-Mode 30
Doppler, Doppler 45
Index 4 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

Control Panel
Date, Basic Scan 15
DF, Basic Scan 23
GA, Basic Scan 15
PRF, Basic Scan 23
Name, Basic Scan 15
t
Index 5
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

Doppler 23
Typical Exam
CWD, Doppler 10
PWD, Doppler 6
B Pause, Doppler 30
Dual, Cardiology 61
Continuous Wave
E
E721, Probes 29
High PRF, Doppler 8
Edge Enhance
HPRF, Doppler 48
B–Mode, B-Mode 39
M–Mode, M-Mode 17
Pulsed Wave
Index 6 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

Parts 30

M–Mode, M-Mode 21
Focus
RI, OB/GYN 95
Gain
t
Index 7
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

Started 43
I739, Probes 31
L764, Probes 34
LA39, Probes 36
K
Index 8 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

M–Mode Analysis
M–Mode, M-Mode 8
LT ECA, Vascular 8
Cardiology 53
t
Index 9
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

PHT, Cardiology 48
Memory
Cine, Basic Scan 72
Color Flow
Cardiology 105
M–Mode
OB, OB/GYN 1
Multigestation
GS, OB/GYN 28
Hints, OB/GYN 35
HR, OB/GYN 33
Locatn, OB/GYN 29
OB Graph, OB/GYN 79
Index 10 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

N
Basic Scan 4

Height, OB/GYN 91
Width, OB/GYN 91
O
P
OB, OB/GYN 37
Editing, OB/GYN 48
Locatn, OB/GYN 29
t
Index 11
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

M–Mode
Peripherals C–6
Index 12 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index
Linear
S316, Probes 40
Applying, Probes 22

B–Mode, B-Mode 37
B–Mode, B-Mode 16
Q RI, OB/GYN 95
RT CCA, Vascular 8
Maintenance 38 S
t
Index 13
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

EMC, Safety 14
Doppler
Set–Up
Cardiology 107
HPRF, Doppler 48
Slant Scan
Doppler, Doppler 33
Index 14 t
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

Sweep Speed
Doppler, Doppler 39
M–Mode, M-Mode 19
System
OB, OB/GYN 1
Customize 79
Color 34
M–Mode, M-Mode 23
TAMAX, Vascular 21

Basic Scan 47
t
Index 15
2156394-100 Rev 0
Index

Operation H–21
User
Tables, OB/GYN 28
VTR. See VCR
Ut–H, OB/GYN 92
Ut–L, OB/GYN 92 W
Height, OB/GYN 92
Warranties
Z
Index 16 t
2156394-100 Rev 0

User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Medical Systems

This product complies with regulatory requirements of the following European

GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

VOLUME 1: Vascular 1 thru 38 0

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

Connecting and Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 10

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

Patient Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety 7

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

Soft Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 33

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

Freezing an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Scan 69

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

Doppler Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler 15

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize 79

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

General Measurements and Calculations

Abdomen and Small Parts

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

Measuring the Max PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 19

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

OB Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 37

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

Data Management Center (DMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB/GYN 83

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

Advanced Vascular (software option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular 27

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

ECG Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 57

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

B-Mode Analysis – Parasternal Long Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 113

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

Probe Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 13

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

System Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 53

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

Summary of system control settings that

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

Setting Up the VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–7

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H–47

LOGIQ  500 Users Manual

This page left blank intentionally.

Keep this User’s Manual with the equipment at all times.

DEVICES NOT TO BE USED NEAR THIS EQUIPMENT

Devices which intrinsically transmit radio waves such as:

Keep power to these devices turned off when near this

Medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct

The system provides image generation in B-Mode, M-Mode,

All transducers are precise solid state array devices, allowing

The system display processor is highly versatile to produce

General Indications for Use

Indications for Fetal Doppler use

S Structural fetal cardiac anomalies for high-risk patients.

Pulsed Wave Doppler, Continuous Wave Doppler, Color Flow

LOGIQ t 500’s Features